ENGINE
SECTION
ACC
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
A
ACC
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 3
F
Removal and Installation .......................................... 3
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .................................................................. 6
G
Accelerator Control ................................................... 6
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ACC-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001717834
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
ACC-2
2008 Quest
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717835
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
ACC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
LBIA0372E
1.
Adjustable pedal electric motor
2.
4.
Accelerator position sensor (non-ad- 5.
justable pedal)
Adjustable accelerator pedal
3.
Accelerator position sensor (adjustable pedal)
J
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal
K
CAUTION:
• Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
• Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
• Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
• Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
• Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
• Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
L
M
N
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ACC-3
2008 Quest
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable
pedal electric motor.
• Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end
to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as
shown.
• When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock
tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.
LBIA0374E
7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts.
8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor
from the pedal bracket.
• Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
• Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the
adjustable accelerator pedal.
• Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable
end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as
shown.
• When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock
tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end.
NOTE:
The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for
clarity.
LBIA0373E
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or
releasing the accelerator pedal.
• Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking
when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
• Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION:
Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected,
perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning".
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.
Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts.
Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor
from the pedal bracket.
• Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
• Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or
releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
ACC-4
2008 Quest
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected,
perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning".
A
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
ACC
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable
pedal electric motor.
• Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end
to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as
shown.
• When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock
tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end.
Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
C
D
E
F
LBIA0374E
5.
Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the
adjustable accelerator pedal.
• Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable
end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as
shown.
• When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock
tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end.
NOTE:
The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for
clarity.
G
H
I
LBIA0373E
6.
Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
• Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
• Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
J
K
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking
when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
• Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION:
Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected,
perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ACC-5
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accelerator Control
INFOID:0000000001717836
PEDAL TRAVEL
Accelerator control pedal - total travel
Revision: August 2007
73.2 mm (2.88 in)
ACC-6
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
ACS
AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) ............................................................... 2
F
Description ................................................................ 2
G
H
I
J
ACS
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ACS-1
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Description
INFOID:0000000001719533
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-25.
Revision: August 2007
ACS-2
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
AP
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM ........................ 3
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)..... 3
Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Harness Connector
Terminal Layout ........................................................ 7
Terminal and Reference Value for Pedal Adjusting
Control Unit ............................................................... 7
Trouble Diagnosis ..................................................... 7
Removal and Installation .........................................12
F
G
H
Automatic Drive Positioner Adjustable Pedal ............ 3
AP
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AP-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718824
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
AP-2
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
A
Automatic Drive Positioner Adjustable Pedal
INFOID:0000000001718825
Automatic drive positioner adjustable pedal. Refer to SE-11.
B
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
INFOID:0000000001718826
C
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
D
E
F
G
H
AP
J
LIIA2451E
1.
Pedal adjusting control unit M14
(view with instrument panel removed)
4.
A. A/T device M34
B. A/T selector lever (view with center console removed)
2.
Pedal adjusting switch B22
3.
Pedal adjusting motor E109 (view
with instrument lower panel LH removed)
K
L
M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The adjustable pedal system power supply is controlled by the pedal adjusting control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 40A fusible link (letter m, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to circuit breaker-2 terminal 1
• through circuit breaker-2 terminal 2
• to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 5.
With the ignition switch in ON or START, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 4.
Ground is supplied
• to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 1
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79
• to pedal adjusting switch terminal 4
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
When the A/T selector lever is shifted to P position, ground is supplied
• to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 3
Revision: August 2007
AP-3
N
O
P
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through A/T device (park position switch) terminal 7
• through A/T device (park position switch) terminal 6
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then pedal adjusting control unit recognizes that A/T selector lever is in P position.
With power supplied, pedal adjusting switch is energized
• through pedal adjusting control unit terminal 7
• to pedal adjusting switch terminal 1.
With power supplied, pedal adjusting switch is energized.
When pedal is adjusted forward, power is supplied
• through pedal adjusting switch terminal 3
• to pedal adjusting motor terminal 1.
Then ground is supplied
• to pedal adjusting motor terminal 2
• through pedal adjusting switch terminal 2
• through pedal adjusting switch terminal 4
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
With power and ground supplied, accelerator and brake pedals move forward.
When pedal is adjusted backward, power is supplied
• through pedal adjusting switch terminal 2
• to pedal adjusting motor terminal 2.
Then ground is supplied
• to pedal adjusting motor terminal 1
• through pedal adjusting switch terminal 3
• through pedal adjusting switch terminal 4
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
With power and ground supplied, accelerator and brake pedals move backward.
Revision: August 2007
AP-4
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIRING DIAGRAM — PEDAL —
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
AP
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1772E
P
Revision: August 2007
AP-5
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1773E
Revision: August 2007
AP-6
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718827
A
B
C
LIIA2452E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Pedal Adjusting Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001718828
E
Terminal
Wire
Color
1
B/W
Ground
3
G/Y
A/T device (park position switch) signal
4
R/W
Ignition switch (ON or START)
5
W
7
G/W
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
—
0
A/T selector lever in other than P position
Battery voltage
Item
A/T selector lever in P position
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
Battery power supply
Pedal adjusting switch power supply output
0
Battery voltage
—
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
A/T selector lever in other than P position
0
Ignition switch ON
A/T selector lever in P position
F
G
H
Battery voltage
Trouble Diagnosis
AP
INFOID:0000000001718829
WORK FLOW
J
1.
2.
3.
K
4.
5.
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to "PRELIMINARY CHECK".
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM".
Does adjustable pedal system operate normally?
YES: GO TO 5.
NO: GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
L
M
PRELIMINARY CHECK
1.CHECK ADJUSTABLE PEDAL MECHANISM
N
Check the following.
• Movable part of accelerator pedal or brake pedal is deformed or there is foreign material in it.
• Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is deformed or broken.
OK or NG
OK
>> Preliminary check is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part and check again.
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM
NOTE:
Always check the WORK FLOW before troubleshooting. Refer to "WORK FLOW".
Revision: August 2007
AP-7
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Adjustable pedal system does not operate.
Diagnosis/service procedure
Reference page
1. Pedal adjusting control unit power supply and ground circuit inspection.
"PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT
POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND INSPECTION"
2. Pedal adjusting switch power supply and ground circuit inspection.
"PEDAL ADJUSTING
SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
INSPECTION"
3. Pedal adjusting motor circuit inspection.
"PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR CIRCUIT
INSPECTION"
4. Replace pedal adjusting motor.
1. A/T device (park position switch) circuit inspection.
Adjustable pedal system does operate when ignition switch is turned ON and A/T selector lever
is in other than P position.
2. Pedal adjusting control unit signal inspection.
3. Replace pedal adjusting control unit.
Adjustable pedal system does not operate when
ignition switch is turned ON and A/T selector lever is in P position.
1. A/T device (park position switch) circuit inspection.
AP-12
"A/T Device
(Park Position
Switch) Circuit
Inspection"
"PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT
IGNITION SIGNAL INSPECTION"
AP-12
"A/T Device
(Park Position
Switch) Circuit
Inspection"
Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Ignition Signal Inspection
1.CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 4 and ground.
Connector
M14
Terminal
(+)
(-)
4
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting control unit ignition signal is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: August 2007
AP-8
LIIA0885E
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Power Supply And Ground Inspection
A
1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 7 and ground.
Terminal
Connector
(+)
M14
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
C
Ignition switch ON
A/T selector lever in P position
Battery voltage
D
Ignition switch OFF
A/T selector lever in other
than P position
0
(-)
7
Ground
B
LIIA2041E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting control unit power supply and ground is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit.
Check voltage between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
H
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
AP
J
LIIA0887E
3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
K
Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting control unit.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
N
LIIA0888E
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
O
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF.
Monitor item
[OPERATION or UNIT]
DETENT SW
“ON/
OFF”
Contents
The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other
than P position (ON)” judged from the A/T device (park position switch) signal is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
AP-9
2008 Quest
P
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device (park position switch) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH) HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 3 and A/T device connector M34 terminal 7.
3-7
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0891E
3.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH)
Check continuity between A/T device terminals 6 and 7.
Terminals
6
7
Condition
Continuity
P position
Yes
Other than
P position
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace A/T device. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and
Installation".
LIIA2203E
4.CHECK A/T DEVICE GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T device connector M34 terminal 6 and
ground.
6 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting control unit.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0893E
Pedal Adjusting Switch Power Supply And Ground Inspection
1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
Revision: August 2007
AP-10
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect pedal adjusting switch connector.
3. Check voltage between pedal adjusting switch connector B22
terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
A
B
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
LIIA0894E
2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH HARNESS
1.
2.
D
Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 7 and pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 1.
7-1
3.
E
F
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector
M14 terminal 7 and ground.
7 - Ground
G
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0895E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting control unit.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
AP
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 4 and ground.
J
4 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
K
L
LIIA0896E
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection
M
1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect pedal adjusting switch.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch terminals as
follows.
N
O
Terminals
1
3
4
Condition
Continuity
Pedal adjusting switch forward.
Yes
Pedal adjusting switch neutral.
No
Pedal adjusting switch backward.
Yes
Pedal adjusting switch neutral.
No
Revision: August 2007
AP-11
P
LIIA0897E
2008 Quest
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
1
2
4
Condition
Continuity
Pedal adjusting switch backward.
Yes
Pedal adjusting switch neutral.
No
Pedal adjusting switch forward.
Yes
Pedal adjusting switch neutral.
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace pedal adjusting switch.
2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect pedal adjusting motor.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22
terminals 2, 3 and pedal adjusting motor connector E109 terminals 1, 2.
2-2
3-1
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22
terminals 2, 3 and ground.
2 - Ground
3 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0898E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting motor. Refer to ACC-3, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718830
Refer to ACC-3 and BR-5.
Revision: August 2007
AP-12
2008 Quest
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
SECTION
AT
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
A
B
AT
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 39
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................39
Fail-Safe ..................................................................39
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair .......................................................41
A/T Electrical Parts Location ...................................47
Circuit Diagram ........................................................49
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .....................49
Check Before Engine Is Started ..............................54
Check at Idle ............................................................54
Cruise Test - Part 1 .................................................55
Cruise Test - Part 2 .................................................57
Cruise Test - Part 3 .................................................57
Shift Schedule .........................................................58
Symptom Chart ........................................................59
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value .............66
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ..............69
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................74
INDEX FOR DTC ................................................. 5
Alphabetical Index ..................................................... 5
DTC No. Index .......................................................... 5
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 7
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 7
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System
of A/T and Engine ..................................................... 7
Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement .......................................................................... 7
Precaution ................................................................. 8
Service Notice or Precaution ..................................... 9
PREPARATION ..................................................10
Special Service Tool ............................................... 10
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 12
Description ...............................................................77
On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................77
Possible Cause ........................................................77
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................77
Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN .....................................78
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................79
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 13
Checking A/T Fluid .................................................. 13
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ....................................... 14
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................18
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR... 80
N
Description ...............................................................80
On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................80
Possible Cause ........................................................80
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................80
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................80
O
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR ....................... 82
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ......36
Introduction ............................................................. 36
OBD-II Function for A/T System .............................. 36
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 36
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .................. 36
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................ 38
Revision: August 2007
G
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ..... 77
A/T FLUID ...........................................................13
Cross-Sectional View .............................................. 18
Shift Mechanism ...................................................... 18
TCM Function .......................................................... 30
Input/Output Signal of TCM ..................................... 32
CAN Communication ............................................... 32
Line Pressure Control ............................................. 32
Shift Control ............................................................ 33
Lock-Up Control ...................................................... 34
F
AT-1
Description ...............................................................82
On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................82
Possible Cause ........................................................82
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................82
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................82
2008 Quest
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH ............................................................. 83
Description .............................................................. 83
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 83
Possible Cause ....................................................... 83
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 83
Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW .............................. 84
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 85
Component Inspection ............................................ 87
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 108
Possible Cause ..................................................... 108
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 108
Wiring Diagram - AT - 1STSIG ............................. 109
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ......... 111
Description ............................................................ 111
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 111
Possible Cause ..................................................... 111
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 111
Wiring Diagram - AT - 2NDSIG ............................. 113
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................... 88
Description .............................................................. 88
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 88
Possible Cause ....................................................... 88
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 88
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS ..................................... 89
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 90
Component Inspection ............................................ 91
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PERFORMANCE ............................................... 93
Description .............................................................. 93
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 93
Possible Cause ....................................................... 93
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 93
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTSP ................................... 94
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 95
Component Inspection ............................................ 96
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................... 98
Description .............................................................. 98
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98
Possible Cause ....................................................... 98
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98
Wiring Diagram - AT - TRSC .................................. 99
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................100
Component Inspection ...........................................100
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ......... 116
Description ............................................................ 116
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116
Possible Cause ..................................................... 116
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 116
Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RDSIG ............................. 117
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION .......... 120
Description ............................................................ 120
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 120
Possible Cause ..................................................... 120
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 120
Wiring Diagram - AT - 4THSIG ............................. 121
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION .......... 123
Description ............................................................ 123
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123
Possible Cause ..................................................... 123
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 123
Wiring Diagram - AT - 5THSIG ............................. 124
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCKUP) .................................................................... 127
Description ............................................................ 127
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127
Possible Cause ..................................................... 127
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 127
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG ............................. 128
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT ................ 102
Description .............................................................102
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................102
Possible Cause ......................................................102
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................102
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSATC .............................103
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................104
Component Inspection ...........................................104
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) ................ 130
Description ............................................................ 130
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 130
Possible Cause ..................................................... 130
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 130
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/A .................................. 131
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132
Component Inspection .......................................... 134
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT
PERFORMANCE ............................................. 106
Description .............................................................106
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................106
Possible Cause ......................................................106
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................106
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................106
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ........ 135
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ......... 108
Description ............................................................ 135
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 135
Description .............................................................108
Revision: August 2007
AT-2
2008 Quest
Possible Cause ..................................................... 135
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 135
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ................................ 136
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
Component Inspection .......................................... 138
Component Inspection ........................................... 168
DTC P0780 SHIFT ........................................... 170
Description ............................................................. 170
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 170
Possible Cause ...................................................... 170
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 170
Wiring Diagram - AT - SFTFNC ............................. 171
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ....... 140
Description ............................................................ 140
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140
Possible Cause ..................................................... 140
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 140
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ................................ 141
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142
Component Inspection .......................................... 143
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) .............................................................. 174
Description ............................................................. 174
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 174
Possible Cause ...................................................... 174
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 174
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/C .................................. 175
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176
Component Inspection ........................................... 177
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C ....... 145
Description ............................................................ 145
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 145
Possible Cause ..................................................... 145
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 145
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/C ................................ 146
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 147
Component Inspection .......................................... 148
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON ........................... 179
Description ............................................................. 179
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 179
Possible Cause ...................................................... 179
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 179
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/CS ................................ 180
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 181
Component Inspection ........................................... 182
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
STUCK ON ....................................................... 150
Description ............................................................ 150
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 150
Possible Cause ..................................................... 150
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 150
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/CS ............................. 151
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 152
Component Inspection .......................................... 153
DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT .......... 184
Description ............................................................. 184
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 184
Possible Cause ...................................................... 184
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 184
Wiring Diagram - AT - LVRSW .............................. 185
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186
Component Inspection ........................................... 187
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D ....... 155
Description ............................................................ 155
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 155
Possible Cause ..................................................... 155
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 155
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/D ................................ 156
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157
Component Inspection .......................................... 158
Description ............................................................. 188
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 188
Possible Cause ...................................................... 188
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 188
Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN .............................. 189
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190
Component Inspection ........................................... 191
DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................... 192
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Description ............................................................. 192
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) .............. 165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .... 193
Description ............................................................ 165
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 165
Possible Cause ..................................................... 165
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 165
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/B .................................. 166
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ....... 193
Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position .. 194
In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ....... 195
In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 195
Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position) .......................... 196
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position.. 196
Revision: August 2007
B
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL .... 188
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E ........ 160
Description ............................................................ 160
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 160
Possible Cause ..................................................... 160
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 160
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/E ................................ 161
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162
Component Inspection .......................................... 163
A
AT-3
2008 Quest
P
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position ......................................................................197
Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1 .......................198
A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2 ..................................199
A/T Does Not Shift: D2→ D3 ..................................200
A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4 ..................................201
A/T Does Not Shift: D4→ D5 ..................................202
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up .............................203
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ...................203
Lock-up Is Not Released .......................................204
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, When
Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON" ..................................205
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, When
Selector Lever "D" → "L" Position .........................206
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, When
Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON" ..................................207
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, When
Release Accelerator Pedal ....................................207
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .....208
TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate .................209
Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 222
Transmission wire ................................................. 222
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................... 224
Removal ................................................................ 224
Inspection After Removal ...................................... 224
Installation ............................................................. 224
OVERHAUL ...................................................... 225
Component ........................................................... 225
Location of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and
Thrust Washers ..................................................... 231
DISASSEMBLY ................................................ 232
Disassembly .......................................................... 232
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .............. 251
Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake .............. 251
One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd
Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 ........... 257
Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ....................... 259
Differential Gear Assembly ................................... 265
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................. 211
Description .............................................................211
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ..........211
Wiring Diagram - AT - SHIFT .................................212
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................212
ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 268
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................ 215
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 292
Removal and Installation .......................................215
Assembly (1) ......................................................... 268
Adjustment ............................................................ 275
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 276
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ............................... 217
Component ............................................................217
Removal ................................................................217
Installation .............................................................218
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .................................. 219
Revolution Sensor Replacement ...........................219
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ..............219
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ....219
ATF Cooler ............................................................220
ATF Cooler Valve ..................................................220
Control Cable Adjustment ......................................221
Side cover ..............................................................222
Revision: August 2007
AT-4
General Specification ............................................ 292
Shift Schedule ....................................................... 292
Stall Speed ............................................................ 293
Line Pressure ........................................................ 293
Time Lag ............................................................... 293
Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 293
Solenoid Valves .................................................... 294
Clutch, Gear and Brakes ....................................... 294
Final Drive ............................................................. 296
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 297
Turbine Revolution Sensor ................................... 297
Revolution Sensor ................................................. 297
2008 Quest
INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index
INFOID:0000000001717837
B
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT
AT-77.
DTC
D
OBD-II
Except OBD-II
CONSULT-III
GST*1
CONSULT-III
only “TRANSMISSION”
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
P0731
AT-108
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
P0732
AT-111
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
P0733
AT-116
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
P0734
AT-120
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
P0735
P0735
AT-123
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
P0744
AT-127
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
P0710
AT-88
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
U1000
AT-77
ELEC TH CONTROL
—
P1726
AT-192
ENG SPD INP PERFOR
—
P0726
AT-106
P0711
P0711
AT-93
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
FLUID TEMP SEN
GEAR LEVER SWITCH
Reference page
E
—
P0825
AT-184
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)
P0745
P0745
AT-130
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
P0775
P0775
AT-165
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
P0795
P0795
AT-174
PC SOL C STC ON
P0797
P0797
AT-179
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
P0705
AT-83
SHIFT
P0780
P0780
AT-170
SHIFT SOL A
P0750
P0750
AT-135
SHIFT SOL B
P0755
P0755
AT-140
SHIFT SOL C
P0760
P0760
AT-145
SHIFT SOL D
P0765
P0765
AT-155
SHIFT SOL E
P0770
P0770
AT-160
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
P0762
P0762
AT-150
TCM POWER INPT SIG
P0882
P0882
AT-188
TCM PROCESSOR
—
P0613
AT-82
TURBINE SENSOR
P0717
P0717
AT-98
VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR
—
P0500
AT-80
VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T
P0722
P0722
AT-102
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
DTC No. Index
INFOID:0000000001717838
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
AT-5
2008 Quest
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-77.
DTC
OBD-II
Except OBD-II
CONSULT-III
GST*1
CONSULT-III
only “TRANSMISSION”
—
P0500
VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR
AT-80
—
P0613
TCM PROCESSOR
AT-82
P0705
P0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-83
P0710
P0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-88
P0711
P0711
FLUID TEMP SEN
AT-93
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
Reference page
P0717
P0717
TURBINE SENSOR
AT-98
P0722
P0722
VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T
AT-102
—
P0726
ENG SPD INP PERFOR
AT-106
P0731
P0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-108
P0732
P0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-111
P0733
P0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-116
P0734
P0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-120
P0735
P0735
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
AT-123
P0744
P0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-127
P0745
P0745
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)
AT-130
P0750
P0750
SHIFT SOL A
AT-135
P0755
P0755
SHIFT SOL B
AT-140
P0760
P0760
SHIFT SOL C
AT-145
P0762
P0762
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
AT-150
P0765
P0765
SHIFT SOL D
AT-155
P0770
P0770
SHIFT SOL E
AT-160
P0775
P0775
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
AT-165
P0780
P0780
SHIFT
AT-170
P0795
P0795
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
AT-174
P0797
P0797
PC SOL C STC ON
AT-179
—
P0825
GEAR LEVER SWITCH
AT-184
P0882
P0882
TCM POWER INPT SIG
AT-188
—
P1726
ELEC TH CONTROL
AT-192
U1000
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
AT-77
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
Revision: August 2007
AT-6
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PRECAUTIONS
A
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001717839
B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS AT
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service ManD
ual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harG
ness connectors.
Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and Engine
INFOID:0000000001717840
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement
H
I
J
K
L
INFOID:0000000001717841
• When replacing A/T assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and initialize TCM if necessary.
M
TCM INITIALIZATION PATTERNS
N
TCM
Replaced with
new one
Not replaced
Replaced with old
one
A/T assembly
Erasing EEPROM in TCM
Remarks
Not required
Not required because the EEPROM in TCM is in the default
state.
Not replaced
Replaced with
new or old one
Replaced with
new or old one
Not replaced
P
Required because data cannot be conformed to previous
data written in the EEPROM in TCM.
Required
Replaced with
new or old one
NOTE:
“Old one” is the TCM or A/T assembly that has been used on other vehicles.
METHOD FOR TCM INITIALIZATION
Revision: August 2007
O
AT-7
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Set the vehicle following the items listed below.
• Ignition switch “ON”.
• Selector lever “P” or “N” position.
• Engine not running.
• Vehicle speed is 0km/h (0 MPH).
• Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
• Malfunction was not detected.
2. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
3. Touch “INITIALIZATION”.
4. Initialize TCM following the direction in display.
Precaution
INFOID:0000000001717842
NOTE:
Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT
section.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if
ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
SEF289H
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
SEF291H
• Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal
inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or
not. AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
MEF040DA
Revision: August 2007
AT-8
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC
(Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
A
B
AT
SEF217U
D
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent
the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transaxle.
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF.
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to
AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid", AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid".
Service Notice or Precaution
INFOID:0000000001717843
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
ATF COOLER SERVICE
If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to AT-14, "A/T
Fluid Cooler Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-16.
M
N
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
• A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on
AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic
result.
• The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.
Always perform the procedure on AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" to complete the
repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
• For details of OBD-II, refer to AT-36.
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71.
Revision: August 2007
AT-9
2008 Quest
O
P
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717844
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1
—
(J-34301-1)
Oil pressure gauge
2
—
(J-34301-2)
Hoses
3
—
(J-34298)
Adapter
4
—
(J-34282-2)
Adapter
5
—
(790-301-1230-A)
60° Adapter
6
—
(J-34301-15)
Square socket
Measuring line pressure
AAT896
Measuring line pressure
KV311J0010
(J-45542)
Adapter
SCIA3019E
Adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch
KV911J0060
(J-45404)
Alignment tool
SCIA3018E
• Removing oil pump assembly
• Removing thrust roller bearing
a: 250 mm(9.84 in)
b: 160 mm(6.30 in)
ST33290001
(J-34286)
Puller
NT414
Installing differential side oil seals
a: 60 mm(2.36 in) dia.
b: 74 mm(1.85 in) dia.
ST33400001
(J-26082)
Drift
NT086
Revision: August 2007
AT-10
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV31102400
(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
Removing and installing return springs
a: 320 mm(12.60 in)
b: 174 mm(6.85 in)
A
B
AT
NT423
D
• Installing oil seal
• Installing thrust roller bearing
a: 77 mm(3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm(2.185 in) dia.
ST30720000
(J-25405)
Drift
E
F
NT115
Removing outer race and adjust shim
a: 62 mm(2.44 in) dia.
b: 40 mm(1.57 in) dia.
ST30612000
(J-25742-2)
Drift
G
H
NT073
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge
1 GG91030000
(J-25765-A)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
Checking differential side bearing preload
I
J
K
NT124
L
a: 60 mm(2.362 in) dia.
b: 45 mm(1.772 in)
KV40102500
(J-28815)
Drift
M
N
SCIA5517E
• Removing tapered roller bearing
• Installing manual valve oil seal
a: 38 mm(1.496 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm(1.122 in) dia.
ST33061000
(J-8107-2)
Drift
O
P
NT073
Revision: August 2007
AT-11
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV38100500
(
—
)
Drift
a:80 mm(3.15 in) dia.
b:60 mm(2.362 in) dia.
Installing tapered roller bearing
NT115
Installing outer race and adjust shim
a: 76 mm(2.992 in) dia.
KV40100621
(J-25273)
Drift
SCIA5518E
ST30022000
(
—
Drift
a: 56 mm(2.205 in) dia.
b: 110 mm(4.331 in) dia.
c: 15 mm(0.591 in)
)
SCIA5519E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717845
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Puller
Removing tapered roller bearing
NT077
Puller
a: 60 mm(2.36 in) dia.
b: 35 mm(1.38 in) dia.
NT411
Revision: August 2007
AT-12
2008 Quest
A/T FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A/T FLUID
A
Changing A/T Fluid
1.
INFOID:0000000001717846
Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature “HOT”.
B
Temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
2.
3.
4.
AT
Stop the engine.
Remove the engine undercover.
Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain
plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer.
Drain plug
D
E
: 39 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)
F
G
LLIA0066E
5.
Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out.
Fluid grade and capacity
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
I
: Refer to MA-11.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill the transaxle.
Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes.
Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-23, "Checking A/T Fluid". If the fluid is still contaminated,
repeat step 2 through 5.
Checking A/T Fluid
J
K
INFOID:0000000001717847
Warm up the engine.
Check for any transaxle fluid leaks.
Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the “COLD” range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
L
M
Temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
a.
b.
H
N
Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake.
Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through
each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the “P” park position.
O
WLIA0014E
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-13
2008 Quest
A/T FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
CAUTION:
Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid
charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide
an accurate reading on the gauge.
d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lintfree paper.
e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far
as it will go.
f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the
LLIA0065E
reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and
then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION:
• Do not overfill the transaxle.
• Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while
driving.
4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds.
5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the “HOT”
range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION:
Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid
charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide
an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge
in position while driving.
Temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
6.
WLIA0014E
Check the fluid for the following conditions:
• If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the AT-13,
"Changing A/T Fluid". Flush the AT fluid cooling system after
repairing the transaxle.
• If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or
bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a
cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs
to the transaxle. Refer to CO-16.
SMA853B
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
INFOID:0000000001717848
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
Revision: August 2007
AT-14
2008 Quest
A/T FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan.
A
B
AT
SCIA2945E
D
5.
6.
7.
8.
Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
E
F
G
SCIA2955E
H
I
J
SCIA2962E
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds
to force out any remaining fluid.
Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle.
Remove the banjo bolts.
Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler
Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE".
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
AT-15
L
M
N
O
P
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
Revision: August 2007
K
2008 Quest
A/T FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
SCIA2955E
SCIA2965E
6.
7.
Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE".
8.
SCIA2966E
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
a.
Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E
Revision: August 2007
AT-16
2008 Quest
A/T FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm
(0.040in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/
fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended.
A
B
AT
SCIA5257E
D
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-17
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View
INFOID:0000000001717849
SCIA2575E
1.
Converter housing
2.
2nd brake
3.
One-way clutch No. 2
4.
Control valve assembly
5.
Side cover
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
Forward clutch
8.
Direct clutch
9.
Transaxle case cover
10. B5 brake
11. Transaxle case
12. U/D clutch
13. U/D brake
14. Final gear
15. Differential case
16. Output shaft
17. Counter driven gear
18. Counter drive gear
19. Input shaft
20. Oil pump
21. One-way clutch No. 1
22. 2nd coast brake
23. Torque converter
24. Main rear planetary gear
25. Main front planetary gear
26. U/D rear planetary gear
27. U/D front planetary gear
Shift Mechanism
INFOID:0000000001717850
CONSTRUCTION
Revision: August 2007
AT-18
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
SCIA2576E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
J
K
L
25. Parking pawl
M
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components
Abbr.
Function
N
Forward clutch 1
F/C
Connect input shaft 20 to main rear internal gear 10.
Direct clutch 2
D/C
Connect input shaft 20 to main sun gear 11.
U/D clutch 3
U/D.C
Connect U/D sun gear 15 to U/D front planetary carrier 16.
2nd coast brake 4
2nd C/B
Lock main sun gear 11.
2nd brake 5
2nd/B
Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11.
1st and reverse brake 6
1st & R/B
Lock main front internal gear 13.
U/D brake 7
U/D.B
Lock U/D sun gear 15.
B5 brake 8
B5/B
Lock U/D rear planetary carrier 18.
One-way clutch No. 1 9
O.C1
Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11, when 2nd brake 5 operations.
One-way clutch No. 2 10
O.C2
Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear 13.
Revision: August 2007
AT-19
O
P
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
Clutch
Shift position
F/C
1
D/C
2
Brake
U/D.C
3
2nd C/
B
4
2nd/B
5
1st & R/
B
6
One-way clutch
U/D.B
7
B5/B
8
O.C1
9
O.C2
10
Remarks
P
PARK
POSITION
R
REVERSE
POSITION
N
NEUTRAL
POSITION
1st
1⇔2
2nd
2⇔3
D*1
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔
4⇔5
3rd
3⇔4
4th
4⇔5
5th
1st
1⇔2
L*2
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3
2nd
2⇔3
3rd
: Operates
: In transition between applied and released.
*1: A/T will not shift to 5th when lever switch is pushed (indicated A/T indicator “4”).
*2: A/T will not shift to 3th when lever switch is pushed (indicated A/T indicator “2”).
NOTE:
When shifting D to L position or lever switch pushes (indicated A/T indicator “4” at D position or “2” at L position), down shift permission
control is activated. Refer to AT-33, "Shift Control".
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” position
Since both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
“P” position
• The same as for the “N” position, both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, so torque from
the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pole linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
Revision: August 2007
AT-20
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
SCIA2577E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
J
K
L
25. Parking pawl
M
“D”, “L” positions 1st gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise.
One-way clutch No. 2 operates. (Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
Revision: August 2007
AT-21
2008 Quest
N
O
P
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
15. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
16. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
17. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
18. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
19. Final gear clockwise.
• During deceleration, main front internal gear clockwise due to rotation itself clockwise of main front small
planetary pinion gear, but driving force loses due to free of one-way clutch No. 2. Therefore, engine brake
does not operate.
SCIA2585E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
Revision: August 2007
AT-22
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
A
25. Parking pawl
“D”, “L” positions 2nd gear
1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
B
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
AT
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
D
7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
E
10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
F
13. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
14. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
G
15. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
16. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
17. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
H
18. Final gear clockwise.
• During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-23
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SCIA2587E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
“D”, “L” positions 3rd gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
Revision: August 2007
AT-24
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
A
7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
B
10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
AT
13. U/D brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D sun gear.)
14. U/D front planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of U/D front planetary pinion
gear.
D
15. U/D rear internal gear and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D front planetary carrier and one.
16. Final gear clockwise.
• During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, E
engine brake operates.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
SCIA2588E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
Revision: August 2007
AT-25
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
“D” positions 4th gear
1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.)
13. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one.
14. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one.
15. Final gear clockwise.
• During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
Revision: August 2007
AT-26
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
SCIA2592E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
M
N
O
25. Parking pawl
P
“D” positions 5th gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.)
Main rear planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and main rear planetary unit rotates clockwise as one.
Revision: August 2007
AT-27
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself for main rear planetary pinion gear and one, and
main front planetary unit rotates clockwise as one.
6. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main front planetary unit and one.
7. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
8. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
9. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.)
10. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one.
11. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one.
12. Final gear clockwise.
• During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
SCIA2593E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
Revision: August 2007
AT-28
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
A
25. Parking pawl
B
“R” position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.)
AT
Main sun gear rotates clockwise.
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and D
one.
6. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
E
7. 1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates counterclockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
F
10. Counter driven gear rotates clockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates clockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
G
13. U/D sun gear rotates counterclockwise.
14. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
H
15. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
16. U/D rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
17. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates clockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
I
18. Final gear counterclockwise.
• During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-29
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SCIA2594E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
TCM Function
INFOID:0000000001717851
The function of the TCM is to:
• Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
• Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
Revision: August 2007
AT-30
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNAL)
PNP switch
Throttle angle signal
Throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
Engine torque signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Turbine revolution sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Lever switch signal
Stop lamp switch signal
⇒
TCM
ACTUATORS
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Engine brake control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT-III communication line
CAN communication line
On board diagnosis
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Shift solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid valve D
Shift solenoid valve E
Pressure control solenoid valve A
Pressure control solenoid valve B
Pressure control solenoid valve C
O/D OFF indicator lamp
A
B
⇒
AT
D
E
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0645E
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-31
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Input/Output Signal of TCM
Control item
Throttle angle signal(*5)
Throttle position signal(*5)
Revolution sensor
Turbine revolution sensor
Vehicle speed signal MTR
(*1) (*5)
INFOID:0000000001717852
Line
pressure
control
Vehicle
speed
control
Shift
control
Lock-up
control
Engine
brake
control
Fail-safe
function
(*3)
Self-diagnostics
function
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(*2)
X(*2)
X
X(*2)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Engine speed signals(*5)
Input
Engine torque signals(*5)
X
X
X
X
X
PNP switch
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(*4)
Lever switch
X
X
X
X
X
Stop lamp switch signal(*5)
X
A/T fluid temperature sensor
X
ASCD
Operation signal(*5)
(*5)
Overdrive cancel signal
TCM power supply voltage signal
X
Shift solenoid valve A/B/C/D/E
Pressure control solenoid valve A
Output
X(*4)
Pressure control solenoid valve B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Pressure control solenoid valve C
Self-diagnostics
X
X
X
X
X
X(*4)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
table(*5)
X
*1: Spare for revolution sensor
*2: Spare for throttle angle signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: CAN communications.
CAN Communication
INFOID:0000000001717853
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
For details, refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Line Pressure Control
INFOID:0000000001717854
• The pressure control solenoid A controls linear line pressure by control signal from TCM and line pressure
for clutches and brakes to reduce shift shock.
• This pressure control solenoid A controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the
pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state.
Revision: August 2007
AT-32
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
SCIA2605E
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN
F
In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the pressure control solenoid A current valve and thus controls the line pressure.
G
Shift Control
INFOID:0000000001717855
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained.
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA3569E
Basically TCM programmed for economy mode, but TCM changes to several shift schedule automatically
according to specified condition.
N
SPECIAL SHIFT MODE
Upslope Mode
When TCM detects upslope from load of engine torque and decrease of acceleration, this mode changes shift
points in high-speed side according to the upslope degree and avoids busy shift of A/T.
Downslope Mode
When TCM detects downslope from increase of acceleration with accelerator full close, this mode operates
moderate engine brake by changing shift points in high-speed side.
Hot Mode Control
This control lowers ATF temperature by changing shift points when the temperature is extremely high.
Down Shift Permission Control
In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, down shift is done only at under a constant vehicle speed.
Revision: August 2007
AT-33
2008 Quest
O
P
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
UP/DOWN SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the pressure to each clutch or brake in order to reduce shifting shock at each shifting (Up,
Down, Coast down).
N-D SHIFT CONTROL
This control improves the N-D shift quality due to controlling line pressure solenoid valve according to forward
clutch piston stroke learned in N-D shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to forward clutch
at N-D shift (include L).
N-D SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the forward clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a forward clutch engaging time and
a rotation change rate.
N-R SHIFT CONTROL
This control improves the N-R shift quality due to controlling shift pressure solenoid valve according to direct
clutch piston stroke learned in N-R shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to direct clutch
at N-R shift.
N-R SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the direct clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a direct clutch engaging time and a
rotation change rate.
TORQUE REDUCTION CONTROL
This control improves the shift quality due to sending torque reduction request signal from TCM to ECM and
cutting engine torque increase of shift at N-D shift, N-R shift and 1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5.
If accelerator pedal is depressed rapidly, this control establishes the upper limit value of engine torque and
avoids engine flare at 2 ⇔ 3, 3 ⇔ 4 and 4 ⇒ 2 of clutch to clutch shift.
Lock-Up Control
INFOID:0000000001717856
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the pressure control solenoid valve C,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
Selector lever
D position
Lever switch
(A/T indicator)
OFF
(D)
L position
ON
(4)
OFF
(3)
ON
(2)
3
2
Gear position
5
4
4
Lock-up
×
–
×
×
–
Slip lock-up
×
×
×
–
–
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-up Control System Diagram
SCIA2612E
Revision: August 2007
AT-34
2008 Quest
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Lock-up Released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
pressure control solenoid valve C and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
A
B
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the pressure control solenoid valve C and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
AT
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the pressure
control solenoid valve C is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the pressure control solenoid valve C is varied to steadily increase the
pressure control solenoid valve C pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
• In the slip region, the pressure control solenoid valve C current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-35
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
INFOID:0000000001717857
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OBD-II Function for A/T System
INFOID:0000000001717858
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
INFOID:0000000001717859
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
INFOID:0000000001717860
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-III or
GST) CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or
occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-III can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-III (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-III display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of
a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III. Time
data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being
detected currently, the time data will be “0”. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
Revision: August 2007
AT-36
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
B
Items
Freeze frame data
2
3
A
AT
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
D
1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
E
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-III, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
• If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
• When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-III or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
• Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
How to erase DTC (with CONSULT-III)
• If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-III “ON” and touch “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
How to erase DTC (with GST)
1.
2.
3.
If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". (The engine warm-up step can be skipped
when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-117, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function".
How to erase DTC (no tools)
The O/D OFF indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". (The engine warm-up step can be skipped
when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Erase DTC with ECM. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
Revision: August 2007
AT-37
2008 Quest
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
INFOID:0000000001717861
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
• If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-23, or see EC-616.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
Revision: August 2007
AT-38
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000001717862
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority B
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT
AT-77.
Priority
Detected items (DTC)
1
U1000 CAN communication line
2
Except above
D
Fail-Safe
INFOID:0000000001717863
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunction in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode, a driving condition is selected according to the malfunctioning location, and line pressure is
set at the maximum. For this reason, the customer will be subjected to uncomfortable “slipping” or “poor acceleration” of the vehicle.
In that case, handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-41).
E
F
G
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible.
NOTE:
Line pressure is set at the maximum in fail-safe mode. Although gear position differs depending on
the type of fail-safe modes, CONSULT-III indicates “5th”.
H
I
DTC
Malfunction items
Fail-safe*
P0500
Vehicle speed signal
No learning control.
P0613
TCM processor
Fail-safe mode 4
P0705
PNP switch
Fail-safe mode 4
P0710
ATF temperature sensor circuit
Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits
lock-up control.
P0711
ATF temperature sensor function
Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits
lock-up control.
P0717
Turbine revolution sensor
Fail-safe mode 1
P0722
Revolution sensor
Uses vehicle speed signal from combination meter as a substitute. Inhibits learning control.
P0726
Engine speed signal input circuit performance
Fail-safe mode 1
P0731
1st gear function
No 1st gear, no control for N-D shift.
P0732
2nd gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0733
3rd gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0734
4th gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0735
5th gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0744
Lock-up function
Fail-safe mode 1
P0745
Pressure control solenoid valve A
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping.
Revision: August 2007
AT-39
J
K
L
M
N
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC
Malfunction items
Fail-safe*
P0750
Shift solenoid valve A
Any one of fail-safe modes
• Fail-safe mode 1
• Fail-safe mode 7. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0755
Shift solenoid valve B
Any one of fail-safe modes
• Fail-safe mode 1
• Fail-safe mode 8
P0760
Shift solenoid valve C
Any one of fail-safe modes
• Fail-safe mode 2
• Fail-safe mode 5
• Fail-safe mode 9
P0762
Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON
Fail-safe mode 2. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping.
Shift solenoid valve D
Any one of fail-safe modes
• Fail-safe mode 1
• Fail-safe mode 10. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
P0770
Shift solenoid valve E
Any one of fail-safe modes
• Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
• Fail-safe mode 6. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
P0775
Pressure control solenoid valve B
Fail-safe mode 3
P0780
Shift function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0795
Pressure control solenoid valve C
Fail-safe mode 1
P0797
Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON
Fail-safe mode 1
P0825
Lever switch
No lever switch control.
P0882
TCM power input signal
Fail-safe mode 1
P1726
Electric throttle control
• The accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a predetermined accelerator angle to make driving possible.
• No lock-up, no learning control.
CAN communication circuit
Any one of fail-safe modes
• Fail-safe mode 1
• Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
• No learning control.
• No lock-up, no learning control, no special shift mode control.
P0765
U1000
*: For fail-safe modes 1 to 10, refer to "Fail-safe mode list".
Fail-safe mode list
Fail-safe mode
Fail-safe mode 1
Fail-safe mode 2
(CONSULT-III displays “8”)
Fail-safe mode 3
Selector lever
Pressure control solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve
Gear
position*1
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
3rd
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Revision: August 2007
AT-40
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Fail-safe mode
Fail-safe mode 4
Fail-safe mode 5
Fail-safe mode 6
Fail-safe mode 7
Fail-safe mode 8
(CONSULT-III displays “1”)
Fail-safe mode 9
(CONSULT-III displays “8”)
Fail-safe mode 10
(CONSULT-III displays “6”)
Selector lever
Pressure control solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve
Gear
position*1
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
4th
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
2nd
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse*2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
5th
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
(2nd)*3
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
L position
3rd
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
R position
Reverse*2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
*1: CONSULT-III indicates “5th”.
*2: Reverse gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 3.342)
*3: 3rd gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 2.301)
K
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
INFOID:0000000001717864
INTRODUCTION
L
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed signal, ECM (throttle opening) or PNP switch and provides
shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc.
SAT631IB
Revision: August 2007
AT-41
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the "WORK FLOW".
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart") should be
used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
SEF234G
WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to "Information From Customer") and “Diagnostic Worksheet” (Refer to "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart"), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart
Revision: August 2007
AT-42
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
SCIA8466E
*1.
"Information From Customer"
*2.
"Diagnostic Worksheet Chart"
*3.
AT-39
*4.
AT-49
*5.
AT-49, AT-49
*6.
AT-49
*7.
AT-69
*8.
AT-36
*9.
AT-38
*10. AT-77
*11. AT-192
*12. AT-193
*13. AT-59
*14. AT-36
*15. AT-77
*16. AT-192
*17. EC-43
M
N
O
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer
P
KEY POINTS
•
•
•
•
WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Revision: August 2007
AT-43
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Customer name
MR/MS
Model & Year
VIN
Trans. Model
Engine
Mileage
Incident Date
Manuf. Date
In Service Date
Frequency
❏ Continuous
Symptoms
❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position
❏ Particular position)
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd
❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ Intermittent (
❏ No down-shift
times a day)
❏ 2nd → 3rd
(❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd
❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip
(❏ N → D
❏ Lock-up
❏ Any drive position)
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select
❏ Others
(
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
)
❏ Continuously lit
❏ Not lit
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart
1
❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint.
AT-39
❏ A/T fluid inspection
2
❏ Leak (Repair leak location.)
❏ State
❏ Amount
AT-49
❏ Stall test, time lag test and line pressure test
❏ Stall test
❏ Engine
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch
❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Forward clutch
❏ Direct clutch
❏ 1st and reverse brake
3
❏ B5 brake
❏ One-way clutch No. 2
❏ Oil pump
❏ Oil strainer
❏ Oil leak for each range circuit
AT-49, AT49
❏ Time lag test
❏ Oil pump
❏ Oil strainer
❏ Oil leak for “D” position circuit
❏ Oil leak for “R” position circuit
❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Forward clutch
❏ Direct clutch
❏ 1st and reverse brake
❏ One-way clutch No. 2
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
Revision: August 2007
AT-44
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items.
AT-49
A
Check before engine is started
❏ The O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on. AT-193.
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items.
AT-54
B
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-80.
❏ TCM processor. AT-82.
❏ PNP switch. AT-83.
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-88.
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-93.
❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-98.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-102.
❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-106.
❏ 1st gear function. AT-108.
❏ 2nd gear function. AT-111.
❏ 3rd gear function. AT-116.
❏ 4th gear function. AT-120.
❏ 5th gear function. AT-123.
❏ Lock-up function. AT-127.
❏ Shift function. AT-170.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-130.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-165.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-174.
❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-135.
❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-140.
❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-145.
❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-155.
❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-160.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-179.
❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-150.
❏ Lever switch circuit. AT-184.
❏ TCM power input signal. AT-188.
❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-192.
❏ CAN communication. AT-77.
❏ Battery
❏ Other
4-1.
4
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Idle inspection
4-2.
❏ Engine cannot be started in “P” and “N” position. AT-194.
❏ In “ P” position, vehicle moves when pushed. AT-195.
❏ In “N” position, vehicle moves. AT-195.
❏ Large shock when shifted from “N” to “D” position. AT-196.
❏ Vehicle does not creep backward in “R” position. AT-196.
❏ Vehicle does not creep forward in “D” or “L” position. AT-197.
K
AT-54
L
Driving tests
M
Part 1
4-3.
❏ Vehicle cannot be started from D1. AT-198.
❏ A/T does not shift: D1 → D2. AT-199.
❏ A/T does not shift: D2 → D3. AT-200.
❏ A/T does not shift: D3 → D4. AT-201.
❏ A/T does not shift: D4 → D5. AT-202.
❏ A/T does not perform lock-up. AT-203
❏ A/T does not hold lock-up condition. AT-203.
❏ Lock-up is not released. AT-204.
AT-55
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-45
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Part 2
❏ Vehicle cannot be started from D1. AT-198.
❏ A/T does not shift: D1 → D2. AT-199.
❏ A/T does not shift: D2 → D3. AT-200.
❏ A/T does not shift: D3 → D4. AT-201.
AT-57
Part 3
❏ A/T does not shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, when lever switch “OFF”→“ON”. AT-205.
❏ A/T does not shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, when selector lever “D”→“L”. AT-206.
❏ A/T does not shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, when lever switch “OFF”→“ON”. AT-207.
❏ A/T does not shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, when release accelerator pedal. AT-207.
❏ Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake. AT-208.
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items.
AT-57
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-80.
❏ TCM processor. AT-82.
❏ PNP switch. AT-83.
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-88.
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-93.
❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-98.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-102.
❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-106.
❏ 1st gear function. AT-108.
❏ 2nd gear function. AT-111.
❏ 3rd gear function. AT-116.
❏ 4th gear function. AT-120.
❏ 5th gear function. AT-123.
❏ Lock-up function. AT-127.
❏ Shift function. AT-170.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-130.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-165.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-174.
❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-135.
❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-140.
❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-145.
❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-155.
❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-160.
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-179.
❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-150.
❏ Lever switch circuit. AT-184.
❏ TCM power input signal. AT-188.
❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-192.
❏ CAN communication. AT-77.
❏ Battery
❏ Other
4
4-3
5
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction
parts.
6
❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items.
AT-49
7
❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts.
See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.)
AT-59
8
❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM.
AT-69AT-74
Revision: August 2007
AT-46
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A/T Electrical Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001717865
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WCIA0583E
Revision: August 2007
AT-47
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
A. TCM (transmission control module 2.
(view with glove box removed)
A. Shift lock button
B. Overdrive control switch
C. Shift position indicator
3.
O/D OFF indicator
4.
5.
A. Turbine revolution sensor F37
B. Terminal cord assembly F30, F62
C. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
F29
(view with battery tray removed)
Revolution sensor F38
(view with intake air duct removed)
6.
Accelerator pedal position sensor
harness connector E20
Revision: August 2007
AT-48
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717866
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BCWA0594E
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001717867
A/T FLUID CHECK
Fluid leakage and fluid level check
• Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Checking A/T Fluid".
Revision: August 2007
AT-49
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Fluid condition check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid status
Conceivable Cause
Required Operation
Varnished (viscous
varnish state)
Clutch, brake
scorched
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
A/T main unit and the vehicle for
malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or
cloudy
Water in the fluid
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
places where water is getting in.
Large amount of
metal powder mixed
in
Unusual wear of
sliding parts within
A/T
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
improper operation of the A/T.
SAT638A
STALL TEST
Stall test procedure
1.
2.
3.
Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.
Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
SAT647B
4.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA7463E
5.
Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
6. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
7. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
8. Move the selector lever to the “N” position.
9. Cool down the A/T fluid.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat step 5 through 9 with selector lever in “L” and “R” positions.
Revision: August 2007
AT-50
SAT514G
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Stall speed:
2,430 - 2,730 rpm
A
Judgement stall test
B
Selector lever position
D, L
Possible cause
R
AT
O
• Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
• Forward clutch (slipping)
• One-way clutch No. 2
D
O
H
• Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
• Direct clutch (slipping)
• 1st and reverse brake (slipping)
L
L
• Engine or torque converter one-way clutch
H
• Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
• B5 brake (slipping)
• Oil pump
• Oil strainer (clogging)
• Oil leak for each range circuit
H
Stall rotation
H
E
F
G
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
H
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
TIME LAG TEST
Time lag test procedure
1.
2.
3.
I
Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.
Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
J
K
L
SAT647B
M
4.
5.
6.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
Engine start, apply foot brake.
Measure time lag by using stopwatch from moment when shift
lever is shifted in “N” to “D” position and “N” to “R” position until
moment slightly shock can be felt.
CAUTION:
• Make sure to take 3 measurement and take the average
value.
• Make sure to keep interval for more than one minute
between time lag tests.
(That purpose is to remove clutch/brake pressure was left
unfinished.)
Time lag:
“N” to “D” position:
“N” to “R” position:
Revision: August 2007
N
O
P
SCIA7463E
Less than 0.7 sec.
Less than 1.2 sec.
AT-51
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Judgement time lag test
Result of time lag test
Possible cause
Longer than standards “N” to “D” position
• Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
• Forward clutch (slipping)
• One-way clutch No. 2
• Oil leak for “D” range circuit
Longer than standards “N” to “R” position
•
•
•
•
•
•
Line pressure is low
Direct clutch (slipping)
1st and reverse brake (slipping)
Oil leak for “R” range circuit
Oil pump
Oil strainer (clogging)
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Line pressure test port
Location of line pressure test port is show in the figure.
SCIA2669E
Line pressure test procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.
Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge [SST: (J34301-C)] and adapter [SST: (J-45542)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to check no oil leak after installing oil pressure gage.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SCIA7463E
Revision: August 2007
AT-52
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed.
CAUTION:
• Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
• When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer
to "STALL TEST".
7. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque.
A
B
AT
:7.4 N·m (0.75 kg-m, 65 in-lb)
SAT493G
D
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Line pressure
E
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Engine speed
D, L positions
F
R position
At idle speed
333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57)
500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88)
At stall speed
1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202)
1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287)
G
Judgement of line pressure test
Judgement
H
Possible cause
Higher than standards both “D”, “L” and “R” positions
• Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction
• Primary regulator valve malfunction
Lower than standards both “D”, “L” and “R” positions
•
•
•
•
•
I
Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction
Primary regulator valve malfunction
Oil pump malfunction
B5 bake malfunction
Oil leak for each range circuit malfunction
Lower than standards only “D” position
• Oil leak for “D” range circuit malfunction
• Forward clutch malfunction
Lower than standards only “R” position
• Oil leak for “R” range circuit malfunction
• Direct clutch malfunction
• 1st and reverse brake malfunction
J
K
L
ROAD TEST
Description
• The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
• The road test is perform in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-54.
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-54.
3. Cruise test
• Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-55, AT57, AT-57.
M
N
O
P
SAT786A
Revision: August 2007
AT-53
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and
inspection items.
• Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose
NG items when all road tests are complete.
SAT496G
Check Before Engine Is Started
INFOID:0000000001717868
1.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Does O/D OFF indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Perform the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to
AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3. Go to AT-54, "Check at Idle".
No
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-193, "O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On".
Check at Idle
INFOID:0000000001717869
1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Turn ignition switch “START”.
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
No
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-194, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position".
2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch "ON". (Do not start engine.)
2. Move selector lever in “D”, “L” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “START”.
Does the engine start in either position?
YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-194, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position".
No
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “In P position, vehicle moves when pushed” on the diagnostics worksheet,
then continue the road test.
No
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1.
Start the engine.
Revision: August 2007
AT-54
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Release the parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “In N position, vehicle moves” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
No
>> GO TO 5.
A
B
5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
When the transaxle is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
YES >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
No
>> GO TO 6.
AT
D
E
6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
YES >> GO TO 7.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
F
G
7.CHECK “D” AND “L” POSITIONS FUNCTIONS
H
Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transaxle is put into the “D” and “L” positions.
Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” and “L” positions?
YES >> Go to AT-55, "Cruise Test - Part 1", AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 2", and AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 3".
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep forward in D or L position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
I
J
Cruise Test - Part 1
INFOID:0000000001717870
1.CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1
1.
Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid.
Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position.
4. Start the engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-III
Read off the gear positions.
Starts from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed.
• Refer to AT-58.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: August 2007
AT-55
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
3.CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed.
• Refer to AT-58.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
4.CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed.
• Refer to AT-58.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
5.CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed.
• Refer to AT-58.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
6.CHECK LOCK-UP
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
• Refer to AT-58.
With CONSULT-III
Read the lock-up status.
Does it lock-up?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
7.CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD
Check lock−up hold.
Does it maintain lock-up status?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not hold lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
8.CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT-III
Read the lock-up status.
Revision: August 2007
AT-56
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Does lock-up cancel?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57).
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57).
Cruise Test - Part 2
B
INFOID:0000000001717871
1.CHECK STARTING FROM D1
1.
2.
A
AT
Move selector lever the “D” position.
Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position.
Does it start from D1?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
D
E
F
2.CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D1 → D2) at
the correct speed.
• Refer to AT-58.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
G
H
I
3.CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D2 → D3) at
the correct speed.
• Refer to AT-58.
J
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
K
4.CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE
M
When the transaxle changes speed D2 → D3, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-57).
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 3
O
P
Confirm lever switch is in OFF position. (O/D OFF indicator lamp “OFF”.)
Confirm gear selector lever is in D position.
Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D5.
Release accelerator pedal.
Push lever switch while driving in D5. (O/D OFF indicator lamp “ON” and A/T indicator “4”.)
With CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
N
INFOID:0000000001717872
1.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D5 TO D4)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L
AT-57
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does A/T shift from D5 to D4?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, when lever switch OFF → ON”
on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
2.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO L3)
1.
2.
3.
Driving in D4.
Move selector lever from D to L position while D4.
Release accelerator pedal.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does A/T shift from D4 to L3?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, when selector lever D → L
position” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
3.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (L3 TO L2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Confirm lever switch is in OFF position. (A/T indicator “3”.)
Confirm gear selector lever is in L position.
Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to L3.
Release accelerator pedal.
Push lever switch while driving in L3. (A/T indicator “2”.)
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does A/T shift from L3 to L2?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, when lever switch OFF →
ON” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
4.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (L2 TO L1)
Release accelerator pedal.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does A/T shift from L2 to L1?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, when release accelerator
pedal” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
5.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Depress and release accelerator pedal while driving in L1.
With CONSULT-III
Read the gear position.
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in L1 position?
YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue trouble diagnosis.
Shift Schedule
INFOID:0000000001717873
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS
Revision: August 2007
AT-58
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Accelerator angle
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
A
D1→D2
D2→D3
D3→D4
D4→D5
D5→D4
D4→D3
D3→D2
D2→D1
100 %
67
(42)
105
(65)
170
(106)
241
(150)
230
(143)
160
(99)
92
(57)
45
(28)
90 %
67
(42)
105
(65)
170
(106)
241
(150)
230
(143)
160
(99)
92
(57)
45
(28)
80 %
65
(40)
100
(62)
152
(94)
227
(141)
178
(111)
142
(88)
86
(53)
45
(28)
70 %
53
(33)
80
(50)
125
(78)
185
(115)
147
(91)
137
(85)
68
(42)
38
(24)
60 %
46
(29)
71
(44)
106
(66)
156
(97)
108
(67)
78
(48)
46
(29)
22
(14)
50 %
43
(27)
67
(42)
97
(60)
145
(90)
98
(61)
68
(42)
40
(25)
18
(11)
40 %
38
(24)
60
(37)
89
(55)
130
(81)
89
(55)
56
(35)
30
(19)
13
(8)
30 %
33
(21)
50
(31)
70
(43)
108
(67)
68
(42)
45
(28)
25
(16)
12
(7)
20 %
23
(14)
35
(22)
49
(30)
77
(48)
49
(30)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
10 %
17
(11)
29
(18)
39
(24)
58
(36)
44
(27)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP
I
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
50 %
190 (118)
137 (85)
15%
101 (63)
72 (45)
0-8%
73 (45)
70 (43)
J
K
• Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
• Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
• Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
L
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP
Accelerator angle
0 - 10 %
Gear position
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
45 (28)
42 (26)
5th
58 (36)
55 (34)
M
N
• Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
• Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
O
• Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001717874
Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
CAUTION:
Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT
section.
Revision: August 2007
AT-59
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
ON vehicle
With selector lever in D position, driving is
not possible.
OFF vehicle
With selector lever in R position, driving is
not possible.
OFF vehicle
AT-66
4. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
5. Control valve assembly
AT-222
6. Torque converter
AT-224
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
8. B5 brake
AT-259
9. One-way clutch No.2
AT-232
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Time lag is large. (“N” →“ D” position)
OFF vehicle
Revision: August 2007
AT-221, AT219
3. TCM
AT-66
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
6. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
7. Control valve assembly
AT-222
8. Torque converter
AT-232
9. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
10. 1st and reverse brake
AT-232
11. B5 brake
AT-259
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed.
AT-49
AT-221, AT219
3. TCM
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
ON vehicle
Reference
page
AT-221, AT219
3. TCM
AT-66
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
6. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
8. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
9. Control valve assembly
AT-222
10. Accumulator
AT-232
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. TCM
AT-66
5. Control valve assembly
AT-222
6. Accumulator
AT-232
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
AT-60
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Time lag is large. (“N” →“ R” position)
OFF vehicle
Engine does not start in “N”, “P” position.
Engine starts in positions other than “N” or
“P”.
Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N”
→ “D”, “R”.
Engine stall when vehicle slow down.
Acceleration is extremely poor.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D1 → D2.
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. TCM
AT-66
5. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
6. Control valve assembly
AT-222
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
8. 1st and reverse brake
AT-232
1. Ignition switch and starter
PG-3, SC-10
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-221
3. PNP switch
AT-83
1. Ignition switch and starter
PG-3, SC-10
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-221
3. PNP switch
AT-83
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
4. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
5. Control valve assembly
AT-222
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
4. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
5. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
6. Control valve assembly
AT-222
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
AT-221, AT219
3. Engine speed signal
AT-106
4. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
6. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
7. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
8. Control valve assembly
9. 2nd coast brake
OFF vehicle 10. 2nd brake
Revision: August 2007
Reference
page
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
AT-222
AT-251, AT257
AT-251
11. One-way clutch No.1
AT-257
12. One-way clutch No.2
AT-232
AT-61
A
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D2 → D3.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D3 → D4.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D4 → D5.
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
8. Control valve assembly
AT-222
9. U/D brake
AT-232
10. B5 brake
AT-259
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
7. Control valve assembly
AT-222
8. U/D clutch
AT-232
9. U/D brake
AT-232
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Control valve assembly
AT-222
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
8. 2nd coast brake
9. One-way clutch No.1
ON vehicle
In D range, does not downshift to 1st gear.
Revision: August 2007
AT-251, AT257
AT-257
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
6. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
7. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
8. Control valve assembly
AT-222
9. 2nd coast brake
OFF vehicle
Reference
page
AT-251, AT257
10. 2nd brake
AT-251
11. One-way clutch No.1
AT-257
12. One-way clutch No.2
AT-232
AT-62
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
In D range, does not downshift to 2nd gear.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
In D range, does not downshift to 3rd gear.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
In D range, does not downshift to 4th gear.
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
8. Control valve assembly
AT-222
9. U/D brake
AT-232
10. B5 brake
AT-259
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
7. Control valve assembly
AT-222
8. U/D clutch
AT-232
9. U/D brake
AT-232
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Control valve assembly
AT-222
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
OFF vehicle 8. 2nd coast brake
9. One-way clutch No.1
Does not lock-up or lock-up is not released.
ON vehicle
Reference
page
AT-251, AT257
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
AT-257
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Stop lamp switch signal
AT-209
3. ATF temperature sensor
AT-88
4. TCM
AT-66
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
7. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
8. Control valve assembly
AT-222
OFF vehicle 9. Torque converter
A
M
N
O
AT-224
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-63
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Engine brake does not work.
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. TCM
AT-66
3. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
4. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
5. Control valve assembly
AT-222
6. 2nd coast brake
OFF vehicle
Shift point is high or low.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position)
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N” →“ R” position)
OFF vehicle
Revision: August 2007
Reference
page
AT-251, AT257
7. U/D brake
AT-232
8. B5 brake
AT-259
1. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
2. Engine speed signal
AT-106
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-192
4. Revolution sensor
AT-102
5. TCM
AT-66
6. Control valve assembly
AT-222
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-88
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
6. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
8. TCM
AT-66
9. Control valve assembly
AT-222
10. Accumulator
AT-232
11. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-88
5. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
6. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-165
7. TCM
AT-66
8. Control valve assembly
AT-222
9. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-232
10. 1st and reverse brake
AT-232
AT-64
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Shock is too large when shift up.
Shock is too large for coast down.
Condition
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-88
5. TCM power input signal
AT-188
6. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
7. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
8. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
9. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
10. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-165
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
14. TCM
AT-66
15. Control valve assembly
AT-222
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-88
5. TCM power input signal
AT-188
6. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
7. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
8. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
9. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
10. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-165
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
14. TCM
AT-66
15. Control valve assembly
AT-222
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-65
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Shock is too large for kick down.
Condition
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “R”,“N” or“ D” position.
OFF vehicle
With selector lever in P position, vehicle
does not enter parking condition or, with selector lever in another position, parking condition is not cancelled.
Vehicle runs with transaxle in “ P” position.
Vehicle runs with transaxle in “N” position.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-106
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-98
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-88
5. TCM power input signal
AT-188
6. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-135
7. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-140
8. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-145
9. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-155
10. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-160
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-130
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-165
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-174
14. TCM
AT-66
15. Control valve assembly
AT-222
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. Control valve assembly
AT-222
3. Torque convertor
AT-232
4. Parking component
AT-225
5. Gear system
AT-232
1. PNP switch
AT-83
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-221
3. Control valve assembly
AT-222
4. Parking component
AT-225
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. PNP switch
AT-83
3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
AT-221, AT219
4. Line pressure test
AT-49
1. Fluid level and state
AT-49
2. PNP switch
AT-83
3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
4. Line pressure test
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value
AT-221, AT219
AT-49
INFOID:0000000001717875
TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT
WCIA0537E
Revision: August 2007
AT-66
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
A
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal
Wire
color
Item
Condition
Data (Approx.)
B
When turning ignition switch ON.
1
Y/W
0 - 1.5V
A/T PV IGN relay
AT
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
3
L
CAN-H
4
P
CAN-L
–
14
B
Ground
–
0V
Lever switch: “ON” position
0V
Lever switch: “OFF” position
Battery voltage
16
O
Lever switch
–
–
D
–
E
F
21
G/B
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
G
When turning ignition switch ON.
22
L
0V
Battery voltage
H
Revolution sensor
power supply
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
I
When turning ignition switch ON.
23
G
Battery voltage
Turbine revolution
sensor power supply
J
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
Selector lever: “P”, “R” and “L” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
K
24
25
26
27
28
BR
G/R
W/B
Y/R
W
PNP switch A
Shift solenoid
valve B
Shift solenoid
valve D
M
N
O
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
Revision: August 2007
L
When turning ignition switch OFF.
Battery voltage
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
AT-67
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire
color
Item
29
B/W
Revolution sensor
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear.
119Hz
30
R
Turbine revolution
sensor
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear.
371Hz
31
G/Y
PNP switch B
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
32
P/B
PNP switch C
Selector lever: “D” and “L” position
0V
33
34
R/V
P
PNP switch PN
Condition
Data (Approx.)
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
Battery voltage
Other than the above
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
Power supply
35
L/Y
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
36
W/L
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
37
38
39
40
41
42
R/B
Y/B
Y/B
L/G
R/Y
LG/B
Shift solenoid
valve C
Power supply
(A/T PV IGN relay)
Power supply
(A/T PV IGN relay)
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
Fluid temperature
sensor
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F)
4.0V
When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F)
3.0V
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F)
0.8V
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F)
0.5V
Fluid temperature
sensor ground
Revision: August 2007
–
AT-68
0V
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire
color
43
V/W
45
O/B
46
W/G
47
BR/Y
48
B
Item
Condition
PNP switch PA
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid
valve A
Shift solenoid
valve E
Data (Approx.)
Selector lever: “P”, “N” and “L” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
0V
Ground
–
A
B
AT
D
E
0V
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)
INFOID:0000000001717876
F
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
G
A/T diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status
suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is
displayed.
Displays TCM self-diagnosis results.
Displays TCM input/output data in real time.
I
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
ECU PART NUMBER
H
Conducted by CONSULT-III instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG".
J
TCM part number can be read.
WORK SUPPORT MODE
K
Work item
Work item
INITIALIZATION
Condition
Under the following conditions.
• Ignition switch “ON”.
• Selector lever “P” or “N” position.
• Engine not running.
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
• Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
• Malfunction was not detected.
L
Usage
Use to initialize TCM in a case of replacing transaxle or TCM. Refer to AT-7, "Precaution for A/T
Assembly or TCM Replacement".
M
N
SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC place check marks for results on the “Diagnostic Worksheet”, AT-41,
"How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". Reference pages are provide following
the items.
O
Display item list
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-69
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
X: Applicable
TCM self-diagnosis
—: Not applicable
OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT-III
screen terms)
Malfunction is detected when...
O/D OFF indicator
lamp*3
“TRANSMISSION” with
CONSULT-III
lamp*1, “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-III or
GST
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• When TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more.
X
U1000*4
U1000*4
VEH SPD SE/CIRMTR
• ECM detects a malfunction in vehicle speed sensor signal,
after that TCM inputs the result by CAN communication.
X
P0500
P0500
TCM PROCESSOR
• TCM processor is malfunctioning.
—
P0613
—
PNP SW/CIRC
• PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern
X
P0705
P0705
ATF TEMP SEN/
CIRC
• Normal voltage is not applied to ATF temperature sensor
due to open, short, and so on.
• During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage
is excessively high or low.
X
P0710
P0710
FLUID TEMP SEN
• ATF temperature signal does not change.
—
P0711
P0711*2
TURBINE SENSOR
• Signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to
open, short, and so on.
• Unexpected signal input during running.
X
P0717
P0717
VHCL SPEED SENA/T
• Signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open,
short, and so on.
• Unexpected signal input during running.
X
P0722
P0722
ENG SPD INP PERFOR
• Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is output
from ECM through CAN communication.
X
P0726
P0726
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
• A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0731
P0731*2
A/T 2ND GR
FNCTN
• A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0732
P0732*2
A/T 3RD GR
FNCTN
• A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0733
P0733*2
A/T 4TH GR
FNCTN
• A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0734
P0734*2
A/T 5TH GR
FNCTN
• A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0735
P0735*2
A/T TCC S/V
FNCTN
• A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0744
P0744*2
X
P0745
P0745
X
P0750
P0750
X
P0755
P0755
X
P0760
P0760
X
P0762
P0762*2
X
P0765
P0765
X
P0770
P0770
X
P0775
P0775
PC SOL A(L/
PRESS)
SHIFT SOL A
SHIFT SOL B
• Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
short, and so on.
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
SHIFT SOL C
SFT SOL C STUCK
ON
SHIFT SOL D
SHIFT SOL E
PC SOL B(SFT/
PRS)
• Condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear
ratio is irregular.
• Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
short, and so on.
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
Revision: August 2007
AT-70
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TCM self-diagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT-III
screen terms)
Malfunction is detected when...
O/D OFF indicator
lamp*3
“TRANSMISSION” with
CONSULT-III
lamp , “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-III or
GST
X
P0780
P0780*2
SHIFT
• No rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting
time is long.
• Shifting ends immediately.
• Condition in malfunction engine revs up usually shifting.
PC SOL
C(TCC&SFT)
• Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
short, and so on.
• TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
X
PC SOL C STC ON
• Condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different
from monitor value, and relation between gear position and
actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular.
X
P0797
P0797*2
GEAR LEVER
SWITCH
• Lever switch signal is incorrectly input due to open, short,
and so on.
—
P0825
—
TCM POWER INPT
SIG
• Voltage supplied to TCM is too low.
—
P0882
P0882
ELEC TH CONTROL
• The electric throttle control system for ECM is in a malfunction, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN commnication.
X
P1726
P1726
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
A
*1
B
AT
D
P0795
P0795
E
F
G
H
• No NG item has been detected.
—
X
X
I
*1: Refer to AT-38, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
J
*3: Indicate it when performing TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS). Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
*4: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-77.
K
DATA MONITOR MODE
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
Display item list
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-III performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
Revision: August 2007
AT-71
L
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
X: Standard
—: Not applicable
Monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h)
X
X
X
VHCL/S SE-MTR* (km/h)
X
—
X
FLUID TEMP SE* (V)
X
—
X
FLUID TEMP* (°C)
—
—
X
COOLAN TEMP* (°C)
—
—
X
BATTERY VOLT* (V)
X
—
X
ENGINE SPEED* (rpm)
X
X
X
Signal input with CAN communication
line.
TURBINE REV* (rpm)
X
—
X
Turbine revolution computed from signal
of turbine revolution sensor is displayed.
OUTPUT REV* (rpm)
—
—
X
Output revolution computed from signal
of revolution sensor is displayed.
PNP SW A* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW B* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW C* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW PA* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW PN (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
MANU MODE SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
NON M-MODE SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
UP SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
DOWN SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
RANGE SLCT SW (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
This means lever switch.
BRAKE SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
This means stop lamp switch signal via
CAN communication line.
CLSO THL POS (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
ASCD SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
ASCD OD OFF (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
TCS GEAR HOLD (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
TCS SFT CNG (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
Requests TCM for shift schedule
change.
LOCK-UP* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
Always “ON” during lock-up, regardless
of types.
SLCT LVR POSI*
—
—
X
Displays “##” when TCM can not judge
selector lever position.
MANU GR POSI
—
—
X
Always displays “##”.
X
Indicates current gear position.
When setting in P or N position, indicate
by shift solenoid valves.
When setting in R position, displays “1”.
Displays “##” when TCM can not judge
gear position.
Monitored item (Unit)
GEAR*
Revision: August 2007
—
—
AT-72
Remarks
Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
Displays status of engine coolant temperature.
Signal input with CAN communication
line.
Not mounted but displayed.
Signal input with CAN communication
line.
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item selection
A
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
NEXT GR POSI
—
—
X
Displays “##” when TCM can not judge
gear position.
REDCT DEM SIG (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
Displays status of engine torque reduction demand signal.
TC SLIP RATIO
—
—
X
SLIP REV (rpm)
—
—
X
Difference between engine speed and
torque converter input shaft speed.
Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM.
For fail-safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
Monitored item (Unit)
Remarks
ACCELE ANGLE* (%)
X
X
X
PC SOL A OUT* (A)
—
—
X
PC SOL A MON* (A)
—
X
X
PC SOL B OUT* (A)
—
—
X
PC SOL B MON* (A)
—
X
X
PC SOL C OUT* (A)
—
—
X
PC SOL C MON* (A)
—
X
X
SFT SOL A OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL B OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL C OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL D OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL E OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL A MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL B MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL C MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL D MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL E MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
G-RATE (G)
—
—
X
F-SAFE MODE (OK/1 to 10)
—
X
X
Numbers indicate types of fail-safe
modes. Refer to AT-39, "Fail-Safe".
VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
Signal input with CAN communication
line.
X
The details for data of shift schedule are
as follow:
NOR: Normal mode
UP1: Upslope 1 mode
UP2: Upslope 2 mode (steeper then
“UP1”)
DOWN: Downslope mode
HOT1: Hot 1 mode
HOT2: Hot 2 mode (higher temperature
than “HOT1”)
SHIFT SCHDULE
Voltage (V)
Revision: August 2007
—
—
—
—
AT-73
X
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Displays the value measured by the voltage probe.
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION FROM
MENU
Frequency (Hz)
—
—
X
DUTY-HI (high) (%)
—
—
X
DUTY-LOW (low) (%)
—
—
X
PLS WIDTH-HI (ms)
—
—
X
PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms)
—
—
X
Monitored item (Unit)
Remarks
The value measured by the pulse probe
is displayed.
*: Also, the items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data mode of self-diagnostic results only if DTC is detected. For details,
refer to "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE".
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test item
Test item
Condition
Description
SHIFT SOLENOID A
SHIFT SOLENOID B
SHIFT SOLENOID C
SHIFT SOLENOID D
SHIFT SOLENOID E
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL A
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL B
Under the following conditions.
• Ignition switch “ON”
• Selector lever “P” or “N” position
• Engine not running
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
• Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
• Malfunction was not detected.*
Each shift solenoid operate ON/OFF by receiving the
drive signal.
Each pressure control solenoid is activated by receiving the drive signal.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL C
*: Except when P0711, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P0735, P0744, P0762, P0780 or P0797 is detected.
NOTE:
Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, “TEST IS STOPPED” will be displayed.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717877
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-III)
Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)
Refer to EC-117, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function".
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer to EC-59, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-III)
Refer to AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description
As a method for locating the suspect system, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for
the malfunction location is output and the O/D OFF indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
Diagnostic procedure
1.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position.
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
Revision: August 2007
AT-74
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO AT-193, "O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On".
A
2.JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After turning ignition switch “ON” (at step 6), perform within 2 seconds (while O/D OFF indicator lamp come B
on.).
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
AT
2. Push shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
D
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position and release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
8. Move the selector lever to “D” position and depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
E
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
10. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
F
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.
Refer to "Judgement self-diagnosis code".
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics, refer to AT-209, "TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate".
G
H
>> DIAGNOSIS END
Judgement self-diagnosis code
When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by longer illumination of the indicator lamp.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
SCIA2758E
ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Revision: August 2007
AT-75
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
• However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-III.
Revision: August 2007
AT-76
2008 Quest
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717878
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission AT
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717879
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-III or U1000 without CONSULT-III is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
Possible Cause
D
E
INFOID:0000000001717880
F
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717881
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
G
H
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 6 seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".
J
WITH GST
K
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III”.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-77
2008 Quest
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN
INFOID:0000000001717882
BCWA0604E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-78
2008 Quest
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717883
A
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with in CONSULT-III.
Is any malfunction of the "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" indicated?
Yes
>> Print out CONSULT-III screen, GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart".
No
>> INSPECTION END
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-79
2008 Quest
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
Description
INFOID:0000000001717884
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717885
• This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR” with CONSULT-III or 15th judgement flicker without CONSULT-III is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN
communication) from combination meter.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717886
• Harness or connectors
(The signal circuit is open or shorted.)
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717887
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
ACCELE ANGLE: 10 % or less
If DTC is detected, go to AT-80, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717888
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
3. Drive vehicle, and then make sure that the values of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” and “VHCL/S SE-MTR” are same.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
3.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-5.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
AT-80
2008 Quest
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
A
4.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-80, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
B
AT
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-81
2008 Quest
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR
Description
INFOID:0000000001717889
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
SCIA2820E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717890
• This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “TCM PROCESSOR” with CONSULT-III is detected when TCM processor is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717891
TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717892
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-82, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717893
1.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-82, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
Is the “TCM PROCESSOR” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
AT-82
2008 Quest
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717894
• The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission range switch.
• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
• TCM judges the selector lever position by the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
B
Selector lever
PNP switch A
PNP switch B
PNP switch C
PNP switch PA
PNP switch PN
P
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
R
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
N
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
D
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
L
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Possible Cause
E
F
G
INFOID:0000000001717896
• Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
H
INFOID:0000000001717897
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
4.
5.
D
INFOID:0000000001717895
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-III or P0705 without CONSULT-III is detected when
PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern.
1.
2.
3.
AT
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Move selector lever to each position.
SLCT LVR POSI: “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” or “L” position
Wait for at least 5 consecutive seconds at each position.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-83
2008 Quest
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW
INFOID:0000000001717898
BCWA0595E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-84
2008 Quest
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717899
A
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
B
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Move selector lever to “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position and check the value of “PNP SW A”, “PNP SW B”,
AT
“PNP SW C”, “PNP SW PA” and “PNP SW PN”.
Selector
lever
“PNP SW A”
“PNP SW B”
“PNP SW
C”
“PNP SW
PA”
“PNP SW
PN”
P
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
R
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
N
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
D
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
L
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
1.
2.
D
E
F
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Move selector lever to “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position and
check voltage between the TCM connector terminals and
ground.
G
H
Connector No.
Selector lever
E142
Terminal
24 Ground
31 Ground
32 Ground
33 Ground
43 Ground
P
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
R
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
N
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
D
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
L
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
I
SCIA2826E
J
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
N
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the PNP switch connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check the voltage between PNP switch connector terminal 1
and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Voltage
F29
1 - Ground
Battery voltage
O
P
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminal 1 and
ground.
SCIA3576E
Revision: August 2007
AT-85
2008 Quest
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
Terminal
Voltage
F29
1 - Ground
0V
7. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch
• Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PNP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector and PNP switch connector.
Check continuity between TCM connector terminals 24, 31, 32,
43 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Continuity
24 - Ground
Selector lever: “P”, “R” and “L” position
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and “L”
position
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “D” and “L” position
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “P”, “N” and “L” position
Yes
Other than the above
No
31 - Ground
E142
32 - Ground
43 - Ground
ALDIA0205ZZ
4. If OK, check the following.
Harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
Open or short-circuit in the harness between combination meter and TCM.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch A, B, C, PA.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of PNP switch.
• PNP switch. Refer to AT-87, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-83, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TCM
1.
2.
Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-86
2008 Quest
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717900
B
PNP SWITCH
1.
Check continuity between PNP switch terminals while moving selector lever. Refer to the following table.
AT
D
E
SCIA3577E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If NG, check again with control cable disconnected. (Refer to step 1 above.)
If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral
position (PNP) switch terminals. (Refer to step 1 above.)
If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-219, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP)
Switch Adjustment".
If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-87
2008 Quest
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000001717901
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717902
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-III or P0710 without CONSULT-III is
detected under the following conditions.
- When normal voltage not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on.
- When during running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717903
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717904
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Warm up engine so that engine coolant temperature is more than 50°C (122°F).
COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F)
Maintain the following conditions for at least 16 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to drive vehicle.)
COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F)
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-90, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-88
2008 Quest
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS
INFOID:0000000001717905
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0340E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-89
2008 Quest
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717906
1.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Item name
Fluid temperature sensor
1.
2.
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42
while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-89, "Wiring Diagram - AT FTS".
Connector
E142
Terminal
41 - 42 (ground)
Temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
SCIA2871E
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect the TCM connector.
5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42.
Connector
E142
Terminal
41 - 42 (ground)
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
4.
Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and
ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2872E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-90
2008 Quest
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
A
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2873E
D
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
E
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
5.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
G
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
H
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222,
"Transmission wire".
J
SCIA4323E
6.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-88, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
L
M
7.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
N
O
INFOID:0000000001717907
P
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Revision: August 2007
K
AT-91
2008 Quest
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
4.
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
If NG, repair and replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222,
"Transmission wire".
SCIA4323E
Revision: August 2007
AT-92
2008 Quest
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717908
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
B
INFOID:0000000001717909
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
AT
• Diagnostic trouble code “FLUID TEMP SEN” with CONSULT-III or P0711 without CONSULT-III is detected
when ATF temperature signal does not change.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717910
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
E
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717911
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
5.
F
G
H
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 15 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to
maintain continuously.)
VHCL SPEED SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-95, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
I
J
K
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-93
2008 Quest
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTSP
INFOID:0000000001717912
BCWA0341E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-94
2008 Quest
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717913
A
1.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
B
AT
Item name
Fluid temperature sensor
1.
2.
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
D
E
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42
while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-94, "Wiring Diagram - AT FTSP".
F
G
Connector
E142
Terminal
41 - 42 (ground)
Temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
H
I
SCIA2871E
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect the TCM connector.
5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42.
L
M
Connector
E142
Terminal
41 - 42 (ground)
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
4.
Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and
ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
N
O
SCIA2872E
P
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-95
2008 Quest
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2873E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222,
"Transmission wire".
SCIA4323E
6.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-93, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717914
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Revision: August 2007
AT-96
2008 Quest
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
A
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
4.
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
B
If NG, repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222,
"Transmission wire".
AT
SCIA4323E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-97
2008 Quest
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000001717915
• The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm
(revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transaxle. The revolution sensor is located on the output side
of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input and output
rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting.
• Hall IC is installed in turbine revolution sensor, it itself handles in
pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to
hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with input rpm speed. Size of
output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed.
SCIA2830E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717916
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE SENSOR” with CONSULT-III or P0717 without CONSULT-III is detected
under the following conditions.
- When signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on.
- When unexpected signal input during running.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717917
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Turbine revolution sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717918
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 consecutive minute.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: Except 1st position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-100, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-98
2008 Quest
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - TRSC
INFOID:0000000001717919
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0342E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-99
2008 Quest
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717920
1.CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”.
Monitor item
Condition
TURBINE REV
1.
2.
During driving (lock-up ON)
Specification
Approximately matches the
engine speed.
Without CONSULT-III
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 23 and 30.
Data (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
Condition
E142
23 - 30 (ground)
When moving at 20 km/h (12
MPH) in 1st gear.
371 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2925E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and turbine revolution sensor.
• Turbine revolution sensor. Refer to AT-100, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-98, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717921
TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
1.
Remove turbine revolution sensor.
Revision: August 2007
AT-100
2008 Quest
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity)
3. Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at turbine revolution sensor tip [gap
is within 5 mm (0.20 in)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self
when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot
change.
4.
Signal
Voltage (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
A
B
AT
SCIA3578E
D
If NG, replace turbine revolution sensor.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-101
2008 Quest
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000001717922
• The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is
sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
• Hall IC is installed in revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse of
rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall effect.
TCM recognizes the pulse with vehicle speed. Size of output
doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed.
SCIA2830E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717923
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T” with CONSULT-III or P0722 without CONSULT-III is
detected under the following conditions.
- When signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on.
- When unexpected signal input during running.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717924
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Revolution sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717925
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR”
value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-104, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive minutes.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-104, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-102
2008 Quest
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSATC
INFOID:0000000001717926
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0596E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-103
2008 Quest
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717927
1.CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-AT”.
Monitor item
Condition
VHCL/S SE-AT
1.
2.
Specification
Approximately matches the
speedometer reading.
During driving
Without CONSULT-III
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 22 and 29.
Connector
Terminal
E142
22 - 29 (ground)
Data (Approx.)
Condition
When moving at 20 km/h
(12 MPH) in 1st gear.
119 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2928E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and revolution sensor.
• Revolution sensor. Refer to AT-104, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-102, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717928
REVOLUTION SENSOR
1.
Remove revolution sensor.
Revision: August 2007
AT-104
2008 Quest
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity)
3. Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at revolution sensor tip [gap is within
5mm (0.20 in)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self
when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot
change.
4.
Signal
Voltage (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
A
B
AT
SCIA3578E
D
If NG, replace revolution sensor.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-105
2008 Quest
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
Description
INFOID:0000000001717929
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717930
• This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “ENG SPD INP PERFOR” with CONSULT-III or 14th judgement flicker without CONSULT-III is detected when malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal or
torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717931
• Harness or connectors
(The signal circuit is open or shorted.)
• ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717932
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 %
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717933
1.CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III
Function (ENGINE)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-9.
• If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-77.
1.
2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
While monitoring “ENGINE SPEED”, check for engine speed change corresponding to “ACCELE
ANGLE”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the ignition signal circuit.
• Refer to EC-591.
1.
2.
3.
Revision: August 2007
AT-106
2008 Quest
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK DTC
A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-106, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
B
4.CHECK TCM
AT
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-107
2008 Quest
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
Description
INFOID:0000000001717934
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
1st
A
B
C
D
E
D
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
L
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717935
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0731 without CONSULT-III is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717936
• Shift solenoid valve A
(Off stick.)
• 2nd brake
• 2nd coast brake
• One-way clutch No.1
• One-way clutch No.2
• Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717937
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 1st gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292,
"Shift Schedule".)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-110, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-108
2008 Quest
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - 1STSIG
INFOID:0000000001717938
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0344E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-109
2008 Quest
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717939
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0750. Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following item:
2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake".
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
3.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-108, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Revision: August 2007
AT-110
2008 Quest
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717940
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
AT
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
2nd
A
B
C
D
E
D
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
L
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
D
E
INFOID:0000000001717941
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 2ND GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0732 without CONSULT-III is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
F
Possible Cause
G
INFOID:0000000001717942
• Shift solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve D
(On stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
• U/D brake
• 2nd coast brake
• 2nd brake
• One-way clutch No.1
• One-way clutch No.2
• B5 brake
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717943
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
3.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 2nd position
Revision: August 2007
O
P
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
N
AT-111
2008 Quest
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 2nd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292,
"Shift Schedule".)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-112
2008 Quest
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - 2NDSIG
INFOID:0000000001717944
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0597E
Revision: August 2007
AT-113
2008 Quest
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCWA0598E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-114
2008 Quest
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717945
A
1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
D
2.CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
E
F
G
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following item:
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake".
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
H
I
J
K
4.CHECK DTC
L
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-111, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-115
2008 Quest
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
Description
INFOID:0000000001717946
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
3rd
A
B
C
D
E
D
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
L
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717947
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 3RD GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0733 without CONSULT-III is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717948
• Shift solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve D
(Off stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• B5 brake
• U/D clutch
• U/D brake
• Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717949
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 3rd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292,
"Shift Schedule".)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-119, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
AT-116
2008 Quest
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RDSIG
INFOID:0000000001717950
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0599E
Revision: August 2007
AT-117
2008 Quest
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCWA0313E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-118
2008 Quest
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717951
A
1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
D
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
F
3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following item:
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232.
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
I
4.CHECK DTC
J
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-116, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-119
2008 Quest
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
Description
INFOID:0000000001717952
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
4th
D
A
B
C
D
E
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717953
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 4TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0734 without CONSULT-III is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717954
• Shift solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• Forward and direct clutch assembly
• U/D clutch
• U/D brake
• 2nd coast brake
• One-way clutch No.1
• Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717955
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 4th position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 4th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292,
"Shift Schedule".)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Revision: August 2007
AT-120
2008 Quest
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
A
Wiring Diagram - AT - 4THSIG
INFOID:0000000001717956
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0345E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-121
2008 Quest
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717957
1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following item:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232.
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
4.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-120, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Revision: August 2007
AT-122
2008 Quest
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717958
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fifth gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
AT
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
5th
D
A
B
C
D
E
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717959
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 5TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0735 without CONSULT-III is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
D
E
F
INFOID:0000000001717960
G
• Shift solenoid valve B
(Off stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
• Shift solenoid valve E
(On stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
• Forward and direct clutch assembly
• Direct clutch
• 2no coast brake
• One-way clutch No.1
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
I
J
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717961
L
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
M
N
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 5th position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 5th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292,
"Shift Schedule".)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
AT-123
2008 Quest
O
P
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Wiring Diagram - AT - 5THSIG
INFOID:0000000001717962
BCWA0346E
Revision: August 2007
AT-124
2008 Quest
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BCWA0347E
P
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-125
2008 Quest
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717963
1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following item:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake".
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
4.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Revision: August 2007
AT-126
2008 Quest
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717964
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, AT
etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717965
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0744 without CONSULT-III is
detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
F
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717967
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
3.
4.
E
INFOID:0000000001717966
• Shift solenoid valve D
(Off stick.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
• Torque converter clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
1.
2.
D
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to more than 100 km/h (62 MPH) and maintain the following conditions for at least 12
consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 5th position
SLIP REV: Less than 100 rpm
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 5 %
LOCK-UP: ON (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)
[Vehicle speed: Constant speed of more than 100 km/h (62 MPH).]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
P
AT-127
2008 Quest
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG
INFOID:0000000001717968
BCWA0348E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-128
2008 Quest
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717969
A
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0765. Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0795. Refer to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
E
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following item:
Torque converter clutch. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
G
4.CHECK DTC
H
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-127, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-129
2008 Quest
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
Description
INFOID:0000000001717970
• The pressure control solenoid valve A is normally high, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid.
• The pressure control solenoid valve A regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal
sent from the TCM.
SCIA2831E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717971
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL A(L/PRESS)” with CONSULT-III or P0745 without CONSULT-III is
detected under the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717972
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve A
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717973
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-130
2008 Quest
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/A
INFOID:0000000001717974
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0349E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-131
2008 Quest
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717975
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-III
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out the value of “PC SOL A OUT” and “PC SOL A MON”.
Monitor item
• PC SOL A OUT
• PC SOL A MON
1.
2.
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
When releasing accelerator pedal with setting selector lever to “P” position.
1.00 A
When depressing accelerator pedal fully setting selector lever to “P” position.
0.32 A
Without CONSULT-III
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Data (Approx.)
E142
35 - 40
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever to
“P” position.
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2908E
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40.
Connector
Terminal
E142
35 - 40
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Resistance
(Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2909E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-132
2008 Quest
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
A
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
3-6
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
AT
SCIA2910E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
D
Check the following.
E
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
G
H
Connector
Terminal
F72
1-2
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
J
SCIA4326E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
K
VALVE A
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve A.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
L
M
7.CHECK DTC
N
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-130, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
O
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: August 2007
AT-133
P
2008 Quest
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717976
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
F72
1-2
4.
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4326E
Revision: August 2007
AT-134
2008 Quest
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717977
• Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and
OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear
positions.
• The shift solenoid valve A is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
D1, L 1
D2, L2
D3, L3
D4
D5
Reverse
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
B
AT
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717978
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL A” with CONSULT-III or P0750 without CONSULT-III is detected under
the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
G
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717980
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
5.
F
INFOID:0000000001717979
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Shift solenoid valve A
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-135
2008 Quest
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A
INFOID:0000000001717981
BCWA0350E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-136
2008 Quest
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717982
A
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL A OUT” and “SFT SOL A MON”.
B
AT
Monitor item
Condition
• SFT SOL A OUT
• SFT SOL A MON
Indication
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
OFF
D
E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
F
Connector
E142
Terminal
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
46 - Ground
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery
voltage
G
When shift solenoid valve A
does not operate.
H
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2875E
I
2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 46 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
E142
46 - Ground
K
Resistance
(Approx.)
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
L
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
SCIA2877E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-137
2008 Quest
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
2 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2878E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F67
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4334E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve A.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-135, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717983
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Revision: August 2007
AT-138
2008 Quest
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F67
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
A
B
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
AT
D
SCIA4334E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-139
2008 Quest
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description
INFOID:0000000001717984
• Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and
OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear
positions.
• The shift solenoid valve B is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve B
D1 , L 1
D2, L 2
D3, L 3
D4
D5
Reverse
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717985
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL B” with CONSULT-III or P0755 without CONSULT-III is detected under
the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001717986
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Shift solenoid valve B
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717987
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd and 4th ⇒ 5th position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-140
2008 Quest
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B
INFOID:0000000001717988
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BCWA0351E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-141
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717989
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL B OUT” and “SFT SOL B MON”.
Monitor item
Condition
• SFT SOL B OUT
• SFT SOL B MON
1.
2.
Indication
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Drive vehicle.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
E142
Terminal
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
25 - Ground
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery
voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate.
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2880E
2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 25 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
E142
25 - Ground
Resistance
(Approx.)
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2881E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-142
2008 Quest
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
A
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
AT
SCIA2882E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
D
Check the following.
E
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
G
H
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F68
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
J
SCIA4335E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
K
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve B.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
L
M
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-140, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
N
O
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
P
INFOID:0000000001717990
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Revision: August 2007
AT-143
2008 Quest
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F68
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4335E
Revision: August 2007
AT-144
2008 Quest
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717991
• Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and
OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear
positions.
• The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve C
D1, L 1
D2, L2
D3, L3
D4
D5
Reverse
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
B
AT
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717992
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL C” with CONSULT-III or P0760 without CONSULT-III is detected under
the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
G
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717994
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
5.
F
INFOID:0000000001717993
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Shift solenoid valve C
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd ⇒ 4th position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-145
2008 Quest
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/C
INFOID:0000000001717995
BCWA0352E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-146
2008 Quest
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717996
A
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and “SFT SOL C MON”.
B
AT
Monitor item
• SFT SOL C OUT
• SFT SOL C MON
Condition
Indication
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
OFF
D
E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
F
Connector
E142
Voltage
(Approx.)
Terminal
Condition
37 - Ground
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or
reverse gear.)
G
Battery
voltage
H
When shift solenoid valve C
does not operate.
0V
SCIA2884E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
J
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
37 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2885E
N
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-147
2008 Quest
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
4 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2886E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F69
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4338E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire.
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-145, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717997
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Revision: August 2007
AT-148
2008 Quest
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F69
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
A
B
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
AT
D
SCIA4338E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-149
2008 Quest
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
Description
INFOID:0000000001717998
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
• This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
• Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and
OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear
positions.
• The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve C
D1 , L 1
D2, L 2
D 3, L3
D4
D5
Reverse
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717999
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SFT SOL C STUCK ON” with CONSULT-III or P0762 without CONSULT-III is
detected when condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear
position and actual gear ratio is irregular.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001718000
• Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
• Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718001
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd ⇒ 4th position
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 %
If DTC is detected, go to AT-152, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-150
2008 Quest
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/CS
INFOID:0000000001718002
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BCWA0353E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-151
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718003
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and “SFT SOL C MON”.
Monitor item
• SFT SOL C OUT
• SFT SOL C MON
1.
2.
Condition
Indication
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Drive vehicle.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
E142
Terminal
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
37 - Ground
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or
reverse gear.)
Battery
voltage
When shift solenoid valve C
does not operate.
0V
SCIA2884E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
37 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2885E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-152
2008 Quest
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
A
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
4 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
AT
SCIA2886E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
D
Check the following.
E
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
G
H
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F69
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
J
SCIA4338E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
K
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire.
L
M
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-150, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
N
O
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
P
INFOID:0000000001718004
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Revision: August 2007
AT-153
2008 Quest
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F69
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4338E
Revision: August 2007
AT-154
2008 Quest
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001718005
• Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and
OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear
positions.
• The shift solenoid valve D is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve D
D1, L 1
D2, L2
D3, L3
D4
D5
Reverse
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
B
AT
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718006
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL D” with CONSULT-III or P0765 without CONSULT-III is detected under
the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
G
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718008
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
5.
F
INFOID:0000000001718007
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Shift solenoid valve D
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 2nd ⇒ 3rd position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-155
2008 Quest
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/D
INFOID:0000000001718009
BCWA0600E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-156
2008 Quest
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718010
A
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL D OUT” and “SFT SOL D MON”.
B
AT
Monitor item
Condition
• SFT SOL D OUT
• SFT SOL D MON
Indication
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
OFF
D
E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
F
Connector
E142
Voltage
(Approx.)
Terminal
Condition
26 - Ground
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th
gear.)
G
Battery
voltage
H
When shift solenoid valve D
does not operate.
0V
SCIA2889E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT
J
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 26 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
26 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2890E
N
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-157
2008 Quest
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2891E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F70
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4339E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve D.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-155, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718011
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
Revision: August 2007
AT-158
2008 Quest
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F70
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
A
B
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
AT
D
SCIA4339E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-159
2008 Quest
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
Description
INFOID:0000000001718012
• Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and
OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear
positions.
• The shift solenoid valve E is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve E
D 1, L1
D2, L 2
D3, L 3
D4
D5
Reverse
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
NOTE:
The condition of shift solenoid valve E is ON (Open) with shifting D2 ⇔ D3 (L2 ⇔ L3) and D3 ⇔ D4.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718013
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL E” with CONSULT-III or P0770 without CONSULT-III is detected under
the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001718014
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Shift solenoid valve E
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718015
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Move selector lever between “N” and “R”.
SLCT LVR POSI: “N”⇔“R” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-160
2008 Quest
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/E
INFOID:0000000001718016
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BCWA0355E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-161
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718017
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL E OUT” and “SFT SOL E MON”.
Monitor item
Condition
• SFT SOL E OUT
• SFT SOL E MON
1.
2.
Indication
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Drive vehicle.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
E142
Terminal
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
47 - Ground
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery
voltage
When shift solenoid valve E
does not operate.
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2896E
2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 47 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
47 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2897E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-162
2008 Quest
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground.
A
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
5 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
AT
SCIA2898E
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
D
Check the following.
E
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
G
H
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F71
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
J
SCIA4340E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
K
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve E.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
L
M
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-160, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
N
O
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
P
INFOID:0000000001718018
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
Revision: August 2007
AT-163
2008 Quest
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F71
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4340E
Revision: August 2007
AT-164
2008 Quest
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001718019
B
• The pressure control solenoid valve B is normally high, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid.
• The pressure control solenoid valve B controls linear shift pressure
by control signal from TCM and controls 2nd coast brake directly
under 2nd, 3rd, 4th and direct clutch directly under 5th and
reverse.
AT
D
E
SCIA2831E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718020
F
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)” with CONSULT-III or P0775 without CONSULT-III is
detected under the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
G
Possible Cause
H
INFOID:0000000001718021
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve B
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718022
J
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-165
2008 Quest
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/B
INFOID:0000000001718023
BCWA0356E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-166
2008 Quest
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718024
A
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-III
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out the value of “PC SOL B OUT” and “PC SOL B MON”.
Monitor item
AT
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
• PC SOL B OUT
• PC SOL B MON
B
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
1.00 A
Other than the above.
0.30 A
D
E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36.
F
Data (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
Condition
E142
36 - 21 (Ground)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever
to “P” position.
G
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
SCIA2911E
I
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
36 - 21 (Ground)
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
J
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
SCIA2912E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 7.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
3-7
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2913E
Revision: August 2007
AT-167
2008 Quest
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
F73
1-2
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4341E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve B.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-165, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718025
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-168
2008 Quest
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
A
Connector
Terminal
F73
1-2
4.
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
B
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
AT
SCIA4341E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-169
2008 Quest
DTC P0780 SHIFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0780 SHIFT
Description
INFOID:0000000001718026
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
• This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by
electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718027
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT” with CONSULT-III or P0780 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions.
- When no rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor)
and shifting time is long.
- When shifting ends immediately.
- When engine revs up unusually during shifting.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001718028
• Shift solenoid valve D
(Off error.)
• Shift solenoid valve E
(Off error.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On/Off error.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve B
(On/Off error.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On/Off error.)
• Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718029
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 60°C (140°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd ⇒ 3rd ⇒ 4th ⇒ 5th position
(Vehicle speed: Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)
If DTC is detected, go to AT-173, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-170
2008 Quest
DTC P0780 SHIFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SFTFNC
INFOID:0000000001718030
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0601E
Revision: August 2007
AT-171
2008 Quest
DTC P0780 SHIFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCWA0602E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-172
2008 Quest
DTC P0780 SHIFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718031
A
1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
2.CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
D
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
• “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
F
3.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace transmission wire or control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire" or AT222, "Control Valve Assembly".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-173
2008 Quest
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
Description
INFOID:0000000001718032
• The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear
pressure control solenoid.
• The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the
apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, and
torque converter clutch.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SCIA2833E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718033
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)” with CONSULT-III or P0795 without CONSULT-III is
detected under the following conditions.
- When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
- When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001718034
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
• Pressure control solenoid valve C
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718035
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Revision: August 2007
AT-174
2008 Quest
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/C
INFOID:0000000001718036
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0357E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-175
2008 Quest
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718037
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-III
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”.
Monitor item
• PC SOL C OUT
• PC SOL C MON
1.
2.
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
1.00 A
Other than the above.
0.20 A
Without CONSULT-III
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Data (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
Condition
E142
45 - 28 (Ground)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever
to “P” position.
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2914E
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
45 - 28 (Ground)
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2915E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
2-5
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2916E
Revision: August 2007
AT-176
2008 Quest
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
A
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F74
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
D
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
F
G
SCIA4342E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
H
VALVE C
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
7.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-174, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
L
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M
N
INFOID:0000000001718038
O
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
J
K
8.CHECK TCM
Component Inspection
I
AT-177
P
2008 Quest
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F74
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4342E
Revision: August 2007
AT-178
2008 Quest
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001718039
• This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B
malfunction.
• This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
AT
• The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear
pressure control solenoid.
• The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the
apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, and
D
torque converter clutch.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
E
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
F
SCIA2833E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718040
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C STC ON” with CONSULT-III or P0797 without CONSULT-III is detected
when condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between
gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular.
Possible Cause
H
INFOID:0000000001718041
I
• Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
• Hydraulic control circuit
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718042
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
L
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 4 consecutive minutes at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnosis Procedure".
M
WITH GST
N
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-179
2008 Quest
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/CS
INFOID:0000000001718043
BCWA0358E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-180
2008 Quest
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718044
A
1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-III
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”.
Monitor item
AT
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
• PC SOL C OUT
• PC SOL C MON
B
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
1.00 A
Other than the above.
0.20 A
D
E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
F
Data (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
Condition
E142
45 - 28 (Ground)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever
to “P” position.
G
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
SCIA2914E
I
2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
E142
45 - 28 (Ground)
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
J
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
SCIA2915E
3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
2-5
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2916E
Revision: August 2007
AT-181
2008 Quest
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND
TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F74
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
SCIA4342E
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire".
7.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer toAT-179, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718045
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-182
2008 Quest
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
A
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F74
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4.
B
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222,
"Control Valve Assembly".
AT
SCIA4342E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-183
2008 Quest
DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000001718046
Lever switch is installed in A/T device. It sends lever switch position (ON or OFF) signals to TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718047
• This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “GEAR LEVER SWITCH” with CONSULT-III is detected when TCM monitors lever
switch signal, and judges as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001718048
• Harness or connectors
(Lever switch circuit is open or shorted.)
• Lever switch (built into A/T device)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718049
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position.
Wait for at least 30 consecutive seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-186, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
AT-184
2008 Quest
DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - LVRSW
INFOID:0000000001718050
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0606E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-185
2008 Quest
DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718051
1.CHECK LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “RANGE SLCT SW”.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between the TCM connector terminal and
ground.
1.
2.
3.
Connector
No.
Terminal
E143
16 - Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Lever switch: “ON” position
0V
Lever switch: “OFF” position
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA3580E
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T DEVICE (LEVER SWITCH)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check the continuity between TCM connector terminal 16 and
ground.
Connector
No.
Terminal
E143
16 - Ground
Condition
Continuity
Lever switch: “ON” position
Yes
Lever switch: “OFF” position
No
4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA3581E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T device (lever switch).
• Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of lever switch.
• Lever switch. Refer to AT-187, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-184, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TCM
1.
2.
Check TCM input/output signal.
If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
AT-186
2008 Quest
DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718052
B
LEVER SWITCH
Check continuity between A/T device (lever switch) terminals 1 and
2.
Switch position
Continuity
ON
Yes
OFF
No
AT
D
E
SCIA3582E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-187
2008 Quest
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
Description
INFOID:0000000001718053
When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the selfdiagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001718054
• This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
• Diagnostic trouble code “TCM POWER INPT SIG” with CONSULT-III or P0882 without CONSULT-III is
detected when voltage supplied to TCM is too low.
Possible Cause
INFOID:0000000001718055
• Harness or connectors
(Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/T PV IGN relay
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718056
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
Depress accelerator pedal or drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 20 consecutive
seconds.
TURBINE REV: More than 800 rpm
If DTC is detected, go to AT-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
AT-188
2008 Quest
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN
INFOID:0000000001718057
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BCWA0605E
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" .
Revision: August 2007
AT-189
2008 Quest
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718058
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
1 - Ground
0 - 1.5V
27 - Ground
E142
34 - Ground
38 - Ground
Battery voltage
39 - Ground
3.
4.
SCIA2930E
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
1 - Ground
0V
27 - Ground
Battery voltage
34 - Ground
0V
38 - Ground
0V
39 - Ground
0V
E142
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following:
• Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39
• 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• 10A fuse (No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R)
• Ignition switch. Refer to PG-3.
• A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-191, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between TCM terminals 14, 48 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA2933E
4.CHECK DTC
Check again. Refer to AT-188, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
AT-190
2008 Quest
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
A
5.CHECK TCM
B
1. Check TCM input/output signal.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
AT
INFOID:0000000001718059
D
A/T PV IGN RELAY
1.
2.
E
Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1
and 2.
Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
F
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
OFF
No
3.
G
If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay.
SCIA1245E
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-191
2008 Quest
DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
Description
INFOID:0000000001718060
This DTC is displayed with other DTCs regarding ECM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTCs displayed. Refer to AT-39.
When this DTC is detected, lock-up operation and learning control are canceled.
Revision: August 2007
AT-192
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
A
INFOID:0000000001718061
SYMPTOM:
B
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
AT
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis.
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-77.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
D
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Refer to AT-189, "Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN".
Connector
Terminal
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
1 - Ground
0 - 1.5V
F
G
27 - Ground
E142
34 - Ground
38 - Ground
H
Battery voltage
39 - Ground
3.
4.
SCIA2930E
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-189, "Wiring Diagram - AT PWR/IN".
Connector
Terminal
Voltage (Approx.)
E143
1 - Ground
0V
27 - Ground
Battery voltage
34 - Ground
0V
38 - Ground
0V
39 - Ground
0V
E142
L
M
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
N
Check the following:
• Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39
• 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• 10A fuse (No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R)
• Ignition switch. Refer to PG-3.
• A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-191, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
O
P
4.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Revision: August 2007
J
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
I
AT-193
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect the TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14, 48 and ground.
Refer to AT-189, "Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN".
Continuity should exist.
4.
If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or the power
source.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA2933E
5.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check the combination meter.
Refer to DI-5.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter".
6.SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position
INFOID:0000000001718062
SYMPTOM:
• Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
• Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “L” or “R” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-10.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
• Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
Revision: August 2007
AT-194
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-83.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed
A
INFOID:0000000001718063
B
SYMPTOM:
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated,
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
AT
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
D
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-83.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
• Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
F
G
3.SYMPTOM CHECK
H
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves
INFOID:0000000001718064
J
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
L
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
M
2.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-83.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
N
O
3.CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
• Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
P
4.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
Revision: August 2007
AT-195
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position)
INFOID:0000000001718065
SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Accumulator. Refer to AT-232.
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position
INFOID:0000000001718066
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
Revision: August 2007
AT-196
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
A
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
B
2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION
AT
Check the control cable and PNP switch position.
• Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT219, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment".
D
E
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
F
G
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
1st and reverse brake. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
Torque convertor. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
I
J
5.CHECK TCM
K
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
N
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position
INFOID:0000000001718067
SYMPTOM:
P
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” or “L” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
AT-197
O
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION
Check the control cable and PNP switch position.
• Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT219, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment".
3.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate pressure control solenoid valve A?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-130.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
Torque convertor. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1
INFOID:0000000001718068
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-196, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position".
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
Revision: August 2007
AT-198
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK LINE PRESSURE
A
Check the line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning item. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
B
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
AT
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
F
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
J
A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2
INFOID:0000000001718069
K
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
L
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position", AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1".
M
N
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
O
P
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: August 2007
AT-199
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following items:
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232.
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D2→ D3
INFOID:0000000001718070
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position",AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot
Be Started from D1".
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
3.
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following items:
Revision: August 2007
AT-200
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A
B
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
D
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
E
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4
INFOID:0000000001718071
G
SYMPTOM:
• The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
• The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position", AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1".
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
I
J
K
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
L
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
M
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
N
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
O
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P
5.CHECK TCM
1.
Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
Revision: August 2007
AT-201
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D4→ D5
INFOID:0000000001718072
SYMPTOM:
• The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
• The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position",AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot
Be Started from D1".
2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following items:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: August 2007
AT-202
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
A
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
INFOID:0000000001718073
AT
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
E
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
F
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
I
J
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Torque converter. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
L
5.CHECK TCM
M
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
N
O
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
INFOID:0000000001718074
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
AT-203
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Torque converter. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Lock-up Is Not Released
INFOID:0000000001718075
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
Revision: August 2007
AT-204
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
B
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
AT
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
D
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
Torque converter. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
F
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
6.CHECK SYMPTOM
I
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, When Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON"
INFOID:0000000001718076
K
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D5 to D4, when pushed lever switch to “ON” position. (O/D OFF indicator lamp
“ON” and A/T indicator “4”.)
L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
M
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
N
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
O
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
P
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
3.
-
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following items:
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232.
Revision: August 2007
AT-205
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, When Selector Lever "D" → "L" Position
INFOID:0000000001718077
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to L3, when changed selector lever from “D” to “L” position. (A/T indicator
“3”.)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232.
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: August 2007
AT-206
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
A
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, When Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON"
INFOID:0000000001718078
AT
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from L3 to L2, when pushed lever switch to “ON” position. (A/T indicator “2”.)
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
E
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
F
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
G
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
H
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
I
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
3. Check the following items:
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
K
4.CHECK TCM
L
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
N
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
O
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, When Release Accelerator Pedal
INFOID:0000000001718079
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from L2 to L1, when releasing accelerator pedal.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Revision: August 2007
AT-207
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
Check the following items:
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake".
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
-
4.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
INFOID:0000000001718080
SYMPTOM:
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear in “L” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate shift solenoid valve E, electric throttle control system?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-160, AT-192.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Revision: August 2007
AT-208
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly".
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232.
A
3. Check the following items:
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1".
B
U/D brake. Refer to AT-232.
B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake".
OK or NG
AT
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK TCM
D
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
E
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
F
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate
INFOID:0000000001718081
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is
good.
H
I
DESCRIPTION
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range
switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
• Stop lamp switch signal
Detects the brake pedal state (stop lamp switch is ON or OFF) and sends a signal via CAN communication
line to the TCM.
• Closed throttle position signal
ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator pedal position sensor, and sends the signal
via CAN communication line to TCM.
J
K
L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
M
Check the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-83.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
N
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
O
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P
3.CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: August 2007
AT-209
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK DATA MONITOR (WITH CONSULT-III)
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-III.
3. Depress or release accelerator pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “CLSD THL POS”.
4. Depress or release brake pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “BRAKE SW”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value".
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-77.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the TCM.
Revision: August 2007
AT-210
2008 Quest
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001718082
• The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
B
With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
AT
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
• The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
D
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001718083
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCIA0017E
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-211
2008 Quest
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AT - SHIFT
INFOID:0000000001718084
BCWA0603E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718085
SYMPTOM 1:
• Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied.
• Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
• Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
Revision: August 2007
AT-212
2008 Quest
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
• Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”.
A
1.CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
B
Check the key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-217.
AT
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
D
Check the selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
E
3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Connect A/T device harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Selector lever is set in “P” position.
Check operation sound.
G
Condition
Brake pedal
Operation sound
When ignition switch is turned to
“ON” position and selector lever
is set in “P” position.
Depressed
Yes
Released
No
H
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK POWER SOURCE
J
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check the voltage between A/T device harness connector M34
terminal 5 and ground.
Condition
Brake pedal
Data (Approx.)
When ignition switch is turned to
“ON” position.
Depressed
Battery voltage
Released
0V
K
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA3437E
5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-213
2008 Quest
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4.
Condition
Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed
Yes
When brake pedal is released
No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-5.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SCIA2126E
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
• 10A fuse [No.1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch harness connector E38 terminal 3.
• Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector E38 terminal 4 and diode-4 harness
connector E149 terminal 2.
• Harness for short or open between diode-4 harness connector E149 terminal 1 and A/T device harness connector M34 terminal 5.
• Diode-4
• Ignition switch (Refer to PG-3.)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M34
terminal 6 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Connect A/T device harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3438E
Revision: August 2007
AT-214
2008 Quest
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718086
CONTROL DEVICE
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
WDIA0357E
1.
Selector knob
2.
Cluster lid C
4.
Shift lock solenoid
5.
A/T device harness connector
3.
J
Selector lever
K
SELECTOR KNOB
Removal
• ⇐ : Front of vehicle
1. Slide the selector knob cover (1) downwards with fingers to
reveal the selector knob clip (2).
2. Gently pry the selector knob clip (2) outward to remove it using
suitable tool.
3. Lift the selector knob up to remove.
L
M
N
O
LDIA0198E
Installation
1.
2.
3.
P
Set the selector knob in place on the selector lever and push the selector knob downward.
Install the selector knob clip into the groove on the selector knob.
Slide the selector knob cover upwards to conceal the selector knob clip.
CONTROL CABLE
Revision: August 2007
AT-215
2008 Quest
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WDIA0358E
1.
Selector lever
Revision: August 2007
2.
Control cable
AT-216
2008 Quest
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718087
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
WCIA0231E
CAUTION:
• Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts.
• After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2
N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Removal
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001718088
Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster
holder.
Remove casing cap from bracket of control device and remove
interlock rod from cable.
I
J
K
L
M
N
WCIA0232E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-217
2008 Quest
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock
cable.
WCIA0233E
Installation
1.
2.
3.
INFOID:0000000001718089
Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder.
Turn ignition key to lock position.
Set selector lever to P position.
WCIA0233E
4.
5.
6.
Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
Install casing cap to bracket.
Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod.
WCIA0234E
Revision: August 2007
AT-218
2008 Quest
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
A
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
INFOID:0000000001718090
Remove intake air duct.
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
• Do not reuse seal bolt.
B
AT
D
BBIA0272E
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
INFOID:0000000001718091
F
Remove battery and bracket.
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
• Do not reuse seal bolt.
G
H
I
BBIA0273E
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001718092
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove battery and bracket.
Remove cable from range lever.
Set range lever in neutral position.
Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number
5.
6.
K
L
: KV911J0060 (J-45404)
Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts.
Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base
line on PNP switch body.
M
N
SCIA5374E
O
7.
8.
9.
Tighten PNP switch bolts.
Reinstall range lever and cable.
Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment".
10. Reinstall battery and bracket.
11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-87, "Component
Inspection".
P
BBIA0274E
Revision: August 2007
AT-219
2008 Quest
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ATF Cooler
INFOID:0000000001718093
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain ATF.
Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove hose clamps and hoses from ATF cooler.
Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
• Do not reuse sealing parts.
BBIA0275E
ATF Cooler Valve
INFOID:0000000001718094
SCIA2975E
1.
ATF cooler valve assembly
2.
Hose clamp
3.
Heater hose
4.
Heater pipe
5.
Outlet water hose
6.
Hose clip
7.
ATF cooler assembly
8.
Transaxle assembly
9.
Control cable bracket
10. Inlet water hose
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Revision: August 2007
AT-220
2008 Quest
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temperature.
A
Dimension “A”:
More than 72.0 mm (2.835 in)
A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face
and valve shaft end face.
B
AT
SCIA2711J
D
2.
Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then
heat it up with temperature of over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes
more.
E
F
G
SCIA2993E
3.
H
Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed.
Dimension “A”:
Less than 66.5 mm (2.618 in)
A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face
and valve shaft end face.
I
J
SCIA2711J
Control Cable Adjustment
K
INFOID:0000000001718095
L
Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should
be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt
or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control
cable needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in the P position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut.
3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of
the arrow shown.
M
N
O
BBIA0279E
Specified force
4.
5.
: 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)
Tighten control cable lock nut.
Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly.
• Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position.
• Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P
position.
Revision: August 2007
AT-221
2008 Quest
P
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Side cover
INFOID:0000000001718096
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine under cover.
Drain ATF. Refer to MA-24, "Changing A/T Fluid".
Remove side cover bolts and side cover.
SCIA4144E
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
Control Valve Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718097
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Disconnect solenoid valve connectors.
Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control
valve assembly.
SCIA4151E
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
• Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to AT-225, "Component"
for specified torque.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
55 (2.17)
2
B
50 (1.97)
2
C
16 (0.63)
2
SCIA4152E
Transmission wire
INFOID:0000000001718098
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove PNP switch. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover".
Revision: August 2007
AT-222
2008 Quest
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect solenoid valve connectors.
4. Remove transmission wire.
A
B
AT
WCIA0238E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-223
2008 Quest
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
INFOID:0000000001718099
Remove the engine and transaxle assembly from the vehicle. Refer to EM-110.
Inspection After Removal
INFOID:0000000001718100
• Drive plate runout
CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear
teeth.
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After Disassembly".
• If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear.
SAT977H
• When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure distance
“A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”
: 14 mm (0.55 in) or more
SAT044A
Installation
INFOID:0000000001718101
• Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• When replacing the A/T assembly, initialize TCM. Refer to AT-7, "Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM
Replacement".
• Perform road test. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis".
Revision: August 2007
AT-224
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OVERHAUL
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718102
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
SCIA5433E
1.
Adjust shim
2.
O-ring
3.
Differential gear assembly
4.
O-ring
5.
Tapered roller bearing
6.
Tapered roller bearing
7.
Outer race
8.
O-ring
9.
Compression spring
Revision: August 2007
AT-225
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. U/D brake piston assembly
11.
U/D brake damper assembly
12. Snap ring
13. U/D brake band assembly
14.
U/D clutch assembly
15. U/D gear assembly
16. Thrust needle roller bearing
17.
Thrust bearing race
18. Seal ring
19. Transaxle case
20.
B5 brake cushion plate
21. B5 brake disc
22. Snap ring
23.
Thrust bearing race
24. U/D RR planetary ring gear
sub assembly
25. Thrust bearing race
26.
U/D RR planetary carrier assembly
27. Thrust needle roller bearing
28. Adjust shim
29.
B5 brake flange
30. B5 brake plate
31. O-ring
32.
Snap ring
33. Return spring
34. B5 brake piston
35.
Transaxle case cover
Revision: August 2007
AT-226
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
SCIA5434E
1.
Snap ring
2.
2nd brake plate
3.
Return spring
4.
O-ring
5.
Oil pump assembly
6.
Oil seal
7.
2nd brake piston
Snap ring
8.
2nd brake sleeve
9.
10. 2nd brake disc
11.
2nd brake flange
12. One-way clutch No.1
13. 2nd coast brake hub
14. Snap ring
15. 2nd coast brake plate
16. Snap ring
17. O-ring
18. 2nd coast brake piston
19. Return spring
20. 2nd coast brake disc
21. 2nd coast brake flange
Revision: August 2007
AT-227
P
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
22. Thrust washer
23. Thrust washer
24. Return spring
25. 1st and reverse brake piston
26. Thrust bearing race
27. Counter drive gear sub assembly
28. One-way clutch outer race sub assem- 29. Thrust washer
bly
30. Snap ring
31. Thrust bearing
32. O-ring
33. Snap ring
34. Planetary gear assembly
35. FR planetary ring gear assembly
36. Snap ring
37. 1st and reverse brake disc
38. 1st and reverse brake flange
39. 1st and reverse brake plate
40. 1st and reverse brake flange
41. One-way clutch No.2
42. Thrust bearing
43. Thrust bearing race
44. Thrust needle roller bearing
45. Seal ring
46. Forward and direct clutch assembly
47. Planetary sun gear sub assembly 48. Thrust bearing race
49. Thrust needle roller bearing
50. RR planetary ring gear assembly
51. Thrust needle roller bearing
52. Thrust bearing race
Revision: August 2007
AT-228
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
SCIA5435E
P
1.
Transaxle case cover
2.
Seal ring
3.
Forward clutch accumulator piston
4.
Compression spring
5.
Accumulator cover
6.
O-ring
7.
Seal ring
8.
Range lever
9.
Washer plate
10. PNP switch
11. Lock washer
12. Parking lock pawl
13. Torsion spring No.1
14. Parking lock pawl shaft
15. Spring guide sleeve
16. Torsion spring No.2
17. Parking lockpin sub assembly
18. U/D brake apply tube sub assembly
Revision: August 2007
AT-229
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
19. Tube clamp
20. Oil reservoir plate
21. Oil cleaner magnet
22. Tube clamp
23. Differential gear lube apply tube
24. Seal ring
25. Thrust roller bearing
26. Straight screw plug
27. O-ring
28. Straight screw plug
29. Differential side oil seal
30. Torque converter
31. Transaxle housing
32. O-ring
33. O-ring
34. Spring washer
35. Hexagon bolt
36. Washer
37. ATF cooler assembly
38. gasket
39. Drain plug
40. Air breather hose
41. O-ring
42. A/T fluid charging pipe
43. A/T fluid level gauge
44. Manual valve lever sub assembly
45. Parking lock rod sub assembly
46. Control valve assembly
47. Suction cover gasket
48. Suction cover
49. Side cover
50. Seal bolt
51. Governor apply gasket
52. Sensor clamp
53. Transmission wire
54. Transaxle lube apply tube
55. Tube clamp
56. Tube clamp
57. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly
58. Bearing race
59. Seal ring
60. Seal bolt
61. Turbine revolution sensor
62. Differential side oil seal
63. Manual valve oil seal
64. O-ring
65. Anchor bolt
66. Revolution sensor
67. Seal bolt
68. Governor apply gasket
69. Transaxle case
70. Oil reservoir plate
71. Oil strainer sub assembly
72. Manual detent spring sub assembly
73. Parking lock pawl bracket
74. Governor apply gasket
75. Copper washer
76. Fluid cooler tube
Revision: August 2007
AT-230
2008 Quest
OVERHAUL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Location of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers
INFOID:0000000001718103
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
SCIA5436E
Revision: August 2007
AT-231
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001718104
Drain ATF through drain plug.
Remove torque converter from transaxle case by holding it
firmly and turning while pulling straight out.
SCIA4134E
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove A/T fluid level gauge.
Remove A/T fluid charging pipe.
Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe.
Remove air breather hose.
Remove fluid cooler tube.
SCIA4135E
8.
Remove turbine revolution sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the turbine revolution sensor and
transaxle case.
SCIA4137E
9.
Remove revolution sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the revolution sensor and transaxle case.
SCIA4136E
Revision: August 2007
AT-232
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Remove nut and range lever.
A
B
AT
SCIA4138E
D
11. Pry off the lock washer using suitable tool.
E
F
G
SCIA4139E
H
12. Loosen nut and remove lock washer.
13. Remove washer plate.
I
J
K
SCIA4140E
14. Remove PNP switch from transaxle case.
L
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
20 (0.79)
1
B
33 (1.30)
1
M
N
SCIA4141E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-233
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
15. Remove hexagon bolt.
16. Remove ATF cooler assembly, washer and spring washer.
17. Remove O-rings from the ATF cooler assembly.
SCIA4142E
18. Remove side cover.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage side cover and transaxle case.
SCIA4143E
SCIA4144E
19. Disconnect solenoid connectors.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA4146E
Revision: August 2007
AT-234
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
20. Remove sensor clamp bolt.
A
B
AT
SCIA4148E
D
21. Remove sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage A/T fluid temperature sensor.
E
F
G
SCIA4147E
22. Remove suction cover bolts.
H
I
J
SCIA4150E
K
23. Remove suction cover and suction cover gasket.
L
M
N
SCIA4149E
O
24. Remove control valve assembly bolts from transaxle case.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
55 (2.17)
2
B
50 (1.97)
2
C
16 (0.63)
2
P
SCIA4152E
Revision: August 2007
AT-235
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
25. While holding control valve assembly, disconnect parking lock
rod sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly and
remove control valve assembly.
NOTE:
Shift position is “N”.
SCIA4153E
26. Remove governor apply gaskets.
SCIA4154E
27. Remove transmission wire.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage solenoid connectors and A/T fluid
temperature sensor.
SCIA4155E
28. Remove oil pump assembly bolts from transaxle case.
SCIA4156E
Revision: August 2007
AT-236
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
SCIA4157E
D
29. Remove oil pump assembly using Tools.
Tool numbers
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
E
F
G
SCIA5359E
30. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.
H
I
J
SCIA4396E
K
31. Remove one-way clutch outer race sub assembly.
32. Remove thrust washer.
L
M
N
SCIA4159E
O
33. Remove transaxle housing bolts from transaxle case.
P
SCIA4160E
Revision: August 2007
AT-237
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
13
B
35 (1.38)
2
C
45 (1.77)
1
D*
—
1
*:Torx bolt
SCIA5495E
34. Remove transaxle housing using suitable tool.
SCIA4162E
35. Remove governor apply gasket.
36. Remove seal ring.
SCIA4163E
37. Remove tube clamp.
SCIA4164E
Revision: August 2007
AT-238
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
38. Remove differential gear lube apply tube using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube
apply tube.
• Be careful not to damage transaxle housing.
A
B
AT
SCIA4165E
D
39. Remove oil reservoir plate.
E
F
G
SCIA4166E
40. Remove oil cleaner magnets from oil reservoir plate.
H
I
J
SCIA4167E
K
41. Remove differential gear assembly.
L
M
N
SCIA4168E
O
42. Remove oil strainer sub assembly.
P
SCIA4169E
Revision: August 2007
AT-239
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
43. Remove oil reservoir plate.
SCIA4170E
44. Remove tube clamp.
SCIA4171E
45. Remove U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage U/D brake apply tube
sub assembly.
• Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
SCIA4172E
46. Disconnect manual detent spring sub assembly from manual
valve lever sub assembly using suitable tool.
SCIA4174E
47. Remove manual valve lever sub assembly from parking lock rod
sub assembly.
SCIA4175E
Revision: August 2007
AT-240
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
48. Remove parking lock rod sub assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4176E
D
49. Remove bolts for manual detent spring sub assembly.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
16.7 (0.657)
1
B
14.0 (0.551)
1
E
F
G
SCIA4177E
50. Remove manual detent spring sub assembly.
H
I
J
SCIA4178E
K
51. Remove parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1.
L
M
N
SCIA4179E
O
52. Remove parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl.
P
WCIA0420E
Revision: August 2007
AT-241
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
53. Remove parking lockpin sub assembly.
SCIA4181E
54. Remove spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2.
SCIA4182E
55. Remove manual valve oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
SCIA4183E
56. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race
from U/D gear assembly.
WCIA0338E
57. Remove U/D gear assembly.
58. Remove seal rings from U/D gear assembly.
SCIA4185E
Revision: August 2007
AT-242
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
59. Remove U/D clutch assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4186E
D
60. Remove anchor bolt.
E
F
G
SCIA4193E
61. Remove U/D brake band assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
H
I
J
SCIA4187E
62. Remove U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing
races.
63. Remove U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
K
L
M
N
SCIA5505E
O
64. Remove thrust needle roller bearing, adjust shim and thrust
bearing race from U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
P
WCIA0339E
Revision: August 2007
AT-243
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
65. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA4190E
66. Remove U/D brake damper assembly.
67. Remove O-rings from U/D brake damper assembly.
SCIA4191E
68. Remove U/D brake piston assembly and compression spring.
69. Remove O-ring from U/D brake piston assembly.
SCIA4192E
70. Remove transaxle case cover bolts from transaxle case.
SCIA4194E
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
8
B
45 (1.77)
2
C
48 (1.89)
2
D*
—
1
*:Stud bolt
SCIA5413E
Revision: August 2007
AT-244
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
71. Tap transaxle case cover using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case cover.
A
B
AT
SCIA4196E
D
72. Remove transaxle case cover.
E
F
G
SCIA4197E
73. Remove governor apply gaskets from transaxle case.
H
I
J
SCIA4198E
K
74. Remove tube clamp.
L
M
N
SCIA4199E
O
75. Remove transaxle lube apply tube using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage transaxle lube apply
tube.
• Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
P
SCIA4200E
Revision: August 2007
AT-245
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
76. Remove forward and direct clutch assembly.
77. Remove thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and
seal ring from forward and direct clutch assembly.
SCIA5421E
78. Remove planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle
roller bearings.
SCIA5499E
79. Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of planetary
sun gear sub assembly bushing.
CAUTION:
Measure at different places and take an average. If it is
greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary
sun gear sub assembly.
Standard
Allowable limit
:22.200 - 22.226mm (0.8740 - 0.8750in)
:22.276 (0.8770in)
SCIA4255E
SCIA4256E
80. Remove RR planetary ring gear assembly.
81. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race
from RR planetary ring gear assembly.
SCIA4203E
Revision: August 2007
AT-246
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
82. Remove planetary gear assembly.
83. Remove thrust bearing race from planetary gear assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4204E
D
84. Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of planetary
gear assembly bushing.
CAUTION:
Measure at different places and take an average. If it is
greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary
gear assembly.
E
F
Standard
Allowable limit
:30.056 - 30.082mm (1.1833 - 1.1843in)
:30.132 (1.1863in)
G
SCIA4254E
85. Remove thrust bearing.
H
I
J
SCIA4205E
K
86. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
L
M
N
SCIA4206E
O
87. Remove 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake
discs and 1st and reverse brake plates.
• INSPECTION
- Check that the sliding surface of discs are not worn and burnt.
If necessary, replace them.
CAUTION:
Replace new discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in A/T
fluid.
P
SCIA4207E
Revision: August 2007
AT-247
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
88. Remove FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch
No.2.
SCIA4208E
89. Make sure that the FR planetary ring gear assembly turns freely
counterclockwise and locks clockwise.
SCIA4414E
90. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA4209E
91. Remove return spring.
SCIA4210E
92. While pushing the piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/
cm2) into the oil passage of transaxle case as shown and
remove 1st and reverse brake piston.
SCIA4211E
Revision: August 2007
AT-248
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
93. Remove O-rings from 1st and reverse brake piston.
A
B
AT
SCIA4212E
D
94. Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing race from counter
drive gear sub assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA4213E
95. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
H
I
J
SCIA4214E
K
96. Remove counter drive gear sub assembly.
L
M
N
SCIA4215E
O
97. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case and transaxle housing using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and transaxle
housing.
P
SCIA4216E
Revision: August 2007
AT-249
2008 Quest
DISASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SCIA4217E
98. Remove outer race and adjust shim from transaxle case.
Tool number
: ST30612000 (J-25742-2)
SCIA5360E
99. Remove thrust roller bearing from transaxle housing.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
SCIA5361E
Revision: August 2007
AT-250
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
A
Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake
INFOID:0000000001718105
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA4384E
1.
Return spring
4.
Oil seal
7.
2nd brake sleeve
10. 2nd brake plate
2.
Snap ring
3.
O-ring
5.
Oil pump assembly
6.
2nd brake piston
8.
O-ring
9.
2nd brake flange
11. 2nd brake disc
12. Snap ring
13. 2nd coast brake piston
14. Return spring
15. Thrust washer
16. 2nd coast brake flange
17. 2nd coast brake plate
18. Snap ring
19. 2nd coast brake disc
20. Snap ring
K
L
M
DISASSEMBLY
1.
N
Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.
O
P
SCIA4396E
Revision: August 2007
AT-251
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly.
SCIA4218E
3.
Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA4219E
4.
Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd
coast brake plates.
SCIA4220E
5.
Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a
press.
Tool number
6.
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA5362E
7.
Remove return spring.
SCIA4222E
Revision: August 2007
AT-252
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8.
9.
While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove
2nd coast brake piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake
piston.
Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston.
A
B
AT
SCIA4223E
D
10. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
E
F
G
SCIA4224E
11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake
plates.
H
I
J
SCIA4225E
K
12. Remove return spring.
L
M
N
SCIA4226E
O
13. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake
piston.
P
SCIA4227E
Revision: August 2007
AT-253
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed
air (4kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd
brake piston (With 2nd brake sleeve).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake
sleeve.
15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve.
SCIA4228E
INSPECTION
• Check that the sliding surface of discs and plates is not worn or burnt. If the discs or plates is worn or burnt,
replace it
CAUTION:
Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF.
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Install O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF.
Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve into oil pump
assembly.
SCIA4229E
4.
Install snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly.
SCIA4227E
5.
Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up.
SCIA4226E
Revision: August 2007
AT-254
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates.
A
B
AT
SCIA4225E
D
7.
Install snap ring using suitable tool.
E
F
G
SCIA4224E
8.
Install O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply ATF to O-rings.
9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF.
10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly.
H
I
J
SCIA4230E
K
11. Install return spring.
L
M
N
SCIA4222E
O
12. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a
press.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
P
13. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA5362E
Revision: August 2007
AT-255
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd
coast brake plates.
SCIA4220E
15. Place clutch spring compressor on 2nd coast brake flange, and
compress return spring with a press.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
16. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA5363E
17. Set a dial indicator as shown.
18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage
as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd
brake piston moves smoothly.
Piston stroke
:1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in)
If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another
flange. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes".
SCIA5500E
19. Set a dial indicator as shown.
20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage
as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check
2nd coast brake piston moves smoothly.
Piston stroke
:0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in)
SCIA5501E
21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
SCIA4218E
Revision: August 2007
AT-256
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
22. Install oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush using Tool.
A
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse oil seal.
• Apply ATF to oil seal.
B
AT
SCIA5364E
One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way
Clutch No.1
INFOID:0000000001718106
D
E
COMPONENTS
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA4234E
1.
Thrust washer
2.
One-way clutch outer race sub assembly
4.
Thrust washer
5.
2nd coast brake hub
3.
One-way clutch No.1
DISASSEMBLY
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-257
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove thrust washer from one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
SCIA4235E
2.
3.
Remove 2nd coast brake hub from one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
Remove thrust washer from 2nd coast brake hub.
SCIA4236E
4.
Remove one-way clutch No.1 from one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
SCIA4237E
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install one-way clutch No.1 into the one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not mistake the direction of one-way clutch No.1.
SCIA4238E
Revision: August 2007
AT-258
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Install thrust washer into 2nd coast brake hub.
CAUTION:
Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of
the washer with the hollow of the 2nd coast brake hub.
3. Install 2nd coast brake hub into one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
CAUTION:
While turning the 2nd coast brake hub, slide it into one-way
clutch outer race sub assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4236E
D
4.
Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of the
washer with the hollow of the one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
E
F
G
SCIA4235E
INSPECTION
H
• Hold one-way clutch outer race sub assembly, and check that 2nd
coast brake hub turns freely clockwise and locks counterclockwise.
I
J
SCIA4239E
Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake
K
INFOID:0000000001718107
L
COMPONENTS
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-259
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SCIA5441E
1.
Transaxle case cover
2.
Seal ring
3.
O-ring
4.
Return spring
5.
Snap ring
6.
B5 brake piston
7.
Seal ring
8.
Bearing race
9.
U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly
10. Tube clamp
11. Forward clutch accumulator piston
12. Compression spring
13. Accumulator cover
14. O-ring
15. Seal ring
16. B5 brake cushion plate
17. B5 brake plate
18. B5 brake flange
19. Snap ring
20. B5 brake disc
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove tube clamps.
SCIA5502E
Revision: August 2007
AT-260
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly using suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the U/D clutch apply tube sub
assembly and transaxle case cover.
A
B
AT
SCIA4241E
D
3.
Remove bearing race and seal rings from transaxle case cover.
E
F
G
WCIA0386E
4.
5.
6.
Remove accumulator cover, compression spring and forward
clutch accumulator piston.
Remove O-ring from the accumulator cover.
Remove seal ring from the forward clutch accumulator piston.
H
I
J
SCIA4243E
7.
K
Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
L
M
N
SCIA4244E
8.
O
Remove B5 brake flange, B5 brake discs, B5 brake plates and
B5 brake cushion plate.
P
SCIA4245E
Revision: August 2007
AT-261
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9.
Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a
press.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation.
10. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA5365E
11. Remove return spring.
SCIA4247E
12. While pushing B5 brake piston by hand, apply compressed air
(4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove B5 brake
piston.
SCIA4248E
13. Remove O-rings from B5 brake piston.
14. Remove seal ring from transaxle case cover.
SCIA4249E
INSPECTION
• Check that the sliding surface of discs and plates are not worn or burnt. If the discs or plates are worn or
burnt, replace them.
CAUTION:
Soak new clutch discs at least 2 hours in ATF.
ASSEMBLY
Revision: August 2007
AT-262
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Install seal ring in transaxle case cover.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal ring.
• Apply ATF to seal ring.
2. Install O-rings in B5 brake piston.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply ATF to O-rings.
3. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case cover with ATF.
4. Press B5 brake piston into the transaxle case cover.
A
B
AT
SCIA4249E
D
5.
Place return spring on B5 brake piston.
E
F
G
SCIA4247E
6.
Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a
press.
Tool number
7.
H
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
I
CAUTION:
Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation.
Install snap ring using suitable tool.
J
SCIA5365E
8.
9.
Install B5 brake cushion plate.
CAUTION:
Be sure direction of B5 brake cushion plate.
Install B5 brake flange, B5 brake plates and B5 brake discs as
shown.
K
L
M
N
SCIA4245E
O
10. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
P
SCIA4244E
Revision: August 2007
AT-263
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11. Install O-ring in accumulator cover.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
12. Install seal ring in forward clutch accumulator piston.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal ring.
• Apply ATF to seal ring.
13. Install forward clutch accumulator piston, compression spring
and accumulator cover in transaxle case cover.
14. Tighten accumulator cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer
to "COMPONENTS".
SCIA4243E
15. Install seal rings and bearing race in transaxle case cover.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal rings.
• Apply ATF to seal rings.
• Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
• Assemble the selected bearing race in the correct order.
Refer to AT-268.
WCIA0386E
16. Install the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly using suitable
tool.
SCIA4252E
17. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
SCIA5502E
Revision: August 2007
AT-264
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
18. Set a dial indicator as shown.
A
19. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage
as shown, measure the B5 brake piston stroke and check the B5
brake piston moves smoothly.
B
Piston stroke
:2.34 - 2.70mm (0.0921 - 0.1063in)
If the B5 brake piston stroke is out standards, select another
flange. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes".
AT
SCIA5503E
D
Differential Gear Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718108
COMPONENTS
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA4407E
1.
O-ring
2.
Tapered roller bearing
4.
Tapered roller bearing
5.
O-ring
3.
K
Differential gear assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1.
L
Remove O-rings from differential gear assembly.
M
N
O
SCIA4408E
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-265
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove tapered roller bearings using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
SCIA5366E
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install tapered roller bearings in differential gear assembly using
Tools.
Tool numbers
: KV38100500 ( — )
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse tapered roller bearings.
SCIA5368E
Revision: August 2007
AT-266
2008 Quest
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Install O-rings in differential gear assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply ATF to O-rings.
A
B
AT
SCIA4408E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-267
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
1.
INFOID:0000000001718109
Install the new differential side oil seal into transaxle case using
Tool.
Tool number
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• Apply ATF to differential side oil seal.
SCIA5369E
Distance
: 3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.118 - 0.157 in)
SCIA4473E
2.
Install counter drive gear sub assembly.
SCIA4215E
3.
Install snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA4214E
Revision: August 2007
AT-268
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Install new O-rings in 1st and reverse brake piston.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply ATF to O-rings.
5. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF.
6. Install 1st and reverse brake piston in transaxle case.
A
B
AT
SCIA4212E
D
7.
Put return spring on 1st and reverse brake piston.
E
F
G
SCIA4210E
8.
While compressing the return spring by hand, install the snap
ring into groove using suitable tool.
H
I
J
SCIA4209E
9.
Put thrust bearing race and thrust bearing on counter drive gear
sub assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing and thrust bearing
race.
K
L
M
N
SCIA4213E
O
10. Install FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch No.
2.
P
SCIA4208E
Revision: August 2007
AT-269
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11. Install 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake
discs and 1st and reverse brake plates.
SCIA4207E
12. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
SCIA4206E
13. Set a dial indicator as shown.
14. Applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) and measure the 1st and
reverse brake piston stroke.
Piston stroke
: 1.39 - 2.21 mm (0.0547 - 0.0870 in)
In a case that is out of reference, check the following items:
• Oil pressure leak
• Damage of O-ring
• Wear damage of discs
SCIA4258E
15. Install thrust bearing.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing.
SCIA4205E
16. Install planetary gear assembly.
17. Install thrust bearing race in planetary gear assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing race.
SCIA4204E
Revision: August 2007
AT-270
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
18. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in RR
planetary ring gear assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and
thrust bearing race.
19. Install RR planetary ring gear assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4203E
20. Install planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller
bearings.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearings.
D
E
F
G
SCIA5499E
21. Install forward and direct clutch assembly.
H
22. Install thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and new
seal ring in forward and direct clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
• Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and
thrust bearing race.
• Apply ATF to seal ring.
• Do not reuse seal ring.
I
J
K
SCIA5412E
L
23. Check the distance of “A”.
“A”
: 50.850 - 51.825 mm (2.0020 - 2.0404 in)
M
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust with in standards
again.
N
SCIA4259E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-271
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
24. Install transaxle lube apply tube using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend and damage transaxle lube apply
tube.
SCIA4260E
25. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225,
"Component".
SCIA4199E
26. Install new governor apply gaskets in transaxle case.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse governor apply gaskets.
• Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets.
SCIA4198E
27. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case.
SCIA4197E
28. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to
AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
Use old seal bolts for re-installing transaxle case cover
when checking and adjusting the end play.
SCIA4194E
Revision: August 2007
AT-272
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
8
B
45 (1.77)
2
C
48 (1.89)
2
D*
—
1
B
AT
*:Stud bolt
SCIA5413E
29. Tighten anchor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
D
E
F
G
SCIA4193E
H
30. Install new O-ring in U/D brake piston assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
31. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF.
32. Install compression spring and U/D brake piston assembly.
I
J
SCIA4192E
33. Install new O-rings in U/D brake damper assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply ATF to O-rings.
34. Install U/D brake damper assembly.
K
L
M
N
SCIA4191E
O
35. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
If the snap ring is deformed, replace it.
P
SCIA4190E
Revision: August 2007
AT-273
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
36. Install thrust needle roller bearing, adjust shim and thrust bearing race in U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to adjust shim, thrust needle roller
bearing and thrust bearing race.
37. Install U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
SCIA5414E
38. Install U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing
races.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing races.
SCIA5505E
39. Install U/D brake band assembly.
SCIA4187E
40. Install U/D clutch assembly.
SCIA4186E
41. Measure the U/D brake piston stroke by applying and releasing
the compressed air (4Kg/cm2) as shown.
CAUTION:
Measure U/D brake piston stroke after assembling U/D
clutch assembly.
Piston Stroke
: 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661 in)
SCIA4263E
Revision: August 2007
AT-274
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
AT
SCIA4625E
D
42. If the piston stroke is out of standards, select another U/D brake
piston. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes".
E
F
G
SCIA4264E
Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001718110
H
ADJUST PRELOAD OF TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
1.
Install adjust shim and outer race in transaxle case using Tools.
I
Tool numbers
: KV40100621 (J-25273)
: ST30022000 ( — )
J
K
SCIA5370E
2.
3.
L
Install differential gear assembly in transaxle case.
Install transaxle housing into transaxle case.
M
N
O
SCIA4265E
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-275
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
Use old seal bolts for re-installing transaxle housing when
checking and adjusting preload.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
13
B
35 (1.38)
2
C
45 (1.77)
1
D*
—
1
SCIA4267E
*:Torx bolt
SCIA5495E
5.
Measure turning torque of differential gear assembly using
Tools.
Tool numbers
6.
: KV40102500 (J-28815)
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Turn differential gear assembly in both directions several times
to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque
(New bearing)
: 0.7 - 1.2 N·m
(0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)
SCIA5371E
If the preload is not within specification, remove differential gear assembly from transaxle case. Re-select
adjust shim. Refer to AT-296, "Final Drive".
Assembly (2)
1.
2.
3.
INFOID:0000000001718111
Remove transaxle housing and differential gear assembly from transaxle case.
Install new seal rings in U/D gear assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal rings.
• Apply ATF to seal rings.
Install U/D gear assembly.
SCIA4185E
Revision: August 2007
AT-276
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in U/D
gear assembly.
a. Perform the following procedure for adjustment.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and
thrust bearing race.
A
B
AT
SCIA5415E
D
b.
Make sure that measurement “E” is within the specifications.
Specification E
: 1.269 - 1.645 mm (0.0500 - 0.0648 in)
E
NOTE:
“E” is the height between the edge of transaxle case and the
roller part of thrust needle roller bearing.
F
G
SCIA5452E
H
I
J
SCIA5459E
c.
d.
If measurement “E” is outside the specifications, replace “T” with
one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch,
Gear and Brakes".
CAUTION:
When adjusting “T”, use “S” of thickness 0.81mm (0.032in).
If all of “T” do not fit “E” within the specifications, replace “S” with
one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch,
Gear and Brakes".
CAUTION:
When adjusting “S”, use “T” of thickness 0.80mm (0.031in).
K
L
M
N
O
P
SCIA5488E
Revision: August 2007
AT-277
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
e. Make sure that measurement “E” is within the specifications.
SCIA5452E
5.
Install new manual valve oil seal into transaxle case until it is
flush using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse manual valve oil seal.
• Apply ATF to manual valve oil seal.
SCIA5486E
6.
7.
Install spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No. 2 in transaxle
case.
Tighten spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No. 2 torx bolt to
specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
SCIA4182E
8.
Install parking lockpin sub assembly.
SCIA4181E
9.
Install parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl.
WCIA0420E
Revision: August 2007
AT-278
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Install parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No. 1.
A
B
AT
SCIA4179E
D
11. Install manual detent spring sub assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA4178E
12. Temporarily tighten the bolts.
H
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
16.7 (0.657)
1
B
14.0 (0.551)
1
I
J
SCIA4177E
K
13. Install parking lock rod sub assembly.
L
M
N
SCIA4176E
O
14. Install manual valve lever sub assembly connect parking lock
rod sub assembly to it.
P
SCIA4175E
Revision: August 2007
AT-279
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
15. Connect manual detent spring sub assembly to manual valve
lever sub assembly using suitable tool.
SCIA4174E
16. Tighten manual detent spring sub assembly bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
SCIA4550E
17. Install U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage U/D brake apply tube sub assembly.
SCIA4270E
18. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225,
"Component".
SCIA4171E
19. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle case.
20. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component".
SCIA4170E
Revision: August 2007
AT-280
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
21. Install oil strainer sub assembly in transaxle case.
22. Tighten oil strainer sub assembly bolt to specified torque. Refer
to AT-225, "Component".
A
B
AT
SCIA4169E
D
23. Install differential gear assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA4168E
24. Drive new differential side oil seal into transaxle housing using
Tool.
Tool number
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
Distance
: 14.8 - 15.8 mm (0.583 - 0.622 in)
H
I
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• Apply ATF to differential side oil seal.
J
SCIA5372E
K
L
M
N
SCIA4474E
25. Install new thrust roller bearing in transaxle housing using Tool.
Tool number
O
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse thrust roller bearing.
P
SCIA5373E
Revision: August 2007
AT-281
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
26. Install oil cleaner magnets on oil reservoir plate.
SCIA4167E
27. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle housing.
28. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component".
SCIA4166E
29. install differential gear lube apply tube using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube
apply tube.
SCIA4272E
30. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225,
"Component".
SCIA4164E
31. Install new governor apply gasket.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse governor apply gasket.
• Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gasket.
32. Install new seal ring.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal ring.
• Apply ATF to seal ring.
SCIA4163E
Revision: August 2007
AT-282
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
33. Apply silicone RTV to transaxle housing as shown. Refer to GI42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant".
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle housing and transaxle case.
A
B
AT
SCIA5506E
34. Install transaxle housing in transaxle case.
35. Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4267E
H
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
13
B
35 (1.38)
2
C
45 (1.77)
1
D*
—
1
I
J
K
*:Torx bolt
SCIA5495E
L
36. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush using
Tool.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
M
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse oil seal.
• Apply ATF to oil seal.
N
SCIA5364E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-283
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
37. Install thrust washer and one- way clutch outer race sub assembly in oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
SCIA4274E
38. Check the distance of “B”.
“B”
: 51.09 - 51.71 mm (2.0114 - 2.0358 in)
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards
again.
SCIA4275E
39. Place oil pump assembly through the input shaft in horizontal
position, and align the bolt holes of the oil pump assembly with
transaxle case. Lightly press oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
SCIA4276E
40. Tighten oil pump assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component".
SCIA4156E
SCIA4157E
Revision: August 2007
AT-284
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
41. Set a dial indicator as shown, move the input shaft and measure
the end play.
End play
A
: 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.0224 in)
B
AT
SCIA4277E
D
If the end play is out of standards, select another thrust bearing
race. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes".
E
F
G
SCIA5417E
H
42. Remove transaxle case cover.
43. Apply silicone RTV to transaxle case cover as shown. Refer to
GI-42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant".
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle case cover and transaxle.
I
J
K
SCIA5507E
44. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case.
L
M
N
SCIA4197E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-285
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
45. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to
AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
SCIA4194E
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
8
B
45 (1.77)
2
C
48 (1.89)
2
D*
—
1
*:Stud bolt
SCIA5413E
46. Install new governor apply gaskets.
CAUTION:
• Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets.
• Do not reuse governor apply gaskets.
SCIA4154E
47. Install transmission wire.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to break the solenoid connector and A/T
fluid temperature sensor.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA4155E
48. While holding control valve assembly, connect the parking lock
rod sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly.
NOTE:
Shift position is “N”.
SCIA4153E
Revision: August 2007
AT-286
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
49. Tighten control valve assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer
to AT-225, "Component".
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
55 (2.17)
2
B
50 (1.97)
2
C
16 (0.63)
2
A
B
AT
SCIA4152E
50. Install new suction cover and suction cover gasket in control
valve assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse suction cover gasket.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4149E
51. Tighten suction cover gasket and suction cover bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
H
I
J
SCIA4150E
52. Install sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor in control
valve assembly.
K
L
M
N
SCIA4147E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-287
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
53. Tighten sensor clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225,
"Component".
SCIA4148E
54. Connect the solenoid connectors.
SCIA4146E
55. Apply silicone RTV to side cover as shown. Refer to GI-42,
"Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant".
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from side
cover and transaxle case.
SCIA5508E
56. Install side cover in transaxle case.
SCIA4143E
Revision: August 2007
AT-288
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
57. Tighten new side cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to
AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
A
B
AT
SCIA4144E
D
58. Install new O-rings in ATF cooler assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply ATF to O-rings.
59. Install ATF cooler assembly, washer and new spring washer.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse spring washer.
60. Tighten hexagon bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225,
"Component".
E
F
G
SCIA4142E
61. Install PNP switch to manual valve lever sub assembly.
62. Temporarily tighten the bolts.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
20 (0.79)
1
B
33 (1.30)
1
H
I
J
SCIA4141E
63. Install new washer plate and new lock washer.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse washer plate and lock washer.
64. Tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
K
L
M
N
SCIA4140E
O
65. Install Tool.
Tool number
: KV991J0060 (J-45404)
P
66. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base
line on PNP switch body.
SCIA5374E
Revision: August 2007
AT-289
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
67. Tighten PNP switch torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component".
SCIA4434E
68. Bend the lock washer using suitable tool.
SCIA4139E
69. Install range lever in manual valve lever sub assembly.
70. Tighten range lever nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-225,
"Component".
SCIA4138E
71. Install turbine revolution sensor in transaxle case.
72. Tighten new turbine revolution sensor bolt to specified torque.
Refer to AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal bolt.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA4137E
73. Install revolution sensor in transaxle case.
74. Tighten new revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to
AT-225, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse seal bolt.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA4136E
Revision: August 2007
AT-290
2008 Quest
ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
75. Install new O-ring in A/T fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
76. Install A/T fluid charging pipe in transaxle housing.
77. Install fluid cooler tube with new copper washers.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse copper washer.
78. Tighten fluid cooler tube union to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component".
79. Install air breather hose.
80. Install A/T fluid level gauge.
A
B
AT
SCIA4135E
81. Install drain plug and new gasket in transaxle housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
82. Tighten drain plug to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component".
83. Install torque converter.
D
E
F
G
H
I
SCIA4134E
84. Check the distance of “C”.
“C”
J
: 14.0 mm (0.551 in)
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards
again.
K
L
SCIA4279E
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-291
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification
INFOID:0000000001718112
Engine
VQ35DE
Automatic transaxle model
RE5F22A
Automatic transaxle model code number
CK710
Stall torque ratio
1.8: 1
Transaxle gear ratio
1st
4.657
2nd
3.032
3rd
1.982
4th
1.341
5th
1.018
Reverse
5.114
Final drive
2.269
Recommended fluid
Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *
Fluid capacity
7.4
(7-7/8 US qt, 6-1/2 Imp qt)
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.
• Using automatic transaxle fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF will deteriorate in driveability and automatic transaxle durability, and may damage the automatic transaxle, which is not covered by the warranty.
*: Refer to MA-11.
Shift Schedule
INFOID:0000000001718113
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS
Accelerator angle
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
D1→D2
D2→D3
D3→D4
D4→D5
D5→D4
D4→D3
D3→D2
D2→D1
100 %
67
(42)
105
(65)
170
(106)
241
(150)
230
(143)
160
(99)
92
(57)
45
(28)
90 %
67
(42)
105
(65)
170
(106)
241
(150)
230
(143)
160
(99)
92
(57)
45
(28)
80 %
65
(40)
100
(62)
152
(94)
227
(141)
178
(111)
142
(88)
86
(53)
45
(28)
70 %
53
(33)
80
(50)
125
(78)
185
(115)
147
(91)
137
(85)
68
(42)
38
(24)
60 %
46
(29)
71
(44)
106
(66)
156
(97)
108
(67)
78
(48)
46
(29)
22
(14)
50 %
43
(27)
67
(42)
97
(60)
145
(90)
98
(61)
68
(42)
40
(25)
18
(11)
40 %
38
(24)
60
(37)
89
(55)
130
(81)
89
(55)
56
(35)
30
(19)
13
(8)
30 %
33
(21)
50
(31)
70
(43)
108
(67)
68
(42)
45
(28)
25
(16)
12
(7)
20 %
23
(14)
35
(22)
49
(30)
77
(48)
49
(30)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
10 %
17
(11)
29
(18)
39
(24)
58
(36)
44
(27)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP
Revision: August 2007
AT-292
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
A
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
50 %
190 (118)
137 (85)
15%
101 (63)
72 (45)
0-8%
73 (45)
70 (43)
B
• Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
AT
• Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
• Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
D
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP
Accelerator angle
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Gear position
0 - 10 %
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
45 (28)
42 (26)
5th
58 (36)
55 (34)
E
F
• Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
• Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
• Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
G
Stall Speed
INFOID:0000000001718114
H
Stall speed
2,430 - 2,730 rpm
Line Pressure
INFOID:0000000001718115
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Engine speed
J
D, L positions
R position
At idle speed
333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57)
500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88)
At stall speed
1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202)
1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287)
Time Lag
I
K
INFOID:0000000001718116
L
Selector lever
Time
N to D position
Less than 0.7 sec.
N to R position
Less than 1.2 sec.
Shift Solenoid Valves
Shift position
M
INFOID:0000000001718117
N
Shift solenoid valve
Remarks
A
B
C
D
E
P
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
PARK POSITION
R
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
REVERSE POSITION
N
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
NEUTRAL POSITION
Revision: August 2007
AT-293
2008 Quest
O
P
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Shift solenoid valve
Shift position
Remarks
A
B
C
D
E
1st
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
1⇔2
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
2nd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
2⇔3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
3rd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
3⇔4
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
4th
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
4⇔5
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
5th
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
1st
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
1⇔2
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
2nd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
2⇔3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
3rd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
D
L
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3
NOTE:
When shifting D to L position or lever switch sets in “ON” position (indicated O/D OFF indicator lamp), down shift permission control is
activated. Refer to AT-33, "Shift Control".
Solenoid Valves
Solenoid valves
INFOID:0000000001718118
Connector (Color)
Terminal
Shift solenoid valve A
F30 (BR)
2
Shift solenoid valve B
F62(GR)
1
Shift solenoid valve C
Resistance (Approx.)
11 - 16 Ω
F62(GR)
4
Shift solenoid valve D
F30 (BR)
1
Shift solenoid valve E
F30 (BR)
5
Pressure control solenoid valve A
F62(GR)
3-6
F30 (BR)
3-7
F62(GR)
2-5
Pressure control solenoid valve B
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
Pressure control solenoid valve C
Specified resistance at 20°C (68°F).
Clutch, Gear and Brakes
INFOID:0000000001718119
2ND BRAKE
Number of 2nd brake plates
4
Number of 2nd brake discs
4
Number of 2nd brake flange
Piston stroke
1
mm (in)
1.10 - 1.50 (0.0433 - 0.0591)
Thickness
mm (in)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
Thickness of 2nd brake flanges
Part number*
31537 8Y011
31537 8Y012
31537 8Y013
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
2ND COAST BRAKE
Revision: August 2007
AT-294
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Number of 2nd coast brake plates
3
Number of 2nd coast brake discs
3
Number of 2nd coast brake flange
1
Piston stroke mm (in)
A
B
0.76 - 1.44 (0.0299 - 0.0567)
B5 BRAKE
AT
Number of B5 brake plates
6
Number of B5 brake discs
6
Number of B5 brake flange
1
Number of B5 brake cushion plate
1
Piston stroke
mm (in)
D
2.34 - 2.70 (0.0921 - 0.1063)
E
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
5.0 (0.197)
5.1 (0.202)
5.2 (0.205)
5.3 (0.209)
5.5 (0.217)
31667 8Y016
31667 8Y017
31667 8Y018
31667 8Y019
31667 8Y020
Thickness of B5 brake flanges
F
G
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE
H
Number of 1st and reverse brake plates
4
Number of 1st and reverse brake discs
5
Number of 1st and reverse brake flanges
2
Piston stroke mm (in)
I
1.39 - 2.21 (0.0547 - 0.0870)
FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
J
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
0.81 (0.0319)
0.90 (0.0350)
1.00 (0.0400)
1.10 (0.0430)
1.20 (0.0470)
1.30 (0.0510)
1.40 (0.0550)
1.50 (0.0590)
31435 8Y060
31435 8Y061
31435 8Y062
31435 8Y063
31435 8Y064
31435 8Y065
31435 8Y066
31435 8Y067
Thickness of thrust washer races
End play
mm (in)
K
L
M
0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.0224)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
N
U/D BRAKE
Piston type
Mark
Piston length mm (in)
Part number*
A
—
63.7 (2.508)
31615 8Y005
B
1
64.2 (2.528)
31615 8Y004
C
2
64.7 (2.547)
31615 8Y003
D
3
65.2 (2.567)
31615 8Y002
E
4
65.7 (2.587)
31615 8Y001
Piston stroke mm (in)
O
P
5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
U/D RR PLANETARY RING GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY
Revision: August 2007
AT-295
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Thickness
mm (in)
31435 8Y100
31435 8Y101
31435 8Y102
31435 8Y103
31435 8Y104
31435 8Y105
31435 8Y106
31435 8Y107
31435 8Y108
0.81 (0.0319)
0.90 (0.0350)
1.00 (0.0400)
1.10 (0.0430)
1.20 (0.0470)
1.30 (0.0510)
1.40 (0.0550)
1.50 (0.0590)
1.60 (0.0630)
Thickness of adjust shims
Part number*
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
U/D GEAR ASSEMBLY
Thickness
mm (in)
31435 8Y021
31435 8Y068
31435 8Y069
31435 8Y070
31435 8Y071
31435 8Y072
31435 8Y073
31435 8Y074
0.80 (0.0310)
0.90 (0.0350)
1.00 (0.0400)
1.10 (0.0430)
1.20 (0.0470)
1.30 (0.0510)
1.40 (0.0550)
1.50 (0.0590)
Thickness of thrust washer races
Part number*
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
PLANETARY SUN GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY
Inner diameter of planetary sun
gear sub assembly bushing mm
(in)
Standard
22.200 - 22.226 (0.8740 - 0.8750)
Allowable limit
22.276 (0.8770)
PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
Inner diameter of planetary
gear assembly bushing mm (in)
Standard
30.056 - 30.082 (1.1833 - 1.1843)
Allowable limit
30.132 (1.1863)
Final Drive
INFOID:0000000001718120
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS
Thickness
mm (in)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.05 (0.0413)
1.10 (0.0433)
1.15 (0.0453)
1.20 (0.0472)
1.25 (0.0492)
1.30 (0.0512)
1.33 (0.0524)
1.36 (0.0535)
1.39 (0.0547)
1.42 (0.0559)
1.45 (0.0571)
Part number*
Thickness
mm (in)
1.48 (0.0583)
1.51 (0.0594)
1.54 (0.0606)
1.57 (0.0618)
1.60 (0.0630)
1.65 (0.0650)
1.70 (0.0669)
1.75 (0.0689)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.85 (0.0728)
1.90 (0.0748)
31438 8Y001
31438 8Y002
31438 8Y003
31438 8Y004
31438 8Y005
31438 8Y006
31438 8Y007
31438 8Y008
31438 8Y009
31438 8Y010
31438 8Y011
31438 8Y012
Part number*
31438 8Y013
31438 8Y014
31438 8Y015
31438 8Y016
31438 8Y017
31438 8Y018
31438 8Y019
31438 8Y020
31438 8Y021
31438 8Y022
31438 8Y023
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
TURNING TORQUE
Turning torque of final drive assembly
Revision: August 2007
0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)
AT-296
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
INFOID:0000000001718121
A
Condition
ATF temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
0.31 kΩ
Turbine Revolution Sensor
B
AT
INFOID:0000000001718122
D
Condition
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body.
Signal
Voltage* (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
*: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance.
E
F
Revolution Sensor
INFOID:0000000001718123
Condition
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body.
Signal
Voltage* (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
G
H
*: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AT-297
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
ATC
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...... 3
Contaminated Refrigerant ......................................... 3
General Refrigerant Precaution ................................ 4
Precaution for Leak Detection Dye ........................... 4
A/C Identification Label ............................................. 4
Precaution for Refrigerant Connection ...................... 4
Precaution for Service of Compressor ...................... 8
Precaution for Service Equipment ............................. 9
PREPARATION ..................................................11
Special Service Tool ............................................... 11
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment.... 11
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 13
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..............................15
Refrigerant Cycle .................................................... 15
Refrigerant System Protection ................................ 15
Component Part Location ....................................... 16
OIL ......................................................................19
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor ........... 19
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL .........................21
Description .............................................................. 21
Operation ................................................................ 21
Description of Control System ................................. 22
Control Operation .................................................... 23
Discharge Air Flow .................................................. 25
System Description ................................................. 26
CAN Communication System Description ............... 27
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................31
Schematic ................................................................35
Wiring Diagram - A/C,A - .........................................36
Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value ....44
A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function .......................45
Operational Check (Front) .......................................47
Operational Check (Rear) ........................................48
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air
Control .....................................................................49
Mode Door Motor Circuit .........................................51
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit .......................................57
Intake Door Motor Circuit .........................................69
Defroster Door Motor Circuit ....................................74
Front Blower Motor Circuit .......................................76
Rear Blower Motor Circuit .......................................84
Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit ......................93
Magnet Clutch Circuit ..............................................98
Insufficient Cooling ................................................ 102
Insufficient Heating ................................................ 109
Heater Pump Circuit .............................................. 110
Noise ..................................................................... 113
Self-Diagnosis ....................................................... 114
Memory Function ................................................... 116
Ambient Sensor Circuit .......................................... 117
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit ........................................ 119
Optical Sensor Circuit ............................................ 122
Intake Sensor Circuit ............................................. 125
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
CONTROL UNIT .............................................. 127
Removal and Installation ....................................... 127
O
AMBIENT SENSOR ........................................ 129
Removal and Installation ....................................... 129
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR .................................... 130
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................28
Removal and Installation ....................................... 130
CONSULT-III Function (HVAC) ............................... 28
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 29
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 30
OPTICAL SENSOR ......................................... 131
Revision: August 2007
F
Removal and Installation ....................................... 131
INTAKE SENSOR ........................................... 132
ATC-1
2008 Quest
P
Removal and Installation .......................................132
DUCTS AND GRILLES .................................... 155
BLOWER MOTOR ........................................... 134
Component ........................................................... 155
Removal and Installation ....................................... 158
Component ............................................................134
Removal and Installation .......................................135
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ................................ 136
Removal and Installation .......................................136
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ....... 137
Component ............................................................137
Removal and Installation .......................................138
HEATER CORE ............................................... 140
Component ............................................................140
Removal and Installation .......................................141
HEATER PUMP ............................................... 143
Removal and Installation .......................................143
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ......................... 144
Removal and Installation .......................................144
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR .................................. 145
Component ............................................................145
Removal and Installation .......................................146
MODE DOOR MOTOR .................................... 148
Removal and Installation .......................................148
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR .................................. 150
Component ............................................................150
Removal and Installation .......................................151
REFRIGERANT LINES ..................................... 160
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ................ 160
Component ........................................................... 162
Removal and Installation for Compressor ............. 164
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch . 165
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 168
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 168
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 169
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure
Pipe ....................................................................... 169
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor ................................................................... 173
Removal and Installation for Condenser ............... 173
Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator ..... 175
Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator ...... 177
Removal and Installation for Front Expansion
Valve ..................................................................... 178
Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion
Valve ..................................................................... 178
Checking of Refrigerant Leaks .............................. 179
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Dye Leak Detector ................................................ 179
Dye Injection ......................................................... 179
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 180
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL ................... 153
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 183
Component ............................................................153
Removal and Installation .......................................154
Service Data and Specification (SDS) .................. 183
Revision: August 2007
ATC-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001718831
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
INFOID:0000000001718832
C
D
E
F
G
H
WARNING:
I
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". To
determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier.
ATC
• Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If
oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
K
handling precautions must be observed:
- When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
- When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just L
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible
to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without
M
proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
- Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or SAE J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) N
recovery equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming
service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
O
- Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
Contaminated Refrigerant
INFOID:0000000001718833
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
• Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
• Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant
supply.
• Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-3
2008 Quest
P
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does
not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition,
replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
• If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718834
WARNING:
• Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
• Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
• Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation.
• Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have
been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or
property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Precaution for Leak Detection Dye
INFOID:0000000001718835
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet
(UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
• Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
• The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J41995).
• For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions prior to performing work.
• A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should
only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
• Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future
service.
• Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of
time cannot be removed.
• Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in
HFC-134A (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs.
A/C Identification Label
INFOID:0000000001718836
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have an identification label on the underside of hood.
Precaution for Refrigerant Connection
INFOID:0000000001718837
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
• Expansion valve to cooling unit
• Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit)
Revision: August 2007
ATC-4
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
A
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
• The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This reduces
the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the Oring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics.
• The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SHA815E
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-5
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
WJIA1967E
1.
High-pressure service valve
2.
Low-pressure service valve
3.
High-pressure pipe
4.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
5.
Low-pressure flexible hose
6.
High-pressure flexible hose
7.
Shaft seal
8.
Condenser
9.
Liquid tank
10. Pressure relief valve
11. Compressor
12. High/low pressure pipe (production)
13. High/low pressure pipe - upper
(service)
14
15
Revision: August 2007
High/low pressure pipe - lower
(service)
ATC-6
Expansion valve (front)
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear A/C
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
LJIA0016E
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or
around the connection.
K
L
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
M
Connection type
O-ring
size
Part number*
D
New
8
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
Former
10
J2476 89956
9.25 (0.3642)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.091)
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
92195 AH300
21.8 (0.858)
2.4 (0.094)
New
Former
New
Former
New
SHA814E
Former
New
12
16
19
24
mm (in)
W mm (in)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
WARNING:
Revision: August 2007
ATC-7
2008 Quest
N
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low pressure chamber.
• When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
• After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
• When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Always replace used O-rings.
• When connecting tube, apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply
oil to threaded portion.
• O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
• When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
• Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
• After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
WJIA1774E
1.
Plug
2.
O-ring
A.
Torque wrench
B.
Apply oil
C.
Do not apply oil to threads
D.
NG (no good)
E.
OK (okay)
F.
Inflated portion
Precaution for Service of Compressor
INFOID:0000000001718838
• Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
• When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor”
exactly. Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor".
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated with oil, wipe
it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
• After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both
directions. This will equally distribute oil inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed,
let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour.
• After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal
operation. Refer to ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch"
Revision: August 2007
ATC-8
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Precaution for Service Equipment
INFOID:0000000001718839
A
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any
refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
B
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
C
VACUUM PUMP
The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the
specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of
the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose.
This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
• Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual
shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose
from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
D
E
F
G
H
I
RHA270D
ATC
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-134a or
134a). Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified oil.
K
L
M
SHA533D
N
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite the manifold gauge.
O
P
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS
Revision: August 2007
ATC-9
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. If an improper
connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified
oils have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant
flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME.
RHA274D
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-10
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718840
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-38873-A)
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
B
C
D
E
LHA171
Removing pulley
KV99233130
(J-29884)
Pulley puller
F
G
LHA172
H
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment
INFOID:0000000003260970
Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified oil with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its oil.
I
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/oil.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or oil) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed
ATC
use of the refrigerants/oil.
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used refrigerant/oil contamination will occur
and compressor failure will result.
K
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HFC-134a (R-134a)
( — )
Refrigerant
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
• large container 1/2”-16 ACME
L
M
N
S-NT196
Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG),
type S
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a)
swash plate compressors (NISSAN
only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp
fl oz)
—
( — )
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
S-NT197
Revision: August 2007
ATC-11
2008 Quest
O
P
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991J0130
(ACR2005-NI)
ACR5 A/C Service Center
Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
WJIA0293E
Checking for refrigerant leaks
(Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal)
—
(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector
AHA281A
Leak detection dye
(Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal)
—
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447)
Quantity 24, 1/4 ounce bottles of
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
ZHA200H
Checking for refrigerant leaks when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal)
—
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak detector
SHA438F
Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a)
PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after
charging system with dye.)
—
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
SHA439F
For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent
leak detection dye into A/C system.
—
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector
Use with (J-41447) 1/4 ounce bottles
SHA440F
Revision: August 2007
ATC-12
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills.
A
B
C
SHA441F
Identification:
• The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size: Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
—
(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses
and couplers)
D
E
F
G
RJIA0196E
Hose colors:
• Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
• High side hose: Red with black stripe
• Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
• 1/2”-16 ACME
Service hoses:
• (J-39500-72B)
High side hose
• (J-39500-72R)
Low side hose
• (J-39500-72Y)
Utility hose
H
I
S-NT201
Hose fitting to service hose:
• M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.
Service couplers:
• (J-39500-20A)
High side coupler
• (J-39500-24A)
Low side coupler
ATC
K
L
S-NT202
For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size - thread size:
• 1/2” - 16 ACME
—
(J-39699)
Refrigerant weight scale
M
N
S-NT200
Capacity:
• Air displacement: 4 CFM
• Micron rating: 20 microns
• Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size: Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
—
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)
S-NT203
Commercial Service Tool
Revision: August 2007
INFOID:0000000001718842
ATC-13
2008 Quest
O
P
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
Tool name
Description
(J-41810-NI)
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a)
For checking refrigerant purity and
system contamination
RJIA0197E
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
(J-44614)
Clutch disc holding tool
Clutch disc holding tool
WHA230
Revision: August 2007
ATC-14
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A
Refrigerant Cycle
INFOID:0000000001718843
Refrigerant flow
B
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the front and rear evaporators, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the
evaporator coils are controlled by a front and rear externally equalized expansion valves, located inside the
front and rear evaporator cases.
Refrigerant System Protection
C
INFOID:0000000001718844
D
Refrigerant pressure sensor
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM.
The ECM de-energizes the A/C relay to disengage the magnetic compressor clutch when pressure on the high
pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2, 398 psi), or below
about 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2, 17.4 psi).
E
F
Pressure Relief Valve
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor.
When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 2,990 kPa (30.5 kg/
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-15
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
cm2, 433.6 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
WJIA1342E
Component Part Location
INFOID:0000000001718845
FRONT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
ATC-16
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA2219E
1.
Defroster nozzle (part of the
instrument panel)
2.
Fresh air duct
3.
P
Defroster duct
4.
RH side demister duct
5.
RH side demister duct extension
6.
LH side demister duct extension
7.
LH side demister duct
8.
RH ventilator duct
9.
Center ventilator duct
10. LH ventilator duct
11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly
13. Floor junction duct extension
14. Floor junction duct
15. Floor distribution duct
⇐
16. Floor duct
Revision: August 2007
12. Floor connector duct
ATC-17
Front
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
LJIA0086E
1. Rear overhead duct
2.
Rear heat duct
3.
Rear heater and cooling unit assembly
4. Clips
Revision: August 2007
ATC-18
2008 Quest
OIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL
A
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
INFOID:0000000001718846
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when
replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount.
If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
• Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
• Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
Oil
B
C
D
Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation.
Start the engine and set the following test conditions:
• Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
• A/C switch: On
• Blower fan speed: Maximum position
• Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
• Intake position: Recirculation (
)
• Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes.
Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table.
E
F
G
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
H
Amount of Oil to be Added
I
Oil to be added to system
Part replaced
m
Amount of oil
(US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
Remarks
ATC
Front evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
Rear evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not replaced.
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *1
In case of refrigerant leak
—
K
L
*1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of oil is needed.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-19
2008 Quest
OIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA1716E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.
New compressor
2.
Old compressor
3.
Recovery/recycling equipment
4.
Measuring cup X
5.
Measuring cup Y
6.
New oil
A.
Drain oil from the new compressor
into clean container
B.
Record amount of oil recovered
C.
Add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz,
0.2 Imp fl oz) of new oil when replacing
liquid tank
D.
Install new oil equal to recorded
amounts in measuring cups X plus Y
Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the
recovery/recycling equipment.
Drain the oil from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of
oil drained.
Drain the oil from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container.
Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this oil to
“new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to “new”
compressor through the suction port opening.
If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this
time.
CAUTION:
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-20
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001718847
The front air control provides automatic regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based
on the driver's and passenger's selected "set temperature", regardless of the outside temperature changes.
This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals
from the following six sensors:
• Ambient sensor
• In-vehicle sensor
• Intake sensor
• Optical sensor (providing one input for driver and one input for passenger side)
• PBR (position balanced resistor).
• Engine coolant temperature sensor (via CAN communication)
• Vehicle speed signal (via CAN communication)
The front air control uses these signals (including the set temperature) to automatically control:
• Outlet air volume
• Air temperature
• Air distribution
The front air control also provides separate regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature for the rear passenger area. The system is based on the rear temperature and blower settings selected from rear air control
(front) control dials located in the overhead console, or from the rear temperature and blower settings from the
rear air control (rear) control dials, when the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator light is on) on the rear
air control (front).
The front air control is used to select:
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
• Outlet air volume
• Air temperature/distribution
Operation
INFOID:0000000001718848
I
AIR MIX DOORS CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
The air mix doors are automatically controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is maintained at a predetermined ATC
value by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature and amount of sunload.
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Blower speed is automatically controlled based on temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and air mix door position.
When AUTO switch is pressed, the blower motor starts to gradually increase air flow volume (if required).
When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing.
K
L
INTAKE DOORS CONTROL
The intake doors are automatically controlled by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle
temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and ON-OFF operation of the compressor. Recirculation
is not allowed in floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes.
M
MODE DOOR CONTROL
N
The mode door is automatically controlled by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature and amount of sunload.
O
DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL
The defroster door is controlled by: Turning the defroster dial to front defroster.
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-21
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
WJIA2144E
When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control outputs compressor ON signal to BCM.
BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line.
ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line.
Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
The self-diagnostic system is built into the front air control to quickly locate the cause of certain symptoms.
Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Description of Control System
INFOID:0000000001718849
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-22
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA2013E
Control Operation
INFOID:0000000001718850
ATC
Front air control
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA2014E
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-23
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear air control
WJIA2015E
DISPLAY SCREEN
Displays the operational status of the system.
AUTO SWITCH
• The compressor, intake doors, air mix doors, outlet doors and blower speed are automatically controlled so
that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator.
• When pressing AUTO switch, air inlet, air outlet, blower speed, and discharge air temperature are automatically controlled.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (DRIVER SIDE)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (PASSENGER SIDE)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
REAR TEMPERATURE/MODE CONTROL DIAL (FRONT)
Increases or decreases the set temperature and changes the location of the rear discharged air.
REAR TEMPERATURE/MODE CONTROL DIAL (REAR)
Increases or decreases the set temperature and changes the location of the rear discharged air.
RECIRCULATION (
) SWITCH
• When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
• When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
• REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON the D/F position, or in floor mode.
DEFROSTER (
) SWITCH
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
The compressor remains ON until the ignition is turned OFF.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
When switch is ON, rear window is defogged.
OFF SWITCH
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet
doors are set to the foot (75% foot and 25% defrost) position.
A/C SWITCH
The compressor is ON or OFF.
(Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.)
MODE SWITCHES
Controls the air discharge outlets.
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL
Revision: August 2007
ATC-24
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Manually control the blower speed. Seven speeds are available for manual control (as shown on the display
screen).
A
REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (FRONT)
When the REAR CTRL switch is off (indicator off) the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor
speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower control dial (rear) position. The rear air control (front) controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (REAR)
B
When the REAR CTRL switch is on (indicator on) the rear air control (rear) controls the rear blower motor
speed regardless of the rear air control (front) blower control dial (front) position. The rear air control (rear)
controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings.
C
Discharge Air Flow
D
INFOID:0000000001718851
FRONT
E
F
G
WJIA2016E
H
I
ATC
K
WJIA0528E
REAR
L
NOTE:
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-25
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Hot air comes from the floor vents, cold air comes from the roof
vents, and blend air comes from both vents.
LJIA0127E
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718852
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
WJIA1674E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-26
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA2017E
CAN Communication System Description
H
INFOID:0000000001718853
I
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-27
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)
INFOID:0000000001718854
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic mode
Description
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays front air control self-diagnosis results.
DATA MONITOR
Displays front air control input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Front air control part number can be read.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Display Item List
DTC
Reference page
B2572
EE changed by calibration
ATC-127, "Removal and Installation"
B2573
Battery voltage out of range
SC-4
B2574
Air mix door motor (passenger) circuit failure
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
B2575
BCM not responding to A/C request
ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit"
B2576
BCM not responding to rear defroster request
GW-76
B2577
Air mix door motor (driver) circuit failure
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
B2578
In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (low)
B2579
In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (high)
B257A
Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure
B257B
Ambient sensor circuit open
B257C
Ambient sensor circuit short
B257D
In-vehicle sensor motor circuit open
B257E
In-vehicle sensor motor circuit short
B257F
Optical sensor (driver) circuit open or short
B2580
Optical sensor (passenger) circuit open or short
B2581
Intake sensor circuit short
B2582
Intake sensor circuit open
B2583
Defroster door motor circuit failure
ATC-74, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
B2584
Intake door motor (passenger) circuit failure
ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
U1000
CAN bus fault
LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart"
B2586
Intake door motor (driver) circuit failure
ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
B2587
Stuck button
ATC-127, "Removal and Installation"
B2587
Mode door motor circuit failure
ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit"
ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
ATC-122, "Optical Sensor Circuit"
ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Monitor item
BATT VIA CAN
IGN VIA CAN
Value
Contents
"V"
Displays battery voltage signal.
"ON/OFF"
Displays ignition switch signal.
DVR SUNLD SEN
"W/M2"
Displays optical sensor (driver) signal.
PAS SUNLD SEN
"W/M2"
Displays optical sensor (passenger) signal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-28
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item
Value
Contents
AMB TEMP SEN
"°C/°F"
Displays ambient temperature sensor signal.
EVAP TEMP SEN
"°C/°F"
Displays intake sensor signal.
INCAR TMP SEN
"°C/°F"
Displays in-vehicle temperature sensor signal.
RR TEMPSET FR
"V"
Displays air mix door (front) set point signal.
RR TEMPSET RR
"V"
Displays air mix door (rear) set point signal.
MODE FDBCK
"V"
Displays mode door motor feedback signal.
DVR MIX FDBCK
"V"
Displays intake door motor (driver) feedback signal.
PAS MIX FDBCK
"V"
Displays intake door motor (passenger) feedback signal.
RR FDBCK
"V"
Displays air mix door motor (rear) feedback signal.
RECIRC
"ON/OFF"
DEFROST
"V"
D
Displays recirculation switch signal.
E
Displays defroster switch signal.
"ON/OFF"
Displays AUTO switch signal.
A/C
"ON/OFF"
Displays A/C switch signal.
MODE
"ON/OFF"
Displays MODE dial signal.
L TEMP UP
"ON/OFF"
Displays driver side temperature control dial (temp increase) signal.
L TEMP DOWN
"ON/OFF"
Displays driver side temperature control dial (temp decrease) signal.
R TEMP UP
"ON/OFF"
Displays rear temperature control dial [front (temp increase)] signal.
R TEMP DOWN
"ON/OFF"
Displays rear temperature control dial [front (temp decrease)] signal.
RR DEFOG
"ON/OFF"
Displays rear defroster request signal.
FAN UP
"ON/OFF"
Displays front blower motor (blower speed increase) signal.
FAN DOWN
"ON/OFF"
Displays front blower motor (blower speed decrease) signal.
MODE SELECT
B
C
AUTO
" [ PNL ]"
" [ MIX ]"
" [ FLR ]"
" [ DEFR ]"
" [ MAX ]"
" [ DENT ]"*
A
F
G
H
I
ATC
Displays mode door motor position.
K
*: DENT is displayed when MODE dial is between selections.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718855
L
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
M
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
O
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
P
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
N
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
ATC-29
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item name “operation or
unit”
Contents
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)” status as judged from ignition switch signal.
COMP ON SIG
“ON/OFF”
Displays “COMP (ON)/COMP (OFF)” status as judged from air conditioner switch signal.
FAN ON SIG
“ON/OFF”
Displays “FAN (ON)/FAN (OFF)” status as judged from blower fan motor switch signal.
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
INFOID:0000000001718856
WORK FLOW
SHA900E
*1
ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)"
SYMPTOM TABLE
Symptom
Reference Page
A/C system does not come on.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System.
A/C system display is malfunctioning.
Go to Navigation System, or Integrated Display System.
A/C system cannot be controlled.
Go to Self-diagnosis Function.
Air outlet does not change.
Mode door motor is malfunctioning.
ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function"
ATC-51, "Mode
Door Motor Circuit"
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor.
ATC-57, "Air Mix
Door Motor Circuit"
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor.
ATC-69, "Intake
Door Motor Circuit"
Intake door does not change.
Intake door motor is malfunctioning.
AV-150 (With
NAVI.) or AV-94
(Without NAVI)
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor.
Discharge air temperature does not change.
Air mix door motor is malfunctioning.
ATC-49, "Power
Supply and
Ground Circuit for
Front Air Control"
Defroster door motor is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Defroster Door Motor.
ATC-74, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor.
ATC-76, "Front
Blower Motor Circuit"
Rear blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Blower Motor.
ATC-84, "Rear
Blower Motor Circuit"
Rear discharge air temperature and/or air
outlet does not change.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Air Control circuit.
ATC-93, "Rear Air
Temperature Control Circuit"
Revision: August 2007
ATC-30
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Reference Page
Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
ATC-98, "Magnet
Clutch Circuit"
Insufficient cooling
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
ATC-102, "Insufficient Cooling"
Insufficient heating
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
ATC-109, "Insufficient Heating"
Noise
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
ATC-113, "Noise"
Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis.
ATC-114, "Self-Diagnosis"
Memory function does not operate.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Memory Function.
ATC-116, "Memory Function"
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718857
A
B
C
D
E
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-31
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA2221E
1.
Refrigerant pressure sensor E111
4.
Heater pump E127
2.
Compressor F3 (view from right tire
housing)
3.
Ambient Sensor E1
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-32
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA2018E
P
1.
Intake door motor (driver) M58
2.
Air mix door motor (driver) M39
3.
In-vehicle sensor M32
4.
Evaporator
5.
Intake sensor M305
6.
Variable blower control (front) M122
7.
Air mix door motor (passenger) M306 8.
Mode door motor M304
9.
Defroster door motor M303
10.
Intake door motor (passenger) M302 11.
Heater pump relay E128
12. Front air control M49, M50
13.
Optical sensor M16
14. Front blower motor M62
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-33
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA2019E
1.
Rear air control (rear) B150
Revision: August 2007
2.
Rear blower motor B134
ATC-34
3.
Air mix door motor (rear) B146
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718858
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0433E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-35
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - A/C,A -
INFOID:0000000001718859
WJWA0434E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-36
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0435E
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-37
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJWA0436E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-38
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0437E
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-39
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALIWA0052GB
Revision: August 2007
ATC-40
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0439E
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-41
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALIWA0053GB
Revision: August 2007
ATC-42
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0440E
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-43
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value
INFOID:0000000001718860
FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
WJIA2020E
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUES FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
Terminal
No.
Wire
Color
Item
Ignition
Switch
1
LG
2
G/W
Optical sensor (driver)
ON
Air mix door motor (passenger) CW
ON
3
Y
Sensor ground
ON
4
L/R
Compressor ON signal
5
L/Y
Fan ON signal
6
Y/B
Air mix door motor (driver) feedback
ON
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Clockwise rotation
-
0 - 5V
Battery voltage
0V
ON
A/C switch OFF
5V
ON
A/C switch ON
0V
ON
Fan switch OFF
5V
ON
Fan switch ON
0V
-
7
LG
Mode door motor feedback
ON
8
R/L
Illumination +
ON
Park lamps ON
-
9
R/Y
Illumination -
-
Park lamps ON
0 - 5V
0 - 5V
Battery voltage
PIIA2344E
Heater pump OFF
Battery voltage
Heater pump ON
0V
10
R/L
Heater pump
ON
11
R/W
Intake sensor
ON
-
0 - 5V
12
W/G
Aux blower speed
ON
-
0 - 5V
13
O
Variable blower control
ON
-
0 - 5V
14
Y/R
Air mix door motor (passenger) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
15
G/Y
Power supply for IGN
ON
-
Battery voltage
16
W/L
Rear defroster request
ON
-
Battery voltage
17
L/B
Air mix door motor (driver) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
18
Y/G
Air mix door motor (driver) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
19
L/O
Mode door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
20
SB
Mode door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
21
R
Intake door motor (driver) CW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
22
R/B
Intake door motor (driver) CCW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
23
W
Defroster door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
Revision: August 2007
ATC-44
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
No.
Wire
Color
24
W/B
25
GR/R
26
Item
Ignition
Switch
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Defroster door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Ambient sensor
ON
-
0 - 5V
O/B
Sensor return
ON
-
0 - 5V
27
Y/R
Power supply for BAT
-
-
Battery voltage
28
W/G
Sensor power
ON
-
5V
29
LG/B
Air mix door motor (passenger) feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
30
G/B
Air mix door motor (rear) feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
31
BR
In-vehicle sensor motor (+)
ON
-
Battery voltage
32
BR/W
In-vehicle sensor signal
ON
-
0 - 5V
33
R/G
Front AUX (rear)
ON
-
0 - 5V
34
BR/Y
Front aux backlight dim
ON
Headlamps OFF
Battery voltage
35
V/W
Front aux tell tale LED
ON
Tell tale OFF
Battery voltage
36
B
Ground
-
-
40
P
CAN-L
ON
-
-
41
L
CAN-H
ON
-
-
42
SB
Optical sensor (passenger)
ON
-
43
P/L
Air mix door motor (rear) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
44
LG/R
Air mix door motor (rear) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
45
P
Intake door motor (passenger) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
46
P/B
Intake door motor (passenger) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
47
Y/L
Rear aux blower pot
ON
Rear blower motor
0 - 5V
0 - 5V
Battery voltage
B
C
D
E
F
0V
G
0 - 5V
48
W/R
Rear aux temp pot
ON
Rear air control (rear) temperature control dial
49
G/O
Front aux blower pot
ON
Rear air control (front)
blower motor
0 - 5V
50
GR/L
Front aux temp pot
ON
Rear air control (front) temperature control dial
0 - 5V
A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function
A
H
I
ATC
K
INFOID:0000000001718861
L
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
If using CONSULT-III refer to ATC-28, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)".
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, CAN system, battery voltage, and stuck button on front air
control. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system
is accomplished by the following:
On the AV switch, hold the memory "4" button and rotate the audio volume control dial until the Self-Diagnostic
screen shows on the display. Scroll down and select "Confirmation/Adjustment" with the joystick. Select "Auto
Climate Control" with the joystick to start the self-test. The fan bars will flash on the display during the self-test,
and then the fault codes (if any are present) will display in the ambient temperature area. Refer to "SELFDIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". The fault codes will continue to scroll until self-diagnostic mode is exited. To exit
Revision: August 2007
ATC-45
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
self-diagnostic mode, press the "BACK" button on the AV switch repeatedly until the screen displays the HVAC
status.
WJIA2022E
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART
NOTE:
If using CONSULT-III refer to ATC-28, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)".
Code No.
Reference page
02
EE changed by calibration
ATC-127, "Removal and Installation"
03
Battery voltage out of range
SC-4
12
Air mix door motor (passenger) circuit failure
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
20
BCM not responding to A/C request
MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit"
21
BCM not responding to rear defroster request
GW-76
22
Air mix door motor (driver) circuit failure
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
30
In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (low)
31
In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (high)
38
Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure
40
Ambient sensor circuit short
41
Ambient sensor circuit open
44
In-vehicle sensor motor circuit open
46
In-vehicle sensor motor circuit short
50
Optical sensor (driver) circuit open or short
52
Optical sensor (passenger) circuit open or short
56
Intake sensor circuit short
57
Intake sensor circuit open
62
Defroster door drive short /open/out of limits
ATC-74, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
72
Intake door motor (passenger) short/open
ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
80
CAN bus fault
LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart"
Revision: August 2007
ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
ATC-122, "Optical Sensor Circuit"
ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
ATC-46
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Code No.
Reference page
82
Intake door motor (driver) short/open
ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
90
Stuck button
ATC-127, "Removal and Installation"
92
Mode door motor short/open/out of limits
ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit"
Operational Check (Front)
A
B
INFOID:0000000001718862
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
Conditions
C
: Engine running and at normal operating temperature
D
CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the temperature to 32°C (90°F).
Rotate the blower control dial counterclockwise (hold blower control dial until system shuts OFF).
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
5.
6.
Press the AUTO switch.
Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature.
E
F
7. Rotate the blower control dial counterclockwise (hold blower control dial until system shuts OFF).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-116, "Memory Function".
If OK, continue with next check.
G
H
CHECKING BLOWER
1.
Rotate blower control dial clockwise to turn system on. Blower should operate on low speed. The fan display should have one bar lit (on display).
I
2. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed and fan display until all
speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on maximum speed.
ATC
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
K
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR
1.
2.
Press each mode switch and press DEF (
) switch.
Each position indicator should change shape (on display).
L
3.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge
Air Flow".
Mode door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh
when the DEF or D/F is selected.
M
N
O
CHECKING RECIRCULATION
1.
Select vent ( ) mode switch and then press recirculation (
) switch one time. Recirculation indicator
should illuminate.
2. Press recirculation (
) switch one more time. Recirculation indicator should go off.
3. Listen for intake door position change (blower sound should change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1.
Rotate temperature dial counterclockwise (driver side or passenger side) until 16°C (60°F) is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-47
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-102,
"Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor
Circuit" or ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Rotate temperature dial clockwise (driver side or passenger side) until 32°C (90°F) is displayed.
2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-109,
"Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor
Circuit" or ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECK A/C SWITCH
1.
2.
Press A/C switch when AUTO switch is ON, or in manual mode.
A/C switch indicator will turn ON.
• Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING AUTO MODE
1.
2.
Press AUTO switch.
Display should indicate AUTO.
• If ambient temperature is warm, and selected temperature is cool, confirm that the compressor clutch
engages (sound or visual inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle, and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control",
then if necessary, trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit".
If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble
Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform tests as outlined. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-30,
"How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair", ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures.
Operational Check (Rear)
INFOID:0000000001718863
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
Conditions
: Engine running and at normal operating temperature
CHECKING REAR BLOWER MOTOR
1. Press the AUTO switch on the front air control.
2. Rotate rear air control (front) blower control dial to low speed.
3. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked.
4. Leave blower on maximum speed.
5. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
6. Rotate rear air control (rear) blower control dial to low speed.
7. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked.
8. Leave blower on maximum speed.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING REAR DISCHARGE AIR
Revision: August 2007
ATC-48
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial
from maximum heat to maximum cold.
2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow".
3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial
from maximum heat to maximum cold.
5. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow".
Air mix door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LJIA0127E
CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE DECREASE
H
1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.
2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
I
4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.
5. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-102, ATC
"Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor
Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
K
L
CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat.
2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat.
5. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-109,
"Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor
Circuit".
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-93, "Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit".
If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble
Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform tests as outlined. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-30,
"How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis
procedures.
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control
INFOID:0000000001718864
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
Revision: August 2007
ATC-49
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - AUTO MODE
1.
2.
Press AUTO switch.
Display should indicate AUTO. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle and set temperatures.)
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM".
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors
needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motors, defroster
door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are
operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the
auto air conditioner system.
Potentio Temperature Control (PTC)
There are two PTCs (passenger and driver) (1) built into the front air
control. They can be set from 16°C (60°F) to 32°C (90°F) temperature range by rotating the temperature dial. The set temperature is
displayed.
WJIA2023E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
ATC-50
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
A
B
C
WJIA2024E
D
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connectors.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 15 and connector M50 (B) terminal 27, and ground.
E
F
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Front air
control
connector
Terminal No.
M49 (A)
15
M50 (B)
27
(-)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
Approx. 0V
Approx. 0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
G
WJIA2025E
H
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check 10A and 15A fuses [Nos. 2 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78.
ATC
• If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
• If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
K
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
2.
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 36 and ground.
L
Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
N
WJIA2026E
O
Mode Door Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718865
SYMPTOM:
P
• Air outlet does not change.
• Mode door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DISCHARGE AIR
1.
Press each of the four mode position switches and then press the
tor should change shape (on display).
Revision: August 2007
ATC-51
(DEF) switch. Each position indica2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge
Air Flow".
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH
when DEF (
) or D/F (
) is selected.
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MODE DOOR OPERATION
Check and verify mode door mechanism for smooth operation in each mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK THE MODE DOOR MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT
Perform diagnostic procedure for the mode door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE
DOOR MOTOR".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair PBR circuit or replace motor. Refer to ATC-148, "Removal and Installation".
7.RECHECK FOR CODES
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnostic codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 8.
8.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Repair as necessary.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
Revision: August 2007
ATC-52
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Front air control
• Mode door motor
• PBR (built into mode door motor)
• In-vehicle sensor
• Ambient sensor
• Optical sensor
• Intake sensor
A
B
System Operation
The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door
motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the
mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it.
The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit.
In AUTO mode the mode door position is set by the front air control which determines the proper position
based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature
selected by the driver or passenger.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
WJIA0423E
K
Mode Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
L
Mode Door Motor
M
WJIA0434E
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit assembly. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by
the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door.
N
O
P
WJIA0424E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
Revision: August 2007
ATC-53
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Press the B/L ( ) mode switch.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 20 and terminal 19 while pressing the floor ( ) mode
switch.
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
19
20
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Press floor
mode
switch
Battery
voltage
WJIA2027E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 20, 19 and ground.
20 - Ground
19 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2028E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
Press the mode switch to the D/F (
) mode.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 19 and terminal 20 while pressing the mode switch to
the vent ( ) mode.
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
20
19
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Press vent
mode
switch
Battery
voltage
WJIA2029E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
ATC-54
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 20 and terminal 19.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
C
WJIA2030E
5.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
D
Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 20, 19 and the mode door motor harness connector (B) terminal 5, 6.
20 - 5
19 - 6
E
F
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
G
WJIA2031E
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (B)
terminal 28.
ATC
Connector
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (M50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
K
WJIA2032E
L
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 28 and ground.
N
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
O
WJIA2033E
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Revision: August 2007
ATC-55
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M304 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50
(C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M304 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
3-1
: Continuity should exist.
WJIA2035E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 7 and ground while cycling mode switch through all
modes.
Voltage
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
WJIA2036E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 7 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2037E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
ATC-56
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector and front
air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M304 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 7.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
WJIA2038E
D
INFOID:0000000001718866
E
SYMPTOM:
• Discharge air temperature does not change.
• Air mix door motor does not operate.
F
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1.
2.
G
Turn the temperature control dial (driver) clockwise until 32°C (90°F) is displayed.
Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Turn the temperature control dial (driver) counterclockwise until 16°C (60°F) is displayed.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
I
ATC
3.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
K
L
M
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 5.
N
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION
Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation from 16°C (60°F) to 32°C (90°F) in each
mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-57
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.CHECK THE AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT
Perform diagnostic procedure for the air mix door motors. Refer to "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair PBR circuit or replace air mix door motor. Refer to ATC-150.
8.RECHECK FOR CODES
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnostic codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 9.
9.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front air control
Air mix door motors (driver, passenger, and rear)
PBR (built-into air mix door motors)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Optical sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
The front air control receives data base on the temperature selected by the driver and front and rear passengers. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while
ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front
air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each
door.
In AUTO mode the air mix, intake, mode door, and defrost door positions are set by the front air control which
determines the proper position based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor,
intake sensor, and the temperature selected by the driver and front and rear passengers.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-58
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new
door position data is returned to the front air control.
A
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0427E
Air Mix Door Control Specification
G
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motors
H
I
WJIA0435E
The driver and front passenger air mix door motors are attached to
the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The rear air mix door motor
is attached to the rear heater & cooling unit assembly. These motors
rotate so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by
the front (or rear) air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through
a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air
control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors.
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0428E
N
O
P
WJIA0429E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-59
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA0430E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (driver) to 32°C (90°F).
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control
dial (driver) to 16°C (60°F).
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
18
17
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
WJIA2039E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 18, 17 and ground.
18 - Ground
17 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2040E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (driver) to 16°C (60°F).
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control
dial (driver) to 32°C (90°F).
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
17
18
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
WJIA2041E
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
ATC-60
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
A
4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17.
B
C
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
D
WJIA2042E
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 18, 17 and the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector M39 (B) terminal 5, 6.
18 - 5
17 - 6
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-151,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
E
H
WJIA2043E
I
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
(B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A)
terminal 3.
Connectors
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
ATC
K
L
WJIA2032E
M
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 28 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
P
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2033E
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Revision: August 2007
ATC-61
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (driver) harness
connector M39 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (driver) harness
connector M39 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3.
3-1
: Continuity should exist.
WJIA2035E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 6 and ground while rotating temperature control dial
from 32°C (90°F) to 16°C (60°F).
Voltage
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
WJIA2044E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 6 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2045E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
ATC-62
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector
and front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between air mix door motor (driver) harness
connector M39 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 6.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-151,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
C
WJIA2046E
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
E
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (passenger) to 32°C (90°F).
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 2 and terminal 14 while rotating temperature control dial
(passenger) to 16°C (60°F).
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
14
2
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
F
G
H
WJIA2047E
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
ATC
2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 2, 14 and ground.
K
L
2 - Ground
14 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
M
WJIA2048E
N
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (passenger) to 16°C (60°F).
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 2 and terminal 14 while rotating temperature control dial
(passenger) to 32°C (90°F).
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Revision: August 2007
Terminals
(+)
(-)
2
14
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
ATC-63
O
P
WJIA2049E
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 2 and terminal 14.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2050E
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 2, 14 and the air mix door motor (passenger)
harness connector M306 (B) terminal 5, 6.
2-5
14 - 6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (passenger). Refer to
"DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR
MOTOR (PASSENGER)".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2051E
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
(B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A)
terminal 3.
Connectors
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (M50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
WJIA2032E
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Revision: August 2007
ATC-64
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 28 and ground.
A
B
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
C
WJIA2033E
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
G
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness
connector M50 (C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
H
I
ATC
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness
connector M49 (A) terminal 3.
K
WJIA2035E
3-1
: Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
M
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 29 and ground while rotating temperature control dial
(passenger) from 32°C (90° F) to 16°C (60° F).
Voltage
N
O
: Approx. 0 - 5V
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
WJIA2052E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Revision: August 2007
ATC-65
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 29 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2053E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector and front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness
connector M50 (A) terminal 29.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC151, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2054E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum hot.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control
dial (rear) to maximum cold.
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
43
44
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
WJIA2055E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 43, 44 and ground.
43 - Ground
44 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-66
WJIA2056E
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum cold.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control
dial (rear) to maximum hot.
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
44
43
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
B
C
D
WJIA2057E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
E
4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44.
Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
I
WJIA2058E
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
ATC
Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 43, 44 and the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 1, 6.
43 - 1
44 - 6
K
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
L
M
WJIA2059E
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
(B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A)
terminal 3.
P
Connectors
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (M50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: August 2007
WJIA2032E
ATC-67
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 28 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2033E
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3.
3-2
: Continuity should exist.
WJIA2060E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 30 and ground while rotating temperature control dial
(rear) from maximum cold to maximum hot.
Voltage
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
WJIA2061E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Revision: August 2007
ATC-68
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 30 and ground.
A
B
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
C
WJIA2062E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector and
front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 4 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 30.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2063E
H
Intake Door Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718867
I
SYMPTOM:
• Intake door does not change.
• Intake door motor does not operate normally.
ATC
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REC (
)
K
1. Press the vent mode ( ).
2. Press REC (
) switch. The REC (
)indicator should illuminate.
3. Press REC (
) switch again. The REC (
) indicator should go out.
4. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound changes slightly).
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
N
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
O
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
P
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THE INTAKE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS
Perform diagnostic procedure for the intake door motor. Refer to "Intake Door Motor Circuit".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-69
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace front air control or repair wiring. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR OPERATION
Check and verify intake door mechanism for smooth operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor. Refer to ATC-145.
NG
>> Repair intake door mechanism.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front air control
Intake door motor (driver and passenger)
PBR (built into intake door motors)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Optical sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
The intake door control determines the intake door (driver and passenger) positions based on the position of
the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motors rotate closing off
the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door
motors rotate in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin.
In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines the intake doors positions based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the DEFROST, or OFF switches are
pushed or A/C switch is OFF, the front air control sets the intake doors at the fresh position. Recirculation is
not allowed in DEFROST, D/F, or Floor modes.
WJIA1751E
Intake Doors Control Specification
WJIA1202E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-70
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A
Intake door motors
The driver and passenger intake door motors are attached to the
intake unit. They rotate so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front
air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the
intake door.
B
C
D
WJIA0433E
E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
22
21
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery voltage
G
H
WJIA2064E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
ATC
2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 22, 21 and ground.
22 - Ground
21 - Ground
K
L
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
M
WJIA2065E
N
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
O
Press the "BACK" button repeatedly to exit out of self-diagnostic
mode.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
P
WJIA2066E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-71
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
21
22
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2067E
5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the intake door motor (driver) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 22, 21 and the intake door motor (driver) harness connector M58 (B) terminal 1, 6.
1 - 22
6 - 21
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2068E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 45 and terminal 46 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
45
46
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery voltage
WJIA2069E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Revision: August 2007
ATC-72
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 46, 45 and ground.
46 - Ground
45 - Ground
A
B
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
C
WJIA2070E
D
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
Press the "BACK" button repeatedly to exit out of self-diagnostic
mode.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 46 and terminal 45 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
46
45
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery
voltage
E
F
G
WJIA2071E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
H
I
4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 46 and terminal 45.
ATC
K
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 5.
L
WJIA2072E
M
5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 46, 45 and the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector terminal 1, 6.
46 - 1
45 - 6
O
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: August 2007
N
ATC-73
P
WJIA2073E
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718868
SYMPTOM:
• Defroster door does not change.
• Defroster door does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DEFROSTER DOOR
1. Press the vent switch ( ).
2. Press the defrost switch (
). Defroster indicator should illuminate.
3. Listen for defroster door position change (blower sound should change slightly).
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Perform diagnostic procedure for defroster door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair PBR circuit or replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144.
5.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR OPERATION
Check and verify defroster door mechanism for smooth operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144.
NG
>> Repair defroster door mechanism.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Defroster door control system components are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front air control
Defroster door motor
PBR (built into defroster door motor)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Optical sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the defroster switch. When the
defroster switch is depressed, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts. When any
mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing off air flow
to the defroster ducts.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-74
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines defroster door position based on the ambient temperature,
the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. Auto mode may be floor/defrost mode, but full
defrost mode is only a manually selected mode.
A
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0438E
G
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Defroster door motor
The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling
unit assembly. The front air control sends voltage to rotate the
defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to
the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are
applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever
which activates the defroster door.
H
I
ATC
LJIA0063E
K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 24 and terminal 23 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function"
M
N
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
23
24
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery voltage
O
WJIA2074E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
P
2.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Revision: August 2007
ATC-75
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 23, 24 and ground.
24 - Ground
23 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2075E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
Press the "BACK" button repeatedly to exit self-diagnostic
mode.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 23 and terminal 24 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
24
23
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery
voltage
WJIA2076E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 23 and terminal 24.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2077E
5.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the defroster door motor harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 24, 23 and the defroster door motor harness
connector M303 (B) terminal 1, 6.
24 - 1
23 - 6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Front Blower Motor Circuit
WJIA2078E
INFOID:0000000001718869
SYMPTOM:
Revision: August 2007
ATC-76
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
A
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - FRONT BLOWER
1.
2.
Rotate the blower control dial clockwise. Blower should operate.
Rotate the blower control dial clockwise, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all
speeds are checked.
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
B
C
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
D
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
E
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
F
Check for any service bulletins.
G
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 5.
H
I
5.CHECK BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Check and verify blower motor operates in all speeds.
Does blower motor operate in all speeds?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR".
ATC
K
6.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
L
M
Component Parts
N
Blower speed control system components are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front air control
Front Blower motor
Front Blower motor relay
Variable blower control (front)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Optical sensor
Intake sensor
Engine coolant temperature (via CAN communication)
Revision: August 2007
ATC-77
O
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System Operation
WJIA2079E
Automatic Mode
In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control and variable blower control
(front) based on input from the in-vehicle sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor, engine
coolant temperature sensor (via CAN communication), and potentio temperature control (PTC).
When the air flow is increased, the duty ratio of the blower fan motor′s drive signal is changed at 8%/sec. to
prevent a sudden increase in air flow.
In addition to manual air flow control and the usual automatic air flow control, starting air flow control, low
engine coolant temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting control are
available.
Starting Fan Speed Control
Start up from cold soak condition (Automatic mode).
In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 50°C (122°F), the blower will not
operate at blower speed 1 for a short period of time (up to 210 seconds). The exact start delay time varies
depending on the ambient and engine coolant temperatures.
In the most extreme case (very low ambient temperature) the blower starting delay will be 210 seconds as
described above. After the engine coolant temperature reaches 50°C (122°F), or the 210 seconds has
elapsed, the blower speed will increase to the objective blower speed.
Start up from normal operating or hot soak condition (Automatic mode).
The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO switch is pushed. The blower speed will gradually
rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective
blower speed).
Blower Speed Compensation
Sunload
When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low
speed. The speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of low or no sunload, the blower
operates at low speed. During high sunload conditions, the front air control causes the blower speed to
increase.
Blower Speed Control Specification
WJIA0441E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-78
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A
Variable Blower Control (Front)
The variable blower control (front) is located on the cooling unit
assembly. The variable blower control (front) receives a gate voltage
from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower fan motor
voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.).
B
C
D
WJIA0442E
E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting
blower speed control.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
WJIA2080E
L
1.CHECK FUSES
Check 20A fuses (No. 28 and 30, located in the fuse and fusible link box). For fuse layout. Refer to PG-79.
M
Fuses are good.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
N
2.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-79
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Press the AUTO switch.
3. Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector
M62 terminal (+) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WJIA0326E
3.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor relay connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 3 and 6 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1896E
4.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY
Check voltage between front blower motor relay connector H-2 terminal 1 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0080E
5.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor connector.
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 5 and 7 and front blower motor harness
connector M62 terminal (+).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA0968E
6.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-80
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminal 2 and ground.
A
Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace blower motor relay.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2147E
7.REPLACE FUSES
D
1. Replace fuses.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Activate the front blower motor.
4. Does fuse blow?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> Inspection End.
E
F
8.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check front blower motor relay. Refer to "Front Blower Motor Relay".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor relay.
H
9.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
I
Check front blower motor. Refer to "Front Blower Motor".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation".
ATC
10.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
K
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 6 and 3 and ground.
L
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
N
WJIA2148E
11.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-81
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect variable blower control (front) harness connector.
2. Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to ATC154, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2083E
12.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect variable blower control (front) connector and front
blower motor relay connector.
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 (A) terminals 5 and 7 and variable blower control
(front) harness connector M122 (B) terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2081E
13.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Check front blower motor. Refer to "Front Blower Motor".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor relay.
14.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 (A) terminal 3 and front blower motor harness connector M62 (B) terminal (-).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2149E
15.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2150E
16.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-82
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect front air control connector.
2. Check continuity between front air control connector M49 (B)
terminal 13 and variable blower control (front) connector M122
(A) terminal 2.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2084E
17.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Reconnect all disconnected parts except the variable blower
control (front) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn front blower motor to maximum speed.
Check voltage between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
2
Ground
5V
Front air control: M122
E
F
G
WJIA2158E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to ATC-154, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
H
COMPONENT INSPECTION
I
Front Blower Motor Relay
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and
ground to coil side terminals of relay.
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
LJIA0068E
Front Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
• Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-83
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and verify
that the motor operates freely and quietly.
WJIA2168E
Rear Blower Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718870
SYMPTOM:
• Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear).
• Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (front) only.
• Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (rear) only.
• Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected.
• Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (rear) speed selected.
• Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (front).
• Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (rear).
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
1.
2.
Press AUTO switch.
Turn the rear air control (front) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation
(REAR CTRL indicator off).
3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise.
Does the rear blower motor operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
1.
Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower
motor back the rear air control (rear).
2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation.
3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise.
Does the rear blower motor operate correctly?
YES >> • Rear blower motor does not operate at any speed from the rear air control (front). Refer to
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1 ".
• Rear blower motor operates in high speed all the time or does not match the rear air control
(front) speed selected. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2 ".
NO
>> • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control
(rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3 "
3.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
1.
Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower
motor back the rear air control (rear).
2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation.
3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise.
Does the rear blower motor operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check rear air control (rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4 ".
4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-84
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
>> GO TO 5.
5.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
A
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> INSPECTION END.
B
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
C
Component Parts
Rear blower speed control system components are:
• Front air control
• Rear air control (front)
• Rear air control (rear)
• Variable blower control (rear)
• Rear blower motor
• Rear blower motor relay
D
E
System Operation
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
WJIA2085E
Rear Blower Control
NOTE:
The rear blower motor can only operate when the front blower motor is on.
When the rear air control (front) blower control dial is turned on and the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), it allows the rear air control (rear) to control the rear blower motor speed. If the REAR CTRL switch is
off (indicator off), the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower speed control dial position.
L
M
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
N
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
The variable blower control (rear) (1) is located on the rear blower
motor case (1). The variable blower control (rear) receives a gate
voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower fan
motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.).
O
P
WJIA2086E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1
Revision: August 2007
ATC-85
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
6
Ground
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2099E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2093E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Revision: August 2007
ATC-86
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground.
A
B
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
6
Ground
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
WJIA2099E
D
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
WJIA2093E
H
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 49 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 6.
I
ATC
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
WJIA2101E
L
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
M
1. Disconnect rear air control (front) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Press AUTO switch.
Does rear blower motor operate in high speed?
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
N
O
2.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-87
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear blower motor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Press AUTO switch.
5. Rotate rear air control (front) blower speed control dial to maximum speed (REAR CTRL indicator off).
6. Check voltage between rear blower motor harness connector
B134 terminal (+) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
LJIA0099E
3.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect variable blower control (rear) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between variable blower control connector B151
terminal 1 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2154E
4.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check voltage between variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Front air control: B151
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
2
Ground
4.5 V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
WJIA2155E
5.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between variable blower control (rear) harness
connector B151 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2150E
6.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Check rear blower motor. Refer to "Rear Blower Motor".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-88
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between rear blower motor connector B134 terminal (-) and variable blower control (rear) connector B151 terminal 3.
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
D
WJIA2156E
8.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 12 and variable blower control (rear) harness
connector B151 (B) terminal 2.
F
Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
WJIA2157E
9.CHECK FUSES
I
Check 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
ATC
10.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
K
Check rear blower motor relay. Refer to "Rear Blower Motor Relay".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace rear blower motor relay.
L
11.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR BLOWER MOTOR AND FUSE BLOCK (J/
B)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector
M3 terminal 3N and 8N and rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+).
M
N
Continuity should exist.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
LJIA0107E
12.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-89
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector M3
terminal 7N and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0102E
13.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector E30 terminal
3Q and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0101E
14.REPLACE FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace fuses.
3. Reconnect all disconnected parts.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Activate the rear blower motor from the rear air control (front).
6. Does fuse blow?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 15.
No
>> Inspection End.
15.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Check rear blower motor. Refer to "Rear Blower Motor".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation".
16.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector and variable
blower control (rear).
Check continuity between rear blower motor harness connector
B134 terminal (+) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control (rear). Refer to ATC154, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0104E
17.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
Revision: August 2007
ATC-90
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 10 and ground.
A
Battery voltage should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2087E
18.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FRONT AUX BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector M50.
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground.
E
F
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front) Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
WJIA2152E
H
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear air control (rear) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector
B150 terminal 6 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (rear): B150
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
6
Ground
5V
I
ATC
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WJIA2099E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1, and 9 and ground.
N
Continuity should exist.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation"
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WJIA2100E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT FOR SHORT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-91
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 6 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2152E
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT BETWEEN FRONT AIR CONTROL
AND REAR IAR CONTROL REAR
1. Disconnect front air control harness connector.
2. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 47 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 6.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2153E
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Rear Blower Motor Relay
Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and
ground to coil side terminals of relays.
WJIA0973E
Rear Blower Motor
Check that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-92
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and ensure
that the blower motor rotates freely and quietly.
A
B
C
LJIA0115E
D
Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718871
SYMPTOM:
• Temperature cannot be adjusted from the rear air control.
E
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) OPERATIONAL CHECK
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Press AUTO switch (rear air controls only operate when front blower is on).
Turn the rear blower motor to maximum speed from the rear air control (front).
Turn rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial clockwise and then counterclockwise (REAR
CTRL indicator off).
4. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets in the maximum heat position and cold air at rear roof
discharge air outlets in the maximum cold position.
Does the rear air control (front) operate properly?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check rear air control (front). Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL
(FRONT)".
H
I
2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) OPERATIONAL CHECK
ATC
Press the REAR CTRL switch on rear air control (front) to send control to the rear air control (rear).
Turn the rear blower motor to maximum speed from the rear air control (rear).
Turn rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial slowly clockwise and then counterclockwise
(REAR CTRL indicator on).
K
4. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets in the maximum heat position and cold air at rear roof
discharge air outlets in the maximum cold position.
Does the rear air control (rear) operate properly?
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check rear air control (rear). Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL
(REAR)".
M
CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
1.
2.
3.
3.
Perform a complete operational check (rear) for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-48, "Operational Check (Rear)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
N
O
Check for any service bulletins.
P
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> System OK.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-93
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Rear air control system components are:
• Front air control
• Rear air control (front)
• Rear air control (rear)
• Air mix door motor (rear)
System Operation
WJIA2102E
Rear Air Control
The front air control must be turned on before either rear air control can be used. When the REAR CTRL indicator is off the rear air control (front) will control all rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode
operations. When the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), the rear air control (rear) will control all the
rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode operations.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
SYMPTOM:
• Temperature/mode operation is malfunctioning.
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Revision: August 2007
ATC-94
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 3 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
3
Ground
4.5V
A
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
WJIA2103E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) AUX TEMP POT VOLTAGE
D
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 7 and ground.
E
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
7
Ground
4.5V
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
WJIA2104E
H
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground.
I
Continuity should exist.
ATC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
WJIA2093E
L
5.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 8 and ground.
M
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 8.
N
O
WJIA2105E
6.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-95
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2108E
7.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) AUX TEMP POT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 50 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 7.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2109E
8.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 (B) terminal 8.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2107E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AUX TEMPERATURE POT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear air control (rear).
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector
B150 terminal 7 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (rear): B150
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
7
Ground
4.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2110E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Revision: August 2007
ATC-96
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector
B150 terminal 3 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (rear): B150
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
3
Ground
4.5V
A
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6
WJIA2103E
D
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE RETURN GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 8 and ground.
E
Continuity should exist.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
G
WJIA2105E
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
H
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 9 and ground.
I
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1 and ground.
ATC
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2106E
L
5.CHECK REAR AUX TEMP CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONM
TROL FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 48 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 7.
N
O
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WJIA2111E
6.CHECK REFERENCE VOLATAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR
CONTROL FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
ATC-97
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2108E
7.CHECK REFERENCE RETURN GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND
FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 8.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Magnet Clutch Circuit
WJIA2107E
INFOID:0000000001718872
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - MAGNET CLUTCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Press vent switch ( ).
Press the A/C switch.
Display shows
, A/C. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle and set temperatures.)
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-98
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
A
Check and verify ambient sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit".
>> GO TO 6.
B
6.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Check and verify intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
C
>> GO TO 7.
7.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
D
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
F
The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal
from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control
The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor.
When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns
OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature, refer to the following table.
Ambient temperature °C (°F)
Compressor ON
intake
temperature C (°F)
Compressor OFF
intake temperature C (°F)
0 (32)
2.5 (37)
2.0 (36)
10 (50)
2.5 (37)
2.0 (36)
20 (68)
2.5 (37)
1.5 (35)
30 (86)
2.0 (36)
1.0 (34)
40 (104)
2.0 (36)
1.0 (34)
50 (122)
2.0 (36)
1.0 (34)
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
M
N
O
P
WJIA2112E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-99
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Check intake sensor. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Malfunctioning intake sensor. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
2.PERFORM AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Perform Auto Active Test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
Does magnet clutch operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> •
WITH CONSULT-III
GO TO 5.
•
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
GO TO 6.
No
>> Check 10A fuse (No. 33, located in IPDM E/R), and GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and compressor (magnet
clutch) connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E124
terminal 33 and compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1.
33 – 1
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA0331E
4.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT
Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage direct current to terminal.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-165, "Removal
and Installation for Compressor Clutch".
SJIA0197E
5.CHECK BCM INPUT (COMPRESSOR ON) SIGNAL
Check compressor ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
A/C SW ON
A/C SW OFF
: COMP ON SIG ON
: COMP ON SIG OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
Revision: August 2007
ATC-100
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 27 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 4.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2113E
7.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL)
1.
2.
3.
D
Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 4 and ground.
E
F
Terminals
(+)
Front air control connector
(-)
Terminal No.
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
A/C switch: ON
0V
A/C switch: OFF
5V
G
WJIA2114E
M49
4
Ground
H
OK or NG
I
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when A/C switch is ON, replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when A/C switch is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal ATC
and Installation of BCM".
8.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
K
Start engine.
Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal
70 and ground.
L
Terminals
(+)
ECM connector
Terminal No.
F54
70
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
A/C switch: ON
0.36 - 3.88V
M
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Refer to EC-603.
WJIA2192E
O
9.CHECK BCM INPUT (FAN ON) SIGNAL
Check FAN ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
P
FAN CONTROL SWITCH ON
FAN CONTROL SWITCH OFF
: FAN ON SIG ON
: FAN ON SIG OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-101
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 5.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2115E
11.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (FAN ON SIGNAL)
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 5 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Front air control connector
(-)
Terminal No.
M49
5
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
A/C switch: ON
Blower motor
operates
0V
A/C switch: OFF
5V
WJIA2116E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when blower motor is ON, replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when blower motor is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
12.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Check CAN communication. Refer to ATC-27, "CAN Communication System Description".
• BCM – ECM
• ECM – IPDM E/R
• ECM – Front air control
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part(s).
Insufficient Cooling
INFOID:0000000001718873
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Press the AUTO switch.
2. Turn temperature control dial (driver) counterclockwise until 16° C (32° F) is displayed.
3. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-102
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
A
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer toATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
B
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
C
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 3.
D
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
E
5.CHECK DRIVE BELTS
F
Check compressor belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Adjust or replace compressor belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
G
6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION
H
Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation.
Does air mix door operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace air mix door control linkage.
I
7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION
ATC
Check and verify cooling fan motor for smooth operation. Refer to EC-463, "Description".
Does cooling fan motor operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check cooling fan motor. Refer to EC-463.
K
8.CHECK RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT BEFORE USAGE
L
Check recovery/recycling equipment before connecting to vehicle. Verify there is no pressure in the recovery/
recycling equipment by checking the gauges. If pressure exists, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
M
>> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK REFRIGERANT PURITY
N
1. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle.
2. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling and refrigerant identifier.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Check contaminated refrigerant. Refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
O
10.CHECK FOR EVAPORATOR FREEZE UP
P
Start engine and run A/C. Check for evaporator freeze up.
Does evaporator freeze up?
YES >> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES".
NO
>> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
Check refrigerant pressure with manifold gauge connected. Refer to "Test Reading".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-103
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES".
NG
>> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK AIR DUCTS
Check ducts for air leaks.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> Repair air leaks.
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES
RJIA1601E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-104
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
*1
"PERFORMANCE CHART"
*4
ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*2
"PERFORMANCE CHART"
*3
"Trouble Diagnoses for UNUSUAL
Pressure"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
WJIA0361E
*1
ATC-165, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
Revision: August 2007
*2
ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" *3
ATC-105
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts"
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode switch
(Ventilation) set
Recirculation (REC) switch
(Recirculation) set
Max. speed set
Blower speed (FR and RR)
Engine speed
Idle speed
RR system
ON
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator
°C (°F)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
25 (77)
9.7 - 13.7 (49 - 57)
30 (86)
12.6 - 16.6 (55 - 62)
35 (95)
14.9 - 19.9 (59 - 68)
40 (104)
17.3 - 23.3 (63 - 74)
50-70
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
High-pressure (Discharge side)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
25 (77)
1,059 - 1,294
(10.8 - 13.2, 153.6 - 187.7)
216 - 255
(2.2 - 2.6, 31.3 - 37.0)
30 (86)
1,206 - 1,481
(12.3 - 15.1, 174.9 - 214.8)
255 - 304
(2.6 - 3.1, 37.0 - 44.1)
35 (95)
1,393 - 1,706
(14.2 - 17.4, 202.0 - 247.5)
275 - 343
(2.8 - 3.5, 39.8 - 49.8)
40 (104)
1,510 - 1,844
(15.4 - 18.8, 219.0 - 267.4)
343 - 422
(3.5 - 4.3, 49.8 - 61.2)
50-70
Trouble Diagnoses for Unusual Pressure
Whenever system′s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperatureto-operating pressure table).
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High
Revision: August 2007
ATC-106
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser.
Excessive refrigerant charge in
refrigeration cycle
• Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
• When compressor is
stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approx-
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
• Clean condenser.
• Check and repair cooling fan
as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge system.
Engine tends to overheat.
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair engine cooling system.
• An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas
near the evaporator outlet.
• Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
• Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side
• Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
• Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification.
↓
Improper expansion valve adjustment
AC359A
Refrigerant cycle
E
F
G
H
Replace expansion valve.
I
ATC
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low
Gauge indication
C
D
Poor heat exchange in condenser
(After compressor operation
stops, high-pressure decreases too slowly.)
↓
Air in refrigeration cycle
imately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2,
28 psi). It then decreases
gradually thereafter.
A
B
Insufficient condenser cooling
performance
↓
Air suction by cooling fan is in1.
Condenser fins are
sufficient.
clogged.
2.
Improper fan rotation of
cooling fan
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too high.
Corrective action
Probable cause
Corrective action
K
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor
and condenser are clogged or
crushed.
• Check and repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.
• Check oil for contamination.
L
M
AC360A
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
Refrigerant cycle
N
Probable cause
Corrective action
High- and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor. Refer to
ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor".
No temperature difference between high- and low-pressure
sides.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor. Refer to
ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor".
AC356A
P
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low
Revision: August 2007
ATC-107
O
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Gauge indication
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
AC353A
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
• There is a big temperature
difference between liquid
tank outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
• Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted.
Liquid tank inside is slightly
clogged.
• Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
• Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
• Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side.
High-pressure pipe located be- • Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
tween liquid tank and expan• Check oil for contamination.
sion valve is clogged.
Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
Low refrigerant charge.
↓
Leaking fittings or components.
Check refrigerant system for
leaks. Refer to ATC-179,
"Checking of Refrigerant
Leaks".
There is a big temperature difference between expansion
valve inlet and outlet while the
valve itself is frosted.
Expansion valve closes a little
compared with the specification.
↓
1.
Improper expansion
valve adjustment.
2.
Malfunctioning expansion
valve.
3.
Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
• Remove foreign particles by
using compressed air.
• Check oil for contamination.
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas near
the evaporator outlet.
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
or crushed.
• Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
• Check oil for contamination.
Evaporator is frozen.
• Check intake sensor circuit.
Refer to ATC-125, "Intake
Sensor Circuit".
• Replace compressor. Refer
to ATC-164, "Removal and
Installation for Compressor".
Air flow volume is too low.
• Replace liquid tank.
• Check oil for contamination.
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative.
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
• Air conditioning system does
not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air.
• The system constantly functions for a certain period of
time after compressor is
stopped and restarted.
Refrigerant does not discharge
cyclically.
↓
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
↓
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
• Drain water from refrigerant
or replace refrigerant.
• Replace liquid tank.
AC354A
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative
Revision: August 2007
ATC-108
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
↓
Expansion valve or liquid tank
is frosted.
Leave the system at rest until
no frost is present. Start it
again to check whether or not
the malfunction is caused by
water or foreign particles.
• If water is the cause, initially
cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from
refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
• If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and
remove the particles with dry
and compressed air (not
shop air).
• If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion
valve.
• Replace liquid tank.
• Check oil for contamination.
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
Liquid tank or front/rear side of
expansion valve′s pipe is frosted or dewed.
AC362A
Insufficient Heating
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
INFOID:0000000001718874
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
H
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Press the AUTO switch.
2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver) clockwise until 32° C (90° F) is displayed.
3. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
Can this symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform complete system operational check. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
2.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
I
ATC
K
L
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
M
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
N
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
O
Check for proper engine coolant level. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
Check hoses for leaks or kinks.
Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
Check for air in cooling system.
P
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATER PUMP
1.
2.
Rotate temperature control dial to full hot 32°C (90°F).
Rotate fan control dial counterclockwise to maximum speed.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-109
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Heater pump should be activated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check heater pump circuit. Refer to ATC-110, "Heater Pump Circuit".
6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION
Check the operation of the air mix door.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the air mix door motor circuit. Refer to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
7.CHECK AIR DUCTS
Check for disconnected or leaking air ducts.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair all disconnected or leaking air ducts.
8.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses.
OK or NG
OK
>> Hot inlet hose and a warm outlet hose: GO TO 9.
NG
>> Both hoses warm: GO TO 10.
9.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM
Check engine control temperature sensor. Refer to EC-188.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Retest.
10.CHECK HEATER HOSES
Check heater hoses for proper installation.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> 1. Back flush heater core.
2. Drain the water from the system.
3. Refill system with new engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
4. GO TO 11 to retest.
11.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> Replace heater core. Refer to ATC-140.
Heater Pump Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718875
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Heater pump control system components are:
• Front air control
• Heater pump relay
• Heater pump
• Intake sensor
System Operation
Revision: August 2007
ATC-110
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The heater pump improves heater performance specifically at idle conditions. It is designed to operate in
either of the following 2 situations:
1. Front blower motor set to maximum speed and temperature control dial (driver or passenger) set to full hot
32° C (90° F) or
2. Engine coolant temperature (signal via CAN communication) minus heater core outlet temperature (intake
sensor input to front air control) is greater than 20° C (68° F). If the difference is less than 16° C (61° F),
the heater pump will not operate unless the conditions in item No. 1 above are met.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA1780E
H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR HEATER PUMP CIRCUIT
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO HEATER PUMP
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I
Disconnect heater pump connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set front blower motor to maximum speed.
Turn temperature control dial (passenger or driver) to full hot 32°
C (90° F).
Check voltage between heater pump harness connector E127
terminal 1 and ground.
(1) - Ground
ATC
K
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WJIA2117E
2.CHECK HEATER PUMP GROUND
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between heater pump harness connector E127
terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
L
N
: Continuity should exist.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace heater pump. Refer to ATC-143.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WJIA2118E
3.CHECK HEATER PUMP RELAY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check heater pump relay. Refer to "Heater Pump Relay".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
ATC-111
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace heater pump relay.
4.CHECK RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 terminals 1, 5 and ground.
1 - Ground
5 - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1783E
5.CHECK HEATER PUMP MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (A) terminal 3 and heater pump harness connector E127
(B) terminal 1.
3-1
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (A) terminal 3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2119E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN HEATER PUMP RELAY AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 10 and heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (B) terminal 2.
2 - 10
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (B) terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2120E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Heater Pump Relay
Revision: August 2007
ATC-112
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5.
A
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
B
If NG, replace relay.
C
LHA160
D
Noise
INFOID:0000000001718876
SYMPTOM: Noise
E
INSPECTION FLOW
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-113
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA1972E
*1
ATC-165, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*2
*4
ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)" *5
ATC-165, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*3
ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor"
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts"
Self-Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718877
SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-114
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSPECTION FLOW
A
1.CONFIRM AUTO MODE OPERATION
1.
2.
Press the AUTO switch.
Display should indicate AUTO. (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle and
set temperatures.)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
B
C
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK (FRONT)
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
D
E
F
Check for any service bulletins.
Have any service bulletins been issued?
YES >> Refer to appropriate service bulletin.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air
Control".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refer to MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control".
5.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT
H
I
ATC
Check ambient sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
K
6.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT
L
Check in-vehicle sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
M
7.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT
N
Check optical sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-122, "Optical Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
O
8.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
P
9.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTORS PBR CIRCUIT
Check air mix door motors PBR circuit. Refer to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
ATC-115
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
10.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
Memory Function
INFOID:0000000001718878
SYMPTOM: Memory function does not operate.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - MEMORY FUNCTION
1. Set the temperature to 32°C (90°F).
2. Press the OFF switch.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Press the AUTO switch.
6. Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature.
7. Press OFF switch.
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air
Control".
>> GO TO 6.
6.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-116
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Ambient Sensor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718879
A
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (driver
side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is then input into the front air control.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0338E
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100
seconds.
This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving.
Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor
will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
F
G
H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the
CONSULT-III, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of
conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
I
ATC
K
WJIA2121E
L
1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
M
Disconnect ambient sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E1
terminal 1 and ground.
N
Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
O
WJIA0526E
2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
Revision: August 2007
ATC-117
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E1 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 25.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2122E
3.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Check ambient sensor. Refer to "Ambient Sensor".
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> 1. Replace ambient sensor. ATC-129.
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E1 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 26.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E1 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2123E
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ambient Sensor
Revision: August 2007
ATC-118
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
After disconnecting ambient sensor connector, measure resistance
between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor component side, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
12.73
−10 (14)
9.92
−5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA0527E
If NG, replace ambient sensor. Refer to ATC-129, "Removal and
Installation".
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
H
INFOID:0000000001718880
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
I
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on instrument lower driver panel.
It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air
(drawn in through the integrated fan) into a value. It is then input into
the front air control.
ATC
K
L
WJIA2193E
M
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
N
O
P
LJIA0088E
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2578 or B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 30 or 31 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the
front air control self-diagnosis.
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor motor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2570 or B257E
is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 44 or 46 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting
the front air control self-diagnosis
Revision: August 2007
ATC-119
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND GROUND
Self-diagnosis DTC B2578 or B2579 (with CONSULT-III) or code 30 or 31 (without CONSULT-III) is present.
Refer to ATC-28, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)".
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 7.
2.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR RETURN VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 4 and ground.
Approx. 5V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
LJIA0089E
3.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR VOLTAGE
Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32
terminal 1 and ground.
Approx. 5V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
WJIA2132E
4.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Check in-vehicle sensor. Refer to "In-vehicle Sensor".
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> 1. Replace in-vehicle sensor. Refer to ATC-130, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
5.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 (B) terminal 4 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 26.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1.
2.
WJIA2130E
Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
Go to self-diagnosis ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-120
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
6.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M50
(A) terminal 32.
B
C
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
D
WJIA2131E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> 1.
2.
NG
Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
Go to self-diagnosis ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
>> Repair harness or connector.
7.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR MOTOR VOLTAGE (SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODES 44 OR 46)
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 3 and ground.
H
Battery voltage should exist.
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
ATC
WJIA2159E
8.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT (SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODES 44 OR 46)
K
Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32
terminal 2 and ground.
L
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the in-vehicle sensor. Refer to ATC-130.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
WJIA2128E
N
9.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR MOTOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
(SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODES 44 OR 46)
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-121
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect front air control connector.
2. Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50
(A) terminal 31.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the front air control. Refer to ATC-127,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2127E
COMPONENT INSPECTION
In-vehicle Sensor
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor (1) connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 4 at sensor component side, using
the table below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
21.40
−10 (14)
16.15
−5 (23)
12.29
0 (32)
9.41
5 (41)
7.27
10 (50)
5.66
15 (59)
4.45
20 (68)
3.51
25 (77)
2.79
30 (86)
2.24
35 (95)
1.80
40 (104)
1.45
45 (113)
1.18
WJIA2194E
If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Refer to ATC-130, "Removal and
Installation".
Optical Sensor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718881
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The optical sensor M16 (1) is located on the passenger side
defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by
means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the front air control
WJIA2133E
OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS
Revision: August 2007
ATC-122
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The front air control also includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over
a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in
detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload
detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily
obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly
after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly.
A
B
C
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the
CONSULT-III, DTC B257F or B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a result of
conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
D
E
F
WJIA2134E
G
1.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (DRIVER) CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect optical sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between optical sensor harness connector M16
terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Optical sensor: M16
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
1
Ground
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
I
ATC
WJIA2135E
L
2.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Check voltage between optical sensor harness connector M16 terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Optical sensor: M16
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
2
Ground
5V
K
M
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
O
WJIA2136E
3.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
ATC-123
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector
M16 terminal 3 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace optical sensor. Refer to ATC-131.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WJIA2137E
4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN OPTICAL SENSOR AND BCM
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector
M16 (B) terminal 3 and BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 18.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2169E
5.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (DRIVER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORTED
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector
M16 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector
M16 (B) terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2138E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
6.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORTED
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector
M16 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M50
(A) terminal 42.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector
M16 (B) terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2139E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-124
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Intake Sensor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718882
A
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It
converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator
into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0482E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III,
code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
F
G
H
WJIA2140E
I
1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M305
terminal 2 and ground.
ATC
K
Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
WJIA0465E
2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M305 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 26.
M
N
O
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WJIA2141E
3.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Check intake sensor. Refer to "Intake Sensor".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
ATC-125
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> 1. Replace intake sensor. Refer to ATC-132.
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M305 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 11.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M305 (B) terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2142E
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance
between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
209.0
−10 (14)
160.0
−5 (23)
123.0
0 (32)
95.8
5 (41)
74.9
10 (50)
58.9
15 (59)
46.7
20 (68)
37.3
25 (77)
30.0
30 (86)
24.2
35 (95)
19.7
40 (104)
16.1
45 (113)
13.2
WJIA0978E
If NG, replace intake sensor. Refer to ATC-132, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-126
2008 Quest
CONTROL UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONTROL UNIT
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718883
FRONT AIR CONTROL
B
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the control knobs from the front air control.
Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C".
Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid
C (2).
C
D
E
F
LJIA0196E
4.
G
Remove the front air control.
Installation
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
H
REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
I
Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front).
Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to
EI-38.
ATC
Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the
front roof console assembly (2).
K
L
M
LJIA0195E
4.
Remove the rear air control (front).
N
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
O
Removal
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-127
2008 Quest
CONTROL UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining,
located over the sliding door, RH.
WJIA2143E
2.
Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-128
2008 Quest
AMBIENT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AMBIENT SENSOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718884
REMOVAL
1.
2.
B
Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE:
The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening,
in front of the condenser.
Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient
sensor.
C
D
E
WJIA0341E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-129
2008 Quest
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718885
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-130
2008 Quest
OPTICAL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OPTICAL SENSOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718886
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove the front demister grille. Refer to LT-46, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2).
Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from
the defroster grille.
C
D
E
ALIIA0061ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-131
2008 Quest
INTAKE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718887
Intake Sensor
WJIA0514E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Air mix door motor (passenger)
6.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
7.
Intake sensor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim (1).
LIIA2480E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-132
2008 Quest
INTAKE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH.
A
B
C
LIIA2481E
D
4.
5.
Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-133
2008 Quest
BLOWER MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BLOWER MOTOR
Component
INFOID:0000000001718888
Front Blower Motor
LJIA0017E
1.
Front blower motor
4.
Heater core and evaporator case
2.
Blower motor side cover
3.
Blower motor case
Rear Blower Motor
WJIA2145E
1.
Rear blower motor
Revision: August 2007
2.
Rear blower motor case
ATC-134
3.
Variable blower control (rear)
2008 Quest
BLOWER MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718889
A
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the RH and LH ventilator duct. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the blower motor side cover.
Remove the front blower motor.
C
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
E
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-135
2008 Quest
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718890
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin
microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the
recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located
in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and
cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear
heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin
microfilters.
LJIA0012E
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving
conditions. Refer to MA-7. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter
cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION:
When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure
that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the
direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is
printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters.
Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Install the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-136
LJIA0058E
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718891
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA1968E
1.
High/low pressure pipe (production)
2.
4.
Front heater core pipe and hose as- 5.
sembly
7.
High/low pressure pipe - upper
(service)
⇐
High/low pressure pipe bracket
3.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
Heater pump
6.
High/low pressure pipe - lower
(service)
Front
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-137
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0066E
1.
Rear heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Rear A/C pipes
3.
Rear heater core pipes
4.
Rear heater core hose
5.
Rear blower motor
6.
Underfloor rear A/C pipes
7.
Underfloor rear heater core pipes
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718892
FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core.
Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve.
Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-138
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse
block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to PG-40, "Harness Layout".
9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front heater and
cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one,
and apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
• After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
• Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
• Recharge the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
A
B
C
D
E
F
REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
G
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
H
Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core.
I
Disconnect the rear A/C pipes from the rear expansion valve.
Disconnect the following electrical connectors:
ATC
• Rear blower motor
• Rear blower motor resistor
• Rear air mix door motor
Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit
K
assembly.
Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly.
L
LJIA0021E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one,
and apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
• After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
• Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
• Recharge the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-139
2008 Quest
HEATER CORE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATER CORE
Component
INFOID:0000000001718893
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0017E
1.
Front blower motor
4.
Heater core and evaporator case
Revision: August 2007
2.
Blower motor side cover
ATC-140
3.
Blower motor case
2008 Quest
HEATER CORE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA2146E
1.
Front cover
2.
Evaporator and heater core case
3.
Evaporator
4.
Side cover
5.
Heater core
6.
Rear blower motor
7.
Blower motor case
8.
Variable blower control (rear)
⇐
Front
M
N
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718894
FRONT HEATER CORE
O
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the side cover.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-141
2008 Quest
P
HEATER CORE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the front heater core.
NOTE:
If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking
from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new
ones before installing the new front heater core.
LJIA0019E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR HEATER CORE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core.
LJIA0069E
4.
5.
Remove the rear heater core bracket.
Remove the rear heater core.
LJIA0071E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-142
2008 Quest
HEATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATER PUMP
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718895
Heater Pump
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
WJIA2220E
1.
Cowl top extension
2.
Heater pump electrical connector
3.
Heater pump
4.
Front heater core pipe and hose assembly
5.
Heater hose
⇐
Front
K
REMOVAL
L
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Remove the cowl top. Refer to EI-18.
Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension.
Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly.
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-143
2008 Quest
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718896
Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0514E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Air mix door motor (passenger)
6.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
7.
Intake sensor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the steering member from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-144
2008 Quest
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718897
Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA0446E
1.
Intake door motor (driver)
2.
Air mix door motor (driver)
3.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-145
2008 Quest
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0514E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Air mix door motor (passenger)
6.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
7.
Intake sensor
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718898
DRIVER SIDE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
LJIA0082E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-146
2008 Quest
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
PASSENGER SIDE
Removal
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-147
2008 Quest
MODE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718899
Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0514E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Air mix door motor (passenger)
6.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
7.
Intake sensor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor.
LJIA0083E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-148
2008 Quest
MODE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-149
2008 Quest
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Component
INFOID:0000000001718900
Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0446E
1.
Intake door motor (driver)
Revision: August 2007
2.
Air mix door motor (driver)
ATC-150
3.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
2008 Quest
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
WJIA0514E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Air mix door motor (passenger)
6.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
7.
Intake sensor
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718901
L
M
FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
Removal
N
1.
2.
3.
4.
O
Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
P
LJIA0084E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-151
2008 Quest
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the rear air mix door
motor.
LJIA0021E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-152
2008 Quest
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718902
Variable Blower Control (Front)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA0514E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Air mix door motor (passenger)
6.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
7.
Intake sensor
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-153
2008 Quest
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
WJIA2145E
1.
Rear blower motor
2.
Rear blower motor case
3.
Variable blower control (rear)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718903
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the two variable blower control (rear) screws.
Remove the variable blower control (rear).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-154
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DUCTS AND GRILLES
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718904
Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
WJIA2219E
1.
Defroster nozzle (part of the
instrument panel)
2.
Fresh air duct
3.
Defroster duct
4.
RH side demister duct
5.
RH side demister duct extension
6.
LH side demister duct extension
Revision: August 2007
ATC-155
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
LH side demister duct
8.
RH ventilator duct
9.
Center ventilator duct
10. LH ventilator duct
11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly
12. Floor connector duct
13. Floor junction duct extension
14. Floor junction duct
15. Floor distribution duct
⇐
16. Floor duct
Front
Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0086E
1.
Rear overhead duct
4.
Clips
Revision: August 2007
2.
Rear floor duct
ATC-156
3.
Rear heater and cooling unit assembly
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Grilles
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
LJIA0197E
1.
Overhead console
2.
Overhead console front grilles
3.
Overhead console rear grilles
4.
Front demister grille
5.
LH ventilator grille
6.
Center LH ventilator grille
7.
Center ventilator grille screws
8.
Center RH ventilator grille
9.
Cluster lid C
10. RH ventilator grille
11. Instrument panel
12. RH side demister grille
13. Front pillar finisher RH
Revision: August 2007
ATC-157
2008 Quest
P
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718905
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
NOTE:
The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly.
Removal
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRESH AIR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the defroster nozzle.
Remove the fresh air duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
DEFROSTER DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the defroster duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Installation
Revision: August 2007
ATC-158
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Remove the floor junction duct.
B
C
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION
D
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension.
E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
FLOOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
G
Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-36.
Remove the floor duct.
H
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR OVERHEAD DUCT
I
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the headliner. Refer to EI-24, "Removal and Installation".
ATC
NOTE:
The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is
replaced as an assembly. Refer to EI-38.
K
Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L
REAR FLOOR DUCT
Removal
M
1.
2.
3.
N
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Reposition the floor carpet out of the way.
Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O
GRILLES
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the interior trim panel(s) as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to EI-31 or EI38.
Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-159
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718906
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WJIA2195E
1.
Shut-off valve
A.
Preferred (best) method
2.
A/C service valve
3.
Recovery/recycling equipment
WARNING:
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a)
recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
WJIA2196E
1.
Shut-off valve
2.
A/C service valve
3.
Recovery/recycling equipment
4.
Refrigerant container (HFC-134a)
5.
Weight scale (J-39650)
6.
Evacuating vacuum pump (J-39699)
Revision: August 2007
ATC-160
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Manifold gauge set (J-39183)
C.
For charging
A.
Preferred (best) method
B.
Alternative method
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA1923E
1
ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quanti- 3
ty in Compressor".
ATC-179, "Checking of Refrigerant
Leaks".
2
ATC-179, "Checking of Refrigerant
Leaks".
ATC-102, "Insufficient Cooling".
Revision: August 2007
4
ATC-161
5
ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component
INFOID:0000000001718907
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
WJIA1967E
1.
High-pressure service valve
2.
Low-pressure service valve
3.
High-pressure pipe
4.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
5.
Low-pressure flexible hose
6.
High-pressure flexible hose
7.
Shaft seal
8.
Condenser
9.
Liquid tank
Revision: August 2007
ATC-162
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Pressure relief valve
11. Compressor
12. High/low pressure pipe (production)
13. High/low pressure pipe - upper
(service)
14
15
High/low pressure pipe - lower
(service)
A
Expansion valve (front)
Rear A/C
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
LJIA0016E
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or
around the connection.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-163
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Compressor
INFOID:0000000001718908
Compressor Mounting
WJIA0371E
1.
Stud
2.
Compressor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield.
Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-13, "Checking Drive Belts".
Remove the compressor mounting stud.
Disconnect the compressor connector.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose from the compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one,
then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-164
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
INFOID:0000000001718909
A
Magnet Clutch Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0372E
G
1.
Magnet clutch assembly
2.
Magnet coil
3.
Pulley
4.
Clutch disc
5.
Snap ring
6.
Thermal protector (built in)
7.
Compressor
H
REMOVAL
NOTE:
I
For clarity, the compressor is shown out of the vehicle, but the compressor does not need to be removed to
remove the compressor clutch.
1. Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield.
ATC
2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-13, "Checking Drive Belts".
3. Disconnect the compressor electrical connector.
4. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary
K
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
5.
: J-44614
L
Remove the clutch disc.
M
WHA228
6.
N
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable
tool.
O
P
RHA072C
Revision: August 2007
ATC-165
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the
small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the
puller on the small adapter.
Tool number
: KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION:
To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller
claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not
into the pulley groove.
WJIA1017E
8.
Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
WHA212
9.
Remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil.
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat,
replace clutch disc and pulley.
WHA183
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving,
replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable
solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION:
Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the
compressor front head.
WHA213
Revision: August 2007
ATC-166
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.
3.
Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install
the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
Tool number
:
—
A
B
(J-38873-A)
C
D
WJIA1016E
4.
Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the
original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand.
E
F
G
WHA184
5.
H
Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc
from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Refer to ATC162, "Component".
Tool number
I
: J-44614
CAUTION:
After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch
pulley rotates smoothly.
ATC
K
WHA229
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-167
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as
shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
: 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
7.
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting
spacer to readjust.
8. Connect the compressor electrical connector.
9. Install the drive belt. Refer to MA-13, "Checking Drive Belts".
10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
WHA194
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
INFOID:0000000001718910
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the engine under cover.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
INFOID:0000000001718911
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the engine under cover.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-168
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
A
INFOID:0000000001718912
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Reposition the IPDM E/R aside.
Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck.
Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside.
Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe
5.
6.
7.
8.
D
F
G
INFOID:0000000001718913
H
REMOVAL
2.
3.
4.
C
E
INSTALLATION
1.
B
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
WARNING:
I
• Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose
and throat.
• If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal.
ATC
Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way.
Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the
K
way. Refer to ATC-143, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the
way.
L
Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage".
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool
M
(ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other
surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
N
• A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the
pipe when it is cut.
• Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe.
O
LJIA0182E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-169
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool
(ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other
surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
• A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the
pipe when it is cut.
LJIA0183E
10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of
the cut A/C pipes.
11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure
pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located
near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
LJIA0184E
12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from
the front expansion valve as shown.
• Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
• Electric throttle control actuator (3)
• ⇐: Front
LJIA0185E
13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the
threaded stud on the dash panel as shown.
• ⇐: Front
LJIA0186E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-170
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as
shown.
• ⇐: Front
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable
material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
A
B
C
LJIA0187E
D
15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe.
a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from
under the vehicle.
b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A).
c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe
clamp (2).
NOTE:
Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe
as necessary.
E
F
G
LJIA0188E
d.
Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel
threaded stud, using a suitable tool.
H
I
ATC
LJIA0189E
e.
Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe
(1).
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable
material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
K
L
M
N
LJIA0190E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
• Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
• Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
NOTE:
The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly.
1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections.
NOTE:
To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and
secure it to the dash panel threaded stud.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-171
2008 Quest
O
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment.
a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve
and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown.
• Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
• Electric throttle control actuator (3)
• ⇐: Front
LJIA0185E
b.
Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown.
• ⇐: Front
LJIA0191E
c.
d.
e.
f.
Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low
pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension
strut tower (3) as shown.
Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip
(secured to the dash panel threaded stud).
Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure
pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut
tower (3) as shown to specification.
LJIA0184E
3.
a.
b.
c.
Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe.
CAUTION:
• Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
• Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
• Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection
(1) bolt (A) as shown to specification.
Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp
bolt (B).
As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3).
LJIA0188E
d.
Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-172
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the
upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure
pipe (B) as shown to specification.
• ⇐: Front
CAUTION:
• Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other
surrounding parts when tightening the fittings.
A
B
C
LJIA0191E
D
4.
5.
6.
7.
Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector.
Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer
bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
E
F
INFOID:0000000001718914
REMOVAL
G
1.
2.
H
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and
remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
I
ATC
WJIA0123E
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
• Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for Condenser
INFOID:0000000001718915
L
M
N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-16.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-173
O
P
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such
as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor.
WJIA0124E
6.
Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its
mounts as shown.
WJIA0373E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-174
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator
INFOID:0000000001718916
A
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
LJIA0017E
1.
Front blower motor
4.
Heater core and evaporator case
2.
Blower motor side cover
3.
Blower motor case
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the blower motor side cover.
Remove the front blower motor.
Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover.
L
M
N
O
LJIA0018E
5.
Remove the blower motor case.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-175
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters.
7. Remove the evaporator.
LJIA0019E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones.
Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them.
• When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction
arrow printed on the side of the filters.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-176
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator
INFOID:0000000001718917
A
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
LJIA0020E
1.
Front cover
2.
Evaporator and heater core case
3.
Evaporator
4.
Side cover
5.
Heater core
6.
Rear blower motor
7.
Blower motor case
8.
Variable blower control (rear)
N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
O
Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove the rear blower motor.
Remove the variable blower control (rear).
Revision: August 2007
ATC-177
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove the rear air mix door motor.
5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to ATC158, "Removal and Installation".
6. Disassemble the rear heater and cooling unit assembly to
remove the evaporator.
LJIA0021E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when
installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve
INFOID:0000000001718918
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the cooler grommet.
Remove the expansion valve.
WJIA0128E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve bolts
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt
: 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
: Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve
INFOID:0000000001718919
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pipes from the expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air and contaminants.
Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
ATC-178
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
Expansion valve bolts
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt
: 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
: Refer to ATC-162, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Checking of Refrigerant Leaks
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
2.
3.
4.
D
E
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000001718921
I
Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a
low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye
will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evapoATC
rator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or
cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
K
After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent
future misdiagnosis.
Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak
L
detector (J-41995).
NOTE:
• Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be M
checked are clean.
• Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
• Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any subN
stance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
INFOID:0000000001718922
NOTE:
This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must
be replaced.
1.
2.
C
INFOID:0000000001718920
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra
inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not
properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all
system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe
along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the
component.
CAUTION:
Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will
improve the chances of finding a leak.
1.
B
Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi).
Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into
the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459).
CAUTION:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service
procedures.
Revision: August 2007
ATC-179
2008 Quest
O
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Connect the injector tool (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve.
4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON.
5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a
(R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve.
7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and
location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
INFOID:0000000001718923
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE:
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent.
Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate
device. To use the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995)
properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform
any specified maintenance.
AHA281A
1.
Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the
point to be checked as shown.
SHA707EA
2.
When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the
probe as shown.
SHA706E
Revision: August 2007
ATC-180
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown.
A
B
C
SHA708EA
D
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette
smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the
leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R134a) Service Procedure".
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
E
F
Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) above a temperature of
16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified G
amount of refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa H
(3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) pressure.
Conduct the leak test from the high pressure side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low
pressure side (evaporator drain hose to shaft seal). Refer to ATC-162, "Component". Clean the compoI
nent to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around
the following connections and components.
• Compressor
ATC
• High and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal
• Liquid tank
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Service valves. Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the ser- K
vice valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE:
After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the ser- L
vice valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
• Evaporator
With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in
the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the M
manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant
leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose.
NOTE:
N
Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water
or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak,
O
then repeat the leak check.
Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and
connections.
P
If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11.
Start the engine.
Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
NOTE:
For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually.
A/C switch: ON
Air flow: VENT mode
Revision: August 2007
ATC-181
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
c. Intake position: RECIRCULATION mode
d. Temperature: MAX cold
e. Blower fan speed: HIGH
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following
steps 4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning
the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor.
The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after
the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks
are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
SHA839E
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier
equipment (J-41810-NI).
14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI).
15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as
necessary.
16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant
leaks.
17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Revision: August 2007
ATC-182
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
Service Data and Specification (SDS)
INFOID:0000000001718924
COMPRESSOR
B
Make
ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL
Model
DKS-17D
Type
Swash plate
Displacement
175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3) / revolution
Cylinder bore x stroke
30.5 x 24.0 mm (1.20 x 0.94 in)
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V ribbed
C
D
E
OIL
F
Name
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
Total in system
220 m
Compressor (service part) charging amount
Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor".
Capacity
(7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 lmp fl oz)
REFRIGERANT
G
H
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb)
I
ATC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
ATC-183
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
AV
AUDIO VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 4
Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................49
Noise Inspection ......................................................52
Power Supply Circuit Inspection ..............................53
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Power
and Ground Supply Circuit Inspection .....................54
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Communication Circuit Inspection ........................................55
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Left
Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection .................57
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Right
Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection .................57
Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth) ..............58
Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth) ...................59
AV Switch Check .....................................................61
Audio Communication Line Check (Without NAVI)....61
Audio Communication Line Check (With NAVI) ......62
Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or
Front Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System) ..........62
Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear
Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System) ....................63
Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or
Front Tweeter (BOSE System) ................................64
Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear
Tweeter (BOSE System) .........................................67
Sound Is Not Heard from Center Speaker (BOSE
System) ...................................................................70
Sound Is Not Heard from Subwoofer (BOSE System) .........................................................................70
Removal and Installation .........................................72
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5
AUDIO ................................................................. 6
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 6
System Description ................................................... 7
Schematic ............................................................... 10
Wiring Diagram - AUDIO - ....................................... 15
Audio Unit (Base System) Harness Connector
Terminal Layout ...................................................... 37
Audio Unit (Mid Level System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................. 37
Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit
(Base and Mid Level System) ................................. 37
Audio Unit (Bose System) Harness Connector
Terminal Layout ...................................................... 39
Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit
(BOSE System) ....................................................... 40
BOSE Speaker Amp. Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................................ 43
Terminal and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker
Amp ......................................................................... 43
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........................................... 45
Terminal and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit .................................................... 45
AV Switch Harness Connector Terminal Layout .... 46
Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch ......... 47
Satellite Radio Tuner Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................................ 48
Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio
Tuner ....................................................................... 48
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ......................... 49
Revision: August 2007
AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................. 78
System Description ..................................................78
Wiring Diagram - W/ANT - .......................................79
Location of Antenna .................................................80
Window Antenna Repair ..........................................80
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM .................... 82
AV-1
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................82
System Description ..................................................82
Schematic ................................................................84
2008 Quest
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
Wiring Diagram - DVD - .......................................... 85
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 91
Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 91
Removal and Installation ........................................ 92
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM .................... 94
System Description ................................................. 94
Schematic (With Monochrome Display) .................. 95
Schematic (With Color Display) .............................. 96
Wiring Diagram - INF/D - ........................................ 97
Schematic ..............................................................109
Wiring Diagram - COMM - .....................................110
Display Unit (With Monochrome Display) Harness
Connector Terminal Layout ...................................113
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit
(With Monochrome Display) ..................................113
Display Unit (With Color Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..........................................114
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit
(With Color Display) ...............................................114
Display Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal
Layout ....................................................................116
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control
Unit ........................................................................117
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................119
Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch .......119
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Monochrome Display Unit) .............................................119
Self-Diagnosis Mode .............................................120
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Color
Display) ..................................................................122
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) ..................................123
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode .............................125
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function .......................127
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom ...................127
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Monochrome Display .............................................128
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Color Display .........................................................128
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Display Control Unit ...............................................130
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
AV Switch ..............................................................131
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) .....................................................132
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit ..................................................................132
Illumination Signal Inspection (With Monochrome
Display) ..................................................................133
Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control
Unit ........................................................................134
Ignition Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) .......................................................................134
Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit..134
Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display) .....................................................134
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) ..........................136
Revision: August 2007
AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display) .................................................... 138
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and AV Switch) ................................. 138
Display Communication Line Check (Between
Display Control Unit and Display Unit) .................. 139
Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed ................................................................... 141
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens
Look Bluish) .......................................................... 141
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens
Look Reddish) ....................................................... 142
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens
Look Yellowish) ..................................................... 143
No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination
Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates) ......................... 144
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to
Start Self-Diagnosis) ............................................. 144
Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored ........ 145
CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display) ...................................................................... 145
Steering Wheel Audio Control Switch Check
(Without Bluetooth) ............................................... 145
Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth) ................ 146
Removal and Installation ....................................... 148
NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 150
System Description ............................................... 150
CAN Communication System Description ............ 152
Component Parts Location ................................... 153
Schematic ............................................................. 154
Wiring Diagram - NAVI - ....................................... 155
Schematic ............................................................. 162
Wiring Diagram - COMM - .................................... 163
NAVI Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal
Layout ................................................................... 166
Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control
Unit ........................................................................ 166
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control
Unit ........................................................................ 168
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit .... 168
Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch ....... 168
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 168
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function ........................ 168
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) .................................. 169
Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) ................................. 171
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ............................. 173
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor .......................... 179
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 180
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
NAVI Control Unit .................................................. 180
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Display Control Unit .............................................. 181
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Display Unit ........................................................... 181
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
AV Switch .............................................................. 183
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for NAVI Control
Unit ........................................................................ 184
AV-2
2008 Quest
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit .................................................................. 185
Illumination Signal Inspection for NAVI Control
Unit ........................................................................ 186
Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control
Unit ........................................................................ 186
Ignition Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit .... 186
Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit.. 187
Reverse Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit .. 187
Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
.. 187
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) ...................... 188
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) .......................... 189
Display Communication Line Check (Between
Display Control Unit and Display Unit) .................. 190
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and AV Switch) .................................. 192
CAN Communication Line Check .......................... 193
If NAVI control unit detects that DVD-ROM map Is
not inserted ........................................................... 193
If NAVI control unit detects that inserted DVDROM map Is malfunctioning or if it Is impossible to
load data from DVD-ROM map ............................. 193
If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and
GPS Antenna Is Malfunctioning ............................ 194
Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen ..................... 194
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Bluish) ............................................ 195
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Reddish) ......................................... 196
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Yellowish) ....................................... 197
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens
Look Bluish) .......................................................... 197
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens
Look Reddish) ....................................................... 198
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens
Look Yellowish) ..................................................... 199
NAVI Screen Is Rolling .......................................... 200
Guide Sound Is Not Heard .................................... 201
Screen Is Not Shown ............................................. 202
A/C Screen Is Not Shown (NAVI Screen Is
Shown) .................................................................. 202
FUEL ECONOMY Screen Is Not Shown ............... 203
Average Fuel Economy Display Is Not Shown ("
*** " Is Shown) ....................................................... 203
Distance to Empty Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is
Shown) .................................................................. 203
Driving Distance or Average Speed Display Is Not
Shown (" *** " Is Shown) ........................................ 203
No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination
Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates) .......................... 204
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to
Start Self-Diagnosis) .............................................. 204
Navigation System Does Not Activate ................... 205
Previous NAVI Conditions Are Not Stored ............ 205
Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored ......... 205
Position of Current Location Mark Is Not Correct .. 205
Radio Wave from GPS Satellite Is Not Received .. 205
Driving Test ........................................................... 206
Example of Symptom Judged Not Malfunction ...... 206
Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit .................. 215
Removal and Installation ....................................... 215
TELEPHONE ................................................... 217
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ......................................................................... 217
System Description ................................................ 217
Wiring Diagram - H/PHON - .................................. 219
Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout .............................................................. 221
Terminal and Reference Value for Bluetooth Control Unit .................................................................. 221
Bluetooth Control Unit Self-Diagnosis Function .... 222
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Bluetooth Control Unit ........................................... 222
Removal and Installation ....................................... 223
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-3
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719363
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
AV-4
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001719364
B
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
C
D
PBIC0191E
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-5
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUDIO
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719365
WKIA5227E
1.
Front tweeter LH M109
2.
Combination meter M24
3.
Combination switch (spiral cable) M30,
M102
4.
Display unit M93
5.
Center speaker (with BOSE) M110
6.
Display control unit (with color display)
M94, M95
7.
Front tweeter RH M111
8.
Satellite radio tuner (if equipped)
M128, M129
9.
Steering wheel audio control switches
10. Audio unit M43, M44, M45, M46,
M127, M252
11. AV switch M98
12. BOSE speaker amp (with BOSE) M112,
M113
13. Rear speaker LH, RH
B45, B131
14. Rear tweeter LH
D516
15. Rear tweeter RH
D506
16. Front door speaker LH, RH
D3, D103
17. Subwoofer (with BOSE, driver seat
view)
B11
18. Rear audio remote control unit (if
equipped)
B23
Revision: August 2007
AV-6
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719366
A
BASE SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
• to audio unit terminal 6 and
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to AV switch terminal 1 and
• to display unit terminal 1.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to audio unit terminal 10 and
• to AV switch terminal 2 and
• to display unit terminal 2.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to display unit terminal 3.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
• to AV switch terminal 5 and
• to display unit terminal 6
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then audio signals are supplied
• through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
• to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of rear tweeter LH and RH.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit (If Equipped)
Power is supplied
• from audio unit terminal 32
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13.
Ground is supplied
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
Audio signals are supplied
• through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29
• to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of rear audio remote control unit.
J
AV
L
MID LEVEL SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
• to audio unit terminal 6 and
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to AV switch terminal 1 and
• to display unit terminal 1 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 1 (with color display).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to audio unit terminal 10 and
• to AV switch terminal 2 and
• to display unit terminal 2 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 10 (with color display).
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to display unit terminal 3 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 12 (with color display).
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
• to AV switch terminal 5 and
• to display unit terminal 6 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 3 (with color display).
Revision: August 2007
AV-7
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then audio signals are supplied
• through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
• to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of rear tweeter LH and RH.
Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches
When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes
depending on which button is pushed.
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit (If Equipped)
Power is supplied
• from audio unit terminal 32
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13.
Ground is supplied
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
Audio signals are supplied
• through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29
• to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of rear audio remote control unit.
Speed Sensitive Volume System (If Equipped)
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.
BOSE® SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 15A fuse [No. 18, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to subwoofer terminal 6
• through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
• to audio unit terminal 6 and
• to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 1
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to AV switch terminal 1 and
• to display control unit terminal 1.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to audio unit terminal 10 and
• to AV switch terminal 2 and
• to display control unit terminal 10.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to display control unit terminal 12.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
• to subwoofer terminal 5
• through body grounds B7 and B19 and
• to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 17
• to AV switch terminal 5
• to display unit terminal 1 and
• to display control unit terminal 3
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then audio signals are supplied
• through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
• to BOSE speaker amp. terminals 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 and 30.
Audio signals are amplified by the BOSE speaker amp.
The amplified audio signals are supplied
• through BOSE speaker amp. terminals 2, 3, 9,10,11,12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 and 19
• to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH
Revision: August 2007
AV-8
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to terminals + and - of center speaker
• to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH
• to terminals + and - of rear tweeter LH and RH and
• to terminals 1 and 2 of subwoofer.
A
Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches
When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes
depending on which button is pushed.
B
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit
Power is supplied
• from audio unit terminal 32
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13.
Ground is supplied
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
Audio signals are supplied
• through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29
• to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of rear audio remote control unit.
C
Speed Sensitive Volume System
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.
F
D
E
G
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed)
NOTE:
Factory installed satellite radio systems may be identified by the location of the satellite radio tuner antenna.
Factory installed satellite radio antennas are installed on the front of the roof and dealer installed antennas are H
installed on the rear of the roof.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
I
• to satellite radio tuner terminal 32.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
J
• to satellite radio tuner terminal 36.
Radio signals are supplied from the satellite radio antenna to satellite radio tuner terminal 37.
Audio signals are supplied
• through satellite radio tuner terminals 21, 22, 23 and 24
AV
• to terminals 41, 42, 43 and 44 of audio unit.
Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-9
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719367
BASE SYSTEM
ALNWA0169GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-10
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MID LEVEL SYSTEM (WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0170GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-11
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MID LEVEL SYSTEM (WITH COLOR DISPLAY)
ALNWA0171GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-12
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BOSE SYSTEM (WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0172GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-13
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BOSE SYSTEM
ALNWA0173GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-14
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -
INFOID:0000000001719368
A
BASE SYSTEM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
ALNWA0174GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-15
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4738E
Revision: August 2007
AV-16
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4739E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-17
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALNWA0175GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-18
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MID LEVEL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0176GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-19
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA3159E
Revision: August 2007
AV-20
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4742E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-21
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ALNWA0177GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-22
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH COLOR DISPLAY
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0178GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-23
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALNWA0179GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-24
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0180GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-25
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BOSE SYSTEM
ALNWA0181GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-26
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0182GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-27
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4749E
Revision: August 2007
AV-28
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4750E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-29
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4751E
Revision: August 2007
AV-30
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4752E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-31
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ALNWA0183GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-32
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH COLOR DISPLAY
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0184GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-33
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALNWA0185GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-34
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
ALNWA0186GB
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-35
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
ALNWA0187GB
Revision: August 2007
AV-36
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Audio Unit (Base System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719369
A
B
C
WKIA5202E
D
Audio Unit (Mid Level System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719370
E
F
G
AWNIA0854ZZ
H
Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Base and Mid Level System)
INFOID:0000000001719371
I
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
Item
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
J
AV
2 (L/W)
1 (L/R)
Audio sound
signal front
LH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
L
SKIA0177E
M
4 (W/B)
3 (L/B)
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
O
SKIA0177E
5 (G/W)
Ground
Antenna
signal
6 (Y)
Ground
Battery power
Ground
Illumination
control signal
7 (R/Y)
Revision: August 2007
Output
ON
–
More than 10V
Poor radio reception.
Input
–
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
ON
Illumination
control switch
is operated by
lighting switch
in 1st position.
Changes between 0 and 12V
Input
AV-37
N
Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled.
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
8 (R/L)
Item
–
Ground
Illumination
signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
OFF
Operation
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting switch
is in 1st position.
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
is OFF.
3V or less
Battery voltage
10 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ON
Ignition switch
ACC or ON
14 (G)
13 (B/Y)
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
Example of symptom
Audio unit illumination does not come
on when lighting
switch is in 1st position.
System does not
work properly.
No sound from rear
speaker LH or rear
tweeter LH.
SKIA0177E
16 (L)
15 (R/G)
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
speaker RH or rear
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
21 (BR)
Ground
Remote
control A
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
22 (W)
Ground
Remote
control B
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
23 (W/R)
Ground
Remote
control C
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
24 (Y/B)
Ground
Remote
control D
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
25 (Y)
–
Remote
control
ground
–
–
–
0V
Rear audio remote
control unit switches
do not function.
27 (W)
26 (B)
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
Audio sound
signal LH
No sound from LH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
29 (G)
28 (R)
Audio sound
signal RH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from RH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
Revision: August 2007
AV-38
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
30
31 (Y/G)
32 (Y/R)
Signal
input/
output
Item
–
–
Shield
–
Condition
Ignition
switch
–
Operation
–
A
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
headphones or rear
audio remote control
unit switches not operating properly.
B
C
Ground
Remote
control enable signal
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
D
Ground
Remote
control
switch power supply
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
Battery voltage
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
E
F
65 (B/R)
Ground
Audio RX
Input
ON
Audio information
does not display
properly.
Operate audio
volume
SKIA4403E
66 (BR)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
H
Audio information
does not display
properly.
Operate audio
volume
G
I
J
SKIA4402E
67
–
Shield
–
–
–
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
AV
*1 With satellite radio tuner
*2 With pre-wiring for satellite radio tuner
L
Audio Unit (Bose System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719372
M
N
O
WKIA5225E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-39
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit (BOSE System)
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
–
2 (W)
1 (B)
Item
Audio sound
signal front
LH
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation
INFOID:0000000001719373
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
4 (V)
3 (LG)
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
5 (G/W)
Ground
Antenna
signal
6 (Y)
Ground
Battery power
Ground
Illumination
control signal
7 (R/Y)
Output
ON
–
More than 10V
Poor radio reception.
Input
–
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
ON
Illumination control switch is operated by lighting
switch in 1st position.
Changes between 0 and 12V
Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled.
Input
8 (R/L)
Ground
Illumination
signal
Input
OFF
Lighting switch is
in 1st position.
Battery voltage
Audio unit illumination does not come
on when lighting
switch is in 1st position.
10 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ON
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
–
–
–
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
–
More than 6.5V
Amp. does not work
properly.
11
12 (G/W)
14 (BR)
–
Shield
Ground
Amp. ON
signal
Output
ON
13 (B/R)
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
speaker LH or rear
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: August 2007
AV-40
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
Item
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
Example of symptom
B
16 (L)
15 (B/W)
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
speaker RH or rear
speaker RH.
Receive audio
signal
D
SKIA0177E
21 (BR)
22 (W)
23 (W/R)
24 (Y/B)
25 (Y)
Ground
Ground
Remote
control A
Output
Remote
control B
Output
Ground
Remote
control C
Ground
Remote
control D
–
Remote
control
ground
Output
Output
–
ON
ON
ON
ON
–
Audio unit ON
Audio unit ON
Audio unit ON
Audio unit ON
–
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
5V
C
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
0V
Rear audio remote
control switches do
not function.
E
F
G
H
I
27 (W)
26 (B)
Audio sound
signal LH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from LH
headphone channel.
J
AV
SKIA0177E
L
29 (G)
28 (R)
Audio sound
signal RH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from RH
headphone channel.
M
SKIA0177E
30
31 (Y/G)
32 (Y/R)
–
Shield
–
–
–
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
headphones or rear
audio remote control
unit switches not operating properly.
Ground
Remote
control enable signal
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
Ground
Remote
control
switch power supply
Output
ON
Audio unit ON
Battery voltage
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
Revision: August 2007
AV-41
2008 Quest
N
O
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
42 (R)
Item
–
41 (G)
Audio signal LH
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Receive satellite
radio tuner signal.
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
No sound on LH
channel when satellite radio signal is received.
SKIB3609E
44 (B)
43 (W)
Audio signal RH
Input
ON
No sound on RH
channel when satellite radio signal is received.
Receive satellite
radio tuner signal.
SKIB3609E
45
46
48 (L)
–
Ground
Shield
REQ1
(AUDIOSAT)
–
Input
–
ON
ON
–
–
–
Approx. 0 V
Set to the satellite
radio mode
–
SKIB3825E
49
(V) *1
(W/R) *2
Ground
Communication signal
(AUDIOSAT)
Input
ON
Set to the satellite
radio mode
–
SKIB3824E
50
(LG) *1
(B/R) *2
Ground
Communication signal
(SAT-AUDIO)
Output
ON
Set to the satellite
radio mode
–
SKIB3826E
65 (B/R)
Ground
Audio RX
Input
ON
Operate audio
volume
Audio does not operate properly.
SKIA4403E
Revision: August 2007
AV-42
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
Item
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
A
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
B
66 (BR)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
Operate audio
volume
ON
Audio does not operate properly.
D
SKIA4402E
67
–
Shield
–
ON
–
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
0V
C
E
*1 With satellite radio tuner
*2 With pre-wiring for satellite radio tuner
F
BOSE Speaker Amp. Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719374
G
H
I
WKIA5204E
Terminal and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp
Terminal
(wire color)
+
–
1 (Y)
Ground
Item
Battery
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
–
–
INFOID:0000000001719375
Reference value
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Example of
symptom
System does not
work properly.
J
AV
L
M
9 (G)
10 (B/Y)
Rear speaker
LH and rear
tweeter LH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
speaker LH or rear
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
N
SKIA0177E
O
11 (L)
12 (R/G)
Rear speaker
RH and rear
tweeter RH
Output
ON
No sound from rear
speaker RH or rear
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: August 2007
AV-43
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(wire color)
+
13 (L/W)
Item
–
14 (L/R)
Front door
speaker LH
and front
tweeter LH
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Receive audio
signal
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
No sound from
front door speaker
LH or front tweeter
LH.
SKIA0177E
15 (W/B)
16 (L/B)
Front door
speaker RH
and front
tweeter RH
17 (B)
Ground
Ground
18 (O)
2 (O/B)
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
–
ON
–
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from
front door speaker
RH or front tweeter
RH.
SKIA0177E
Center speaker
–
–
No sound from
center speaker.
SKIA0177E
19 (W)
3 (G)
Subwoofer
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from
subwoofer.
SKIA0177E
22
(LG/R)
Ground
Subwoofer ON
signal
Input
ON
–
24 (L)
23 (B/W)
Audio sound
signal rear RH
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal
More than 6.5V
Subwoofer does
not work properly.
No sound from rear
speaker RH or rear
tweeter RH.
SKIA0177E
26 (BR)
25 (B/R)
Audio sound
signal rear LH
Input
ON
No sound from rear
speaker LH or rear
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
Revision: August 2007
AV-44
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(wire color)
+
Signal
input/
output
Item
–
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
A
B
28 (V)
Audio sound
signal front RH
27 (LG)
Input
ON
No sound from
front door speaker
RH or front tweeter
RH.
Receive audio
signal
D
SKIA0177E
30 (W)
Audio sound
signal front LH
29 (B)
Input
ON
No sound from
front door speaker
LH or front tweeter
LH.
Receive audio
signal
C
E
F
SKIA0177E
31 (G/W)
Amp. ON signal
Ground
Input
ON
–
More than 6.5V
Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
System does not
work properly.
G
INFOID:0000000001719376
H
I
J
WKIA5205E
AV
Terminal and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719377
L
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
Item
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
M
N
2 (W)
1 (B)
Audio sound
signal LH
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from LH
headphone channel.
O
SKIA0177E
P
4 (G)
3 (R)
Audio sound
signal RH
Input
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from RH
headphone channel.
SKIA0177E
Revision: August 2007
AV-45
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
Item
–
5
–
6 (R/L)
Ground
7 (W)
–
8 (Y/G)
Ground
9 (B)
Shield
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Example of symptom
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
headphones or rear
audio remote control
unit switches not operating properly.
Battery voltage
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
illuminate.
0V
Rear audio remote
control unit switches
do not function.
–
–
Input
ON
–
–
Remote
control enable signal
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate.
Ground
Remote
control A
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
10 (W)
Ground
Remote
control B
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
11 (G/R)
Ground
Remote
control C
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
12 (Y/B)
Ground
Remote
control D
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
5V
Rear audio remote
control unit does not
operate properly.
13 (Y/R)
Ground
Remote
control
switch power supply
Input
ON
Audio unit ON
Battery voltage
Rear audio remote
control does not operate.
15 (B)
–
–
ON
0V
–
Illumination
Remote
control
ground
Ground
–
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting switch
ON
–
AV Switch Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719378
WKIA5206E
Revision: August 2007
AV-46
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch
INFOID:0000000001719379
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
C
+
–
1 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
2 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
3 (R/L)
Ground
Illumination
signal
Lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Input
OFF
Battery voltage
AV switch illumination does not
come on when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Turn lighting switch
OFF.
Approx. 3.0V or less
Changes between 0 and 12V.
AV switch illumination cannot be
controlled.
0V
–
Input
ON
Illumination control
switch is operated
by lighting switch in
1st position.
4 (R/Y)
Ground
Illumination
control signal
5 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
6 (V)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
–
System does not
work properly.
D
E
F
G
H
I
SKIA0175E
7
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
–
–
J
8 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (-)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
L
SKIA0176E
12
(R) *1
(V) *2
13
(G) *1
(G/O) *2
14
(B/Y) *1
(R/B) *2
Ground
Ground
–
Remote control A
Remote control B
Remote control ground
Input
Input
–
ON
ON
–
Press MODE switch
0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
0.75V
Press VOL UP
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
Press POWER
switch
0V
Press SEEK DOWN
switch
0.75V
Press VOL DOWN
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
–
–
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
O
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
P
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
*2 With bluetooth control unit
AV-47
M
N
*1 Without bluetooth control unit
Revision: August 2007
AV
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Satellite Radio Tuner Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719380
WKIA5207E
Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
–
22 (R)
21 (G)
Item
Audio signal LH
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation
INFOID:0000000001719381
Voltage
(approx.)
Receive audio signal.
SKIB3609E
24 (B)
23 (W)
Audio signal RH
Output
ON
Receive audio signal.
SKIB3609E
25
26
28 (L)
–
Ground
Shield
REQ1
(SAT-AUDIO)
–
Output
–
–
ON
ON
–
Approx. 0 V
Set to the satellite radio
mode
SKIB3825E
29
(V) *1
(W/R) *2
Ground
Communication signal
(SAT-AUDIO)
Output
ON
Set to the satellite radio
mode
SKIB3824E
Revision: August 2007
AV-48
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
Item
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
A
Voltage
(approx.)
B
30
(LG) *1
(B/R) *2
Ground
Communication signal
(AUDIO-SAT)
Input
ON
Set to the satellite radio
mode
C
SKIB3826E
32 (Y)
36 (V)
37
Ground
–
Battery power supply
ACC power supply
OFF
Input
Antenna signal
ACC
–
−
Battery voltage
–
–
D
E
*1 With satellite radio tuner
*2 With pre-wiring for satellite radio tuner
F
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
INFOID:0000000001719382
It can check ON/OFF operation of each switch in the AV switch and diagnose the input signals from the steering switch.
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
2.
3.
G
H
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC.
While pressing the “4” switch, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) If unable
to start self-diagnosis mode refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)".
Press each switch and listen for beep.
I
J
AV
WKIA5232E
EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
• Turn ignition switch OFF. Then the self-diagnosis ends.
L
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• It can check for continuity of the switches by sounding a beep when each AV switch and steering switch is
pressed.
• It can check for continuity of harness between AV switch and steering switch.
Trouble Diagnosis
M
INFOID:0000000001719383
N
The majority of audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference, etc.).
Check the inspection items below to diagnose the malfunction.
O
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE AND MID LEVEL SYSTEM)
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-49
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Possible cause
Inoperative
• Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
• Audio communication line check. Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication
Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV136, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and
Audio Unit)" (with color display).
• AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Steering switch does not operate
• Steering switch check. Refer to AV-58, "Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth)".
• AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Audio screen is not shown
• Display unit check. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display).
• Display control unit check. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with color display).
All speakers do not sound
• Audio unit
One or several speakers do not sound
• Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-62, "Sound Is Not Heard from Front
Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System)".
• Rear speaker check. Refer to AV-63, "Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System)".
Poor sound
• Audio unit
• Speaker
Noisy
• Audio unit
• Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM)
Before proceeding on models with NAVI, confirm that other AV switch functions (except audio functions) operate. If not, refer to AV-204, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)".
Symptom
Possible cause
Inoperative
• Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
• AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (without NAVI) or AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (with NAVI).
• Audio communication line check (without NAVI). Refer to AV-134, "Audio
Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)".
• Audio communication line check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)".
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Steering switch does not operate
• Steering switch check. Refer to AV-58, "Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth)".
• AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (without NAVI) or AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (with NAVI).
• Audio communication line check (without NAVI). Refer to AV-134, "Audio
Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)".
• Audio communication line check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)".
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Audio screen is not shown
• Display unit check. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (without NAVI),
AV-169, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" (with NAVI).
All speakers do not sound
• Audio unit
• BOSE speaker amp. power supply and ground circuit check. Refer to AV-53,
"Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
• BOSE speaker amp. ON signal
• BOSE speaker amp.
Revision: August 2007
AV-50
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Possible cause
A
• Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-64, "Sound Is Not Heard from Front
Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System)".
• Rear speaker check. Refer to AV-67, "Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (BOSE System)".
• Subwoofer check. Refer to AV-70, "Sound Is Not Heard from Subwoofer
(BOSE System)".
• Center speaker check. Refer to AV-70, "Sound Is Not Heard from Center
Speaker (BOSE System)".
C
Poor sound
• Audio unit
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Speaker
D
Noisy
• Audio unit
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
One or several speakers do not sound
B
E
FOR RADIO ONLY
Symptom
F
Possible cause
No sound
• Audio unit
• Antenna feeder, wiring or connections
• Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections
Noisy
•
•
•
•
•
•
All radio stations stored in memory are deleted
• Audio unit power circuit. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
• Audio unit
Audio unit
Antenna feeder, wiring or connections
Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections
Noise prevention parts
Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
Wire harness of each piece of electrical equipment
G
H
I
NOTE:
J
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mounAV
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
L
FOR CD ONLY
Symptom
Possible cause
M
CD cannot be inserted.
CD cannot be ejected.
The CD cannot be played.
Audio unit
N
The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted.
FOR SATELLITE RADIO TUNER (FACTORY INSTALLED) ONLY
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-51
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Possible cause
Inoperative
• Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) power and ground circuit inspection.
Refer to AV-54, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Power and Ground
Supply Circuit Inspection".
• Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) communication circuit inspection. Refer to AV-55, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Communication Circuit
Inspection".
If above check is OK, replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to
AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Right or left channel does not sound
• Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) right channel audio signal circuit inspection. Refer to AV-57, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Right
Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection".
• Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) left channel audio signal circuit inspection. Refer to AV-57, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Left Channel
Audio Signal Circuit Inspection".
If above check is OK, replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to
AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Poor reception
• Location of vehicle. Make certain vehicle is in an open area (clear view of
sky).
• Satellite radio antenna or antenna feeder. Refer to AV-80, "Location of Antenna".
Noisy
• Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) ground.
• Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness shield wires.
• Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.). Refer to AV-52, "Noise
Inspection".
NOTE:
Pressing the SAT button, the display unit will display `NO SAT' when the following conditions exist:
• Loss of power to the satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
• Open or short in the REQ1, TXD, or RXD circuits.
If the satellite antenna is disconnected or inoperative, the display unit will display ANTENNA.
Noise Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719384
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE
Occurrence condition
Occurs only when engine is ON.
Possible cause
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
• Ignition components
A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed is
high. A booming noise occurs while the engine is
running and the lighting switch is ON.
• Generator
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump.
Noise only occurs when various
electrical components are operating.
Revision: August 2007
• Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches.
• Relay malfunction, radio malfunction
The noise occurs when various motors are operating.
• Motor case ground
• Motor
AV-52
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Occurrence condition
Possible cause
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
• Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna amplifier or antenna feeder line
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions.
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
it is vibrating excessively.
• Ground wire of body parts
• Ground due to improper part installation
• Wiring connections or a short circuit
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
A
B
C
INFOID:0000000001719385
1.CHECK FUSES
D
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit
Terminals
6
Audio unit
Signal name
Battery power
E
Fuse No.
31
10
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
AV switch
1
Battery power
19
BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE)
1
Battery power
31
Subwoofer (BOSE system)
6
Battery power
18
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
H
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
I
Disconnect audio unit, subwoofer (with BOSE) or BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) connector.
Check voltage between the audio unit and ground.
Terminal No.
Unit
(+)
Connector
Audio unit
Terminal
J
(-)
OFF
ACC
ON
6
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
10
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M43
AV
L
SKIA1992E
M
3.
Check voltage between subwoofer (BOSE system) and ground.
Terminal No.
Unit
Subwoofer
(+)
Connector
Terminal
B11
6
N
(-)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
O
P
WKIA1162E
4.
Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) and ground.
Revision: August 2007
AV-53
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Unit
BOSE
speaker
amp.
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M113
1
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
(-)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
SKIA4311E
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between subwoofer (BOSE system) harness
connector B11 terminal 5 and BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE)
harness connector M113 terminal 17 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1163E
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Power and Ground Supply Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719386
1.CHECK FUSES
• Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit
Terminals
Satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
Signal name
Fuse No.
32
Battery power
31
36
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) M128 connector.
Check voltage between the satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and ground.
Terminal No.
Unit
(+)
Connector
Satellite
radio tuner
(factory installed)
Terminal
(-)
OFF
ACC
ON
32
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
36
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M128
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: August 2007
WKIA4539E
AV-54
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
A
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Inspect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) case ground.
Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 (A) and audio unit connector M127 (B).
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit.
B
C
Terminals
Satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
Connector
Terminal
A: M128
25
26
Audio unit
Connector
B: M127
Continuity
D
Terminal
45
Yes
46
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness, connector or satellite radio tuner (factory installed) case ground.
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Communication Circuit Inspection
E
WKIA4540E
F
G
INFOID:0000000001719387
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 and audio unit connector M127.
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector M128 (A) terminal 28 and audio unit harness
connector M127 (B) terminal 48
J
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector M128 (A) terminal 28 and ground.
AV
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA4541E
2.CHECK HARNESS - 2
1.
L
M
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector M128 (A) terminal 29 and audio unit harness
connector M127 (B) terminal 49
N
Continuity should exist.
2.
O
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector M128 (A) terminal 29 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA4542E
3.CHECK HARNESS - 3
Revision: August 2007
AV-55
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector M128 (A) terminal 30 and audio unit harness
connector M127 (B) terminal 50
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector M128 (A) terminal 30 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA4543E
4.CHECK REQ1 SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector and audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 terminal 28 and ground with CONSULT-llI
or oscilloscope.
28 - Ground
: Refer to AV-48, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
WKIA4544E
5.CHECK TXD SIGNAL
1.
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 terminal 29 and ground with CONSULT-llI
or oscilloscope.
29 - Ground
: Refer to AV-48, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
WKIA4545E
6.CHECK RXD SIGNAL
1.
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 terminal 30 and ground with CONSULT-lIl
or oscilloscope.
30 - Ground
: Refer to AV-48, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to
AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
Revision: August 2007
AV-56
WKIA4546E
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Left Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719388
A
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 (A) and audio unit connector M127 (B).
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit.
B
C
Terminals
Satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
Connector
Terminal
A: M128
4.
Audio unit
Connector
21
Continuity
41
B: M127
22
D
Terminal
Yes
42
E
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
and ground.
WKIA4547E
F
Terminals
Satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
Connector
A: M128
Terminal
21
Continuity
—
Ground
22
G
No
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
I
2.CHECK LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
connector M128 terminals 21 and 22 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
21 - 22
J
AV
: Refer to AV-48, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to
AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
L
M
WKIA4548E
N
Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Right Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719389
O
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 (A) and audio unit connector M127 (B).
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit.
Revision: August 2007
AV-57
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
Satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
Connector
A: M128
4.
Terminal
Audio unit
Connector
23
B: M127
24
Continuity
Terminal
43
Yes
44
Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
and ground.
WKIA4549E
Terminals
Satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
Connector
A: M128
Terminal
23
Continuity
—
Ground
24
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
connector M128 terminals 23 and 24 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
23 - 24
: Refer to AV-48, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to
AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth)
WKIA4550E
INFOID:0000000001719390
1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
2. Operate steering switch.
Does steering switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV switch connector and spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and AV switch harness connector terminal.
Revision: August 2007
AV-58
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
A
AV switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
32
M30
B
13
31
M98
14
24
4.
Continuity
Yes
12
C
Check continuity between AV switch and ground.
LKIA0189E
D
Terminals
AV switch (+)
Connector
Continuity
(–)
Terminal
E
12
M98
13
Ground
No
14
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
G
3.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
Check continuity between spiral cable connector terminals.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
32
M30
31
24
Terminal
H
Continuity
I
16
M102
17
Yes
20
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36.
WKIA4424E
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals.
Terminal
16
20
17
17
Signal name
L
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Seek (down)
Depress (station) down switch.
Power
Depress power switch.
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
652
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
AV
M
165
0
N
O
0
WKIA4457E
652
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth)
P
INFOID:0000000001719391
1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1.
Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
Revision: August 2007
AV-59
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Operate steering switch.
Does steering switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV switch connector and bluetooth control unit connector.
Check continuity between AV switch connector (A) M98 terminals 12, 13, and 14 and bluetooth control
unit connector (B) B506 terminals 17, 18, and 19.
Terminal No.
AV switch
(A)
Connector
Bluetooth control unit
(B)
Terminal
Connector
12
M98
Terminal
17
13
B506
14
4.
Continuity
18
Yes
19
Check continuity between AV switch and ground.
WKIA5248E
Terminal No.
AV switch (+)
(A)
Connector
(–)
Continuity
Terminal
12
M98
13
Ground
No
14
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
3.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
Disconnect spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between bluetooth control unit connector (A) B506 terminals 12, 13, and 14 and spiral
cable connector (B) M30 terminals 24, 32, and 31.
Terminals
Bluetooth control unit
(A)
Connector
Terminal
Spiral cable
(B)
Connector
12
B506
13
Continuity
Terminal
24
M30
14
32
Yes
31
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA5249E
4.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
Revision: August 2007
AV-60
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between spiral cable connector terminals.
A
Connector
Terminal
Connector
32
M30
31
24
Terminal
Continuity
16
M102
17
B
Yes
20
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36.
C
WKIA4424E
5.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
D
Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals.
E
Terminal
16
20
17
17
Signal name
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Seek (down)
Depress (station) down switch.
Power
Depress power switch.
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
652
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
F
165
0
G
0
WKIA4457E
652
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace bluetooth control unit. Refer to AV-223, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
AV Switch Check
I
INFOID:0000000001719392
J
1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
Perform AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
Does AV switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
AV
L
2.CHECK AV SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check AV switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-131, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch" (without NAVI) or AV-183, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch"
(with NAVI).
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair malfunctioning part.
Audio Communication Line Check (Without NAVI)
N
O
Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and Audio Unit)" (with color display).
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning part.
AV-61
M
INFOID:0000000001719393
1.CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE
Revision: August 2007
H
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Audio Communication Line Check (With NAVI)
INFOID:0000000001719394
1.CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE
Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and Audio Unit)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning part.
Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base and Mid Level
System)
INFOID:0000000001719395
1.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and front door speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH).
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and suspect speaker or tweeter harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
Connector
2
D3
1
4
M43
D103
3
2
M109
1
4
M111
3
3.
Continuity
Terminal
+
+
-
Yes
+
+
-
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and ground.
WKIA1220E
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Terminal
—
Continuity
2
M43
1
4
Ground
No
3
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
2.FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect audio unit connector and front speaker or tweeter connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Revision: August 2007
AV-62
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
A
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Terminal
2
M43
B
(-)
Reference
signal
C
1
M43
4
D
Receive
audio
signal
3
E
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
F
G
SKIA4278E
Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System)
INFOID:0000000001719396
H
1.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
I
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and rear speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH).
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
J
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
Connector
13
B45
14
15
M44
B131
16
13
D516
14
15
D506
16
3.
Continuity
AV
Terminal
+
L
+
Yes
-
M
+
-
N
+
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and ground.
O
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Terminal
—
Continuity
WKIA1164E
13
M44
14
15
Ground
No
16
Revision: August 2007
AV-63
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
2.REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect audio unit connector and rear speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
Connector
14
M44
16
Condition
Reference
signal
Terminal
13
M44
15
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
SKIA4281E
Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System)
INFOID:0000000001719397
1.HARNESS CHECK
1.
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and front door speaker and tweeter connector (LH or
RH).
Revision: August 2007
AV-64
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
A
B
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
Connector
13
D3
14
15
D103
16
M112
13
M109
14
15
M111
16
3.
Continuity
Terminal
C
+
+
+
D
Yes
E
+
-
F
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and ground.
G
WKIA1221E
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Terminal
—
Continuity
H
13
M112
14
15
Ground
I
No
16
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
AV
2.FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and suspect speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-65
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Connector
Terminal
Terminal
13
M112
Condition
Reference
signal
14
M112
15
16
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal
and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SKIA4283E
3.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
BOSE speaker amp.
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
1
M43
29
2
30
M112
3
27
4
4.
Continuity
Yes
28
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground.
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Terminal
—
Continuity
1
M43
2
3
Ground
No
SKIA4284E
4
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
4.FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
Connect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector.
Revision: August 2007
AV-66
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push “POWER” switch.
4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
A
B
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
2
Condition
Reference
signal
C
1
D
M43
4
M43
Receive
audio
signal
3
E
SKIA0177E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
G
SKIA4278E
Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (BOSE System)
1.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
I
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and rear speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH).
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Terminal
9
10
11
M112
12
9
10
11
12
3.
H
INFOID:0000000001719398
J
AV
Speaker or tweeter
Connector
B45
B131
D516
D506
Continuity
Terminal
L
+
+
+
M
Yes
N
+
-
O
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and ground.
P
WKIA1165E
Revision: August 2007
AV-67
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
—
Terminal
Continuity
9
10
M112
Ground
11
No
12
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
2.REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and suspect speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
Connector
9
M112
11
Condition
Reference
signal
Terminal
10
M112
12
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal
and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SKIA4314E
3.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector M112.
Revision: August 2007
AV-68
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal.
A
B
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
BOSE speaker amp.
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
13
26
M112
15
23
16
4.
C
25
14
M44
Continuity
Yes
D
24
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground.
E
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
—
Terminal
F
Continuity
13
G
SKIA4315E
14
M44
Ground
15
No
H
16
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
I
4.REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Connect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector M112.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M44
terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
AV
L
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Condition
(-)
Terminal
Connector
14
Reference
signal
M
Terminal
13
N
M44
16
M44
15
Receive
audio
signal
O
SKIA0177E
P
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
SKIA4316E
Revision: August 2007
AV-69
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Sound Is Not Heard from Center Speaker (BOSE System)
INFOID:0000000001719399
1.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M113 terminals and center speaker harness connector M110
terminals.
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Center speaker
Terminal
Connector
2
M113
Terminal
M110
18
Continuity
+
Yes
WKIA1222E
3.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M113 terminals and ground.
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
—
Terminal
2
M113
Continuity
Ground
18
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
2.CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M113 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
Connector
Condition
Reference
signal
Terminal
WKIA1223E
M113
18
M113
2
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Sound Is Not Heard from Subwoofer (BOSE System)
INFOID:0000000001719400
1.CHECK FUSE
Revision: August 2007
AV-70
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
A
Unit
Terminal
Subwoofer
Signal name
6
Battery power
Fuse No.
18
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect subwoofer connector.
Check voltage between the subwoofer and ground.
B
C
D
Terminal No.
Unit
(+)
Subwoofer
Connector
Terminal
B11
6
(-)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
E
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
G
WKIA1166E
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between subwoofer harness connector B11
terminal 5 and ground.
I
Continuity should exist.
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
AV
WKIA1167E
4.CHECK SUBWOOFER AMP. ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect subwoofer connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Operate system and check voltage between subwoofer harness
connector B11 terminal 4 and ground.
L
M
N
Voltage
: More than approx. 6.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
O
P
WKIA1168E
5.HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connectors.
Revision: August 2007
AV-71
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and subwoofer harness connector terminal.
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
3
B11
1
19
B11
2
M113
4.
Subwoofer
Yes
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and ground.
WKIA1169E
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Terminal
3
M113
Continuity
—
Ground
19
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
6.SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Reference
signal
WKIA1170E
M113
19
M113
3
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719401
AUDIO UNIT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect electrical connectors.
Revision: August 2007
AV-72
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the audio unit (1) by removing the screws (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors.
A
B
C
WKIA5256E
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
AV SWITCH
Removal
1.
2.
F
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C".
Remove screws (A) and AV switch (1).
G
H
I
LKIA0710E
J
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AV
BOSE SPEAKER AMP.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
L
Disconnect battery negative terminal.
Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove Bose speaker amp (1) by removing the screws (A) and
disconnecting the harness connector (2).
M
N
O
WKIA5257E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
BOSE SUBWOOFER
Removal
1.
Remove pedal adjusting switch and power seat switch LH.
Revision: August 2007
AV-73
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove outer pedestal finisher.
3. Remove front seat LH. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove Bose subwoofer.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal
1.
2.
Remove combination meter cover. Refer to IP-10.
Remove the center speaker (1) by removing the screws (A) and
disconnecting the harness connector.
LKIA0718E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three front door speaker screws.
Remove the front door speaker.
Disconnect front door speaker electrical connector.
WKIA1173E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT TWEETER
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front speaker cover. Refer to IP-10.
Remove the front tweeter (1) by removing the screws (A) and
disconnecting the harness connector.
LKIA0719E
Revision: August 2007
AV-74
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
REAR SPEAKER
Removal
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three rear speaker screws and remove speaker.
Disconnect rear speaker electrical connector.
D
E
WKIA1175E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
REAR AUDIO CONTROL UNIT
G
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Carefully remove the rear audio remote control unit from the
headlining.
CAUTION:
Wrap removal tool with clean shop cloth to prevent damage
to the headlining.
Disconnect rear audio electrical connector.
Remove the rear audio remote control unit.
H
I
J
WKIA1201E
AV
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L
REAR TWEETER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
M
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove push pins and remove tweeter.
Disconnect connector.
N
O
P
WKIA1176E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Revision: August 2007
AV-75
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove front roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38.
Disconnect satellite radio antenna.
Remove satellite radio antenna nut (A).
Remove satellite radio antenna.
LKIA0675E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SATLLITE RADIO TUNER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Disconnect satellite radio tuner connectors.
Remove satellite radio tuner bolts (1).
LKIA0664E
4.
Remove satellite radio tuner unit.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES
Removal
1.
2.
Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation".
Remove horn switch screws and remove horn switch.
WKIA1224E
Revision: August 2007
AV-76
2008 Quest
AUDIO
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove steering wheel rear cover screws and remove steering
wheel rear cover.
A
B
C
WKIA1225E
D
4.
Remove steering wheel switch assembly screws and steering
wheel switches.
E
F
G
WKIA1226E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-77
2008 Quest
AUDIO ANTENNA
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUDIO ANTENNA
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719402
With the ignition switch in ACC or ON, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the antenna amp.
When the radio switch is turned ON, antenna signal is supplied
• through audio unit terminal 5
• to the antenna amp. terminal 1.
Then the antenna amp. is activated.
The amplified radio signals are supplied to the audio unit through the antenna amp.
Revision: August 2007
AV-78
2008 Quest
AUDIO ANTENNA
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - W/ANT -
INFOID:0000000001719403
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4960E
Revision: August 2007
AV-79
2008 Quest
P
AUDIO ANTENNA
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Location of Antenna
INFOID:0000000001719404
WKIA4247E
←: To audio unit
1.
Satellite radio tuner (if equipped)
M128, M129
2.
M502, M601
3.
M48, M501
4.
M64, M350
5.
M351
6.
Satellite radio antenna (if equipped, factory installed)
7.
Antenna feeder
8.
Window antenna grid RH
9.
Antenna amp. M602
10. Window antenna grid LH
Window Antenna Repair
INFOID:0000000001719405
ELEMENT CHECK
1.
Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on
each side.
SEL250I
Revision: August 2007
AV-80
2008 Quest
AUDIO ANTENNA
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger.
A
B
C
SEL122R
D
2.
If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEL252I
3.
To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication
will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point.
AV
L
M
N
SEL253I
Element Repair
O
Refer to GW-91, "Filament Repair".
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-81
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719406
WKIA5228E
1.
DVD player M153, M154
4.
R15 Video monitor (without rear roof console assembly) R53
Front video monitor (with rear roof console
assembly)
2.
Audio unit M46
3.
Rear video monitor (with dual monitor
system) R55
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719407
Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to DVD player terminal 16.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to DVD player terminal 15.
Power is also supplied
• from DVD player terminals 31 and 32
• to video monitor terminals 11 and 12.
Ground is supplied
• to DVD player terminal 22
Revision: August 2007
AV-82
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through grounds M57, M61, and M79.
Audio signals are supplied
• through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4
• to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37.
Video signals are supplied
• through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29
• to front video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8 and rear video monitor (models with dual monitor system) terminals 5 and 8.
On dual monitor DVD entertainment systems, video signals are also supplied
• through DVD player terminals 25 and 30
• to rear video monitor terminals 6 and 7.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-83
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719408
WKWA4762E
Revision: August 2007
AV-84
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - DVD -
INFOID:0000000001719409
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4763E
Revision: August 2007
AV-85
2008 Quest
P
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4764E
Revision: August 2007
AV-86
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MODELS WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4765E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-87
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (SINGLE MONITOR)
WKWA4766E
Revision: August 2007
AV-88
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (DUAL MONITOR)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4767E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-89
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4768E
Revision: August 2007
AV-90
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719410
A
Symptom
DVD player inoperative
Possible causes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Repair order
1.
2.
3.
Power supply
Ground circuit
Audio enable circuit
DVD enable signal
Audio enable signal
DVD player
Audio unit
4.
5.
6.
7.
No sound when playing
DVD
1.
2.
3.
1.
Audio signal circuits
DVD player
Audio unit
2.
3.
Video monitor is inoperative/does not operate properly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Power supply
Video monitor ground circuit
Video circuits
Data signal
Video monitor
DVD player
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Refer to AV-91, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
Refer to AV-91, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
Check audio enable circuits for open or short between audio unit terminals 39, 40 and DVD player
terminals 11, 9.
Push power switch of DVD player and verify approx.
5V is present at terminal 39 of audio unit.
Push power switch of DVD player and verify approx.
5V is present at terminal 9 of DVD player.
Remove DVD player for repair.
Remove audio unit for repair.
Check audio signal circuits for open or short between DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 and audio
unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37.
Remove DVD player for repair.
Remove audio unit for repair.
Operate DVD player and verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 11 and 12 of video monitor. Verify approximately 5 volts is present at terminal
10 of video monitor.
Check video monitor ground circuits between DVD
player terminals 19 and 27 and video monitor terminals 1 and 2.
Check video circuits between DVD player terminals
23 and 24 and video monitor terminals 7 and 8.
Check data signal circuit for open or short between
DVD player terminal 29 and video monitor terminal
5.
Remove video monitor for repair.
Remove DVD player for repair.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
Data signal
DVD player remote control batteries
DVD player remote control
Video monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check data signal circuit for open or short between
DVD player terminal 28 and video monitor terminal
6.
Replace DVD player remote control batteries.
Replace DVD player remote control.
Remove video monitor for repair.
Headphones inoperative
1.
2.
3.
Headphone batteries
Headphones
Rear audio remote control unit
1.
2.
3.
Replace headphone batteries.
Replace headphones.
Replace rear audio remote control unit.
L
Snowy video/poor audio
1.
2.
Harness or connectors
DVD player
1.
2.
Check harness and connectors for open or short.
Check DVD player.
M
Snowy video (audio OK)
1.
2.
Harness or connectors
DVD player
1.
2.
Check harness and connectors for open or short.
Check DVD player.
No video (audio OK)
1.
2.
3.
Harness or connectors
DVD player
Video monitor
1.
2.
3.
Check harness and connectors for open or short.
Check DVD player.
Check video monitor.
Dim video (audio OK)
1.
2.
3.
Harness or connectors
DVD player
Video monitor
1.
2.
3.
Check harness and connectors for open or short.
Check DVD player.
Check video monitor.
DVD remote control is inoperative/does not operate
properly
N
O
P
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719411
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Revision: August 2007
AV
AV-91
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit
Terminals
DVD player
Signal name
Fuse No.
16
Battery power
22
15
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect DVD player connector.
Check voltage between the DVD player and ground.
Terminal No.
Unit
(+)
Connector
DVD player
Terminal
(-)
OFF
ACC
ON
16
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
15
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M153
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1197E
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between DVD player harness connector P105
terminal 22 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
• Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1198E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719412
DVD PLAYER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect electrical connectors.
Remove DVD player screws, using power tool.
Pull out DVD player and disconnect DVD player connectors.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VIDEO MONITOR (WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY)
Removal
Revision: August 2007
AV-92
2008 Quest
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove video monitor screws.
2. Disconnect connector.
3. Remove video monitor housing.
A
B
C
WKIA1200E
D
4.
5.
Remove the video monitor hinge screws.
Remove the video monitor from video monitor housing.
E
F
G
WKIA1219E
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
H
VIDEO MONITOR (WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY)
Removal
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Remove rear roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38.
Disconnect the video monitor connector.
Remove the video monitor screws.
Remove the video monitor and housing.
AV
L
M
WKIA1199E
5.
N
Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video
monitor.
O
P
WKIA1219E
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
AV-93
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719413
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
Refer to Owner′s Manual for integrated display operating instructions.
AV SWITCH SYSTEM
Refer to Owner′s Manual for AV switch operating instructions.
Using the AV switch at the center of the instrument panel, the controls of the following systems are centralized:
• Integrated display system (Drive computer, setting screen, clock, etc.)
• Audio system
PRECAUTION OF LCD MONITOR
• Brightness of LED backlight display may change, depending on in-car temperature. In low temperatures, the
refreshing rate of the picture also becomes low because of the low response of the LCD monitor. When passenger area becomes warm, however, the LCD recovers the normal display.
• Backlight sometimes flickers or darkens according to the total operation hours and the number of times
switched ON and OFF. In this case, entire display unit should be replaced. (Backlight cannot be replaced
separately.)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R), and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34 and 41, located in IPDM E/R)
• to CPU of IPDM E/R, and
• through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in fuse and fusible link box), and
• to audio unit terminal 6
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• to display unit terminal 1 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 1 (with color display) and
• to AV switch terminal 1 and
• to combination meter terminal 40.
When ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• to display unit terminal 2 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 10 (with color display)
and
• to AV switch terminal 2 and
• to BCM terminal 11.
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, located in IPDM E/R, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• to display unit terminal 3 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 12 (with color display).
Ground is supplied
• to display unit terminal 6 (with monochrome display) or display unit terminal 1 (with color display)
• to display control unit terminal 3 (with color display) and
• to AV switch terminal 5 and
• to combination meter terminal 20 and
• to BCM terminal 67
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
DRIVE COMPUTER
Refer to Owner′s Manual for drive computer operating instructions.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
AV-94
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic (With Monochrome Display)
INFOID:0000000001719414
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4769E
Revision: August 2007
AV-95
2008 Quest
P
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic (With Color Display)
INFOID:0000000001719415
WKWA4770E
Revision: August 2007
AV-96
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - INF/D -
INFOID:0000000001719416
A
(WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
WKWA4771E
Revision: August 2007
AV-97
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4772E
Revision: August 2007
AV-98
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4773E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-99
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4774E
Revision: August 2007
AV-100
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4775E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-101
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
(WITH COLOR DISPLAY)
WKWA4776E
Revision: August 2007
AV-102
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4777E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-103
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4778E
Revision: August 2007
AV-104
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4779E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-105
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4780E
Revision: August 2007
AV-106
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4781E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-107
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4782E
Revision: August 2007
AV-108
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719417
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4798E
Revision: August 2007
AV-109
2008 Quest
P
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - COMM -
INFOID:0000000001719418
WKWA4783E
Revision: August 2007
AV-110
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
(WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4961E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-111
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
(WITH COLOR DISPLAY)
WKWA4785E
Revision: August 2007
AV-112
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Display Unit (With Monochrome Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719419
A
B
C
D
WKIA5208E
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display)
INFOID:0000000001719420
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
1 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery power
2 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
3 (G)
4 (R/L)
6 (B)
Ground
Ignition signal
Ground
Ground
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
E
F
Ignition
switch
Operation
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
H
Battery voltage
A/C operation is
not possible. Vehicle information
setting is not
possible.
I
Input
ON
–
Lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Illumination
signal
Input
Ground
–
OFF
ON
Battery voltage
Turn lighting switch
OFF.
3.0V or less
–
0V
Audio unit illumination does not
come on when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
G
J
AV
–
L
7 (P/L)
Ground
Vehicle speed
signal (8pulse)
Input
ON
Drive computer
item is not displayed correctly.
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
M
SKIA0168E
N
8 (B/R)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Operate audio volume.
Audio does not
operate properly.
P
SKIA4402E
9
–
Shield ground
Revision: August 2007
–
–
–
AV-113
–
O
–
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
10 (BR)
Ground
Audio RX
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Operate audio volume.
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4403E
11 (V)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
–
12
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
13 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (-)
Input/
output
ON
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0175E
–
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0176E
14 (L)
–
CAN-H
–
–
–
–
–
16 (P)
–
CAN-L
–
–
–
–
–
Display Unit (With Color Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719421
WKIA5209E
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Color Display)
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
INFOID:0000000001719422
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
–
+
–
1 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
2 (L/W)
Ground
Power supply (Inverter)
Input
ON
–
9V
Screen is not
shown.
3 (L/R)
Ground
Power supply (Signal)
Input
ON
–
9V
Screen is not
shown.
Revision: August 2007
AV-114
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Item
+
6 (R/W)
–
7
RGB signal
(G: green)
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
Screen looks
reddish.
C
D
SKIA4981E
7
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
–
–
E
8 (R)
21
Horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal
Output
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed.
–
G
SKIA4983E
9 (B)
21
RGB area
(YS) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed.
Press the “TRIP”
button.
F
H
I
SKIA0162E
J
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to adjust brightness.
23
Display communication
signal
(DCU-DSP)
13 (P/B)
Ground
(Inverter)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
14 (LG)
Ground
(Signal)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
11 (B/W)
Input
ON
–
SKIA4364E
17 (R/L)
7
RGB signal
(R: red)
Input
AV
L
M
N
Screen looks
bluish.
O
SKIA4980E
P
18 (B)
7
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Input
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Screen looks
yellowish.
SKIA4982E
Revision: August 2007
AV-115
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Item
+
–
19 (G)
21
RGB synchronizing
signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Screen is rolling.
SKIA0164E
20 (W)
21
Vertical synchronizing
(VP) signal
Output
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed.
–
SKIA4983E
21
22 (L)
–
Shield ground
23
Display communication
signal
(DSP-DCU)
–
Output
–
ON
–
–
–
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to adjust brightness.
–
SKIA4363E
23
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
Display Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
–
–
INFOID:0000000001719423
WKIA5210E
Revision: August 2007
AV-116
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719424
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
System does not
work properly.
B
C
1 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery Power
2 (L/W)
Ground
Power Supply
(Inverter)
Output
ON
–
9V
3 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
4 (L/R)
Ground
Power Supply
(Signal)
Output
ON
–
9V
5 (P/B)
Ground
(Inverter)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
7 (LG)
Ground
(Signal)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
10 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
G
12 (G)
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
ON
–
Battery voltage
Vehicle information setting is not
possible.
H
Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd
Battery voltage
Lighting switch position OFF
0V
14 (R/L)
Ground
Illumination
signal
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
Screen is not
shown.
D
–
Screen is not
shown.
E
F
Input
OFF
Display unit
does not change
when lighting
switch is turned
to 1st position.
I
J
16 (P/L)
Ground
Vehicle
speed signal
(8–pulse)
Input
ON
Value of vehicle
speed information is not accurately displayed.
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
SKIA0168E
AV
L
25 (L)
–
CAN-H
–
–
–
–
–
26 (P)
–
CAN-L
–
–
–
–
–
M
28 (V)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
Output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
O
SKIA0175E
29
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
–
N
–
P
30 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
SKIA0176E
Revision: August 2007
AV-117
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
36 (B/W)
37
Display Communication
signal
(DCU-DSP)
37
–
Shield ground
37
Display Communication
signal
(DSP-DCU)
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Output
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
–
–
–
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to adjust brightness.
SKIA4364E
38 (L)
Input
–
–
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to adjust brightness.
SKIA4363E
39
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
40 (B/R)
Ground
Audio TX
Communication signal
Output
ON
Operate audio
volume.
–
–
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4402E
42 (BR)
Ground
Audio RX
communication signal
Input
ON
Operate audio
volume.
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4403E
47
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
–
–
49
–
Shield ground
–
–
–
–
–
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
50 (R/L)
47
RGB signal
(R: red)
Output
Screen looks
bluish.
SKIA4980E
51 (B)
49
RGB area
(YS) signal
Output
ON
Press the“TRIP”
button.
RGB screen is
not shown.
SKIA0162E
Revision: August 2007
AV-118
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
52 (R/W)
–
47
RGB signal
(G: green)
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
Screen looks
reddish.
C
D
SKIA4981E
E
53 (W)
49
Vertical synchronizing
(VP) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed.
–
F
SKIA4983E
G
54 (B)
47
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Output
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Screen looks
yellowish.
I
SKIA4982E
55 (R)
49
Horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
and A/C is not
displayed.
–
H
J
AV
SKIA4983E
L
56 (G)
49
RGB synchronizing
signal
Output
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
Screen is rolling.
SKIA0164E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
N
INFOID:0000000001719425
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch
O
INFOID:0000000001719426
P
Refer to AV-47, "Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch".
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Monochrome Display Unit)
INFOID:0000000001719427
DESCRIPTION
• Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically.
• Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen.
Revision: August 2007
AV-119
M
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Mode
Self-diagnosis
Item
Description
Reference page
NETWORK CHECK
Check network between control unit and switch connected
from display unit via communication line.
AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis
Mode"
PARTS CHECK
• Perform diagnosis and setting of display unit.
• Perform self-diagnosis for auto air conditioner system.
AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis
Mode"
VERSION CHECK
Displays version of each unit.
AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis
Mode"
Self-Diagnosis Mode
INFOID:0000000001719428
OPERATION PROCEDURES
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” switch, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) If unable
to start self-diagnosis mode refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)".
WKIA5232E
4.
5.
Display unit connection check screen.
Select each connecting unit (IVCS, CHANGER, SATELLITE
RADIO).
SKIA4377E
6.
Self-diagnosis screen is displayed.
• Using the joystick, select each item, and perform diagnosis.
CAUTION:
If self-diagnosis cannot be activated, refer to AV-127, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom".
SKIA4378E
NETWORK CHECK
Revision: August 2007
AV-120
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Selecting NETWORK CHECK on self-diagnosis screen displays selfdiagnostic results.
A
B
C
SKIA4379E
D
Diagnosis item
Contents
DTC return condition
Reference at error
HVAC
OK/NG
Communication error between combination meter and display unit.
"DISPLAY UNIT CIRCUIT
INSPECTION"
SWITCH
OK/NG
Communication error between AV switch and display unit.
AV-138, "AV Communication
Line Check (With Monochrome Display)"
AUDIO
OK/NG
Communication error between audio and display unit.
AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)"
E
F
G
PARTS CHECK
• Selecting PARTS CHECK on self-diagnosis screen displays selection screen.
• Selecting DISPLAY indicates DISPLAY DETAIL screen. Display
diagnosis and setting can be performed.
• Selecting HVAC indicates HVAC DETAIL screen. Air conditioner
system self-diagnosis can be performed.
H
I
J
SKIA4381E
AV
DISPLAY DETAIL SCREEN
L
Items
FULL BLINK
BLANK–ADJ
WARNING
Description
All display unit segments turn ON.
M
Adjust the display timeout for 5 to 15 seconds. (Default is 10
seconds.)Note
Select warning indication ON/OFF. (Default is ON.)
N
NOTE:
Except an audio screen.
SKIA4382E
O
HVAC DETAIL SCREEN
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-121
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Press the joystick, start air conditioner system self-diagnosis. Refer
to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
SKIA4383E
VERSION CHECK
Check ID and version of display, AV switch, and audio.
DISPLAY UNIT CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display unit for damage, bent or loose connection (unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display unit connector.
Check resistance between display unit harness connector terminals.
Display unit
connector
Terminal
M93
14
Resistance
(Approx.)
16
54 - 66 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness between display unit and data link connector.
SKIA6867E
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Color Display)
INFOID:0000000001719429
DESCRIPTION
• Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen.
• CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set
value.
DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Mode
Self-diagnosis (DCU)
Revision: August 2007
Description
Display control unit diagnosis.
AV-122
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Mode
Display diagnosis
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
Vehicle signals
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
Description
On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be
checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed signal, light signalNOTE, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
A
B
Display status of CAN communication.
NOTE:
Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown.
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)
C
INFOID:0000000001719430
D
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard. If selfdiagnosis mode can not be started refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV
Switch)".
E
F
G
WKIA5232E
4.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Confirmation/Adjustment” and “CAN
DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective.
H
I
J
AV
WKIA4476E
5.
Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”.
• Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
• A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision
screen indicates progress of the diagnosis.
L
M
N
SKIA4208E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-123
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation
screen will be shown.
• When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen
to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or
not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on
the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS”
screen will be shown.
• When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for
the part will not appear on the screen.
SKIA4209E
7.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
• If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
8.
WKIA4477E
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
• When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation/
adjustment” menu or refer to the service manual.”
• When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
• When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
“DCU is abnormal”.
SKIA4211E
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV163, "Wiring Diagram - COMM -".
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Screen switch
Switch color
DCU*
Red
×
×
Gray
DISPLAY
Audio unit
GPS antenna
Diagnosis No.
1
x
x
2
x
×
3
×
4
*: DCU = Display control unit
CAUTION:
• When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)".
• When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-202, "Screen Is Not Shown".
Self-Diagnosis Codes
Revision: August 2007
AV-124
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
1
Display control unit malfunction.
Refer to AV-120.
2
Display communication line between display control unit and display unit.
Refer to AV-139.
3
Audio unit power supply and ground circuit.
Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit.
Refer to AV-136.
B
C
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
INFOID:0000000001719431
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
A
D
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard. If selfdiagnosis mode can not be started refer to AV-136, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio
Unit)".
E
F
G
WKIA5232E
4.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Confirmation/Adjustment” and “CAN
DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective.
H
I
J
WKIA4476E
5.
6.
7.
When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial trouble
diagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of
each item will become possible.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals” and “Auto Climate Control” will become selective.
Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
AV
L
M
N
WKIA4478E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-125
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
WKIA4316E
• When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
• When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-141, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All
Screens Look Bluish)", AV-142, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV143, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)".
VEHICLE SIGNALS
• A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of
lighting switch (normal setting).
• OFF: D (Day mode)
• ON: N (Night mode)
Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed.
WKIA4306E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Light
IGN
Reverse
Condition
Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
Remarks
–
–
Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
• If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
• If light is NG, refer to AV-134, "Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
Revision: August 2007
AV-126
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If IGN is NG, refer to AV-134, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
• If reverse is NG, refer to AV-187, "Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
A
INFOID:0000000001719432
B
Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
INFOID:0000000001719433
C
Symptom
Suspect Systems and reference
No screen is shown.
Refer to AV-128, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Monochrome
Display" (with monochrome display) or AV-128, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Inspection for Color Display" (with color display).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
Screen does not switch to nighttime mode after the
lighting switch is turned to 1st.
Refer to AV-133, "Illumination Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)" (with
monochrome display) or AV-134, "Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
TRIP and FUEL ECON screen do not appear.
Refer to AV-134, "Ignition Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)" (with
monochrome display) or AV-134, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control
Unit" (with color display).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
• Trip odometer (DIST) is not added up.
• Average vehicle speed (AVG) is not displayed.
Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or
AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
Average fuel consumption (AVG) is not displayed.
• Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or
AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color
display).
• Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display) or AV-145,
"CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)" (with color display unit).
If above is normal, replace display.
Distance to empty (DTE) is not displayed.
• Check if speedometer operates. If it does not operate, go to DI-18, "Vehicle
Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or AV-132, "Vehicle Speed
Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display).
• Check if fuel gauge operates. If it does not operate, go to DI-19, "Fuel Level
Sensor Unit Inspection".
• Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display) or AV-145,
"CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)" (with color display unit).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
Door warning screen does not appear.
• Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or
AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color
display).
• Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display) or AV-145,
"CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)" (with color display).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
AV switch and all switch operation are not possible.
(Do not start self-diagnosis.)
• Refer to AV-131, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch".
• Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
• Refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)"
(with monochrome display) or AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)" (with color display).
If above is normal, replace display unit.
Audio operation is not possible.
• Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
• Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-136, "Audio Communication Line
Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" (with color display).
Previous vehicle conditions are not stored.
Refer to AV-145, "Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored".
Revision: August 2007
AV-127
2008 Quest
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Monochrome Display
INFOID:0000000001719434
1.CHECK FUSE
Check if the following fuses for display unit are blown.
Unit
Display unit
Power souse
Fuse No.
Battery power
19
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
Ignition switch ON or START
12
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display unit connector.
Check voltage between display unit connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
M93
Ignition switch position
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
1
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
2
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
3
Ground
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Terminal
SKIA4386E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between display unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminal 6 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair ground harness.
SKIA4387E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Color Display
INFOID:0000000001719435
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair malfunctioning part.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT
Revision: August 2007
AV-128
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3 and ground.
A
B
Approx. 9V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
C
D
WKIA1227E
3.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M94.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2, 4 and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3.
E
F
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
2
M94
4.
Display unit
M93
4
Continuity
G
Yes
H
Terminal
2
3
Check continuity between display unit and ground.
I
Terminals
WKIA1229E
Display unit
Connector
M93
Terminal
2
3
Continuity
—
J
Ground
No
AV
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness.
L
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13, 14 and ground.
M
Continuity should exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
O
WKIA2079E
5. CHECK HARNESS
1.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Revision: August 2007
AV-129
2008 Quest
P
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13, 14 and display control unit harness connector M94
terminals 5, 7.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA2080E
6.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows.
1.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
—
Ignition
switch
Continuity
M93
1
Ground
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1228E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719436
1.CHECK FUSE
Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
M94
Power source
Fuse No.
1
Battery power
19
10
ACC power
4
12
Ignition switch ON or START
12
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
Ignition switch position
(–)
1
M94
10
12
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
0V
WKIA1373E
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
AV-130
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse.
A
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between the following display control unit terminal and ground.
B
C
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
—
M94
3
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
SKIA4293E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch
INFOID:0000000001719437
F
1.CHECK FUSES
Check the fuses below.
G
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
AV switch
Battery power
19
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
I
J
Disconnect AV switch connector.
Check voltage between AV switch and ground.
AV
Terminals
(+)
Connector
M98
Ignition switch position
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
1
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
2
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Terminal
L
M
LKIA0210E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between AV switch and fuse.
N
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-131
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between AV switch harness connector M98 terminal 5 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair ground harness.
LKIA0211E
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)
INFOID:0000000001719438
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector M93 and combination meter connector M24.
Check continuity between display unit connector M93 (B) terminal 7 and combination meter connector M24 (A) terminal 26.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
(A) terminal 7 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA5250E
2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display unit and combination meter connectors.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Check the signal between display unit harness connector M93
terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
7 - Ground
: Refer to AV-113, "Terminal and Reference Value
for Display Unit (With
Monochrome Display)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection".
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
WKIA1370E
INFOID:0000000001719439
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94 and combination meter connector M24.
Revision: August 2007
AV-132
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 (A)
terminal 26 and display control unit connector M94 (B) terminal
16.
A
Continuity should exist.
4.
B
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M94 (B) terminal 16 and ground.
C
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA5251E
D
2.CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
E
Connect display control unit connector and combination meter connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 and ground.
F
Approx. 3.5V or more
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
H
SKIA4297E
3.CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
16 - Ground
J
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection".
Illumination Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)
AV
L
SKIA4616E
N
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M93
4
O
Lighting switch position
(–)
Ground
1st or 2nd position
OFF
Battery voltage
Approx. 3V or less
P
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
SKIA4393E
Revision: August 2007
M
INFOID:0000000001719440
1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
I
AV-133
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display unit and IPDM E/R.
Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719441
1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
Lighting switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M94
14
(–)
Ground
1st or 2nd position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R.
Ignition Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)
SKIA4299E
INFOID:0000000001719442
1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 3 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display unit
and fuse.
SKIA4394E
Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719443
1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 12 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse.
WKIA1230E
Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)
INFOID:0000000001719444
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
AV-134
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display unit connector M93.
3. Check continuity between audio unit and display unit.
A (Base system)
B (Mid level system)
C
Connector
Terminal
Connector
8
Display
Unit: M93
Continuity
B
Yes
C
Terminal
65
Audio unit:
M45
10
9
4.
A
66
67
Check continuity between display unit and ground.
D
WKIA4203E
Terminals
C
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Display unit: M93
8
E
Ground
No
10
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
G
2.CHECK AUDIO TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 8 and ground.
Voltage
H
I
: Approx. 3.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
J
AV
SKIA4396E
3.CHECK AUDIO RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 [(A)
with base system or (B) with mid level system] terminal 65 and
ground.
Voltage
M
N
: Approx. 3.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
O
P
WKIA4204E
4.CHECK AUDIO TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
AV-135
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M45
[(A) with base system or (B) with mid level system] terminal 66
and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
66 - Ground
: Refer to AV-113, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome
Display)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
WKIA4205E
5.CHECK AUDIO RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between display unit harness connector M93
terminal 10 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
10 - Ground
: Refer to AV-113, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome
Display)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
SKIA4398E
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)
INFOID:0000000001719445
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for audio unit. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
4.
Audio unit
Terminal
Connector
40
M45
42
Continuity
Terminal
65
Yes
66
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1192E
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Terminal
40
42
Continuity
—
Ground
No
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
AV-136
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
A
3.CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector M95.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 and ground.
B
C
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
D
E
WKIA1770E
4.CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95.
Connect audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 and ground.
G
H
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
I
J
WKIA1771E
5.CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
AV
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 40 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
40 - Ground
L
M
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
N
O
SKIA4447E
6.CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
P
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
AV-137
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
42 - Ground
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)
SKIA4448E
INFOID:0000000001719446
1.CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector and AV switch connector.
Check continuity between display unit and AV switch.
Terminals
Display unit
Connector
AV switch
Terminal
Connector
11
M93
Continuity
Terminal
6
13
M98
8
Yes
LKIA0213E
12
4.
7
Check continuity between display unit and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
M93
11
13
Terminal
Ground
Continuity
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display unit connector and AV switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 11, 13 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
11, 13 - Ground
: Refer to AV-113, "Terminal and Reference Value
for Display Unit (With
Monochrome Display)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to .
SKIA4401E
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)
INFOID:0000000001719447
1.CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
AV-138
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 (A) and AV switch connector M98 (B).
3. Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch.
A
Terminals
B
(A)
Connector
(B)
Terminal
28
M95
4.
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
30
C
6
M98
Yes
8
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
D
Terminals
WKIA5379E
Display control unit
Connector
—
Terminal
28
M95
Continuity
Ground
30
E
No
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
1. Replace AV switch.
2. Connect display control unit and AV switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
H
I
J
Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit)
INFOID:0000000001719448
AV
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
L
Terminals
M
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
36
M95
4.
Display unit
M93
38
Continuity
Terminal
N
11
Yes
22
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
O
Terminals
WKIA2019E
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Terminal
36
38
Continuity
—
Ground
P
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
AV-139
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
WKIA1377E
3.CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
SKIA4453E
4.CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 36 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
36 - Ground
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to .
SKIA4452E
5.CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
38 - Ground
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
Revision: August 2007
AV-140
SKIA4453E
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed
INFOID:0000000001719449
A
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and display
unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9, 20, 8.
B
C
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 55 and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 8.
D
Continuity should exist.
5.
E
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and ground.
WKIA1965E
F
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
G
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
H
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
55 - 49
I
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
AV
SKIA4305E
3.CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL
1.
2.
Press the “TRIP” button.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
51 - 49
M
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
O
SKIA4306E
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)
INFOID:0000000001719450
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Revision: August 2007
AV-141
L
2008 Quest
P
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
• When the screen looks bluish.
Terminals
B
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
50
Display unit:
M93
17
47
Yes
7
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
50
Continuity
—
Ground
47
WKIA4221E
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check the following with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal
50 and 47.
50 - 47
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to .
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)
SKIA4697E
INFOID:0000000001719451
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
• When the screen looks reddish.
Terminals
B
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
52
Display unit:
M93
6
47
7
Yes
WKIA4222E
Revision: August 2007
AV-142
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
A
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
52
—
Continuity
B
Ground
47
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
D
1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal
52 and 47.
52 - 47
E
F
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)
G
H
SKIA4698E
I
INFOID:0000000001719452
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
AV
• When the screen looks yellowish.
L
Terminals
B
A
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
54
Display unit:
M93
18
47
Continuity
M
Yes
N
7
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
54
47
Continuity
—
Ground
O
WKIA4223E
P
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
AV-143
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal
54 and 47.
54 - 47
: Refer to AV-117, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
SKIA4356E
No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates)
INFOID:0000000001719453
1. DISPLAY CONDITION CHECK
Check display conditions of each warning screen.
Warning screen
Display condition
DOOR OPEN
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of any of the doors is detected.
LIFTGATE OPEN
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and liftgate ajar is detected.
Have conditions been met to display warning screen?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-123, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)".
Is self-diagnosis result OK?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter".
NO
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)
INFOID:0000000001719454
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-183, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV
Switch".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS
AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: August 2007
AV-144
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE
A
Check communication line. Refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit
and AV Switch)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
B
Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored
C
INFOID:0000000001719455
1.CHECK BATTERY POWER
D
Check display control unit battery power.
Refer to AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check display control unit battery power system harness.
CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)
E
INFOID:0000000001719456
F
1.CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-123, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)".
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-179,
"CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
G
H
>> GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart" after
checking the state of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR" displayed on the screen.
I
J
WKIA4307E
Steering Wheel Audio Control Switch Check (Without Bluetooth)
INFOID:0000000001719457
AV
1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
2. Operate steering wheel audio control switch.
Does steering wheel audio control switch operate normally?
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV switch connector M98 and spiral cable connector M30.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminals and AV switch harness connector terminals.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-145
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
AV switch
Terminal
Connector
32
M30
Terminal
13
31
M98
24
4.
Continuity
14
Yes
12
Check continuity between AV switch and ground.
LKIA0189E
Terminals
AV switch (+)
Connector
Continuity
(–)
Terminal
12
M98
13
Ground
No
14
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
3.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
Check spiral cable harness.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36.
4.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE
Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals.
Terminal
(+)
16
20
(–)
17
17
Signal name
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Seek (down)
Depress (station) down switch.
165
Power
Depress power switch.
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
652
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
0
0
WKIA4457E
652
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace steering wheel audio control switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth)
INFOID:0000000001719458
1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
2. Operate steering switch.
Does steering switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
AV-146
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect AV switch connector and bluetooth control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV switch connector M98 (A) terminals 13, 14, and 12 and bluetooth control
unit connector B506 (B) terminals 17, 18, and 19.
Terminal No.
AV switch
(A)
Connector
B
Bluetooth control unit
(B)
Terminal
Connector
C
17
13
B506
18
14
4.
Continuity
Terminal
12
M98
A
Yes
D
19
Check continuity between AV switch and ground.
WKIA5248E
E
Terminal No.
AV switch (+)
(A)
Connector
Continuity
(–)
F
Terminal
12
M98
13
Ground
G
No
14
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
3.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
I
Disconnect spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between bluetooth control unit connector B506 (A) terminals 12, 13, and 14 and spiral
cable connector M30 (B) terminals 24, 32, and 31.
J
Terminals
Bluetooth control unit
(A)
Connector
Terminal
Spiral cable
(B)
Connector
Terminal
12
B506
13
AV
Continuity
L
24
M30
32
14
Yes
31
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA5249E
N
4.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
Check continuity between spiral cable connector terminals.
O
Connector
Terminal
Connector
32
M30
31
24
Terminal
Continuity
16
M102
17
20
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36 .
Revision: August 2007
P
Yes
AV-147
WKIA4424E
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals.
Terminal
16
20
17
17
Signal name
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Seek (down)
Depress (station) down switch.
165
Power
Depress power switch.
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
652
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
0
0
WKIA4457E
652
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719459
DISPLAY UNIT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid D".
Remove the display unit assembly (1) by removing the screws
(A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2).
LKIA0712E
3.
Remove the rear cover (1) and front cover (2).
LKIA0717E
Revision: August 2007
AV-148
2008 Quest
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove the screws (A) and the display screen (1).
A
B
C
LKIA0711E
D
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
E
Removal
1.
2.
Remove display unit assembly. Refer to "DISPLAY UNIT".
Remove the screws (A) and the display control unit (1).
F
G
H
I
LKIA0720E
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-149
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719460
NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of
the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle
of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS
antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and
indicated on the screen with a current-location mark.
WKIA1371E
By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the
GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
SEL684V
TRAVEL DISTANCE
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation
may become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function
has been adopted. Adjustments can be made in extreme cases (such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires).
Refer to AV-173, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode".
TRAVEL DIRECTION
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
Type
Advantage
Disadvantage
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
• Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite
accurately.
• Direction errors may accumulate when the vehicle is driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna (GPS information)
• Can detect the vehicle's travel direction
(North/South/East/West).
• Correct direction cannot be detected when the
vehicle speed is low.
MAP–MATCHING
Revision: August 2007
AV-150
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Map–matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored in
the DVD-ROM drive.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display
must be corrected manually.
CAUTION:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVDROM.
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is currently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has
been repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road.
• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map DVDROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data and the
actual road pattern are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching
function may find another road and position the current-location
mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the currentlocation mark may leap to it.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when there is
an excessive gap between the current vehicle position and the
position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible.
A
B
C
SEL685V
D
E
F
G
SEL686V
H
I
J
AV
SKIA0613E
L
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and controlled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 miles).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satelSEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions.
• In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
• There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning,
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the
arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
• Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do
not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from
the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
Revision: August 2007
AV-151
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAVI Control Unit
• The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
• Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor, and
the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this
data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map. Location information is shown on liquid crystal display (display unit).
• Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information
can be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc.
• The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle
steering angle.
WKIA4480E
Map DVD-ROM
• The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information.
• To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive
Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used.
Display Control Unit
The display control unit coordinates audio and video signals between the NAVI control unit and the display
unit.
Display Unit
Displays NAVI system information.
AV Switch
AV switch allows user to input NAVI display settings. Self diagnostics are initiated using AV switch.
GPS Antenna
GPS antenna sends signals to NAVI control unit.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719461
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
AV-152
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001719462
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
WKIA5230E
1.
Steering wheel audio control switches
4.
Display unit M93
7.
Combination switch M28
10. Bluetooth control unit B506, B507
2.
M
BCM M18, M19
3.
Combination meter M24
5.
GPS antenna
6.
Display control unit M94, M95
8.
Audio unit M43, M45
9.
AV switch M98
N
11. NAVI control unit B504, B505
(view with seat removed)
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-153
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719463
WKWA4786E
Revision: August 2007
AV-154
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - NAVI -
INFOID:0000000001719464
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4787E
Revision: August 2007
AV-155
2008 Quest
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4788E
Revision: August 2007
AV-156
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4790E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-157
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4791E
Revision: August 2007
AV-158
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4789E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-159
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4792E
Revision: August 2007
AV-160
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4793E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-161
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719465
WKWA4794E
Revision: August 2007
AV-162
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - COMM -
INFOID:0000000001719466
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4795E
Revision: August 2007
AV-163
2008 Quest
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4796E
Revision: August 2007
AV-164
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
WKWA4797E
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-165
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NAVI Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719467
WKIA5211E
Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
INFOID:0000000001719468
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
+
–
1 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
2 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
5 (V)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
14 (P)
Voice guide
signal
ON
Press the “GUIDE/
VOICE” button.
12 (L)
Output
Only route guide
and operation
guide are not
heard.
SKIA0171J
13
44 (R)
–
47
Shield ground
RGB signal
(R: red)
–
Output
–
–
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Audio noise interference.
–
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
SKIA4977E
45 (W)
47
RGB signal
(G: green)
Output
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
NAVI screen
looks reddish.
SKIA4978E
Revision: August 2007
AV-166
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
46 (B)
–
47
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
NAVI screen
looks yellowish.
C
D
SKIA4979E
47
48 (Y)
–
Shield ground
49
RGB synchronizing
signal
–
–
–
ON
Press the “MAP”
button.
Video display interference.
–
E
F
Output
NAVI screen is
rolling.
G
SKIA0164E
49
61 (R/L)
63 (G)
65 (G/W)
66 (P/L)
–
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Shield ground
Illumination
signal
Ignition signal
Reverse
signal
Vehicle
speed signal
(8-pulse)
–
Input
Input
Input
Input
–
ON
ON
ON
ON
–
–
Lighting switch in 1st
position
Battery voltage
Lighting switch is
OFF
–
3V or less
Battery voltage
A/T selector lever in
R position
Battery voltage
A/T selector lever
not in R position
0V
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
Video display interference.
H
Display unit illumination does
not change
when lighting
switch is turned
to 1st position.-
I
Navigation current location
mark does not
indicate the correct position.
The navigation
current-location
mark moves
strangely when
the vehicle is
moving backwards.
J
AV
L
M
N
Navigation current location
mark does not
indicate the correct position.
O
–
P
PKIA1935E
68
–
Revision: August 2007
Shield ground
–
–
–
AV-167
–
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
69 (G)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Signal
input/
output
Input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
–
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0175E
70 (R)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
SKIA0176E
73
74
GPS signal
Input
ON
Connector is not
connected.
5V
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit
Navigation system GPS correction is not
possible.
INFOID:0000000001719469
Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit
INFOID:0000000001719470
Refer to AV-114, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Color Display)".
Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch
INFOID:0000000001719471
Refer to AV-119, "Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch".
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719472
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function
INFOID:0000000001719473
DESCRIPTION
• Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen.
• CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set
value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system.
DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Mode
Description
Self-diagnosis (DCU)
Display control unit diagnosis.
Self-diagnosis (NAVI)
• NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive) will not be diagnosed
when no map DVD-ROM is in it.
• Analyzes connection between the NAVI control unit and the GPS antenna and operation of each unit.
Revision: August 2007
AV-168
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Mode
Description
On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be
checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
Display diagnosis
On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehi-
Vehicle signals
cle speed signal, light signalNOTE, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
Auto Climate Control
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
Display diagnosis
Vehicle signals
On NAVI C/U mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed
signal, light signal, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
History of Errors
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition
switch ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the
errors occurred are also displayed.
Navigation
B
A/C self-diagnosis of A/C system.
On NAVI C/U mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked
by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
Navigation
A
D
E
Display Longitude & Latitude
Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude
will be displayed.
Speed Calibration
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring function will automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and tire
diameter caused by tire wear or low -pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration
is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather.
Angle adjustment
Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning
angle of the car mark on the display.
Initialize Location
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is
transported a long distance on a trailer, etc.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
C
Display status of CAN communication.
G
H
I
NOTE:
Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown.
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)
F
INFOID:0000000001719474
J
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
AV
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
L
M
WKIA5232E
4.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
N
O
P
WKIA4301E
Revision: August 2007
AV-169
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”.
• Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
• A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision
screen indicates progress of the diagnosis.
SKIA4208E
6.
When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation
screen will be shown.
• When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen
to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or
not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on
the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS”
screen will be shown.
• When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for
the part will not appear on the screen.
SKIA4209E
7.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
• If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
8.
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
• When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis did not detect any error. Please refer to
the “confirmation/adjustment” function or service manual for
more detailed diagnosis information.”
• When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
• When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
“DCU is abnormal”.
WKIA4304E
WKIA4479E
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV163, "Wiring Diagram - COMM -".
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Revision: August 2007
AV-170
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Screen switch
Switch color
DCU*
Red
×
×
Gray
DISPLAY
A
Audio unit
Navigation
GPS antenna
Diagnosis No.
B
1
x
2
x
x
×
3
×
×
C
4
*: DCU = Display control unit
CAUTION:
• When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-204, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)".
• When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-202, "Screen Is Not Shown".
E
Self-Diagnosis Codes
Diagnosis
No.
D
Possible cause
Reference
page
1
Display control unit malfunction.
Refer to AV-148.
2
Display communication line between display control unit and display unit.
Refer to AV-190.
3
Audio unit power supply and ground circuit.
Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit.
Refer to AV-189.
4
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit.
AV communication line between display control unit and NAVI control unit.
Refer to AV-215.
Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000001719475
I
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
J
AV
L
WKIA5232E
M
4.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
N
O
P
WKIA4301E
Revision: August 2007
AV-171
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis (NAVI)”.
• Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
• A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision
screen indicates progress of the diagnosis.
SKIA4212E
6.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
• If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
7.
WKIA4309E
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
• When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “Confirmation and
Adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual.”
• When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
• When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
“Center Control Unit is abnormal”.
SKIA4211E
• When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown.
“Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER of NAVI was not conducted because no DVD-ROM was available.”
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV163, "Wiring Diagram - COMM -".
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Screen switch
Center control unit*
Red
×
1
Gray
×
2
×
3
Yellow
GPS antenna
Diagnosis No.
Switch color
×
4
×
×
5
*: Center Control unit = NAVI control unit
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
AV-172
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-204, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)".
• When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-202, "Screen Is Not Shown".
A
Self-diagnosis codes
B
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
1
NAVI control unit malfunction.
Refer to
AV-215
2
No map DVD-ROM is inserted in the NAVI control unit.
Refer to
AV-193
3
When “DVD-ROM error. Please check disc.” is shown.
1.
Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system.
2.
Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage.
3.
If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the
map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
Refer to
AV-193
4
If “Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance
with service manual” is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3.
Refer to
AV-193
5
GPS antenna system.
1.
Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable.
2.
Disconnect GPS antenna connector, and make sure approximately 5V is supplied from the NAVI
control unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If 5V is supplied, replace the GPS antenna. If the connection is still malfunction after the replacement of the GPS antenna, the NAVI
control unit is malfunctioning.
Refer to
AV-215
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
D
E
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000001719476
I
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
C
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
J
AV
L
M
WKIA5232E
4.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
N
O
P
WKIA4301E
Revision: August 2007
AV-173
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial trouble
diagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of
each item will become possible.
6. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “Auto Climate Control”
and “Navigation” will become selective.
7. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
SKIA4220E
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
WKIA4316E
• When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
• When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-197, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All
Screens Look Bluish)", AV-198, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV199, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)".
VEHICLE SIGNALS
• A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of
lighting switch (normal setting).
• OFF: D (Day mode)
• ON: N (Night mode)
Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed.
WKIA4306E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Revision: August 2007
Condition
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
AV-174
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis item
Light
IGN
Reverse
Display
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
•
•
•
•
Condition
Remarks
A
–
B
–
Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-185, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
If light is NG, refer to AV-186, "Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-187, "Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
D
E
NAVIGATION
1.
2.
C
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, "Navigation", “Error History” and "Delete Unit Connection Log" will be displayed.
Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
F
G
H
WKIA4311E
I
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
J
AV
L
M
N
WKIA4317E
• When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
O
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
P
• When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-195, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Bluish)", AV-196, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)" and
AV-199, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)".
VEHICLE SIGNALS
Revision: August 2007
AV-175
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of
light switch (normal setting).
• OFF: D (Day mode)
• ON: N (Night mode)
Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed.
WKIA4306E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Light
IGN
Reverse
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
•
•
•
•
Condition
–
–
Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-184, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit".
If light is NG, refer to AV-186, "Illumination Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit".
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-186, "Ignition Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit".
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-187, "Reverse Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit".
ERROR HISTORY
WKIA4318E
DIAGNOSIS BY ERROR HISTORY
The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred during the period from when the ignition switch
is turned to ON until “Self-diagnosis” is completed.
If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in the past, which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis”, must be found by diagnosing the "Error History".
Revision: August 2007
AV-176
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The error history displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points.
• Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the NAVI
control unit has malfunctioned.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current-location mark at the time when the
error occurred. If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error
occurrence may be located correctly.
• The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is 50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the displayed number remains 50.
When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be identified because several errors are
present, record the item, number and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the error history),
then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to reproduce the malfunction. Check the error history to find the
items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diagnose the item.
Possible causes
Error item
Action/symptom
Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro.
Gyro sensor
disconnected
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS
substrate.
GPS disconnected
GPS transmission cable
malfunction
GPS input
line connection error
GPS TCX0
over
GPS TCX0
under
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
B
C
D
Example of symptom
E
• Navigation location detection performance has
deteriorated.
(Angular velocity cannot be detected.)
F
G
• Navigation location detection performance has
deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
• GPS receiving status remains gray.
H
I
Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal
GPS substrate.
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal
GPS substrate.
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing
oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively
high or low temperatures.
• During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not
performed.
AV-177
L
M
• Navigation location detection performance has
deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
• GPS receiving status remains gray.
• Location detection accuracy of the navigation
system will deteriorate, depending on the error
• Perform self-diagnosis.
area in the memory, because GPS cannot
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
make correct positioning.
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interfer(Location correction using GPS is not perence.
formed.)
Revision: August 2007
J
AV
• Navigation location detection performance has
deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
• GPS receiving status remains gray.
Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning.
GPS ROM
malfunction
GPS RAM
malfunction
A
2008 Quest
N
O
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
Action/symptom
Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning.
GPS RTC
malfunction
GPS antenna disconnected
• Correct time may not be displayed.
• After the power is turned on, the system al• Perform self-diagnosis.
ways takes some time until GPS positioning
• When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interferpositioning without re-collecting the whole satence.
ellite information when it judged the data
stored in the receiver is correct.)
• Correct time of error occurrence may not be
stored in the error history.
Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control
unit and GPS antenna.
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is
judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has decreased.
Low voltage
of GPS
• Perform self-diagnosis.
• When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is
judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
Malfunctioning NAVI control unit.
DVD-ROM
Malfunction
DVD-ROM
Read error
DVD-ROM
Response Error
• Navigation location detection performance has
deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
• GPS receiving status remains gray.
-
Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be
read.
•
•
•
• Navigation location detection performance has
deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
• GPS receiving status remains gray.
Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty?
If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth.
Perform self-diagnosis.
When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the
symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration.
• The map of a particular location cannot be displayed.
• Specific guidance information cannot be displayed.
• Map display is slow.
• Guidance information display is slow.
• System has been affected by vibration.
NAVIGATION
1.
2.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Steering Angle Adjustment” and “Speed Calibration” will
become selective.
Select each switch on “NAVIGATION” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
WKIA4312E
Angle adjustment
• Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope.
WKIA4314E
Speed Calibration
Revision: August 2007
AV-178
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires.
A
B
C
WKIA4315E
D
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
INFOID:0000000001719477
OPERATION PROCEDURE
E
1.
2.
3.
F
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
G
H
WKIA5232E
4.
5.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”.
I
J
AV
L
WKIA4301E
M
6.
Display status of CAN communication.
Item
Content
Error counter
CAN_COMM
OK/NG
0-50
CAN_CIRC_1
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_2
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_3
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_4
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_5
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_6
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_7
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_8
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_9
OK/UNKWN
0-50
Revision: August 2007
AV-179
N
O
P
WKIA4307E
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If the ignition is turned on and UNKWN is shown on the screen, the value of the counter will be up. (MAX50)
• The value of the counter does not change if the ignition changes to OFF. (MAX50)
• If the counter shows the value of 50 and UNKWN is shown, the value of 50 will not be changed.
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
INFOID:0000000001719478
Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719479
1.CHECK FUSES
Make sure the following fuses for the NAVI control unit are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
2
Battery power
17
5
ACC or ON power
4
63
ON or START
12
Terminal
B504
B505
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
1.
2.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
2
B504 (A)
5
B505 (B)
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Ground
63
0V
WKIA5252E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between NAVI control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between the following NAVI control unit terminals and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
—
B504
1
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WKIA4207E
Revision: August 2007
AV-180
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719480
A
1.CHECK FUSE
Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
1
Battery power
19
10
ACC power
4
12
Ignition switch ON or START
12
Terminal
M94
B
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
F
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
(–)
Terminal
1
M94
G
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
OFF
ACC
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Ground
10
12
0V
H
ON
I
Battery
voltage
WKIA5255E
0V
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse.
AV
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between the following display control unit terminal and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
—
M94
3
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
L
M
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
SKIA4293E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Unit
P
Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair malfunctioning part.
1.
AV-181
O
INFOID:0000000001719481
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
Revision: August 2007
E
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3 and ground.
Approx. 9V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WKIA1227E
3.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2, 4 and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
2
M94
4.
Display unit
M93
4
Continuity
Terminal
2
Yes
3
Check continuity between display unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1229E
Display unit
Connector
M93
Terminal
2
3
Continuity
—
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness.
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13, 14 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WKIA2079E
5. CHECK HARNESS
1.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Revision: August 2007
AV-182
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13, 14 and display control unit harness connector M94
terminals 5, 7.
A
Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness.
C
WKIA2080E
6.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
D
Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows.
1.
E
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
—
Ignition
switch
M93
1
Ground
OFF
Continuity
Yes
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness.
G
WKIA1228E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch
H
INFOID:0000000001719482
1.CHECK FUSE
I
Make sure the following fuses of the AV switch are not blown.
J
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
1
Battery power
19
2
ACC power
4
Terminal
M98
AV
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect AV switch connector.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
N
Ignition switch position
O
(+)
Connector
L
Terminal
(–)
1
M98
Ground
2
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
P
WKIA1374E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between AV switch and fuse.
Revision: August 2007
AV-183
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between AV switch and ground as follows.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
(–)
M98
5
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WKIA2692E
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719483
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505, display control unit connector M94 and combination meter
connector M24.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
B505 (B) terminal 66 and combination meter harness connector
M24 (A) terminal 26.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
B505 (B) terminal 66 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA5253E
2.CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector, display control unit connector and combination meter connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
B505 terminal 66 and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
WKIA4209E
3.CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Revision: August 2007
AV-184
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector
B505 terminal 66 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
66 - Ground
A
: Refer to AV-166, "Terminal
and Reference Value for NAVI
Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection".
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
B
C
WKIA4210E
D
INFOID:0000000001719484
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M94, NAVI control unit connector B505 and combination meter
connector M24.
Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 (A)
terminal 26 and display control unit connector M94 (B) terminal
16.
F
G
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M94 (B) terminal 16 and ground.
H
Continuity should not exist.
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA5254E
J
2.CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector, NAVI control unit connector and combination meter connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 and ground.
AV
L
Approx. 3.5V or more
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
M
N
SKIA4297E
3.CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
O
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-185
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
16 - Ground
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection".
Illumination Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit
SKIA4616E
INFOID:0000000001719485
1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
Lighting switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
B505
61
(–)
Ground
1st or 2nd position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and IPDM E/R.
Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
WKIA4211E
INFOID:0000000001719486
1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
Lighting switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M94
14
(–)
Ground
1st or 2nd position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R.
Ignition Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit
SKIA4299E
INFOID:0000000001719487
1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
AV-186
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
B505 terminal 63 and ground.
A
B
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control
unit and fuse.
Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
C
WKIA4212E
D
INFOID:0000000001719488
1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
E
1.
2.
3.
F
Disconnect display control unit connector M94.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 12 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse.
H
WKIA1230E
Reverse Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719489
1.CHECK REVERSE LAMP
J
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Place A/T selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-88.
AV
L
2.CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL
With the A/T selector lever in R-position, check voltage between
NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
Terminal
B505
65
M
Selector lever position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Ground
R-position
Other than R-position
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
N
O
OK or NG
WKIA4213E
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp position relay.
Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719490
1.CHECK REVERSE LAMP
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
I
AV-187
2008 Quest
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Place A/T selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-88.
2.CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL
With the A/T selector lever in R-position, check voltage between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
Selector lever position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M94
6
(–)
Ground
R-position
Other than
R-position
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
SKIA4303E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and back-up lamp position relay.
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit)
INFOID:0000000001719491
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-180, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control
unit.
Terminals
B
4.
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control
unit: B505
69
Display control
unit: M95
32
70
Yes
34
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
WKIA4214E
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control unit:
B505
69
70
Continuity
—
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
1.
2.
Replace NAVI control unit.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Revision: August 2007
AV-188
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
A
B
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)
INFOID:0000000001719492
C
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for audio unit. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit.
G
Display control unit
Connector
40
M95
4.
Audio unit
Terminal
M45
42
E
F
Terminals
Connector
D
Continuity
Terminal
H
65
Yes
66
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
I
Terminals
WKIA1192E
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Terminal
40
42
Continuity
—
Ground
J
No
AV
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
3.CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector M95.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 and ground.
M
N
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
O
P
WKIA1770E
4.CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95.
Connect audio unit connector.
Revision: August 2007
AV-189
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
WKIA1771E
5.CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 40 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
40 - Ground
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
SKIA4447E
6.CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 and ground with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope.
42 - Ground
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
SKIA4448E
Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit)
INFOID:0000000001719493
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Revision: August 2007
AV-190
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
A
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
36
M95
4.
Display unit
M93
38
Continuity
Terminal
B
11
Yes
22
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
C
Terminals
WKIA2019E
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Terminal
36
38
—
Continuity
D
No
E
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
F
2.CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
G
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 and ground.
H
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
I
J
WKIA1377E
3.CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AV
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 and ground.
L
M
Approx. 3.5V or more.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
O
SKIA4453E
4.CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
P
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
AV-191
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 36 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
36 - Ground
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
SKIA4452E
5.CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope.
38 - Ground
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
SKIA4453E
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)
INFOID:0000000001719494
1.CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and AV switch connector M98.
Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch.
Terminals
A
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
28
4.
Connector
M98
30
Continuity
Terminal
6
Yes
8
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA5379E
A
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
28
30
Continuity
—
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
1. Replace AV switch.
2. Connect display control unit and AV switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
AV-192
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
A
CAN Communication Line Check
INFOID:0000000001719495
1.CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
B
Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-169, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)".
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-179,
"CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
Item
content
C
Error counter
Normal condition
Error (Example)
CAN_COMM
OK
NG
0-50
CAN_CIRC_1
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_2
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_3
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_4
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_5
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_6
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_7
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_8
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
UNKWN
0-50
D
E
WKIA4307E
3.
F
G
H
Record each item display description (OK/NG/UKNWN) displayed on the following CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR Check Sheet.
I
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet
Diagnosis item
Screen display
Diagnosis item
Screen display
CAN_COMM
OK
NG
CAN_CIRC_5
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_1
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_6
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_2
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_7
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_3
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_8
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_4
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
UNKWN
AV
L
>> After filling in CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet, GO TO LAN-38.
If NAVI control unit detects that DVD-ROM map Is not inserted
J
INFOID:0000000001719496
M
1.CHECK DVD-ROM
Make sure identified DVD-ROM map is inserted.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Insert identified DVD-ROM map.
N
If NAVI control unit detects that inserted DVD-ROM map Is malfunctioning or if it Is impossible to load data from DVD-ROM map
O
INFOID:0000000001719497
P
1.CHECK 1: DVD-ROM
Remove inserted DVD-ROM map to check that it is identified.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace identified DVD-ROM map.
Revision: August 2007
AV-193
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK 2: DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace DVD-ROM map.
3.CHECK 3: DVD-ROM
Insert same DVD-ROM to make sure same diagnosis result is found as last self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace DVD-ROM map.
If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna Is Malfunctioning
INFOID:0000000001719498
1.CHECK GPS ANTENNA
Check cable for GPS antenna for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK BY REPLACEMENT OF GPS ANTENNA
Replace with other functional GPS antenna to try self-diagnosis again.
Result of self-diagnosis; Found same result?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen
INFOID:0000000001719499
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and display
unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9, 20, 8.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1965E
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
AV-194
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
A
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
55 - 49
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
C
SKIA4305E
3.CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL
1.
2.
D
Press the “TRIP” button.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
51 - 49
E
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)
F
G
SKIA4306E
H
INFOID:0000000001719500
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
• When the screen looks bluish.
J
AV
Terminals
B
A
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control
unit: B505
44
47
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
44
L
Yes
45
M
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control unit:
B505
44
47
Continuity
—
Ground
WKIA4215E
No
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Revision: August 2007
N
AV-195
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 44 and 47 with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal
44 and 47.
44 - 47
: Refer to AV-166, "Terminal
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)
WKIA4216E
INFOID:0000000001719501
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
• When the screen looks reddish.
Terminals
B
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control
unit: B505
45
Display control
unit: M95
46
47
Yes
45
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control unit:
B505
45
Continuity
—
Ground
47
WKIA4217E
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 45 and 47 with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal
45 and 47.
45 - 47
: Refer to AV-166, "Terminal
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
AV-196
WKIA4218E
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish)
INFOID:0000000001719502
A
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
B
C
• When the screen looks yellowish.
D
Terminals
B
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control
unit: B505
46
Display control
unit: M95
48
47
E
Yes
45
F
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control unit:
B505
46
Continuity
—
G
Ground
47
WKIA4219E
No
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
I
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 46 and 47 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal
46 and 47.
46 - 47
J
AV
L
: Refer to AV-166, "Terminal
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)
M
WKIA4220E
N
INFOID:0000000001719503
O
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
• When the screen looks bluish.
Revision: August 2007
AV-197
P
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
B
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
50
Display unit:
M93
17
47
Yes
7
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
50
Continuity
—
Ground
47
WKIA4221E
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal
50 and 47.
50 - 47
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)
SKIA4697E
INFOID:0000000001719504
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
• When the screen looks reddish.
Terminals
B
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
52
Display unit:
M93
6
47
7
Yes
WKIA4222E
Revision: August 2007
AV-198
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
A
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
52
—
Continuity
B
Ground
47
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
D
1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check the following with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal
52 and 47.
52 - 47
E
F
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)
G
H
SKIA4698E
I
INFOID:0000000001719505
1.CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
AV
• When the screen looks yellowish.
L
Terminals
B
A
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
54
Display unit:
M93
18
47
Continuity
M
Yes
N
7
Terminals
B
Connector
Terminal
Display control
unit: M95
54
47
Continuity
—
Ground
O
WKIA4223E
P
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
AV-199
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
• When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal
54 and 47.
54 - 47
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NAVI Screen Is Rolling
SKIA4356E
INFOID:0000000001719506
1.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Terminals
B
4.
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control
unit: B505
48
Display control
unit: M95
43
49
Yes
41
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA4224E
B
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control unit:
B505
48
49
Continuity
—
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminals 48 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
48 - 49
: Refer to AV-166, "Terminal
and Reference Value for NAVI
Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
WKIA4225E
3.CHECK HARNESS
Revision: August 2007
AV-200
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93.
3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
A
Terminals
B
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
56
M95
4.
Display unit
Terminal
C
19
M93
49
Continuity
Yes
21
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
D
Terminals
WKIA2775E
Display control unit
Connector
—
Terminal
M95
Continuity
56
Ground
49
E
No
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
G
4.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminals 19
and 21 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope.
19 - 21
H
I
: Refer to AV-168, "Terminal
and Reference Value for Display Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal
and Installation".
Guide Sound Is Not Heard
J
AV
WKIA2022E
L
INFOID:0000000001719507
1.CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING
M
• While driving in the dark green route, voice guide does not operate.
• Is volume setting switched ON?
NOTE:
Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction.
Yes or No
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up.
2.CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
O
P
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B504 and audio unit connector M45.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and audio unit.
Revision: August 2007
N
AV-201
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
B
4.
A
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control
unit: B504
12
Audio unit:
M45
71
14
Yes
69
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA4226E
B
Connector
Terminal
NAVI control unit:
B504
12
Continuity
—
Ground
14
No
Ok or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
3.CHECK VOICE GUIDE
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector
B504 terminal 12 and 14 with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope.
12 - 14
: Refer to AV-166, "Terminal
and Reference Value for NAVI
Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and
Installation".
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal
and Installation".
Screen Is Not Shown
WKIA4227E
INFOID:0000000001719508
1.POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
A/C Screen Is Not Shown (NAVI Screen Is Shown)
INFOID:0000000001719509
1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
AV-202
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System
Specification Chart".
FUEL ECONOMY Screen Is Not Shown
A
INFOID:0000000001719510
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
B
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
D
Check CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System
Specification Chart".
E
Average Fuel Economy Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown)
F
INFOID:0000000001719511
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
G
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-185, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
H
2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
I
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-38.
Distance to Empty Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown)
J
INFOID:0000000001719512
AV
1.CHECK SPEEDOMETER
Confirm that speedometer is functioning.
Is speedometer functioning?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection".
L
M
2.CHECK FUEL GAUGE
Confirm that fuel gauge is functioning.
Is fuel gauge functioning?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection".
N
3.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
O
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-38.
P
Driving Distance or Average Speed Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown)
INFOID:0000000001719513
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
AV-203
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-38.
2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-185, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates)
INFOID:0000000001719514
1. DISPLAY CONDITION CHECK
Check display conditions of each warning screen.
Warning screen
Display condition
DOOR OPEN
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of any of the doors is detected.
LIFTGATE OPEN
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and liftgate ajar is detected.
Have conditions been met to display warning screen?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-169, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)".
Is self-diagnosis result OK?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter".
NO
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)
INFOID:0000000001719515
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-183, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV
Switch".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS
AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE
Check communication line. Refer to AV-192, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit
and AV Switch)".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
AV-204
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
Navigation System Does Not Activate
A
INFOID:0000000001719516
1.POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
B
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-180, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for
NAVI Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Previous NAVI Conditions Are Not Stored
C
D
INFOID:0000000001719517
1.CHECK BATTERY POWER
E
Check NAVI control unit battery power.
Refer to AV-180, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check NAVI control unit battery power system harness.
F
Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored
G
INFOID:0000000001719518
1.CHECK BATTERY POWER
H
Check display control unit battery power.
Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check display control unit battery power system harness.
Position of Current Location Mark Is Not Correct
I
INFOID:0000000001719519
J
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-171, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
AV
L
2.ERROR HISTORY DIAGNOSIS
Was any error stored in AV-173, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode" of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT
mode?
YES or NO
YES >> AV-173, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode".
NO
>> AV-206, "Driving Test".
Radio Wave from GPS Satellite Is Not Received
INFOID:0000000001719520
M
N
O
1.CHECK ENVIRONMENT
Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable
phone) is located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building.
OK or NG
OK
>> System is not malfunctioning. The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the
GPS satellite if it is shielded by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Revision: August 2007
AV-205
2008 Quest
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-171, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Driving Test
INFOID:0000000001719521
1.DRIVING TEST 1
1.
Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT
LOCATION CORRECTION”.
2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark.
3. Perform the distance correction of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode.
Note: Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be
made.
4. Are symptoms malfunctioning to the AV-206, "Example of Symptom Judged Not Malfunction" after driving
the vehicle?
YES or NO
YES >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.DRIVING TEST 2
• Did any malfunction occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed?
• Test pattern
Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor.
- Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction
Disconnect GPS antenna connector (GT5) connected to the NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current
location and the direction, then drive the vehicle.
- Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching
Accurately adjust the current location and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the NAVI control unit
with ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back in the
unit, display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration.
• Sample tests
-
Perform test pattern 1.
-
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate
tracking, plotting shall be made every several hundred meters (feet).
-
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate
the rate of change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance.
Correction = A/B
A: Distance shown on the screen
B: Actual distance
YES or NO
YES >> • If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again.
• If any error is found in the map, please contact map data supplier. Refer to Navigation System
Owner's Manual for contact information.
• Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system.
Example of Symptom Judged Not Malfunction
INFOID:0000000001719522
BASIC OPERATION
Revision: August 2007
AV-206
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
A
No image is shown.
Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK
side.
Adjust the display brightness.
No guide sound is heard.
Audio guide volume is too low or
too high.
Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX.
Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is
driving on a dark green route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Screen is too dark.
Motion of the image is too slow.
Temperature inside the vehicle is low.
Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear
on the screen.
Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit).
System is not malfunction.
B
C
D
VEHICLE MARK
E
Symptom
Cause
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™
Name of the place varies with the
screen.
Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some
cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data
processing.
System is not malfunctioning.
Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly.
Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its
ignition switch is turned to OFF.
Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition.
Screen will not switch to nighttime
mode after the lighting switch is
turned ON.
The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH
SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function.
Perform screen dimming and select the
nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel.
Current location is not displayed.
Press “MAP” button to display the current location.
Vehicle mark will not be shown.
Current location is not displayed.
Press “MAP” button to display the current location.
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite
mark) on the map screen stays
gray.
GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the vehicle is in or behind a building.
Move the vehicle out to an open space.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument panel.
Do not place anything in the center on top of
the display.
L
GPS satellites are not visible from current location.
Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle.
M
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the
map screen stays gray.
Current location is not determined.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle.
Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
advancement or retard still occur, perform
the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is
always deviated to the same position.)
As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
released once a year.
Vehicle location accuracy is low.
Remedy
F
G
I
DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET
Revision: August 2007
AV-207
H
2008 Quest
J
AV
N
O
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Destination cannot be set.
Destination to be set is on an expressway.
Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched
when re-searching the route.
The vehicle has already passed the passing point,
or the system judged so.
To include the passing points that have been
passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be displayed.
Route searching has not been done.
Set the destination and perform route
searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF.
Turn route guide ON.
Route information is not available on the dark
green route.
System is not malfunctioning.
After the route searching, no guide
sign will appear as the vehicle
goes near the entrance/exit to the
toll road.
Drive on the recommended route.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
(On the display, only guide signs related to the recommended route will be shown.)
Automatic route searching is not
possible.
Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no
recommended route is available.
Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search
the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour
search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that of
the previous search.
Performed search with every condition considered. However, the result is the same as that of the
previous search.
System is not malfunctioning.
Passing points cannot be set.
More than five passing points were set.
Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting
point cannot be selected.
The current vehicle location is always set as the
starting point of a route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Some menu items cannot be selected.
The vehicle is being driven.
Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then operate the system.
VOICE GUIDE
Symptom
Voice guide will not operate.
Cause
Remedy
Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
even when the route on the map changes direction.
System is not malfunctioning.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route.
Return to the recommended route or research the route.
Voice guide is turned OFF.
Turn voice guide ON.
Route guide is turned OFF.
Turn route guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which
tual road pattern.
the vehicle is turned and the connection of the road
to other roads.
Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules.
ROUTE SEARCH
Revision: August 2007
AV-208
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
No route is shown.
Indicated route is intermittent.
Cause
Remedy
No road to be searched is found around the destination.
Find wider road (orange road or wider) nearby and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direction when there are separate up and down
roads.
A
Starting point and the destination are too close.
Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/
time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination.
Turn the time-regulating search conditions
OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
search conditions OFF.
In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
System is not malfunctioning.
B
C
D
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
E
When the vehicle has passed the
recommended route, it is deleted
from the screen.
A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing
point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some areas.)
System is not malfunctioning.
Detouring route is recommended.
In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour
route may be recommended.
Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
route).
G
A detour route may be shown when some traffic
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area
around the starting point or the destination.
Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route of
your choice.
H
In the area where highways (gray routes) are
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route
may be detouring.
System is not malfunctioning.
Landmarks on the map do not
match the actual ones.
This can be happen due to omission or error in
the map data.
As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
released once a year. Wait until the latest
map has become available.
J
Recommended route is far from
the starting point, passing points,
and destination.
Starting point, passing points, and destination of
the route guide were set far from the desired
points because route searching data around
these area were not stored.
Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
the recommended route.
AV
F
I
NOTE:
L
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
M
EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-209
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V
Revision: August 2007
AV-210
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Cause (condition)
–: While driving ooo: Display
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
A
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
B
C
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
E
ELK0193D
F
Straight roads
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and distance errors may accumulate. As a result,
the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location when the vehicle is turned at a
corner.
Road configuration
ELK0194D
Zigzag roads
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.
G
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
H
I
J
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern
AV
When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location.
L
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel
(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
N
O
ELK0197D
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-211
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Cause (condition)
–: While driving ooo: Display
In a parking lot
SEL709V
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be easily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
Place
SEL710V
Slippery roads
On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
Slopes
When parking in sloped garages, when
travelling on banked roads, or in other cases where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
Map data
Different road pattern
(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road.
ELK0201D
Vehicle
Use of tire chains
Revision: August 2007
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct road.
AV-212
Drive the vehicle for a while. If
the distance still deviates, adjust it by using the distance adjustment function. (If the tire
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Cause (condition)
–: While driving ooo: Display
Just after the engine is started
Continuous driving without stopping
Precautions
for driving
Abusive driving
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
speed sensor) correction is not completed,
the vehicle can lose its direction and may
have deviated from the correct location.
Wait for a short while before
driving after starting the engine.
When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and
the current-location mark may deviate from
the correct road.
Stop and adjust the orientation.
Spinning the wheels or engaging in other
kinds of abusive driving may result in the
system being unable perform correct detection, and may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road.
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
If the accuracy of location settings is poor,
accuracy may be reduced when the correct
road cannot be found, particularly in places
where there are many roads.
Enter in the road displayed on
the screen with an accuracy of
approx. 1mm.
Caution: Whenever possible,
use detailed map for the correction.
B
C
D
E
Position correction accuracy
How to correct location
F
G
SEL701V
Direction when location is corrected
H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be reduced afterwards.
Perform direction correction.
I
SEL702V
J
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map
depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
AV
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the current-location mark becomes out of
place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. L
The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been towed
- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise loca- M
tion can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the
current location.
• When map-matching has been done
- If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map-matching is done, the currentlocation mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS
measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to
a location which is not on a road.
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA
The navigation system moves the current-location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If
the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT
Revision: August 2007
AV-213
2008 Quest
N
O
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW
• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO
CORRECT LOCATION
• The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark may
not be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done.
• The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching
location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used.
• GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped.
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED
The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen.
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows.
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Revision: August 2007
AV-214
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719523
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
SKIA0389E
M
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719524
GPS ANTENNA
N
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid D".
Remove glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove instrument panel side cover RH. Refer to IP-10.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
AV-215
2008 Quest
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Separate the GPS antenna (1) from the bracket by removing the
screws (A).
WKIA5258E
5.
Disconnect GPS antenna connector and remove GPS antenna
and feeder assembly out the top.
WKIA1195E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Removal
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Remove front seat RH. Refer to SE-75.
2. Remove NAVI control unit from the seat.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
AV-216
2008 Quest
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TELEPHONE
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719525
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKIA5231E
1.
BCM
M18, M19
2.
Combination meter
M24
3.
Audio unit
M45
4.
AV switch
M98
5.
Steering wheel audio control switches
6.
Microphone
R20
7.
Bluetooth ON indicator
R16
8.
Bluetooth control unit
B506, B507
(View with seat removed)
9.
Bluetooth antenna
(View with seat removed)
System Description
N
O
INFOID:0000000001719526
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth telephone system operating instructions.
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth telephone
system.
Revision: August 2007
AV-217
2008 Quest
P
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Bluetooth telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth cellular telephone to make a wireless connection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be
sent and received. Personal memos can be created using the Voice Recognition system. Some Bluetooth cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the Bluetooth control unit. Different cellular
telephones may have different pairing procedures. Refer to the cellular telephone operating manual.
Bluetooth Telephone System Diagram
WKIA4569E
Bluetooth Control Unit
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth control unit will power up. During power up, the
Bluetooth control unit is initialized and performs various self checks. Initialization may take up to 10 seconds.
During this time the Bluetooth ON indicator will flash until initialization is complete. Voice Recognition will then
become active and the Bluetooth ON indicator will remain on. Bluetooth telephone functions can be turned off
using the voice recognition system.
BCM
The BCM supplies power for the Bluetooth ON indicator.
Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches
When buttons on the steering wheel audio control switch are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio
control switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth control module uses this
signal to perform various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system.
The following functions can be performed using the steering wheel audio control switch:
• Initiate Self Diagnosis of the Bluetooth telephone system
• Start a voice recognition session
• Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume of calls
• Record memos
AV Switch
Call volume can be adjusted using the AV switch.
Microphone
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth control unit.
Combination Meter
The combination meter supplies speed signals to the Bluetooth control unit. Vehicle speed signals are used to
determine which voice command functions will be disabled based on driving conditions.
Bluetooth ON Indicator
The Bluetooth ON indicator is located in the overhead console. The indicator will flash during power up while
the Bluetooth control unit is initializing. This process may take up to 10 seconds. After initialization, the indicator will remain on to indicate that the system is ready for voice commands.
Audio Unit
Revision: August 2007
AV-218
2008 Quest
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers.
A
Wiring Diagram - H/PHON -
INFOID:0000000001719527
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
N
O
P
WKWA4760E
Revision: August 2007
AV-219
2008 Quest
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4761E
Revision: August 2007
AV-220
2008 Quest
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719528
A
B
C
WKIA5226E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Bluetooth Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719529
E
Terminal
(Wire color)
+
–
1 (Y)
Ground
Item
Battery power
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Input
–
–
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
System does not
work properly.
2 (V)
Ground
ACC power
Input
ACC/
ON
3 (G/R)
Ground
IGN power
Input
ON/
START
–
Battery voltage
4 (B/W)
–
Ground
–
–
–
–
–
6
–
Shield
–
–
–
–
–
7 (R/L)
8 (B)
Mic-in signal
Input
ON
–
–
–
9 (G)
10 (L)
Audio out
Output
–
–
–
–
11(Y)
–
Mute
–
–
–
–
–
Press MODE
switch
Approx. 0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
Approx. 0.75V
Press VOL UP
switch
Approx. 2V
Except for above
Approx. 5V
Press POWER
switch
Approx. 0V
Press SEEK
DOWN switch
Approx. 0.75V
Press VOL
DOWN switch
Approx. 2V
Except for above
Approx. 5V
12 (R/G)
13 (G/W)
Ground
Ground
Remote
control A
Remote
control B
Input
Input
ON
ON
H
I
J
L
M
Steering wheel audio
controls do not function.
N
O
–
–
–
–
Steering wheel audio
controls do not function.
14 (Y/R)
–
15 (GR)
–
LED
–
–
–
–
–
17 (V)
–
–-
–
–
–
–
–
18 (G/O)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
19 (R/B)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 (B)
–
Ground
–
–
–
–
–
21 (B)
–
Ground
–
–
–
–
–
AV-221
G
AV
Steering wheel audio
controls do not function.
Remote
control
ground
Revision: August 2007
F
2008 Quest
P
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
Ignition
switch
Operation
–
–
–
–
–
Microphone
power
–
–
–
–
–
Bluetooth
antenna signal
Input
–
–
–
–
+
–
28 (P/L)
–
Speed signal
29 (R/W)
–
33
–
Bluetooth Control Unit Self-Diagnosis Function
INFOID:0000000001719530
The Bluetooth control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the technician using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble diagnosis.
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Internal control unit failure
Bluetooth antenna connection open or shorted
Steering wheel audio control switches (SEND/END) stuck closed
Vehicle speed pulse count
Microphone connection test (with playback to operator)
Bluetooth inquiry check
STARTING THE DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON.
Wait for the Bluetooth system to complete initialization and the Bluetooth ON indicator to stop flashing.
This may take up to 10 seconds.
Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch SEND
button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth system will begin to
play a verbal prompt.
WKIA4446E
4.
5.
6.
While the prompt is playing, momentarily press both the steering
wheel audio control switches SEND and END buttons simultaneously. The Bluetooth system will sound a 5 second beep.
While the beep is sounding, momentarily press both the steering
wheel audio control switches SEND and END buttons simultaneously again.
The Bluetooth system has now entered into the diagnostic
mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the
technician by the system.
WKIA4447E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Bluetooth Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719531
1.CHECK FUSES
Make sure the following fuses for the Bluetooth control unit are not blown.
Revision: August 2007
AV-222
2008 Quest
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
Connector
Ignition Switch
Fuse No.
1
All positions
31
2
ACC/ON
4
3
ON/START
12
Terminal
B506
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connector B506.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
1
B506
2
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
3
0V
D
F
OFF
Ground
C
E
Ignition switch position
(–)
A
G
WKIA4389E
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between Bluetooth control unit and fuse.
I
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUITS
J
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between the following Bluetooth control unit
terminals and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
B506
20
—
AV
Continuity
L
Yes
M
4
Ground
21
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WKIA4556E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719532
N
O
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT
P
Removal
1.
Remove front passenger seat. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
AV-223
2008 Quest
TELEPHONE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove Bluetooth control unit (1) from bluetooth control unit
bracket by removing screws (A) and disconnecting harness connector (2).
LKIA0713E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
When replacing bluetooth control unit, Perform pairing procedure. Refer to Owner's Manual Pairing Procedure.
BLUETOOTH ON INDICATOR
Removal
1.
2.
Remove front overhead console. Refer to EI-38.
Release Bluetooth ON indicator tabs (A) and remove indicator
(1).
LKIA0714E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MICROPHONE
Removal
1.
2.
Remove front overhead console. Refer to EI-38.
Release microphone tabs (A) and remove microphone (1).
LKIA0716E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
AV-224
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
BCS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................... 3
System Description ................................................... 3
CAN Communication System Description ................. 7
Schematic ................................................................. 8
BCM Terminal Arrangement ....................................10
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................11
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
....15
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................15
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) .........................................17
Configuration ...........................................................17
Removal and Installation of BCM ............................18
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BCS-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719305
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
BCS-2
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
A
INFOID:0000000001719306
• BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle.
B
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper
washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components.
Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM
using CAN communication.
C
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
D
1.
2.
Description
• BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results.
• BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5)
and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
Operation description
• BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in
turn.
• If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
• At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When
voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects
voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
E
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
N
O
LIIA0757E
3.
BCM - Operation table of combination switch
• BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the following table.
Revision: August 2007
BCS-3
2008 Quest
P
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SKIA4959E
NOTE:
Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4.
Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
• When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if
OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
• When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting
switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication.
• When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
LIIA0760E
5.
NOTE:
Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON,
electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed.
Operation mode
• Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Revision: August 2007
BCS-4
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Normal status
• When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
• When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting
switch input only.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA4093E
J
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H)
connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively
reads required data only.
BCS
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
• With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
• Control by BCM is being operated properly.
• When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
• Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is
active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
• This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
• It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
• Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
• With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
• With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
• Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
4.
Sleep status
• BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
• CAN communication is not active.
Revision: August 2007
BCS-5
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
• When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
- Key switch
- Hazard switch
- Door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH)
- Back door switch
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
• When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive
mode.
• Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
• Power door lock system. Refer to BL-16.
• Remote keyless entry system. Refer to BL-48.
• Power window system. Refer to GW-17. NOTE
• Sunroof system. Refer to RF-10. NOTE
• Room lamp timer. Refer to LT-106.
• Warning chime system. Refer to DI-34.
• Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to LT-55.
• Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-25.
• NVIS (NATS) system. Refer to BL-180.
NOTE:
Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
• Panic system. Refer to BL-48.
• Theft warning system. Refer to BL-72.
• Headlamp, daytime light, fog lamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to LT-5, LT25, LT-47, LT-90, or LT-35.
• Front wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-3.
• Rear window defogger system. Refer to GW-76.
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
System
Input
Output
Remote keyless entry system
Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob)
• All door locking actuators
• Back door opener actuator
• Turn signal lamps
Power door lock system
• Front power door lock/unlock switch (LH, RH)
• All door switches
• Key switch
All door locking actuators
Power supply (IGN/RAP) to power window and sunroof
Ignition/retained power supply
Power supply to power window and
sunroof system
Power supply (BAT) to power window,
sunroof and power seat
Battery power supply
Power supply to power window, sunroof system and power seat
Panic alarm
• Key switch
• Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob)
IPDM E/R
Auto light system
• Optical sensor
• Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Battery saver control
• Ignition switch
• Combination switch
• Front door switch LH and RH
IPDM E/R
Headlamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Tail lamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Fog lamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Revision: August 2007
BCS-6
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System
Input
Output
A
Turn signal lamp
Combination switch
• Turn signal lamp
• Combination meter
Hazard lamp
Hazard switch
• Turn signal lamp
• Combination meter
B
Room lamp timer
•
•
•
•
•
Interior room lamp
C
Key warning chime
• Key switch
• Front door switch LH
Combination meter (warning buzzer)
D
Light warning chime
• Combination switch
• Key switch
• Front door switch LH
Combination meter (warning buzzer)
Vehicle-speed-sensing intermittent wiper
• Combination switch
• Combination meter
IPDM E/R
Rear window defogger
Rear window defogger switch
IPDM E/R
Air conditioner switch signal
Front air control
ECM
Blower fan switch signal
Front air control
ECM
Low tire pressure warning system
Remote keyless entry receiver
• Combination meter
• Display control unit
Vehicle security system
•
•
•
•
•
•
Key switch
Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob)
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
All door switches
Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob)
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
All door switches
Back door latch (door ajar switch)
CAN Communication System Description
E
F
G
H
• IPDM E/R
• Security indicator lamp
I
INFOID:0000000001719307
J
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
BCS
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BCS-7
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719308
ALMWA0126GB
Revision: August 2007
BCS-8
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
N
O
ALMWA0127GB
P
Revision: August 2007
BCS-9
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCM Terminal Arrangement
INFOID:0000000001719309
LIIA2443E
Revision: August 2007
BCS-10
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719310
A
Measuring condition
Terminal
Wire
color
Signal name
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
1
BR/W
Ignition keyhole illumination
Output
OFF
Operation or condition
Door is locked (SW OFF)
Door is unlocked (SW ON)
Reference value or waveform
(Approx.)
B
Battery voltage
C
0V
D
2
GR/R
Combination switch
input 5
Input
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
E
SKIA5291E
F
3
G/Y
Combination switch
input 4
Input
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
G
SKIA5292E
4
G/R
Combination switch
input 3
Input
ON
H
I
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5291E
5
6
G/B
Combination switch
input 2
G/W
Combination switch
input 1
BCS
Input
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
L
SKIA5292E
9
W/L
10
GR
11
Rear window defogger
switch
Input
ON
Hazard lamp flash
Input
OFF
V
Ignition switch (ACC
or ON)
Input
ACC or
ON
12
GR/L
Front door switch RH
Input
OFF
13
O/B
Rear door switch RH
Input
OFF
15
L/W
Tire pressure warning
check connector
Input
OFF
Revision: August 2007
M
Rear window defogger switch
ON
0V
Rear window defogger switch
OFF
5V
N
ON (opening or closing)
0V
OFF (other than above)
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ACC or ON
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
0V
OFF (closed)
BCS-11
P
Battery voltage
ON (open)
Battery voltage
—
O
5V
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Measuring condition
Terminal
Wire
color
Signal name
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value or waveform
(Approx.)
18
P
Remote keyless entry
receiver (Ground)
Output
OFF
—
0V
19
V/W
Remote keyless entry
receiver (power supply)
Output
OFF
Ignition switch OFF
LIIA1893E
Stand-by (keyfob buttons released)
20
Y/G
Remote keyless entry
receiver signal (Signal)
LIIA1894E
Input
OFF
When remote keyless entry
receiver receives signal from
keyfob (keyfob buttons
pressed)
LIIA1895E
21
O
NATS antenna amp.
22
Y/B
BUS
G/O
Security indicator
lamp
Input
OFF →
ON
Ignition switch (OFF → ON)
—
—
Ignition switch ON or power
window timer operates
Just after turning ignition switch
ON: Pointer of tester should
move for approx. 1 second, then
return to battery voltage.
PIIA2344E
23
Output
OFF
25
BR
NATS antenna amp.
Input
OFF →
ON
27
L/R
Compressor ON signal
Input
ON
28
L/Y
Front blower monitor
Input
ON
29
Y/R
Hazard switch
Input
OFF
Revision: August 2007
Goes OFF → illuminates (Every 2.4 seconds)
Ignition switch (OFF → ON)
A/C switch OFF
A/C switch ON
Battery voltage → 0V
Just after turning ignition switch
ON: Pointer of tester should
move for approx. 1 second, then
return to battery voltage.
5V
0V
Front blower motor OFF
Battery voltage
Front blower motor ON
0V
ON
0V
OFF
5V
BCS-12
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire
color
Signal name
Signal
input/
output
Measuring condition
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value or waveform
(Approx.)
A
B
32
R/G
Combination switch
output 5
Output
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
C
SKIA5291E
33
R/Y
Combination switch
output 4
Output
ON
D
E
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
F
SKIA5292E
G
34
R
Combination switch
output 3
Output
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
H
SKIA5291E
35
36
R/B
Combination switch
output 2
R/W
Combination switch
output 1
I
Output
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5292E
37
B/R
38
Key inserted
Battery voltage
Key removed
0V
Key switch
Input
OFF
G
Ignition switch (ON)
Input
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
—
43
O
Back door switch
Input
OFF
44
BR
Rear wiper auto stop
Input
ON
47
GR/R
Front door switch LH
Input
OFF
48
W/G
Rear door switch LH
Input
OFF
49
W/V
Cargo lamp
Output
OFF
55
SB
Rear wiper motor output
Output
ON
Revision: August 2007
ON (open)
OFF (closed)
Rear wiper operating
Rear wiper stopped
ON (open)
OFF (closed)
ON (open)
OFF (closed)
Any door open (ON)
All doors closed (OFF)
L
M
0V
Battery voltage
N
0
Battery
0V
O
Battery voltage
0V
Battery voltage
0V
Battery voltage
OFF
0
ON
Battery voltage
BCS-13
BCS
2008 Quest
P
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
56
57
58
Wire
color
R/G
Y/G
W/R
59
G
60
GR/L
Signal name
Battery saver output
Battery power supply
Optical sensor
Signal
input/
output
Output
Input
Input
Measuring condition
Ignition
switch
OFF
Operation or condition
30 minutes after ignition
switch is turned OFF
Reference value or waveform
(Approx.)
0V
ON
—
Battery voltage
OFF
—
Battery voltage
When optical sensor is illuminated
3.1V or more
When optical sensor is not illuminated
0.6V or less
ON
Front door lock assembly LH actuator
(unlock)
Output
OFF
OFF (neutral)
Turn signal (left)
Output
ON
0V
ON (unlock)
Battery voltage
Turn left ON
SKIA3009J
61
G/R
Turn signal (right)
Output
ON
Turn right ON
SKIA3009J
62
R/W
Step lamp LH and RH
Output
OFF
63
P
Interior room/map
lamp
Output
OFF
65
V
All door lock actuators
(lock)
Output
OFF
66
G/Y
Front door lock actuator RH, rear door lock
actuators LH/RH and
back door lock actuator (unlock)
67
B/W
Ground
68
W/L
Power window power
supply (RAP)
ON (any door open)
OFF (all doors closed)
ON (open)
Any door
switch
OFF (closed)
OFF (neutral)
OFF
Input
ON
Output
—
Battery voltage
0V
Battery voltage
0V
ON (lock)
Battery voltage
OFF (neutral)
Output
0V
0V
ON (unlock)
Battery voltage
—
0V
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 seconds after ignition switch OFF
0V
When front door LH or RH is
open or power window timer
operates
0V
69
W/R
Power window power
supply
Output
—
—
Battery voltage
70
W/B
Battery power supply
Input
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Revision: August 2007
BCS-14
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719311
A
1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
• Check 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
• Check 10A fuses [No. 4 and 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 15A fuses [No. 3, located in the fuse
block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
11
Ground
M18
C
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connectors and ground.
Connector
B
Power
source
Condition
ACC
power
supply
Ignition
switch
ACC or
ON
E
Voltage (V) (Approx.)
F
Battery voltage
G
LIIA2415E
38
Ground
Ignition
power
supply
Ignition
switch ON
or START
Battery voltage
57
Ground
Battery
power
supply
Ignition
switch
OFF
Battery voltage
Ground
Battery
power
supply
Ignition
switch
OFF
Battery voltage
M20
70
H
I
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace the harness.
BCS
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
67 - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
LIIA0915E
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Revision: August 2007
O
INFOID:0000000001719312
BCS-15
P
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Content
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
ITEMS OF EACH PART
NOTE:
CONSULT-III will only display systems the vehicle possesses.
Diagnostic test mode (Inspection by part)
System and item
CONSULT-III display
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF−
DIAG RESULTS
×
BCM
BCM
×
Power door lock system
DOOR LOCK
×
Rear defogger
DATA
MONITOR
CAN DIAG
SUPPORT
MNTR
ECU
PART
NUMBER
×
×
ACTIVE
TEST
×
×
×
REAR
DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Room lamp timer
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Remote keyless entry
system
MULTI REMOTE
ENT
×
×
×
Headlamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper
WIPER
×
×
Turn signal lamp
Hazard lamp
FLASHER
×
×
Blower fan switch signal
Air conditioner switch
signal
AIR
CONDITIONER
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
×
NVIS (NATS)
IMMU
×
×
Interior lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
Back door
BACK DOOR
×
×
×
×
×
Retained power control
RETAINED PWR
×
Low tire pressure monitor system
AIR PRESSURE
MONITOR
×
Oil pressure switch
SIGNAL BUFFER
Panic system
PANIC ALARM
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
×
×
×
CONFIGURATION
×
×
×
×
×
×
WORK SUPPORT
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
BCS-16
2008 Quest
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
A
Description
RESET SETTING VALUE
Return a value set with WORK SUPPORT of each system to a default value in factory shipment.
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
INFOID:0000000001719313
B
1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
1.
2.
3.
C
Connect to CONSULT-III, and select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
Select “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
D
CONSULT-III display code
Diagnosis item
INITIAL DIAG
E
TRANSMIT DIAG
ECM
U1000
IPDM E/R
F
METER/M&A
I-KEY
Contents displayed
No malfunction>>Inspection End
Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Configuration
G
H
INFOID:0000000003302384
I
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has three functions as follows:
• READ CONFIGURATION is the function to read (extract) vehicle configuration of current BCM.
• WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection is the function to select and write vehicle configuration on BCM J
manually.
• WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file is the function to write vehicle configuration with the data extracted
from current BCM.
BCS
• For READ CONFIGURATION and WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file, refer to CONSULT-III Operation
Manual.
• For WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection using the following chart, identify the correct model and
L
configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-III software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown
in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-III WRITE
CONFIGURATION-Manual selection screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set M
or changed.
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-43, "Model Variation".
N
ITEM
SET VAL
AUTO LIGHT
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
FR FOG LAMP
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
SPEED SENS WIP
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
O
CAUTION:
• When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-III.
• Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
• If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
Revision: August 2007
BCS-17
2008 Quest
P
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation of BCM
INFOID:0000000001719315
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring
brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration".
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to PB-5, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2).
• ⇐ : Front
LKIA0715E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration".
• When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-180.
• When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT13, "ID Registration Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
BCS-18
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
BL
BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 4
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check .............................40
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check ....42
Front Door Lock Actuator RH Check .......................43
Door Lock Actuator Check (Sliding Door) ................44
Back Door Lock Actuator Check (Without Automatic Back Door) .....................................................44
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check ..........................................................45
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4
Precaution for work ................................................... 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5
G
H
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............. 48
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 6
Work Flow ................................................................. 6
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 8
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 10
HOOD .................................................................12
Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 12
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly ........... 13
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ...... 14
Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................. 15
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ........................16
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 16
System Description ................................................. 16
Schematic ............................................................... 19
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK - ..................................... 21
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 33
Work Flow ............................................................... 33
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 34
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart ......................... 35
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
.... 35
Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door
System) ................................................................... 35
Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door
System) ................................................................... 37
Key Switch (Insert) Check ....................................... 39
Revision: August 2007
F
BL-1
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................48
System Description ..................................................48
CAN Communication System Description ...............51
Schematic ................................................................52
Wiring Diagram - KEYLES - ....................................53
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................55
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........55
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................56
CONSULT-III Application Item .................................56
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ..................................58
Pre-Diagnosis Inspection .........................................58
Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................58
Key Switch (insert) Check .......................................60
Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door
System) ...................................................................61
Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door
System) ...................................................................63
Keyfob Battery and Function Check ........................65
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Inspection ...........................................................................66
ACC Power Check ...................................................67
IPDM E/R Operation Check .....................................67
Check Hazard Function ...........................................68
Check Horn Function ...............................................68
Check Headlamp Function ......................................68
Check Interior Lamp Illumination Function ..............69
ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................69
Keyfob Battery Replacement ...................................71
2008 Quest
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM ............................................................. 72
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 137
System Description ............................................... 137
Schematic ............................................................. 142
Wiring Diagram - B/CLOS - ................................... 143
Back Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................................. 148
Terminal and Reference Value for Back Door
Control Unit ........................................................... 148
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 149
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ............................... 149
Self-Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 150
Diagnosis Chart .................................................... 151
Back Door Control Unit Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Inspection .................................................. 152
Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection . 152
Back Door Close Switch System Inspection ......... 154
Pinch Strip System Inspection .............................. 155
Back Door Warning Chime System Inspection ..... 156
Half-Latch Switch System Inspection .................... 156
Open Switch System Inspection ........................... 157
Close Switch System Inspection ........................... 158
Back Door Handle Switch System Inspection ....... 159
Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection .................. 160
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 72
System Description ................................................. 72
CAN Communication System Description .............. 74
Schematic ............................................................... 75
Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC - ................................... 76
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 80
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 80
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 81
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 82
Preliminary Check .................................................. 83
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 84
Diagnosis Procedure 1 ........................................... 84
Diagnosis Procedure 2 ........................................... 88
Diagnosis Procedure 3 ........................................... 89
Diagnosis Procedure 4 ........................................... 91
Diagnosis Procedure 5 ........................................... 91
Diagnosis Procedure 6 ........................................... 91
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM ........... 92
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 92
System Description ................................................. 92
Schematic ..............................................................100
Wiring Diagram - S/CLOS - ...................................103
Sliding Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..........................................................118
Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door
Control Unit ............................................................118
Sliding Door Latch Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................120
Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door
Latch Control Unit ..................................................120
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................121
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ................................121
Self-Diagnosis Procedure ......................................122
Diagnosis Chart .....................................................123
Auto Sliding Door Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ........................................................124
Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection ..125
Sliding Door Open/Close Switch System Inspection .........................................................................125
Sliding Door Motor System Inspection ..................126
Magnetic Clutch Line Check ..................................127
Sliding Door Encoder System Inspection ..............127
Sliding Door Remote Control Switch System Inspection .................................................................129
Child Lockout Switch System Inspection ...............130
Latch Release Actuator System Inspection ...........130
Warning Chime System Inspection .......................131
Half-Latch Switch System Inspection ....................132
Full-Latch Switch System Inspection .....................133
Neutral Switch System Inspection .........................134
Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection ...................135
DOOR ............................................................... 162
Fitting Adjustment ................................................. 162
Removal and Installation ....................................... 165
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 168
Component Structure ............................................ 168
Removal and Installation ....................................... 168
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 170
SLIDE DOOR LOCK ......................................... 171
Removal and Installation ....................................... 171
BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 175
Component Structure ............................................ 175
Back Door Latch ................................................... 176
Back Door Power Lift Assembly ............................ 177
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 178
Wiring Diagram - F/LID - ....................................... 178
NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SystemNATS) ............................................................... 180
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM ............. 137
Revision: August 2007
BL-2
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 180
System Description ............................................... 180
System Composition ............................................. 180
ECM Re-communicating Function ........................ 181
Wiring Diagram - NATS - ...................................... 182
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 182
CONSULT-III Function .......................................... 182
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ............................... 184
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 185
Diagnosis Procedure 1 .......................................... 187
Diagnosis Procedure 2 .......................................... 188
Diagnosis Procedure 3 .......................................... 188
2008 Quest
Diagnosis Procedure 4 .......................................... 189
Diagnosis Procedure 5 .......................................... 190
Diagnosis Procedure 6 .......................................... 192
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp ................... 193
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ...... 194
Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV - ................................. 194
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 194
BODY REPAIR ................................................. 196
Body Component Parts ......................................... 197
Corrosion Protection .............................................. 200
Body Sealing ......................................................... 202
Body Construction ................................................. 206
Body Alignment ..................................................... 206
Handling Precaution for Plastics ............................ 218
Precaution in Repairing High Strength Steel ......... 221
Foam Repair .......................................................... 223
Replacement Operation ......................................... 224
A
B
C
Body Exterior Paint Color ...................................... 196
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-3
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718448
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for work
INFOID:0000000001718449
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operation.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
Revision: August 2007
BL-4
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718450
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
B
Description
C
Locating the noise
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
D
E
SIIA0993E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
G
H
SIIA0994E
BL
J
Used to test keyfobs
—
(J-43241)
Remote Keyless Entry
Tester
K
L
LEL946A
M
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718451
N
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
O
Locating the noise
P
SIIA0995E
Revision: August 2007
BL-5
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000001718452
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: August 2007
BL-6
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
D
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
E
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
F
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken G
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- H
porarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
BL
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
Revision: August 2007
BL-7
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
INFOID:0000000001718453
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: August 2007
BL-8
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
B
C
D
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
E
F
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the G
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
H
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- BL
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-9
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000001718454
LAIA0072E
Revision: August 2007
BL-10
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LAIA0071E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-11
2008 Quest
HOOD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HOOD
Fitting Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001718455
AWIIA0727ZZ
1.
Hood hinge
2.
Hood lock assembly
3.
Hood assembly
4.
Front grille
5.
Headlamp
6.
Front fender
D.
6.0 - 10.0 mm (0.236 - 0.394 in)
E.
0.0 - 4.0 mm (0.000 - 0.157 in)
F.
5.3 - 9.3 mm (0.209 - 0.366 in)
G.
5.1 - 7.1 mm (0.201 - 0.280 in)
CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
Revision: August 2007
BL-12
2008 Quest
HOOD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the hood lock assembly and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood clearance of hood and fender becomes 1 mm (0.04 in) lower than fitting standard dimension.
2. Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and
striker for looseness, and tighten the lock bolt to the specified torque.
3. Adjust the clearance and surface height of hood and fender according to the fitting standard dimension by
rotating right and left bumper rubbers.
CAUTION:
Adjust right/left gap between hood and each part to the following specification.
Hood and headlamp (B–B)
2.
3.
B
C
: Less than 2.0 mm
D
HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT
1.
A
Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock center
(when viewed from vehicle front).
Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx.
3 kg (29 N, 7lb).
CAUTION:
Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or
higher.
After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified
torque.
E
F
G
H
PIIA3806E
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718456
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIIA1116E
Revision: August 2007
BL-13
2008 Quest
HOOD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
2.
3.
1.
Hood assembly
2.
Hood front sealing rubber
4.
Hood hinge
5.
Hood lock assembly
3.
Hood insulator
Support the hood by the striker with a suitable tool to prevent it from falling.
Remove the hinge to hood nuts to remove the hood assembly.
CAUTION:
Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
INFOID:0000000001718457
WIIA1117E
1.
Hood lock assembly
2.
Hood lock cable
3.
Radiator core support side
4.
Hood ledge reinforce upper
5.
Hood ledge upper
6.
Clip
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-17, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and
hoodledge.
Remove the bolt and the hood opener.
Remove the grommet on the dash lower panel, and pull the
hood lock cable toward the passenger room.
CAUTION:
While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the
hood lock cable.
LIIA1544E
Revision: August 2007
BL-14
2008 Quest
HOOD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSTALLATION
1. Pull the hood lock cable through the dash lower panel hole to the engine room.
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius
100mm (3.94 in) or more.
2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and push the grommet into the panel hole securely.
3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at * mark.
A
B
C
D
PIIA0173E
4.
5.
Install the cable securely to the lock.
After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood
opener operation. Refer to BL-12, "Fitting Adjustment".
E
F
G
PIIA0174E
Hood Lock Control Inspection
H
INFOID:0000000001718458
BL
CAUTION:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front
end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make
sure the hood opener returns to the original position.
J
K
L
PIIA1086E
M
3.
Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply
“body grease” to the points shown in the figure.
N
O
P
PIIA0176E
Revision: August 2007
BL-15
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718459
LIIA2462E
1.
Sliding door switch
LH B46
RH B135
2.
BCM M18, M19, M20
(view with instrument panel removed)
3.
Front pillar LH
4.
Front door lock assembly LH D14
(key cylinder switch)
5.
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch LH D7, D8
Power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH D105
6.
Front door switch
LH B8
RH B108
7.
Back door latch (door ajar switch)
D511
(with power back door)
Back door switch D512
(without power back door)
8.
Key switch M27
9.
Sliding door lock actuator
LH D205
RH D305
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718460
WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70 and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to key switch terminal 1.
With ignition key inserted, power is supplied
• through key switch terminal 2
• to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the door is locked or unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied
• to CPU of main power window and door lock/unlock switch
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Revision: August 2007
BL-16
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Then main power window and door lock/unlock switch operation signal is supplied
• to BCM terminal 22
A
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12.
When the door is locked or unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied
• to CPU of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
B
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then power window and door lock/unlock switch RH operation signal is supplied
• to BCM terminal 22
C
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16.
When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6
D
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1 and 5
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied
E
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12.
When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7
F
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 6 and 5
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied
G
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12.
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH through the power window serial link.
H
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 47
• through front door switch LH terminal 1
BL
• through front door switch LH case ground.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 12
• through front door switch RH terminal 1
J
• through front door switch RH case ground.
When the sliding door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 48
K
• through sliding door switch LH terminal 1
• through sliding door switch LH case ground.
When the sliding door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 13
L
• through sliding door switch RH terminal 1
• through sliding door switch RH case ground.
When the back door switch is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
M
• to BCM terminal 43
• through back door switch terminal 1
• through back door switch terminal 3
N
• through grounds D403 and D404.
WITH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70 and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to key switch terminal 1.
With ignition key inserted, power is supplied
• through key switch terminal 2
• to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the door is locked or unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied
• to CPU of main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Revision: August 2007
BL-17
2008 Quest
O
P
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then main power window and door lock/unlock switch operation signal is supplied
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14.
When the door is locked or unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied
• to CPU of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then power window and door lock/unlock switch RH operation signal is supplied
• to BCM terminal 22
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16.
When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 4
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1 and 5
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14.
When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 6 and 5
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14.
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH through a serial link.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 47
• through front door switch LH terminal 1
• through front door switch LH case ground.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 12
• through front door switch RH terminal 1
• through front door switch RH case ground.
When the sliding door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 48
• through sliding door switch LH terminal 1
• through sliding door switch LH case ground.
When the sliding door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 13
• through sliding door switch RH terminal 1
• through sliding door switch RH case ground.
When the back door switch (built into back door latch) is ON (door is open), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 43
• through back door latch (door ajar switch) assembly terminal 7
• through back door latch assembly terminal 8
• through grounds D403 and D404.
OUTLINE
Functions available by operating the door lock and unlock switches on driver's door and passenger's door
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
unlocked.
Functions available by operating the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door key cylinder, door lock actuators of all doors are locked.
• When door key cylinder is unlocked, front door lock assembly LH (actuator) is unlocked.
Revision: August 2007
BL-18
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When door key cylinder is unlocked for the second time within 5 seconds after the first operation, door lock
actuators on all doors are unlocked.
A
Key reminder door system
When door lock and unlock switch is operated to lock doors with ignition key in key cylinder and any door
open, all door lock actuators are locked and then unlocked.
B
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718461
WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIWA1808E
Revision: August 2007
BL-19
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
WIWA1809E
WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYS-
Revision: August 2007
BL-20
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1810E
P
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -
INFOID:0000000001718462
WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
BL-21
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1811E
Revision: August 2007
BL-22
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1812E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-23
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1813E
Revision: August 2007
BL-24
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1814E
WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
BL-25
2008 Quest
P
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1815E
Revision: August 2007
BL-26
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1816E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-27
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1817E
Revision: August 2007
BL-28
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
ALKWA0205GB
WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
BL-29
2008 Quest
P
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1819E
Revision: August 2007
BL-30
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1820E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-31
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1821E
Revision: August 2007
BL-32
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1822E
P
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718463
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Work Flow
1.
INFOID:0000000001718464
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Revision: August 2007
BL-33
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Understand the outline of system. Refer to BL-16, "System Description".
3. According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to BL-35,
"Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart".
4. Does power door lock system operate normally? OK: GO TO 5, NG: GO TO 3.
5. Inspection End.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718465
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM
diagnostic test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the
BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received date is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to
them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be
read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item "OPERATION"
Content
KEY ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
CDL LOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
CDL UNLOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK-SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder.
KEY CYL UN-SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder.
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW–DR
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW–AS
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW–RR
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch RH.
DOOR SW–RL
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch LH.
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
Content
ALL LOCK/UNLOCK
This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when "ON"
on CONSULT–III screen is touched.
DR UNLOCK
This test is able to check front door lock assembly LH (actuator) unlock operation.These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–III screen is touched.
OTHER UNLOCK
This test is able to check door lock actuators [except front door lock assembly LH (actuator)]
unlock operation.These actuators unlock when "ON" on CONSULT–III screen is touched.
Revision: August 2007
BL-34
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001718466
A
Symptom
Repair order
Key reminder door function does not operate
properly.
Refer to page
1. Door switch check
BL-35
2. Key switch (Insert) check
BL-39
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-18
Power door lock does not operate with door lock
and unlock switch on main power window and
door lock/unlock switch or power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH.
1. Door lock/unlock switch check
Front door lock assembly LH (actuator) does not
operate.
1. Front door lock assembly LH (actuator) check
BL-42
1. Door lock actuator check (Front LH)
BL-42
2. Door lock actuator check (Front RH)
BL-43
3. Door lock actuator check (Sliding door)
BL-44
4. Back door lock actuator check (Without automatic back door system)
BL-44
5. Back door lock actuator check (With automatic
back door system)
BL-150
1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check
BL-45
Specific door lock actuator does not operate.
Power door lock does not operate with front door
lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation.
Power door lock does not operate.
B
C
BL-40
D
2. Replace BCM.
BCS-18
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
BL-35
2. Door lock/unlock switch check
BL-40
3. Replace BCM.
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
E
F
G
H
BL
BCS-18
INFOID:0000000001718467
J
INFOID:0000000001718468
K
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System)
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR
SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
L
M
N
O
• When doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
Revision: August 2007
P
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
BL-35
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
M19
M18
Item
Terminals
(+)
Back door
switch
43
Front door
switch LH
47
Sliding door
switch LH
48
Front door
switch RH
12
Sliding door
switch RH
13
(–)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
LIIA1041E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH),
B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47
and 48.
1 - 12
1 - 13
1 - 43
1 - 47
1 - 48
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front
LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or
D512 (Back) terminal 1 and ground.
WIIA1143E
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
FRONT AND SLIDING DOORS
Check continuity between front or sliding door switch terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0782E
BACK DOOR
Revision: August 2007
BL-36
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between back door switch terminals 1 and 3 while
pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
A
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> (Front and sliding doors) Switch circuit is OK.
OK
>> (Back door) GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
C
WIIA0783E
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND
D
Check continuity between back door switch connector D512 terminal
3 and ground.
3 - Ground
E
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
F
G
WIIA0791E
Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System)
INFOID:0000000001718469
H
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
BL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR
SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
J
K
L
• When doors are closed:
M
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
N
O
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
BL-37
P
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
M19
M18
Item
Terminals
(+)
Back door
latch (door
ajar switch)
43
Front door
switch LH
47
Sliding door
switch LH
48
Front door
switch RH
12
Sliding door
switch RH
13
(–)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
LIIA1041E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH),
B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and BCM
connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48.
1 - 47
1 - 12
1 - 48
1 - 13
7 - 43
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front
LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511
terminal 7 and ground.
1 - Ground
7 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA1144E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
FRONT AND SLIDING DOORS
Revision: August 2007
BL-38
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between front or sliding door switch terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
A
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
B
C
WIIA0782E
D
BACK DOOR
Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) terminals 7 and 8 while pressing (closing back door) and releasing (opening back door) switch.
E
When back door is open
: Continuity should exist.
When back door is closed : Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Front and sliding doors) Switch circuit is OK.
OK
>> (Back door) GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
F
G
WIIA0811E
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND
H
Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground.
8 - Ground
BL
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
LIIA0828E
Key Switch (Insert) Check
INFOID:0000000001718470
L
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III
Function (BCM)".
• When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
N
: ON
O
• When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
M
: OFF
P
Without CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
BL-39
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Terminal
Connector
(+)
(–)
M18
37
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Key switch (insert) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0567E
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch.
Check continuity between key switch terminals 1, 2.
Terminals
1–2
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace key switch. Refer to PS-9.
LIIA1906E
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check
INFOID:0000000001718471
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK:
CDL LOCK SW
: ON
• When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK:
CDL UNLOCK SW
: ON
Without CONSULT-III
Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/
unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after
the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
1.
2.
Revision: August 2007
BL-40
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
Terminal
(+)
A
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(–)
B
M18
22
Ground
C
PIIA1297E
PIIA6379E
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for "MULTI REMOTE ENT" with CONSULT–III.
Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item".
When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered?
F
G
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
H
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
BL
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
J
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 (without automatic back
door system) or D8 terminal 17 (with automatic back door system) and ground.
K
15 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
17 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
L
WIIA0812E
4.
M
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
N
11 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
P
LIIA1270E
4.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 12 (without automatic back door system) or terminal 14 (with automatic back
door system).
Revision: August 2007
BL-41
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
22 - 12
22 - 14
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA1903E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 16.
22 - 16
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1271E
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check
INFOID:0000000001718472
1.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (ACTUATOR) HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly LH (actuator).
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65
and front door lock assembly LH (actuator) connector D14 terminals 2, 3.
Connector
M20
4.
Terminals
Connector
59
Terminals
Continuity
2
Yes
3
Yes
D14
65
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65
and body ground.
LIIA1574E
Connector
M20
Terminals
59
65
Ground
Continuity
No
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (ACTUATOR) SIGNAL
1.
Reconnect BCM.
Revision: August 2007
BL-42
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65
and ground.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Driver door lock/unlock
switch is turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
Driver door lock/unlock
switch is turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
(-)
59
M20
Ground
65
A
B
C
LIIA1046E
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (actuator). Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Front Door Lock Actuator RH Check
INFOID:0000000001718473
F
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and front door lock actuator RH.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and front door lock actuator RH connector D114 terminals 2, 3.
G
H
Connector
M20
4.
Terminals
Connector
65
Terminals
Continuity
3
Yes
2
Yes
D114
66
BL
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and body ground.
Connector
Terminals
65
M20
Continuity
Ground
66
J
LIIA1479E
No
K
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
M
1.
2.
Reconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
65
M20
Ground
66
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Door lock/unlock switch
is turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
Door lock/unlock switch
is turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
N
O
P
LIIA1048E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock actuator RH. Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
BL-43
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Door Lock Actuator Check (Sliding Door)
INFOID:0000000001718474
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and each door lock actuator.
Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M20 terminals 65,
66 and sliding door lock actuator connector (B) D205 (LH) or
D305 (RH) terminals 2, 4.
Connector
M20
4.
Terminals
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
65
D205 or
D305
4
Yes
2
Yes
66
Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M20 terminals 65,
66 and body ground.
WIIA1145E
Connector
Terminals
65
M20
Continuity
Ground
66
No
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
Reconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
65
M19
Ground
66
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Door lock/unlock switch
is turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
Door lock/unlock switch
is turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
LIIA1048E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace sliding door lock actuator. Refer to BL-171.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Back Door Lock Actuator Check (Without Automatic Back Door)
INFOID:0000000001718475
1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and back door lock actuator.
Revision: August 2007
BL-44
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M20 terminals 65,
66 and back door lock actuator connector (B) D513 terminals 2,
4.
Connector
Connector
65
M20
4.
Terminals
Terminals
Continuity
2
Yes
4
Yes
D513
66
A
B
C
Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M19 terminals 50,
51 and body ground.
WIIA1146E
Connector
Terminals
65
M20
Ground
66
D
Continuity
No
No
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
F
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
G
Reconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66
and ground.
H
Connector
Terminals
(+)
65
M20
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Door lock/unlock switch
is turned to LOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
Door lock/unlock switch
is turned to UNLOCK
0 → Battery voltage
for 300 ms
(-)
Ground
66
BL
J
LIIA1048E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace back door lock actuator. Refer to BL-176, "Back Door Latch".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check
L
INFOID:0000000001718476
1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
M
With CONSULT-III
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in
DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
N
KEY CYL LK-SW
O
: ON
• When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
KEY CYL UN-SW
P
: ON
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 (without
automatic sliding door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system) and ground.
Revision: August 2007
BL-45
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Without Automatic Sliding Door System
Terminals
Connector
(+)
(–)
6
D7
Ground
7
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
LIIA0867E
With Automatic Sliding Door System
Terminals
Connector
(+)
(–)
4
D7
Ground
6
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
LIIA0566E
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH GROUND HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and body ground.
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D14
5 – Ground
Yes
WIIA0813E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) terminals.
Terminals
1–5
Condition
Continuity
Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
Key is turned to LOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
5–6
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
LIIA1573E
BL-46
2008 Quest
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168.
A
4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER HARNESS
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 6, 7
(without automatic sliding door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system) and front door
lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector (B) D14 terminals 1, 6 and body ground.
Without Automatic Sliding Door System
Connector
A: Main
power window and
door lock/
unlock
switch
C
Terminals
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
6
B: Front
door lock
assembly
LH (key
cylinder
switch)
1
Yes
7
D
6
Yes
E
6
Ground
No
7
Ground
No
WIIA1159E
With Automatic Sliding Door System
Connector
A: Main
power window and
door lock/
unlock
switch
F
G
Terminals
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
4
B: Front
door lock
assembly
LH (key
cylinder
switch)
1
Yes
6
B
H
6
Yes
BL
4
Ground
No
6
Ground
No
WIIA0814E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-47
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718477
LIIA2463E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20
2.
(view with instrument panel removed)
Front pillar LH
3.
Front door switch
LH B8
RH B108
4.
Back door latch (door ajar switch)
D511
(with power back door)
Back door switch D512
(without power back door)
5.
Key switch M27
6.
Remote keyless entry receiver M120
7.
Front pillar RH
8.
Horn (low) E3
(below front combination lamp LH)
9.
Horn (high) E108
(below front combination lamp RH)
10. Sliding door switch
LH B46
RH B135
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718478
INPUTS
Power is supplied at all times
• to BCM terminal 70
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 57
Revision: August 2007
BL-48
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition key is inserted in the ignition cylinder, power is supplied
• to BCM terminal 37
• through key switch terminals 1 and 2
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON, power is supplied
• to BCM terminal 11
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in ON or START, power is supplied
• to BCM terminal 38
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 47
• through front door switch LH terminal 1
• through front door switch LH case ground.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 12
• through front door switch RH terminal 1
• through front door switch RH case ground.
When the sliding door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 48
• through sliding door switch LH terminal 1
• through sliding door switch LH case ground.
When the sliding door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 13
• through sliding door switch RH terminal 1
• through sliding door switch RH case ground.
When the back door switch is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 43
• through back door switch terminal 1 (without power back door) or,
• through back door latch terminal 7 (with power back door)
• through back door switch terminal 3 (without power back door)
• through back door latch terminal 8 (with power back door)
• through body grounds D403 and D404.
Keyfob signal is supplied to BCM from the remote keyless entry receiver.
The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the
• power door locks
• sliding door opener (with automatic sliding door system)
• back door opener (with power back door)
• interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
• panic alarm
• hazard and horn reminder
• keyless power window down (open)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
OPERATION PROCEDURE
• The BCM only locks/unlocks the doors if the ID number matches. (Remote control entry functions)
• When the keyfob is operated, the signal from the keyfob is sent and the remote keyless entry receiver
receives the signal and sends it to the BCM. Only if the ID number matches does the BCM send the open/
close signal to the sliding door control unit. (Remote control automatic sliding door function)
• Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder or one of the doors is opened within 1 minute after the
UNLOCK switch on the keyfob is pressed, all the doors are automatically locked. (Auto lock function)
• When a door is locked or unlocked, the vehicle hazard lamps flash and the horn sounds to verify operation.
(Active check function)
• When the key is in the ignition key cylinder (when the key switch is ON) and one of the doors is open, the
door lock function does not work even when the door lock is operated with the keyfob.
• Keyfob ID set up is available.
• If a keyfob is lost, a new keyfob can be set up. A maximum of 5 IDs can be set up.
Remote Control Entry Functions
Operation Description
• When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the keyfob and received by the remote keyless entry receiver.
Revision: August 2007
BL-49
2008 Quest
N
O
P
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number.
• If the ID number matches, the BCM sends the lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator.
• When the door lock actuators receive this signal, each operates to lock/unlock its door.
• BCM locks all doors with input of LOCK signal from keyfob.
• When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver's door will be unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked.
Remote control entry operation conditions
Keyfob operation
Operation condition
• With key removed (key switch: OFF)
• Closing all doors (door switch: OFF)
Door lock operation (locking)
Door lock operation (unlocking)
With key removed (key switch: OFF)
Auto Lock Function
Operation Description
• Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder or one of the doors is opened, within 1 minute after a
door lock is unlocked by keyfob operation, all the doors are automatically locked.
The 1 minute timer count is executed by the BCM and after 1 minute, the BCM sends the lock signal to all
doors.
Lock operations are the same as for the remote control entry function.
Remote Control Automatic Sliding Door Function (Vehicles With Automatic Sliding Door System)
For the auto sliding door system operation, refer to BL-92, "System Description".
Active Check Function
Operation Description
When a door is locked or unlocked by keyfob operation, the vehicle hazard lamps flash and the horn sounds to
verify operation.
• When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the keyfob and received by the keyless
remote entry receiver.
• The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number.
• If the ID number matches, the BCM sends the hazard lamps flashing and horn signals to the IPDM E/R.
• The IPDM E/R flashes the hazard lamps and sounds the horn (when in C mode) for each keyfob operation.
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
C mode
S mode
Keyfob operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning lamp
flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
Hazard and Horn Reminder
BCM output to IPDM E/R for horn reminder signal as DATA LINE (CAN-H line and CAN-L line).
The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode).
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode
With CONSULT-III
Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET".
Without CONSULT-III
Refer to Owner's Manual for instructions.
Interior Lamp Operation
When the following input signals are both supplied:
• all door switches are in the OFF position (when all the doors are closed);
• lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position.
Remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) for 30 seconds with input
of UNLOCK signal from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to LT-107, "System Description".
Panic Alarm Operation
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns
on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob.
Revision: August 2007
BL-50
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation
When keyfob unlock switch is turned ON with ignition switch OFF, and the switch is detected to be on continuously for more than 3 seconds, the driver's door and passenger's door power windows are simultaneously
opened.
Power window is operated to open and the operation continues as long as the keyfob unlock switch is
pressed.
CAN Communication System Description
A
B
INFOID:0000000001718479
C
Refer to LAN-3.
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-51
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718480
WIWA1823E
Revision: August 2007
BL-52
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - KEYLES -
INFOID:0000000001718481
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1824E
Revision: August 2007
BL-53
2008 Quest
P
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1825E
Revision: August 2007
BL-54
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1826E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718482
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001718483
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
BL-55
2008 Quest
P
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718484
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM
diagnostic test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the
BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received date is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to
them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be
read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-III Application Item
INFOID:0000000001718486
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
Data Monitor
Monitored Item
Description
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch LH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch RH.
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEYLESS LOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote locking signal.
KEYLESS PANIC
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS PSD
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob sliding door button is pushed (with RH power door only).
KEYLESS PSD L
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob left sliding door button is pushed (with LH and RH power doors).
KEYLESS PSD R
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob right sliding door button is pushed (with LH and RH power doors).
KEYLESS UNLOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote unlocking signal.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
LK/UN BTN ON
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
PANIC BTN
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.
RKE KEEP UNLK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition. Keep pushing UNLOCK, turns to ON 3 seconds after UNLOCK button is pushed.
RKE LCK-UNLCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob LOCK and UNLOCK buttons are pushed at the same time.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
UN BUTTON ON
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
Active Test
Revision: August 2007
BL-56
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Test Item
Description
A
INT ILLUM
This test is able to check interior lamp illumination operation. The interior lamp illumination is turned
on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
IGN ILLUM
This test is able to check ignition keyhole illumination operation. The ignition keyhole illumination is
turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
FLASHER RIGHT(CAN)
This test is able to check right hazard reminder operation. The right hazard lamp turns on when “ON”
on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
FLASHER LEFT(CAN)
This test is able to check left hazard reminder operation. The left hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on
CONSULT-III screen is touched.
HORN
This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
HEAD LAMP (HI)
This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
POWER WINDOW DOWN
This test is able to check power window down operation. The windows are lowered when “ON” on
CONSULT-III screen is touched.
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
This test is able to check back door actuator operation. The back door is unlocked when “ON” on
CONSULT-III screen is touched.
B
C
D
E
F
Work Support
G
Test Item
Description
REMO CONT ID REGIST
keyfob ID code can be registered.
REMO CONT ID ERASUR
keyfob ID code can be erased.
REMO CONT ID CONFIR
It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode.
HORN CHIRP SET
Horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The horn reminder mode will be changed when
"CHANGE SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
HAZARD LAMP SET
Hazard reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The hazard reminder mode will be changed
when "CHANGE SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
H
MULTI ANSWER BACK SET
Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed
when “CHANG SETT” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
AUTO LOCK SET
Auto locking function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when
"CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
PANIC ALRM SET
Panic alarm operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when
"CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
TRUNK OPEN SET
Back door opener operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed
when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
PW DOWN SET
Keyless power window down (open) operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation
mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
BL
J
K
L
M
Hazard and horn reminder mode
MODE 1
(C mode)
MODE 2
(S mode)
MODE 3
MODE 4
MODE 5
MODE 6
Keyfob
operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning
lamp flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
—
—
Twice
Once
Twice
—
—
Once
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Once
—
Once
—
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
5 minutes
Nothing
1 minute
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
0.5 seconds
Nothing
1.5 seconds
Panic alarm operation mode
Keyfob operation
Revision: August 2007
O
P
Auto locking function mode
Auto locking function
N
BL-57
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trunk lid open operation mode
Keyfob operation
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
0.5 seconds
Nothing
1.5 seconds
Keyless power window down operation mode
Keyfob operation
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
3 seconds
Nothing
5 seconds
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000001718487
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-48, "System Description".
Confirm system operation.
• Check that the power door lock system operates normally. Refer to BL-16.
• Check that the automatic sliding door system operates normally. Refer to BL-92.
• Check that the automatic back door system operates normally. Refer to BL-137.
Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to BL-58, "Pre-Diagnosis Inspection".
Refer to trouble diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-58,
"Trouble Diagnosis".
Inspection End.
Pre-Diagnosis Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718488
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718489
SYMPTOM CHART
NOTE:
• Always check the "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" before troubleshooting. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis
Procedure".
• Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. Refer to BL-65, "Keyfob Battery and Function Check".
• The panic alarm operation of the remote keyless entry system does not activate with the ignition key inserted
in the ignition key cylinder.
• Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob before
replacing keyfob.
Symptom
All functions of remote keyless entry system do not
operate.
The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered.
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241).
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
BL-65
2. Check BCM and remote keyless entry receiver.
BL-66
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241).
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
BL-65
2. Key switch (insert) check.
BL-60
3a. Door switch check (without automatic back door system).
BL-61
3b. Door switch check (with automatic back door system).
BL-63
4. ACC power check.
5. Replace BCM.
Revision: August 2007
Reference
page
BL-58
BL-67
BCS-18
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Door lock or unlock does not function.
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to
BL-16.)
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241).
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Replace BCM.
Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly
when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
Horn reminder does not activate properly when
pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
(Hazard reminder OK)
BL-61
2b. Door switch check (with automatic back door system).
BL-63
2. Check hazard function with hazard switch.
BL-68
2. Check horn function with horn switch.
BL-67
G
H
BL
BCS-18
BL-60
3. Remote keyless entry receiver system check.
BL-66
J
K
BCS-18
1. Room lamp operation check.
BL-68
2. Ignition keyhole illumination operation check.
BL-69
3. Step lamp operation check.
LT-107
4a. Door switch check (without automatic back door).
BL-61
4b. Door switch check (with automatic back door).
BL-63
L
M
N
BCS-18
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241).
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
BL-65
2. Key switch (insert) check.
BL-60
3. Check horn function.
BL-68
4. Check headlamp function.
BL-68
BL-59
F
WW-39
2. Key switch (insert) check.
5. Replace BCM.
Revision: August 2007
BL-56
BL-65
5. Replace BCM.
Panic alarm (horn and/or headlamp output) does not
activate when panic alarm button is continuously
pressed.
BCS-18
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241).
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
4. Replace BCM.
E
BCS-18
BL-56
1. Check horn reminder mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Horn reminder mode can be changed.
First check the horn reminder mode setting.
C
D
1. Check hazard reminder mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Hazard reminder mode can be changed.
First check the hazard reminder mode setting.
4. Replace BCM.
Interior lamp and puddle lamp (if equipped) operation do not activate properly.
BCS-18
2a. Door switch check (without automatic back door system).
3. IPDM E/R operation check.
Sliding door open/close operation is not carried out
with keyfob operation.
(The automatic sliding door system is normal.)
B
BL-56
3. Replace BCM.
A
BL-65
1. Check hazard and horn reminder mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed.
First check the hazard and horn reminder mode setting.
3. Replace BCM.
Hazard reminder does not activate properly when
pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
(Horn reminder OK)
Reference
page
O
P
BCS-18
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Reference
page
Diagnoses/service procedure
Auto door lock operation does not activate properly.
(All other remote keyless entry functions OK.)
1. Check auto door lock operation mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Auto door lock operation mode can be changed.
First check the auto door lock operation mode setting.
BL-56
2. Replace BCM.
Keyless power window down (open) operation does
not activate properly.
(All other remote keyless entry functions OK.)
BCS-18
1. Check power window down operation mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Power window down operation mode can be changed.
First check the power window down operation mode setting.
BL-56
2. Check power window function with switch.
GW-17
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-18
Key Switch (insert) Check
INFOID:0000000001718490
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III
Function (BCM)".
• When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
: ON
• When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
: OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground.
Terminal
Connector
(+)
(–)
M18
37
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Key switch (insert) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0567E
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch.
Check continuity between key switch terminals 1, 2.
Terminals
1–2
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace key switch.
LIIA1906E
Revision: August 2007
BL-60
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System)
INFOID:0000000001718491
A
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR
SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
B
C
D
E
• When doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
F
G
H
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground.
BL
Connector
M19
M18
Item
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
J
Back door
switch
43
Front door
switch LH
47
Sliding door
switch LH
48
Front door
switch RH
12
Sliding door
switch RH
13
K
Ground
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
LIIA1041E
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
N
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH),
B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47
and 48.
Revision: August 2007
BL-61
2008 Quest
O
P
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1 - 12
1 - 13
1 - 43
1 - 47
1 - 48
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front
LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or
D512 (Back) terminal 1 and ground.
WIIA1143E
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
FRONT AND REAR DOORS
Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0782E
BACK DOOR
Check continuity between back door switch terminals 1 and 3 while
pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK.
OK
>> (Back door) GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0783E
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between back door switch connector D512 terminal
3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0791E
Revision: August 2007
BL-62
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System)
INFOID:0000000001718492
A
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR
SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
B
C
D
E
• When doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
F
G
H
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground.
BL
Connector
M20
M18
Item
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
J
Back door
latch (door
ajar switch)
43
Front door
switch LH
47
Sliding door
switch LH
48
Front door
switch RH
12
Sliding door
switch RH
13
K
Ground
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
LIIA1041E
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
N
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH),
B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and BCM
connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48.
Revision: August 2007
L
BL-63
2008 Quest
O
P
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1 - 47
1 - 12
1 - 48
1 - 13
7 - 43
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front
LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511
terminal 7 and ground.
1 - Ground
7 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA1144E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
FRONT AND REAR DOORS
Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0782E
BACK DOOR
Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) terminals 7 and 8 while pressing (closing back door) and releasing (opening back door) switch.
When back door is open
: Continuity should exist.
When back door is closed : Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK.
OK
>> (Back door) GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0811E
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND
Revision: August 2007
BL-64
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground.
8 - Ground
A
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
LIIA0828E
D
Keyfob Battery and Function Check
INFOID:0000000001718493
1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY
E
Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage
: 2.5V - 3.0V
F
NOTE:
Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to BL-71, "Keyfob Battery
Replacement".
G
H
SEL237W
2.CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION
BL
With CONSULT-III
Check keyfob function in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
J
When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should be turned as follows.
Condition
Monitor item
Pushing LOCK
KEYLESS LOCK
: ON
Pushing UNLOCK
KEYLESS UNLOCK
: ON
Keep pushing UNLOCK
RKE KEEP UNLK turns
to ON 3 seconds after
UNLOCK button is
pushed.
L
M
Pushing PANIC
KEYLESS PANIC
: ON
Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK
at the same time
RKE LCK-UNLCK
: ON
KEYLESS PSD *1
: ON
KEYLESS PSD R *2
: ON
Pushing SLID DOOR LH OPEN KEYLESS PSD L *2
: ON
Pushing SLID DOOR RH
OPEN
K
N
O
P
*1: With auto sliding door RH
*2: With auto sliding door RH and LH
Without CONSULT-III
Check keyfob function using Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
BL-65
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> WITH CONSULT-III: Keyfob, remote keyless entry receiver and wiring harness between BCM and
remote keyless entry receiver are OK. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation
of BCM".
OK
>> WITHOUT CONSULT-III: Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble
Diagnosis".
NG
>> WITH CONSULT-III: Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis".
NG
>> WITHOUT CONSULT-III: Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-69, "ID Code Entry Procedure".
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718494
1.REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL
Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 20 and ground using an oscilloscope.
Condition:
Keyfob buttons released
Keyfob buttons pressed
: Refer to BL-55, "Terminal
and Reference Value for
BCM".
: Refer to BL-55, "Terminal
and Reference Value for
BCM".
LIIA1275E
OK or NG
OK
>> Remote keyless entry receiver signal power supply, ground and signal circuits are OK. Replace
BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY INSPECTION
Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 19 and ground using an oscilloscope.
19 - Ground
: Refer to BL-55, "Terminal
and Reference Value for
BCM".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
WIIA0433E
3.REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM)
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 18 and
ground.
18 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
WIIA0434E
4.HARNESS INSPECTION BETWEEN BCM AND REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
1.
Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver and BCM connectors.
Revision: August 2007
BL-66
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver connector M120 terminals 1, 2, 4 and BCM connector M18 terminals 18, 19, 20.
1 - 18
2 - 20
4 - 19
3.
A
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
B
C
Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver terminals 1, 2 and 4 and ground.
WIIA0308E
1 - Ground
2 - Ground
4 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
D
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace remote keyless entry receiver.
NG
>> Repair or replace the harness between the remote keyless entry receiver and BCM.
ACC Power Check
F
INFOID:0000000001718495
1.CHECK ACC POWER
G
With CONSULT-III
Check "ACC ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function
(BCM)".
Monitor Item
Condition
ACC ON SW
H
BL
Ignition switch position is ACC
: ON
Ignition switch position is OFF
: OFF
J
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 11 and ground.
K
Terminal
Connector
(+)
(–)
M18
11
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ACC or ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
OK or NG
OK
>> ACC power circuit is OK.
NG
>> Check the following:
• 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• Harness for open or short.
IPDM E/R Operation Check
L
M
PIIA7002E
INFOID:0000000001718496
O
1.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE
P
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 51 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
N
BL-67
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
E121
Terminal
(+)
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
51
Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA6403E
2.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and horn relay.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 51 and horn relay connector H-1 terminal 1.
51 - 1
4.
:Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 51 and ground.
51 - Ground
:Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2171E
Check Hazard Function
INFOID:0000000001718497
1.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
Does hazard indicator flash with hazard switch?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
No
>> Check hazard indicator. Refer toLT-55.
Check Horn Function
INFOID:0000000001718498
First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-III, then perform the trouble diagnosis of
malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM".
1.CHECK HORN FUNCTION
Does horn sound with horn switch?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Horn circuit is OK.
No
>> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-39.
Check Headlamp Function
INFOID:0000000001718499
First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-III, then perform the trouble diagnosis of
malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM".
1.CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch ON?
Yes or No
Revision: August 2007
BL-68
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Yes
>> Headlamp operation circuit is OK.
No
>> Check headlamp circuit. Refer to LT-5.
Check Interior Lamp Illumination Function
A
INFOID:0000000001718500
1.CHECK LAMP FUNCTION
B
When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, open the front door LH or RH.
C
Interior lamp should illuminate.
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> Check interior lamp circuit. Refer to LT-106.
ID Code Entry Procedure
D
INFOID:0000000001718501
E
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A spe- F
cific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-III. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not
known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
G
• When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If
five ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is
erased. If less than five codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, the new
H
ID code is added and no ID codes are erased.
• Entry of a maximum of five ID codes is allowed. When more than five codes are entered, the oldest ID
code will be erased.
• Even if the same ID code that is already in memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The BL
code is counted as an additional code.
1. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
2. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
J
3. The items below can be set up.
• “REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or not.
K
• “REMO CONT ID REGIST”
Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code.
NOTE:
L
Register the ID code when keyfob or BCM is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required.
• “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-69
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-III
LIIA1670E
NOTE:
• If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID
code can be erased with CONSULT-III. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) five times. After all ID codes are erased, the
ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
Revision: August 2007
BL-70
2008 Quest
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID
codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less
than five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is added
and no ID codes are erased.
• If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code
entry” for each new keyfob.
• Entry of maximum five ID codes is allowed. When more than five ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code
will be erased.
• Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is
counted as an additional code.
Keyfob Battery Replacement
A
B
C
INFOID:0000000001718502
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
LIIA1514E
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-71
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718503
LIIA2464E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20
2.
(view with instrument panel removed)
Front pillar LH
3.
Front door lock assembly LH D14
(key cylinder switch)
4.
Main power window and door lock/un- 5.
lock switch LH D7, D8
Power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH D105
Front door switch
LH B8
RH B108
6.
Back door latch (door ajar switch) D511
(with power back door)
Back door switch D512
(without power back door)
7.
Sliding door switch
LH B46
RH B135
Horn (low) E3
(below front combination lamp LH)
9.
Horn (high) E108
(below front combination lamp RH)
8.
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718504
DESCRIPTION
Operation Flow
Revision: August 2007
BL-72
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
PIIA1367E
F
Setting the vehicle security system
Initial condition
G
• Ignition switch is OFF.
Disarmed phase
• When the vehicle is being driven or when doors are open, the vehicle security system is set in the disarmed
phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle.
H
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
• There are three conditions to enable the vehicle security system to turn into the "pre-armed" phase and tran- BL
sition into armed phase. The initial requirements are that hood, glass hatch and all doors must be closed
(ignition key removed) for the transition to take place. Those three conditions are:
1. Locking vehicle with either front power door lock switch before exiting vehicle and closing all doors.
J
2. Using keyfob to lock already closed doors after leaving the vehicle.
3. Using driver key cylinder switch to lock already closed doors after leaving the vehicle.
• Upon any of the above three steps taking place, the security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds, then
K
the system automatically shifts into the "armed" phase.
Canceling the set vehicle security system
When one of the following operations is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
1. Unlock the front doors with the key or the keyfob.
2. If equipped, open the back door with the keyfob. When the back door is closed after opening the back
door with the keyfob, the system returns to the armed phase.
3. If equipped, open the sliding door(s) with the keyfob. With the sliding door(s) closed after opening the sliding door(s) with the keyfob, the system returns to the armed phase.
Activating the alarm operation of the vehicle security system
Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
When one of the following operations is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps
for about 50 seconds.
1. Any door is opened before unlocking door with key or keyfob.
2. Door is opened without using key or keyfob.
3. Back door is opened without using keyfob (with automatic back door system).
4. Sliding door(s) opened without using keyfob (with automatic sliding door system).
Power is supplied at all times
through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
to combination meter (security indicator lamp) terminal 40
through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
to BCM terminal 70
through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Revision: August 2007
M
N
O
P
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
•
•
•
•
•
L
BL-73
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to BCM terminal 57
• through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to horn relay terminal 2 and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to IPDM E/R internal CPU.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through body ground E9, E15 and E24.
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM
The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors.
To activate the vehicle security system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors are closed and locked.
When a door is open, BCM terminal 12, 13, 43, 47 or 48 receives a ground signal from each door switch.
When front door LH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 12 (without power back
door) or terminal 14 (with power back door) of main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
When front door RH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 16 of power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH.
When the back door is open, BCM terminal 43 receives a ground signal
• from terminal 1 (without power back door) of the back door switch or terminal 7 (with power back door) of the
back door latch (door ajar switch)
• through body grounds D403 and D404.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
• from IPDM E/R CPU
• to headlamp high relay and
• from IPDM E/R terminal 51
• to horn relay terminal 1.
The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds, but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door must be unlocked with the key or keyfob.
When the key is used to unlock a door, BCM terminal 22 receives signal
• from terminal 12 (without power back door) or terminal 14 (with power back door) of the main power window
and door lock/unlock switch.
When the BCM receives unlock signal from keyfob or key cylinder switch, the vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
PANIC ALARM OPERATION
Remote keyless entry system can operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as required.
When the panic alarm is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
• from IPDM E/R CPU
• to headlamp high relay and
• to horn relay terminal 1.
The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001718505
Refer to LAN-3.
Revision: August 2007
BL-74
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718506
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1827E
Revision: August 2007
BL-75
2008 Quest
P
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC -
INFOID:0000000001718507
WIWA1828E
Revision: August 2007
BL-76
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1829E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-77
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1830E
Revision: August 2007
BL-78
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1831E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-79
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1832E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718508
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001718509
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
BL-80
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718510
A
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM
diagnostic test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
B
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the
BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received date is displayed.
C
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to
them.
D
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be
read.
E
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
F
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEM
Data Monitor
G
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
KEYLESS LOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS UNLOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS TRUNK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door open signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS PSD R
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power sliding door LH signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS PSD L
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power sliding door RH signal from keyfob.
KEYLESS PBD
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door close signal from keyfob.
TRNK OPNR SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door switch.
TRNK CYL SW
OFF (not equipped)
TRNK OPN MNTR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door position.
HOOD SW
OFF (not equipped)
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
BACK DOOR SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.
CDL LOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Active Test
Test Item
THEFT IND
Revision: August 2007
Description
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON”
on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
BL-81
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Test Item
Description
HEADLAMP (HI)
This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The high beam headlamps will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched.
Work Support
Test Item
Description
SECURITY ALARM SET
This mode can confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting.
THEFT ALM TRG
The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and
erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on
CONSULT-III screen.
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718511
WORK FLOW
WIIA0599E
• For “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” diagnosis, refer to BL-16.
• For “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM” diagnosis, refer to BL-48.
Revision: August 2007
BL-82
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001718512
A
The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED
in the following flow chart.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA1152E
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-83
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001718513
SYMPTOM
Diagnostic procedure
PROCEDURE
Diagnostic Procedure 1
Refer to BL-84, "Diagnosis Procedure 1".
AII items
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Lock/unlock switch
1
Vehicle security
system cannot be
set by ····
Door outside key (driver)
2
3
*1 Vehicle security
system does not
alarm when ····
Diagnostic Procedure 3
Refer to BL-89, "Diagnosis Procedure 3".
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Combination meter
Diagnostic Procedure 2
Refer to BL-88, "Diagnosis Procedure 2".
BCM
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Any door is opened.
Diagnostic Procedure 1
Refer to BL-84, "Diagnosis Procedure 1".
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Diagnostic Procedure 4
Refer to BL-91, "Diagnosis Procedure 4".
Horn alarm
4
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
Check remote keyless entry function.
Keyfob
Security indicator
does not turn
“ON”.
Diagnostic Procedure 6
Refer to BL-91, "Diagnosis Procedure 6".
If the above systems are “OK”, check horn system.
Refer to WW-39.
Vehicle security
alarm does not activate.
Headlamp alarm
Diagnostic Procedure 5
Refer to BL-91, "Diagnosis Procedure 5".
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
5
Vehicle security
system cannot be
canceled by ····
Door outside key (driver)
Diagnostic Procedure 3
Refer to BL-89, "Diagnosis Procedure 3".
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
Check remote keyless entry function.
Keyfob
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
Diagnosis Procedure 1
INFOID:0000000001718514
Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System)
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR
SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
Revision: August 2007
: ON
: ON
: ON
BL-84
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: ON
: ON
A
• When doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
B
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
C
D
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
M19
M18
Item
Terminals
(+)
Back door
switch
43
Front door
switch LH
47
Sliding door
switch LH
48
(–)
Condition
E
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
F
G
Ground
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
H
LIIA1041E
Front door
switch RH
12
Sliding door
switch RH
13
BL
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH),
B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47
and 48.
1 - 12
1 - 13
1 - 43
1 - 47
1 - 48
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
K
L
M
N
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front
LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or
D512 (Back) terminal 1 and ground.
O
WIIA1143E
1 - Ground
P
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
FRONT AND REAR DOORS
Revision: August 2007
BL-85
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0782E
BACK DOOR
Check continuity between back door switch terminals 1 and 3 while
pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK.
OK
>> (Back door) GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0783E
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between back door switch connector D512 terminal
3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0791E
Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System)
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR
SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
• When doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
Revision: August 2007
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
BL-86
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
: OFF
: OFF
A
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
M19
M18
Item
Terminals
(+)
Back door
latch
43
Front door
switch LH
47
Sliding door
switch LH
48
Front door
switch RH
12
Sliding door
switch RH
13
(–)
Condition
B
C
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
D
Ground
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
E
LIIA1041E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
G
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
H
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), BL
B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and BCM
connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48.
J
1 - 47
: Continuity should exist.
1 - 12
: Continuity should exist.
K
1 - 48
: Continuity should exist.
1 - 13
: Continuity should exist.
7 - 43
: Continuity should exist.
L
4.
Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front
LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511
terminal 7 and ground.
1 - Ground
7 - Ground
M
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
P
WIIA1144E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
FRONT AND REAR DOORS
Revision: August 2007
BL-87
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch.
Door switch is released
Door switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
WIIA0782E
BACK DOOR
Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) terminals 7 and 8 while pressing (closing back door) and releasing (opening back door) switch.
When back door is open
: Continuity should exist.
When back door is closed : Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK.
OK
>> (Back door) GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
WIIA0811E
4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between back door latch connector D511 terminal 8
and ground.
8 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0828E
Diagnosis Procedure 2
INFOID:0000000001718515
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
1.SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-III
Check "THEFT IND” in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect BCM.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
23 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(+)
(-)
23
Ground
M18
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Security indicator lamp is OK.
Revision: August 2007
LIIA0523E
BL-88
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
A
Check indicator lamp condition.
Refer to DI-23.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace combination meter (security indicator lamp). Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
B
C
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination meter connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M18 terminal 23
and combination meter connector (B) M24 terminal 35.
23 - 35
4.
D
E
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M18 terminal 23
and ground.
23 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>>
NG
F
G
Check the following:
• 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness.
Diagnosis Procedure 3
WIIA1147E
H
INFOID:0000000001718516
BL
1.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
With CONSULT-III
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in
DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• When key inserted in left front door key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
J
K
KEY CYL LK-SW
: ON
• When key inserted in left front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
KEY CYL UN-SW
L
: ON
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 (without
automatic sliding door system or automatic back door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door
system or automatic back door system) and ground.
M
N
Without Automatic Sliding Door System or Automatic Back Door System
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(–)
6
D7
Ground
7
Condition of left front key
cylinder
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
O
P
LIIA0867E
Revision: August 2007
BL-89
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
With Automatic Sliding Door System or Automatic Back Door System
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(–)
4
D7
Ground
6
Condition of left front key
cylinder
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Unlock
0
LIIA0566E
OK or NG
OK
>> Key cylinder switch signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH GROUND HARNESS
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and body ground.
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D14
5 – Ground
Yes
WIIA0813E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) terminals.
Terminals
1–5
Condition
Continuity
Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
Key is turned to LOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
5–6
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168.
LIIA1573E
4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER HARNESS
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 6, 7
(without automatic sliding door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system) and front door
lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector (B) D14 terminals 1, 6 and body ground.
Revision: August 2007
BL-90
2008 Quest
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Without Automatic Sliding Door System
Connector
A: Main
power window and
door lock/
unlock
switch
Terminals
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
6
B: Front
door lock
assembly
LH (key
cylinder
switch)
1
Yes
6
Yes
7
A
B
6
Ground
No
7
Ground
No
C
WIIA1159E
D
With Automatic Sliding Door System
Connector
A: Main
power window and
door lock/
unlock
switch
Terminals
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
4
B: Front
door lock
assembly
LH (key
cylinder
switch)
1
Yes
6
Yes
6
E
F
4
Ground
No
6
Ground
No
G
WIIA0814E
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Diagnosis Procedure 4
BL
INFOID:0000000001718517
J
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK
1.CHECK HORN OPERATION
Check if horn sounds with horn switch.
Does horn operate?
Yes
>> Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and horn relay.
No
>> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-39.
Diagnosis Procedure 5
K
L
INFOID:0000000001718518
M
VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK
1.CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION
N
Check if headlamps operate with lighting switch.
Do headlamps come on when turning switch ON?
Yes
>> Headlamp alarm is OK.
No
>> Check headlamp system. Refer to LT-5 or LT-25.
Diagnosis Procedure 6
O
INFOID:0000000001718519
P
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check if power door lock operates with door lock/unlock switch.
Do doors lock/unlock when using each door lock/unlock switch?
Yes
>> Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
No
>> Refer to BL-16.
Revision: August 2007
BL-91
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718520
LIIA2465E
1.
Sliding door switch
LH B46
RH B135
2.
BCM M18, M19, M20
(view with instrument panel removed)
3.
Front pillar LH
4.
Sliding door open/close switch LH
5.
Automatic door main switch R10
6.
Sliding door open/close switch RH
7.
Sliding door open/close switch
LH B58
RH B140
8.
Sliding door control unit
LH B60, B61, B501 (left rear body)
RH B143, B144, B401 (right rear body)
9.
Sliding door motor assembly
LH B59 (left rear body)
RH B145 (right rear body)
10. Remote keyless entry receiver M120 11. Front pillar RH
(view with instrument panel removed)
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718521
• It is possible to automatically open/close the sliding doors with automatic main door switch, keyfob, or sliding
door open/close switch.
• It is possible to switch the sliding doors between auto and manual operation by switching the automatic main
door switch ON/OFF.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• When the automatic door main switch is pressed, sliding door control unit terminal 15 receives the signal.
• The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage.
• For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13.
• Door lock status is checked through terminal 3. If the door is locked, the sliding door control unit will unlock
the door through terminal 30.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends the unlock signal to the sliding door latch control unit.
• When the sliding door latch control unit receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 10 to operate
the release actuator and unlatches the door lock.
Revision: August 2007
BL-92
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder
(built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor
OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF.
• The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker.
Remote Keyless Entry Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, sliding door control unit terminal 7 receives the
signal.
• The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage.
• For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13.
• Door lock status is checked through terminal 3, if the door is locked, the sliding door control unit will unlock
the door through terminal 30.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends the unlock signal to the sliding door latch control unit.
• When the sliding door latch control unit receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 10 to operate
the release actuator and unlatches the door lock.
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder
(built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor
OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF.
• The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Sliding Door Open/Close Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• When the sliding door open/close switch is pressed, sliding door control unit terminal 2 receives the signal.
• The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through ter- BL
minal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage.
• For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are J
met, including automatic door main switch in the ON position, doors in the unlock position and the child lock
switch in the OFF position, it sends the unlock signal to the sliding door latch control unit.
• When the sliding door latch control unit receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 10 to operate
K
the release actuator and unlatches the door lock.
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this
L
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder
(built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor
OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF.
M
• The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker.
Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
• When the automatic door main switch is pressed, the sliding door control unit terminal 15 receives the signal.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are
met, it operates the sliding door motor.
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 36 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the close direction. (At this
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch closes and the sliding door control
unit detects the signal through terminal 5.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the sliding door motor and sends the
latch command through terminal 26 to the sliding door latch control unit terminal 6.
• When the sliding door auto closure operates the cinch latch motor and the full-latch switch detects this, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal and reverses the latch motor to the neutral position.
• The siding door auto closure operation ends when the door is fully closed. The sliding door remains
unlocked.
Revision: August 2007
BL-93
2008 Quest
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
• When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, the sliding door control unit terminal 7 receives
the signal.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are
met, it operates the sliding door motor.
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 36 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the close direction. (At this
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch closes and the sliding door control
unit detects the signal through terminal 5.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the sliding door motor and sends the
latch command through terminal 26 to the sliding door latch control unit terminal 6.
• When the sliding door auto closure operates the cinch latch motor and the full-latch switch detects this, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal and reverses the latch motor to the neutral position.
• The sliding door auto closure operation ends when the door is fully closed. The sliding door remains
unlocked.
Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
Power Assist Function
• When the sliding door is pushed or pulled from any position, operations switch to the auto open/close function.
• The automatic door main switch must be in the ON position.
Sliding Door Power Assist Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13.
• The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage.
• When the sliding door control unit detects motion through terminals 4 and 17, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are met, it applies power to terminals 33 and 34 to operate the door in the open direction.
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder
(built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor
OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF.
• The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker.
Sliding Door Power Assist Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
• When the handle is pulled or the door is moved in the closed direction, sliding door control unit initiates the
power assist close operation.
• The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 36 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the
magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the close direction. (At this
time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.)
• When the sliding door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch closes and the sliding door control
unit detects the signal through terminal 5.
• When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the sliding door motor and sends the
latch command through terminal 26 to the sliding door latch control unit terminal 6.
• When the sliding door auto closure operates the cinch latch motor and the full-latch switch detects this, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal and reverses the latch motor to the neutral position.
• The siding door auto closure operation ends when the door is fully closed. The sliding door remains
unlocked.
Reverse Function
• During auto open/close operation, if automatic door main switch, keyfob button or sliding door open/close
switch is pressed, the sliding door reverses direction. A chime will sound to announce the reversal.
Anti-Pinch Function
• During auto open/close operation, if pinching of an object is detected, the sliding door reverses direction to
prevent pinching by moving to the full open or close position.
Intermittent Clutch Control Function
• During automatic operation, if the door is stopped midway, for example due to the automatic door main
switch being switched to OFF or a system error, the clutch is intermittently turned ON → OFF to prevent sudRevision: August 2007
BL-94
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
den opening or closing. Intermittent clutch control ends after 6 seconds or when no door motion is detected.
If the vehicle is on level ground, intermittent clutch control is executed for 1/2 second.
A
Precautions
• Check and inspect operation of the remote control auto sliding door system on level ground.
B
Auto Sliding Door Operation Enable Conditions
Automatic door main switch or remote keyless entry
Operation
Fully closed →
open
Operating direction
Main switch
Sliding door open/close switch
Fully open →
closed
Fully closed →
open
Fully open →
closed
—
Fully closed →
open
C
Fully open →
closed
D
ON
Automatic transmission selector lever in P position
and vehicle speed
signal is less than 2
km/h
Vehicle stop
condition
Power assist
—
Automatic transmission selector lever in P position
and vehicle speed
signal is less than 2
km/h
—
Automatic transmission selector lever in P position
and vehicle speed
signal is less than 2
km/h
E
—
F
Unlock (if door is
fully closed)
Door lock knob
state
—
Battery voltage
Approx. 11V or more
—
About 9V min. (operates with warning
chime for low voltage of 9 - 11V)
Control When Handle Open/Closed When Operating Enable Conditions Not Yet Met
Items
Operation condition
G
H
Not met case
Control
Main switch
ON
OFF
Manual mode (Power operation
is available with automatic door
main switch and remote keyless
entry)
A/T selector lever P position
P position
Other
Power close operation
J
9 - 6V
Stopped while constrained
(clutch is engaged and warning
chime sounds)
K
Voltage drop
9V or more
6 - 0V
Manual mode
Control When Operating Enable Conditions No Longer Met
Description
BL
L
Operation
Condition
Main switch turned OFF during power open
or close
Warning chime active and clutch intermittent mode
→ Shift to manual mode
(Recovery to power mode when main
switch turned ON or door fully closed)
→ Shift to manual mode
A/T selector lever P position
Warning chime active continuously (0.66
second dings) and one-way operation continues if closing
Warning chime active continuously (0.33
second beep followed by 0.33 second
pause) and one-way operation continues if
opening. Warning chime remains on after
completing open function.
Stop continued
Voltage drop 11 - 9V
One-way operation continued (equivalent
to the case of starting voltage ← 11V for
handle operation with warning chime active)
Normal operation
Revision: August 2007
BL-95
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Description
Operation
Condition
Voltage drop 9 - micro reset V
Motor stopped (clutch ON) → stop continued while still constrained → (Switching the
main switch OFF shifts operation to intermittent mode.)
→ Shift to manual mode unless voltages returns to >9 V within 5 seconds
Voltage drop below micro reset V
(Clutch hold not possible voltage)
• Stop continued while still constrained
(Clutch ON circuit) Clutch is released
when micro reset occurs
• The clutch force is weak, so there is slipping on hills, etc.
→ Shift to manual mode
Warning Chime Active Conditions
The warning chime uses two types of audio warnings, a friendly chime and a warning chime. The friendly
chime consists of dings lasting 0.66 seconds each immediately followed by the next ding. The warning chime
consists of beeps lasting 0.33 seconds with a pause of 0.33 seconds between each beep.
Operation status
Operation or conditions
When reverse operation starts
When reverse operation detected
During power close
When vehicle not in P position
During power open or close
Obstacle is detected
During power open
When vehicle not in P position or vehicle is moving at greater than 2 km/h
Warning chime pattern
Friendly chime
1.33 seconds, 2 dings
Friendly chime
Continuous
Warning chime
2 seconds, 3 beeps
Warning chime
Continuous until vehicle is shifted to P position
Reverse Conditions
Type
Control
Automatic door main switch, remote keyless entry or sliding door
open/close switch operation
Both open/close directions
Detection method
Operation speed and motor current change direction
Non-reversed area
• Between full open and approx. 45 mm (near full-open lock)
• Closure operation area
Number of times reverse allowed
A maximum of one obstacle is allowed during an open or close operation. If a second obstacle is detected, the door will enter manual mode.
Operation Chart
Revision: August 2007
BL-96
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Open operation from fully closed
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
LIIA0748E
• Close operation from fully open
J
K
L
M
N
LIIA1628E
Initialization Mode
Initialization mode is used to set the default values of door full open position and normal motor current.
It is necessary to complete initialization and reset the default settings under any of the following circumstances:
• Sliding door control unit is replaced.
• Sliding door motor is replaced.
• Sliding door is adjusted.
• Sliding door panel is replaced or repaired.
• Body panel near sliding door is replaced or repaired.
• Any sliding door roller is replaced or adjusted.
• Any sliding door striker is replaced or adjusted.
Revision: August 2007
BL-97
2008 Quest
O
P
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Any sliding door dovetail is replaced or adjusted.
• Sliding door lock assembly is replaced.
• Rear rail is replaced.
• Sliding door weatherstrip is replaced.
• Sliding door contact switch is replaced or adjusted.
• When the battery is first connected, the sliding door control unit is automatically set to the initialization mode.
The sliding door control unit may be manually set to initialization mode by performing the following procedure:
SLIDING DOOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
While in initialization mode, only the overhead sliding door open/close switches are enabled. Remote keyless
entry, door pillar switch and power assist functions are disabled. Each of the power sliding doors must be initialized individually. The following procedure can be repeated for each power sliding door needing initialization.
1. Open the sliding door being initialized.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn the Automatic Door Main Switch OFF.
LIIA2178E
4.
Within 3 seconds after step 3, press the door pillar Sliding Door
Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized 10 times within
10 seconds.
LIIA2179E
5.
6.
Within 3 seconds after step 4, turn ignition switch OFF then ON.
• You should hear three sliding door warning chimes.
• The three chimes indicate the sliding door control unit has entered initialization mode.
• Normal door functions are disabled during initialization.
Turn the Automatic Door Main Switch ON.
LIIA2178E
Revision: August 2007
BL-98
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Press and HOLD the overhead Sliding Door Open/Close Switch
of the door being initialized until the door completely closes and
stops, then release the switch.
A
B
C
LIIA2178E
D
8.
Press and HOLD the same overhead Sliding Door Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized again
until the door completely opens and stops, then release the switch.
9. Press and HOLD the same overhead Sliding Door Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized again
until the door completely closes and stops, then release the switch.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF.
The power sliding door initialization process is complete. The above procedure may be repeated for the other
power sliding door (if equipped).
E
F
SLIDING DOOR LATCH AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
• If the sliding door is ajar (with lock and striker engaged), the motor automatically retracts the door to fully
close it.
• During auto-close operation, if the exterior/interior handle is operated, the retraction mechanism is mechanically cancelled, and the door can open/close.
G
H
SLIDING DOOR LATCH AUTO CLOSURE OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• If the sliding door is ajar, sliding door latch control unit terminal 8 receives the signal, supplies power from
terminal 3 to cinch latch motor terminals 1, grounds sliding door latch control unit terminal 9 from terminal 2, BL
and rotates the cinch latch motor in the close direction.
• When the motor rotates, the cable is retracted and the close lever rotated.
• Pressed by the rotated close lever, the latch rotates and pulls in the door until it is fully latched.
• When the sliding door is fully latched, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal, supplies J
power from terminal 9 to cinch latch motor terminal 2, grounds sliding door control unit terminals 3 from terminal 1, and rotates the closure motor in the open direction.
• Then, when the neutral switch is pressed and the signal is received by sliding door latch control unit terminal K
1, it stops the cinch latch motor and stops with the door fully closed.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-99
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718522
WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
WIWA1833E
Revision: August 2007
BL-100
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1838E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-101
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1839E
Revision: August 2007
BL-102
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - S/CLOS -
INFOID:0000000001718523
A
WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIWA1834E
Revision: August 2007
BL-103
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1835E
Revision: August 2007
BL-104
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1940E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-105
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1836E
Revision: August 2007
BL-106
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1837E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-107
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
WIWA1840E
Revision: August 2007
BL-108
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1841E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-109
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1842E
Revision: August 2007
BL-110
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1843E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-111
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1844E
Revision: August 2007
BL-112
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1845E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-113
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALKWA0206GB
Revision: August 2007
BL-114
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1847E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-115
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1848E
Revision: August 2007
BL-116
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1849E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-117
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Sliding Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718524
LIIA2445E
Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door Control Unit
Terminal
1
2
3
4
Wire Color
L/Y*1
*2
BR/W
R/G
Sliding door open/close switch
Y/R*1
Sliding door lock/unlock actuator unlock output signal
P/G
*2
L*1
W/B*2
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Automatic door main switch ON
0
Automatic door main switch OFF
5
Sliding door open/close switch ON
0
Sliding door open/close switch OFF
5
Power door lock switch
door unlock operation
0 → Battery voltage → 0
Other than above
0
Item
Automatic door main switch
ON/OFF switch
Encoder pulse signal A
INFOID:0000000001718525
Sliding door (motor active)
PIIA1060E
5
O/B
Half-latch switch
Sliding door
Fully open → half → fully closed
PIIA2169E
6
7
G
Ignition switch
Y*1
Y/B*2
Power window serial link
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF
0
When ignition switch is ON or power
window timer operates
PIIA2344E
8
11
12
LG/B*1
Y/G
*2
R*1
G*2
Y/R
Revision: August 2007
Warning chime ON
0
Warning chime OFF
5
Encoder power supply
—
9
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Warning chime output signal
BL-118
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
13
LG/W*1
14
15
16
W/G*1
R/W*2
L/W*1
GR/W*2
L
Item
Fuel door interlock switch
Condition
A
Fuel door closed
0
Fuel door open
5
OPEN
0
CLOSED
5
ON
0
OFF
5
UNLOCK position
Battery voltage
LOCK position while door is closing
0
Sliding door switch
Automatic door main switch
Child lockout switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
B
C
D
E
17
Y*1
R/B*2
Encoder pulse signal B
Sliding door (motor active)
F
PIIA1060E
18
22
23
G/Y
G*1
B*2
B
P position
0
Other than above
5
Encoder ground
—
—
Ground
—
—
A/T device (park position
switch)
G
H
BL
26
GR/L
Closure motor
CLOSE output signal
Sliding door
Fully open → half → fully closed
J
SIIA1480E
27
W
28
G/Y
30
G/Y*1
BR/R*2
Battery power supply
Door unlock input
Sliding door lock motor unlock
signal
—
Battery voltage
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Unlock)
0 → Battery voltage
Door lock
(Neutral → Unlock)
0 → Battery voltage
K
L
M
31
Y
Closure motor
RETURN output signal
Sliding door
Fully open → half → fully closed
N
SIIA1480E
32
B
Ground
33
R
Sliding door motor
OPEN output signal
Revision: August 2007
—
—
Sliding door auto OPEN operation
(motor active)
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
BL-119
2008 Quest
O
P
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
34
Wire Color
Y
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Auto sliding door
(Motor active)
0
Item
Magnetic clutch power supply
Auto sliding door
(Motor active to stationary)
PIIA1798E
36
37
B
Y
Sliding door motor
CLOSE output signal
Sliding door auto CLOSE operation
(motor active)
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
—
—
Magnetic clutch ground
*1: LH
*2: RH
Sliding Door Latch Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718526
LIIA2446E
Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door Latch Control Unit
Terminal
Wire Color
1
G
Item
Neutral switch signal
Condition
INFOID:0000000001718527
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Sliding door
Fully open→ half → fully closed
PIIA2170E
2
Y
Cinch latch motor RETURN
signal
Sliding door
Fully open→ half → fully closed
SIIA1480E
Revision: August 2007
BL-120
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
A
B
3
G/B
Cinch latch motor CLOSE output
Latch Open (ON) → Closed (OFF)
C
SIIA1480E
5
SB
Handle switch (open) signal
Other than above
0
Handle operation
0
Other than above
5
D
E
6
GR/L
Cinch latch motor CLOSE signal
Sliding door
Fully open→ half → fully closed
F
SIIA1480E
G
H
7
LG
Sliding door
Fully open→ half → fully closed
Full-latch switch signal
BL
PIIA2171E
J
8
O/B
Sliding door
Fully open→ half → fully closed
Half-latch switch signal
K
PIIA2169E
L
9
L/B
M
Latch Close (OFF) → Open (ON)
Cinch latch motor OPEN output
SIIA1480E
10
R/W
Latch release actuator output
Other than above
0
Latch
(Lock → Unlock)
0 → Momentarily above 0
Other than above
0
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718528
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001718529
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-92, "System Description".
Revision: August 2007
BL-121
2008 Quest
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Confirm system operation.
4. Perform self-diagnosis procedures. Refer to BL-122, "Self-Diagnosis Procedure".
5. Refer to diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-123, "Diagnosis Chart".
6. Inspection End.
Self-Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718530
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK MODE
Input signal check mode allows testing of switch input signal to the sliding door control unit.
To activate input signal check mode on the automatic sliding door, perform the following steps:
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled).
3. Place A/T selector lever in P position.
4. Confirm fuel door closed (with LH sliding door).
5. Open sliding door RH or LH manually.
6. Have an assistant press and hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
7. While the assistant continues to hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH, turn ignition switch ON
(DO NOT start engine).
8. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds.
9. Release the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
10. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press and hold the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
11. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second.
12. Release the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
13. The input signal check mode is now initialized.
The input signal check mode can test the following inputs. The back door warning chime will sound for approximately 0.5 seconds each time a switch signal input occurs. Use this test when one of these inputs is not
responding during normal automatic sliding door operation.
Switch signal
Operation
Refer to
Automatic door main switch
OFF → ON
BL-125
Automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH
OFF → ON
BL-125
Sliding door open/close switch RH or LH
OFF → ON
BL-125
Sliding door switch RH or LH
OFF (door closed) → ON (door open)
BL-63
A/T device (park position switch)
P position → other than P position
SE-64
Fuel door interlock switch
OFF (fuel door closed) → ON (fuel door open)
BL-178
Sliding door lock/unlock signal
LOCK → UNLOCK
BL-129
Vehicle speed*
Vehicle speed
BL-48
Remote keyless entry signal
Keyfob switch OFF → ON
BL-66
Door lock/unlock signal
LOCK → UNLOCK
BL-63
*Back door warning chime should sound as soon as vehicle moves.
Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode.
OPERATING CHECK MODE
Operating check mode allows self-diagnosis of the automatic sliding door system.
To activate operating check mode on the automatic sliding door, perform the following steps:
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled).
3. Place A/T selector lever in P position.
4. Open sliding door RH or LH manually.
5. Have an assistant press and hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
Revision: August 2007
BL-122
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. While the assistant continues to hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH, turn ignition switch ON
(DO NOT start engine).
7. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds.
8. Release the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
9. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press the automatic door main sliding door
open/close switch RH or LH 5 times in rapid succession.
10. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second.
11. Release the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH.
12. Immediately close the sliding door RH or LH manually.
13. Turn automatic door main switch ON.
14. Open and close the back door with the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH to
activate operating check mode.
Self-diagnosis results are indicated by the back door warning chime.
Back door warning chime order
A
B
C
D
E
Back door warning chime length
Start self-diagnosis
1.5 seconds
F
OK
NG
1. Operating conditions diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
2. Sliding door encoder diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
3. Sliding door clutch diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
4. Sliding door motor diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
Restart self-diagnosis
G
H
1.5 seconds
BL
Item
NG Result
Refer to
1. Operating conditions diagnosis result
One of the following operating conditions no
longer met: ignition switch ON, automatic door
main switch ON, A/T selector lever in P position
—
2. Sliding door encoder diagnosis result
Sensor diagnosis/short, pulse signal, pulse
signal direction
BL-127
3. Sliding door clutch diagnosis result
Sliding door clutch does not operate
BL-127
4. Sliding door motor diagnosis result
Sliding door motor does not operate (no operating current)
BL-126
5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis result
Cinch latch motor does not operate (no operating current)
BL-135
J
K
L
M
Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode.
Diagnosis Chart
INFOID:0000000001718531
Symptom
Suspect systems
Automatic operations are not executed from the sliding door fully
closed or fully open position.
(Auto open/close operations from a position midway through automatic operation, power assist, and auto closure operate normally.)
Revision: August 2007
Latch release actuator system inspection
BL-123
Refer to
N
O
BL-130
P
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Suspect systems
Refer to
Automatic door main switch system inspection
BL-125
Sliding door open/close switch system inspection
BL-125
Magnetic clutch line check
BL-127
Auto sliding door power supply and ground circuit system inspection.
BL-124
Stops midway through sliding door open/close operations, power
assist does not operate.
Encoder system inspection
BL-127
Warning chime does not sound.
Warning chime system inspection
BL-131
During auto closing operations, if obstruction is detected, the door
does not operate in reverse.
Encoder system inspection
BL-127
During cinching operations, the door does not operate in reverse
if the sliding door handle is operated.
Handle switch system
BL-129
Child lockout system does not operate.
Child lockout switch system inspection
BL-130
When the keyfob is operated, the sliding door does not operate
automatically.
Remote keyless entry system inspection
BL-48
Half-latch switch system
BL-132
Cinch latch motor system
BL-135
Handle switch system
BL-129
Automatic operations are not carried out together with open/close
operations.
(Manual operations are normal.)
Auto closure does not operate.
Contact switch
The sliding door does not open.
(Closure motor rotation is not reversed.)
Auto closure operation works, but the sliding door is not fully
closed.
—
Neutral switch system
BL-134
Full-latch switch
BL-133
Handle switch system
BL-129
Door switch
BL-37
Full-latch switch system
BL-133
Handle switch system
BL-129
Cinch latch motor system
BL-135
Sliding door latch assembly mechanism damaged or worn.
BL-130
Auto Sliding Door Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718532
1.AUTO SLIDING DOOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door control unit.
Check voltage between sliding door control unit connectors B60,
B61 (LH) or B143, B144 (RH) terminals 12, 27 and ground.
12 - Ground
27 - Ground
: Approx. battery voltage
: Approx. battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the sliding door control unit power supply circuit.
LIIA0751E
2.AUTO SLIDING DOOR GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Revision: August 2007
BL-124
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between sliding door control unit connectors B60,
B61 (LH) or B143, B144 (RH) terminals 23, 32 and ground.
23 - Ground
32 - Ground
A
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
WIIA0816E
D
Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718533
1.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION
E
Check automatic door main switch using switch operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Automatic door main switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
2.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While operating the automatic door main switch, check voltage
between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143
(RH) terminal 1 and ground.
Terminal
(+)
(-)
1
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Measuring condition
Automatic
door main
switch
H
ON
0
OFF
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Automatic door main switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
BL
J
LIIA0753E
K
3.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect automatic door main switch and sliding door control unit.
Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector
R10 terminals 3 (LH) or 4 (RH) and sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 15.
3 - 15
4 - 15
L
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace automatic door main switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
LIIA0754E
Sliding Door Open/Close Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718534
P
1.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION
Check sliding door open/close switch using switch operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding door open/close switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
BL-125
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While operating the sliding door open/close switch, check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or
B143 (RH) terminal 2 and ground.
Terminal
(+)
(-)
2
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Measuring condition
Sliding door
open/close
switch
ON
0
OFF
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding door open/close switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LIIA0755E
3.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect sliding door open/close switch and sliding door control unit.
Check continuity between sliding door open/close switch connector B58 (LH) or B140 (RH) terminal 1 and sliding door control
unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 2.
1-2
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1635E
4.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between sliding door open/close switch connector
B58 (LH) or B140 (RH) terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the sliding door open/close switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0758E
Sliding Door Motor System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718535
1.SLIDING DOOR MOTOR SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Operate the sliding door fully open → fully closed and check
voltage between sliding door control unit connector B69 (LH) or
B141 (RH) terminals 33, 36 and ground.
Terminal
(+)
33
36
(-)
Ground
Measuring condition
Fully open → half →
fully closed
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
0
0 → Battery voltage → 0
OK or NG
LIIA0761E
Revision: August 2007
BL-126
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace sliding door control unit.
A
2.SLIDING DOOR MOTOR OPERATION INSPECTION
Connect battery power to terminals 33 and 36 on the sliding door
control unit connector B69 (LH) or B141 (RH) and check motor operation.
33 (+) - 36 (-)
33 (-) - 36 (+)
B
C
: It operates.
: It operates. (Reverse rotation)
OK or NG
OK
>> Motor is OK.
NG
>> Replace the sliding door motor. Refer to BL-171.
D
WIIA0379E
Magnetic Clutch Line Check
INFOID:0000000001718536
1.MAGNETIC CLUTCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
E
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Operate the sliding door and check voltage waveform between
sliding door control unit connector B69 (LH) or B141 (RH) terminal 34 and ground using an oscilloscope.
G
H
BL
34 - Ground
LIIA0762E
J
PIIA1798E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace sliding door control unit.
K
2.MAGNETIC CLUTCH GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check continuity between sliding door control unit connector B69
(LH) or B141 (RH) terminal 37 and ground.
37 - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Clutch circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
LIIA0763E
Sliding Door Encoder System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718537
1.SLIDING DOOR ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
P
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
BL-127
O
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60
(LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 11 and ground.
11 - Ground
: Approx. 9V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0764E
2.SLIDING DOOR ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check continuity between sliding door control unit connector B60
(LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 22 and ground.
22 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace sliding door control unit.
LIIA0765E
3.ENCODER (POSITION) SIGNAL INSPECTION
Operate the sliding door and check voltage waveform between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminals 4,
17 and ground using an oscilloscope.
4 - Ground
17 - Ground
LIIA0766E
OCC3383D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace sliding door encoder.
4.SLIDING DOOR ENCODER CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect sliding door control unit and sliding door motor assembly.
Check continuity between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) (A) terminals 4, 11,
17, 22 and sliding door motor assembly connector B59 (LH) or B145 (RH) (B) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4.
Sliding Door RH
4-3
11 - 1
17 - 2
22 - 4
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Sliding Door LH
4-2
11 - 1
17 - 3
22 - 4
Revision: August 2007
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
BL-128
WIIA0817E
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding door encoder circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
A
Sliding Door Remote Control Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718538
B
1.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION
Check sliding door remote control switch operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding door remote control switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
2.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Close the sliding door.
While operating the sliding door remote control switch, check
voltage between sliding door latch control unit connector D204
(LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 5 and ground.
Terminal
(+)
5
(-)
Ground
Measuring condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Sliding door handle open direction operation
0
Other than above
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding door remote control switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
F
G
H
LIIA0769E
BL
3.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
J
Disconnect sliding door remote control switch and sliding door latch control unit.
Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch
connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 1 and sliding door
latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 5.
1-5
K
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
M
LIIA0770E
4.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
1.
2.
N
Close the sliding door.
Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch
connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 3 and ground.
3 - Ground
O
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the sliding door remote control switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
P
LIIA0771E
Revision: August 2007
BL-129
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Child Lockout Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718539
1.CHILD LOCKOUT SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Set child lockout switch in LOCK position and close door.
While operating the sliding door in the open direction, check
voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or
B143 (RH) terminal 16 and ground.
Terminal
(+)
(-)
16
Ground
Measuring condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Sliding door handle in the
open direction
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0773E
2.CHILD LOCKOUT SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect sliding door remote control switch and sliding door control unit.
Close the sliding door.
Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch
connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 2 and sliding door
control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 16.
2 - 16
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0774E
3.CHILD LOCKOUT SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the sliding door remote control switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0771E
Latch Release Actuator System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718540
1.LATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
BL-130
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. While opening the sliding door, check voltage between sliding
door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 10 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
10
Ground
Measuring condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Latch release actuator
operation (opening door)
0 → Momentarily above 0
Other than above
0
A
B
C
LIIA0776E
OK or NG
OK
>> Latch release actuator is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
2.LATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
E
Disconnect latch release actuator and sliding door latch control unit.
Check continuity between latch release actuator connector
D206 (LH) or D306 (RH) terminal 2 and sliding door latch control
unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 10.
2 - 10
F
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
WIIA0380E
3.LATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR GROUND INSPECTION
1.
2.
BL
Close the sliding door.
Check continuity between latch release actuator connector
D206 (LH) or D306 (RH) terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
J
: Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the latch release actuator.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
LIIA1637E
Warning Chime System Inspection
1.WARNING CHIME OUTPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While opening or closing the sliding door, check voltage waveform between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or
B143 (RH) terminal 8 and ground using an oscilloscope as you
press the sliding door open/close switch to reverse door direction.
O
P
LIIA1911E
Revision: August 2007
M
INFOID:0000000001718541
BL-131
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8 - Ground
LIIA2490E
OK or NG
OK
>> Warning chime system is OK.
NG
>> Replace sliding door control unit.
Half-Latch Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718542
1.HALF-LATCH SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage
waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector
D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 8 and ground using an oscilloscope.
8 - Ground
LIIA0781E
PIIA2169E
OK or NG
OK
>> Half-latch switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.HALF-LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit.
Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202
(LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 2 and sliding door latch control unit
connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 8.
2-8
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1638E
3.HALF-LATCH SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
1.
Close the sliding door.
Revision: August 2007
BL-132
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202
(LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
A
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the cinch latch switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
LIIA0783E
D
Full-Latch Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718543
1.FULL-LATCH SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While fully closing and opening the sliding door, check voltage
waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector
D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 7 and ground using an oscilloscope.
F
G
H
7 - Ground
LIIA0785E
BL
PIIA2171E
OK or NG
OK
>> Full-latch switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.FULL-LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
K
Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit.
Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202
(LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 3 and sliding door latch control unit
connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 7.
3-7
L
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
N
LIIA0786E
3.FULL-LATCH SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
1.
O
Close the sliding door.
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-133
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202
(LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the cinch latch switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0783E
Neutral Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718544
1.NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage
waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector
D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 1 and ground using an oscilloscope.
1 - Ground
LIIA1639E
PIIA2170E
OK or NG
OK
>> Neutral switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.NEUTRAL SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit.
Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202
(LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 4 and sliding door latch control unit
connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 1.
4-1
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0789E
3.NEUTRAL SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
1.
Close the sliding door.
Revision: August 2007
BL-134
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202
(LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
A
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the cinch latch switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
LIIA0783E
D
Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718545
1.CINCH LATCH MOTOR SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage
waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector
D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminals 3, 9 and ground using an
oscilloscope.
F
G
H
3 - Ground
9 - Ground
WIIA0818E
BL
SIIA1480E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace the sliding door latch control unit.
J
2.CINCH LATCH MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
K
Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit.
Check continuity between cinch latch motor connector D203
(LH) or D303 (RH) terminals 1, 2 and sliding door latch control
unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminals 3, 9.
1-3
2-9
L
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
LIIA0791E
3.CINCH LATCH MOTOR OPERATION INSPECTION
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-135
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connect battery power to terminals 1 and 2 on the cinch latch motor
and check motor operation.
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (-) - 2 (+)
: It operates.
: It operates. (Reverse rotation)
OK or NG
OK
>> Motor is OK.
NG
>> Replace the cinch latch motor.
LIIA1913E
Revision: August 2007
BL-136
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718546
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA2466E
J
1.
Back door handle switch D510
2.
Back door latch D511
3.
Pinch strip LH D517
4.
Pinch strip RH D505
5.
Backdoor warning chime D514
6.
BCM M18, M19, M20
(view with instrument panel removed)
7.
Front pillar LH
8.
Automatic door main switch R10
9.
Back door switch
10. Back door close switch B63
11. Back door control unit B55
K
12. Remote keyless entry receiver M120
(view with instrument panel removed)
13. Front pillar RH
L
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718547
NOTE:
The automatic back door system must be initialized by fully closing the back door anytime the battery
or the back door control unit has been disconnected.
The automatic back door system consists of a one piece unit that combines the back door control unit along
with the back door motor, back door clutch and the back door encoder. The back door latch contains a lock
function that can control the two functions of automatic back door latch closure and electrical opener with a
single motor when the back door is closed to the halfway state.
• Back door auto closure
When the back door is closed to the half-way state (half-latch) position, the motor drives to rotate the latch
lever and pull it in from half latched to full latched and automatically close the door.
• Power back door
With the back door closed, press the automatic door main switch or press the remote keyless entry button,
or pull the back door handle with the back door unlocked, the back door latch motor drives the open the locking plate and releases the latch. The back door motor then raises the door to the full open position.
With the back door open, press the automatic door main switch, keyfob button or the back door close switch,
the back door motor closes the door to the half-latch state. The back door latch motor then drives the latch to
the full close position.
On an open or close signal, the hazard lamps will flash 3 times and the warning chime will sound 3 dings
lasting a total of 2 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
BL
BL-137
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• When the automatic door main switch is pressed, back door control unit terminal 23 receives the signal.
• The back door control unit checks the automatic transaxle select lever (A/T device) position through terminal
18, vehicle speed through terminal 21 and battery voltage.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime, sends a signal
to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps and sends the unlock signal to the back door latch.
• When the back door latch receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 12 to operate the release
actuator and releases the door lock.
• The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and moves the
back door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload
reverse control.)
• When the back door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder,
and the back door control unit switches the back door motor OFF and the magnetic clutch is pulsed and then
turned OFF.
• The back door is held in the fully open position by the gas stays.
Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, back door control unit terminal 21 receives the
signal.
• The back door control unit checks the automatic transaxle select lever (A/T device) position through terminal
18, vehicle speed through terminal 21 and battery voltage.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime, sends a signal
to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps and sends the unlock signal to the back door latch.
• When the back door latch receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 12 to operate the release
actuator and releases the door lock.
• The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and moves the
back door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload
reverse control.)
• When the back door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder,
and the back door control unit switches the back door motor OFF and the magnetic clutch is pulsed and then
turned OFF.
• The back door is held in the fully open position by the gas stays.
Back Door Handle Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation)
• When the back door is unlocked and the back door handle is pulled, back door control unit terminal 26
receives the signal.
• The back door control unit checks the automatic transaxle select lever (A/T device) position through terminal
18, vehicle speed through terminal 21 and battery voltage and automatic door main switch position through
terminal 13.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime, sends a signal
to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps and sends the unlock signal to the back door latch.
• When the back door latch receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 12 to operate the release
actuator and releases the door lock.
• The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and moves the
back door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload
reverse control.)
• When the back door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder,
and the back door control unit switches the back door motor OFF and the magnetic clutch is pulsed and then
turned OFF.
• The back door is held in the fully open position by the gas stays.
Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
• When the automatic door main switch is pressed, the back door control unit terminal 23 receives the signal.
• The back door control units checks battery voltage.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime and sends a
signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps.
Revision: August 2007
BL-138
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and move the
back door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload
reverse control.)
• When the back door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch detects this and the signal is sent to
the back door control unit terminal 22.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the back door motor and the magnetic
clutch.
• When the cinch latch motor operates and the close switch detects this, the back door control unit terminal 14
receives the signal from back door latch terminal 5.
• When the back door latch operates and full close is detected through terminal 14 of the back door control
unit, the back door auto closure operation ends and the door is fully closed.
A
B
C
D
Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
• When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, the back door control unit terminal 21 receives
the signal.
• The back door control units checks battery voltage.
E
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime and sends a
signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps.
• The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and move the F
back door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload
reverse control.)
• When the back door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch detects this and the signal is sent to G
the back door control unit terminal 22.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the back door motor and the magnetic
clutch.
• When the cinch latch motor operates and the close switch detects this, the back door control unit terminal 14 H
receives the signal from back door latch terminal 5.
• When the back door latch operates and full close is detected through terminal 14 of the back door control
unit, the back door auto closure operation ends and the door is fully closed.
BL
Back Door Close Switch Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation)
• When the back door close switch is pressed with the automatic main door switch ON, the back door control
unit terminal 8 receives the signal.
• The back door control units checks battery voltage.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are
met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime and sends a
signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps.
• The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and move the
back door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload
reverse control.)
• When the back door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch detects this and the signal is sent to
the back door control unit terminal 22.
• When the back door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the back door motor and the magnetic
clutch.
• When the cinch latch motor operates and the close switch detects this, the back door control unit terminal 14
receives the signal from back door latch terminal 5.
• When the back door latch operates and full close is detected through terminal 14 of the back door control
unit, the back door auto closure operation ends and the door is fully closed.
Reverse Function
The door will reverse direction during power open or close operation if the automatic door main switch, keyfob
or back door close switch is operated. A chime will sound to announce the reversal.
Anti-Pinch Function
• During auto operation, if an object is detected in the door's path, a warning chime sounds and the back door
operates in the reverse direction to prevent pinching.
• During auto close operation, if an object is detected by the pinch strips in the door's path, a warning chime
sounds and the back door operates in the open direction until it is fully open.
Gas Stay Check
• During each power open operation, the back door control unit monitors motor current draw to determine if
the gas stays are functioning properly.
Revision: August 2007
BL-139
2008 Quest
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If a malfunction of the gas stays is detected, the back door control unit will close the back door while sounding the warning chime. The back door cannot be opened using the switches until the gas malfunction is
repaired.
Warning Functions
• The hazard warning lamps flash and a warning chime is sounded according to the back door operating state,
operations, and conditions.
Auto Back Door Operation Enable Conditions
Automatic door main
switch
Operation
Operating
direction
Fully closed
→ open
Remote keyless entry
Fully open
→ closed
Fully closed
→ open
Back door handle switch
Fully open
→ closed
Main switch
Fully closed
→ open
Back door close switch
Fully closed →
open
Fully open
→ closed
Fully open
→ closed
ON
A/T selector
lever in P position and vehicle speed
less than 2
km/h
Vehicle stop
condition
A/T selector
lever in P position and vehicle speed
less than 2
km/h
—
Battery voltage
A/T selector
lever in P position and vehicle speed
less than 2
km/h
—
—
—
Approx. 11V (operates with
warning chime for low voltage
of 9 - 11V)
Approx. 11V or more
Control When Handle Pulled When Operating Enable Conditions Not Yet Met
Items
Operation condition
Not met case
Control
Main switch
ON
OFF
Manual mode (after finishing
open/close operation if active)
A/T selector lever P position
P position
Other than P position
Power close operation only
11 > V > 9
Power operation will continue
but will not begin from full close
position
9 > V > reset voltage
Power operation will stop and
warning chime will sound
Reset voltage > V
No power function available
Error
No operation
Voltage drop
11V or more
Handle switch
Normal
Control When Operating Enable Conditions No Longer Met
Description
Operation
Full open stop
Main switch turned OFF
Warning chime active
→ Shift to manual mode after full open or
close operation is complete
(Recovery to power mode when main
switch turned ON or door fully closed)
→ Shift to manual mode
A/T selector lever P position
Warning chime active and one-way operation continuous
(Warning chime inactive and door fully open
or fully closed or operating conditions recovered)
Stop continued
Voltage drop 11 - 9V
One-way operation continued (equivalent
to the case of starting voltage ← 11V for
handle operation with warning chime active)
Not allowed
Voltage drop 6 - 4V
(Microcomputer reset voltage - clutch hold
voltage)
• Motor stopped
• Control not possible because microcomputer being reset
Control not possible because microcomputer being reset
Revision: August 2007
BL-140
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Warning Chime Active Conditions
The warning chime uses two types of audio warnings, a friendly chime and a warning chime. The friendly
chime consists of dings lasting 0.66 seconds each immediately followed by the next ding. The warning chime
consists of beeps lasting 0.33 seconds with a pause of 0.33 seconds between each beep.
Operation status
Operation or conditions
A
B
Warning chime pattern
Automatic door main switch operation
When auto operation starts
Friendly chime
2 seconds, 3 dings
C
When reverse request is detected from
automatic door main switch, remote
keyless entry or back door close switch
Friendly chime
1.3 seconds, 2 dings
D
When obstacle is detected
Warning chime
2 seconds, 3 beeps
When operating with handle
Warning chime
2 seconds, 3 beeps
Back door handle switch operation
Back door close switch operation
When reverse operation starts
Operating at low voltage
Back door close operation
Friendly chime
Continuous dings
Back door open operation
Warning chime
Continuous beeps
A/T selector lever not in P position
E
F
G
Reverse Conditions
Type
Operation covered
Detection method
H
Overload reverse
Both directions
Operation speed and motor current change direction
BL
Pinch strips during back door close operation
Non-reversed area
• For about 0.5 seconds immediately after drive motor operation
starts
• Between full open and approx. 7° from full open
• Closure operation area
Number of times reverse allowed
One reversal is allowed (if a second obstacle is detected during a
power open or close operation, the door reverts to manual mode).
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-141
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718548
WIWA1850E
Revision: August 2007
BL-142
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - B/CLOS -
INFOID:0000000001718549
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1851E
Revision: August 2007
BL-143
2008 Quest
P
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1947E
Revision: August 2007
BL-144
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1852E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-145
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1853E
Revision: August 2007
BL-146
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1854E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-147
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Back Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718550
LIIA2444E
Terminal and Reference Value for Back Door Control Unit
Terminal
Wire Color
1
B
2
B
3
Y/R
INFOID:0000000001718551
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
—
—
Ground
—
—
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Item
Pulse must be >50ms
but less than 250ms
4
GR
Hazard lamp output
Request to flash hazards
PIIA3278E
5
LG/W
Pinch strip ground
6
P/L
7
G
8
GR/B
Back door close switch
9
GR
10
Warning chime output
Ignition switch
—
—
Back door motor active
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF
0
Back door close switch ON
0
Back door close switch OFF
Battery voltage
Warning chime ground
—
—
W
Battery power
—
Battery voltage
11
L/B
Cinch latch motor
CLOSE output
Back door close operation
Battery voltage
12
L/W
Cinch latch motor
RETURN output
Back door open operation
Battery voltage
13
L/Y
Automatic door main switch
ON/OFF switch
Automatic door main switch ON
0
Automatic door main switch OFF
9
14
P
Close switch signal
While fully opening back door
WIIA1047E
Revision: August 2007
BL-148
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
A
B
15
O/B
Open switch signal
While fully closing back door
C
PIIA2171E
A/T device (park position
switch)
18
G/Y
19
BR/W
Pinch strip RH
20
L/Y
Pinch strip LH
P or N position (Ignition is ON)
0
Other than above (Ignition is ON)
9
Detecting obstruction
0
Other than above
4
Detecting obstruction
0
Other than above
4
D
E
F
21
Y
Power window serial link
G
—
H
PIIA2344E
BL
22
BR
Half-latch switch
Back door close operation
J
PIIA2169E
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
Sliding door RH warning chime
request
Sliding door active
0
Other than above
5
Sliding door LH warning chime
request
Sliding door active
0
Other than above
5
Back door handle switch (open)
0
Back door handle switch (at rest)
Battery voltage
23
G/R
Automatic door main switch
24
Y/G
25
LG/B
26
V/W
Back door handle switch signal
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
K
L
M
N
INFOID:0000000001718552
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
O
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000001718553
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-137, "System Description".
Confirm system operation.
Perform self-diagnosis procedures. Refer to BL-150, "Self-Diagnosis Procedure".
Refer to diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-151, "Diagnosis Chart".
Inspection End.
Revision: August 2007
BL-149
2008 Quest
P
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718554
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK MODE
Input signal check mode allows testing of switch input signal to the back door control unit.
To activate input signal check mode on the automatic sliding door, perform the following steps:
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled).
3. Place A/T selector lever in P position.
4. Using the inside emergency release lever, open the back door.
5. Have an assistant press and hold the back door close switch.
6. While the assistant continues to hold the back door close switch, turn ignition switch ON (DO NOT start
engine).
7. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds.
8. Release the back door close switch RH or LH.
9. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press and hold the automatic door main back
door open/close switch.
10. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second.
11. Release the automatic door main back door open/close switch.
12. The input signal check mode is now initialized.
The input signal check mode can test the following inputs. The back door warning chime will sound for approximately 0.5 seconds each time a switch signal input occurs. Use this test when one of these inputs is not
responding during normal automatic sliding door operation.
Switch signal
Operation
Refer to
Automatic door main switch
OFF → ON
BL-152
Automatic door main back door open/close switch
OFF → ON
BL-152
Back door close switch
OFF → ON
BL-154
Back door handle switch
OFF → ON
BL-159
A/T device (park position switch)
P position → other than P position
SE-64
Vehicle speed*
Vehicle speed
Remote keyless entry signal
Keyfob switch OFF → ON
BL-66
Door lock/unlock signal
LOCK → UNLOCK
BL-40
Pinch strip LH signal
OFF → ON
BL-155
Pinch strip RH signal
OFF → ON
BL-155
—
*Back door warning chime should sound as soon as vehicle moves.
Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode.
OPERATING CHECK MODE
Operating check mode allows self-diagnosis of the automatic back door system.
To activate operating check mode on the automatic back door, perform the following steps:
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled).
3. Place A/T selector lever in P position.
4. Using the inside emergency release lever, open the back door.
5. Have an assistant press and hold the back door close switch.
6. While the assistant continues to hold the back door close switch, turn ignition switch ON (DO NOT start
engine).
7. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds.
8. Release the back door close switch.
9. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press the automatic door main back door
open/close switch 5 times in rapid succession.
Revision: August 2007
BL-150
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second.
11. Release the automatic door main back door open/close switch.
12. Immediately close the back door manually.
13. Turn automatic door main switch ON.
14. Open and close the back door with the automatic door main back door open/close switch to activate operating check mode.
Self-diagnosis results are indicated by the back door warning chime.
Back door warning chime order
A
B
C
Back door warning chime length
Start self-diagnosis
1.5 seconds
D
OK
NG
1. Operating conditions diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
2. Back door encoder diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
3. Back door clutch diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
4. Back door motor diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis
0.5 seconds
0.2 seconds
Restart self-diagnosis
E
F
1.5 seconds
G
Item
NG Result
Refer to
1. Operating conditions diagnosis result
One of the following operating conditions no
longer met: ignition switch ON, automatic door
main switch ON, A/T selector lever in P position
—
2. Back door encoder diagnosis result
Sensor diagnosis/short, pulse signal, pulse
signal direction
BL-152
3. Back door clutch diagnosis result
Back door clutch does not operate
BL-156
4. Back door motor diagnosis result
Back door motor does not operate (no operating current)
BL-152
5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis result
Cinch latch motor does not operate (no operating current)
BL-160
H
BL
J
K
Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode.
Diagnosis Chart
INFOID:0000000001718555
Symptom
Automatic operations are not executed from the back door fully
closed or fully open position.
(Auto closure operates normally.)
Suspect systems
Refer to
Automatic door main switch system inspection
BL-152
A/T device (park position switch)
BL-155
Automatic door main switch system inspection
BL-152
Back door close switch system inspection
BL-154
Back door control unit power supply and
ground circuit system inspection.
BL-152
The auto closure function does not operate.
(Stops at the halfway position for auto closing operations.)
Pinch strip system inspection
BL-155
During auto closing operations, if obstruction is detected, the door
does not operate in reverse.
Back door motor assembly
During close or cinch operations, the door does not operate in reverse if the back door handle is operated.
Handle switch system
Revision: August 2007
BL-151
M
—
Pinch strip system inspection
Automatic operations are not carried out together with open/close
operations.
(Manual operations are normal.)
L
N
O
—
BL-159
2008 Quest
P
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Suspect systems
Refer to
Remote keyless entry system inspection
BL-48
Power window serial link
BL-149
Pinch strip system inspection
BL-155
Half-latch switch system
BL-156
Cinch latch motor system
BL-160
Handle switch system
BL-159
The back door does not open.
(Closure motor rotation is not reversed.)
Open switch system
BL-157
Handle switch system
BL-159
Warning chime does not sound.
Back door warning chime system
BL-156
Close switch system
BL-158
Handle switch system
BL-159
Cinch latch motor system
BL-160
When the keyfob is operated, the back door does not operate automatically.
Auto closure does not operate.
Auto closure operation works, but the back door is not fully closed.
Back door latch assembly mechanism damaged or worn.
Back Door Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
—
INFOID:0000000001718556
1.BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect back door control unit.
Check voltage between back door control unit connector B55
terminals 3, 10 and ground.
3 - Ground
10 - Ground
: Approx. battery voltage
: Approx. battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0567E
2.BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check continuity between back door control unit connector B55 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
1 - Ground
2 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0801E
Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718557
1.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION
Check automatic door main switch using switch operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Automatic door main switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
BL-152
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between automatic door main switch connector
R10 terminal 8 and ground.
8 - Ground
B
: Approx. battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
LIIA0857E
3.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
E
While operating the automatic door main switch, check voltage
between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 23 and
ground.
F
Terminals
(+)
(-)
23
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Measuring condition
Automatic
door main
switch
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
LIIA0802E
BL
4.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect automatic door main switch and back door control unit.
Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector
(B) R10 terminal 2 and back door control unit connector (A) B55
terminal 23.
2 - 23
3.
J
K
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector
(B) R10 terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
L
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
WIIA0786E
N
5.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
O
: Continuity should exist.
P
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the automatic door main switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0804E
Revision: August 2007
BL-153
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Back Door Close Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718558
1.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION
Check back door close switch using switch operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door close switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While operating the back door close switch, check voltage
between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 8 and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
8
Ground
Position of back door close
switch
Momentary
close position
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LIIA0805E
3.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect back door close switch and back door control unit.
Check continuity between back door close switch connector (B)
B63 terminal 1 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 8.
1-8
: Continuity should exist.
WIIA0787E
3.
Check continuity between back door close switch connector (B)
B63 terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0787E
4.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Revision: August 2007
BL-154
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between back door close switch connector B63 terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
A
: Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the back door close switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
LIIA0807E
D
Pinch Strip System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718559
1.PINCH STRIP SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While operating the pinch strip, check voltage between back
door control unit connector B55 terminals 19 (RH), 20 (LH) and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
19
20
Ground
Measuring condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Pinch strip operation
0
Other
4
OK or NG
OK
>> Switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
H
LIIA0811E
BL
2.PINCH STRIP CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect pinch strip and back door control unit.
Check continuity between pinch strip connector (B) D505 (RH),
D517 (LH) terminals 1, 2 and back door control unit connector
(A) B55 terminals 5, 19 (RH), 20 (LH).
1 - 19
1 - 20
2-5
3.
J
K
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
L
Check continuity between pinch strip connector (B) D505 (RH),
D517 (LH) terminal 1and ground.
M
LIIA2257E
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
3.PINCH STRIP GROUND INSPECTION
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-155
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between pinch strip connector terminal 2 and
ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the pinch strip.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0817E
Back Door Warning Chime System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718560
1.BACK DOOR WARNING CHIME CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect back door warning chime and back door control unit.
Check continuity between back door warning chime connector
(B) D514 terminal 2 and back door control unit connector (A)
B55 terminal 6.
2-6
4.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between back door warning chime connector
(B) D514 terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA1148E
2.BACK DOOR WARNING CHIME CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
Check continuity between back door warning chime connector
(B) D514 terminal 1 and back door control unit connector (A)
B55 terminal 9.
1-9
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between back door warning chime connector
(B) D514 terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace warning chime.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA1149E
Half-Latch Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718561
1.HALF-LATCH SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
BL-156
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage
waveform between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 22 and ground using an oscilloscope.
A
B
22 - Ground
C
LIIA0826E
D
PIIA2169E
OK or NG
OK
>> Half-latch switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.HALF-LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect back door latch switch and back control unit.
Check continuity between back door latch (half-latch switch)
connector (B) D511 terminal 6 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 22.
6 - 22
3.
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between back door latch (half-latch switch)
connector (B) D511 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
H
: Continuity should not exist.
BL
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2259E
J
3.HALF-LATCH SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between back door latch (half-latch switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground.
8 - Ground
K
: Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the back door latch. Refer to BL-175.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
WIIA1150E
N
Open Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718562
1.OPEN SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-157
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. While fully closing and opening the back door, check voltage
waveform between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 15 and ground using an oscilloscope.
15 - Ground
LIIA0829E
WIIA1047E
OK or NG
OK
>> Open switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.OPEN SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect back door latch and back door control unit.
Check continuity between back door latch (open switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 4 and back door control unit connector (A)
B55 terminal 15.
4 - 15
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between back door latch (open switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 4 and ground.
4 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2260E
3.OPEN SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between back door latch (open switch) connector
D511 terminal 8 and ground.
8 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the back door latch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA1150E
Close Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718563
1.CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
BL-158
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. While fully opening and closing the back door, check voltage
waveform between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 14 and ground using an oscilloscope.
A
B
14 - Ground
C
LIIA0831E
D
WIIA1047E
OK or NG
OK
>> Close switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect back door latch and back door control unit.
Check continuity between back door latch (close switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 5 and back door control unit connector
(A) B55 terminal 14.
5 - 14
3.
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between back door latch (close switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
H
: Continuity should not exist.
BL
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2261E
J
3.CLOSE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between back door latch (close switch) connector
D511 terminal 8 and ground.
8 - Ground
K
: Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the back door latch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
WIIA1150E
Back Door Handle Switch System Inspection
N
INFOID:0000000001718564
1.BACK DOOR HANDLE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-159
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. While operating the back door handle switch, check voltage
between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 26 and
ground.
Terminal
(+)
(-)
26
Ground
Measuring condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Pull the back door handle
switch (ON)
0
Other (OFF)
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Back door handle switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0833E
2.BACK DOOR HANDLE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect back door handle switch and back door control unit.
Check continuity between back door handle switch connector
(B) D510 terminal 1 and back door control unit connector (A)
B55 terminal 26.
1 - 26
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between back door handle switch connector
(B) D510 terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0788E
3.BACK DOOR HANDLE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION
Check continuity between back door handle switch connector D510
terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the back door handle switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0835E
Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718565
1.CINCH LATCH MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect back door latch and back door control unit.
Revision: August 2007
BL-160
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between back door latch (cinch latch motor)
connector (B) D511 terminals 1, 2 and back door control unit
connector (A) B55 terminals 11, 12.
1 - 12
2 - 11
4.
A
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
B
Check continuity between back door latch (cinch latch motor)
connector (B) D511 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
1 - Ground
2 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
C
LIIA2263E
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
2.CINCH LATCH MOTOR OPERATION INSPECTION
Connect battery power to terminals 1 and 2 on the back door latch
connector and check motor operation.
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (-) - 2 (+)
F
: It operates.
: It operates. (Reverse rotation)
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace the back door latch.
H
LIIA0838E
BL
3.CINCH LATCH MOTOR SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Reconnect back door latch and back door control unit.
While fully opening and closing the back door, check voltage
between back door control unit connector B55 terminals 11, 12
and ground.
J
K
Terminals
(+)
11
12
(-)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Measuring condition
L
While closing back door
While opening back door
Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Cinch latch motor circuit is OK.
NG
>> Replace the back door control unit.
LIIA2397E
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-161
2008 Quest
DOOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DOOR
Fitting Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001718566
AWIIA0728ZZ
4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in)
E.
4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in)
F.
4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in)
G.
4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in)
1.
Front door hinge pillar
2.
Lower roller assembly
3.
Waist rail
D.
FRONT DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
Remove the front fender. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation".
Loosen the hinge nuts or bolts and adjust as needed.
Striker Adjustment
1.
Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
LIIA0113E
SLIDE DOOR
Longitudinal clearance, surface height and outboard adjustment at front end
Revision: August 2007
BL-162
2008 Quest
DOOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the sliding door trim panel. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
2. Accessing from inside the vehicle, loosen the nuts. Open the sliding door and adjust as needed.
A
Striker Adjustment
NOTE:
Turn OFF automatic sliding door system, if equipped.
1. Inspect the door latch-to-striker clearance for the front and rear
strikers.
• Slowly open and close the sliding door.
• Confirm the strikers meet the latches correctly.
• Adjust striker height up or down as needed.
2. Slightly loosen the door strikers, upper and lower dovetails, and
contact switch.
NOTE:
Loosened parts should not move on their own.
3. Open and close the door three or four times to allow the strikers
and contact switch to align themselves.
4. Carefully tighten all loosened parts using care not to move the
parts .
5. Open and close door three or four times to confirm smooth
latching.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA1645E
BL
BACK DOOR
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-163
2008 Quest
DOOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AWIIA0729ZZ
1.
Back door
2.
Back door hinge RH & LH
3.
Roof
4.
Body side outer
5.
Back door glass
6.
Rear combination lamp
7.
Rear bumper fascia
8.
17 N·m (1.7 Kg·m, 13 ft-lb)
H.
10.0 mm ( 0.4in)
J.
2.5 mm (0.10 in)
K.
6.8 mm (0.27 in)
M.
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
N.
6.5 mm (0.26 in)
P.
2.8 mm (0.11 in)
Q.
6.7 mm (0.26 in)
R.
1.4 mm (0.06 in)
S.
6.2 mm (0.24 in)
T.
0.4 mm (0.02 in)
U.
6.2 mm (0.24 in)
V.
0.4 mm (0.02 in)
W.
6.1 mm (0.24 in)
Revision: August 2007
BL-164
2008 Quest
DOOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Longitudinal clearance, surface height and outboard adjustment at front end
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Open and support the back door.
Slightly loosen the hinge nuts.
Reposition the door as necessary and tighten the nuts.
Confirm the adjustment. Repeat as necessary to obtain the desired fit.
B
Striker Adjustment
1.
Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
C
D
E
LIIA1733E
Removal and Installation
F
INFOID:0000000001718567
G
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to proH
tect the door and body.
• When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
• Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply "body grease".
BL
1. Remove the door window and module assembly. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the door harness.
3. Remove the check link cover.
J
4. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar.
K
L
LIIA0423E
5.
Remove the door-side hinge nuts and bolts, and remove the
door assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the front door. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment".
M
N
O
P
LIIA0424E
SLIDE DOOR
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to protect the door and body.
Revision: August 2007
BL-165
2008 Quest
DOOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
• Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply "body grease".
1. Remove the upper and lower door finishers. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the door glass. Refer to GW-70.
3. Remove the door lock and handle assemblies. Refer to BL-171.
4. Remove the upper and lower male dovetail assemblies.
5. Remove the door wiring harness.
6. Remove the door.
• Disconnect the rear slide door guide.
• Remove the lower hinge bracket.
• Remove the upper hinge bracket.
WIIA0830E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the front door. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment".
BACK DOOR
WARNING:
Always support back door when removing or replacing back door stays. Power back door opener will
not support back door with back door stays removed.
1. Remove the back door glass. Refer to GW-13.
2. Remove the license lamp finisher. Refer to EI-23.
3. Remove the back door lock assembly. Refer to BL-175.
4. Remove the rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-34, "Rear Wiper Motor".
Revision: August 2007
BL-166
2008 Quest
DOOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Remove the back door wire harness.
6. Remove the rear washer nozzle and hose from the back door. Refer to WW-35, "Rear Washer Nozzle".
CAUTION:
Two technicians should be used to avoid damaging the back door during removal.
7. Support the back door with a suitable tool.
8. Disconnect the power back door lift arm from the door.
9. Remove the back door stays.
10. Remove the door side nuts and the back door assembly.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WIIA1120E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the back door. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment".
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-167
2008 Quest
FRONT DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
INFOID:0000000001718568
WIIA0541E
1.
Front gasket
4.
Rear gasket
5.
Outside handle bracket
6.
Grommet
7.
Key cylinder rod (Driver side only)
8.
Outside handle cable
9.
Door lock assembly
10. Inside handle cable
2.
Outside handle
11. Lock knob cable
Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.
3.
Door key cylinder assembly (Driver
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (Passenger side)
12. Inside handle
INFOID:0000000001718569
Remove the front door window regulator assembly. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the front door window rear glass run.
Remove the grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly
(driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side)
bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole.
PIIA3553E
4.
While pulling the outside handle (1), remove door key cylinder
assembly or escutcheon (2).
PIIA3554E
Revision: August 2007
BL-168
2008 Quest
FRONT DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.
6.
Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped).
While pulling outside handle (2), slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove (1).
A
B
C
D
LIIA0532E
7.
Remove the front and rear gaskets.
E
F
G
PIIA3557E
H
8.
Remove the TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts : 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
BL
J
K
PIIA1090E
9.
Remove the TORX bolt (T30) from the outside handle bracket.
L
M
N
WIIA0542E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-169
2008 Quest
FRONT DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear
of the vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly.
PIIA3558E
11. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
12. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside
handle bracket.
PIIA5059E
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718570
DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
WIIA1057E
1.
Door key cylinder assembly
⇐
Pawl
2.
Key cylinder escutcheon
3.
Door key cylinder
Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder.
Revision: August 2007
BL-170
2008 Quest
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718571
OUTSIDE HANDLE
1.
2.
B
Remove the sliding door finisher. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the grommet, and the outside handle escutcheon bolt
(TORX T30) from grommet hole.
C
D
E
PIIA3553E
F
3.
While pulling the outside handle (1), remove outside handle
escutcheon (2).
G
H
BL
WIIA0851E
4.
While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove (2).
J
K
L
LIIA0532E
5.
M
Remove the front gasket and rear gasket.
N
O
P
PIIA3557E
Revision: August 2007
BL-171
2008 Quest
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
PIIA1090E
7.
Remove the TORX bolt (T30), and remove the outside handle
bracket.
PIIA3556E
8.
While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove outside handle and door lock assembly.
PIIA3558E
9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
10. Separate outside handle cable from the outside handle bracket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PIIA5059E
SLIDING DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
Revision: August 2007
BL-172
2008 Quest
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
WIIA1121E
1.
Sliding door lock assembly
2.
Striker
3.
Sliding door inside handle cable
4.
Sliding door inside handle
5.
Sliding door inside lock
6.
Sliding door inside lock cable
⇐
Front
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
Remove exterior door handle.
Disconnect sliding door lock assembly electrical connectors.
Remove sliding door lock assembly.
• Remove screws from front and rear latches.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
M
SLIDING DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY AND MOTOR
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-173
2008 Quest
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIIA1122E
1.
Rear roller
2.
Sliding door motor
4.
Front roller
⇐
Front
3.
Sliding door cable assembly
1. Remove sliding door rail cover. Refer to EI-27, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect slide door cables.
3. Remove luggage lower trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect sliding door motor electrical connector.
5. Remove sliding door link rollers.
6. Remove sliding door cable and motor assembly.
7. Remove sliding door motor from sliding door cable assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
BL-174
2008 Quest
BACK DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
Component Structure
INFOID:0000000001718572
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA1123E
N
1.
Back door motor assembly
2.
Back door motor assembly bracket
3.
Back door motor gear assembly
4.
Back door closure rod
5.
Pinch strip
6.
Back door latch release cable
7.
Back door handle
8.
Power back door latch assembly
9.
Power back door latch cinch motor
10. Back door striker
11. Dovetail (door side)
13. Back door opener actuator assembly 14. Lower back door lock assembly
O
12. Dovetail (body side)
15. Back door lock bracket
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-175
2008 Quest
BACK DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Back Door Latch
INFOID:0000000001718573
WIIA1124E
1.
Back door assembly
2.
Manual back door latch assembly
4.
Back door striker
⇐
Front
3.
Power back door latch assembly
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation"
Revision: August 2007
BL-176
2008 Quest
BACK DOOR LOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the weather seal.
3. On manual doors, disconnect the back door latch release cable.
4. For power doors, disconnect the cinch motor electrical connector.
5. Remove the back door latch assembly (power door) or the back door lock assembly (manual door).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the back door latch. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment".
Back Door Power Lift Assembly
A
B
C
INFOID:0000000001718574
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA1125E
N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the LH rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the closure rod to door bolt.
Remove the back door motor gear assembly.
Remove the back door motor.
• Disconnect the electrical connector.
O
P
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
BL-177
2008 Quest
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram - F/LID -
INFOID:0000000001718575
WIWA1855E
REMOVAL
Revision: August 2007
BL-178
2008 Quest
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
LIIA2272E
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
Fuel filler lid opening (LH rear fender) 2.
4.
Fuel filler lid opener actuator
Lock ring
3.
F
Electrical connector
G
Remove LH rear lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Open fuel filler lid.
Disconnect fuel filler lid opener actuator electrical connector.
Remove lock ring and fuel filler lid opener actuator.
• Turn lock ring 1/4 turn counter-clockwise to remove.
H
BL
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-179
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718576
LIIA2467E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20
2.
(view with instrument panel removed)
Front pillar LH
4.
NATS antenna amp. M21
ECM E16
5.
System Description
3.
Combination Meter M24
INFOID:0000000001718577
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) has the following immobilizer functions:
• Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose IDs have been registered into the ECM and BCM, allow the
engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS
(NATS).
NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS
(NATS).
• All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS) components.
• The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
• When NVIS (NATS) detects a malfunction, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON
position.
• NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-III hardware and CONSULT-III NVIS (NATS) software.
When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically
NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs
can be carried out.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to
CONSULT-III Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
• When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator
Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID, it may be necessary to re-register original
key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition
INFOID:0000000001718578
The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
• NATS ignition key
• NATS antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder
• Body control module (BCM)
• Engine control module (ECM)
• Security indicator
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
BL-180
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The communication between ECM and BCM uses the CAN communication system.
A
B
C
D
E
PIIA1121E
ECM Re-communicating Function
F
INFOID:0000000001718579
The following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only when the G
ECM has been replaced with a new one which has never been energized on-board.
(In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-III is not necessary).
NOTE:
H
• When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-III
Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
• If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work.
BL
• Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID.
1. Install ECM.
2. Using a registered key (*1), turn ignition switch to ON.
J
*1: To perform this step, use the key that has been used before performing ECM replacement.
3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
K
5. Start engine.
If engine can be started, procedure is completed.
If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual and initialize control unit.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-181
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - NATS -
INFOID:0000000001718580
WIWA1856E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718581
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
CONSULT-III Function
INFOID:0000000003302416
CONSULT-III INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Revision: August 2007
BL-182
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector.
A
B
C
BBIA0336E
D
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START”.
Touch “OTHER”.
Select “NATS V.5.0”.
If “NATS V5.0” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
E
F
CONSULT-III DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION
CONSULT-III DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE
G
Description
C/U INITIALIZATION
When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all
NATS mechanical keys are necessary.
[NATS mechanical key/ BCM/ ECM*]
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart.
Refer to "NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART" .
BL
*: When replace ECM, refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
NOTE:
• When any initialization is performed, all ID previously registered will be erased and all NATS mechanical
keys must be registered again.
• The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF
KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-III screen.
• In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART
Detected items
[NVIS (NATS) program card screen
terms]
P No. Code
(Self-diagnostic
result of “ENGINE”)
Malfunction is detected when.....
Reference
page
J
K
L
M
N
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
[P1612]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1612
Communication impossible between ECM and BCM
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
during key registration procedure, even if the system is not
malfunctioning.
Refer to
BL-187.
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
[P1615]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1615
BCM can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID verification between key ID and BCM is NG.
Refer to
BL-188.
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
[P1614]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1614
BCM cannot receive the key ID signal.
Refer to
BL-190.
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
[P1611]
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1611
The result of ID verification between BCM and ECM is NG.
System initialization is required.
Refer to
BL-188.
Revision: August 2007
H
O
P
BL-183
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Detected items
[NVIS (NATS) program card screen
terms]
LOCK MODE
[P1610]
P No. Code
(Self-diagnostic
result of “ENGINE”)
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610
DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG
—
Reference
page
Malfunction is detected when.....
When the starting operation is carried out five or more
times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS
(NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the engine from being started.
• Unregistered ignition key is used.
• BCM or ECM’s malfunctioning.
Refer to
BL-189.
All engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble code
has been detected in ECM.
Refer to
BL-184.
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000003302417
WORK FLOW
1.STARTING ENGINE
Check if the engine could be started by inserting the key into the ignition key cylinder and operate ignition
switch.
OK
NG
>> System is normal.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS
Perform SELF-DIAGNOSIS “NATS V5.0” using CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
NATS program card is necessary to display the “SELF-DIAGNOSIS”.
No malfunction is detected>>Recheck the starting engine section GO TO 1.
Malfunction related to NATS is detected>>GO TO 3.
Malfunctions related to “DON’T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG” and NATS are detected>>GO
TO 7.
3.IDENTIFYING NATS MALFUNCTION
Self-diagnosis results referring to NATS, but no information about engine self-diagnosis result is displayed on
CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis" .
>> GO TO 4.
4.NATS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Repair NATS (if necessary, perform “C/U INITIALIZATION” with CONSULT-III.)
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Erase the record of “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” by using CONSULT-III.
>> GO TO 6.
6.STARTING ENGINE
Check if the engine could be started by inserting the key into the ignition key cylinder and operate ignition
switch.
NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
>> End of inspection.
7.IDENTIFYING NATS AND ENGINE CONTROL MALFUNCTION
Revision: August 2007
BL-184
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NATS malfunction and “DON’T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG” are displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
NOTE:
This indication means that malfunction have been detected in NATS and engine control system.
A
B
>> GO TO 8.
8.NATS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Repair NATS according to self-diagnosis results refer to NATS (if necessary, perform “C/U INITIALZATIN” with
CONSULT-III.)
NOTE:
Do not erase “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” by using CONSULT-III.
C
D
>> GO TO 9.
E
9.IDENTIFYING ENGINE CONTROL MALFUNCTION
Check engine “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” records with a generalized program card instead of the NATS program
card.
F
>> GO TO 10.
10.ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
G
Repair engine control system if engine related malfunction is detected.
With engine diagnostic codes present, refer to EC-9 .
Without engine diagnostic codes present, refer to EC-78 .
H
NOTE:
If only “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed, erase the self-diagnosis results.
BL
>> GO TO 11.
11.STARTING ENGINE
J
Check if the engine could be started by inserting the key into the ignition key cylinder and operate ignition
switch.
OK
NG
>> GO TO 12.
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
12.ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Erase both NATS and ENGINE "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" records by using CONSULT-III NATS program card and
generalized program card.
M
>> GO TO 13
N
13.COMFIRMATION
Perform running test with CONSULT-III in engine “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” mode.
O
“NO DTC” is displayed>> End of inspection.
Malfunction information is displayed>>GO TO 2.
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718584
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1
Revision: August 2007
BL-185
2008 Quest
P
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-diagnosis related item
Symptom
Displayed “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” on CONSULT-III screen.
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
[P1612]
• Security indicator lighting up*
• Engine cannot be
started
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
[P1615]
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
[P1614]
Security indicator lighting
up*
Diagnostic Procedure
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 1
(BL-187)
PROCEDURE 2
(BL-188)
PROCEDURE 5
(BL-190)
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
[P1611]
PROCEDURE 3
(BL-188)
LOCK MODE
[P1610]
PROCEDURE 4
(BL-189)
DON'T ERASE BEFORE
CHECKING ENG DIAG
WORK FLOW
(BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis")
System
(Malfunctioning part or
mode)
Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram
In rare case, “CHAIN OF
ECM-IMMU” might be
stored during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning.
—
Open circuit in battery
voltage line of BCM circuit
C1
Open circuit in ignition
line of BCM circuit
C2
Open circuit in ground
line of BCM circuit
C3
Open or short circuit between BCM and ECM
communication line
C4
ECM
B
BCM
A
Unregistered key
D
BCM
A
Malfunction of key ID
chip
E5
Communication line between ANT/ AMP and
BCM:
Open circuit or short circuit of battery voltage
line or ground line
E1
E3, E4
Open circuit in power
source line of ANT/ AMP
circuit
E3
Open circuit in ground
line of ANT/ AMP circuit
E4
NATS antenna amp.
E6
BCM
A
System initialization has
not yet been completed.
F
ECM
B
LOCK MODE
D
Engine trouble data and
NVIS (NATS) trouble
data have been detected
in ECM
—
*: When NVIS (NATS) detects a malfunction, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2
Revision: August 2007
BL-186
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Non self-diagnosis related item
Symptom
Diagnostic Procedure
(Reference page)
Security indicator does not light
up*.
PROCEDURE 6
(BL-192, "Diagnosis Procedure
6")
System
(Malfunctioning part or mode)
Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram
Combination meter (security indictor lamp)
E2
Open circuit between Fuse and
BCM
C1, C2
BCM
A
B
A
C
*: CONSULT-III self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”.
Diagnosis Procedure 1
INFOID:0000000001718585
D
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-III screen
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “BCM” with CONSULT-III, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of “BCM”. Refer to BL-182, "CONSULTIII Function".
E
1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
F
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is
not malfunctioning.
Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as above?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis".
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR BCM
1.
2.
3.
G
H
BL
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 and ground.
J
70 – Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following:
• 50A fusible link (letter j, located in fuse and fusible link
box).
• Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM
connector.
K
L
WIIA1151E
M
3.CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 38 and ground.
38 – Ground
N
: Battery voltage
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following:
• 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
• Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM
connector.
P
WIIA0821E
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BCM
Revision: August 2007
BL-187
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground.
67 – Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1040E
5.REPLACE BCM
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> BCM is malfunctioning.
No
>> • ECM is malfunctioning.
• Replace ECM.
• Perform initialization or re-communicating function.
• For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
• For re-communicating function, refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure 2
INFOID:0000000001718586
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen
1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as above?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis".
2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III
Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NATS ignition key?
Yes
>> • Ignition key ID was unregistered.
No
>> • BCM is malfunctioning.
• Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
• Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
• For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
Diagnosis Procedure 3
INFOID:0000000001718587
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-III screen
1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”:
Registered ID of BCM is in discord with that of ECM.
Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as shown?
Revision: August 2007
BL-188
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis".
A
2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III
Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> • Start engine. (END)
• System initialization had not been completed.
No
>> • ECM is malfunctioning.
• Replace ECM.
• Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
Diagnosis Procedure 4
B
C
D
E
INFOID:0000000001718588
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-III screen
F
1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
G
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis".
H
2.ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes
>> System is OK (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”).
No
>> GO TO 3.
BL
J
K
3.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III
Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows the message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> System is OK.
No
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III AGAIN
1.
2.
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows the message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> System is OK. BCM is malfunctioning.
No
>> • ECM is malfunctioning.
• Replace ECM.
• Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
Revision: August 2007
BL-189
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure 5
INFOID:0000000001718589
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen
1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis".
2.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION
Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to BL-193, "How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly.
3.CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP
Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> • Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
• Replace the ignition key.
• Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
No
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP.
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 1 and ground.
1 – Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace fuse or harness.
LIIA1641E
5.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 1
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal
2 and ground with analog tester.
LIIA1642E
Revision: August 2007
BL-190
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector terminals
(+)
2
(-)
Ground
A
Position of ignition key cylinder
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Before inserting ignition key
Battery voltage
After inserting ignition key
Pointer of tester should move for approx. 30 seconds,
then return to battery voltage
Just after turning ignition switch
ON
Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then
return to battery voltage
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> • Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". perform
initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
D
E
6.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 2
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal
4 and ground with analog tester.
F
G
H
WIIA0822E
Connector terminals
(+)
4
(-)
Ground
BL
J
Position of ignition key cylinder
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Before inserting ignition key
Battery voltage
After inserting ignition key
Pointer of tester should move for approx. 30 seconds,
then return to battery voltage
Just after turning ignition switch
ON
Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then
return to battery voltage
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> • Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to
CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
L
M
N
7.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector.
Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 3 and ground.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-191
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3 – Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> • NATS antenna amp. is malfunctioning.
NG
>> • Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18,
"Removal and Installation of BCM". Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
LIIA1283E
Diagnosis Procedure 6
INFOID:0000000001718590
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1.CHECK FUSE
Check 15A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
2.CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the security indicator lamp lights up.
Security indicator lamp should light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter (security indicator lamp).
Check voltage between combination meter connector M24 terminal 40 and ground.
40 – Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2491E
4.CHECK BCM (NATS CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
Connect combination meter (security indicator lamp).
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and
ground.
23 – Ground
OK or NG
OK
>>
: Battery voltage
BCM is malfunctioning.
• Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
• Perform initialization with CONSULT-III.
LIIA0523E
Revision: August 2007
BL-192
2008 Quest
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual.
NG
>> Check the following:
• Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and BCM (NATS control unit).
• Indicator lamp condition.
A
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp
B
INFOID:0000000001718591
NOTE:
• If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS)
system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on
CONSULT-III screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN OF
IMMU-KEY”.
• Initialization is not necessary when only NATS antenna amp.
is replaced with a new one.
C
D
E
SIIA1683E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-193
2008 Quest
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV -
INFOID:0000000001718592
WIWA1857E
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718593
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver.
Revision: August 2007
BL-194
2008 Quest
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.)
operates with original, hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is malfunctioning, not
vehicle related.
A
1.ILLUMINATION CHECK
B
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Does red light (1) of transmitter illuminate when any of the three
transmitter buttons (2) is pressed?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
C
D
E
WIIA0789E
2.TRANSMITTER CHECK
F
Check transmitter with Tool*.
*:For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
OK or NG
OK
>> Receiver or hand-held transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related.
NG
>> Replace auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver).
G
3.POWER SUPPLY CHECK
H
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) connector.
Check voltage between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror connector R17 terminal 10 and ground.
10 - Ground
BL
: Battery voltage
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following:
• 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
• Harness for open or short between fuse and auto antidazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver).
K
L
LIIA0839E
4.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
M
Check continuity between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror connector R17 terminal 8 and body ground.
8 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver).
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
P
PIIA2368E
Revision: August 2007
BL-195
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BODY REPAIR
Body Exterior Paint Color
INFOID:0000000001718594
LIIA0797E
Component
1
Outside
mirror
2
Lift gate
Finisher
3
Bumper
fascia
Side guard
molding
4
Color code
A15
BW9
C30
C43
G10
K11
K12
Q11
Description
Red
Brawn
Majestic
Blue
Lakeshore
Slate
Desert
Stone
Galaxy
Black
Smoke
Radiant
Silver
Nordic
White
Pearl
Paint type
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
3P
Clear coat
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Body
Body color
Base
Black
A15
BW9
C30
C43
G10
K11
K12
Q11
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
Body color
A15
BW9
C30
C43
G10
K11
K12
Q11
Body
Body color
A15
BW9
C30
C43
G10
K11
K12
Q11
Body
Body color
A15
BW9
C30
C43
G10
K11
K12
Q11
5
Outside
handle
Chromiumplate
Cr2p
Cr2p
Cr2p
Cr2p
Cr2p
Cr2p
Cr2p
Cr2p
6
Radiator
grille
Chromiumplate
+Smoke
Clear
Cr+HF
M09
Cr+HFM
09
Cr+HFM
09
Cr+HF
M 09
Cr+HF
M 09
Cr+HF
M 09
Cr+HF
M 09
Cr+HFM
09
Center
M: Metallic; 2S: 2-Coat Solid, 2P: 2-Coat Pearl; 3P: 3-Coat Pearl; t: New Cross Linking Clear Coat
Revision: August 2007
BL-196
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Body Component Parts
INFOID:0000000001718595
A
UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIIA0535E
1.
Hoodledge upper RH/LH
2.
Rear hoodledge reinforcement RH/LH
22. Rear floor rear
3.
Hoodledge reinforcement
23. Front side member RH/LH
4.
Lower front hoodledge RH/LH
24. Front side member closing plate RH/LH
Revision: August 2007
21. Rear side floor rear RH/LH
BL-197
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.
Side cowl top RH/LH
25. Front side member extension reinforcement RH/LH
6.
Rear lower hoodledge RH/LH
26. Front side member reinforcement RH/LH
7.
Upper dash
27. Front side member front extension RH/LH
8.
Front cowl top
28. Inner front side member assembly RH/LH
9.
Center cowl top
29. Floor center member assembly
10. Cowl top extension
30. Outer 3rd seat mounting bracket
11. Cowl top extension bracket RH/LH
31. Center 1st cross member assembly
12. Lower dash
32. Front side member rear extension RH/LH
13. Dash lower cross member
33. Lower guide rail assembly RH/LH
14. 2nd cross member assembly
34. 4th cab moulting cross member
15. Inner sill RH/LH
35. Rear seat cross member
16. Front floor
36. Rear side member RH/LH
17. Center front floor
37. Center rear seat cross member
18. 2nd seat mounting bracket assembly RH/LH
38. 2nd rear cross member
19
39. Front hook RH/LH
Front floor rear
20. Rear floor step RH/LH
Revision: August 2007
BL-198
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIIA0366E
P
1.
Hood
2.
Front fender (RH&LH)
18. Inner roof side rail
3.
Front door assembly
19. Upper guide rail
4.
Slide door assembly
20. Upper guide rail
5.
Body side outer
21. Roof drip rail
Revision: August 2007
17. Center pillar reinforcement
BL-199
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.
Rear fender
22. Waist rail guide
7.
Body side outer reinforcement
23. Back panel assembly
8.
Back pillar reinforcement
24. Back panel assembly
9.
Inner side panel
25. Standard roof assembly
10. Front pillar lower hinge brace
26. Roof assembly with sunroof
11. Outer sill reinforcement
27. Front roof rail
12. Inner lower front pillar
28. Roof side molding assembly
13. Inner upper front pillar
29. Roof bow No. 2
14. Upper hinge pillar brace assembly
30. Rear roof bow
15. Inner roof rail reinforcement
31. Rear roof rail
16. Inner center pillar
Corrosion Protection
INFOID:0000000001718596
DESCRIPTION
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-corrosive measures.
ANTI-CORROSIVE PRECOATED STEEL (GALVANNEALED STEEL)
To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anticorrosive precoated steel sheet has been adopted replacing conventional zinc-coated steel sheet.
Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron
alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance
with cationic electrode position primer.
PIIA0093E
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that
GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory.
PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION PRIMER
A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrode position primer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are employed on all body components.
CAUTION:
Confine paint removal during welding operations to an absolute
minimum.
PIIA0095E
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built
into the vehicle at the factory.
ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX
To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas of
Revision: August 2007
BL-200
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelf
life.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
LIIA0810E
O
UNDERCOATING
The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chipping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating which is rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.
Precautions in undercoating
1.
2.
3.
Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three
way catalyst which are subjected to heat).
Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts which become hot.
Do not undercoat rotating parts.
Revision: August 2007
BL-201
2008 Quest
P
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.
LIIA0129E
Body Sealing
INFOID:0000000001718597
DESCRIPTION
Revision: August 2007
BL-202
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant which has been applied to these
areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of
sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
LIIA0812E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-203
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIIA0368E
Revision: August 2007
BL-204
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0816E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-205
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Body Construction
INFOID:0000000001718598
BODY CONSTRUCTION
LIIA0818E
Body Alignment
INFOID:0000000001718599
BODY CENTER MARKS
Revision: August 2007
BL-206
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
LIIA0819E
PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS
A mark has been placed on each body panel to indicate the parts matching positions. When repairing parts
damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle structure (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and
effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
Revision: August 2007
BL-207
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIIA0364E
DESCRIPTION
• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.
• When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself
to make sure there is no free play.
• When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
• Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
• An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side
is symmetrically the same value.
Revision: August 2007
BL-208
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of "X", "Y"
and "Z".
A
B
C
D
E
PIIA0104E
F
Engine Compartment
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-209
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT
WIIA0536E
Revision: August 2007
BL-210
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0860E
P
Underbody
Revision: August 2007
BL-211
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT
WIIA0358E
Revision: August 2007
BL-212
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIIA0359E
P
Passenger Compartment
Revision: August 2007
BL-213
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT
WIIA0537E
Revision: August 2007
BL-214
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0862E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-215
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LIIA0903E
Rear Body
Revision: August 2007
BL-216
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIIA0539E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-217
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MEASUREMENT POINTS
LIIA0864E
Handling Precaution for Plastics
INFOID:0000000001718600
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS
Revision: August 2007
BL-218
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Abbreviation
1.
2.
Material name
Heat resisting
temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance to gasoline and
solvents
A
Other cautions
PE
Polyethylene
60 (140)
Gasoline and most solvents are
harmless if applied for a very
short time (wipe up quickly).
Flammable
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
80 (176)
Same as above.
Poison gas is emitted
when burned.
EPM/
EPDM
Ethylene Propylene (Diene) rubber
80 (176)
Same as above.
Flammable
TPO/
TPR
Thermoplastic Olefine/
Thermoplastic Rubber
80 (176)
Same as above.
Flammable
PP
Polypropylene
90 (194)
Same as above.
Flammable, avoid battery acid.
UP
Polyester thermoset
90 (194)
Same as above.
Flammable
PS
Polystyrene
80 (176)
Avoid solvents.
Flammable
ABS
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
resin
80 (176)
Avoid gasoline and solvents.
AES
Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene
80 (176)
Same as above.
PMMA
Polymethyl Methacrylate
85 (185)
Same as above.
AAS
Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene
85 (185)
Same as above.
AS
Acrylonitrile Styrene
85 (185)
Same as above.
EVA
Polyvinyl Ethyl Acetate
90 (194)
Same as above.
ASA
Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate
100 (222)
Same as above.
PPO/
PPE
Polyphenylene Oxide/
Polyphenylene Ether
110 (230)
Same as above.
PC
Polycarbonate
120 (248)
Same as above.
PAR
Polyacrylate
180 (356)
Same as above.
LLDPE
Lenear Low Density PE
45 (100)
Gasoline and most solvents are
harmless.
PUR
Polyurethane
90 (194)
Same as above.
TPU
Thermoplastic Urethane
110 (230)
Same as above.
PPC
Polypropylene Composite
115 (239)
Same as above.
Flammable
POM
Polyacetal
120 (248)
Same as above.
Avoid battery acid.
PBT+P
C
Polybutylene Terephthalate+Polycarbonate
120 (248)
Same as above.
Flammable
PA
Polyamide (Nylon)
140 (284)
Same as above.
Avoid immersing in water.
PBT
Polybutylene Terephthalate
140 (284)
Same as above.
FRP
Fiber Reinforced Plastics
170 (338)
Same as above.
PET
Polyethylene Terephthalate
180 (356)
Same as above.
PEI
Polyetherimide
200 (392)
Same as above.
B
D
G
H
Flammable
BL
J
Flammable
K
L
M
N
Avoid battery acid.
O
,
Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials characteristics.
BL-219
E
F
When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics
(influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them.
Revision: August 2007
C
2008 Quest
P
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
LIIA0824E
Revision: August 2007
BL-220
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA0825E
Precaution in Repairing High Strength Steel
INFOID:0000000001718601
High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.
Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:
BL
High strength steel (hss) used in Nissan vehicles
J
Tensile strength
373 N/mm
Nissan/Infiniti designation
SP130
•
•
•
•
•
SP150
• Front bumper reinforcement
• Rear bumper reinforcement
2
2
(38kg/mm ,54klb/sq in)
785-981 N/mm2
(80-100kg/mm2
114-142klb/sq in)
Major applicable parts
Front side member assembly
Upper hoodledge
Upper pillar hinge brace assembly
Rear side member extension
Other reinforcements
K
L
M
SP130 is the most commonly used HSS.
SP150 HSS is used only on parts that require much more strength.
Read the following precautions when repairing HSS:
1. Additional points to consider
• The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heating is not recommended since it may weaken the component.
When heating is unavoidable, do not heat HSS parts above
550°C (1,022°F).
Verify heating temperature with a thermometer.
(Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropriate.)
N
O
P
PIIA0115E
Revision: August 2007
BL-221
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any
HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may cause
deformation in adjacent portions of the body. In this case,
increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pull
the HSS panel.
PIIA0116E
• When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible.
Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas due
to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum
margin of 50 mm (1.97in).
PIIA0117E
• When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possible in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to
heat.
If spot welding is impossible, use M.I.G. welding. Do not use
gas (torch) welding because it is inferior in welding strength.
PIIA0144E
• The spot weld on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary steel panel.
Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low
speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit
durability and facilitate the operation.
• SP150 HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/
mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2, 114 to 142 klb/sq in), used as reinforcement in the door guard beams, is too strong to repair.
When these HSS parts are damaged, the outer panels also
sustain substantial damage; therefore, the assembly parts
must be replaced.
Revision: August 2007
BL-222
PIIA0145E
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Precautions in spot welding HSS
This work should be performed under standard working conditions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS:
• The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according to
the metal thickness.
A
B
C
PIIA0146E
D
• The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no
gaps.
E
F
G
PIIA0147E
H
• Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.
Unit:mm
Thickness (t)
Minimum pitch ( )
0.6 (0.024)
0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
10 (0.39) or over
12 (0.47) or over
18 (0.71) or over
20 (0.79) or over
27 (1.06) or over
31 (1.22) or over
BL
J
K
PIIA0148E
Foam Repair
INFOID:0000000001718602
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the
vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
L
M
Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read
instructions on product for fill procedures.
N
FILL PROCEDURES
1.
-
Fill procedures after installation of service part.
Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
Clean area in which foam was removed.
Install service part.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-223
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service
part.
LIIA1081E
2. Fill procedures before installation of service part.
Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
Clean area in which foam was removed.
Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE:
Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange
area.
Install service part.
NOTE:
Refer to label for information on working times.
LIIA1082E
Replacement Operation
INFOID:0000000001718603
DESCRIPTION
This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section.
Technicians are also encouraged to read Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the original functions and quality of the vehicle can be maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) contains
additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Technicians
should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repairs.
Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures may not
apply in some regions or countries.
Revision: August 2007
BL-224
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The symbols used in this section for cutting and welding / brazing operations are shown below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
PIIA0149E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-225
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at
position A due to the construction of the vehicle. Refer to the front
pillar section.
PIIA0150E
• Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating
indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer
front pillar over 60 mm above inner front pillar cut position.
PIIA0151E
• Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will
permit service part to be accurately cut at joint position.
PIIA0152E
• An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as follows.
1. Mark cutting lines.
A: Cut position of outer pillar
B: Cut position of inner pillar
2. Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar.
3. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig. (At position A)
4. Remove jig and cut remaining portions.
5. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner.
PIIA0153E
HOODLEDGE
Revision: August 2007
BL-226
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Work after radiator core support has been removed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0866E
P
FRONT SIDE MEMBER
Revision: August 2007
BL-227
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Work after hoodledge and radiator core support have been removed.
WIIA0360E
Revision: August 2007
BL-228
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0869E
FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT)
Revision: August 2007
BL-229
P
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Work after radiator core support has been removed.
WIIA0361E
FRONT PILLAR
Revision: August 2007
BL-230
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Work after rear hoodledge reinforcement has been removed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0870E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-231
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LIIA0871E
Revision: August 2007
BL-232
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0872E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-233
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CENTER PILLAR
LIIA0873E
Revision: August 2007
BL-234
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0874E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-235
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LIIA0904E
Revision: August 2007
BL-236
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OUTER SILL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0875E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-237
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR FENDER
LIIA0876E
Revision: August 2007
BL-238
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR PANEL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0877E
P
REAR FLOOR REAR
Revision: August 2007
BL-239
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Work after rear panel has been removed.
LIIA0878E
REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION
Revision: August 2007
BL-240
2008 Quest
BODY REPAIR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Work after rear panel and rear end crossmember have been removed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIIA0879E
P
Revision: August 2007
BL-241
2008 Quest
BRAKES
SECTION
BR
BRAKE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................15
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 21
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 2
Wiring Diagram and Trouble Diagnosis .................... 2
On-Vehicle Service ..................................................21
Removal and Installation .........................................21
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
Removal and Installation .........................................23
Inspection ................................................................23
FRONT DISC BRAKE ....................................... 25
BRAKE PEDAL ................................................... 5
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 5
Removal and Installation ........................................... 7
REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 32
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4
Component ..............................................................32
On Board Inspection ................................................33
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ...................33
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and
Disc Rotor ................................................................33
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly....34
Brake Burnishing .....................................................37
BRAKE FLUID ....................................................10
Checking Brake Fluid Level .................................... 10
Changing Brake Fluid .............................................. 10
Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 10
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE ..............................11
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 38
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................14
On Board Inspection ............................................... 14
Removal and Installation ......................................... 14
Revision: August 2007
G
VACUUM LINES ............................................... 23
Component ..............................................................25
On Board Inspection ................................................26
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ...................26
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and
Disc Rotor ................................................................27
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly....28
Brake Burnishing .....................................................30
Hydraulic Circuit ...................................................... 11
Front Brake Piping and Hose .................................. 11
Rear Brake Piping and Hose ................................... 12
Inspection ................................................................ 13
BR
BR-1
General Specification ..............................................38
Disc Brake ...............................................................38
Brake Pedal .............................................................39
Brake Booster ..........................................................39
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718242
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Brake System
INFOID:0000000001718243
CAUTION:
• Recommended fluid is brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
• Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
• If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled
without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a
defect exists.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the
ABS actuator control unit or the battery terminal before performing the work.
• Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at
SBR686C
very low mileage.
Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing" (front disc brakes) or BR-37, "Brake Burnishing" (rear disc
brakes).
WARNING:
• Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Wiring Diagram and Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718244
For wiring diagrams or trouble diagnosis relating to the brake system, refer to BRC section.
Revision: August 2007
BR-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718245
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-46532)
Brake and clutch pedal height measurement tool
Measuring brake pedal height
B
C
D
E
LFIA0227E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718246
BR
Tool name
Description
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
G
H
I
S-NT360
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
J
K
PBIC0190E
L
M
PBIC0191E
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-3
2008 Quest
Symptom
Revision: August 2007
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
BR-4
BR-28, BR-34
BR-28, BR-34
BR-28, BR-34
BR-30, BR-37
BR-28, BR-34
Rotor runout
Rotor deformation
Rotor deflection
Rotor rust
Rotor thickness variation
STEERING
Shimmy
ROAD WHEEL
×
TIRES
Shake
SUSPENSION
BR-25, BR-32
Rotor damage
×
AXLE
BR-28, BR-34
Rotor imbalance
×
DRIVE SHAFT
BR-25, BR-32
×
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-26, BR-33
Shims damaged
Noise
Pads - uneven wear
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
BR-25, BR-32
Reference page
Pads - damaged
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
INFOID:0000000001718247
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2008 Quest
BRAKE PEDAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BRAKE PEDAL
A
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001718248
INSPECTION
1.
2.
B
If equipped with adjustable pedals, move the brake pedal to the forward most position (closest to the
floor).
Inspect the brake pedal height, play, and switch clearance from
the dash lower panel as shown.
CAUTION:
When equipped with adjustable pedals, the brake pedal
must be set in the forward most position (closest to the
floor) for checking the brake pedal specifications.
Tool number
:
—
C
D
E
(J-46532)
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0160E
J
Free height “H”
156.3 - 166.3 mm (6.15 - 6.55 in)
Depressed pedal height “D” under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb)
with engine running
More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in)
Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp
switch and ASCD cancel switch “C1” or “C2”
0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.029 - 0.077 in)
Pedal play “A”
3.
K
L
3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in)
Adjust the brake pedal as necessary. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT".
M
ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise.
Loosen the lock nut on the input rod.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is
located inside the clevis as shown.
N
O
P
SBR229E
Revision: August 2007
BR-5
2008 Quest
BRAKE PEDAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height.
When the brake pedal is adjusted to specification, tighten the
lock nut to specification. Refer to BR-21, "Removal and Installation".
Tool number
:
—
(J-46532)
WFIA0160E
Free height “H”
156.3 - 166.3 mm (6.15 - 6.55 in)
Depressed pedal height “D” under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb)
with engine running
More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in)
Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp
switch and ASCD cancel switch “C1” or “C2”
0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.029 - 0.077 in)
Pedal play “A”
4.
5.
6.
7.
3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in)
With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in
until the threaded ends contact the rubber stops.
With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch contacting the rubber stops, turn
the switches 45° clockwise to lock them in place.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the gap (“C1” and “C2”) between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification.
Check the pedal play “A”.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released.
Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Revision: August 2007
BR-6
2008 Quest
BRAKE PEDAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718249
A
Non-adjustable Pedal
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0297E
1.
Brake pedal assembly
2.
Snap pin
3.
ASCD cancel switch
4.
Stop lamp switch
5.
Pedal pad
6.
Clevis pin
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-7
2008 Quest
BRAKE PEDAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Adjustable Pedal
WFIA0298E
1.
Brake pedal assembly
2.
Snap pin
3.
ASCD cancel switch
4.
Stop lamp switch
5.
Pedal pad
6.
Clevis pin
WARNING:
Do not damage the brake tube.
CAUTION:
• Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) must be in
the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator
and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
• Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
• Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
• Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the brake pedal assembly by turning 45°
degrees.
If equipped with the adjustable pedal, disconnect the adjustable
brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor.
• Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown.
LBIA0374E
Revision: August 2007
BR-8
2008 Quest
BRAKE PEDAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the brake booster clevis.
5. Remove nuts and the brake pedal assembly. Support the brake booster and master cylinder at the bulkhead so as not to damage the brake tubes.
CAUTION:
• Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forward most
position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) for installation.
• Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
• Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
• Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
A
B
C
D
Check brake pedal for following items.
• Clevis pin deformation
• Crack of any welded portion
• Brake pedal bent or damaged
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
BR
• Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or
releasing the brake pedal.
• If equipped, check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or
G
sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward.
• After installing the brake pedal assembly, adjust as necessary. Refer to BR-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-9
2008 Quest
BRAKE FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BRAKE FLUID
Checking Brake Fluid Level
INFOID:0000000001718250
• Check fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the sub tank.
• Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks.
• If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
• Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes
off. If not, check brake system for leaks.
LFIA0204E
Changing Brake Fluid
INFOID:0000000001718251
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Always keep fluid level higher than “MIN” line on sub tank.
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder.
2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal.
4. Clean the inside of the sub tank, and refill the sub tank with new brake fluid.
5. Bleed the brake system refilling the system with new fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
Bleeding Brake System
INFOID:0000000001718252
CAUTION:
• Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation.
• Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". Make sure it is full at
all times while bleeding the air out of system.
• Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid.
• Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
3. Fully depress brake pedal several times.
4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release
air.
5. Close air bleeder valve.
6. Release brake pedal slowly.
7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification.
Air bleeder valve
8.
9.
: 8 N·m (0.8 kg-m, 71 in-lb)
Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of
air bleeder valve.
Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order:
Right rear brake → Left front brake → Left rear brake → Right front brake
Revision: August 2007
BR-10
SBR419C
2008 Quest
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
A
Hydraulic Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718253
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0428E
1.
Actuator
2.
Master Cylinder
●
Flare nut
■
Union Bolt
Front Brake Piping and Hose
3.
Brake Booster
J
INFOID:0000000001718254
K
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
• Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
L
M
N
O
P
SBR419C
Revision: August 2007
BR-11
2008 Quest
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the flare nut connecting the brake tube and hose, then
withdraw the lock spring.
4. Remove the connecting bolt and disconnect the brake hose
from the caliper assembly.
5. Remove lock springs from the mounting portion of the brake
tube and the mounting portion of the strut.
WFIA0087E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Attach the brake hose to the caliper assembly, then temporarily tighten the connecting bolt by hand.
CAUTION:
• Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body.
• The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected.
2. Attach the brake hose to the strut, then secure it with a lock spring.
3. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand,
then secure it with a lock spring.
4. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts to specification. Refer
to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit".
5. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve.
6. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding
Brake System".
SBR686C
Rear Brake Piping and Hose
INFOID:0000000001718255
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
• Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
SBR419C
Revision: August 2007
BR-12
2008 Quest
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring.
4. Remove connecting bolt and disconnect brake hose from caliper
assembly.
A
B
C
WFIA0088E
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
E
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand.
2. Attach the brake hose with a lock spring, then tighten the conBR
necting bolt and flare nut using a torque wrench to specification.
Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit".
3. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve.
G
4. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding
Brake System".
H
SBR686C
Inspection
I
INFOID:0000000001718256
CAUTION:
If leakage occurs around hose and tube connections, retighten
or, if necessary, replace damaged parts.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, cracks, distortion, deformation, without interfering with other parts or loosening connecting parts, deterioration or other damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
2. Apply a stepping force of 784 N (80 kg-f, 176 lb-f) to the brake
pedal with the engine running and keep it for about 5 seconds,
then check each part for leaks.
J
K
L
M
SBR389C
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-13
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
On Board Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718257
LEAK INSPECTION
• Check for leaking in the master cylinder installation surface, the reservoir tank installation surface, the reservoir hose connections, and the brake tube connections.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718258
CAUTION:
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas, it may cause damage. If brake fluid is splashed
on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid".
Remove the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube attached to air cleaner case (upper). Refer
to EM-15, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the harness connector for the brake fluid level switch.
Disconnect the master cylinder brake tubes and the hose from the reservoir tank to the sub tank using a
suitable tool.
Remove the master cylinder nuts and remove the master cylinder.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and tighten the master cylinder nuts to specification. Refer to
BR-15, "Disassembly and Assembly".
2. Connect the sub tank hose to the master cylinder reservoir tank and fill the sub tank with new brake fluid.
3. Plug all ports on master cylinder with your fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal.
4. Have an assistant depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out of the master cylinder.
• Install and tighten brake tube flare nuts to specification. Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit".
• Refill the brake system fluid and bleed the air from the brake system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake
System".
5. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
BR-14
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718259
A
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0282E
1.
Reservoir cap
4.
Clamp
7.
Grommet
10. Pin
2.
Oil strainer
3.
Hose
5.
Bracket
6.
Reservoir tank
8.
Piston stopper
9.
Cylinder body
11. Secondary piston assembly
J
K
12. Primary piston assembly
13. Stopper cap
14. Sub tank
15. Brake fluid level switch
16. O-ring
17. Plate
18. Guide
L
19. Snap ring
WITHOUT VDC MODELS
M
Disassembly
1.
Lift up the tabs on the stopper cap and remove it from the master cylinder using a suitable tool as shown. The piston inside the
master cylinder might pop out when this is done, so hold the
stopper cap down at the same time.
N
O
P
BRA0031D
Revision: August 2007
BR-15
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around
the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder
assembly in a vise.
CAUTION:
• When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise,
be sure not to over-tighten.
• When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to
protect the flange.
PFIA0438E
3.
4.
5.
Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)].
Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise.
Remove reservoir tank and grommets from cylinder body.
PFIA0439E
6.
7.
Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if necessary.
Push in the piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body using a suitable tool.
PFIA0440E
8.
Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent
cylinder inner wall from being damaged using a suitable tool.
BRA0561D
Revision: August 2007
BR-16
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9. Tap flange using a soft block such as wood, and carefully pull
the secondary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder
inner wall from being damaged.
A
B
C
BRA0033D
Inspection After Disassembly
Master cylinder
Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are
any non-standard conditions.
Piston
Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found.
D
E
BR
Assembly
CAUTION:
• Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
• Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the pis- G
ton, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools.
• Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the
H
piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and
primary piston assembly into cylinder body in this order.
CAUTION:
I
• Do not reuse the primary and secondary piston assemblies.
• Be sure to replace the assembly without disassembling
the new inner kit.
J
• Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cup, and
insert straight to prevent the cup from being caught by
cylinder inner wall.
SBR089C
K
2.
Perform a visual inspection of the secondary piston slit through
the tank boss hole on the secondary side of the cylinder body,
and install the piston stopper using a suitable tool.
L
M
N
PFIA0440E
3.
4.
O
Holding down the piston with the stopper cap, push the stopper
cap tabs so they are firmly into the cylinder grooves, then attach
the stopper cap.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the stopper cap.
Apply brake fluid to the grommets and attach to the cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the grommets.
P
BRA0035D
Revision: August 2007
BR-17
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.
Place master cylinder assembly is a vise as described in disassembly step 2.
6.
Install the reservoir tank pin so that the pin is evenly seated on
both sides of the reservoir, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)].
CAUTION:
Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin.
PFIA0439E
7.
If necessary, install brake fluid level switch.
WITH VDC MODELS
Disassembly
1.
Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around
the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder
assembly in a vise.
CAUTION:
• When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise,
be sure not to over-tighten.
• When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to
protect the flange.
PFIA0438E
2.
3.
4.
Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)].
Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise.
Remove reservoir tank and grommets from cylinder body.
PFIA0439E
5.
6.
Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if necessary.
Push in the primary piston and remove the piston stopper from
the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the inner wall of the cylinder.
BRA0560D
Revision: August 2007
BR-18
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent
cylinder inner wall from being damaged using a suitable tool.
A
B
C
BRA0561D
D
8.
9.
Holding the rod of the primary piston, remove the primary piston assembly, the plate and the guide.
CAUTION:
Pull components straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged.
Remove the plate and guide from the primary piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rod on the inner wall of the plate.
Inspection After Disassembly
Master cylinder
Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are
any non-standard conditions.
Piston
Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found.
Assembly
CAUTION:
• Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
• Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the piston, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools.
• Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the
piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and
primary piston assembly into cylinder body.
CAUTION:
• Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cups. Also,
insert pistons squarely to prevent scratching the cylinder
inner wall.
• Always replace the inner kit as an assembly.
WFIA0129E
2.
Align the slit in the center of the secondary piston with the axial
direction of the piston stopper. Visually check the secondary piston slit from the piston stopper hole and install the piston stopper.
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BRA0560D
Revision: August 2007
BR-19
2008 Quest
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Insert the plates and the guide into the cylinder body as shown.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the primary piston rod.
• Pay attention to the orientation of the guide.
WFIA0123E
4.
Press in the primary piston and install a new snap ring.
CAUTION:
• Make sure snap ring is fully inserted in the snap ring
groove.
• Do not reuse snap ring.
BRA0561D
5.
Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around
the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder
assembly in a vise.
CAUTION:
• When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise,
be sure not to over-tighten.
• When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to
protect the flange.
PFIA0438E
6.
7.
Using a pin punch [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4
mm (0.16 in)], attach the reservoir tank mounting pin so that the
attachment side and the opposite side are identical.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin.
If necessary, install brake fluid level switch.
PFIA0439E
Revision: August 2007
BR-20
2008 Quest
BRAKE BOOSTER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BRAKE BOOSTER
A
On-Vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001718260
OPERATING CHECK
B
With the engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric
pressure by depressing the brake pedal several times. Then with
brake pedal fully depressed, start the engine and when the vacuum
pressure reaches the standard, check that the clearance between
the brake pedal and floor panel decreases.
CAUTION:
Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
C
D
E
BRA0037D
AIRTIGHT CHECK
BR
• Run the engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after
applying vacuum to the booster. Depress the brake pedal normally
to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Check that
distance between the brake pedal and floor panel gradually
increases.
• Depress the brake pedal while the engine is running, then stop the
engine with the pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not
change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
CAUTION:
Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
G
H
I
SBR365AA
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718261
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WFIA0143E
Revision: August 2007
BR-21
2008 Quest
BRAKE BOOSTER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
Master cylinder
2.
Reservoir tank
4.
Gasket
5.
Lock nut
3.
Brake booster
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing the brake booster.
• Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during
installation, the dash panel may damage the threads.
• Attach the check valve in the correct orientation.
1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-14, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove vacuum hose from the brake booster. Refer to BR-23, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
5. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle.
6. Remove the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
7. Remove brake booster assembly from the engine compartment side.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Output Rod Length Inspection
Apply specified vacuum to the brake booster. Then check output rod
length, using a suitable tool.
Standard dimension at vacuum
of (–66.7 kPa) [(–500 mmHg),
(–19.69 inHg)]
: 10.275 – 10.525 mm
(0.4045 – 0.4144 in)
SBR208E
INSTALLATION
1.
Loosen the lock nut to adjust the input rod length so that the
dimension shown satisfies the specified value.
Standard value
: 110 mm (4.33 in)
2.
After adjusting, temporarily tighten the lock nut to install the
booster assembly to the vehicle. At this time, make sure to
install a gasket between the booster assembly and the vehicle.
3. Connect the brake pedal with the clevis of the input rod while
installing brake pedal assembly onto brake booster studs.
4. Install nuts to secure brake pedal assembly to brake booster
WFIA0159E
and tighten to specification.
5. Install the brake piping from the brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit".
6. Install the brake master cylinder to the brake booster. Refer to BR-14, "Removal and Installation".
7. Adjust the height and play of the brake pedal.
8. Tighten the lock nut of the input rod to the specification.
9. Adjust brake pedal. Refer to BR-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".
10. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
Revision: August 2007
BR-22
2008 Quest
VACUUM LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
VACUUM LINES
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718262
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0429E
1.
Clamp
2.
Vacuum hose
4.
Vacuum piping
A
Brake booster
3.
Check valve inclusion position stamp
CAUTION:
• Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer to
the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. The brake booster will not operate normally if the
hose is installed in the wrong direction.
• Insert the vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 in).
• Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
J
K
L
M
N
SBR225B
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718263
P
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check for improper assembly, damage and deteriorate.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection
Revision: August 2007
O
BR-23
2008 Quest
VACUUM LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Use a suitable tool to check.
When connected to booster side (1):
Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa
(10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under
a vacuum of (–66.7 kPa) [(–500 mmHg),
(–19.69 inHg)]
When connected to engine side (2):
No vacuum will be applied
WFIA0158E
Revision: August 2007
BR-24
2008 Quest
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718264
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
WFIA0483E
1.
Union bolt
2.
Copper washers
3.
4.
Inner shim cover
5.
Sliding pin
6.
Cap
7.
Air bleeder
8.
Cylinder body
9.
Sliding pin boot
10.
Piston seal
11.
Piston
12.
Piston boot
13.
Torque member
14.
Outer shim cover
15.
Inner shim
16.
Inner pad
17.
Pad retainer
18.
Pad retainer
19.
Outer pad
20.
Outer shim
21.
Lock washer
22.
Torque member bolts
⇐
Front
K
Brake hose
L
M
WARNING:
Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air.
CAUTION:
• While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not
depress the brake pedal.
• It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is
not under tension.
• Do not damage piston boot.
• If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
• Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads.
• Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads
or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing".
Revision: August 2007
BR-25
2008 Quest
N
O
P
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718265
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
• Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary.
Standard pad thickness
Pad wear limit
: 10 mm (0.394 in)
: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
MAA0439D
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
INFOID:0000000001718266
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize a hazard of airborne particles or other
materials.
CAUTION:
• While removing pad assemblies, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
• Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on disc rotor. Always replace shims when replacing
pads.
• If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims.
• It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt except for disassembly or replacement
of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
• Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back
piston.
• Burnish the brake pads (or linings) and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces after refinishing or
replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at a very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing".
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove lower sliding pin.
SBR433D
3.
Hang the cylinder body with a wire and remove the pad and
shim assemblies, then pad retainers from the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage piston boot.
• When removing pad retainer from torque member, lift pad
retainer in the direction of arrow as shown so as not to
deform it.
• Keep rotor clean and free from brake fluid.
SBR556E
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
BR-26
2008 Quest
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, refer to MA-11, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides.
Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads.
2. Install pad retainers and pad assemblies to the torque member.
A
B
C
D
SBR556E
3.
Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached, and install the cylinder body to the torque member.
E
NOTE:
Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION:
• By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank and sub BR
tank. Watch the level of the fluid in the sub tank.
• When installing pad retainer, make sure it firmly seated to the toque member.
G
4. Install the sliding pin and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component".
5. Check brake for drag.
6. Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
H
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing".
I
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
INFOID:0000000001718267
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
J
Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid".
Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool,
then remove cylinder body.
K
L
M
SFIA0140E
4.
Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION:
Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor.
N
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
CAUTION:
Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor.
Revision: August 2007
BR-27
P
2008 Quest
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member
bolts to specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component".
CAUTION:
Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any
oil off the knuckle spindle washers and cylinder body
attachment surfaces.
3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and tighten union bolt to
the specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts.
• Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder
body attachment part.
4.
5.
SFIA0140E
Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing".
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718268
NOTE:
Do not remove torque member, pads, shims, shim covers or pad retainers, when disassembling or assembling
cylinder body.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove caliper assembly. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc
Rotor".
Remove cylinder body from torque member, then sliding pin boots from torque member.
Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
WARNING:
Do not get your fingers caught in the piston.
BRB0032D
4.
Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
SFIA0141E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
• Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
• Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there are
any non-standard conditions.
Revision: August 2007
BR-28
2008 Quest
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with
a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
A
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION:
• Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper.
• Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected,
replace applicable part.
Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots
Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
B
C
D
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
E
Visual Inspection
Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace applicable part.
BR
Runout Inspection
1.
2.
Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions.
Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
Measurement point
Maximum runout
(with it attached to the vehicle)
3.
G
: At a point 10 mm
(0.39 in) from outer
edge of the disc
: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
or less
CAUTION:
Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0
in). Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by
shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole.
H
I
SBR019B
J
K
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness
does not meet specification, replace disc rotor.
L
Standard thickness
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation (measured at 8 positions)
: 28 mm (1.10 in)
: 26 mm (1.02 in)
: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or
less
M
N
SBR020B
ASSEMBLY
O
CAUTION:
Do not use Genuine NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling.
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-29
2008 Quest
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Apply rubber grease to the piston seals and install them into cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston seals.
SFIA2419E
2.
Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on
the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into
the cylinder body groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston boot.
3.
Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston, insert into the
cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot pistonside lip into the piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
SFIA0155E
PFIA0272E
4.
5.
6.
Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, refer to MA-11, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides.
Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads.
Attach the pad retainer to the torque member.
CAUTION:
When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it
does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown.
SBR556E
7.
After assembling the shims and the shim covers to the pad, install it to the torque member.
8.
Install cylinder body and tighten sliding pin to the specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component".
Brake Burnishing
INFOID:0000000001718269
Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors,
after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
Revision: August 2007
BR-30
2008 Quest
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH).
Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
A
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-31
2008 Quest
REAR DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR DISC BRAKE
Component
INFOID:0000000001718270
WFIA0484E
1.
Union bolt
2.
Brake hose
3.
Copper washer
4.
7.
Cap
5.
Air bleeder
6.
Sliding pin bolt
Cylinder body
8.
Piston seal
9.
10.
Piston
Piston boot
11. Retaining ring
12.
Inner shim cover
Pad retainer
13.
Inner shim
14. Inner pad
15.
16.
Outer pad
17. Outer shim
18.
Sliding pin boot
19.
Torque member bolts
20. Sliding pin
21.
Torque member
⇐
Front
WARNING:
Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air.
CAUTION:
• While removing cylinder body, never depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
• It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is
not under tension.
• Do not damage piston boot.
• If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
• Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads.
• Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads
or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-37, "Brake Burnishing".
Revision: August 2007
BR-32
2008 Quest
REAR DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718271
A
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
• Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary.
Standard pad thickness
Pad wear limit
B
: 8.5 mm (0.335 in)
: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
C
D
BRA0010D
E
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
INFOID:0000000001718272
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
BR
Remove wheel and tires assemblies using power tool.
Remove bottom sliding pin bolt.
Hang cylinder body with a wire then remove pads, pad retainers, and shims from torque member.
G
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the rear of the pad and to both sides
of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim to the outer
pad.
Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach the cylinder body to the torque member.
NOTE:
Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION:
• By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank and the
sub tank. Watch the brake fluid level in the sub tank.
• When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it
does not float up higher than the torque member, as
shown.
Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to specification. Refer to
BR-32, "Component".
Check the brake for any drag.
Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or
SBR556E
replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if
a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-37,
"Brake Burnishing".
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
INFOID:0000000001718273
REMOVAL
Revision: August 2007
H
P
BR-33
2008 Quest
REAR DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool.
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool,
and remove cylinder body.
4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be
removed, remove as follows:
• Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged.
PFIA0413E
• Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the
adjuster hole plug.
• Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and
rotate the adjuster in the direction shown to loosen and retract
the brake shoes.
• Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a
marker between the hub and disc rotor.
• Remove wheel nut and rotor.
WFIA0018E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install the disc rotor.
• Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor.
2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to BR-32, "Component".
CAUTION:
Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle
assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to BR-32, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts.
• Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body.
4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
5. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service".
6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to MA-27, "Tire Rotation".
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-37, "Brake Burnishing".
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718274
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque
member and cylinder.
Remove the sliding pin and the sliding pin boot from the torque member.
Revision: August 2007
BR-34
2008 Quest
REAR DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown.
A
B
C
SBR028A
D
4.
Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
WARNING:
Do not place your finger in front of piston.
E
BR
G
BRD0041D
5.
Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or
suitable tool, as shown.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
H
I
J
PFIA0269E
K
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
• Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
• Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace cylinder body.
• Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with
a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION:
Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper.
Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace
applicable part.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots
Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are,
replace them.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not use Genuine NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling.
Revision: August 2007
BR-35
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
REAR DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston seals.
SFIA0156E
2.
3.
4.
Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on
the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into
the cylinder body groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston boot.
Apply a brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston, insert into the
cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot pistonside lip into the piston boot.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
PFIA0272E
Fix piston boot with retaining ring.
CAUTION:
• Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove.
• Do not reuse the retaining ring.
SFIA0158E
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Attach the sliding pin and sliding pin boot to the torque member.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease, or equivalent, refer to MA-11 to the rear
of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and
the outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad.
Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
CAUTION:
When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it
does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown.
After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the
torque member.
Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to specification.
Refer to BR-32, "Component".
SBR556E
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection
Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection
1.
Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub. (2 or more positions)
Revision: August 2007
BR-36
2008 Quest
REAR DISC BRAKE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
A
Measurement position
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
3.
: At a point 10 mm (0.39 in)
from outer edge of the disc.
: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less
CAUTION:
Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0
in). Refer to RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by
shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by
one hole.
B
C
SBR019B
D
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is
not within specification, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation
(measured at 8 positions)
E
: 16.0 mm (0.630 in)
: 14.0 mm (0.551 in)
: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or
less
BR
G
SBR020B
Brake Burnishing
H
INFOID:0000000001718275
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
NOTE:
Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors,
after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust
brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-37
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification
INFOID:0000000001718276
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
AD35VB disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake
47.62 (1.87)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
132.0 × 53.5 × 10 (5.20 × 2.11 × 0.39)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
290 × 28 (11.42 × 1.10)
Brake model
AD14VE disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Rear brake
42.86 (1.69)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.27 × 1.30 × 0.33)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Master cylinder
308 × 16 (12.13 × 0.63)
Cylinder bore diameter
25.4 (1.00)
Booster model
Brake booster
Diaphragm diameter
M245T
Primary
252 (9.92)
Secondary
230 (9.06)
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
equivalent, DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Recommended brake fluid
Disc Brake
INFOID:0000000001718277
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Pad wear limit
Minimum thickness
Maximum runout
Rotor repair limit
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation
(measured at 8 positions)
Revision: August 2007
BR-38
AD35VB (Front)
AD14VE (Rear)
2.0 (0.079)
2.0 (0.079)
0.04 (0.0016)
0.05 (0.0020)
26.0 (1.02)
14.0 (0.55)
0.015 (0.0006) or less
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Brake Pedal
INFOID:0000000001718278
A
Unit: mm (in)
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
WFIA0160E
Free height “H” *
156.3 - 166.3 (6.15 - 6.55)
Depressed pedal height “D” [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] *
Clearance “C1” or “C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD
switch
Pedal play “A”
more than 90.3 (3.55)
I
0.74 - 1.96 (0.029 - 0.077)
3 - 11 (0.12 - 0.43)
J
*: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad
Brake Booster
INFOID:0000000001718279
K
Unit: mm (in)
Output rod length
L
10.275 - 10.525 (0.4045 - 0.4144)
Clevis length
110 (4.33)
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BR-39
2008 Quest
BRAKES
SECTION
BRC
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
TCS/ABS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 3
Precaution for Brake Control ..................................... 3
Precaution for CAN System ...................................... 4
Wheel Sensor System Inspection ............................28
Engine System Inspection .......................................29
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inspection ............................29
Solenoid Valve System Inspection ..........................30
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection ...........................................................................31
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection .....................32
ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection .......................................................32
CAN Communication System Inspection .................33
Component Inspection .............................................33
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ..... 35
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................... 6
Schematic ................................................................. 6
ABS Function ............................................................ 6
EBD Function ............................................................ 6
TCS Function ............................................................ 6
Wheel Sensors .......................................................... 7
Fail-Safe Function ..................................................... 7
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ......................................... 8
CAN COMMUNICATION ..................................... 9
System Description ................................................... 9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................10
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 10
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 13
Schematic ............................................................... 14
Wiring Diagram - TCS - ........................................... 15
Basic Inspection ...................................................... 18
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ....................... 19
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard .............. 19
CONSULT-III Function (ABS) ................................. 21
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ..................................................28
Revision: August 2007
ABS Works Frequently ............................................35
Unexpected Pedal Action ........................................35
Long Stopping Distance ..........................................36
ABS Does Not Work ................................................36
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise .................36
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ......................................37
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition
Switch Is Turned On ................................................37
Vehicle Jerks During TCS Activation .......................38
WHEEL SENSORS ........................................... 39
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Removal and Installation .........................................39
SENSOR ROTOR .............................................. 40
N
Removal and Installation .........................................40
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) .................................................................. 41
O
Removal and Installation .........................................41
VDC/TCS/ABS
P
SERVICE INFORMATION ........................... 43
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 43
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................43
Precaution for Brake System ...................................43
BRC-1
2008 Quest
Precaution for Brake Control .................................. 43
Precaution for CAN System .................................... 44
PREPARATION ................................................. 45
Special Service Tool ............................................... 45
Commercial Service Tool ....................................... 45
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................... 46
System Component ................................................ 46
ABS Function .......................................................... 46
EBD Function ......................................................... 46
TCS Function .......................................................... 47
VDC Function ......................................................... 47
Wheel Sensors ....................................................... 47
Fail-Safe Function .................................................. 47
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ....................................... 48
CAN COMMUNICATION ................................... 49
System Description ................................................. 49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..................................... 50
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 50
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 53
Schematic ............................................................... 54
Wiring Diagram - VDC - .......................................... 55
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 59
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ....................... 60
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 60
CONSULT-III Function (ABS) ................................. 63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS .................................................. 70
Wheel Sensor System Inspection ........................... 70
Engine System Inspection ...................................... 71
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection .................. 71
Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection ............. 72
Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection .......................................................................... 73
Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System
Inspection ................................................................ 74
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection .......................................................................... 75
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection ..................... 76
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground
Systems Inspection ................................................. 77
Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection .......... 78
CAN Communication System Inspection ................ 78
Component Inspection ............................................ 79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ..... 80
ABS Works Frequently ............................................ 80
Unexpected Pedal Action ........................................ 80
Long Stopping Distance .......................................... 81
ABS Does Not Work ............................................... 81
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise ................ 81
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...................................... 82
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition
Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 82
Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation .............. 83
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .................................... 84
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position ........................................................................ 84
WHEEL SENSORS ............................................ 85
Removal and Installation ......................................... 85
SENSOR ROTOR .............................................. 86
Removal and Installation ......................................... 86
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ................................................................... 87
Removal and Installation ......................................... 87
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ........................... 89
Removal and Installation ......................................... 89
G SENSOR ........................................................ 90
Removal and Installation ......................................
Revision: August 2007
BRC-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001718289
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
D
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
BRC
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
H
Precaution for Brake System
INFOID:0000000001718290
CAUTION:
• Refer to MA-11 for recommended brake fluid.
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
• Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
• If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled
without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a
defect exists.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work.
• Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at
SBR686C
very low mileage.
Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing" (front disc brakes) or BR-37, "Brake Burnishing" (rear disc
brakes).
WARNING:
• Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Precaution for Brake Control
INFOID:0000000001718292
• During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
• Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine
compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
• Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-3
2008 Quest
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer
(what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis.
Besides electrical system inspection, check booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks.
• If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
• If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or
error.
• If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits or improper wiring.
Precaution for CAN System
•
•
•
•
INFOID:0000000001718293
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured.
Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V.
Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable.
Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape.
Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in).
PKIA0306E
• Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is
bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-4
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718294
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991J0070
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors
B
C
D
E
WFIA0101E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718295
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
BRC
G
H
I
S-NT360
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-5
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718296
AWFIA0213GB
ABS Function
INFOID:0000000001718297
• The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during
sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles.
• If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and
the ABS warning lamp turns on.
• The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III.
• During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
• Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
• Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
EBD Function
INFOID:0000000001718298
• Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels
during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which
results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
• If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and BRAKE warning lamp are turned on.
• The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III.
• During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
• Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
TCS Function
INFOID:0000000001718299
• Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS/TCS control unit using inputs from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, engine fuel cut is conducted while the throttle value is restricted to reduce the
engine torque and decrease the amount of wheel spin. In addition, the throttle opening is controlled to
achieve the optimum engine torque.
• Depending on road condition, the vehicle may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum traction has the highest priority during TCS operation.
• TCS may be activated during sudden vehicle acceleration, wide open throttle acceleration, sudden transmission shifts or when the vehicle is driven on a road with a varying surface friction coefficient.
• The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of TCS operation.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-6
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wheel Sensors
INFOID:0000000001718300
A
Each wheel sensor unit consists of a wheel hub with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The wheel sensors are installed
on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the
sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as
the wheel speed increases.
B
C
D
WFIA0033E
Fail-Safe Function
INFOID:0000000001718301
E
CAUTION:
If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/TCS system.
BRC
ABS/EBD SYSTEM
In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on.
In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the BRAKE warning lamp, ABS warning lamp and
SLIP indicator lamp will turn on.
The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function.
1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of
vehicles without ABS/TCS system.
2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same
as the condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS and EBD system.
G
H
TCS SYSTEM
I
In case of TCS system malfunction, the SLIP indicator lamp is turned on and the condition of the vehicle is the
same as the condition of vehicles without TCS system. In case of an electrical malfunction with the TCS system, the ABS control continues to operate normally without TCS control.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-7
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000001718302
WFIA0280E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-8
2008 Quest
CAN COMMUNICATION
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718303
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-9
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
INFOID:0000000001718304
INTRODUCTION
The ABS/TCS system has an electronic control unit to control major
functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and
controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of
brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out
what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/
TCS equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information.
SEF233G
SEF234G
Revision: August 2007
BRC-10
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
AWFIA0209GB
P
CLARIFY CONCERN
Revision: August 2007
BRC-11
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending
on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
• Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
• It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what
type of trouble the customer is having.
[TCS/ABS]
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
WFIA0097E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-12
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718305
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WFIA0480E
1.
Rear wheel sensor RH B122
2.
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3.
trol unit) E125 (engine removed for
clarity)
Front wheel sensor RH E117
4.
Front wheel sensor LH E18
5.
TCS OFF switch M6
Combination meter M24
7.
Rear wheel sensor LH B123
Revision: August 2007
BRC-13
6.
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718306
WFWA0407E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-14
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - TCS -
INFOID:0000000001718307
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WFWA0408E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-15
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WFWA0409E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-16
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WFWA0410E
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-17
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WFWA0411E
Basic Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718308
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION
1.
2.
Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid.
Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is
leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items.
• If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified
torque and recheck for leaks.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-18
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads,
replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks.
• When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and
recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly.
CAUTION:
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced
as an assembly.
3. Check the brake pads for excessive wear.
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION
Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make
sure the battery is sufficiently charged.
A
B
C
D
ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND TCS OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E
Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp (when TCS OFF switch
is off), turn on for approximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check the
TCS OFF indicator lamp and the TCS OFF switch. Refer to BRC-33, "Component Inspection". Check BRC
CAN communications. If there are no errors with the TCS OFF switch or the CAN communication system,
check combination meter. Refer to DI-5.
Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp
G
does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis.
With the engine running, make sure the TCS OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when the TCS OFF
switch is turned on and off. If the indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the
H
TCS OFF switch. Refer to BRC-33, "Component Inspection".
Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp turn off approximately 2
seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp or TCS OFF indicator lamp
have not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuI
ator and electric unit (control unit).
After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III
Function (ABS)".
J
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing
INFOID:0000000001718309
K
ABS
warning lamp
TCS OFF
indicator lamp
SLIP
indicator lamp
Remarks
When the ignition switch is OFF
–
–
–
–
After the ignition switch is turned
ON for approx. 1 second
×
×
×
–
After the ignition switch is turned ON
for approx. 2 seconds
–
–
–
Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds
after the engine is started.
When the TCS OFF switch is
pressed (TCS function OFF)
–
×
–
–
×
×
×
–
×
×
–
When the TCS/ABS control unit is
malfunctioning (power supply or
ground malfunction).
–
×
×
–
Condition
TCS/ABS malfunction
When the TCS is malfunctioning
L
N
O
P
X: ON
—: OFF
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
INFOID:0000000001718310
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
M
BRC-19
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited.
Data monitor
Monitor item
P POSI SIG
N POSI SIG
GEAR
Display content
A/T gear position
A/T gear position
A/T gear position
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
Wheel speed
ACCEL POS SIG
Open/close condition
of throttle valve (linked
with accelerator pedal).
ENGINE SPEED
With engine running
BATTERY VOLT
Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)
CRANKING SIG
Cranking status
STOP LAMP SW
Brake pedal operation
ABS WARN LAMP
ABS warning lamp ON
condition (Note 2)
MOTOR RELAY
Operation status of motor and motor relay
ACTUATOR RLY
SLIP LAMP
Revision: August 2007
Actuator relay operation status
SLIP indicator lamp
status (Note 3)
Condition
P position
Reference value in
normal operation
Note: Error inspection
checklist
ON
Other than P position
OFF
N position
ON
Other than N position
OFF
1st gear
1
2nd gear
2
3rd gear
3
4th gear
4
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h (MPH)]
Vehicle running (Note 1)
Almost in accordance with speedometer display
(within ±10%)
BRC-28, "Wheel Sensor
System Inspection"
Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON)
0%
Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON)
0 to 100%
BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
With engine stopped
0 rpm
Engine running
Almost in accordance with tachometer display
Ignition switch ON
10 to 16V
Cranking
ON
Not cranking
OFF
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS not activated)
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS activated)
ON
Vehicle stopped (Ignition
switch ON)
OFF
Vehicle stopped (Engine running)
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is
ON
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is
OFF
OFF
BRC-20
BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
BRC-29, "Engine System
Inspection"
BRC-32, "ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and
Ground Systems Inspection"
—
BRC-32, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
BRC-37, "ABS Warning
Lamp Does Not Come On
When Ignition Switch Is
Turned On"
BRC-31, "Actuator Motor,
Motor Relay, and Circuit
Inspection"
DI-9, "Arrangement of
Combination Meter"
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Data monitor
Monitor item
OFF LAMP
EBD WARN LAMP
OFF SW
ASCD SIGNAL
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
Display content
TCS OFF indicator
lamp status
EBD warning lamp status
TCS OFF switch
ON/OFF status
ASCD operation condition
Solenoid valve operation
TCS SIGNAL
ABS SIGNAL
EBD SIGNAL
Signal status
TCS FAIL SIG
ABS FAIL SIG
EBD FAIL SIG
Fail signal status
Note: Error inspection
checklist
A
BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
B
Reference value in
normal operation
Condition
When TCS OFF indicator
lamp is ON
ON
When TCS OFF indicator
lamp is OFF
OFF
When EBD warning lamp is ON
ON
When EBD warning lamp is
OFF
OFF
TCS OFF switch ON
(When TCS OFF indicator
lamp is ON)
BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
C
D
ON
BRC-33, "Component Inspection"
TCS OFF switch OFF
(When TCS OFF indicator
lamp is OFF)
OFF
ASCD activated
ON
ASCD not activated
OFF
Actuator (solenoid) is active
(“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (solenoid) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON).
OFF
TCS active
ABS active
EBD active
ON
TCS not active
ABS not active
EBD not active
OFF
TCS fail
ABS fail
EBD fail
OFF
ASCD and circuit
E
BRC
G
—
H
I
TCS system
ABS system
EBD system
J
TCS system
ABS system
EBD system
K
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
L
Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS function is not activated.
M
Note 3: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and TCS function is activated
while driving.
N
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS function is not activated.
Flashing: TCS function is active during driving.
O
CONSULT-III Function (ABS)
INFOID:0000000001718311
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ABS diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Revision: August 2007
P
BRC-21
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ABS diagnostic mode
Description
FUNCTION TEST
Conducted by CONSULT-III instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG".
ECU PART NUMBER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as
follows:
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the
CONSULT-III screen.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by
touching “COPY”.)
• When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and
TCS OFF indicator lamp.
7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
component.
8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
• When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH)
or more for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is
repaired.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
10. Start the engine and touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-III screen
to erase the error memory.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
CAUTION:
If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 4.
11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and
confirm that the ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn off.
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
BRC-22
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
FR LH SENSOR 1
[C1104]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open
RR RH SENSOR 1
[C1101]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open
FR RH SENSOR 1
[C1103]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open
RR LH SENSOR 1
[C1102]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open
FR LH SENSOR 2
[C1108]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR RH SENSOR 2
[C1105]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
FR RH SENSOR 2
[C1107]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR LH SENSOR 2
[C1106]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
PUMP MOTOR (Note 3)
[C1111]
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor
turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor
turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground.
Check system
B
C
D
BRC-28, "Wheel Sensor
System Inspection"
(Note 1)
G
H
I
J
BRC-30, "Solenoid Valve
System Inspection"
K
L
M
BRC-31, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection"
N
O
Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction.
BRC-32, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too
low.
BRC-32, "ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and
Ground Systems Inspection"
CONTROLLER FAILURE
[C1110]
Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
or wheel speed signal malfunction.
BRC-29, "ABS/TCS Control Unit Inspection"
BRC-23
E
BRC
STOP LAMP SW
[C1116]
Revision: August 2007
A
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
• CAN communication line is open or shorted.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction
• Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more.
BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2)
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
[C1130]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit
and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 2
[C1131]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit
and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 3
[C1132]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit
and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 4
[C1133]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit
and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 5
[C1134]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit
and ECM is abnormal.
ACTUATOR RLY
[C1140]
ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction.
BRC-29, "Engine System
Inspection"
BRC-31, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection"
Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power
supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check.
Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for
CAN communication line first.
Note 3: "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results indicates a malfunction of the actuator
motor relay or circuit.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector.
Touch “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-III screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
From the “DATA MONITOR” screen, touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION
FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information.
When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
GEAR
×
×
×
Gear position judged by PNP switch
signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
(V)
×
×
×
Voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
ACCEL POS SIG
(%)
×
–
×
Throttle valve open/close status
judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-24
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
A
ENGINE SPEED
(rpm)
×
×
×
Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
B
STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
SLIP LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
OFF LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
OFF SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
TCS OFF switch (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS actuator relay signal (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
EBD WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
P POSI SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
N POSI SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
CRANKING SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Ignition switch START position signal input status is displayed.
TCS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-25
2008 Quest
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Data monitor item selection
Item
(Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
TCS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ASCD SIG
–
–
×
ASCD (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
×: Applicable
–: Not applicable
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Do not perform active test while driving.
• Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
• The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test.
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect the CONSULT-III to the data link connector and start the engine.
Touch “ABS”.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
The “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
6.
7.
With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”.
The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test.
Solenoid Valve Operation Chart
ABS solenoid valve
Operation
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACTUATOR UP
ACTUATOR KEEP
FR RH SOL
FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH SOL
FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH SOL
RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH SOL
RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
NOTE:
• If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
• After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6.
ABS Motor
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below.
Operation
ON
OFF
ABS actuator relay
ON
ON
ABS motor relay
ON
OFF
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
BRC-26
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-27
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Wheel Sensor System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718312
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK TIRES
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
4.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5,
"On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0105E
6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
BRC-28
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel sensor
harness connector.
Wheel sensor
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Connector
Terminal
27
Front LH
23
12
Front RH
E125
Rear LH
Rear RH
21
30
26
15
11
Wheel sensor
Connector
E18
E117
B123
B122
Continuity
A
B
Terminal
1
C
2
1
2
1
Yes
D
2
E
1
2
OK or NG
BRC
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
G
Engine System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718313
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
H
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
I
Self-diagnosis results
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
J
ENGINE SIGNAL 2
ENGINE SIGNAL 3
K
ENGINE SIGNAL 4
ENGINE SIGNAL 5
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
L
2.ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION
M
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
N
O
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718314
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
P
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
CONTROLLER FAILURE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
Revision: August 2007
BRC-29
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check all wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-28, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS Actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Solenoid Valve System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718315
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
FR LH IN ABS SOL
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
RR RH IN ABS SOL
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
FR RH IN ABS SOL
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RR LH IN ABS SOL
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND
1.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
2
Body
ground
—
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
WFIA0475E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-30
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
3
4
Body
ground
—
—
[TCS/ABS]
A
Measured value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection
B
C
WFIA0476E
D
E
INFOID:0000000001718316
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
BRC
1.CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
G
Self-diagnosis results
PUMP MOTOR
H
ACTUATOR RLY
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
I
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
J
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
K
3. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM
1.
L
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 and body ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
1
Body
ground
—
M
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
N
O
WFIA0106E
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-31
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
4
Body
ground
—
[TCS/ABS]
Measured
value
(Approx.)
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection
WFIA0477E
INFOID:0000000001718317
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
STOP LAMP SW
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3.STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and check the voltage between the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 8
and ground.
8 - Ground
Brake pedal depressed
: Battery voltage
(approx. 12V)
Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection
WFIA0478E
INFOID:0000000001718318
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-32
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
Self-diagnosis results
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
B
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
C
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
D
3.ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
E
Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125
and ground.
Signal name
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
connector E125
Power supply
16
Ground
Ground
Measured value
BRC
G
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
3
—
4
H
Continuity should exist.
I
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
CAN Communication System Inspection
J
INFOID:0000000001718319
K
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check
the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnosis results, and refer to LAN-38.
NO
>> Connector terminal connection is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Component Inspection
L
M
N
INFOID:0000000001718320
TCS OFF SWITCH
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-33
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
1-2
: Continuity should exist when pushing the
switch.
Continuity should not exist when releasing
the switch.
WFIA0157E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-34
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS Works Frequently
A
INFOID:0000000001718321
B
1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
C
D
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
• Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
• Wheel sensors for physical damage
• Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
E
BRC
3.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
G
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BR-13, "Inspection".
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection".
Unexpected Pedal Action
H
I
J
K
INFOID:0000000001718322
L
1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
M
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
N
2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke.
Is pedal stroke excessive?
YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic
Inspection".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
O
P
SBR540A
Revision: August 2007
BRC-35
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE
1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
• Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
• Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in
electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN-38.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection".
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
• Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
• Wheel sensors for physical damage
• Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector. Then retest.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Long Stopping Distance
INFOID:0000000001718323
1.CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
• Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
• Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in
electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN-38.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently".
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection".
ABS Does Not Work
INFOID:0000000001718324
CAUTION:
The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation.
• Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
NG
>> Go to BRC-37, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On".
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise
INFOID:0000000001718325
NOTE:
During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Revision: August 2007
BRC-36
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom occur only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
[TCS/ABS]
A
B
2.RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on?
YES
NO
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently".
C
D
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
INFOID:0000000001718326
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSIBLE LINKS
E
BRC
Check 40A fusible link f and 40A fusible link l for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link
layout, refer to PG-3.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 1 and ground and terminal 2 and
ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
G
H
I
J
K
WFIA0479E
L
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 3 and ground and terminal 4 and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
M
N
O
WFIA0476E
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
INFOID:0000000001718327
1.CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis?
Revision: August 2007
BRC-37
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
NO
>> Refer to DI-23.
Vehicle Jerks During TCS Activation
[TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000001718328
1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION
Perform data monitor with CONSULT-III for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform TCM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the
terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
6.CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION
Check the CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-38.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-38.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-38
2008 Quest
WHEEL SENSORS
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHEEL SENSORS
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718329
B
C
D
E
BRC
WFIA0146E
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
• When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative.
CAUTION:
• Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
• Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the bolt to
the specified torque.
- Before installing wheel sensor, make sure no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) are adhered
to the pick-up part of the sensor, to the inside of the sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting
surface.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-39
2008 Quest
SENSOR ROTOR
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718330
NOTE:
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to
RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to
RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
BRC-40
2008 Quest
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718331
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
WFIA0416E
1.
To left front
2.
To rear right
3.
4.
To front right
5.
From the master cylinder secondary side 6.
7.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
8.
Actuator harness connector
K
To rear left
From the master cylinder primary
side
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid".
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION:
• To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
Remove the bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Refer to BR-11 when connecting the brake tubes.
CAUTION:
To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
• Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-41
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
Revision: August 2007
BRC-42
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001718332
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
D
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
BRC
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
H
Precaution for Brake System
INFOID:0000000001718333
CAUTION:
• Refer to MA-11 for recommended brake fluid.
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
• Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
• If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled
without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a
defect exists.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work.
• Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at
SBR686C
very low mileage.
Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing" (front disc brake) or BR-37, "Brake Burnishing" (rear disc brake).
WARNING:
• Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Precaution for Brake Control
J
K
L
M
N
O
INFOID:0000000001718335
• During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
• Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine
compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
• Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
Revision: August 2007
I
BRC-43
2008 Quest
P
PRECAUTIONS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer
(what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis.
Besides electrical system inspection, check booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks.
• If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
• If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or
error.
• If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits or improper wiring.
• If the following components are replaced with non-genuine components or modified, the VDC OFF indicator
lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on or the VDC system may not operate properly. Components
related to suspension (shock absorbers, struts, springs, bushings, etc.), tires, wheels (exclude specified
size), components related to brake system (pads, rotors, calipers, etc.), components related to engine (muffler, ECM, etc.), components related to body reinforcement (roll bar, tower bar, etc.).
• Driving with broken or excessively worn suspension components, tires or brake system components may
cause the VDC OFF indicator lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp to turn on, and the VDC system may not
operate properly.
• When the TCS or VDC is activated by sudden acceleration or sudden turn, some noise may occur. The
noise is a result of the normal operation of the TCS and VDC.
• When driving on roads which have extreme slopes (such as mountainous roads) or high banks (such as
sharp curves on a freeway), the VDC may not operate normally, or the VDC warning lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp may turn on. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the engine.
• Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. with VDC turned off may cause the yaw
rate/side G sensor to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after
restarting the engine.
Precaution for CAN System
•
•
•
•
INFOID:0000000001718336
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured.
Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V.
Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable.
Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape.
Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in).
PKIA0306E
• Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is
bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-44
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718337
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991J0070
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors
B
C
D
E
WFIA0101E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718338
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
BRC
G
H
I
S-NT360
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-45
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Component
INFOID:0000000001718339
AWFIA0214GB
ABS Function
INFOID:0000000001718340
• The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during
sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles.
• If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and
the ABS warning lamp turns on.
• The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III.
• During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
• Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
• Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
EBD Function
INFOID:0000000001718341
• Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels
during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which
results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
• If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and BRAKE warning lamp are turned on.
• The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III.
• During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is
normal.
• Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from
engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-46
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TCS Function
INFOID:0000000001718342
A
• Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS/TCS/VDC control unit using inputs from the wheel
speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, the drive wheel right and left brake fluid pressure control and engine
fuel cut are conducted while the throttle value is restricted to reduce the engine torque and decrease the
amount of wheel spin. In addition, the throttle opening is controlled to achieve the optimum engine torque.
• Depending on road condition, the vehicle may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum traction has the highest priority during TCS operation.
• TCS may be activated during sudden vehicle acceleration, wide open throttle acceleration, sudden transmission shifts or when the vehicle is driven on a road with a varying surface friction coefficient.
• The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of TCS operation.
VDC Function
INFOID:0000000001718343
B
C
D
• In addition to the ABS/TCS function, the driver steering amount and brake operation amount are detected
from the steering angle sensor and pressure sensor, and the vehicle's driving status (amount of under steer- E
ing/over steering) is determined using inputs from the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, wheel speed sensors,
etc. and this information is used to improve vehicle stability by controlling the braking and engine torque
application to the wheels.
BRC
• The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of VDC operation.
• During VDC operation, the vehicle body and brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be
heard. This is normal.
• The ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on when the vehicle is G
subject to strong shaking or large vibration, such as when the vehicle is on a turn table or a ship while the
engine is running or on a steep slope. In this case, restart the engine on a normal road and if the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn off, there is no problem.
H
Wheel Sensors
INFOID:0000000001718344
Each wheel sensor unit consists of a wheel hub with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The wheel sensors are installed
on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the
sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as
the wheel speed increases.
I
J
K
WFIA0033E
Fail-Safe Function
L
INFOID:0000000001718345
CAUTION:
If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/TCS/VDC system.
M
ABS/EBD SYSTEM
In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP
indicator lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the BRAKE warning lamp,
ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on.
The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function.
1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of
vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC system.
2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same
as the condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC or EBD system.
VDC/TCS SYSTEM
In case of TCS/VDC system malfunction, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp are turned on
and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without TCS/VDC system. In case of
an electrical malfunction with the TCS/VDC system, the ABS continues to operate normally without TCS/VDC
control.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-47
2008 Quest
N
O
P
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000001718346
WFIA0281E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-48
2008 Quest
CAN COMMUNICATION
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718347
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-49
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
INFOID:0000000001718348
INTRODUCTION
The ABS/TCS/VDC system has an electronic control unit to control
major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors
and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of
brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS/VDC complaint. The
customer is a very good source of information on such problems,
especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer,
find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they
occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/
TCS/VDC equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for
information.
SEF233G
SEF234G
Revision: August 2007
BRC-50
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
AWFIA0205GB
P
CLARIFY CONCERN
Revision: August 2007
BRC-51
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending
on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
• Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
• It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what
type of trouble the customer is having.
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
WFIA0097E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-52
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718349
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WFIA0481E
1.
Rear wheel sensor RH B122
Revision: August 2007
2.
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3.
trol unit) E125 (engine removed for
clarity)
BRC-53
Front wheel sensor RH E117
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.
Front wheel sensor LH E18
7.
Spiral cable (includes steering angle 8.
senor) M47 (steering wheel removed
for clarity)
5.
Combination meter M24
6.
VDC OFF switch M6
Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor B125
9.
Rear wheel sensor LH B123
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718350
WFWA0412E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-54
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - VDC -
INFOID:0000000001718351
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WFWA0413E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-55
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WFWA0414E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-56
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WFWA0415E
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-57
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WFWA0416E
Revision: August 2007
BRC-58
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WFWA0417E
Basic Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718352
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION
1.
2.
Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid.
Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is
leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items.
• If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified
torque and recheck for leaks.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-59
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads,
replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks.
• When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and
recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly.
CAUTION:
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced
as an assembly.
3. Check the brake pads for excessive wear.
POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION
Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make
sure the battery is sufficiently charged.
ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp (when VDC OFF switch
is off), turn on for approximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check the
VDC OFF indicator lamp and the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-79, "Component Inspection". Check
CAN communications. If there are no errors with the VDC OFF switch or CAN communication system,
check combination meter. Refer to DI-5.
Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp
does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis.
With the engine running, make sure the VDC OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when the VDC OFF
switch is turned on and off. If the indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the
VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-79, "Component Inspection".
Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp turn off approximately 2
seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp or VDC OFF indicator lamp
have not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III
Function (ABS)".
Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing
INFOID:0000000001718353
ABS
warning lamp
VDC OFF
indicator lamp
SLIP
indicator lamp
Remarks
When the ignition switch is OFF
–
–
–
–
After the ignition switch is turned ON
for approx. 1 second
×
×
×
–
After the ignition switch is turned ON
for approx. 2 seconds
–
–
–
Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds
after the engine is started.
When the VDC OFF switch is
pressed (VDC function OFF)
–
×
–
–
×
×
×
–
×
×
–
When the ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction).
–
×
×
–
Condition
ABS/TCS/VDC malfunction
When the VDC is malfunctioning
X: ON
—: OFF
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
INFOID:0000000001718354
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
BRC-60
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited.
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display content
P POSI SIG
A/T gear position
N POSI SIG
A/T gear position
GEAR
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
ACCEL POS SIG
A/T gear position
Wheel speed
Open/close condition
of throttle valve (linked
with accelerator pedal).
Condition
Reference value in
normal operation
ON
Other than P position
OFF
N position
ON
Other than N position
OFF
1st gear
1
2nd gear
2
3rd gear
3
4th gear
4
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h (MPH)]
Vehicle running (Note 1)
Almost in accordance with speedometer display
(within ±10%)
BRC-70, "Wheel Sensor
System Inspection"
Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON)
0%
Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON)
0 to 100%
BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
With engine stopped
0 rpm
BRC-71, "Engine System
Inspection"
I
Engine running
Almost in accordance with tachometer display
BRC-72, "Steering Angle
Sensor System Inspection"
J
With engine running
Steering angle detected by steering angle
sensor
Straight-ahead
Approx. 0 deg
STR ANGLE SIG
Steering wheel turned
–756 to 756 deg
YAW RATE SEN
Yaw rate detected by
yaw rate sensor
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 d/s
Vehicle running
–100 to 100 d/s
Transverse G detected
by side G-sensor
Vehicle stopped
SIDE G-SENSOR
Approx. 0 m/s2
Vehicle running
–16.7 to 16.7 m/s2
BATTERY VOLT
CRANKING SIG
Cranking status
STOP LAMP SW
Brake pedal operation
OFF SW
ABS WARN LAMP
Revision: August 2007
VDC OFF switch
ON/OFF status
ABS warning lamp ON
condition (Note 2)
B
P position
ENGINE SPEED
Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)
Note: Error inspection
checklist
A
Ignition switch ON
10 to 16V
Cranking
ON
Not cranking
OFF
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
VDC OFF switch ON
(When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is ON)
ON
VDC OFF switch OFF
(When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is OFF)
OFF
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
BRC-61
C
BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
D
E
BRC
G
H
K
BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/Side/
Decel G Sensor System
Inspection"
L
BRC-77, "ABS/TCS/VDC
Control Unit Power and
Ground Systems Inspection"
M
—
N
BRC-76, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
BRC-79, "Component Inspection"
BRC-82, "ABS Warning
Lamp Does Not Come On
When Ignition Switch Is
Turned On"
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display content
EBD WARN LAMP
EBD warning lamp status
MOTOR RELAY
Operation status of motor and motor relay
ACTUATOR RLY
OFF LAMP
SLIP LAMP
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
CV1
CV2
SV1
SV2
Actuator relay operation status
VDC OFF indicator
lamp status (Note 3)
SLIP indicator lamp
status (Note 4)
Solenoid valve operation
VDC switch-over valve
status
DECEL G-SEN
Longitudinal acceleration detected by Decel
G-Sensor
FLUID LEV SW
ON/OFF status of
brake fluid level switch
STOP LAMP SW2
Revision: August 2007
ASCD operation condition
Condition
Reference value in
normal operation
When EBD warning lamp is ON
ON
When EBD warning lamp is
OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS not activated)
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS activated)
ON
Vehicle stopped (Ignition
switch ON)
OFF
Vehicle stopped (Engine running)
ON
When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is ON
ON
When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is OFF
OFF
When SLIP indicator lamp is
ON
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is
OFF
OFF
Actuator (solenoid) is active
(“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (solenoid) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON).
OFF
When actuator (switch-over
valve) is active (“ACTIVE
TEST” with CONSULT-III) or
actuator relay is inactive (when
in fail-safe mode).
ON
When actuator (switch-over
valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition
switch ON).
OFF
Vehicle stopped
ON
Vehicle running
OFF
When brake fluid level switch
ON
ON
When brake fluid level switch
OFF
OFF
ASCD activated
ON
ASCD not activated
OFF
BRC-62
Note: Error inspection
checklist
BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
BRC-75, "Actuator Motor,
Motor Relay, and Circuit
Inspection"
BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection"
BRC-74, "Solenoid and
VDC Change-Over Valve
System Inspection"
BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/Side/
Decel G Sensor System
Inspection"
DI-23
ASCD and circuit
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Data monitor
Monitor item
VDC SIGNAL
TCS SIGNAL
ABS SIGNAL
EBD SIGNAL
VDC FAIL SIG
TCS FAIL SIG
ABS FAIL SIG
EBD FAIL SIG
Display content
Signal status
Fail signal status
Condition
VDC active
TCS active
ABS active
EBD active
VDC not active
TCS not active
ABS not active
EBD not active
VDC fail
TCS fail
ABS fail
EBD fail
Note: Error inspection
checklist
Reference value in
normal operation
ON
OFF
ON
A
B
VDC system
TCS system
ABS system
EBD system
C
D
VDC system
TCS system
ABS system
EBD system
E
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp
BRC
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not
activated.
Note 3: ON/OFF timing of VDC OFF indicator lamp
G
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and VDC OFF switch is ON.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation.) And when VDC OFF switch is
OFF.
Note 4: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and TCS/VDC function is activated while driving.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not
activated.
H
I
Flashing: TCS/VDC function is active during driving
J
CONSULT-III Function (ABS)
INFOID:0000000001718355
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
K
ABS diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
ECU PART NUMBER
M
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
FUNCTION TEST
N
Conducted by CONSULT-III instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG".
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
O
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as
follows:
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
Revision: August 2007
L
BRC-63
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the
CONSULT-III screen.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by
touching “COPY”.)
• When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and
VDC OFF indicator lamp.
7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
component.
8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
• When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH)
or more for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is
repaired.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
10. Start the engine and touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-III screen
to erase the error memory.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
CAUTION:
If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 4.
11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and
confirm that the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp, and VDC OFF indicator lamp turn off.
Display Item List
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
FR LH SENSOR 1
[C1104]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open
RR RH SENSOR 1
[C1101]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open
FR RH SENSOR 1
[C1103]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open
RR LH SENSOR 1
[C1102]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open
FR LH SENSOR 2
[C1108]
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR RH SENSOR 2
[C1105]
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
FR RH SENSOR 2
[C1107]
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR LH SENSOR 2
[C1106]
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot
identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
STOP LAMP SW 1
[C1116]
Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction.
BRC-76, "Stop Lamp
Switch System Inspection"
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
[C1143, C1163]
Neutral position of steering angle sensor is dislocated, or steering
angle sensor is malfunctioning.
BRC-72, "Steering Angle
Sensor System Inspection"
YAW RATE SENSOR
[C1145]
Yaw rate sensor has generated an error, or yaw rate sensor signal
line is open or shorted.
BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
Revision: August 2007
BRC-64
BRC-70, "Wheel Sensor
System Inspection"
(Note 1)
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
CV1
[C1164]
Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
CV2
[C1165]
Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or
shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
SV1
[C1166]
Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open
or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
SV2
[C1167]
Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open
or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or
ground.
PUMP MOTOR (Note 3)
[C1111]
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor
turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor
turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground.
Check system
A
B
C
D
BRC-74, "Solenoid and
VDC Change-Over Valve
System Inspection"
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection"
K
BRC-77, "ABS/TCS/VDC
Control Unit Power and
Ground Systems Inspection"
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too
low.
ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
[C1144]
Neutral position correction of steering angle sensor is not finished.
ST ANG SEN COM CIR
[C1156]
CAN communication line or steering angle sensor has generated
an error.
LONGITUDINAL G-SENSOR
[C1113]
Longitudinal G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of longitudinal G-sensor is open or shorted.
BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
CONTROLLER FAILURE
[C1110]
Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
or wheel speed signal malfunction.
BRC-71, "ABS/TCS/VDC
Control Unit Inspection"
O
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
• CAN communication line is open or shorted.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction
• Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more.
BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2)
P
LATERAL G-SENSOR
[C1146]
Lateral G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of lateral G-sensor is open or shorted.
BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/
Side/Decel G Sensor
System Inspection"
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
[C1155]
Brake fluid level drops or circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is shorted.
BRC-78, "Brake Fluid
Level Switch System Inspection"
Revision: August 2007
BRC-65
BRC-72, "Steering Angle
Sensor System Inspection"
2008 Quest
L
M
N
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-diagnostic item
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
[C1130]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 2
[C1131]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 3
[C1132]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 4
[C1133]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 5
[C1134]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit and ECM is abnormal.
ENGINE SIGNAL 6
[C1136]
ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control
unit and ECM is abnormal.
ACTUATOR RLY
[C1140]
ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction.
BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection"
STOP LAMP SW 2
[C1176]
ASCD brake switch or circuit malfunction.
ACS-2
BRC-71, "Engine System
Inspection"
Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power
supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check.
Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for
CAN communication line first.
Note 3: "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator
motor relay or circuit.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector.
Touch “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-III screen.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
From the “DATA MONITOR” screen, touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION
FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information.
When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
GEAR
×
×
×
Gear position judged by PNP switch
signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
(km/h, MPH)
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
(V)
×
×
×
Voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
ACCEL POS SIG
(%)
×
–
×
Throttle valve open/close status
judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-66
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
A
ENGINE SPEED
(rpm)
×
×
×
Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
B
STR ANGLE SIG
(deg)
×
–
×
Steering angle detected by steering
angle sensor is displayed.
YAW RATE SEN
(d/s)
×
×
×
Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor is displayed.
DECEL G-SEN
(d/s)
×
×
×
Longitudinal acceleration detected
by decel G-sensor is displayed.
×
–
×
Transverse acceleration detected
by side G-sensor is displayed.
STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
OFF SW
(ON/OFF)
×
×
×
VDC OFF switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
SLIP LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
SIDE G-SENSOR
(m/s2)
FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
OFF LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
VDC OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF)
–
×
×
ABS actuator relay signal (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
EBD WARN LAMP
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
P POSI SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
N POSI SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
CRANKING SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Ignition switch START position signal input status is displayed.
CV1
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Primary side switch-over solenoid
valve (cut valve) (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-67
2008 Quest
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
(Unit)
Data monitor item selection
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
CV2
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Secondary side switch-over solenoid valve (cut-valve) (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
SV1
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Primary side switch-over solenoid
valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
SV2
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
Secondary side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
VDC FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
VDC fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
TCS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
EBD FAIL SIG
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
FLUID LEV SW
(ON/OFF)
×
–
×
Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
TCS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
VDC SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
–
–
×
VDC operation (ON/OFF) status is
displayed.
STOP LAMP SW2
–
–
×
ASCD (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
×: Applicable
–: Not applicable
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Do not perform active test while driving.
• Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
• The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test.
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect the CONSULT-III to the data link connector and start the engine.
Touch “ABS”.
If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
The “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
6.
7.
With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”.
The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test.
Solenoid Valve Operation Chart
Revision: August 2007
BRC-68
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ABS solenoid valve
Operation
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACTUATOR UP
ACTUATOR KEEP
FR RH SOL
FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH SOL
FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
FR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH SOL
RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH SOL
RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT)
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
A
B
C
D
E
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
NOTE:
• If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
• After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6.
BRC
G
ABS Motor
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below.
H
Operation
ON
OFF
ABS actuator relay
ON
ON
ABS motor relay
ON
OFF
I
NOTE:
• If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal.
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-69
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Wheel Sensor System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718356
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code.
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK TIRES
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
4.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5,
"On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel sensor harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-70
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wheel sensor
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Connector
Terminal
13
Front LH
14
27
Front RH
26
E125
29
Rear LH
28
11
Rear RH
12
A
Wheel sensor
Connector
E18
E117
B123
B122
Continuity
Terminal
B
1
2
1
2
1
C
Yes
2
D
1
2
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation".
BRC
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Engine System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718357
G
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
H
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
I
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
ENGINE SIGNAL 2
J
ENGINE SIGNAL 3
ENGINE SIGNAL 4
ENGINE SIGNAL 5
K
ENGINE SIGNAL 6
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
L
2.ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION
M
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection
N
INFOID:0000000001718358
O
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
P
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
CONTROLLER FAILURE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
Revision: August 2007
BRC-71
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check all wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-70, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS Actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718359
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
ST ANG SEN COM CIR
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.DATA MONITOR CHECK
Conduct “Data Monitor” of the “STR ANGLE SIG” to check if the status is normal.
Steering condition
Data monitor
Straight-ahead
-5deg - +5deg
Turn wheel 90° to the right.
Approx. +90°
Turn wheel 90° to the left.
Approx. -90°
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and steering angle sensor
M47.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
4. CHECKING STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-72
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check voltage between steering angle sensor connector M47
and ground.
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
Terminals
(+)
Steering angle sensor
connector
Terminal
(-)
Measured
value
(Approx.)
B
C
1
M47
3
Ground
12V
12V
WFIA0398E
D
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check resistance between steering angle sensor connector M47
and ground.
E
Terminals
(-)
Measured
value Ω
(Approx.)
Ground
0Ω
(+)
Steering angle sensor
connector
Terminal
M47
2
BRC
G
OK or NG
WFIA0399E
OK
>> Check the CAN communication system. Refer to BRC78, "CAN Communication System Inspection". If the CAN communication system is OK, replace
spiral cable (steering angle sensor) and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to
BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection
H
I
INFOID:0000000001718360
J
CAUTION:
Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. when VDC function is OFF may
cause the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor system to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal
operation can be resumed after restarting the engine.
K
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
L
Check self-diagnosis results.
M
Self-diagnosis results
YAW RATE SENSOR
LONGITUDINAL G-SENSOR
N
LATERAL G-SENSOR
CAUTION:
If vehicle is on turntable at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indicator
lamp may illuminate and CONSULT-II self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system malfunction.
However, in this case there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off turntable or
other moving surface, and start engine. Results will return to normal.
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and yaw rate/side/decel G sensor
connector B125.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-73
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
3.YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR HARNESS INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125 and ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and the
yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125.
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor
trol unit) connector E125
connector B125
19
1
36
2
35
3
34
4
4
5
6
6
Continuity
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
4.YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
Connect the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125.
Use “Data Monitor” to check if the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor signals are normal.
Vehicle status
YAW RATE SEN
(Data monitor standard)
SIDE G-SENSOR
(Data monitor standard)
DECEL G-SEN
(Data monitor standard)
When stopped
-4 to +4 deg/s
-1.1 to +1.1 m/s2
-0.11 G to +0.11 G
Right turn
Negative value
Negative value
-
Left turn
Positive value
Positive value
-
Speed up
-
-
Negative value
Speed down
-
-
Positive value
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-90, "Removal and Installation".
Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718361
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
FR LH IN ABS SOL
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
Revision: August 2007
BRC-74
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-diagnosis results
A
RR RH IN ABS SOL
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
FR RH IN ABS SOL
B
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RR LH IN ABS SOL
C
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
CV 1
CV 2
D
SV 1
SV 2
E
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
BRC
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
G
H
3. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND
1.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
16
Body
ground
—
I
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
J
K
WFIA0111E
2.
L
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground.
M
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
31
46
Body
ground
—
—
Measured value Ω
(Approx.)
0Ω
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection
N
O
WFIA0112E
P
INFOID:0000000001718362
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Revision: August 2007
BRC-75
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
PUMP MOTOR
ACTUATOR RLY
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM
1.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
1
Body
ground
—
Measured
value
(Approx.)
12V
WFIA0106E
2.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
connector E125
46
Body
ground
—
Measured
value
(Approx.)
0Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection
WFIA0113E
INFOID:0000000001718363
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
STOP LAMP SW 1
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-76
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
A
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3.STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION
Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 23 and ground.
B
C
D
23 - Ground
Brake pedal depressed
E
: Battery voltage
(approx. 12V)
Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V
BRC
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results
appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0114E
G
ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718364
H
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
I
Check self-diagnosis results.
J
Self-diagnosis results
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
K
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
L
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
M
N
3.ABS/TCS/VDC CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125
and ground.
Signal name
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
connector E125
Power supply
45
Ground
31
Ground
Measured value
P
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
—
46
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
BRC-77
O
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
INFOID:0000000001718365
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
1.
2.
Check the brake fluid reservoir fluid level. If the level is low, add brake fluid.
Erase the self-diagnosis results and check the self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.
2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and brake fluid level switch
connector E21.
2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3.CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH AND THE ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check the continuity between the brake fluid level switch connector E21 and the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125.
ABS actuator and elec- Brake fluid level switch
tric unit (control unit)
connector E21
connector E125
38
+
38
Ground
Ground
-
Continuity
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should not exist.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
Check continuity between brake fluid level switch terminals + and -.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace brake fluid level switch.
CAN Communication System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718366
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
Revision: August 2007
BRC-78
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check
the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnosis results, and refer to LAN-38.
NO
>> Connector terminal connection is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718367
A
B
C
VDC OFF SWITCH
D
Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
1-2
: Continuity should exist when pushing the
switch.
Continuity should not exist when releasing
the switch.
E
BRC
PFIA0307E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-79
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS Works Frequently
INFOID:0000000001718368
1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
• Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
• Wheel sensors for physical damage
• Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
3.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BR-13, "Inspection".
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection".
Unexpected Pedal Action
INFOID:0000000001718369
1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke.
Is pedal stroke excessive?
YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic
Inspection".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
SBR540A
Revision: August 2007
BRC-80
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE
A
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
• Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
• Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN38.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection".
B
C
D
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
Check the following.
E
• Wheel sensor mounting for looseness
• Wheel sensors for physical damage
• Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections
BRC
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
G
connector. Then retest.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Long Stopping Distance
INFOID:0000000001718370
1.CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
H
I
1.
2.
Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Drive vehicle and check brake operation.
NOTE:
• Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
• Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs
in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN38.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to BRC-80, "ABS Works Frequently".
NG
>> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection".
ABS Does Not Work
J
K
L
INFOID:0000000001718371
M
CAUTION:
The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
N
1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation.
• Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
NG
>> Go to BRC-82, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On".
Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise
INFOID:0000000001718372
NOTE:
During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-81
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom occur only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on?
YES
NO
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-80, "ABS Works Frequently".
ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
INFOID:0000000001718373
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSIBLE LINKS
Check 40A fusible link f and 40A fusible link l for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link
layout, refer to PG-3.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 1 and ground and terminal 16 and
ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
WFIA0116E
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector terminal 31 and ground and terminal 46 and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
WFIA0112E
ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
INFOID:0000000001718374
1.CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Revision: August 2007
BRC-82
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis?
YES >> Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
NO
>> Refer to DI-23.
Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
A
B
INFOID:0000000001718375
C
1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
2.ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION
Perform data monitor with CONSULT-III for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
BRC
G
3.ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
H
I
4.TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform TCM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
J
K
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the
terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
6.CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION
Check the CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-38.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-38.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-83
2008 Quest
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
INFOID:0000000001718376
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to
adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE:
Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-III.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
2. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
3. Touch “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ST ANGLE SENSOR
ADJUSTMENT” on CONSULT-III screen in this order.
BBIA0336E
4.
Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.)
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop.
8. Select “DATA MONITOR”, “SELECTION FROM MENU”, and “STR ANGLE SIG” on CONSULT-III screen.
Then check that “STR ANGLE SIG” is within 0±2.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1
to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-84
2008 Quest
WHEEL SENSORS
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHEEL SENSORS
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718377
B
C
D
E
BRC
WFIA0146E
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
• When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative.
CAUTION:
• Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
• Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the bolt to
the specified torque.
- Before installing wheel sensor, make sure no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) are adhered
to the pick-up part of the sensor, to the inside of the sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting
surface.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-85
2008 Quest
SENSOR ROTOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718378
NOTE:
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to
RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to
RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
BRC-86
2008 Quest
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718379
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
WFIA0416E
K
1. To left front
2. To rear right
3. To rear left
4. To front right
5. From the master cylinder secondary
side
6. From the master cylinder primary side
7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
8. Actuator harness connector
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid".
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION:
• To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
Remove the bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Refer to BR-11 when connecting the brake tubes.
CAUTION:
To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
• Always tighten brake tubes to specified torque when installing.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-87
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new
brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System".
Revision: August 2007
BRC-88
2008 Quest
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000003297118
REMOVAL
1.
2.
B
Remove the spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the
steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2).
C
D
E
ALFIA0123ZZ
CAUTION:
In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust
position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position".
INSTALLATION
1.
BRC
G
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
BRC-89
2008 Quest
G SENSOR
[VDC/TCS/ABS]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718381
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove center console lower cover. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION:
• Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/
decel G sensor.
• Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/
decel G sensor.
WFIA0485E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification.
CAUTION:
• Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Revision: August 2007
BRC-90
2008 Quest
ENGINE
SECTION
CO
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A
CO
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
RADIATOR ........................................................ 16
Removal and Installation .........................................16
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 2
COOLING FAN .................................................. 18
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Removal and Installation .........................................19
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
Removal and Installation .........................................18
Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan ...........18
WATER PUMP .................................................. 19
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING .................................................................... 24
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 6
Troubleshooting Chart ............................................... 6
G
H
I
Removal and Installation .........................................24
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING .......... 26
COOLING SYSTEM ............................................ 8
Cooling Circuit ........................................................... 8
Schematic ................................................................. 9
F
J
Removal and Installation .........................................26
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 27
ENGINE COOLANT ...........................................10
K
Standard and Limit ..................................................27
System Inspection ................................................... 10
Changing Engine Coolant ....................................... 11
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001717142
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Liquid Gasket
INFOID:0000000001717143
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
using the Tool and remove the sealant.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to
lightly tap (1) the Tool where the sealant is applied. Use a plastic
hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the side.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed
screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the mating
surfaces.
• Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the mating
surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove all adhering
moisture, grease and foreign material.
Attach the sealant tube to Tool.
• Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
PBIC0003E
Revision: August 2007
CO-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions using Tool.
Tool number
: WS39930000 (
–
A
)
CO
C
WBIA0567E
D
• If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove.
• As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the
holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be applied
outside the holes.
• Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating
component.
• If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Do not retighten after the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
E
F
G
SEM159F
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717144
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing oil pan and timing chain case
S-NT046
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
WS39930000
(
–
)
Tube presser
S-NT052
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester adapter
S-NT564
For refilling engine cooling system
KV991J0070
(J-45695)
Coolant refill tool
LMA053
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
KV991J0010
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
WBIA0539E
Commercial Service Tool
Revision: August 2007
INFOID:0000000001717145
CO-4
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
A
CO
C
PBIC0190E
Radiator cap tester
Checking radiator and radiator cap
D
E
PBIC1982E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-5
2008 Quest
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000001717146
Symptom
Poor heat transfer
Check items
Water pump malfunction
Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed
Coolant circulation
Damaged fins
Dust contamination or paper clogging
—
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling
tube
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow
High resistance to fan rotation
Fan assembly
—
Radiator shroud
—
Damaged fan blades
Cooling system parts
malfunction
Damaged radiator shroud
—
Improper coolant mixture
ratio
—
Poor coolant quality
—
—
Coolant viscosity
—
Cooling hose
Heater pump
Water pump
Radiator cap
Coolant leaks
Loose clamp
Cracked hose
Poor sealing
Loose
Poor sealing
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting
Insufficient coolant
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank
Overflowing reservoir tank
Revision: August 2007
CO-6
Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system
Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket deterioration
2008 Quest
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Abusive driving
Driving in low gear for extended time
A
CO
Driving at extremely high
speed
—
Overload on engine
Except cooling system
parts malfunction
C
Powertrain system malfunction
Installed improper size
wheels and tires
—
D
Dragging brakes
Improper ignition timing
Blocked radiator grille
Blocked or restricted air
flow
Blocked bumper
Mud contamination or paper
clogging
Blocked radiator
E
Installed car brassiere
—
F
Blocked condenser
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-7
2008 Quest
COOLING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling Circuit
INFOID:0000000001717147
WBIA0494E
1.
Cylinder block (RH)
2. Oil cooler
3. Cylinder head (RH)
4.
Water pump
5. Radiator
6. Water inlet
7.
Thermostat
8. Cylinder head (LH)
9. Cylinder block (LH)
10. Heater pump
Revision: August 2007
CO-8
2008 Quest
COOLING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001717148
A
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0332E
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-9
2008 Quest
ENGINE COOLANT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE COOLANT
System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717149
WARNING:
• Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
• Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
Check hoses for the following:
• Improper attachment
• Leaks
• Cracks
• Damage
• Loose connections
• Chafing
• Deterioration
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
• Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when
the engine is cool.
• Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little.
SMA412B
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using
Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Testing pressure
: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from
the radiator.
CAUTION:
Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
WBIA0568E
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
1.
Inspect the radiator cap.
• Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
• Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or
the metal retainer.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
Revision: August 2007
CO-10
2008 Quest
ENGINE COOLANT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Pull the negative-pressure valve to open it and check that it
closes completely when released.
• Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the
radiator cap negative-pressure valve.
• Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing conditions of the negative-pressure valve.
A
CO
C
SMA967B
D
3.
Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
E
Standard: 78 – 98 kPa (0.8 – 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 – 14 psi)
F
Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 9 psi)
• When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water or
coolant to the cap seal surface.
• Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of
the standard values.
G
WBIA0570E
H
CHECKING RADIATOR
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows:
• Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and
horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
6. Check for leaks.
Changing Engine Coolant
I
J
K
L
INFOID:0000000001717150
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
• Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to
release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
M
N
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine undercover.
Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove
the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial
cooling system drain.
For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank
and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before
installation.
• Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts.
O
P
LBIA0063E
Revision: August 2007
CO-11
2008 Quest
ENGINE COOLANT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.
When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove
the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front
drain plug and the cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs.
PBIC0846E
CAUTION:
If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in
place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the
engine block heater.
PBIC1285E
5.
Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
• If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
Revision: August 2007
CO-12
2008 Quest
ENGINE COOLANT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained
completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain
plugs and tighten to specification.
CAUTION:
If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in
place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the
engine block heater.
• The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
• Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs.
Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent.
Refer to GI-42 .
A
CO
C
D
E
F
G
PBIC1285E
H
I
J
PBIC0846E
K
Radiator drain plug
Cylinder block front drain plug
Cylinder block RH drain plug
Cylinder block LH drain plug
2.
3.
: Refer to CO-16 .
: Refer to EM-116 .
: Refer to EM-116 .
: Refer to EM-116 .
L
If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-13
2008 Quest
ENGINE COOLANT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number
5.
: KV991J0070 (J-45695)
Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is
placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed
position.
• Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent.
Refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation".
Engine coolant capacity
(with reservoir)
6.
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure
7.
8.
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids
and Lubricants".
: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2
, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION:
LLIA0058E
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air
dryer.
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is
full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, use the vacuum specifications below, based on the
altitude above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 - 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)
Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
LLIA0057E
9.
When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then
open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling
system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into
the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and
reinstall radiator filler cap.
Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
Revision: August 2007
CO-14
2008 Quest
ENGINE COOLANT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
A
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-15
2008 Quest
RADIATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717151
WBIA0495E
1.
Radiator
2.
Radiator upper clip
4.
A/T fluid cooler hose
5.
Radiator hose (lower)
6.
Radiator fan assembly
7.
Engine coolant reservoir tank
8.
Radiator hose (upper)
9.
Radiator filler cap
10. Radiator core connection
11. Radiator drain plug
3.
Mounting rubber
12. Air guide
13. O-ring
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drain the coolant from the radiator. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
Partially drain the A/T fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing A/T Fluid".
Remove fresh air duct. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses.
Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler hoses.
NOTE:
Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
Disconnect the engine coolant reservoir tank hose.
Revision: August 2007
CO-16
2008 Quest
RADIATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to
release the lock, as shown.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage, do not pull tabs excessively.
8. Disconnect fan electrical connectors.
9. Remove the radiator fan assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch A/C condenser and radiator core
when removing.
10. If necessary, remove the radiator fan assembly from the radiator.
Refer to CO-18, "Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan".
11. If necessary, remove the rubber mounting from the radiator.
A
CO
C
PBIC1216E
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
E
Apply pressure using Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
F
WARNING:
To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under
pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp.
CAUTION:
Attach a hose to the A/T fluid cooler as well.
G
SLC933-A
2.
H
Place radiator in water filled tank and check for leakage.
I
J
K
SLC934
L
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following:
• Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
M
Installation of Radiator Upper Clip
1.
2.
3.
Install the rmounting ubber on mounting pin of radiator core.
Align the radiator upper clip with the radiator core connector,
then insert the radiator upper clip straight into the radiator core
connections until a click is heard.
After connecting the radiator upper clip, use the following
method to make sure it is fully connected.
• Visually confirm that the two radiator upper clips are connected to the radiator core connections.
• Move the radiator upper clip and the radiator core forward and
backward to make sure they are securely connected.
N
O
P
PBIC1241E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks.
Revision: August 2007
CO-17
2008 Quest
COOLING FAN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COOLING FAN
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717152
REMOVAL
1. Remove radiator. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
• Start and warm up engine. Visually inspect that there are no engine coolant or A/T fluid leaks.
Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan
INFOID:0000000001717153
WBIA0362E
1.
Fan blade
2.
Fan shroud
3.
Fan motor
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove fan blade.
Remove fan motor from fan shroud.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: August 2007
CO-18
2008 Quest
WATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WATER PUMP
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717154
CO
C
D
E
F
G
WBIA0363E
1.
Water pump
2.
Timing chain tensioner
3.
Chain tensioner cover
4.
Water pump cover
5.
Water drain plug
6.
O-rings
H
CAUTION:
• When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
• After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator
cap tester.
I
J
REMOVAL
1.
Drain coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
2. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
4. Remove right-hand wheel and tire assembly using power tool.
5. Remove splash shield.
6. Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove idler pulley and idler pulley bracket.
8. Support engine at lower oil pan with a transmission jack and remove front engine insulator and bracket.
Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
K
L
M
N
O
P
PBIC0846E
Revision: August 2007
CO-19
2008 Quest
WATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11. Remove the chain tensioner assembly.
a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab.
b. Insert the stopper pin into the tensioner body hole to hold the
lever and keep the stopper tab released.
NOTE:
An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as
an example.
SLC444B
c.
d.
Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide.
Keep the slack guide pressed and hold the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through the lever
and into the tensioner body hole.
e.
Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise.
PBIC0848E
12. Remove chain tensioner.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop chain tensioner bolts inside front timing chain case.
PBIC0849E
13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a maximum gap
between water pump gear and timing chain by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water
pump sprocket.
PBIC1210E
Revision: August 2007
CO-20
2008 Quest
WATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm
(1.97 in)] into water pump's upper and lower bolt holes until they
reach the timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt
for a half turn, and pull out the water pump.
• Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket
in installation area.
• Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain.
15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.
A
CO
C
JLC357B
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
2.
Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly.
Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
E
F
G
SLC943A
H
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install new O-rings to water pump.
Apply engine oil and engine coolant to the O-rings as shown.
NOTE:
Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
I
J
K
PBIC1397E
3.
Install the water pump.
CAUTION:
Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings
when installing the water pump.
• Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are
engaged.
• Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
Water pump bolts
L
M
N
9.6 N·m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
O
SLC031B
4.
Remove dust and foreign material completely from back side of chain tensioner and from installation area
of rear timing chain case.
Revision: August 2007
CO-21
2008 Quest
P
WATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that
the timing chain on the timing chain tensioner side is loose.
NOTE:
When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be
applied to the oil hole and tensioner.
PBIC0848E
6.
Install the timing chain tensioner.
Timing chain tensioner
bolts
7.
8.1 N·m (0.83 kg-m, 72 in-lb)
Remove the stopper pin.
NOTE:
An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as
an example.
SLC448B
8.
a.
Install chain tensioner and water pump cover.
Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a
scraper.
Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the
front cover.
SLC446B
b.
Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent,
to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump
cover. Refer to GI-42.
SLC447B
Revision: August 2007
CO-22
2008 Quest
WATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
A
Water drain plug
: 9.5 N·m (0.97 kg-m, 76 in-lb)
CO
C
PBIC0846E
D
10. Tighten idler pulley bolts.
Idler pulley bolts
: 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
E
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
• Refill engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
• After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air
from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.
F
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
G
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-23
2008 Quest
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717155
WBIA0364E
1.
Gasket
2.
Engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cool.
Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
Disconnect lower radiator hose.
Disconnect oil cooler line.
Remove engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly.
• Do not disassemble engine coolant inlet and thermostat
assembly. Replace them as a unit, if necessary.
WBIA0334E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
2.
Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift.
Thermostat
Valve opening temperature
Valve lift
Valve closing temperature
Standard Values
80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F)
77°C (171°F) or lower
SLC949A
Revision: August 2007
CO-24
2008 Quest
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal paying attention to the following.
• Refill engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
• Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb coolant.
A
CO
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-25
2008 Quest
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717156
WBIA0365E
1.
Water outlet
2.
Gasket
3.
O-ring
4.
Heater pipe
5.
Water connector
6.
Water bypass pipe
7.
Engine coolant temperature sensor
8.
Washer
9.
Water bypass hose
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drain coolant from radiator and drain plugs on both sides of cylinder block. Refer to CO-11, "Changing
Engine Coolant".
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
Remove fresh air duct, air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, mass air flow sensor and upper
air cleaner case as an assembly. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation".
Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose.
Remove connector(s) from heater pipe.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector.
Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water connector, and water bypass pipe nuts and bolts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Securely insert each hose, and install a clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge.
• When inserting a water pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring.
• Refill engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks.
Revision: August 2007
CO-26
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
Standard and Limit
INFOID:0000000001717157
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
CO
Unit:
Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level)
(US gal, Imp gal)
10.5 (2 3/4, 2 3/8)
C
THERMOSTAT
Valve opening temperature
80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
Valve lift
D
8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F)
Valve closing temperature
77°C (171°F) or lower
E
RADIATOR
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Cap relief pressure
Standard
F
78 – 98 (0.8 – 1.0, 11 – 14)
Limit
59 (0.6, 9)
Leakage test pressure
157 (1.6, 23)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
CO-27
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
DI
DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition
Switch ON) ..............................................................29
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off
(Oil Pressure Is Normal) ..........................................30
Component Inspection .............................................31
PRECAUTION ..................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
A/T INDICATOR ................................................ 32
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND - .......................................32
Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................33
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ............................33
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
COMBINATION METERS ................................... 5
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 5
System Description ................................................... 5
Arrangement of Combination Meter .......................... 9
Internal Circuit ......................................................... 10
Wiring Diagram - METER - ..................................... 11
Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal
Layout ..................................................................... 13
Terminal and Reference Value for Combination
Meter ....................................................................... 13
Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter ............ 13
CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A) ................... 15
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 17
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 17
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 17
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection ............................. 18
Water Temperature Signal Inspection ..................... 19
Engine Speed Signal Inspection ............................. 19
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection .......................... 19
Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or
Varies ...................................................................... 21
Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position ........... 21
DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit ............. 21
Electrical Component Inspection ............................. 22
Combination Meter .................................................. 22
WARNING CHIME ............................................. 34
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................34
System Description ..................................................34
CAN Communication System Description ...............35
Wiring Diagram - CHIME - .......................................36
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................37
Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal
Layout ......................................................................38
Terminal and Reference Value for Combination
Meter .......................................................................38
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................38
Preliminary Check ...................................................38
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................38
All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate .......................39
Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do
Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) .......................................................................39
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate ...................41
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................42
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate ..........42
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
REAR SONAR SYSTEM ................................... 45
WARNING LAMPS .............................................23
Schematic ............................................................... 23
Wiring Diagram - WARN - ....................................... 24
Revision: August 2007
F
DI-1
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................45
System Description ..................................................45
Wiring Diagram - SONAR - ......................................47
Sonar Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal
Layout ......................................................................49
2008 Quest
P
Terminal and Reference Value for Sonar Control
Unit ......................................................................... 49
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 50
Pre-diagnosis Inspection ........................................ 50
Self-Diagnosis Function .......................................... 50
Preliminary Check .................................................. 52
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 53
Component Inspection ............................................ 53
Rear Sonar Sensors ............................................... 54
Sonar Control Unit .................................................. 54
REAR VIEW MONITOR ..................................... 55
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 55
System Description ................................................. 55
Revision: August 2007
DI-2
Schematic ............................................................... 57
Wiring Diagram - R/VIEW - ..................................... 58
Rear View Camera Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................. 61
Terminal and Reference Value for Rear View
Camera Control Unit ............................................... 61
CONSULT-III Function (REARVIEW CAMERA) ..... 61
Side Distance Guideline Correction ........................ 62
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 63
Rear View Is Not Displayed with the A/T Selector
Lever in R Position .................................................. 64
Rear View Camera Control Unit .............................. 67
Rear View Camera .................................................. 68
2008 Quest
PRECAUTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTION
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001719179
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001719180
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0191E
Revision: August 2007
DI-4
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COMBINATION METERS
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719181
B
C
D
E
F
G
WKIA5219E
1.
4.
Combination meter M24
2.
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 3.
(fuel level sensor) B252 (view with
fuel tank removed)
ECM E16
H
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E125 (view with engine removed)
I
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719182
J
UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT
• Speedometer, odometer, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled by the combination meter.
DI
• Warning indicators are controlled by signals drawn from the CAN communication system and components
connected directly to the combination meter.
• Digital meter is adopted for odometer.
L
NOTE:
The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter is
erased when the battery is disconnected.
M
• Odometer/trip meter and A/T indicator segments can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
• Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
• All warning indicators except air bag, washer fluid, security and seat belt can be checked in self-diagnosis
mode.
N
NOTE:
Under the following conditions, the meters will perform a homing function. The meter pointers will move down
slightly and then move back to the resting position. This is a normal design condition.
O
• Approximately 60 seconds after turning the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position
• If the battery is disconnected and then reconnected
Illumination control
The unified meter control unit outputs the odometer, A/T indicator, fuel and temperature gauge lighting when
the ignition switch is turned on. When the lighting switch is turned on, the illumination control switch can be
used to adjust the brightness of the combination meter and instrument panel switch illumination. When the
ignition switch is in the START position, the combination meter dial lighting and illumination control switch
lighting are turned off. For additional combination meter illumination control information, refer to LT-127, "System Description".
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
DI-5
2008 Quest
P
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Power is supplied at all times
• through 15A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 40.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No.14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
• to combination meter terminal 20
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides a water temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
SKIB6905E
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
SKIB6904E
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable resistor signal supplied
• to combination meter terminal 6
• through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2
• through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5
• from combination meter terminal 4.
SPEEDOMETER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN
communication lines.
WKIA5370E
ODO/TRIP METER
Revision: August 2007
DI-6
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) converts a pulse signal received from the wheel sensor into
a vehicle speed signal. This signal is then transmitted to the unified meter via CAN communication.
• The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by the combination meter and the mileage is displayed.
How to Change the Display For Odo/Trip Meter
Operating the odo/trip meter switch toggles the mode in the following order.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WKIA5371E
H
• Odo/trip meter switch (1) location.
• When resetting with trip A displayed only trip A display is reset.
(Trip B operates the same way.)
I
J
DI
WKIA5372E
FAIL-SAFE
Combination meter performs a fail-safe operation for the functions listed below when communication is lost.
Function
Fail-safe specifications
M
Speedometer
Tachometer
Zero indication
Fuel gauge
N
Water temperature gauge
Illumination control
Segment LCD
L
Meter illumination
Change to nighttime mode when communication is lost.
Odometer
Freeze current indication.
A/T position
Display turns off.
Buzzer
O
Buzzer turns off.
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-7
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Function
Fail-safe specifications
ABS warning lamp
Brake warning lamp
TCS/VDC OFF indicator lamp
Lamp turns on when communication is lost.
SLIP indicator lamp
O/D OFF warning lamp
Oil pressure warning lamp
Door warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp
CRUISE indicator lamp
Warning/indicator lamp
Lamp turns off when communication is lost.
SET indicator lamp
High beam indicator
Turn signal indicator lamp
Driver and passenger seat belt
warning lamp
Lamp turns off when disconnected.
Charge warning lamp
Security indicator lamp
Air bag warning lamp
Lamp turns on when disconnected.
Low tire pressure warning lamp
Lamp will flash every second for 1 minute and then stay
on continuously thereafter.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
DI-8
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Arrangement of Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000001719183
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
LKIA0708E
Revision: August 2007
DI-9
2008 Quest
P
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Internal Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719184
WKWA4659E
Revision: August 2007
DI-10
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - METER -
INFOID:0000000001719185
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4660E
Revision: August 2007
DI-11
2008 Quest
P
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4661E
Revision: August 2007
DI-12
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719186
A
B
C
LKIA0698E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000001719187
E
Condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Item
1
R/Y
Illumination control switch
—
4
B
Fuel level sensor signal
input
—
—
6
G/Y
Fuel level sensor signal
output
—
—
9
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
11
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
20
B/W
Ground
ON
—
0V
21
B/W
Illumination ground
ON
—
0V
38
O
Ignition switch ON or
START
ON
—
Battery voltage
40
Y/R
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Ignition
switch
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
Operation or condition
Lighting switch ON
Refer to LT-127, "System Description".
G
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor
Unit Inspection".
Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter
H
I
DI
L
The following items can be checked during Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode.
• Gauge sweep and present gauge values.
• Illuminates all odometer/trip meters and A/T indicator segments.
• Illuminates all micro controlled lamps/LEDs regardless of switch position.
• Displays estimated present battery voltage.
• Displays seat belt buckle switch LH status.
M
N
HOW TO INITIATE COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
NOTE:
• Once entered, combination meter self-diagnosis mode will function with the ignition switch in ON or START.
Combination meter self-diagnosis mode will exit upon turning the ignition switch to OFF or ACC.
• If the diagnosis function is activated with trip A displayed, the mileage on trip A is reset to 0000.0. (Trip B
operates the same way.)
To initiate combination meter self-diagnosis mode, refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON, while pressing the odometer/trip meter switch for 5 - 8 seconds. When the
diagnosis function is activated, the odometer/trip meter will display tESt.
NOTE:
Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit when self-diagnosis mode of combination meter
does not start. Refer to DI-17, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Replace combination meter if
normal. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE FUNCTIONS
DI-13
J
INFOID:0000000001719188
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Revision: August 2007
F
2008 Quest
O
P
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
To interpret combination meter self-diagnosis mode functions, refer to the following table.
Event
Odometer Display
Description of Test/Data
Odometer/trip meter A/B
switch held from 5 to 8
seconds (or until released)
tESt
Switch released
GAGE
Performs sweep of all
gauges, then displays
present gauge values.
Switch pressed
(All segments illuminated)
Lights all LCD segments.
Compare with picture.
Notes:
Initiating self-diagnosis mode
Gauges sweep within 10 seconds
WKIA5373E
Switch pressed
bulb
Illuminates all micro-controlled lamps/LEDs.
Part may not be configured for all
lamps (functions) that turn on during test. This is normal.
The following lamps/LEDs are not
micro driven and will not illuminate:
• Air bag
• Washer fluid
• Security
• Seat belt
Switch pressed
r XXXX, FAIL
Return to normal operation of all lamps/LEDs and
displays "r XXXX".
If a malfunction exists, "FAIL" will
flash.
Switch pressed
nrXXXX
N/A
Switch pressed
EE XX, FAIL
Displays "EE XX".
Switch pressed
(4 times)
DtXX through Epr XX
N/A
Switch pressed
1nF XX
Displays 8-bit market info
value in Hex format.
Switch pressed
(3 times)
cYL XX through tF
N/A
XXXXX
"Corrected" speed value
in hundredths of MPH.
Gauge indication may be
slightly higher. This is normal.
Will display "-----" if message is not
received. Will display "99999" if
data received is invalid.
XXXXX
"Corrected" speed value
in hundredths of KPH.
Gauge indication may be
slightly different. This is
normal.
Will display "-----" if message is not
received. Will display "99999" if
data received is invalid.
Switch pressed
t XXXX
Tachometer value in
RPM. Gauge indication
may be higher at higher
RPM. This is normal.
Will display "-----" if message is not
received.
Switch pressed
F1XXXX
Present fuel level A/D input. This input represents
fuel sender input.
000-009 = Short circuit
010-254 = Normal range
255 = Open circuit
Switch pressed
Switch pressed
Revision: August 2007
DI-14
If a malfunction exists, "FAIL" will
flash.
$31 = USA
$2A = Canada
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Event
Odometer Display
Description of Test/Data
Notes:
A
"Filtered" fuel level. Fuel
gauge indicates present
filtered level per indication
standard.
000-009 = Short circuit
010-254 = Normal range
255 = Open circuit
XXXC
Last temperature gauge
input value in degrees C.
Temperature gauge indicates present temperature per indication
standard.
Will display "---"C if message is not
received.
Will display "999" if data received
is invalid.
High = 130 deg C
Normal = 70 - 105 deg C
Low = less than 50 deg C
Switch pressed
BAtXXX
Estimated present battery
voltage.
Switch pressed
rES -X
Seat belt buckle switch LH
status.
Switch pressed
(31 times)
PA -XX through PA1-XX
N/A
Switch pressed
Switch pressed
Switch pressed
F2XXXX
B
C
D
1= Buckled
0 = Unbuckled
E
F
Return to beginning of self-diagnosis cycle.
GAGE
CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)
INFOID:0000000001719189
G
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
H
METER diagnosis mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Description
Displays combination meter self-diagnosis results.
I
Displays combination meter input/output data in real time.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
J
Display Item List
CONSULT-III display
CAN COMM CIRC [U1000]
VEHICLE SPEED CIRC [B2205]
Malfunction
Reference
Page
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication lines.
CAUTION:
Even when there is no malfunction on CAN communication system, malfunction may be misinterpreted when battery has low voltage (when maintaining 7V-8V for about 2 seconds) or 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse
block (J/B)] is removed.
DI-21
Malfunction is detected when an erroneous speed signal is input.
CAUTION:
Even when there is no malfunction on speed signal system, malfunctions
may be misinterpreted when battery has low voltage (when maintaining 7V8V for about 2 seconds).
DI-18
L
M
"TIME" indicates the condition of the self-diagnosis results judged by each signal input.
• Normal: If the system is presently operating properly, but had a malfunction in the past, the time will indicate
"1-63".
• Malfunction: Soon after detecting malfunctions by self-diagnoses or current malfunction, "0" is indicated.
After the system returns to normal operating condition, every time the ignition switch is cycled (turned to OFF
from ON), a value of one is added to the counter (i.e. "1"→"2"→"3"···"63"). When the ignition switch is cycled
64 times, the result of the self-diagnoses will be erased. If a malfunction is detected again, "0" will be indicated.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
DI-15
DI
2008 Quest
N
O
P
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Contents
SPEED METER [km/h] or [mph]
X
X
This is the angle correction value after the speed signal from
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is converted
into the vehicle speed.
SPEED OUTPUT [km/h] or [mph]
X
X
This is the angle correction value before the speed signal
from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is converted into the vehicle speed.
TACHO METER [rpm]
X
X
This is the converted value for the engine speed signal from
the ECM.
W TEMP METER [°C] or [°F]
X
X
This is the converted value for the water temp signal from the
ECM.
FUEL METER [lit.]
X
X
This is the processed value for the signal (resistance value)
from the fuel gauge.
Display item [Unit]
DISTANCE [km]
X
X
This is the calculated value for the speed signal from the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), the signal (resistance signal) from the fuel gauge and fuel consumption from
ECM.
FUEL W/L [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of low fuel warning lamp.
C-ENG W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of malfunction indicator lamp.
AIR PRES W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of low tire pressure indicator
lamp.
SEAT BELT W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt warning lamp.
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of buzzer.
DOOR W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door warning lamp.
HI-BEAM IND [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of high beam indicator.
TURN IND [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of turn indicator.
OIL W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of oil pressure warning lamp.
VDC/TCS IND [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of VDC OFF indicator lamp.
ABS W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ABS warning lamp.
SLIP IND [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SLIP indicator lamp.
BRAKE W/L [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of brake warning lamp.*
BUZZER [ON/OFF]
X
PNP P SW [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of park/neutral position (park)
switch.
PNP N SW [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of park/neutral position (neutral) switch.
O/D OFF SW [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF switch.
BRAKE SW [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of parking brake switch.
P RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift P range indicator.
R RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift R range indicator.
N RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift N range indicator.
D RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift D range indicator.
4 RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift 4 range indicator.
3 RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift 3 range indicator.
2 RANGE IND [ON/OFF]
X
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift 2 range indicator.
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF indicator lamp.
O/D OFF W/L [ON/OFF]
CRUISE IND [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE indicator.
SET IND [ON/OFF]
X
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET indicator.
*: Monitor keeps indicating “OFF” when brake warning lamp is on because of parking brake operation or low
brake fluid level.
Revision: August 2007
DI-16
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719190
A
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Perform preliminary check. Refer to "PRELIMINARY CHECK".
According to the symptom chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom.
Does the meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2.
Inspection End.
B
C
PRELIMINARY CHECK
D
1.CHECK OPERATION OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (COMBINATION METER)
Perform self-diagnosis mode of combination meter. Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination
Meter".
Does self-diagnosis mode operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER (CONSULT-III)
Perform self-diagnosis of combination meter. Refer to DI-15, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
Self-diagnostic results
No malfunction detected>>Inspection End.
Malfunction detected>>Refer to DI-15, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT OF COMBINATION METER
Check power supply and ground circuit of combination meter. Refer to DI-17, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
NG
>> Repair power supply and ground circuit of combination meter.
Symptom Chart
E
F
G
H
I
J
INFOID:0000000001719191
DI
Trouble phenomenon
Possible cause
Improper speedometer or odometer indication.
Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection".
Improper tachometer indication.
Refer to DI-19, "Engine Speed Signal Inspection".
Improper water temperature gauge indication.
Refer to DI-19, "Water Temperature Signal Inspection".
Improper fuel gauge indication.
L
M
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection".
Low-fuel warning lamp indication is irregular.
Improper A/T position indication.
Refer to DI-32.
Illumination control does not operate.
Refer to LT-127.
N
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719192
O
1.CHECK FUSES
Check for blown combination meter fuses.
P
Unit
Combination meter
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
19
Ignition switch ON or START
14
Refer to DI-11, "Wiring Diagram - METER -".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
DI-17
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
Ignition switch position
(–)
38
M24
Ground
40
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
WKIA5212E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the harness for open between combination meter and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
terminals and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M24
20
21
(–)
Ground
Continuity
Yes
WKIA5213E
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719193
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
• With traction control but without VDC system, refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
• With VDC system, refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
2.COMPARE SPEEDOMETER AND DATA MONITOR INDICATIONS
1.
2.
Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III.
Drive the vehicle at different speeds and compare speedometer gauge indication with "SPEED METER"
and "SPEED OUTPUT" of "DATA MONITOR". Speedometer and "DATA MONITOR" indications should be
close.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
Revision: August 2007
DI-18
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
A
Water Temperature Signal Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719194
1.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
C
2.COMPARE WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE AND DATA MONITOR INDICATIONS
1.
2.
Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III.
Run the engine at different temperatures and compare water temperature gauge indication with "W TEMP
METER" of "DATA MONITOR". Indication should be as follows:
D
E
High:
Normal:
Cold:
130°C (266°F)
70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Less than 50°C (122°F)
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
Engine Speed Signal Inspection
G
INFOID:0000000001719195
H
1.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
I
J
2.COMPARE TACHOMETER AND DATA MONITOR INDICATIONS
1.
2.
Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III.
Run the engine at different speeds and compare tachometer gauge indication with "TACHO METER" of DI
"DATA MONITOR". Tachometer and "DATA MONITOR" indications should be close.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
L
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719196
M
FUEL GAUGE
The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction.
• Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank shifts and the indication may fluctuate.
• If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the indication will update slowly.
• If the vehicle is tilted when the ignition switch is turned ON, fuel in the tank may flow to one direction resulting in a change of reading.
N
O
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP
Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstances, the fuel level in the tank varies, and the warning lamp
ON timing may be changed.
1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Select “METER/M&A” on CONSULT-III.
Using “FUEL METER” of “DATA MONITOR”, compare the value of DATA MONITOR with fuel gauge
pointer of combination meter.
Revision: August 2007
DI-19
2008 Quest
P
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Fuel gauge pointer
Reference value of data monitor [lit.]
Full
Approx. 76
3/4
Approx. 54
1/2
Approx. 38
1/4
Approx. 22
Empty
Approx. 7
Does the data monitor value approximately match the fuel gauge indication?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
2.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit terminals (meter-side and harness-side) for poor connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3
NG
>> Repair or replace terminals or connectors.
3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor
unit connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
(B) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector
(A).
A
3.
B
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B252
2
M24
6
Continuity
Yes
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector (A) and ground.
A
Connector
Terminal
B252
2
WKIA5215E
Continuity
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
(B) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector
(A).
A
2.
B
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B252
5
M24
4
Continuity
Yes
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector (A) and ground.
WKIA5216E
Revision: August 2007
DI-20
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
A
Connector
Terminal
B252
5
Continuity
Ground
No
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
5.CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION
Check fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-22, "Electrical Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and check whether the float arm interferes or binds with
any of the internal components in the fuel tank.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or Varies
D
E
INFOID:0000000001719197
F
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION
Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or just before or just after stopping.
Does the indication value vary only during driving or just before or just after stopping?
YES >> The fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal.
NO
>> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, and perform the trouble
diagnosis.
Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position
G
H
INFOID:0000000001719198
1.CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO FULL-POSITION
I
Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to full-position?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
J
2.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH POSITION
DI
Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON?
YES or NO
YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time for the
pointer to move to full-position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
L
3.OBSERVE VEHICLE POSITION
M
Is the vehicle parked on an incline?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
N
4.CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO EMPTY-POSITION
O
During driving, does the fuel gauge move gradually toward empty-position?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-22, "Electrical Component Inspection".
NO
>> Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and determine whether the float arm interferes or binds
with any of the internal components in the fuel tank.
P
DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719199
Symptom: Display CAN COMM CIRC [U1000] at the result of self-diagnosis for combination meter.
Revision: August 2007
DI-21
2008 Quest
COMBINATION METERS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode for "METER/M&A" with CONSULT-III.
>> Go to "CAN SYSTEM". Refer to LAN-38.
Electrical Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719201
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK
For removal, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump
Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminals 2 and 5.
Terminals
2
5
Float position
mm (in)
Resistance
value Ω
(Approx.)
*1
Empty
15 (0.59)
81
*2
Full
193 (7.6)
5
*1 and *2: When float rod is in contact with stopper.
LKIA0402E
Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000001719202
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
Revision: August 2007
DI-22
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WARNING LAMPS
A
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719203
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
P
ALNWA0168GB
Revision: August 2007
DI-23
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - WARN -
INFOID:0000000001719204
WKWA4663E
Revision: August 2007
DI-24
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4664E
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-25
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4665E
Revision: August 2007
DI-26
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4666E
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-27
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4667E
Revision: August 2007
DI-28
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4668E
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)
P
INFOID:0000000001719205
1.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT SIGNAL
Activate IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
DI-29
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT SIGNAL
Select “DATA MONITOR” of “IPDM E/R”. Refer to PG-18, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)". Operate ignition switch with “OIL P SW” of data monitor and check operation status.
When ignition switch is in ON
position (Engine stopped)
When engine running
: OIL P SW CLOSE
: OIL P SW OPEN
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
3.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E121 and oil pressure switch connector F106.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminal 57 and oil pressure switch harness connector F106 terminal +.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LKIA0245E
4.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-31, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace the oil pressure switch.
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)
INFOID:0000000001719206
NOTE:
For oil pressure inspection, refer to LU-8, "Inspection".
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E121 and oil pressure switch
connector F106.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminal 57 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LKIA0247E
2.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-31, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace oil pressure switch.
Revision: August 2007
DI-30
2008 Quest
WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719207
A
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check continuity between oil pressure switch and ground.
B
Condition
Oil pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Continuity
Engine stopped
Less than 29 (0.3, 4)
Yes
Engine running
More than 29 (0.3, 4)
No
C
D
ELF0044D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-31
2008 Quest
A/T INDICATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND -
INFOID:0000000001719208
WKWA4669E
Revision: August 2007
DI-32
2008 Quest
A/T INDICATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719209
A
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
INFOID:0000000001719210
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
B
1. Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III.
2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever.
NOTE:
If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off.
C
CONSULT-III display
P RANGE IND
R RANGE IND
N RANGE IND
D RANGE IND
4 RANGE IND
3 RANGE IND
2 RANGE IND
Switch operation
D
Operation
status
P range position
ON
Except for P range position
OFF
R range position
ON
Except for R range position
OFF
N range position
ON
Except for N range position
OFF
D range position
ON
Except for D range position
OFF
4 range position
ON
Except for 4 range position
OFF
3 range position
ON
Except for 3 range position
OFF
2 range position
ON
Except for 2 range position
OFF
E
F
G
H
I
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
DI
2.CHECK TCM
Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
NG
>> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-33
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719211
WKIA5220E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Combination meter M24
3.
Key switch M27
4.
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
5.
Front door switch LH B8
6.
Seat belt buckle switch LH B12
7.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E125 (view with engine removed)
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719212
FUNCTION
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fuse (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to key switch terminal 1.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• through body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
NOTE:
When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same
time, the priorities for each chime are the following.
1. Light warning chime
2. Ignition key warning chime
3. Seat belt warning chime
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME
With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the
warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
• through key switch terminal 2
• to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 47
Revision: August 2007
DI-34
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through front door switch LH terminal 1.
Front door switch LH is case grounded.
BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN
communication lines. When combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
A
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
B
With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [This is the operation of the light warning
chime, except when headlamp battery saver control operates (for 5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to
OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.]
Signal is supplied
• from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10
• to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36.
NOTE:
BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 47
• through front door switch LH terminal 1.
Front door switch LH is case grounded.
BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened),
warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
Ground is supplied
• to combination meter terminal 24
• through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1.
Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19.
Combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line.
BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication
line, and sends seat belt warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime.
CAN Communication System Description
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
INFOID:0000000001719213
DI
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-35
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - CHIME -
INFOID:0000000001719214
WKWA4670E
Revision: August 2007
DI-36
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4671E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719215
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Revision: August 2007
DI-37
2008 Quest
P
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719216
LKIA0698E
Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
9
L
11
Condition
INFOID:0000000001719217
Ignition
switch
Measurement method
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
CAN-H
OFF
—
—
P
CAN-L
OFF
—
—
20
B/W
Ground
OFF
—
0V
24
W/L
Seat belt buckle switch LH
ON
38
O
Ignition switch ON or START
ON
—
Battery voltage
40
Y/R
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Item
Unfastened (ON)
Fastened (OFF)
0
Battery voltage
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000001719218
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-34, "System Description".
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-38, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If not, go to 3.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719219
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719220
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Revision: August 2007
DI-38
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCM diagnostic
test item
A
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
B
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
C
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
D
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
E
Data Monitor Item
Monitored item
IGN ON SW
F
Description
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).
LIGHT SW 1ST
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.
G
H
ACTIVE TEST
Active Test Item
I
Test item
Malfunction is detected when···
LIGHT WARN ALM
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2 seconds
after touching “ON” on CONSULT-III screen.
IGN KEY WARN ALM
This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2 seconds
after touching “ON” on CONSULT-III screen.
SEAT BELT WARN TEST
This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds for 2
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-III screen.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
J
DI
L
Display Item List
Monitored Item
CAN communication
CONSULT-III display
CAN communication [U1000]
Description
M
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
NOTE:
If "CAN communication U1000" is indicated, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System". Refer to
LAN-38.
All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719221
O
1.CHECK BCM CHIME OPERATION
Select "BUZZER" on CONSULT-III, and perform "LIGHT WARN ALM", "IGN KEY WARN ALM", OR "SEAT
BELT WARN TEST" active test.
Does chime sound?
YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NO
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning
Revision: August 2007
N
DI-39
2008 Quest
P
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Chime Does Operate)
INFOID:0000000001719222
1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III.
With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "DOOR SW-DR" changes with the status of front door LH.
When front door LH is
opened
When front door LH is
closed
: DOOR SW-DR ON
: DOOR SW-DR OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47
and ground.
When front door LH is
opened
When front door LH is
closed
: Approx. 0V
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and
Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WKIA1515E
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M19 (A) and front door switch LH
connector B8 (B).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 (A) terminal 47 and front door switch LH harness connector B8 (B) terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 (A) terminal 47 and ground.
WKIA5217E
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
Check continuity between front door switch LH terminal 1 and
exposed metal of switch while pushing and releasing switch.
When front door LH
switch is released
When front door LH
switch is pushed
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and
Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace the front door switch LH.
Revision: August 2007
DI-40
LKIA0404E
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719223
A
1.CHECK FUSE
Check if the key switch 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Refer to DI-36, "Wiring Diagram - CHIME -".
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse. Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
B
C
2.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position.
Does warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Go to DI-39, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" or DI-39, "Key Warning Chime and Light
Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)".
D
E
3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "KEY ON SW" changes when the key is inserted/removed from
the ignition key cylinder.
F
G
When key is inserted in ignition
key cylinder
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder
: KEY ON SW ON
H
: KEY ON SW OFF
I
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37
and ground.
J
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M18
37
Condition
(–)
Ground
Voltage (V)
Key is inserted
Battery voltage
Key is removed
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and
Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 4.
DI
L
LKIA0255E
M
4.CHECK KEY SWITCH
1.
2.
N
Disconnect key switch connector.
Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.
Terminals
1
Condition
2
O
Continuity
Key is inserted
Yes
Key is removed
No
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace the key switch.
WKIA3206E
5.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
DI-41
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect BCM connector M18.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 and key switch harness connector M27 terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
3.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1139E
6.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between key switch harness connector M27 terminal
1 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and
Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Check harness for open between key switch and fuse.
WKIA1140E
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719224
1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
Check key warning chime and seat belt warning chime functions.
Do key warning chime and seat belt warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to DI-39, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate".
2.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM".
With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "LIGHT SW 1ST" status changes when the lighting switch
is moved from ON (1st position) to OFF.
Lighting switch ON (1st position)
Lighting switch OFF
: LIGHT SW 1ST ON
: LIGHT SW 1ST OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Check combination switch. Refer to LT-79, "Combination Switch Reading Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-79, "Combination Switch Reading Function".
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719225
1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
1.
With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position.
2. Return lighting switch to OFF position, and insert key into ignition.
Does warning chime sound for both steps?
Revision: August 2007
DI-42
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to DI-39, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate".
A
2.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP OPERATION
Turn ignition switch ON. Buckle and unbuckle driver seat belt while watching seat belt warning lamp.
NOTE:
While performing this test, the front passenger seat must be unoccupied.
When seat belt is fastened
When seat belt is unfastened
B
C
: Warning lamp OFF
: Warning lamp ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
E
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24
terminal 24 and ground.
F
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
M24
24
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Seat belt is fastened
G
Battery voltage
Seat belt is unfastened
H
0
WKIA5218E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
NG
>> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
J
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector.
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH terminals 1
and 2.
Terminals
1
Condition
2
DI
L
Continuity
Seat belt is fastened
No
Seat belt is unfastened
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH.
M
WKIA1143E
N
5.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 24 and seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 1.
O
P
Continuity should exist.
3.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 24 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WKIA3295E
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
DI-43
2008 Quest
WARNING CHIME
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> Check seat belt buckle switch ground circuit.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
DI-44
2008 Quest
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719226
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5221E
1.
Sonar buzzer M117
2.
Rear sonar system OFF switch
M116
3.
Rear sonar sensor LH outer B202
4.
Rear sonar sensor LH inner B203
5.
Rear sonar sensor RH inner B204
6.
Rear sonar sensor RH outer B205
7.
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
8.
F29 (view with battery tray removed)
Sonar control unit B56 (view with
rear lower finisher assembly LH removed)
System Description
J
DI
INFOID:0000000001719227
L
FUNCTION
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to sonar control unit terminal 8, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
• to sonar control unit terminal 6
• through body grounds B7 and B19.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, and the selector lever in the R position, power is supplied
• to sonar control unit terminal 5
• from park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 4.
With power and ground supplied, selector lever in R position, and the rear sonar system OFF switch ON, the
rear sonar system will detect obstacles within 1.8 m (5.9 ft) of the rear sonar sensors. The vehicle operator is
notified of obstacles by varied lengths of tone from the sonar buzzer depending on distance of obstacle being
sensed.
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
Revision: August 2007
DI-45
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
With power and ground supplied to the sonar control unit, selector lever in R position, the sonar system can be
disabled and the sonar buzzer silenced by momentarily pressing the rear sonar system OFF switch. The rear
sonar system OFF indicator lamp will be illuminated in the rear sonar system OFF switch.
To disable the rear sonar system, ground is supplied
• to sonar control unit terminal 13
• through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 7
• through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 6
• from body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
To light the rear sonar system OFF indicator, power is supplied
• to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 3
• from sonar control unit terminal 4.
Ground is supplied
• to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 2
• from body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
The rear sonar system and buzzer will be disabled and the rear sonar system OFF indicator will be illuminated
until the ignition switch is turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the rear sonar system will be enabled.
Depressing the rear sonar system OFF switch momentarily will enable the rear sonar system also. Enabling
the rear sonar system will cause the rear sonar system OFF indicator to go out.
SONAR BUZZER
With the power supplied to the sonar control unit, selector lever in R position and a stationary object at least
7.0 cm (2.8 in.) wide and 10.0 cm (3.9 in.) tall closer than 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) will be detected by the rear sonar
sensors, the sonar buzzer will sound a tone. As the vehicle approaches the object, the rate of the tone will
increase. When the object is less than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the rear bumper, the tone will sound continuously.
Power is supplied
• to sonar buzzer terminal +
• from sonar control unit terminal 7.
Ground is supplied
• to sonar buzzer terminal • from sonar control unit terminal 3.
REAR SONAR SENSOR
With power and ground supplied to the rear sonar sensors, the sonar sensors transmit a 38.4 kHz ultrasonic
signal. This signal is reflected back to the sensor by objects large enough and close enough to be detected.
The rear sonar sensors measure the time from the transmitted signal to the time the signal is reflected back
and sends this information to the sonar control unit.
Power is supplied
• to rear sonar sensors terminal 1
• from sonar control unit terminal 16.
Ground is supplied
• to rear sonar sensors terminal 3
• from sonar control unit terminal 15.
Signal is supplied
• to sonar control unit terminals 9, 10, 11 and 12
• from rear sonar sensors terminal 2.
Revision: August 2007
DI-46
2008 Quest
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - SONAR -
INFOID:0000000001719228
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4672E
Revision: August 2007
DI-47
2008 Quest
P
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4673E
Revision: August 2007
DI-48
2008 Quest
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Sonar Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719229
A
B
C
WKIA5222E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Sonar Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719230
E
Condition
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
—
0
3 (R/Y)
Sonar buzzer return
ON
4 (O/B)
Rear sonar system
OFF indicator output
ON
5 (G/W)
Reverse signal
ON
Sonar control unit
ground
OFF
6 (B)
ON
0
OFF
Battery voltage
Selector lever
R position
Battery voltage
Selector lever
Not R position
0
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
—
Sonar buzzer drive
signal
ON
G
H
0
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• No obstacles
7 (W/G)
I
Battery voltage
J
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• Distance between rear sonar sensor and
obstacle is <0.25 m (0.82 ft) or less.
0
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• Distance between rear sonar sensor and
obstacle is 0.25 to 1.8 m (0.82 to 5.9 ft).
Cycles between 0.001 and 12
—
Battery voltage
DI
L
8 (G)
Sonar control unit
power
ON
9 (L)
Rear sonar sensor
signal - RH outer
ON
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• No obstacles
Battery voltage
10 (R)
Rear sonar sensor
signal - LH outer
ON
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• No obstacles
Battery voltage
11 (G/O)
Rear sonar sensor
signal - LH inner
ON
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• Distance obstacles
Battery voltage
12 (W)
Rear sonar sensor
signal - RH inner
ON
• Rear sonar system OFF switch ON
• Selector lever in R position
• Distance obstacles
Battery voltage
13 (GR/L)
Rear sonar system
OFF switch signal
ON
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
Revision: August 2007
DI-49
F
M
N
ON
0
OFF
9
2008 Quest
O
P
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Condition
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
—
0
15 (G/Y)
Rear sonar sensor
ground
ON
16 (Y)
Rear sonar sensor
power
ON
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
INFOID:0000000001719231
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-45, "System Description".
Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to DI-50, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection".
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-50, "Self-Diagnosis Function".
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-52, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to DI-53, "Symptom Chart".
Does the rear sonar system operate properly? If so, go to 8. If not, go to 3.
Inspection End.
Pre-diagnosis Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719232
SENSOR STATUS CHECK
• Check that the rear sonar sensor is not frozen.
• Check that snow, mud, or other foreign objects are not adhering to the rear sonar sensor.
• Check that there is no deformation, scratches, or other damage to the rear sonar sensor.
• Check that water has not accumulated in the rear sonar sensor.
CAUTION:
Use water, cotton swab, or other soft material for cleaning the sensor.
1. Check that there are no obstacles within each rear sonar sensor's detection range.
Detection range
Rear sonar sensors
2.
3.
Approx. 1.8 m (5.9 ft) maximum
Check that there are no nearby ultrasound sources (such as the sounds of vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes).
Check that the vehicle is on a level surface.
Self-Diagnosis Function
INFOID:0000000001719233
There are four modes of self-diagnosis; entering diagnostics, requesting number of fault codes, requesting
fault codes, and idling or clearing fault codes. These steps must be followed in order. Self-diagnosis can be
manually exited by turning the ignition OFF, or selecting reverse gear. Self-diagnosis will automatically exit if a
message is repeated five times without acknowledgement, before reporting number of faults if no switch activity is detected for thirty seconds or in idle mode if no switch activity is detected for thirty seconds.
ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON. Rear sonar system OFF switch indicator lamp comes on for three seconds and then goes out.
Immediately push rear sonar system OFF switch ten times
within five seconds.
The the sonar buzzer sounds once and the rear sonar system
OFF indicator flashes once.
LKIA0389E
Revision: August 2007
DI-50
2008 Quest
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REQUESTING NUMBER OF FAULT CODES MODE
1. While in diagnostic mode, push rear sonar system OFF switch
once.
2. The sonar buzzer will sound once.
3. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash once and sonar
buzzer will sound once for each fault code detected.
4. There will be a four second pause.
5. The number of fault codes will repeat then pause five times.
NOTE:
Self-diagnosis will exit unless requesting fault codes occurs
before five repeats ends.
A
B
C
LKIA0388E
D
REQUESTING FAULT CODES MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
While in requesting number of fault codes mode, push rear
sonar system OFF switch once.
The sonar buzzer will sound once.
Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will
sound the first digit of the fault code followed by a one second
pause.
Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will
sound the second digit of the fault code followed by a four second pause.
The fault codes will repeat then pause five times.
LKIA0390E
NOTE:
Requesting fault codes will exit unless the fault code is acknowledged before five repeats ends.
The fault code is acknowledged by pushing the rear sonar system OFF switch once (the sonar buzzer
may sound). When all fault codes have been indicated, idle mode will be entered. See the following table
for fault code identification.
Fault Code
Malfunction
Rear sonar sensor LH
outer
12
Rear sonar sensor LH inner
13
Rear sonar sensor RH inner
14
Rear sonar sensor RH
outer
21
Sonar buzzer
DI-53, "Component Inspection"
22
Rear sonar system OFF
indicator
DI-53, "Component Inspection"
23
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
DI-53, "Component Inspection"
24
Sonar control unit
Replace sonar control
unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit"
Check harness for open
or short. If NG repair or replace harness. If OK replace sensor. Refer to EI15, "Removal and Installation".
H
I
L
M
N
O
P
NOTE:
While in idle mode, self-diagnosis will automatically exit if no activity occurs for thirty seconds.
DI-51
G
DI
IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE
Revision: August 2007
F
J
Page Reference
11
E
2008 Quest
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds
to reset time-out counter.
2. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds
to clear codes.
LKIA0391E
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719234
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.CHECK FUSES
Check for blown rear sonar system fuse.
UNIT
POWER SOURCE
FUSE
Sonar control unit
ON or START
12
Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram - SONAR -".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect sonar control unit connector.
Check voltage between sonar control unit connector B56 terminal 8 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
B56
8
Ignition switch position
(-)
ON or START
Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between sonar control unit and
fuse.
WKIA1145E
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between sonar control unit connector B56 terminal 6 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
B56
6
(–)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
WKIA1146E
DI-52
2008 Quest
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001719235
A
Symptom
Repair order
1.
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator
lamp does not light and the buzzer does not sound.
2.
3.
4.
1.
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator
lamp does not light but buzzer sounds.
2.
3.
1.
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar buzzer
does not sound but indicator lamp lights up.
2.
3.
1.
When rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp lights up and the sonar buzzer sounds intermittently (for about 4 seconds).
2.
3.
1.
The rear sonar system operates with the rear sonar system OFF
switch ON.
2.
3.
4.
1.
When the selector lever is in the R position and the rear sonar
system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar system does not operate.
2.
3.
1.
When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator
lamp lights up and buzzer sounds although there is no obstacle
within the detection range.
The rear sonar sensors do not operate according to the distance
between each sensor and the obstacle. (There is a large error in
the obstacle detection distance.)
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Component Inspection
Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer
to DI-53, "Component Inspection".
Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit.
Check harness and connections between rear sonar system
OFF switch and sonar control unit.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check rear sonar system OFF indicator for malfunction. Refer to DI-53, "Component Inspection".
Check harness and connections between rear sonar system
OFF indicator and sonar control unit.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check sonar buzzer. Refer to DI-53, "Component Inspection".
Check harness and connections between sonar buzzer and
sonar control unit.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to: DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check harness between rear sonar sensors and sonar control unit for an open condition.
Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer
to DI-53, "Component Inspection".
Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit.
Check harness and connections between rear sonar system
OFF switch and sonar control unit.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check for PNP switch failure. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis
Procedure".
Check harness and connections between sonar control unit
and PNP/reverse lamp circuits.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check for adhesion of snow, mud, or other foreign objects to
rear sonar sensors; dew condensation; etc. Refer to DI-50,
"Pre-diagnosis Inspection".
Check harness and connections between rear sonar sensors and sonar control unit.
Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction.
Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control
Unit".
INFOID:0000000001719236
SONAR BUZZER
Revision: August 2007
DI-53
2008 Quest
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
P
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disconnect the sonar buzzer connector M117, and apply battery voltage (approx. 12V) to terminal +. Check the buzzer operation when
terminal - is connected to battery ground.
Terminal to be inspected
Condition
+
Approx. 12V
-
Ground
Sonar buzzer
Operation
Sonar buzzer
sounds
WKIA4032E
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch connector M116.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
Rear sonar system OFF
switch
Terminal to be inspected
ON
Yes
6-7
OFF
Continuity
No
WKIA1148E
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR
Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch connector M116, and
apply battery voltage (approx. 12V) to terminal 3. Check the rear
sonar system OFF indicator operation when terminal 2 is connected
to battery ground.
Terminal to be inspected
Condition
Operation
3
Approx. 12V
2
Ground
Rear sonar
system OFF
indicator lights
Rear sonar system OFF switch
WKIA2691E
Rear Sonar Sensors
INFOID:0000000001719237
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Refer to EI-15, "Removal and Installation" for rear sonar sensor removal and installation procedures.
Sonar Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719238
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" to gain access to
sonar control unit.
2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
DI-54
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR VIEW MONITOR
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719239
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WKIA5223E
DI
1.
Display unit M93
Display control unit M94, M95
2.
Data link connector M22
3.
AV switch M98
4.
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
5.
F29 (view with battery tray removed)
Rear view camera D518
6.
Rear view camera control unit B512
A. Passenger seat
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719240
• When the A/T selector is in the R position, the display unit shows a view to the rear of the vehicle.
• Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
O
P
AV COMMUNICATION LINE
Rear view camera control unit is connected to the following units with AV communication line. Each unit transmits/receives data with AV communication line.
DI-55
M
N
Power is supplied at all times
• through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to rear view camera control unit terminal 1.
When ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to rear view camera control unit terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
• to rear view camera control unit terminal 3
• through grounds B117 and B132
• to rear view camera terminal 2
• through grounds D403 and D404.
Revision: August 2007
L
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• NAVI control unit (with NAVI)
• Display unit
• Display control unit
• AV switch
REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 2.
When A/T selector lever is in R position, power is supplied
• through park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 4
• to rear view camera control unit terminal 4.
Then, rear view camera control unit sends camera ON signal
• through rear view camera control unit terminal 8
• to rear view camera terminal 1.
An image taken by rear view camera is sent
• through rear view camera terminals 3 and 4
• to rear view camera control unit terminals 9 and 10.
Then an image is sent
• through rear view camera control unit terminals 11 and 12
• to display unit terminals 4 and 15.
An image of rear view will be projected on the display.
Side Distance Guideline
When A/T selector lever is in R position, rear view camera control unit is sent rear view camera guideline
image
• through rear view camera control unit terminals 11 and 12
• to display unit terminals 4 and 15.
Rear view camera guideline will be projected on the display.
Display shows image from rear view camera image and rear view camera guideline.
Revision: August 2007
DI-56
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719241
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4954E
Revision: August 2007
DI-57
2008 Quest
P
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - R/VIEW -
INFOID:0000000001719242
WKWA4674E
Revision: August 2007
DI-58
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
N
O
WKWA4675E
P
Revision: August 2007
DI-59
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4676E
Revision: August 2007
DI-60
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear View Camera Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001719243
A
B
C
WKIA5224E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719244
E
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
1
Y
2
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
Battery power
OFF
—
Battery voltage
V
ACC power
ACC
—
Battery voltage
3
B
Ground
OFF
—
0
4
G/W
Reverse signal input
ON
A/T selector lever in other than R
position
0
5
BR
AV Control
ON
—
0
6
SB
DDL
—
—
—
8
Y
Camera power output
ON
9
—
Camera image input (–)
ON
10
G
Camera image input (+)
ON
Item
A/T selector lever R position
A/T selector lever R position
—
F
G
Battery voltage
H
I
6
0
J
DI
A/T selector lever R position
L
SKIA4894E
11
—
Shield ground
—
—
—
M
12
W
Composite image output
ON
A/T selector lever R position
N
SKIA4896E
CONSULT-III Function (REARVIEW CAMERA)
INFOID:0000000001719245
P
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
REARVIEW CAMERA
diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the rearview camera control unit
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the rearview
camera control unit and received data is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
DI-61
O
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REARVIEW CAMERA
diagnostic mode
Description
DATA MONITOR
Displays rearview camera control unit input/output data in real time.
ECU PART NUMBER
Rearview camera control unit part number can be read.
WORK SUPPORT
SELCT GUIDELINE PATTERN
Side distance guideline is optional from two patterns.
ADJ GUIDELINE POSITION
Side distance guideline is adjustable toward up and down, right and left.
Refer to DI-62, "Side Distance Guideline Correction" for detail.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Display item [Unit]
R POSI SIG [ON/OFF]
ALL SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
X
X
Contents
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of R position signal input.
Side Distance Guideline Correction
INFOID:0000000001719246
This mode is used to modify the side distance guidelines if they are dislocated from the rear view monitor
image, because of variations of body/camera mounting conditions.
SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Create a correction line to modify the screen.
Draw lines on the rearward of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 inch) from both sides of the vehicle, and
• *1: 0.5 m (1.5 feet)
• *2: 1 m (3 feet)
• *3: 2 m (7 feet)
• *4: 3 m (10 feet)
and from the rear end of the bumper
With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-III to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. Touch “REARVIEW
CAMERA” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
CAUTION:
Stop engine for safety when correcting side distance guideline.
SKIA5637E
Revision: August 2007
DI-62
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Shift the A/T selector lever to R position.
A
B
C
SKIA6103E
D
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch “SELCT GUIDELINE PATTERN” on “SELECT WORK ITEM” screen.
Touch “UP” or “DOWN”, and select the guide line, “PATTERN NO. 0” or “PATTERN NO. 1”, which is the
closest to the corrected line.
Touch “SAVE”, and confirm the guide line.
Touch “END”.
E
F
8.
Touch “ADJ GUIDELINE POSITION” on “SELECT WORK ITEM” screen.
9.
Adjust the guide line touching “X UP”, “X DOWN”, “Y UP” or “Y DOWN” so that the corrected line can fit
the guide line.
10. Touch “SAVE”, and confirm the guide line.
11. Touch “END” to finish correcting.
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
G
H
INFOID:0000000001719247
1.CHECK FUSES
I
Check for blown rear view camera system fuses.
Unit
Rear view camera control unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
31
Ignition switch ACC or ON
4
J
DI
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3.
L
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector.
Check voltage between rear view camera control unit and
ground.
M
N
Terminals
(+)
Connector
B512
Terminal
(–)
OFF
ACC
O
1
Ground
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
2
Ground
0V
Battery voltage
WKIA2027E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between rear view camera control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
DI-63
2008 Quest
P
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 3 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
SKIA5081E
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect rear view camera connector.
Check continuity between rear view camera harness connector
D518 terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
SKIA5082E
Rear View Is Not Displayed with the A/T Selector Lever in R Position
INFOID:0000000001719248
1.BACK-UP LAMP INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift A/T selector lever to R position.
Does back-up lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-88.
2.CHECK REVERSE POSITION INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Select “DATA MONITOR” of “REARVIEW CAMERA”. Operate ignition switch with “R POSI SIG” of “DATA
MONITOR” and check operate status.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift A/T selector lever to R position.
Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 4 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between rear view
camera control unit and park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
SKIA5086E
3.CHECK DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
DI-64
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 5 and ground.
Voltage
A
: Approx. 5V
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
WKIA4198E
4.CHECK DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 5 and display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 8.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 5 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
G
SKIA7149E
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
I
5.CHECK AV CONTROL SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect rear view camera control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift A/T selector lever to R position.
Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 5 and ground.
Voltage
J
DI
: Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace rear view camera control unit. Refer to DI-67,
"Rear View Camera Control Unit".
L
SKIA7150E
M
6.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear view camera connector.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 8 and rear view camera harness connector D518 terminal 1.
N
O
Continuity should exist.
4.
P
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 9 and rear view camera harness connector D518 terminal 4.
SKIA5095E
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 10 and rear
view camera harness connector D518 terminal 3.
Revision: August 2007
DI-65
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
7.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 8 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
2.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 9 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
3.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 10 and ground.
SKIA5098E
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness on connector.
8.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to DI-63, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair power supply or ground circuit.
9.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect rear view camera control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift A/T selector lever to R position.
Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 terminal 8 and ground.
Voltage
: Approx. 6V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace the rear view camera control unit. Refer to DI67, "Rear View Camera Control Unit".
SKIA5099E
10.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect rear view camera connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift A/T selector lever to R position.
Check voltage signal between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 10 and ground.
10 - Ground:
SKIA5100E
SKIA4894E
Revision: August 2007
DI-66
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace the rear view camera. Refer to DI-68, "Rear View Camera".
A
11.CHECK COMPOSITE SIGNAL OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector and display
unit connector.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 (A) terminal 12 and display unit harness connector M93 (B) terminal 15.
C
D
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 (A) terminal 12 and ground.
E
WKIA5377E
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
F
12.CHECK COMPOSITE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT
G
1.
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 (A) terminal 11 and display unit harness connector M93 (B) terminal 4.
H
Continuity should exist.
2.
I
Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness
connector B512 (A) terminal 11 and ground.
J
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA5378E
DI
13.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA CONTROL UNIT COMPOSITE SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
L
Connect rear view camera control unit connector and display
unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage signal between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 12 and ground.
M
N
12 - Ground:
WKIA1827E
SKIA4896E
P
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace the rear view camera control unit. Refer to DI-67, "Rear View Camera Control Unit".
Rear View Camera Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001719249
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
DI-67
O
2008 Quest
REAR VIEW MONITOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to SE-75.
Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector.
Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2).
LKIA0662E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear View Camera
INFOID:0000000001719250
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EI-23.
Disconnect rear view camera connector (1).
Remove rear view camera screw and remove rear view camera.
LKIA0663E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installing rear view camera, perform side distance guideline correction procedure. Refer to DI-62, "Side
Distance Guideline Correction".
Revision: August 2007
DI-68
2008 Quest
ENGINE
SECTION
EC
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
EC
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 9
INDEX FOR DTC ................................................. 9
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ...................................................... 34
System Description ..................................................34
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................34
Component Inspection .............................................36
DTC No. Index .......................................................... 9
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................13
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................. 13
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and
A/T ........................................................................... 13
Precaution ............................................................... 13
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 39
Description ...............................................................39
Component Inspection .............................................39
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) ....................................................... 41
Introduction ..............................................................42
Two Trip Detection Logic .........................................42
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .................43
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................59
OBD System Operation Chart .................................62
K
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ....................... 68
Basic Inspection ......................................................68
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .....................71
Procedure After Replacing ECM .............................72
VIN Registration ......................................................72
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .......73
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning .................73
Idle Air Volume Learning .........................................73
Fuel Pressure Check ...............................................75
Input/Output Signal Chart ........................................ 24
System Description ................................................. 24
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) ...............................................................25
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 78
CAN COMMUNICATION ....................................27
System Description ................................................. 27
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ................28
Description .............................................................. 28
Component Inspection ............................................ 30
Removal and Installation ......................................... 32
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ........................ 32
Revision: August 2007
I
J
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ...............24
System Description ................................................. 25
Component Description ........................................... 26
H
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 42
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................19
Schematic ............................................................... 19
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ..................... 19
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ................................ 22
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Speed) ..................................................................... 22
G
Description ...............................................................41
PREPARATION ..................................................17
Special Service Tool ............................................... 17
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 18
F
EC-1
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................78
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................82
Fail-Safe Chart ........................................................83
Symptom Matrix Chart .............................................85
Engine Control Component Parts Location .............89
Vacuum Hose Drawing ............................................96
Circuit Diagram ........................................................97
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..............99
ECM Terminal and Reference Value .......................99
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) .........................107
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .......................117
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................119
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE ............................................................. 122
Description .............................................................122
Testing Condition ...................................................122
Inspection Procedure .............................................122
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT ........................................................ 130
Description .............................................................130
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................130
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 131
Wiring Diagram ......................................................131
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................134
Ground Inspection .................................................138
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE ................................................................. 139
Description .............................................................139
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................139
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................139
Wiring Diagram ......................................................140
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................140
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ............. 141
Description .............................................................141
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................141
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................141
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................141
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ................. 142
Description .............................................................142
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................142
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................143
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................143
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................144
Component Inspection ...........................................145
Removal and Installation .......................................145
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ............................................... 146
Description .............................................................146
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................146
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................146
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................146
Wiring Diagram ......................................................147
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................150
Component Inspection ...........................................152
Removal and Installation .......................................152
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
HEATER ........................................................... 153
Revision: August 2007
Description ............................................................ 153
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 153
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 153
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 155
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 158
Component Inspection .......................................... 160
Removal and Installation ....................................... 160
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .................................................... 161
Component Description ........................................ 161
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 161
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 161
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 162
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165
Component Inspection .......................................... 166
Removal and Installation ....................................... 167
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR .............................. 168
Component Description ........................................ 168
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 168
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 168
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 168
Overall Function Check ......................................... 169
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 171
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172
Component Inspection .......................................... 175
Removal and Installation ....................................... 176
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .................. 177
Component Description ........................................ 177
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 177
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 177
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 177
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 179
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180
Component Inspection .......................................... 182
Removal and Installation ....................................... 183
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR .................... 184
Component Description ........................................ 184
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 184
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 184
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 185
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185
Component Inspection .......................................... 187
Removal and Installation ....................................... 187
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ................... 188
Component Description ........................................ 188
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 189
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 190
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190
EC-2
2008 Quest
Component Inspection .......................................... 192
Removal and Installation ....................................... 192
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 224
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 224
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 224
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 226
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229
Removal and Installation ....................................... 231
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ..................... 193
Component Description ......................................... 193
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 193
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 193
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 193
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 194
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195
Component Inspection .......................................... 198
Removal and Installation ....................................... 198
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ................ 232
Component Description ......................................... 232
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 232
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 232
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 232
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 234
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 237
Removal and Installation ....................................... 240
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ............................... 199
Component Description ......................................... 199
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 199
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 200
Component Inspection .......................................... 201
Removal and Installation ....................................... 201
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ............................. 241
Component Description ......................................... 202
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 202
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 202
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 203
Component Inspection .......................................... 204
Removal and Installation ....................................... 204
Component Description ......................................... 241
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 241
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 241
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 241
Overall Function Check ......................................... 242
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 243
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246
Component Inspection ........................................... 248
Removal and Installation ....................................... 249
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .......... 205
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ............................. 250
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ................................ 202
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 205
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 205
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 205
Component Inspection .......................................... 205
Removal and Installation ....................................... 206
Component Description ......................................... 250
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 250
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 250
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 251
Overall Function Check ......................................... 252
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 253
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 256
Component Inspection ........................................... 260
Removal and Installation ....................................... 261
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ................. 207
Component Description ......................................... 207
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 207
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 207
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 207
Overall Function Check ......................................... 208
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 210
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 213
Removal and Installation ....................................... 215
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ............................. 262
Component Description ......................................... 262
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 262
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 262
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 262
Overall Function Check ......................................... 263
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 264
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 267
Component Inspection ........................................... 269
Removal and Installation ....................................... 270
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ................. 216
Component Description ......................................... 216
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 216
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 216
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 216
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 218
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221
Removal and Installation ....................................... 223
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................. 271
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ................. 224
Component Description ......................................... 224
Revision: August 2007
EC-3
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 271
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 271
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 273
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 276
2008 Quest
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................. 281
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................281
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................281
Wiring Diagram ......................................................283
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................286
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ............................... 291
Component Description .........................................291
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................291
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................291
Wiring Diagram ......................................................292
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................293
Component Inspection ...........................................294
Removal and Installation .......................................295
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .................. 296
Component Description .........................................296
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................296
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................296
Wiring Diagram ......................................................297
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................297
Component Inspection ...........................................299
Removal and Installation .......................................300
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR .................... 301
Component Description .........................................301
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................301
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................301
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................301
Wiring Diagram ......................................................302
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................303
Component Inspection ...........................................306
Removal and Installation .......................................306
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE .............. 307
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................307
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................307
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................308
DTC P0327, P0328 KS .................................... 314
Component Description .........................................314
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................314
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................314
Wiring Diagram ......................................................315
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................316
Component Inspection ...........................................318
Removal and Installation .......................................318
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ................... 319
Component Description .........................................319
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................319
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................319
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................319
Wiring Diagram ......................................................320
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................321
Revision: August 2007
Component Inspection .......................................... 324
Removal and Installation ....................................... 324
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .. 325
Component Description ........................................ 325
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 325
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 325
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 326
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 329
Component Inspection .......................................... 332
Removal and Installation ....................................... 332
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION ........................... 333
Description ............................................................ 333
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 334
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 335
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 335
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 337
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 338
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL
VALVE .............................................................. 341
Description ............................................................ 341
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 342
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 342
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 342
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 343
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 344
Component Inspection .......................................... 345
Removal and Installation ....................................... 346
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR ................ 347
Component Description ........................................ 347
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 347
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 347
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 350
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 350
Component Inspection .......................................... 352
Removal and Installation ....................................... 353
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST
FUNCTION ........................................................ 354
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 354
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 354
Overall Function Check ......................................... 355
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 355
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 359
System Description ............................................... 359
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 359
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 359
Overall Function Check ......................................... 360
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 361
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 364
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 364
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 365
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 365
EC-4
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............. 371
Description ............................................................ 371
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 371
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 372
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 372
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 373
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 374
Component Inspection .......................................... 377
Removal and Installation ....................................... 378
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 399
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 399
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 399
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 401
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 402
Component Inspection ........................................... 404
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
PRESSURE SENSOR ..................................... 405
Component Description ......................................... 405
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 405
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 405
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 405
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 407
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 408
Component Inspection ........................................... 411
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....... 379
Description ............................................................ 379
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 379
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 380
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 380
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 381
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 382
Component Inspection .......................................... 384
Removal and Installation ....................................... 384
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ................................................... 385
Component Description ......................................... 385
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 385
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 385
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 385
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 386
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 387
Component Inspection .......................................... 389
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ................................................... 390
Component Description ......................................... 390
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 390
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 390
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 390
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 392
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 393
Component Inspection .......................................... 394
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 399
C
D
E
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 412
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 412
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 413
G
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 418
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 418
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 419
Overall Function Check ......................................... 419
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 420
H
I
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 426
Component Description ......................................... 426
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 426
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 426
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 426
Removal and Installation ....................................... 427
J
K
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 428
Component Description ......................................... 428
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 428
Overall Function Check ......................................... 428
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 429
Removal and Installation ....................................... 429
L
M
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .. 430
Component Description ......................................... 430
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 430
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 430
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430
Removal and Installation ....................................... 431
N
O
DTC P0500 VSS .............................................. 432
Description ............................................................. 432
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 432
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 432
Overall Function Check ......................................... 433
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 433
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ............................... 434
Component Description ......................................... 399
Revision: August 2007
EC
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 412
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 396
Component Description ......................................... 396
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 396
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 396
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 396
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 397
Component Inspection .......................................... 398
A
EC-5
Description ............................................................. 434
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 434
2008 Quest
P
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................434
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................434
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ................................ 436
Description .............................................................436
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................436
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................436
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................436
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR .............................. 438
Component Description .........................................438
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................438
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................438
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................438
Wiring Diagram ......................................................439
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................440
Component Inspection ...........................................442
Removal and Installation .......................................442
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ................ 443
Component Description .........................................443
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................443
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................443
Wiring Diagram ......................................................444
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................445
DTC P0605 ECM .............................................. 447
Component Description .........................................447
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................447
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................447
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................448
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ........ 449
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................449
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................449
Wiring Diagram ......................................................450
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................451
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ............................... 454
Component Description .........................................454
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................454
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................454
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................454
Overall Function Check .........................................455
Wiring Diagram ......................................................456
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................457
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ................................................................ 460
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................460
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .................. 461
Description .............................................................461
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................461
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................461
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................461
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ..... 462
Description .............................................................462
Revision: August 2007
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 462
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 462
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 462
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE.. 463
Description ............................................................ 463
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 464
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 464
Overall Function Check ......................................... 465
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 466
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 467
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 471
Component Inspection .......................................... 471
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .................................. 473
Component Description ........................................ 473
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 473
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 473
Removal and Installation ....................................... 474
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .................................. 475
Component Description ........................................ 475
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 475
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 475
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 475
Removal and Installation ....................................... 476
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION ........................... 477
Description ............................................................ 477
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 478
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 479
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 479
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 481
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 482
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL ............ 484
Description ............................................................ 484
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 484
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 484
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 484
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .......... 486
Component Description ........................................ 486
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 486
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 486
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 486
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 488
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 489
Component Inspection .......................................... 491
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ............... 492
Component Description ........................................ 492
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 492
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 492
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 492
EC-6
2008 Quest
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 494
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 495
Component Inspection .......................................... 498
Removal and Installation ....................................... 525
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR .......................................... 526
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR .................................................................. 499
Component Description ......................................... 499
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 499
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 499
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 499
Component Description ......................................... 526
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 526
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 526
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 527
C
Component Description ......................................... 528
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 528
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 528
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 528
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 529
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 530
Component Inspection ........................................... 532
Removal and Installation ....................................... 533
Component Description ......................................... 534
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 534
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 534
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 534
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 535
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 536
Component Inspection ........................................... 539
Removal and Installation ....................................... 539
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ................................ 540
Component Description ......................................... 540
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 540
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 540
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 540
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 541
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 542
Component Inspection ........................................... 545
Removal and Installation ....................................... 545
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL
MOTOR RELAY ............................................... 510
Component Description ......................................... 510
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 510
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 510
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 510
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 511
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 512
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ............................. 546
Description ............................................................ 514
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 514
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 514
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 515
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 516
Component Inspection .......................................... 519
Removal and Installation ....................................... 520
Component Description ......................................... 546
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 546
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 546
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 546
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 548
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 549
Component Inspection ........................................... 552
Removal and Installation ....................................... 553
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .. 521
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 .............. 554
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION ............................................. 514
Component Description ......................................... 521
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 521
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 521
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 522
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 523
Component Inspection .......................................... 525
Revision: August 2007
D
E
F
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ................. 534
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .......................... 506
Description ............................................................ 506
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 506
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 506
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 506
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 507
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 508
Component Inspection .......................................... 509
EC
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ................. 528
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE .............................................................. 501
Component Description ......................................... 501
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 501
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 501
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 501
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 502
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 503
Component Inspection .......................................... 504
Removal and Installation ....................................... 504
A
EC-7
Component Description ......................................... 554
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 554
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 554
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 554
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 556
2008 Quest
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................559
Removal and Installation .......................................563
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 564
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 587
Component Inspection .......................................... 589
Removal and Installation ....................................... 590
Component Description .........................................564
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................564
Wiring Diagram ......................................................565
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................566
Component Inspection ...........................................569
IGNITION SIGNAL ............................................ 591
ASCD INDICATOR .......................................... 570
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 603
Component Description .........................................570
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................570
Wiring Diagram ......................................................571
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................571
Component Description ........................................ 603
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 604
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 605
Removal and Installation ....................................... 607
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 573
Description .............................................................573
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................573
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................573
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE
MOUNT ............................................................ 575
System Description ................................................575
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................575
Wiring Diagram ......................................................576
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................577
FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 579
Component Description .........................................579
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................579
Wiring Diagram ......................................................580
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................581
Component Inspection ...........................................584
Removal and Installation .......................................584
FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 585
Description .............................................................585
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................585
Wiring Diagram ......................................................586
Revision: August 2007
Component Description ........................................ 591
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 592
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 597
Component Inspection .......................................... 600
Removal and Installation ....................................... 602
VIAS .................................................................. 608
Description ............................................................ 608
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 609
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 610
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 611
Component Inspection .......................................... 614
Removal and Installation ....................................... 615
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ............... 616
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 616
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 618
Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 618
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 618
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 618
Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 618
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 618
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 618
EGR Temperature Sensor .................................... 618
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 619
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 619
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 619
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ..................... 619
Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 619
Fuel Injector .......................................................... 619
Fuel Pump ............................................................. 619
EC-8
2008 Quest
INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index
INFOID:0000000001717158
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
U1000
1000* 4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-139
U1001
1001*4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-139
U1010
1010
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
EC-141
P0000
0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
—
P0011
0011
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
EC-142
P0021
0021
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
EC-142
P0031
0031
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-146
P0032
0032
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-146
P0037
0037
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-153
P0038
0038
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-153
P0051
0051
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
EC-146
P0052
0052
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
EC-146
P0057
0057
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-153
P0058
0058
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-153
P0075
0075
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
EC-161
P0081
0081
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
EC-161
P0101
0101
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
EC-168
P0102
0102
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
EC-177
P0103
0103
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
EC-177
P0112
0112
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
EC-184
P0113
0113
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
EC-184
P0117
0117
ECT SEN/CIRC
EC-188
P0118
0118
ECT SEN/CIRC
EC-188
P0122
0122
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1
EC-193
P0123
0123
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1
EC-193
P0125
0125
ECT SENSOR
EC-199
P0127
0127
IAT SENSOR -B1
EC-202
P0128
0128
THERMSTAT FNCTN
EC-205
P0130
0130
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-207
P0131
0131
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-216
P0132
0132
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-224
P0133
0133
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-232
P0137
0137
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-241
P0138
0138
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-250
P0139
0139
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-262
Revision: August 2007
EC-9
2008 Quest
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*
2
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P0150
0150
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-207
P0151
0151
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-216
P0152
0152
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-224
P0153
0153
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-232
P0157
0157
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-241
P0158
0158
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-250
P0159
0159
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-262
P0171
0171
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
EC-271
P0172
0172
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
EC-281
P0174
0174
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
EC-271
P0175
0175
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
EC-281
P0181
0181
FTT SENSOR
EC-291
P0182
0182
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-296
P0183
0183
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-296
P0222
0222
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1
EC-301
P0223
0223
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1
EC-301
P0300
0300
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
EC-307
P0301
0301
CYL 1 MISFIRE
EC-307
P0302
0302
CYL 2 MISFIRE
EC-307
P0303
0303
CYL 3 MISFIRE
EC-307
P0304
0304
CYL 4 MISFIRE
EC-307
P0305
0305
CYL 5 MISFIRE
EC-307
P0306
0306
CYL 6 MISFIRE
EC-307
P0327
0327
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-314
P0328
0328
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-314
P0335
0335
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-319
P0340
0340
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-325
P0345
0345
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
EC-325
P0400
0400
EGR SYSTEM
EC-333
P0403
0403
EGR VOL CON/V CIR
EC-341
P0405
0405
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
EC-347
P0406
0406
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
EC-347
P0420
0420
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
EC-354
P0430
0430
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
EC-354
P0441
0441
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
EC-359
P0442
0442
EVAP SMALL LEAK
EC-364
P0443
0443
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-371
P0444
0444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-379
P0445
0445
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-379
P0447
0447
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-385
P0448
0448
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-390
P0451
0451
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-396
Revision: August 2007
EC-10
2008 Quest
INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P0452
0452
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-399
P0453
0453
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-405
P0455
0455
EVAP GROSS LEAK
EC-412
P0456
0456
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
EC-418
P0460
0460
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
EC-426
P0461
0461
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-428
P0462
0462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-430
P0463
0463
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-430
P0500
0500
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC
EC-432
P0506
0506
ISC SYSTEM
EC-434
P0507
0507
ISC SYSTEM
EC-436
P0550
0550
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
EC-438
P0603
0603
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
EC-443
P0605
0605
ECM
EC-447
P0643
0643
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
EC-449
P0705
0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-83
P0710
0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-88
P0711
0711
FLUID TEMP SEN
AT-93
P0717
0717
TURBINE SENSOR
AT-98
P0722
0722
VHCL SPEED SEN·AT
AT-102
P0731
0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-108
P0732
0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-111
P0733
0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-116
P0734
0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-120
P0735
0735
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
AT-123
P0744
0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-127
P0745
0745
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)
AT-130
P0750
0750
SHIFT SOL A
AT-135
P0755
0755
SHIFT SOL B
AT-140
P0760
0760
SHIFT SOL C
AT-145
P0762
0762
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
AT-150
P0765
0765
SHIFT SOL D
AT-155
P0770
0770
SHIFT SOL E
AT-160
P0775
0775
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
AT-165
P0780
0780
SHIFT
AT-170
P0795
0795
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
AT-174
P0797
0797
PC SOL C STC ON
AT-179
P0850
0850
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
EC-454
P0882
0882
TCM POWER INPT SIG
AT-188
P1148
1148
CLOSED LOOP-B1
EC-460
P1168
1168
CLOSED LOOP-B2
EC-460
P1211
1211
TCS C/U FUNCTN
EC-461
Revision: August 2007
EC-11
2008 Quest
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*
2
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P1212
1212
TCS/CIRC
EC-462
P1217
1217
ENG OVER TEMP
EC-463
P1225
1225
CTP LEARNING-B1
EC-473
P1226
1226
CTP LEARNING-B1
EC-475
P1402
1402
EGR SYSTEM
EC-477
P1421
1421
COLD START CONTROL
EC-484
P1564
1564
ASCD SW
EC-486
P1572
1572
ASCD BRAKE SW
EC-492
P1574
1574
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
EC-499
P1610
1610
LOCK MODE
BL-182
P1611
1611
ID DISCARD IMM-ECM
BL-182
P1612
1612
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
BL-182
P1614
1614
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
BL-182
P1615
1615
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
BL-182
P1800
1800
VIAS S/V-1
EC-501
P1805
1805
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
EC-506
P2100
2100
ETC MOT PWR-B1
EC-510
P2101
2101
ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1
EC-514
P2103
2103
ETC MOT PWR
EC-510
P2118
2118
ETC MOT-B1
EC-521
P2119
2119
ETC ACTR-B1
EC-526
P2122
2122
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-528
P2123
2123
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-528
P2127
2127
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-534
P2128
2128
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-534
P2135
2135
TP SENSOR-B1
EC-540
P2138
2138
APP SENSOR
EC-546
P2A00
2A00
A/F SENSOR 1 (B1)
EC-554
P2A03
2A03
A/F SENSOR 1 (B2)
EC-554
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
Revision: August 2007
EC-12
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PRECAUTIONS
A
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000003288704
EC
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INFOID:0000000001717162
N
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect negative battery cable.
O
P
SEF289H
Revision: August 2007
D
INFOID:0000000001717161
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71.
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution
C
EC-13
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Do not disassemble ECM.
• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
PBIB1164E
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely
with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
PBIB1512E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-99, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Revision: August 2007
EC-14
PBIB0090E
MEF040D
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
A
EC
C
SEF217U
D
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow
the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
• Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF348N
• B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in
the figure.
K
L
M
N
SEC893C
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-15
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0081E
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
radio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Revision: August 2007
EC-16
SEF708Y
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717163
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
EC
Description
(J-44321)
Fuel pressure gauge kit
C
Checking fuel pressure
D
E
LEC642
(J-44321-6)
Fuel pressure adapter
Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector
type fuel lines.
F
G
LBIA0376E
Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room.
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
H
I
J
PBIC0198E
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
K
L
S-NT564
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in the engine coolant
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
M
N
WBIA0539E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-17
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Commercial Service Tool
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
INFOID:0000000001717164
Description
Leak detector
i.e.: (J-41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
S-NT703
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
EVAP service port
adapter
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter
i.e.: (MLR-8382)
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
S-NT815
Socket wrench
Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor
S-NT705
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
i.e.: (J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
i.e.: (PermatexTM
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
S-NT779
Revision: August 2007
EC-18
2008 Quest
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001717165
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
PBIB2506E
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
INFOID:0000000001717166
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Revision: August 2007
EC-19
2008 Quest
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*3
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking condition
Battery
Battery voltage*3
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation*2
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*2
ECM function
Fuel injection
& mixture ratio
control
Actuator
Fuel injector
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
During warm-up
When starting the engine
During acceleration
Hot-engine operation
When shift lever is changed from N to D
High-load, high-speed operation
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (Manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
Revision: August 2007
EC-20
2008 Quest
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air A
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-216. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
EC
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (Manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
• Deceleration and acceleration
• High-load, high-speed operation
• Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
• Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
• High engine coolant temperature
• During warm-up
• After shifting from N to D
• When starting the engine
C
D
E
F
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Revision: August 2007
EC-21
2008 Quest
O
P
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
INFOID:0000000001717167
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*1
ECM function
Ignition timing
control
Actuator
Power transistor
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage
• During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed)
INFOID:0000000001717168
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Neutral position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*
ECM function
Fuel cut control
Actuator
Fuel injector
*: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Revision: August 2007
EC-22
2008 Quest
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies A
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
EC
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-19.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-23
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
INFOID:0000000001717169
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner ON signal*
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
voltage*2
Battery
Battery
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*1
ECM function
Actuator
1
Air conditioner
cut control
Air conditioner relay
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
System Description
INFOID:0000000001717170
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Revision: August 2007
EC-24
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717171
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
EC
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
C
ASCD brake switch
Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch
ASCD steering switch operation
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Combination meter
Vehicle speed*
TCM
Powertrain revolution*
ASCD vehicle speed control
Electric throttle control
actuator
D
E
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
F
G
H
SET OPERATION
I
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
J
ACCELERATOR OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed
until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
K
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is depressed
• More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Shift lever is changed to N, P, R position
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
• VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
Revision: August 2007
EC-25
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released
• A/T shift lever is in other than P and N positions
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717172
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-486.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-492 and EC-564.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer toEC-492, EC-506 and EC-564.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-510, EC-514, EC-521 and EC-526.
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-570.
Revision: August 2007
EC-26
2008 Quest
CAN COMMUNICATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000001717173
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-27
2008 Quest
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description
INFOID:0000000001717174
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
Revision: August 2007
EC-28
2008 Quest
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB3073E
:
M
From next page
1.
Intake manifold collector
4.
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
2.
EVAP service port
3.
EVAP purge resonator
N
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-29
2008 Quest
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PBIB3069E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sen- 2.
sor
:
To previous page
EVAP canister vent control valve
Component Inspection
3.
EVAP canister
INFOID:0000000001717175
EVAP CANISTER
Revision: August 2007
EC-30
2008 Quest
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C.
3. Release blocked port B.
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C.
5. Block port A and B.
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
A
EC
C
PBIB1212E
D
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1.
Wipe clean valve housing.
E
F
G
SEF445Y
2.
H
Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
I
J
K
SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
L
Refer to EC-377.
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-294.
M
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-389.
N
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-398.
EVAP SERVICE PORT
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-31
2008 Quest
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
BBIA0320E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717176
EVAP CANISTER
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
PBIB1214E
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
PBIB3082E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
INFOID:0000000001717177
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
• Do not start engine.
• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
Revision: August 2007
EC-32
2008 Quest
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-III.
A
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar
graph.
EC
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-28, "Description".
C
D
E
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
1.
2.
F
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
G
H
I
SEF462UA
3.
Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP
system.
J
K
L
M
BBIA0664E
:
1.
4.
5.
6.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
N
EVAP canister
To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-28, "Description".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-33
2008 Quest
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
System Description
INFOID:0000000001717178
PBIB1387E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
• Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
• Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
- Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
- Disconnect battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
• Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
• Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
• After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717179
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Revision: August 2007
EC-34
2008 Quest
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
A
EC
C
PBIB1213E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
D
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
E
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
G
5.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
H
I
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
J
1.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
K
L
M
N
O
P
PBIB1213E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
Revision: August 2007
EC-35
2008 Quest
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace filler neck tube.
7.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
8.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube.
9.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
SEF665U
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717180
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
EC-36
2008 Quest
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-9.
A
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
EC
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that C
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
D
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
E
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
F
G
H
I
J
BBIA0248E
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
K
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-9.
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel gauge retainer.
Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-37
2008 Quest
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0248E
Revision: August 2007
EC-38
2008 Quest
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717181
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
D
E
F
G
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection
M
INFOID:0000000001717182
N
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
O
P
PBIB1589E
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
Revision: August 2007
EC-39
2008 Quest
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
Revision: August 2007
EC-40
2008 Quest
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717183
• If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNC- EC
TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-III using NATS program card. Refer to BL-180.
• Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELFC
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
• When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-III using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) D
initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-41
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
INFOID:0000000001717184
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data
Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code
Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits
Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID
Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC
1st trip DTC
Freeze Frame
data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code
SRT status
Test value
CONSULT-III
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
GST
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
ECM
×
×*
—
—
—
×
—
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-83,
"Fail-Safe Chart".)
Two Trip Detection Logic
INFOID:0000000001717185
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable
MIL
DTC
1st trip
Items
2nd trip
—: Not applicable
1st trip DTC
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
—
—
—
×
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
—
—
—
×
—
×
×
—
Blinking
Lighting
up
Blinking
Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is
being detected
×
—
—
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is
being detected
—
—
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".)
—
Except above
—
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Revision: August 2007
EC-42
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
A
EC
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
INFOID:0000000001717186
C
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
D
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*2
SRT code
Trip
ECM*3
MIL lighting
up
Reference
page
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*4
—
1
×
EC-139
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*4
—
2
—
EC-139
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010
1010
—
1
×
EC-141
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
—
Flashing*5
—
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
—
2
×
EC-142
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P0021
0021
—
2
×
EC-142
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P0031
0031
—
2
×
EC-146
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P0032
0032
—
2
×
EC-146
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
—
2
×
EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
—
2
×
EC-153
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P0051
0051
—
2
×
EC-146
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P0052
0052
—
2
×
EC-146
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
—
2
×
EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
—
2
×
EC-153
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P0075
0075
—
2
×
EC-161
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P0081
0081
—
2
×
EC-161
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
P0101
0101
—
2
×
EC-168
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
P0102
0102
—
1
×
EC-177
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT -B1
P0103
0103
—
1
×
EC-177
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
P0112
0112
—
2
×
EC-184
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1
P0113
0113
—
2
×
EC-184
ECT SEN/CIRC
P0117
0117
—
1
×
EC-188
ECT SEN/CIRC
P0118
0118
—
1
×
EC-188
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1
P0122
0122
—
1
×
EC-193
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1
P0123
0123
—
1
×
EC-193
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
—
2
×
EC-199
IAT SENSOR-B1
P0127
0127
—
2
×
EC-202
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
—
2
×
EC-205
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P0130
0130
—
2
×
EC-207
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P0131
0131
—
2
×
EC-216
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P0132
0132
—
2
×
EC-224
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P0133
0133
×
2
×
EC-232
Revision: August 2007
EC-43
2008 Quest
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*2
ECM*3
SRT code
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference
page
HO2S2 (B1)
P0137
0137
×
2
×
EC-241
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
×
2
×
EC-250
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
×
2
×
EC-262
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P0150
0150
—
2
×
EC-207
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P0151
0151
—
2
×
EC-216
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P0152
0152
—
2
×
EC-224
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P0153
0153
×
2
×
EC-232
HO2S2 (B2)
P0157
0157
×
2
×
EC-241
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
×
2
×
EC-250
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
×
2
×
EC-262
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
—
2
×
EC-271
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
—
2
×
EC-281
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
—
2
×
EC-271
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
—
2
×
EC-281
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
—
2
×
EC-291
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
—
2
×
EC-296
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
—
2
×
EC-296
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1
P0222
0222
—
1
×
EC-301
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1
P0223
0223
—
1
×
EC-301
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
—
2
×
EC-307
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
—
2
×
EC-307
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
—
2
×
EC-307
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
—
2
×
EC-307
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
—
2
×
EC-307
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
—
2
×
EC-307
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
—
2
×
EC-307
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
—
2
—
EC-314
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
—
2
—
EC-314
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
—
2
×
EC-319
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
—
2
×
EC-325
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
P0345
0345
—
2
×
EC-325
EGR SYSTEM
P0400
0400
×
2
×
EC-333
EGR VOL CON/V CIR
P0403
0403
—
1
×
EC-341
EGR TEMP SEN/ CIRC
P0405
0405
—
2
×
EC-347
EGR TEMP SEN/ CIRC
P0406
0406
—
2
×
EC-347
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
×
2
×
EC-354
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
0430
×
2
×
EC-354
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
×
2
×
EC-359
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
×
2
×
EC-364
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0443
0443
—
2
×
EC-371
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
—
2
×
EC-379
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
—
2
×
EC-379
Revision: August 2007
EC-44
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*2
ECM*3
SRT code
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference
page
A
EC
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
—
2
×
EC-385
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0448
0448
—
2
×
EC-390
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
—
2
×
EC-396
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
—
2
×
EC-399
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
—
2
×
EC-405
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
—
2
×
EC-412
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
×*6
2
×
EC-418
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
—
2
×
EC-426
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
—
2
×
EC-428
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
—
2
×
EC-430
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
—
2
×
EC-430
P0500
0500
—
2
×
EC-432
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
—
2
×
EC-434
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
—
2
×
EC-436
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
—
2
—
EC-438
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
P0603
0603
—
2
×
EC-443
ECM
P0605
0605
—
1 or 2
× or —
EC-447
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P0643
0643
—
1
×
EC-449
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
—
1
×
AT-83
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
—
2
×
AT-88
FLUID TEMP SEN
P0711
0711
—
2
×
AT-93
TURBINE SENSOR
P0717
0717
—
1
×
AT-98
VHCL SPEED SEN·AT
P0722
0722
—
1
×
AT-102
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
0731
—
1
×
AT-108
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
0732
—
1
×
AT-111
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
—
1
×
AT-116
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
—
1
×
AT-120
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
P0735
0735
—
1
×
AT-123
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
—
1
×
AT-127
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)
P0745
0745
—
1
×
AT-130
SHIFT SOL A
P0750
0750
—
1
×
AT-135
SHIFT SOL B
P0755
0755
—
1
×
AT-140
SHIFT SOL C
P0760
0760
—
1
×
AT-145
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
P0762
0762
—
1
×
AT-150
SHIFT SOL D
P0765
0765
—
1
×
AT-155
SHIFT SOL E
P0770
0770
—
1
×
AT-160
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
P0775
0775
—
1
×
AT-165
SHIFT
P0780
0780
—
1
×
AT-170
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
P0795
0795
—
1
×
AT-174
PC SOL C STC ON
P0797
0797
—
1
×
AT-179
VEH SPEED
SEN/CIRC*5
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P0850
0850
—
2
×
EC-454
TCM POWER INPT SIG
P0882
0882
—
1
×
AT-188
Revision: August 2007
EC-45
2008 Quest
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-III
GST*2
ECM*3
SRT code
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference
page
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
—
1
×
EC-460
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
—
1
×
EC-460
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
—
2
—
EC-461
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
—
2
—
EC-462
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
—
1
×
EC-463
CTP LEARNING-B1
P1225
1225
—
2
—
EC-473
CTP LEARNING-B1
P1226
1226
—
2
—
EC-475
EGR SYSTEM
P1402
1402
×
2
×
EC-477
COLD START CONTROL
P1421
1421
—
2
×
EC-484
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
—
1
—
EC-486
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
—
1
—
EC-492
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1574
1574
—
1
—
EC-499
LOCK MODE
P1610
1610
—
2
—
BL-180
ID DISCARD IMM-ECM
P1611
1611
—
2
—
BL-180
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
P1612
1612
—
2
—
BL-180
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
P1614
1614
—
2
—
BL-180
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
P1615
1615
—
2
—
BL-180
VIAS S/V-1
P1800
1800
—
2
—
EC-501
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
—
2
—
EC-506
ETC MOT PWR-B1
P2100
2100
—
1
×
EC-510
ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1
P2101
2101
—
1
×
EC-514
ETC MOT PWR
P2103
2103
—
1
×
EC-510
ETC MOT-B1
P2118
2118
—
1
×
EC-521
ETC ACTR-B1
P2119
2119
—
1
×
EC-526
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
—
1
×
EC-528
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
—
1
×
EC-528
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
—
1
×
EC-534
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
—
1
×
EC-534
TP SENSOR-B1
P2135
2135
—
1
×
EC-540
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
—
1
×
EC-546
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P2A00
2A00
—
2
×
EC-554
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P2A03
2A03
—
2
×
EC-554
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
*5: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to “How to Display SRT Status”.
*6: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
Revision: August 2007
EC-46
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, A
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
EC
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to “EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR- C
MATION ITEMS”. These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL D
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-78, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per- E
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-III display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Revision: August 2007
EC-47
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Priority
1
Items
Freeze frame data
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2
3
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-III indication)
CATALYST
EVAP SYSTEM
HO2S
EGR SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
Performance
Priority*
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
Corresponding
DTC No.
3
Three way catalyst function
P0420, P0430
3
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
2
EVAP control system
P0442
3
EVAP control system
P0456
3
A/F sensor 1
P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0137, P0157
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0138, P0158
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0139, P0159
3
EGR function
P0400
1
EGR function
P1402
EC-48
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-III.
A
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and EC
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result
All OK
Case 1
Case 2
NG exists
Case 3
Diagnosis
← ON →
OFF
C
Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON →
OFF
← ON →
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
P0402
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
— (1)
P0402
— (0)
— (0)
OK (1)
— (1)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK
OK
—
—
P0402
—
—
—
—
P1402
NG
—
NG
NG
(Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC
—
1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
Revision: August 2007
EC-49
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PBIB2320E
*1
“How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC” *2
“How to Display SRT Status”
*3
“How to Set SRT Code”
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC&SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-III display for SRT code is shown in the figure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
Revision: August 2007
EC-50
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
A
EC
C
D
E
F
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on “SRT Item”.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-51
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Driving Pattern
JMBIA1062GB
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Revision: August 2007
EC-52
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.
A
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
EC
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
C
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
D
Pattern 3:
• The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
E
• Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal F
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
G
1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times.
During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as
possible.
H
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
I
SEF414S
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the shift lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
J
K
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID(OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (eg., if the bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of the bank 1 is displayed)
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-53
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
OBDMID
01H
Self-diagnostic test item
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 1)
HO2S
02H
03H
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 3
(Bank 1)
Revision: August 2007
DTC
Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)
Description
TID
Unit and
Scaling
ID
P0131
83H
0BH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0131
84H
0BH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0130
85H
0BH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0130
86H
0BH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0133
87H
04H
Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
Rich)
P0133
88H
04H
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
Lean)
P2A00
89H
84H
The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00
8AH
84H
The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P0130
8BH
0BH
Difference in sensor output voltage
P0133
8CH
83H
Response gain at the limited frequency
P0138
07H
0CH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0137
08H
0CH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0138
80H
0CH
Sensor output voltage
P0139
81H
0CH
Difference in sensor output voltage
P0143
07H
0CH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0144
08H
0CH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0146
80H
0CH
Sensor output voltage
P0145
81H
0CH
Difference in sensor output voltage
EC-54
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
OBDMID
Self-diagnostic test item
DTC
P0151
05H
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)
HO2S
06H
07H
21H
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 3
(Bank2)
Three way catalyst function
(Bank1)
CATALYST
22H
Three way catalyst function
(Bank2)
Revision: August 2007
Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)
A
Description
TID
Unit and
Scaling
ID
83H
0BH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
EC
P0151
84H
0BH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0150
85H
0BH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0150
86H
0BH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0153
87H
04H
Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
Rich)
P0153
88H
04H
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
Lean)
P2A03
89H
84H
The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A03
8AH
84H
The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P0150
8BH
0BH
Difference in sensor output voltage
P0153
8CH
83H
Response gain at the limited frequency
P0158
07H
0CH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0157
08H
0CH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0158
80H
0CH
Sensor output voltage
P0159
81H
0CH
Difference in sensor output voltage
P0163
07H
0CH
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0164
08H
0CH
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
cycle
P0166
80H
0CH
Sensor output voltage
P0165
81H
0CH
Difference in sensor output voltage
P0420
80H
01H
O2 storage index
P0420
82H
01H
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
value
P2423
83H
0CH
Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output voltage
P2423
84H
84H
O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
P0430
80H
01H
O2 storage index
P0430
82H
01H
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
value
P2424
83H
0CH
Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output voltage
P2424
84H
84H
O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
EC-55
2008 Quest
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
EGR
SYSTEM
EVAP
SYSTEM
O2 SENSOR
HEATER
SECONDARY AIR
OBDMID
31H
Self-diagnostic test item
EGR function
DTC
Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)
Description
TID
Unit and
Scaling
ID
P0400
80H
96H
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
rate (short term)
P0400
81H
96H
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
rate (long term)
P0400
82H
96H
Low Flow Faults: Difference between
max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400
83H
96H
Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
P1402
84H
96H
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
rate
39H
EVAP control system leak
(Cap Off)
P0455
80H
0CH
Difference in pressure sensor output
voltage before and after pull down
3BH
EVAP control system leak
(Small leak)
P0442
80H
05H
Leak area index (for more than
0.04inch)
P0456
80H
05H
3CH
EVAP control system
(Very small leak)
Leak area index (for more than
0.02inch)
P0456
81H
FDH
Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
system during monitoring
P0441
83H
0CH
Difference in pressure sensor output
voltage before and after vent control value close
3DH
Purge flow system
41H
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
Low Input:P0031
High Input:P0032
81H
0BH
Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage
42H
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
Low Input:P0037
High Input:P0038
80H
0CH
Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage
43H
Heated oxygen sensor 3
(Bank 1)
P0043
80H
0CH
Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage
45H
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
Low Input:P0051
High Input:P0052
81H
0BH
Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage
46H
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
Low Input:P0057
High Input:P0058
80H
0CH
Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage
47H
Heated oxygen sensor 3
(Bank 2)
P0063
80H
0CH
Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage
P0411
80H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System Incorrect Flow Detected
Bank1: P0491
Bank2: P0492
81H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System Insufficient Flow
P2445
82H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
Stuck Off
P2448
83H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System High
Airflow
Bank1: P2440
Bank2: P2442
84H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open
P2440
85H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open
P2444
86H
01H
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
Stuck On
71H
Secondary Air system
Revision: August 2007
EC-56
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
OBDMID
DTC
TID
Unit and
Scaling
ID
A
Description
EC
81H
Fuel injection system function
(Bank 1)
P0171 or P0172
80H
2FH
Long term fuel trim
P0171 or P0172
81H
24H
The number of lambda control clamped
82H
Fuel injection system function
(Bank 2)
P0174 or P0175
80H
2FH
Long term fuel trim
P0174 or P0175
81H
24H
The number of lambda control clamped
P0301
80H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the first
cylinder
P0302
81H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the second cylinder
P0303
82H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the third
cylinder
P0304
83H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the
fourth cylinder
P0305
84H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the fifth
cylinder
P0306
85H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the sixth
cylinder
P0307
86H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the seventh cylinder
P0308
87H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the
eighth cylinder
P0300
88H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the multiple cylinders
P0301
89H
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the first
cylinder
P0302
8AH
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the second cylinder
FUEL
SYSTEM
MISFIRE
Self-diagnostic test item
Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)
A1H
Multiple Cylinder Misfire
Revision: August 2007
P0303
8BH
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the third
cylinder
P0304
8CH
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fourth
cylinder
P0305
8DH
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth
cylinder
P0306
8EH
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth
cylinder
P0307
8FH
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth
cylinder
P0308
90H
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth
cylinder
P0300
91H
24H
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the single cylinder
P0300
92H
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the single
cylinder
P0300
93H
24H
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the multiple cylinders
EC-57
2008 Quest
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
OBDMID
A2H
A3H
A4H
A5H
Self-diagnostic test item
DTC
Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)
TID
P0301
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0301
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0302
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0302
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0303
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0303
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0304
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0304
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0305
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0305
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0306
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0306
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0307
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0307
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
P0308
0BH
24H
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles
P0308
0CH
24H
Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles
No.1 Cylinder Misfire
No.2 Cylinder Misfire
No.3 Cylinder Misfire
No.4 Cylinder Misfire
MISFIRE
A6H
A7H
A8H
A9H
Description
Unit and
Scaling
ID
No.5 Cylinder Misfire
No.6 Cylinder Misfire
No.7 Cylinder Misfire
No.8 Cylinder Misfire
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "DTC No. Index"), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
Revision: August 2007
EC-58
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
A
4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
WITH GST
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at least 10 sec- EC
onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "DTC No. Index"), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
C
2. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at least 10 sec- D
onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "DTC No. Index"), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
E
2. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
F
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
G
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
H
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
INFOID:0000000001717187
I
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-23, or see EC-616.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
J
K
L
SEF217U
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-59
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function
Explanation of Function
Mode I
Ignition switch in
ON position
BULB CHECK
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine running
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses
Ignition switch in
ON position
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
Engine stopped
Mode II
Engine stopped
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
MIL Flashing Without DTC
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-43, "Emissionrelated Diagnostic Information".
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
EC-60
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For A
the details, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
EC
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
C
D
E
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
3.
F
Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Self-diagnostic Results)".
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
G
H
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-23
or see EC-616.
I
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL
Condition
ON
When the malfunction is detected.
OFF
No malfunction.
J
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
K
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-61
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)
cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-9)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to "How
to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart
INFOID:0000000001717188
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-42, "Two Trip Detection Logic".
• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
Revision: August 2007
EC-62
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
A
SUMMARY CHART
EC
Items
MIL (goes off)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
80 (pattern C)
80 (pattern C)
40 (pattern A)
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern B)
*1, *2
*1, *2
1 (pattern B)
C
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
D
E
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
F
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”
, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-63
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL
will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the
times (pattern B) without any malDTC and the freeze frame data will be
functions.
stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for
freeze frame data will be cleared at
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the
will not be displayed any longer after
the moment OK is detected.
1st trip freeze frame data will be
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C)
stored in ECM.
without the same malfunction. (The
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
Revision: August 2007
EC-64
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART)
A
EC
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
C
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to D
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
E
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
F
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
G
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-65
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL
will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the
times (pattern B) without any malDTC and the freeze frame data will be
functions.
stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for
cle is driven once (pattern B) without
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the
will not be displayed any longer after
the same malfunction.
1st trip freeze frame data will be
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A)
stored in ECM.
without the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
When the same malfunction is de*7: tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
Revision: August 2007
EC-66
2008 Quest
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
AEC574
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
G
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-67
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717189
1.INSPECTION START
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Headlamp switch is OFF.
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5.
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
With CONSULT-III
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
Revision: August 2007
EC-68
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
A
EC
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
C
PBIA8513J
D
Without CONSULT-III
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
1.
2.
E
F
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
H
Stop engine.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
I
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
J
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
K
Refer to EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
L
M
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition
Timing Check".
N
O
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
1.
2.
P
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: August 2007
EC-69
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-325.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-319.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
A
: Timing indicator
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
JMBIA0964ZZ
11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
>> GO TO 12.
12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 13.
13.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition
Timing Check".
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Revision: August 2007
EC-70
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
A
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
C
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
A
D
E
: Timing indicator
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
JMBIA0964ZZ
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
G
H
I
17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-325.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-319.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
J
K
L
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
M
N
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
O
Did you replace the ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
2. INSPECTION END
No
>> INSPECTION END
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
P
INFOID:0000000001717190
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
EC-71
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
1. Slide the harness protector off ignition coil No.1 to clear the
wires.
2. Attach timing light to the ignition coil No.1 wires as shown in the
figure.
BBIA0196E
3.
Check ignition timing.
A
: Timing indicator
JMBIA0964ZZ
Procedure After Replacing ECM
INFOID:0000000001717191
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.
1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
2. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
3. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
4. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
5. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
VIN Registration
INFOID:0000000001717192
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-43.
Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Revision: August 2007
EC-72
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
INFOID:0000000001717193
A
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time EC
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
D
INFOID:0000000001717194
E
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
F
OPERATION PROCEDURE
G
1.
2.
3.
H
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning
INFOID:0000000001717195
I
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
J
K
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
• PNP switch: ON
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is
start the headlamp will not be illuminated.
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
- Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
With CONSULT-III
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
Revision: August 2007
M
N
O
P
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
L
EC-73
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to
the Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
2. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
Revision: August 2007
EC-74
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check PCV valve operation.
A
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-122.
EC
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
• Engine stalls.
C
• Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check
INFOID:0000000001717196
D
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
F
G
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
H
I
J
BBIA0229E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
K
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models do not have fuel return system.
L
Method A
CAUTION:
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”.
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-23.
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
• Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
• Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.
Revision: August 2007
EC-75
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool.
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710
or 16439 40U00).
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
• When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 0.08in).
Tightening torque:
PBIB0669E
1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9
- 13in-lb)
• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
BBIA0230E
5.
6.
7.
8.
After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg,
22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off.
Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling:
Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
Method B
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that thequick
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
• Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-38.
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
• Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
• Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure.
• Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
• When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose fordamage and abnormality.
Revision: August 2007
EC-76
2008 Quest
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
A
EC
At idling:
7.
8.
9.
Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
Check the following.
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-77
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
INFOID:0000000001717197
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on “WORK FLOW”.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on “Worksheet Sample” should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
WORK FLOW
Revision: August 2007
EC-78
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Overall Sequence
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
PBIB3456E
Detailed Flow
O
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC*1
1.
2.
Check DTC*1.
Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
EC-79
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
Erase DTC*1. (Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
-
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check real time diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check real time diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-82, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
• Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation
Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No
>> Check according to EC-130.
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 9.
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP
value using CONSULT-III “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-122.
Are they within the SP value?
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: August 2007
EC-80
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
A
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> GO TO 9.
EC
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
C
D
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-119, "CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode", EC-99, "ECM
Terminal and Reference Value".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
E
F
G
H
I
J
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK
>> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic
Information" and AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to
EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
L
M
N
O
P
Description
Revision: August 2007
K
EC-81
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
SEF907L
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000001717198
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
EC-82
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
EC-141.
Priority
1
2
3
EC
Detected items (DTC)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
U1010 CAN communication
P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
P0128 Thermostat function
P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0403 EGR volume control valve
P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
P0605 ECM
P0643 Sensor power supply
P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
P1610 - P1615 NATS
P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0405 P0406 EGR temperature sensor
P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
P0603 ECM power supply
P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve
P1805 Brake switch
P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
P2101 Electric throttle control function
P2118 Throttle control motor
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
P0300 - P0306 Misfire
P0400 P1402 EGR system
P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
P0710 P0711 P0717 P0722 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P0744 P0745 P0750 P0755 P0760 P0762 P0765
P0770 P0775 P0780 P0795 P0797 P0882 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
P1211 TCS control unit
P1212 TCS communication line
P1421 Cold start control
P1564 ASCD steering switch
P1572 ASCD brake switch
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fail-Safe Chart
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
INFOID:0000000001717199
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Revision: August 2007
EC-83
A
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC No.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102
P0103
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0117
P0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
or START
40°C (104°F)
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
engine starting.
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135
Throttle position sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0643
Sensor power supply
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2100
P2103
Throttle control motor relay
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101
Electric throttle control
function
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118
Throttle control motor
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2119
Electric throttle control actuator
(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Accelerator pedal position
sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Revision: August 2007
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-84
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom Matrix Chart
INFOID:0000000001717200
A
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC
1
1
2
3
2
Fuel pressure regulator system
3
3
4
4
4
Fuel injector circuit
1
1
2
3
2
Evaporative emission system
3
3
4
4
4
Air
Positive crankcase ventilation system
3
3
4
4
4
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
Electric throttle control actuator
Ignition
EGR
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Fuel pump circuit
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
Fuel
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
ENGINE STALL
AA
Warranty symptom code
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
4
C
3
4
2
D
Reference
page
E
F
G
EC-585
4
EC-75
2
EC-579
4
4
EC-28
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
EC-39
2
3
3
Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
EC-68
Ignition circuit
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
EC-591
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
EGR system
Main power supply and ground circuit
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
Throttle position sensor circuit
2
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
3
Revision: August 2007
K
2
EC-85
1
2
L
EC-131
EC-188,
EC-199
3
A/F sensor 1 circuit
2
EC-333,
EC-477
EC-168,
EC-177
1
1
J
EC-341
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
2
EC-514,
EC-526
1
2
I
EC-68
1
EGR volume control valve circuit
H
EC-146,
EC-207,
EC-216,
EC-224,
EC-232,
EC-554
EC-193,
EC-301,
EC-473,
EC-475,
EC-540
EC-449,
EC-528,
EC-534,
EC-546
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
Knock sensor circuit
2
3
Reference
page
EC-314
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
2
2
EC-319
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
3
2
EC-325
Vehicle speed signal circuit
2
Power steering pressure sensor circuit
2
ECM
2
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit
3
2
3
3
PNP switch circuit
3
3
3
3
EC-438
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit
3
3
EC-443,
EC-447
3
EC-161
3
EC-454
1
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
2
EC-501
3
Electrical load signal circuit
Air conditioner circuit
3
EC-432
3
4
EC-603
3
2
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
2
3
3
4
3
3
3
EC-573
3
3
3
2
ATC-28 or
MTC-27
BRC-10 or
BRC-50
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
Revision: August 2007
EC-86
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYMPTOM
Fuel
Fuel tank
Fuel piping
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
A
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
5
5
5
5
5
5
Air
F
5
5
5
5
5
5
—
EM-15
Air cleaner
EM-15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EM-17
Battery
SC-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
Signal plate
6
EM-116
PNP switch
4
AT-83
Cylinder head gasket
5
SC-10
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
3
M
N
Piston
Connecting rod
L
EM-94
Cylinder block
Piston ring
K
SC-17
Starter circuit
Cylinder head
I
J
5
EM-17,
EM-23
1
H
EM-15
5
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
Generator circuit
G
—
5
Air duct
Electric throttle control actuator
Engine
E
—
5
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric
throttle control actuator)
Cranking
D
EM-38
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline,
Low octane)
C
Reference
page
FL-9
5
Vapor lock
EC
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
EM-116
O
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve
mechanism
P
Timing chain
EM-54
Camshaft
EM-54
Intake valve timing control
5
5
5
5
Intake valve
5
5
EM-54
5
3
Exhaust valve
Revision: August 2007
5
EC-87
EM-94
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5
5
5
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
5
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
5
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
Exhaust
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
5
5
5
Three way catalyst
Lubrication
Cooling
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Reference
page
EM-25, EX4
EM-29, LU10, LU-12,
LU-16
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
LU-8
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-16
Thermostat
5
CO-24
Water pump
Water gallery
CO-19
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
Cooling fan
CO-26
EC-463
5
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
5
1
1
CO-10
BL-180
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
Revision: August 2007
EC-88
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine Control Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001717201
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0314E
Revision: August 2007
EC-89
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0321E
Revision: August 2007
EC-90
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BBIA0652E
:
M
Vehicle front
1.
Knock sensor harness connector
2.
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 1) harness connector
3.
4.
Ignition coil harness connector
(bank 1)
5.
Ignition coil harness connector (bank 6.
2)
Power valve actuator
7.
VIAS control solenoid valve
8.
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 2) harness connector
Fuel pump fuse (15A)
9.
Fuel injector harness connector
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-91
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0682E
:
Vehicle front
1.
Throttle valve
(view with intake air duct removed)
4.
Electronic controlled engine mount- 5.
1 harness connector
Park/neutral position switch harness 6.
connector
(view with battery tray removed)
7.
Power steering pressure sensor
harness connector
EGR temperature sensor harness
connector
(view with engine cover removed)
Revision: August 2007
2.
8.
EGR volume control valve harness
connector
EC-92
3.
9.
EGR volume control valve
Tie rod RH
(view from under vehicle)
Intake manifold collector
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1686E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0683E
:
N
Vehicle front
1.
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 1)
2.
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
(view from under the vehicle)
3.
Oil pan
(view from under the vehicle)
4.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
harness connector
5.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
harness connector
6.
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 2)
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-93
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0665E
:
Vehicle front
1.
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
4.
Intake manifold collector
5.
EVAP canister purge volume control 6.
solenoid valve
ECM harness connector
7.
Accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor harness connector
8.
EVAP service port
Intake manifold collector
Revision: August 2007
EC-94
3.
9.
EVAP canister
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
BBIA0684E
:
K
Vehicle front
L
1.
ASCD brake switch
2.
Stop lamp switch
3.
Fuel pressure regulator
4.
Fuel pump, fuel level sensor unit
and fuel filler
5.
ASCD steering switch
6.
MAIN switch
SET/COAST switch
9.
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
7.
CANCEL switch
8.
10.
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump harness connector
(view with fuel tank removed)
11. PCV valve
(view with cowl removed)
M
12. Intake manifold collector
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-95
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Vacuum Hose Drawing
INFOID:0000000001717202
BBIA0663E
1.
Power valve actuator
4.
VIAS control solenoid valve
2.
Vacuum tank
3.
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
Refer to EC-19, "Schematic" for Vacuum Control System.
Revision: August 2007
EC-96
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717203
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2498E
Revision: August 2007
EC-97
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBWA2499E
Revision: August 2007
EC-98
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001717204
A
EC
C
MBIB0045E
D
ECM Terminal and Reference Value
INFOID:0000000001717205
E
PREPARATION
ECM is located in the right side of the cowl top (behind the strut
tower).
F
G
H
BBIA0315E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
1
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
L
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
Body ground
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
M
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
N
PBIB1584E
3
R
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
O/L
Throttle control motor
(Close)
P
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB1104E
Revision: August 2007
EC-99
O
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
4
J
K
WIRE
COLOR
Approximately 5V
2
I
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 14V
5
W/L
Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
6
8
9
GR
W
W/R
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 2)
Electronic controlled engine
mount-1
Electronic controlled engine
mount-2
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 950 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm
or less
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
• 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or
less
2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 950 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm
or more
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
• 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or
more
2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 12V
10
Y/L
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB1790E
Revision: August 2007
EC-100
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 12V
11
R/L
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (Bank 1)
C
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
D
PBIB1790E
12
W
Power steering pressure
sensor
A
[Engine is running]
• Steering wheel: Being turned
0.5 - 4.5V
[Engine is running]
• Steering wheel: Not being turned
0.4 - 0.8V
E
F
Approximately 10V
G
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
13
W
H
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
I
Approximately 10V
J
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
K
PBIB1042E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
14
W
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (Bank 2)
L
M
PBIB1039E
N
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
O
PBIB1040E
15
W
Knock sensor
Revision: August 2007
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
EC-101
Approximately 2.5V
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
16
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
17
18
19
20
P/B
G
L
L/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EGR volume control valve
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
0.1 - 14V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
21
22
23
L/W
R/Y
R/B
Fuel injector No. 5
Fuel injector No. 3
Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14V)
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
Approximately 5V
24
W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
25
29
32
P
Y/G
BR
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 1)
VIAS control solenoid valve
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Revision: August 2007
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Between 1,800 and 3,600
rpm
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
EC-102
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
33
Y
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (Bank 1)
A
C
PBIB1039E
D
1.0 - 4.0V
E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
F
PBIB1040E
34
Y/G
Intake air temperature sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
40
41
42
V/W
R/L
R/W
Fuel injector No. 6
Fuel injector No. 4
Fuel injector No. 2
G
H
(11 - 14V)
I
SEC984C
J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
L
SEC985C
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-103
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting.
45
V/R
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm
(More than 100 seconds after starting engine)
SEC991C
47
R
Throttle position sensor
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
48
G/O
EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
BR/Y
Refrigerant pressure sensor
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
1.0 - 1.3V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Less than 4.5V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• EGR system: Operating
0 - 1.5V
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
0 - Approximately 1.0V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
50
51
54
55
Y
W/L
P/L
W
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Throttle position sensor 1
Mass air flow sensor
EGR temperature sensor
Approximately 2.6V
Revision: August 2007
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
EC-104
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
0 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
60
61
62
P/L
L/R
Y/R
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
A
C
SEC986C
D
0.1 - 0.6V
E
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
F
SEC987C
66
G
Throttle position sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
G
67
B
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
H
68
BR/W
PSP sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
69
L
Throttle position sensor 2
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
1.0 - 4.0V
J
K
70
W
Refrigerant pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
73
Y/B
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with engine
coolant temperature.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
0 - Approximately 1.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
74
78
W
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
Revision: August 2007
EC-105
L
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
79
80
81
GR/R
GR
G/R
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
SEC987C
82
B
APP sensor 1 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83
G
APP sensor 2 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
85
SB
Data link connector
—
—
86
P
CAN communication line
—
—
90
R/V
APP sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
O
APP sensor 2 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
94
L
CAN communication line
—
—
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
Approximately 4V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• MAIN switch: Pressed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 1V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 3V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Approximately 2V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Shift lever: P or N
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Except the above gear position
Approximately 0V
98
99
101
102
W/B
G/Y
R/G
O/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
ASCD steering switch
Stop lamp switch
PNP switch
Revision: August 2007
EC-106
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
104
106
107
108
109
111
113
WIRE
COLOR
O
W
R/L
G/B
R
W/B
B/O
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor
ASCD brake switch
Ignition switch
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Fuel pump relay
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with fuel
tank temperature.
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
J
K
L
115
116
B
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
Body ground
117
LG/B
EVAP canister vent control
valve
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
121
G
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
M
N
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
O
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)
INFOID:0000000001717206
FUNCTION
P
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*
Revision: August 2007
EC-107
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test
This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number
ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Revision: August 2007
EC-108
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA
MONITOR
ACTIVE
TEST
INPUT
DATA*2
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
A
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
×
×
×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
×
×
×
Mass air flow sensor
×
Engine coolant temperature sensor
×
A/F sensor 1
×
×
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2
×
×
×
×
Wheel sensor
×
Accelerator pedal position sensor
×
Throttle position sensor
×
Fuel tank temperature sensor
×
×
EVAP control system pressure sensor
×
×
Intake air temperature sensor
×
EGR temperature sensor
×
Knock sensor
×
×
×
×
×
×
C
D
×
E
×
×
×
EC
F
×
×
G
×
H
×
Refrigerant pressure sensor
×
Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal)
×
Air conditioner switch
×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
×
×
Stop lamp switch
×
×
Power steering pressure sensor
×
×
Battery voltage
×
Load signal
×
Fuel level sensor
×
×
ASCD steering switch
×
×
ASCD brake switch
×
×
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-109
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DATA
MONITOR
ACTIVE
TEST
Fuel injector
×
×
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
×
×
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
Throttle control motor relay
×
Throttle control motor
×
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
×
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
×
×
×
×
×
Air conditioner relay
×
Fuel pump relay
OUTPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
×
×
Cooling fan relay
×
×
×
EGR volume control valve
×
×
×
A/F sensor 1 heater
×
×
×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
×
×
×*3
×
×
×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
×
×
×
VIAS control solenoid valve
×
×
×
×
×
EVAP canister vent control valve
×
Electronic controlled engine mount
×
Calculated load value
×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-43.
*3: Always “COMPLT” is displayed.
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
CONDITION
USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
WORK ITEM
• FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure from
fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN
• THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT
• THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT.
When clearing the coefficient of
self-learning control value
Revision: August 2007
EC-110
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
USAGE
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
• IGN SW “ON”
• ENGINE NOT RUNNING
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
• NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
• FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
• WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
• WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTIII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*
• IDLE CONDITION
When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*
• IDLE CONDITION
When adjusting target ignition timing
VIN REGISTRATION
• IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM.
When registering VIN in ECM
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
H
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
I
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1
FUEL SYS-B2
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
EC-9.)
• “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
• The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
[°C] or [°F]
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
J
Description
L
M
N
• “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
• “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm]
• The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
ABSOL TH-P/S [%]
• The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
• The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
EC-111
K
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Freeze frame data
item*
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
FTFMCH1
Description
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• Always a certain value is displayed.
• These items are not efficient for V42 models.
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
Monitored item
ENG SPEED
Unit
Description
Remarks
rpm
• Indicates the engine speed computed from
the signal of the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) and camshaft position sensor
(PHASE).
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops
below the idle rpm.
• If the signal is interrupted while the engine is
running, an abnormal value may be indicated.
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1
V
B/FUEL SCHDL
msec
A/F ALPHA-B1
%
A/F ALPHA-B2
%
COOLAN TEMP/S
°C or °F
A/F SEN1 (B1)
V
A/F SEN1 (B2)
V
HO2S2 (B1)
V
HO2S2 (B2)
V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
RICH/LEAN
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM,
prior to any learned on board correction.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
• This data also includes the data for the air-fuel
ratio learning control.
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.
• When the engine coolant temperature sensor
is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe
mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed.
• The A/F signal computed from the input
signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
• The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 2 is displayed.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
RICH/LEAN
VHCL SPEED SE
km/h or mph
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination
meter is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V]
V
• The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1
V
ACCEL SEN 2
V
TP SEN 1-B1
V
TP SEN 2-B1
V
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed.
• ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage
is displayed.
• TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
FUEL T/TMP SE
°C or °F
• The fuel temperature (determined by the
signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature
sensor) is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE
°C or °F
• The intake air temperature (determined by
the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated.
Revision: August 2007
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
EC-112
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitored item
Unit
Description
EGR TEMP SEN
V
• The signal voltage of EGR temperature
sensor is displayed.
EVAP SYS PRES
V
• The signal voltage of EVAP control system
pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE
V
• The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor
is displayed.
ON/OFF
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
computed by the ECM according to the
signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
ON/OFF
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed
by ECM according to the accelerator pedal
position sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by the air
conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
ON/OFF
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
system (determined by the signal voltage
of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated.
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch
and lighting switch are OFF.
START SIGNAL
CLSD THL POS
PW/ST SIGNAL
LOAD SIGNAL
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater
fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
stop lamp switch signal.
IGNITION SW
INJ PULSE-B1
msec
INJ PULSE-B2
msec
IGN TIMING
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
PURG VOL C/V
EGR VOL CON/V
Revision: August 2007
Remarks
A
EC
C
• After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed
regardless of the starter signal.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
• Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according to
the input signals.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated.
BTDC
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by
ECM according to the input signals.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
%
• “Calculated load value” indicates the value
of the current air flow divided by peak air
flow.
g·m/s
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of the
mass air flow sensor.
%
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input
signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
step
M
N
O
P
• Indicates the EGR volume control value
computed by the ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
EC-113
L
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitored item
Unit
INT/V TIM (B1)
°CA
INT/V TIM (B2)
°CA
INT/V SOL (B1)
%
INT/V SOL (B2)
%
Description
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle.
• The control value of the intake valve timing
control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
• The advance angle becomes larger as the
value increases.
VIAS S/V-1
ON/OFF
• The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating.
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not
operating.
AIR COND RLY
ON/OFF
• The air conditioner relay control condition
(determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
ENGINE MOUNT
IDLE/TRVL
• The control condition of the electronic controlled engine mount (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
IDLE: Engine speed is below 950 rpm
TRVL: Engine speed is above 950 rpm
FUEL PUMP RLY
ON/OFF
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the
input signals.
VENT CONT/V
ON/OFF
• The control condition of the EVAP canister
vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
THRTL RELAY
ON/OFF
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay
control condition determined by the ECM
according to the input signals.
HI/MID/LOW/
OFF
• The control condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
HI: High speed operation
MID: Middle speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
COOLING FAN
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
ON/OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
ON/OFF
I/P PULLY SPD
VEHICLE SPEED
IDL A/V LEARN
TRVL AFTER MIL
Revision: August 2007
rpm
Remarks
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
ECM according to the input signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from
the turbine revolution sensor signal.
km/h or MPH
• Indicates the vehicle speed computed
from the revolution sensor signal.
YET/CMPLT
• Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET: Idle air volume learning has not been
performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully.
km or mile
• Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
EC-114
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitored item
Unit
Description
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
%
• Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals.
• The current flow to the heater becomes
larger as the value increases.
AC PRESS SEN
V
Remarks
A
EC
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant
pressure sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE
km/h or mph
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
km/h or m.p.h
• The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
C
D
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
switch signal.
CANCEL SW
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
SET/COAST switch signal.
BRAKE SW1
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
switch signal.
NON/CUT
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
NON/CUT
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
according to the input signal from the
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
cancel signal sent from the TCM.
M
CRUISE LAMP
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
lamp determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
N
SET LAMP
ON/OFF
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
determined by the ECM according to the
input signals.
O
A/F ADJ-B1
—
A/F ADJ-B2
—
MAIN SW
VHCL SPD CUT
LO SPEED CUT
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
• Indicates the correction factor stored in
ECM. The factor is calculated from the difference between the target air-fuel ratio
stored in ECM and the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 signal.
P
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
Revision: August 2007
EC-115
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
JUDGEMENT
FUEL INJECTION
• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
• Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-III.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
• Harness and connectors
• Fuel injector
• A/F sensor 1
IGNITION TIMING
• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
• Timing light: Set
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
• Perform Idle Air Volume Learning
POWER BALANCE
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine.
• A/C switch: OFF
• Shift lever: P or N
• Cut off each fuel injector signal
one at a time using CONSULT-III.
Engine runs rough or dies.
•
•
•
•
•
•
COOLING FAN*
• Ignition switch: ON
• Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”,
“LOW” and “OFF” using CONSULT-III.
Cooling fan moves and stops.
• Harness and connectors
• Cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
• Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-III.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
• Harness and connectors
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• Fuel injector
FUEL PUMP RELAY
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound.
Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound.
• Harness and connectors
• Fuel pump relay
EGR VOL
CONT/V
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Change the EGR volume control
valve opening step using CONSULT-III.
EGR volume control valve makes an
operating sound.
• Harness and connectors
• EGR volume control valve
VIAS S/V-1
• Ignition switch: ON
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” using CONSULT-III and listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes the operating
sound.
• Harness and connectors
• Solenoid valve
ENGINE
MOUNTING
• Ignition switch: ON
• Turn electronic controlled engine
mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with
the CONSULT-III.
Electronic controlled engine mount
makes the operating sound.
• Harness and connectors
• Electronic controlled engine mount
PURG VOL
CONT/V
• Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm.
• Change the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
opening percent using CONSULT-III.
Engine speed changes according to
the opening percent.
• Harness and connectors
• Solenoid valve
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
• Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III.
VENT CONTROL/V
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-III and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
• Harness and connectors
• Solenoid valve
V/T ASSIGN ANGLE
• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
• Change intake valve timing using
CONSULT-III.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
• Harness and connectors
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Revision: August 2007
EC-116
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
Harness and connectors
Compression
Fuel injector
Power transistor
Spark plug
Ignition coil
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
A
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
EC
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
C
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode
Test item
Corresponding DTC No.
Reference page
P0441
EC-359
P0442
EC-364
P0455
EC-412
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456*
P0456
EC-418
PURG VOL CN/V P1444
P0443
EC-371
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276
P0130
EC-207
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279
P0133
EC-232
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286
P0150
EC-207
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289
P0153
EC-232
HO2S2 (B1) P0139
P0139
EC-262
HO2S2 (B1) P1146
P0138
EC-250
HO2S2 (B1) P1147
P0137
EC-241
HO2S2 (B2) P0159
P0159
EC-262
HO2S2 (B2) P1166
P0158
EC-250
HO2S2 (B2) P1167
P0157
EC-241
EGR SYSTEM P0400
P0400
EC-333
EGR SYSTEM P1402
P1402
EC-477
PURG FLOW P0441
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM
A/F SEN1
HO2S2
EGR SYSTEM
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to V42 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
K
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function
INFOID:0000000001717207
DESCRIPTION
L
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual.
M
N
O
SEF139P
FUNCTION
P
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Service $01
READINESS TESTS
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
Service $02
(FREEZE DATA)
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
Revision: August 2007
EC-117
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic test mode
Function
DTCs
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
were stored by ECM.
Service $04
CLEAR DIAG INFO
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
Service $06
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
Service $07
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
Service $03
Service $08
Service $09
—
(CALIBRATION ID)
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped).
When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can be
closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
• Low ambient temperature
• Low battery voltage
• Engine running
• Ignition switch OFF
• Low fuel temperature
• Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect GST to data link connector (2), which is located under
LH dash panel near the hood opener handle.
• Brake pedal (1)
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0690E
4.
Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
Revision: August 2007
EC-118
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
A
EC
C
SEF416S
D
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717208
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1
• See EC-122.
B/FUEL SCHDL
• See EC-122.
A/F ALPHA-B1
A/F ALPHA-B2
• See EC-122.
COOLAN TEMP/S
• Engine: After warming up
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
• Engine: After warming up
More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
11 - 14V
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
TP SEN 1-B1
TP SEN 2-B1*
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: D
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
EGR TEMP SEN
• Engine: After warming up
Less than 4.5V
EVAP SYS PRES
• Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL
• Ignition switch: ON → START → ON
OFF → ON → OFF
CLSD THL POS
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
AIR COND SIG
• Engine: After warming up,
idle the engine
P/N POSI SW
• Ignition switch: ON
Revision: August 2007
G
LEAN ←→ RICH
J
K
L
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Shift lever: P or N
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
EC-119
I
Fluctuates around 1.5V
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
F
H
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
E
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
LOAD SIGNAL
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up,
idle the engine
• Ignition switch: ON
IGNITION SW
• Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON
HEATER FAN SW
• Engine: After warming up,
idle the engine
BRAKE SW
• Ignition switch: ON
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel: Not being turned
OFF
Steering wheel: Being turned
ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
OFF
ON → OFF → ON
Heater fan: Operating
ON
Heater fan: Not operating
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
13° - 18° BTDC
IGN TIMING
•
•
•
•
2,000 rpm
25° - 45° BTDC
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
•
•
•
•
2,500 rpm
5% - 35%
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
•
•
•
•
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
PURG VOL C/V
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
(Accelerator pedal is not depressed
even slightly, after engine starting)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
0 step
EGR VOL CON/V
•
•
•
•
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
rpm quickly
10 - 55 step
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
−5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 30°CA
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
0% - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
VIAS S/V-1
• Engine: After warming up
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
• Engine: After warming up
idle the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
AIR COND RLY
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
ON
ENGINE MOUNT
• Engine: Running
Engine speed: Below 950 rpm
IDLE
Engine speed: Above 950 rpm
TRVL
FUEL PUMP RLY
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
• Engine running or cranking
ON
• Except above conditions
OFF
Revision: August 2007
EC-120
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V
• Ignition switch: ON
OFF
THRTL RELAY
• Ignition switch: ON
ON
A
Engine coolant temperature: 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature: Between
95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature: Between
100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)
MID
Engine coolant temperature: 105°C
(221°F) or more
HI
D
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
E
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
I/P PULLY SPD
• Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication
VEHICLE SPEED
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
TRVL AFTER MIL
• Ignition switch: ON
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
0 - 100%
AC PRESS SEN
• Engine: Idle
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
1.0 - 4.0V
VHCL SPEED SE
• Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT-III value.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
SET VHCL SPD
• Engine: Running
ASCD: Operating.
The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
MAIN SW
• Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed
ON
MAIN switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL SW
• Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
ON → OFF
ACSD: Operating
ON
ASCD: Not operating
OFF
COOLING FAN
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
• Engine: After warming up,
idle the engine
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has
turned ON.
EC
C
G
0 - 65,535 km
(0 - 40,723 mile)
H
• Ignition switch: ON
• Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW1
• Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW2
• Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE LAMP
• Ignition switch: ON
SET LAMP
• MAIN switch: ON
• When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
I
EC-121
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
Revision: August 2007
F
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
INFOID:0000000001717210
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in
“SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When
the value in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may
have one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction)
• A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
INFOID:0000000001717211
•
•
•
•
•
-
Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
Transmission: Warmed-up
After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717212
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-122
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717213
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
PBIB2268E
Revision: August 2007
EC-123
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PBIB3214E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
3.
Start engine.
Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-122, "Testing Condition".
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
EC-124
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG
if the indication is out of the SP value even a little.
A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
EC
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
C
D
E
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
4.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
F
G
H
I
J
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition.
K
L
M
>> INSPECTION END
6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". GO
TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
O
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
P
1.
2.
Check the following.
Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
Clogged fuel filter
Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-585.)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
Revision: August 2007
EC-125
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
Check the following.
Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-591.)
Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-579.)
Intake air leakage
Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-94, "On-Vehicle Service".)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-207, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P0131, P0151, refer to EC-216, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P0132, P0152, refer to EC-224, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P0133, P0153, refer to EC-232, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-554, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-126
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 15.
A
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. EC
>> GO TO 16.
C
16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
17.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
18.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
-
Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
Engine oil level is too high
Engine oil viscosity
Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
Noise from engine
Noise from transmission, etc.
Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
EGR valve stuck
Valve clearance malfunction
Intake valve timing control function malfunction
Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
M
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
N
O
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
Revision: August 2007
EC-127
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-177.
2. GO TO 29.
NG
>> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> GO TO 29.
25.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 27.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
26.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
28.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
EC-128
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
A
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
EC
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
C
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
D
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
E
F
30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-129
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
INFOID:0000000001717214
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow
2
3 or 4
Situation
The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5
(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10
The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717215
1.INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3.SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4.CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-21, "How to Check Terminal", “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-130
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
A
INFOID:0000000001717216
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2500E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-131
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
109
111
119
120
WIRE
COLOR
R
W/B
R/G
R/G
ITEM
Ignition switch
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
Revision: August 2007
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-132
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2501E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-133
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
1
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
Body ground
115
116
B
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
Body ground
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717217
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-134
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
K
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
L
Continuity should exist.
M
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
N
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F14, E5
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
O
P
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
EC-135
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to EC-591.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB1915E
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage:
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop
approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
11.
PBIB1630E
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Revision: August 2007
EC-136
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
A
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC
12.CHECK 15A FUSE
C
1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
D
13.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
N
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
O
14.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
P
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3.
Also check harness for short to power.
Revision: August 2007
EC-137
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F14, E5
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Ground Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717218
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-30, "Ground Distribution".
PBIB1870E
Revision: August 2007
EC-138
2008 Quest
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717219
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
U1000*1
1000*1
U1001*2
CAN communication
line
1001*2
INFOID:0000000001717220
DTC detecting condition
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal of OBD (emission-related
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal other than OBD (emissionrelated diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
Possible cause
D
E
• Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
F
G
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
INFOID:0000000001717221
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-139
2008 Quest
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717222
BBWA2502E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717223
Go to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
Revision: August 2007
EC-140
2008 Quest
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717224
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717225
D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
U1010
1010
Trouble diagnosis name
CAN communication bus
DTC detecting condition
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis for CAN controller of ECM.
Possible cause
E
• ECM
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
INFOID:0000000001717226
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check DTC.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717227
1.INSPECTION START
I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
4. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
L
M
N
2.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-141
2008 Quest
O
P
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
Description
INFOID:0000000001717228
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Engine speed and piston position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*
Intake valve
timing control
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve
*: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
PBIB3275E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717229
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
−5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 30°CA
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
0% - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
Revision: August 2007
EC-142
2008 Quest
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717230
A
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
Detecting condition
P0011
0011
(Bank 1)
P0021
0021
(Bank 2)
Intake valve timing
control performance
There is a gap between angle of target and
phase-control angle degree.
Possible cause
EC
•
•
•
•
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Intake valve control solenoid valve
Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
portion of the camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve timing control
C
D
FAIL-SAFE MODE
E
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control
The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
F
INFOID:0000000001717231
NOTE:
• If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0075 or P0081. Refer to EC-161.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
G
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 60°C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 3.4 msec
Shift lever
P or N position
4.
5.
6.
7.
K
L
M
N
Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
O
P
ENG SPEED
1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S
70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Shift lever
1st or 2nd position
Driving location uphill
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
Revision: August 2007
EC-143
2008 Quest
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Check 1st trip DTC.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717232
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1.
2.
Start engine.
Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
KG
>> Go to LU-8, "Inspection".
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-145, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-324, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-332, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following.
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
SEC905C
6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Revision: August 2007
EC-144
2008 Quest
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Yes
>> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54.
No
>> GO TO 7.
A
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-84, "Inspection After Installation".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean lubrication line.
EC
C
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-320 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-326 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717233
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 or 2 and ground
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Removal and Installation
G
H
I
PBIB0193E
J
K
L
M
PBIB2275E
INFOID:0000000001717234
N
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-54.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-145
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
INFOID:0000000001717235
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
ECM function
Actuator
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 heater con- Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
trol
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717236
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0031
0031
(Bank 1)
P0051
0051
(Bank 2)
P0032
0032
(Bank 1)
P0052
0052
(Bank 2)
SPECIFICATION
0 - 100%
INFOID:0000000001717237
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 heater control circuit low
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.)
• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1 heater
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 heater control circuit
high
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.)
• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
INFOID:0000000001717238
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-146
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717239
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2505E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-147
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: August 2007
EC-148
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2506E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-149
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
PBIB1584E
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717240
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-150
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0656E
:
1.
2.
3.
E
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
G
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
I
PBIB1683E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
J
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R harness connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
K
L
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
N
Continuity should exist.
O
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
P
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: August 2007
EC-151
2008 Quest
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
7.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717241
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717242
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25.
Revision: August 2007
EC-152
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717243
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
ECM function
Actuator
C
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
D
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
E
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm
F
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600
OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
G
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717244
H
Specification data are reference values.
I
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
OFF
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
On Board Diagnosis Logic
J
ON
K
INFOID:0000000001717245
L
DTC No.
P0037
0037
(Bank 1)
P0057
0057
(Bank 2)
P0038
0038
(Bank 1)
P0058
0058
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control circuit low
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control circuit high
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
• Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is open or shorted.)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
M
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
• Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is shorted.)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
O
P
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717246
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
N
EC-153
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under
no load.
6. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
7. Check 1st trip DTC.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-154
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717247
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2507E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-155
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
25
WIRE
COLOR
P
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
74
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
78
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Revision: August 2007
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC-156
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2508E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-157
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
6
WIRE
COLOR
GR
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
55
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
78
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717248
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
Revision: August 2007
EC-158
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
: Vehicle front
A
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
C
2.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Oil pan (1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3)
Turn ignition switch ON.
D
E
F
BBIA0685E
G
3.
Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
I
J
PBIB0112E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
L
M
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
DTC
Terminals
O
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0037, P0038
25
2
1
P0057, P0058
6
2
2
P
Continuity should exist.
4.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Revision: August 2007
EC-159
2008 Quest
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Refer to EC-160, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717249
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1.
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No.
Resistance
2 and 3
5.0 - 7.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
4 and 1, 2, 3
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18
or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF249Y
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717250
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25.
Revision: August 2007
EC-160
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717251
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
EC
C
D
PBIB1842E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717252
Specification data are reference values.
F
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
•
•
•
•
E
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717253
I
DTC No.
P0075
0075
(Bank 1)
P0081
0081
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve circuit
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
J
K
INFOID:0000000001717254
L
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-161
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717255
BANK 1
BBWA2548E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-162
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
A
EC
C
7 - 12V
11
R/L
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (Bank 1)
D
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
E
PBIB1790E
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
F
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
G
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-163
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2549E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-164
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
7 - 12V
10
Y/L
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
D
PBIB1790E
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
E
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
F
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717256
I
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
J
K
L
M
BBIA0065E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
N
Voltage: Battery voltage
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
P
PBIB0192E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors F44, F101 (bank 1)
Revision: August 2007
EC-165
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F44, F101 (bank 1)
• Harness for open and short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-166, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717257
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals as follows.
Terminals
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 or 2 and ground
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
Revision: August 2007
EC-166
PBIB0193E
2008 Quest
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
A
EC
C
PBIB2275E
D
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717258
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
E
Refer to EM-54.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-167
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717259
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIB1604E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717260
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
MAS A/F SE-B1
• See EC-122.
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
•
•
•
•
2,500 rpm
5% - 35%
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
INFOID:0000000001717261
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
A)
P0101
0101
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Mass air flow sensor
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
• Intake air temperature sensor
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Intake air leaks
• Mass air flow sensor
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
• Intake air temperature sensor
Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance
B)
Possible cause
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717262
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-168
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
3. Check 1st trip DTC.
C
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
D
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following step.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB3457E
7.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
TP SEN 1-B1
More than 3V
TP SEN 2-B1
More than 3V
Shift lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8.
9.
M
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
N
O
P
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717263
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
Revision: August 2007
EC-169
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
With GST
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select Service $01 with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5. If NG, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEF534P
Revision: August 2007
EC-170
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717264
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2511E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-171
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
51
67
111
119
120
WIRE
COLOR
W/L
B
W/B
R/G
R/G
ITEM
Mass air flow sensor
Sensor ground
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
1.0 - 1.3V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717265
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A
>> GO TO 3.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-172
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0327E
3.
O
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1597E
Revision: August 2007
EC-173
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-398, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-174
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717266
A
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
D
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
C
E
F
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
G
H
I
J
K
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
L
M
Condition
Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
N
O
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
b.
P
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Revision: August 2007
EC-175
2008 Quest
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717267
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-15.
Revision: August 2007
EC-176
2008 Quest
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717268
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
EC
C
D
PBIB1604E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717269
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
E
F
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
MAS A/F SE-B1
• See EC-122.
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
•
•
•
•
2,500 rpm
5% - 35%
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic
H
I
INFOID:0000000001717270
J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
K
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0102
0102
Mass air flow sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake air leaks
• Mass air flow sensor
L
P0103
0103
Mass air flow sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Mass air flow sensor
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
N
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717271
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
Revision: August 2007
O
EC-177
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Check DTC.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
Check DTC.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-178
2008 Quest
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717272
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2511E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-179
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
51
67
111
119
120
WIRE
COLOR
W/L
B
W/B
R/G
R/G
ITEM
Mass air flow sensor
Sensor ground
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
1.0 - 1.3V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717273
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-180
2008 Quest
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0327E
3.
O
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1597E
Revision: August 2007
EC-181
2008 Quest
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-182, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717274
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Revision: August 2007
EC-182
2008 Quest
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Condition
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
A
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
EC
C
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
D
E
F
G
H
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
J
Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.3
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
I
K
L
1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
M
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation
N
O
P
INFOID:0000000001717275
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer toEM-15.
Revision: August 2007
EC-183
2008 Quest
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717276
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
25 (77)
3.32
1.800 - 2.200
80 (176)
1.23
0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
INFOID:0000000001717277
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0112
0112
Intake air temperature sensor
circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
P0113
0113
Intake air temperature sensor
circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SEF012P
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake air temperature sensor
INFOID:0000000001717278
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-184
2008 Quest
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717279
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2512E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717280
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-185
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0327E
3.
Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 2 and
ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB1598E
Revision: August 2007
EC-186
2008 Quest
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
E
Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
F
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer toEC-130.
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717281
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
I
Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 1 and
2 under the following conditions.
J
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.800 - 2.200
K
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
L
PBIB1604E
M
N
O
SEF012P
P
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717282
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-15.
Revision: August 2007
EC-187
2008 Quest
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717283
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
Engine coolant temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717284
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
Trouble Diagnosis Name
DTC Detecting Condition
P0117
0117
DTC No.
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
P0118
0118
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-III display)
Condition
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START
40°C (104°F)
Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting.
80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Except as shown above
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while
engine is running.
Revision: August 2007
EC-188
2008 Quest
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INFOID:0000000001717285
A
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Check DTC.
D
If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-189
2008 Quest
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717286
BBWA2513E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717287
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-190
2008 Quest
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
1.
2.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0323E
3.
O
Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E
Revision: August 2007
EC-191
2008 Quest
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-192, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717288
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717289
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-24.
Revision: August 2007
EC-192
2008 Quest
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717290
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717291
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
TP SEN 1-B1
TP SEN 2-B1*
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: D
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
G
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717292
I
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
E
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0122
0122
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.
P0123
0123
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2)
Accelerator pedal position sensor.
(APP sensor 2)
J
K
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
M
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717293
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Revision: August 2007
EC-193
2008 Quest
N
O
P
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-195, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717294
BBWA1604E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-194
2008 Quest
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
50
66
69
91
WIRE
COLOR
R
Y
G
L
O
ITEM
Throttle position sensor
power supply
Throttle position sensor 1
Throttle position sensor
ground
Throttle position sensor 2
APP sensor 2 power supply
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
E
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Less than 4.75V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnosis Procedure
C
D
H
I
INFOID:0000000001717295
J
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-195
2008 Quest
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0318E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
Revision: August 2007
EC-196
2008 Quest
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit.
D
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
E
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-194
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-535
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
H
Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
I
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
K
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
N
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
O
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-197
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-198, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717296
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
PBIB1608E
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717297
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-17.
Revision: August 2007
EC-198
2008 Quest
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717298
NOTE:
EC
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-188.
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
C
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the therD
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
E
SEF594K
F
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
G
Voltage*
V
Resistance kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
H
I
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic
K
DTC No.
P0125
0125
INFOID:0000000001717299
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Insufficient engine coolant
temperature for closed
loop fuel control
• Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
practical, even when some time has passed
after starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• Thermostat
INFOID:0000000001717300
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
Revision: August 2007
EC-199
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because
the test result will be OK.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-200, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717301
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
Revision: August 2007
EC-200
2008 Quest
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-24.
EC
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
4.
Refer to EC-130.
Refer to EC-190, "Wiring Diagram".
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717302
E
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
F
G
H
PBIB2005E
I
2.
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
J
K
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
L
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717303
M
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-24.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-201
2008 Quest
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717304
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
25 (77)
3.32
1.800 - 2.200
80 (176)
1.23
0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0127
0127
INFOID:0000000001717305
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake air temperature
too high
SEF012P
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Intake air temperature sensor
INFOID:0000000001717306
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
a.
b.
c.
Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check the engine coolant temperature.
Revision: August 2007
EC-202
2008 Quest
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down
engine.
A
• Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
EC
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
C
6. Check 1st trip DTC.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-203, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
D
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717307
E
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0691E
N
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
P
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-204, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Revision: August 2007
EC-203
2008 Quest
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
Refer to EC-185, "Wiring Diagram".
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717308
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.800 - 2.200
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717309
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-15.
Revision: August 2007
EC-204
2008 Quest
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
A
INFOID:0000000001717310
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long EC
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
DTC No.
P0128
0128
Trouble diagnosis name
Thermostat function
C
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The engine coolant temperature does not reach
to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough.
• Thermostat
• Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717311
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
• For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
• For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 71°C (160°F).
• Before performing the following procedure, do not fill with the fuel.
D
E
F
G
H
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Turn A/C switch OFF.
Turn blower fan switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”.
If it is below 71°C (160°F), go to following step.
If it is above 71°C (160°F), cool down the engine to less than 71°C (160°F), then go to next step.
Start engine.
Wait at idle for a least 30 minutes.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 71°C (160°F) within 30 minutes, turn ignition switch
OFF because the test result will be OK.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-205, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
J
K
L
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717312
N
1.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-205, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Component Inspection
O
P
INFOID:0000000001717313
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Revision: August 2007
EC-205
2008 Quest
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2.
PBIB2005E
2.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.0
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717314
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-24.
Revision: August 2007
EC-206
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717315
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
E
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717316
I
Specification data are reference values.
J
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
SPECIFICATION
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717317
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
P0130
0130
(Bank 1)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit
P0150
0150
(Bank 2)
DTC detecting condition
A)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other
than approx. 1.5V.
B)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V.
A)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other
than approx. 1.5V.
B)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V.
Possible Cause
M
O
P
INFOID:0000000001717318
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
EC-207
L
N
• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
or shorted.)
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Revision: August 2007
K
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTD is detected, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 8.0 msec
Shift lever
D position with “OD” OFF
7.
8.
9.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717319
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
Set D position with “OD” OFF, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to
50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times.
Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
EC-208
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Restart engine.
9. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times.
10. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
11. Make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure".
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-209
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717320
BANK 1
BBWA2503E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-210
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
Approximately 5V
C
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
E
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
F
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-211
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2504E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-212
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
EC
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
C
PBIB1584E
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Approximately 2.3V
E
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717321
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0691E
P
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-213
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0656E
:
1.
2.
3.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R harness connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank1
Bank 2
Revision: August 2007
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
EC-214
2008 Quest
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
4.
A
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
C
D
E
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
I
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717322
L
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-215
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717323
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717324
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Fluctuates around 1.5V
INFOID:0000000001717325
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No.
P0131
0131
(Bank 1)
P0151
0151
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible Cause
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit low voltage
• The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/
F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.
• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717326
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
Revision: August 2007
EC-216
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-221, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
A
EC
C
D
E
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
Gear position
Suitable position
F
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
10. Check 1st trip DTC.
11. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-221, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
I
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-217
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717327
BANK 1
BBWA2503E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-218
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
Approximately 5V
C
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
E
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
F
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-219
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2504E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-220
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
EC
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
C
PBIB1584E
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Approximately 2.3V
E
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717328
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0691E
P
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-221
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0656E
:
1.
2.
3.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R harness connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank1
Bank 2
Revision: August 2007
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
EC-222
2008 Quest
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
4.
A
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
C
D
E
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
I
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717329
L
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-223
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717330
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717331
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Fluctuates around 1.5V
INFOID:0000000001717332
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No.
P0132
0132
(Bank 1)
P0152
0152
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible Cause
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit high voltage
• The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.
• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717333
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
Revision: August 2007
EC-224
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-229, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
A
EC
C
D
E
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
Gear position
Suitable position
F
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
10. Check 1st trip DTC.
11. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-229, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
I
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-225
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717334
BANK 1
BBWA2503E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-226
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
Approximately 5V
C
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
E
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
F
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-227
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2504E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-228
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
EC
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
C
PBIB1584E
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Approximately 2.3V
E
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717335
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0691E
P
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-229
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0656E
:
1.
2.
3.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R harness connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank1
Bank 2
Revision: August 2007
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
EC-230
2008 Quest
DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
4.
A
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
C
D
E
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
I
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717336
L
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-231
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717337
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717338
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Fluctuates around 1.5V
INFOID:0000000001717339
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 temperature
index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately
long or not.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible Cause
• The response of the A/F signal computed by
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than
the specified time.
• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• PCV
• Mass air flow sensor
P0133
0133
(Bank 1)
P0153
0153
(Bank 2)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow response
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717340
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
EC-232
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
8. Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step.
9. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-122.
10. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
11. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-122.
12. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-237, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select Service $01 with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injectors
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
• Mass air flow sensor
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
8. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
9. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
10. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
11. Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-237, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-233
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717341
BANK 1
BBWA2503E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-234
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
Approximately 5V
C
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
E
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
F
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-235
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2504E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-236
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
EC
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
C
PBIB1584E
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Approximately 2.3V
E
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717342
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0691E
P
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-237
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
5.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
BBIA0327E
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-271or EC-281.
No
>> GO TO 6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-238
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
BBIA0656E
D
:
1.
3.
4.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
G
H
PBIB1683E
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R harness connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
N
O
P
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-239
2008 Quest
DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-39.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
13.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717343
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25.
Revision: August 2007
EC-240
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717344
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
EC
C
D
SEF327R
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717345
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
E
F
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
LEAN ←→ RICH
G
H
INFOID:0000000001717346
I
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuelcut.
J
K
L
PBIB2162E
M
DTC No.
P0137
0137
(Bank 1)
P0157
0157
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor 2
circuit low voltage
DTC detecting condition
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks
O
INFOID:0000000001717347
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
N
EC-241
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
9. Open engine hood.
10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
11. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
12. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-246, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717348
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
10. If NG, go to EC-246, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-242
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717349
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2509E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-243
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
25
WIRE
COLOR
P
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 1)
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
74
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
78
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Revision: August 2007
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC-244
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2510E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-245
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
6
WIRE
COLOR
GR
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 2)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
55
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
78
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717350
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
Revision: August 2007
EC-246
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
A
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
C
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-271.
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
E
F
G
H
I
BBIA0327E
J
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Oil pan (1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3)
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
L
M
N
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BBIA0685E
P
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Revision: August 2007
EC-247
O
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC
Terminals
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0137
74
1
1
P0157
55
1
2
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
DTC
Terminals
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0137
74
1
1
P0157
55
1
2
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-248, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717351
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
Revision: August 2007
EC-248
2008 Quest
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
A
EC
C
JMBIA0640GB
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
D
E
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INFOID:0000000001717352
N
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-249
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717353
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717354
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
LEAN ←→ RICH
INFOID:0000000001717355
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E
Revision: August 2007
EC-250
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0138
0138
(Bank 1)
P0158
0158
(Bank 2)
DTC detecting condition
A)
Heated oxygen
sensor 2 circuit high
voltage
B)
Possible cause
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to
the specified voltage.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure
A
EC
C
D
INFOID:0000000001717356
E
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-256, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
I
J
K
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
9. Open engine hood.
10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P0138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
11. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
12. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-256, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
F
EC-251
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717357
PROCEDURE MALFUNCTION B
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
10. If NG, go to EC-256, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-252
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717358
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2509E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-253
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
25
WIRE
COLOR
P
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 1)
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
74
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
78
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Revision: August 2007
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC-254
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2510E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-255
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
6
WIRE
COLOR
GR
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 2)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
55
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
78
B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717359
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
Revision: August 2007
EC-256
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
: Vehicle front
A
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
C
2.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Oil pan (1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3)
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BBIA0685E
H
3.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
DTC
Terminals
I
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
74
1
1
P0158
55
1
2
G
J
K
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
DTC
Terminals
L
M
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
74
1
1
P0158
55
1
2
N
Continuity should not exist.
O
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
P
4.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check HO2S2 connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-257
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-260, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Revision: August 2007
EC-258
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-281.
No
>> GO TO 3.
A
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0327E
F
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Oil pan (1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3)
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
H
I
J
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BBIA0685E
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
L
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
DTC
Terminals
K
M
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
74
1
1
P0158
55
1
2
N
O
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
DTC
Terminals
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
74
1
1
P0158
55
1
2
Revision: August 2007
P
EC-259
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-260, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717360
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
JMBIA0640GB
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
7. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-260
2008 Quest
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
EC
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
C
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
D
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
F
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717361
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
G
Refer to EM-25.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-261
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717362
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717363
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
LEAN ←→ RICH
INFOID:0000000001717364
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition
such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
DTC No.
P0139
0139
(Bank 1)
P0159
0159
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor 2
circuit slow response
DTC detecting condition
It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks
INFOID:0000000001717365
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
EC-262
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
A
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
EC
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
D
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
9. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
E
10. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
F
11. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-267, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
G
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717366
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
H
I
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 secPBIB1607E
ond during this procedure.
10. If NG, go to EC-267, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-263
2008 Quest
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717367
BANK 1
BBWA2509E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-264
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
25
74
78
A
WIRE
COLOR
P
W
B
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 1)
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
0 - 1.0V
C
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-265
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2510E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-266
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
6
55
78
A
WIRE
COLOR
GR
W
B
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (Bank 2)
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
0 - 1.0V
C
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Heated oxygen sensor 2
ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Diagnosis Procedure
E
G
H
INFOID:0000000001717368
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
F
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBIA0691E
Revision: August 2007
EC-267
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
BBIA0327E
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-271 or EC-281.
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Oil pan (1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3)
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BBIA0685E
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Revision: August 2007
EC-268
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC
A
Terminals
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0139
74
1
1
P0159
55
1
2
EC
Continuity should exist.
2.
C
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
DTC
Terminals
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0139
74
1
1
P0159
55
1
2
E
F
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
H
Refer to EC-269, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
I
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-130.
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717369
L
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-269
2008 Quest
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
JMBIA0640GB
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717370
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25.
Revision: August 2007
EC-270
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717371
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
A/F sensors 1
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
P0171
0171
(Bank 1)
P0174
0174
(Bank 2)
Fuel injection system too
lean
ECM function
Fuel injection control
DTC detecting condition
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Actuator
D
Fuel injector
Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Intake air leaks
A/F sensor 1
Fuel injector
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Lack of fuel
Mass air flow sensor
Incorrect PCV hose connection
INFOID:0000000001717372
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
E
F
G
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC276, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Revision: August 2007
EC-271
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine coolant temperature (T)
condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure". If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
8. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
9. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
10. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
11. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
BBIA0327E
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature (T)
condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
12. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
13. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
Revision: August 2007
EC-272
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717373
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2514E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-273
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
21
22
23
L/W
R/Y
R/B
Fuel injector No. 5
Fuel injector No. 3
Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14V)
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: August 2007
EC-274
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2515E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-275
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
40
41
42
V/W
R/L
R/W
Fuel injector No. 6
Fuel injector No. 4
Fuel injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717374
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1.
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-276
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
A
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
C
D
E
BBIA0656E
:
1.
3.
4.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
G
Intake manifold collector
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
I
J
K
L
Continuity should exist.
5.
F
M
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
N
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
O
P
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: August 2007
EC-277
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-585.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
• Fuel lines
• Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Install all removed parts.
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-168.
7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.
With GST
Install all removed parts.
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK (P0171)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0174)>>GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-168.
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
Revision: August 2007
EC-278
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
A
Without CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3)
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
:Vehicle front
Intake manifold collector (1)
EC
C
D
BBIA0657E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
E
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
H
PBIB2323E
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
L
10.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
M
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
N
Cylinder
Harness connector F101 terminal
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
O
P
PBIB2324E
Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
11.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
Revision: August 2007
EC-279
2008 Quest
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-579.
PBIB1986E
12.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-38.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIB1726E
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-280
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
A
INFOID:0000000001717375
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Sensor
A/F sensors 1
DTC No.
P0172
0172
(Bank 1)
P0175
0175
(Bank 2)
Input signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel injection system too
rich
ECM function
Fuel injection control
DTC detecting condition
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)
Actuator
D
Fuel injector
Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
A/F sensor 1
Fuel injector
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Mass air flow sensor
F
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717376
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
E
H
I
J
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC286, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
K
L
M
N
O
P
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Revision: August 2007
EC-281
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine coolant temperature (T)
condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
6. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
7. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
8. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
9. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
10. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
BBIA0327E
to EC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature (T)
condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
11. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
12. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
Revision: August 2007
EC-282
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717377
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2514E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-283
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
21
22
23
L/W
R/Y
R/B
Fuel injector No. 5
Fuel injector No. 3
Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14V)
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: August 2007
EC-284
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2515E
P
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-285
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
40
41
42
V/W
R/L
R/W
Fuel injector No. 6
Fuel injector No. 4
Fuel injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717378
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-286
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
A
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
C
D
E
BBIA0656E
F
:
1.
3.
4.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
G
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
I
J
K
L
Continuity should exist.
5.
M
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
N
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
O
P
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EC-287
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51
psi)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-585.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
>> Repair or replace.
6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Install all removed parts.
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-168.
7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.
With GST
Install all removed parts.
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK (P0172)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0175)>>GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-168.
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
Revision: August 2007
EC-288
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
2.
3.
-
Without CONSULT-III
Stop engine.
Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3)
Turn ignition switch ON.
: Vehicle front
Intake manifold collector (1)
A
EC
C
D
BBIA0657E
4.
E
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
PBIB2323E
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
H
I
J
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
K
L
10.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Cylinder
M
Harness connector F101 terminal
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
N
O
PBIB2324E
Operating sound should exist.
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
11.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
Revision: August 2007
EC-289
2008 Quest
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-579.
PBIB1986E
12.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1.
Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-38.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected
4. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 13.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-290
2008 Quest
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717379
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
EC
C
D
BBIA0081E
E
F
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
H
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
SEF012P
I
INFOID:0000000001717380
J
DTC No.
P0181
0181
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit range/performance
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
• Harness or connectors
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
from engine coolant temperature sensor and in• Fuel tank temperature sensor
take air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
WITH CONSULT-III
4.
5.
M
N
O
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to EC-293, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F).
Revision: August 2007
L
INFOID:0000000001717381
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
1.
2.
3.
K
EC-291
P
2008 Quest
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Check 1st trip DTC.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-293, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717382
BBWA2516E
Revision: August 2007
EC-292
2008 Quest
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717383
A
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
BBIA0691E
J
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector (1).
: Vehicle front
Turn ignition switch ON.
N
O
P
BBIA0689E
Revision: August 2007
EC-293
2008 Quest
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness connectors B148, B251
• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness connectors B148, B251
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717384
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Remove “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
Revision: August 2007
EC-294
2008 Quest
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
A
EC
C
PBIB0931E
D
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717385
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
E
Refer to FL-5.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-295
2008 Quest
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717386
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0081E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
INFOID:0000000001717387
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0182
0182
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
P0183
0183
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SEF012P
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Fuel tank temperature sensor
INFOID:0000000001717388
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-296
2008 Quest
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717389
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2516E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717390
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-297
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector (1).
: Vehicle front
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0689E
3.
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E
Revision: August 2007
EC-298
2008 Quest
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness connectors B148, B251
• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
EC
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
F
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness connectors B148, B251
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ECM
H
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
Refer to EC-299, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
K
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
M
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717391
N
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
O
P
PBIB0931E
Revision: August 2007
EC-299
2008 Quest
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717392
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5.
Revision: August 2007
EC-300
2008 Quest
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717393
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717394
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
TP SEN 1-B1
TP SEN 2-B1*
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: D
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
G
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717395
I
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
E
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0222
0222
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1
is sent to ECM.
P0223
0223
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1
is sent to ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
J
K
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up.
M
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717396
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Revision: August 2007
EC-301
2008 Quest
N
O
P
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-303, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717397
BBWA1610E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-302
2008 Quest
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
50
66
69
91
WIRE
COLOR
R
Y
G
L
O
ITEM
Throttle position sensor
power supply
Throttle position sensor 1
Throttle position sensor
ground
Throttle position sensor 2
APP sensor 2 power supply
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
E
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Less than 4.75V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnosis Procedure
C
D
H
I
INFOID:0000000001717398
J
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-303
2008 Quest
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0318E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
Revision: August 2007
EC-304
2008 Quest
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit.
D
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
E
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-302
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-535
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
H
Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
I
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
K
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
N
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
O
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-305
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-306, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717399
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
PBIB1608E
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717400
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-17.
Revision: August 2007
EC-306
2008 Quest
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717401
A
EC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
ECM function
On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0300
0300
Multiple cylinder misfire
detected
Multiple cylinder misfire.
P0301
0301
No.1 cylinder misfire detected
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
P0302
0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 2 cylinder misfires.
P0303
0303
No. 3 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
P0304
0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 4 cylinder misfires.
P0305
0305
No. 5 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 5 cylinder misfires.
P0306
0306
No. 6 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 6 cylinder misfires.
•
•
•
•
Improper spark plug
Insufficient compression
Incorrect fuel pressure
The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
Fuel injector
Intake air leak
The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted
Lack of fuel
Signal plate
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Incorrect PCV hose connection
G
H
J
K
L
M
INFOID:0000000001717402
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Revision: August 2007
F
N
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
E
I
Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
D
EC-307
2008 Quest
O
P
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
7. Check 1st trip DTC.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-308, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Vehicle speed
Engine coolant temperature (T)
condition
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed
Time
Around 1,000 rpm
Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm
Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm
Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717403
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace it.
3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1.
With CONSULT-III
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Revision: August 2007
EC-308
2008 Quest
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
A
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 11.
EC
4.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
1.
2.
3.
-
Stop engine.
Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3).
Turn ignition switch ON.
: Vehicle front
Intake manifold collector (1)
C
D
E
F
BBIA0657E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
G
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
PBIB2323E
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
J
K
L
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
M
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
N
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Cylinder
O
Harness connector F101 terminal
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
P
PBIB2324E
Operating sound should exist.
Revision: August 2007
EC-309
2008 Quest
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
Start engine.
Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-579.
PBIB1986E
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
BBIA0229E
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
PBIB2325E
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
EC-310
2008 Quest
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
A
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-591.
C
9.CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs
(Platinum-Tipped Type)".
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 10.
D
E
F
SEF156I
10.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated.
G
H
I
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)".
J
11.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
K
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-94, "On-Vehicle Service".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
L
12.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
M
Install all removed parts.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
N
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
O
13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
P
Check the following.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-585.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
• Fuel lines
• Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: August 2007
EC-311
2008 Quest
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
14.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
Items
Specifications
Target idle speed
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Follow the EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
15.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0656E
:
1.
3.
4.
Vehicle front
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) 3.
harness connector
Intake manifold collector
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
Revision: August 2007
EC-312
2008 Quest
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
A
EC
Continuity should not exist.
C
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
16.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1.
E
F
17.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-III
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
G
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
H
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
I
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-168.
18.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
K
L
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
M
19.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
N
O
>> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
P
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-313
2008 Quest
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717404
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
BBIA0067E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717405
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detected condition
P0327
0327
Knock sensor circuit low
input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
P0328
0328
Knock sensor circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Knock sensor
INFOID:0000000001717406
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-316, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-314
2008 Quest
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717407
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA1611E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-315
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
15
WIRE
COLOR
W
ITEM
Knock sensor
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.5V
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717408
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BBIA0067E
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F26, F301
• Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EC-318, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace knock sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-316
2008 Quest
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
A
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
I
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
J
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
K
6.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
N
O
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F26, F301
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground
P
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Revision: August 2007
EC-317
2008 Quest
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717409
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF227W
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717410
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-116.
Revision: August 2007
EC-318
2008 Quest
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717411
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
F
G
H
PBIB2744E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717412
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication
J
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717413
L
DTC No.
P0335
0335
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
while the engine is running.
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine running.
Possible cause
M
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Signal plate
O
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717414
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
N
EC-319
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-321, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717415
BBWA2518E
Revision: August 2007
EC-320
2008 Quest
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
C
Approximately 10V
D
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
13
W
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
E
PBIB1041E
F
Approximately 10V
G
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
H
PBIB1042E
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
I
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717416
L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-321
2008 Quest
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
: Vehicle front
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (1)
(View from under the vehicle)
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0686E
3.
Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1872E
Revision: August 2007
EC-322
2008 Quest
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
4.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
Continuity should exist.
E
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
F
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
I
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
K
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
7.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-324, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
M
N
8.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace the signal plate.
O
P
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-323
2008 Quest
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717417
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717418
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EM-29.
Revision: August 2007
EC-324
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717419
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of
camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
F
G
H
PBIB2744E
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0340
0340
(Bank 1)
P0345
0345
(Bank 2)
INFOID:0000000001717420
J
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) circuit
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
during engine running.
• The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Camshaft (Intake)
• Starter motor (Refer to SC-10.)
• Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10.)
• Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
INFOID:0000000001717421
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
4. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
K
EC-325
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717422
BANK 1
BBWA2519E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-326
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
1.0 - 4.0V
Y
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (Bank 1)
EC
C
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
33
A
D
PBIB1039E
E
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
G
PBIB1040E
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H
I
J
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-327
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2520E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-328
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
14
W
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (Bank 2)
C
D
PBIB1039E
1.0 - 4.0V
E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
F
PBIB1040E
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
G
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
I
J
INFOID:0000000001717423
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
K
Turn ignition switch to START position.
L
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10.)
M
2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-329
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
BBIA0239E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y
Revision: August 2007
EC-330
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1)
• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
F
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1)
• Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground
H
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank2) and CMP sensor (PHASE)
terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
K
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
L
M
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1)
• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
N
O
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-332, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
P
10.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
Check the following.
Revision: August 2007
EC-331
2008 Quest
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
SEC905C
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717424
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717425
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-76.
Revision: August 2007
EC-332
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717426
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
EC
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation *1
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Electrical load
Electrical load signal *1
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed *1
TCM
Gear position, shifting signal *1
ECM function
Actuator
C
D
E
EGR volume
control
EGR volume control valve
F
G
H
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions.
• Engine stopped
• Engine starting
• Engine idling
• Low engine coolant temperature
• Excessively high engine coolant temperature
• High engine speed
• Wide open throttle
• Low battery voltage
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
PBIB1843E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
P
EGR Volume Control Valve
Revision: August 2007
EC-333
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W
EGR Temperature Sensor
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEF599K
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
4.59
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
2.32
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.62
0.011 - 0.014
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
SEF068X
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717427
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
EGR TEMP SEN
• Engine: After warming up
EGR VOL CON/V
•
•
•
•
Revision: August 2007
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Shift lever: P or N
No load
SPECIFICATION
Less than 4.5V
Idle
0 step
Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
quickly
10 - 55 step
EC-334
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717428
A
If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sensor under the condition that calls for EGR, a
low-flow malfunction is diagnosed.
DTC No.
P0400
0400
Trouble diagnosis name
EGR function (Close)
EC
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
No EGR flow is detected under the condition that calls for EGR.
• Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• EGR volume control valve stuck closed
• Dead (Weak) battery
• EGR passage clogged
• EGR temperature sensor and circuit
• Exhaust gas leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717429
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
• P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III even though DTC work support test result is NG.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then
stop engine immediately.
• For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or higher.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Confirm “COOLAN TEMP/S” value is within the range listed below.
COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize.
Do not attempt to lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing
so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value
reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step.
Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “START”.
Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and then stop vehicle with engine running.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 8.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain
the conditions until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds or
more.)
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,800 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
4 - 9 msec
Shift lever
Suitable position
8.
WITH GST
EC-335
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC338, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
C
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check engine coolant temperature in Service $01 with GST.
Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize.
Do not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may
produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
3. Start engine and let it idle monitoring the engine coolant temperature value. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step.
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.
Engine speed: 1,200 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Shift lever: Suitable position
5. Stop vehicle.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
7. Select Service $07 with GST.
8. Check 1st trip DTC.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-338, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-336
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717430
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2547E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-337
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
17
18
19
20
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
G
L
L/W
ITEM
EGR volume control valve
54
P/L
EGR temperature sensor
67
B
Sensor ground
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
0.1 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Less than 4.5V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• EGR system: Operating
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717431
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
1.
2.
Start engine.
Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks.
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace exhaust system.
2.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0339E
Revision: August 2007
EC-338
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.
Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
A
Voltage: Battery voltage
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
C
PBIB0627E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
D
E
F
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
EGR volume control valve
17
6
18
3
19
4
20
1
G
H
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
5.CHECK EGR PASSAGE
M
Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace EGR passage.
N
6.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
O
P
7.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0405, P0406. Refer to EC-347, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
Revision: August 2007
EC-339
2008 Quest
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-340
2008 Quest
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717432
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
EC
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation *1
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Electrical load
Electrical load signal *1
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed *1
TCM
Gear position, shifting signal *1
ECM function
Actuator
C
D
E
EGR volume
control
EGR volume control valve
F
G
H
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions.
• Engine stopped
• Engine starting
• Engine idling
• Low engine coolant temperature
• Excessively high engine coolant temperature
• High engine speed
• Wide open throttle
• Low battery voltage
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
PBIB1843E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
P
EGR Volume Control Valve
Revision: August 2007
EC-341
2008 Quest
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717433
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EGR VOL CON/V
CONDITION
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Shift lever: P or N
No load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0 step
Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
quickly
10 - 55 step
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717434
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0403
0403
Trouble diagnosis name
EGR volume control valve circuit
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• EGR volume control valve
INFOID:0000000001717435
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm for 10 times.
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-344, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-342
2008 Quest
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717436
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2546E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-343
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
17
18
19
20
111
119
120
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
G
L
L/W
W/B
R/G
R/G
ITEM
EGR volume control valve
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
0.1 - 14V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717437
1.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0249E
4.
Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0627E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Revision: August 2007
EC-344
2008 Quest
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ECM terminal
EGR volume control valve
17
6
18
3
19
4
20
1
A
EC
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
E
4.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
F
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-130.
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717438
I
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2
and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
K
Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)]
4.
5.
6.
L
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove EGR volume control valve.
Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control
valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
M
N
O
P
SEF605Y
7.
Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Revision: August 2007
EC-345
2008 Quest
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
SEF560W
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2
and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)]
4.
5.
6.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove EGR volume control valve.
Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control
valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON and OFF.
SEF605Y
7.
Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position.
SEF560W
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717439
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EM-21.
Revision: August 2007
EC-346
2008 Quest
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717440
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.
EC
C
D
SEF599K
E
F
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
4.59
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
2.32
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.62
0.011 - 0.014
G
H
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
I
When EGR system is operating.
J
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
K
L
SEF068X
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717441
M
DTC No.
P0405
0405
P0406
0406
Trouble Diagnosis Name
EGR temperature sensor
circuit low input
EGR temperature sensor
circuit high input
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
An excessively low voltage from the EGR
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even
when engine coolant temperature is low.
• Harness or connectors
(The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
shorted.)
• EGR temperature sensor
• Malfunction of EGR function
An excessively high voltage from the EGR
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even
when engine coolant temperature is high.
• Harness or connectors
(The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
open.)
• EGR temperature sensor
• Malfunction of EGR function
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717442
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Revision: August 2007
EC-347
2008 Quest
N
O
P
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0405
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 50°C (122°F).
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool the engine down.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0406
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F).
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to 50 step and check “EGR TEMP SEN” indication.
“EGR TEMP SEN” indication should decrease to less than 1.0V.
If the check result is NG, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the check result is OK, go to the following step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,800 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
B/FUEL SCHDL
4 - 9 msec
Shift lever
Suitable position
10. Check 1st trip DTC.
11. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $01 with GST and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-348
2008 Quest
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine speed
1,200 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Shift lever
Suitable position
7.
8.
9.
A
EC
Select Service $07 with GST.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-349
2008 Quest
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717443
BBWA2545E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717444
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-350
2008 Quest
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
1.
2.
Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0319E
3.
O
Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
PBIB2577E
Revision: August 2007
EC-351
2008 Quest
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
4.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EGR temperature sensor.
5.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717445
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1
and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF611Y
Revision: August 2007
EC-352
2008 Quest
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
< Reference data>
A
4.
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.011 - 0.014
EC
C
If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.
D
E
F
G
SEF068X
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717446
H
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EM-21.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-353
2008 Quest
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717447
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YB
DTC No.
P0420
0420
(Bank 1)
P0430
0430
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
DTC detecting condition
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly.
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Three way catalyst (manifold)
Exhaust tube
Intake air leaks
Fuel injector
Fuel injector leaks
Spark plug
Improper ignition timing
INFOID:0000000001717448
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
9. Open engine hood.
10. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
12. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
13. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It
will take approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.
14. Check 1st trip DTC.
Revision: August 2007
EC-354
2008 Quest
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
15. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-355, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Overall Function Check
A
INFOID:0000000001717449
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st EC
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Open engine hood.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank
1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
9. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
10. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-355, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
C
D
E
F
G
H
PBIB1108E
I
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717450
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
J
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
K
2.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
L
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
M
N
O
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
P
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: August 2007
EC-355
2008 Quest
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
Items
Specifications
Target idle speed
675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Follow the EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTORS
1.
2.
Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for FUEL INJECTOR, EC-580.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Perform EC-581, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIB2250E
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
BBIA0229E
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
Revision: August 2007
EC-356
PBIB2325E
2008 Quest
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
EC
CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
7.
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
C
D
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-579.
E
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
F
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs
(Platinum-Tipped Type)".
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
G
H
I
SEF156I
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.
J
K
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)".
10.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-38.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
O
P
Refer to EC-130.
EC-357
M
N
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Revision: August 2007
L
2008 Quest
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).
Revision: August 2007
EC-358
2008 Quest
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717451
NOTE:
EC
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
P0441
0441
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system incorrect purge flow
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system
pressure sensor.
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
• Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
• Blocked rubber tube
• Cracked EVAP canister
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• Blocked purge port
• EVAP canister vent control valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717453
EC-359
J
K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Revision: August 2007
I
INFOID:0000000001717452
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
DTC No.
H
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
Shift lever
Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE
32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED
500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.3 - 9.0 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S
70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
9.
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC361, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717454
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch
ON
Headlamp switch
ON
Rear window defogger switch
ON
Engine speed
Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position
Any position other than P, N or R
PBIB1109E
10. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
11. If NG, go to EC-361, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-360
2008 Quest
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717455
A
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister.
EC
C
2.CHECK PURGE FLOW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D
With CONSULT-III
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-28, "Description".
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum
existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V
100%
E
F
G
Vacuum
Should exist
0%
Should not exist
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
I
3.CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-28, "Description".
4. Start engine and let it idle.
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after engine starting engine.
1.
2.
3.
J
K
L
Vacuum should not exist.
6.
Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
M
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
N
4.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
O
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair it.
P
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
Revision: August 2007
EC-361
2008 Quest
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
1.
2.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-399, P0453 EC-405.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1.
2.
Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
Check the rubber tube for clogging.
Revision: August 2007
EC-362
2008 Quest
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
A
11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
C
12.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
D
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace it.
E
13.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
F
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
G
14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
H
>> INSPECTION END
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-363
2008 Quest
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717456
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
P0442
0442
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(negative pressure)
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
control system does not operate properly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
Fuel tank temperature sensor
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
EVAP canister is saturated with water
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
MIL may come on.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Revision: August 2007
EC-364
2008 Quest
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717457
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
TESTING CONDITION:
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed
on flat level surface.
• Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
D
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
E
F
G
H
I
J
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before
driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Turn ignition switch ON.
8. Select Service $07 with GST.
• If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-361.
M
N
INFOID:0000000001717458
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
P
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
L
O
Diagnosis Procedure
1.
K
EC-365
2008 Quest
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-30, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0320E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
Revision: August 2007
EC-366
2008 Quest
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
A
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
EC
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
C
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
2
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
D
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
E
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
SEF200U
7.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
G
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
H
I
J
K
BBIA0664E
L
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: August 2007
EC-367
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
• EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-32, "Removal and Installation".
• EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
9.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1213E
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-368
2008 Quest
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
A
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
EC
14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
C
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
D
15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
E
Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
F
16.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
G
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
H
17.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
I
J
18.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
K
L
19.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
M
>> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
N
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-34.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
Revision: August 2007
EC-369
2008 Quest
O
P
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
22.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
24.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-370
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Description
INFOID:0000000001717459
A
EC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*2
ECM function
C
Actuator
D
E
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
F
G
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
H
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
I
J
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
K
L
M
SEF337U
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717460
N
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
Revision: August 2007
CONDITION
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
(Accelerator pedal is not depressed
even slightly, after engine starting)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-371
O
P
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0443
0443
INFOID:0000000001717461
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid
valve
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The canister purge flow is detected during the
specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
completely closed.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
(The valve is stuck open.)
• EVAP canister vent control valve
• EVAP canister
• Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717462
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
Touch “START”.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC374, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-374, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-372
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717463
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2517E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-373
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
45
V/R
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
SEC991C
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717464
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0255E
Revision: August 2007
EC-374
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or
tester.
A
Voltage: Battery voltage
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0080E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors F44, F101
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
E
F
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
H
I
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F44, F101
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
N
O
P
BBIA0664E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Revision: August 2007
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
EC-375
3.
EVAP canister
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
6.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
9.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
Revision: August 2007
EC-376
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 12.
No
>> GO TO 14.
A
EC
C
PBIB1213E
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
D
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
E
F
13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
H
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
I
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
J
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717465
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
K
With CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve using “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode
with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
L
M
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
N
PBIB0149E
O
Without CONSULT-III
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-377
2008 Quest
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717466
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-17.
Revision: August 2007
EC-378
2008 Quest
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
INFOID:0000000001717467
A
EC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*2
ECM function
C
Actuator
D
E
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
F
G
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
H
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
I
J
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
K
L
M
SEF337U
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717468
N
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
Revision: August 2007
CONDITION
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
(Accelerator pedal is not depressed
even slightly, after engine starting)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-379
O
P
2008 Quest
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
INFOID:0000000001717469
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0444
0444
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
open
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
P0445
0445
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
shorted
An excessively high voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717470
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-382, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-380
2008 Quest
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717471
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2517E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-381
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
45
V/R
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
SEC991C
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717472
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0255E
Revision: August 2007
EC-382
2008 Quest
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or
tester.
A
Voltage: Battery voltage
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0080E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness connectors F44, F101
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
E
F
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
H
I
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
K
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F44, F101
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
L
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
1.
2.
3.
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Revision: August 2007
EC-383
2008 Quest
N
O
P
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717473
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve using “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode
with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717474
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-17
.
Revision: August 2007
EC-384
2008 Quest
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717475
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
EC
C
D
PBIB1263E
E
F
G
H
BBIA0664E
I
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
J
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717476
K
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
L
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717477
M
DTC No.
P0447
0447
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
through EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
• EVAP canister vent control valve
INFOID:0000000001717478
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-385
2008 Quest
N
O
P
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717479
BBWA2521E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-386
2008 Quest
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
111
WIRE
COLOR
W/B
ITEM
CONDITION
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
E
C
117
LG/B
EVAP canister vent control
valve
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717480
1.INSPECTION START
G
Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
H
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen.
Check for operating sound of the valve.
J
K
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
L
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
N
O
P
BBIA0664E
:
1.
3.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
EC-387
2008 Quest
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0152E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors B107, E139
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors B107, E139
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-388
2008 Quest
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717481
A
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
EC
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C
D
E
PBIB1033E
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
F
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
G
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7.
8.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 6 again.
H
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
I
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
J
K
L
PBIB1033E
M
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
N
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
O
P
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
Revision: August 2007
EC-389
PBIB1034E
2008 Quest
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717482
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
PBIB1263E
BBIA0664E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717483
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0448
0448
INFOID:0000000001717484
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve close
SPECIFICATION
OFF
DTC detecting condition
EVAP canister vent control valve remains
closed under specified driving conditions.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• EVAP canister vent control valve
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
• Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
• EVAP canister is saturated with water
INFOID:0000000001717485
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
EC-390
2008 Quest
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
A
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
4. Repeat next procedures three times.
EC
a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
C
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
E
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
F
G
H
PBIB0972E
8.
9.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-391
2008 Quest
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717486
BBWA2521E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-392
2008 Quest
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
111
A
WIRE
COLOR
W/B
ITEM
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
117
LG/B
EVAP canister vent control
valve
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717487
F
1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
G
H
I
J
BBIA0664E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
K
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
L
M
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-394, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
N
3.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
O
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
Revision: August 2007
EC-393
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1213E
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
6.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717488
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-III
1.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Revision: August 2007
EC-394
2008 Quest
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
A
EC
C
PBIB1033E
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
D
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
E
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7.
8.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 6 again.
F
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
G
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
H
I
J
PBIB1033E
K
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
L
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
M
N
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
PBIB1034E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-395
2008 Quest
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717489
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
PBIB1207E
BBIA0664E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
EVAP canister vent control valve 3.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EVAP canister
INFOID:0000000001717490
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717491
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-449.
DTC No.
P0451
0451
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system
pressure sensor performance
ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
control system pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
INFOID:0000000001717492
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-396
2008 Quest
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
3. Check 1st trip DTC.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnosis Procedure".
A
EC
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717493
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
L
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
M
2.CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
N
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
O
P
BBIA0664E
Revision: August 2007
EC-397
2008 Quest
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
:
1.
2.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve 3.
EVAP canister
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-398, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-401.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717494
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
• Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-398
PBIB1173E
2008 Quest
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717495
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
EC
C
D
PBIB1207E
E
F
G
H
BBIA0664E
:
1.
I
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2. EVAP canister vent control valve
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
3.
EVAP canister
J
INFOID:0000000001717496
Specification data are reference values.
K
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
L
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717497
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-449.
DTC No.
P0452
0452
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor low input
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
N
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
O
INFOID:0000000001717498
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
Revision: August 2007
M
EC-399
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIB1110E
Revision: August 2007
EC-400
2008 Quest
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717499
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2522E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-401
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
BR
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
G/O
EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
67
B
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717500
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-402
2008 Quest
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
BBIA0664E
D
:
1.
2.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
E
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
G
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
H
Voltage: Approximately 5V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
PBIB0138E
K
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
L
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
P
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Revision: August 2007
EC-403
2008 Quest
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717501
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
4.
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
• Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-404
PBIB1173E
2008 Quest
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717502
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
EC
C
D
PBIB1207E
E
F
G
H
BBIA0664E
:
1.
I
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
3.
EVAP canister
J
INFOID:0000000001717503
Specification data are reference values.
K
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
L
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717504
NOTE:
If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-449.
DTC No.
P0453
0453
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
pressure sensor high insent to ECM.
put
DTC Confirmation Procedure
N
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
• EVAP canister vent control valve
• EVAP canister
• Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame
INFOID:0000000001717505
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-405
M
2008 Quest
O
P
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine wait at least 10 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIB1110E
Revision: August 2007
EC-406
2008 Quest
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717506
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2522E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-407
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
BR
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
G/O
EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
67
B
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717507
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-408
2008 Quest
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
BBIA0664E
D
:
1.
2.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
E
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
G
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
H
Voltage: Approximately 5V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
PBIB0138E
K
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
L
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
P
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Revision: August 2007
EC-409
2008 Quest
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness connectors B106, E138
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
Revision: August 2007
EC-410
2008 Quest
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 13.
No
>> GO TO 15.
A
EC
C
PBIB1213E
13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
D
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
E
F
14.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
H
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
I
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
J
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717508
K
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring, replace it with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
• Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-411
L
M
N
O
PBIB1173E
P
2008 Quest
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717509
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0455
0455
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
gross leak detected
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
EVAP control system has a very large leak such
as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does
not operate properly.
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
• Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used
• Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
• Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
• EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
• EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
leaks
• EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
• Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
• Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
• ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
MIL may come on.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717510
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
EC-412
2008 Quest
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
A
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed C
on flat level surface.
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
D
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK
[P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-413, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
G
H
I
J
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before
driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
5. Select Service $07 with GST.
• If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-361, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-413, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717511
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1.
E
K
L
M
N
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-413
2008 Quest
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-30, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
• EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-32, "Removal and Installation".
• EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
8.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
Revision: August 2007
EC-414
2008 Quest
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
A
EC
C
BBIA0320E
D
E
F
G
SEF916U
With CONSULT-III >>GO TO 9.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 10.
H
9.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
I
J
K
L
M
N
SEF200U
O
10.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
Revision: August 2007
EC-415
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0664E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor 2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
Revision: August 2007
EC-416
2008 Quest
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
A
14.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC
With CONSULT-III
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
1.
2.
15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
C
D
E
Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
F
16.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
G
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
H
17.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
I
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
J
18.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-34.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
K
L
19.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 20.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
P
21.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-417
N
O
Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
Revision: August 2007
M
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717512
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
P0456
0456
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (negative
pressure check)
• EVAP system has a very small leak.
• EVAP system does not operate
properly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control
valve.
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
and the circuit
Fuel tank temperature sensor
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing
or damaged
EVAP canister is saturated with water
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
ORVR system leaks
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
MIL may come on.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Revision: August 2007
EC-418
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717513
A
NOTE:
• If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
• After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
EC
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
D
• If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle
for more than 1 hour.
- Fuel filler cap is removed.
E
- Refilled or drained the fuel.
- EVAP component parts is/are removed.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
F
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
Follow the instruction displayed.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-420, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
• If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go
to EC-68, "Basic Inspection".
• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Overall Function Check
G
H
I
J
K
L
INFOID:0000000001717514
M
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
• Do not start engine.
• Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-419
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
BBIA0320E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Set the pressure pump and a hose.
Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect GST and select Service $08.
Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-420, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to next step.
Disconnect GST.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
Diagnosis Procedure
SEF462UI
INFOID:0000000001717515
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-420
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
A
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
EC
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
D
Refer to EC-30, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
E
5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
F
G
H
BBIA0320E
I
J
K
L
SEF916U
M
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
3.
N
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
Revision: August 2007
EC-421
2008 Quest
O
P
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
7.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0664E
:
1.
Vehicle front
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2.
EVAP canister vent control valve
3.
EVAP canister
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
• EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-32, "Removal and Installation".
• EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
Revision: August 2007
EC-422
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
A
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
EC
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
C
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
1.
D
PBIB1213E
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
E
F
G
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
I
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
J
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
K
L
M
13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
O
P
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
Revision: August 2007
N
EC-423
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
17.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-28, "Description".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-34.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
22.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-424
2008 Quest
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
A
24.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-425
2008 Quest
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717516
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0081E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717517
NOTE:
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected.
DTC No.
P0460
0460
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
noise
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to
ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Combination meter
• Fuel level sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
INFOID:0000000001717518
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-426, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717519
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-426
2008 Quest
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
A
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
EC
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717520
C
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
D
Refer to FL-5.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-427
2008 Quest
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717521
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0081E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717522
NOTE:
• If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
DTC No.
P0461
0461
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
range/performance
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change within the specified range even
though the vehicle has been driven a long distance.
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Combination meter
• Fuel level sensor
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717523
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-9.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Revision: August 2007
EC-428
2008 Quest
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
If NG, go to EC-429, "Diagnosis Procedure".
A
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 EC
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
C
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
D
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
E
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10. If NG, go to EC-429, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717524
F
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
G
H
2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
I
J
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
K
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717525
L
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-429
2008 Quest
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717526
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0081E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717527
NOTE:
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P0462 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0462
0462
Fuel level sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage is sent from the sensor is sent to ECM.
P0463
0463
Fuel level sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage is sent from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Combination meter
• Fuel level sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717528
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Wait at least 5 seconds.
3. Check 1st trip DTC.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-430, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717529
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
EC-430
2008 Quest
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
A
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
EC
Refer to EC-130.
C
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717530
D
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-431
2008 Quest
DTC P0500 VSS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0500 VSS
Description
INFOID:0000000001717531
NOTE:
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0500
0500
INFOID:0000000001717532
Trouble diagnosis name
Vehicle speed sensor
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from
vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even
when vehicle is being driven.
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
• Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
shorted)
• Wheel sensor
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items
Vehicle speed sensor
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates (High)
while engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717533
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF).
Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-432
2008 Quest
DTC P0500 VSS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENG SPEED
1,600 - 6,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
4.4 - 31.8 msec
Shift lever
Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
6.
7.
A
EC
C
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Overall Function Check
INFOID:0000000001717534
D
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
E
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine.
Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
INFOID:0000000001717535
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
H
Refer to BRC-50 (models with VDC) or BRC-10 (models without VDC).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
I
2.COMBINATION METER
J
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-5.
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-433
2008 Quest
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Description
INFOID:0000000001717536
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed
from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0506
0506
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system
RPM lower than expected
INFOID:0000000001717537
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is less than the target idle speed
by 100 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Electric throttle control actuator
• Intake air leak
INFOID:0000000001717538
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-73, before
conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service Data and
Specifications (SDS), EC-618.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
1. Open engine hood.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
7. Check 1st trip DTC.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-434, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717539
1.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Revision: August 2007
EC-434
2008 Quest
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
A
4. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
5. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
6. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
EC
7. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-435
2008 Quest
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Description
INFOID:0000000001717540
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed
from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0507
0507
INFOID:0000000001717541
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system
RPM higher than expected
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is more than the target idle
speed by 200 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Electric throttle control actuator
• Intake air leak
• PCV system
INFOID:0000000001717542
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-73, before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”, EC-618.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
1. Open engine hood.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
7. Check 1st trip DTC.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-436, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717543
1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and let it idle.
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-436
2008 Quest
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
A
3.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-437
2008 Quest
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717544
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
BBIA0241E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717545
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel: Not being turned.
OFF
Steering wheel: Being turned.
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717546
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-449.
DTC No.
P0550
0550
Trouble diagnosis name
Power steering pressure
sensor circuit
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Power steering pressure sensor
INFOID:0000000001717547
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-440, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-438
2008 Quest
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717548
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2523E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-439
2008 Quest
P
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
12
WIRE
COLOR
W
ITEM
CONDITION
Power steering pressure
sensor
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Steering wheel: Being turned
0.5 - 4.5V
[Engine is running]
• Steering wheel: Not being turned
0.4 - 0.8V
67
B
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
68
BR/W
Power steering pressure
sensor power supply
[Ignition switch ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717549
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
EC-440
2008 Quest
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
A
EC
C
BBIA0241E
D
3.
Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
F
G
SEF479Y
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
J
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
L
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
M
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
N
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR
O
Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace PSP sensor.
P
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-441
2008 Quest
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717550
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and let it idle.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition
Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned
0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned
0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717551
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to PS-24.
Revision: August 2007
EC-442
2008 Quest
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717552
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
EC
C
D
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
E
INFOID:0000000001717553
F
DTC No.
P0603
0603
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM power supply circuit
DTC detecting condition
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
properly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.]
• ECM
INFOID:0000000001717554
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Repeat step 2 to 4 for 4 times.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-445, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-443
2008 Quest
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717555
BBWA2524E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-444
2008 Quest
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
121
A
WIRE
COLOR
G
ITEM
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Diagnosis Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
INFOID:0000000001717556
C
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
MBIB0026E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
• IPDM E/R harness connector E124
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
I
J
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
K
L
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-443, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-443, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> INSPECTION END
M
1.
2.
3.
4.
N
O
P
5.REPLACE ECM
Revision: August 2007
EC-445
2008 Quest
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
3. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
4. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
5. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
6. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-446
2008 Quest
DTC P0605 ECM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0605 ECM
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717557
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
EC
C
D
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717558
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0605
0605
Trouble diagnosis name
Engine control module
E
F
DTC detecting condition
A)
ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
B)
ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
C)
ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
Possible cause
G
• ECM
H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
I
Detected items
Malfunction A
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
• ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
degrees) by the return spring.
• ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717559
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
K
L
M
N
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure".
O
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
1.
2.
3.
4.
P
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Revision: August 2007
EC-447
2008 Quest
DTC P0605 ECM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717560
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-447, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-447, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-180.
Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-448
2008 Quest
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717561
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0643
0643
Trouble diagnosis name
Sensor power supply circuit
short
EC
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects a voltage of power source
for sensor is excessively low or high.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor is
shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1)
• Power steering pressure sensor
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
C
D
E
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
G
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
H
INFOID:0000000001717562
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-451, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-449
2008 Quest
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717563
BBWA2008E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-450
2008 Quest
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
48
G/O
EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
BR/Y
Refrigerant pressure sensor
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
68
BR/W
PSP sensor power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
82
B
APP sensor 1 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
D
83
G
APP sensor 2 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
E
90
R/V
APP sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
O
APP sensor 2 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
98
106
W/B
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
C
F
G
H
I
J
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717564
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-451
2008 Quest
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0335E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1851E
Revision: August 2007
EC-452
2008 Quest
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 7 and ECM terminal 90.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit.
D
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
E
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
90
APP sensor terminal 7
EC-450
48
EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3
EC-401
49
Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
EC-604
68
PSP sensor terminal 3
EC-439
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
F
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-27).
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection".)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning component.
I
J
K
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
L
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
M
1.
2.
3.
4.
N
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
O
>> INSPECTION END
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
P
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-453
2008 Quest
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717565
When the shift position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is turned ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
The park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also indicates a transmission range switch to detect shift
lever position.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717566
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
P/N POSI SW
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Shift lever: P or N
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0850
0850
INFOID:0000000001717567
Trouble diagnosis name
Park/neutral position
switch
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.
• Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.]
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717568
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever)
Known-good signal
P or N position
ON
Except above position
OFF
3.
4.
5.
If NG, go to EC-457, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 6,375 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
2.0 - 31.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Shift lever
Suitable position
Revision: August 2007
EC-454
2008 Quest
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Check 1st trip DTC.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-457, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Overall Function Check
A
INFOID:0000000001717569
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this EC
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
Condition (Gear position)
P or N position
Except above position
3.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
D
Voltage V (Known-good data)
Approx. 0
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
If NG, go to EC-457, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
MBIB0043E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-455
2008 Quest
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717570
BBWA2532E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-456
2008 Quest
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
102
A
WIRE
COLOR
O/B
ITEM
PNP switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Shift lever: P or N
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Except above position
Approximately 0V
Diagnosis Procedure
EC
C
INFOID:0000000001717571
D
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Refer to SC-10.
E
F
2.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check voltage between combination meter terminal 30 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester under the following conditions.
G
H
Condition (Shift position)
P or N position
Except above position
Voltage
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
Approximately 0 V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
J
PBIB3286E
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
1.
2.
3.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect PNP switch harness connector (1).
: Vehicle front
Turn ignition switch ON.
M
N
BBIA0687E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-457
2008 Quest
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB3071E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 5 and combination meter terminal 30.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F33, E19
• Harness connectors E25, M90
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to AT-83.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace PNP switch.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
9.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 7.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
Revision: August 2007
EC-458
2008 Quest
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
A
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
EC
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E134, M83
• Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
11.CHECK CONBINATION METER
Refer to DI-5.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace combination meter
E
F
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-459
2008 Quest
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717572
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1148
1148
(Bank 1)
P1168
1168
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed loop control
function
DTC detecting condition
The closed loop control function for bank 1 does
not operate even when vehicle is driving in the
specified condition.
The closed loop control function for bank 2 does
not operate even when vehicle is driving in the
specified condition.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
open or shorted.]
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
NOTE:
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
Revision: August 2007
EC-460
2008 Quest
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717573
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS EC
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
C
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717574
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1211
1211
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS control unit
DTC detecting condition
ECM receives a malfunction information from
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
D
Possible cause
E
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
• TCS related parts
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717575
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-461, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
G
H
INFOID:0000000001717576
I
Go to BRC-10 or BRC-50.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-461
2008 Quest
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
INFOID:0000000001717577
NOTE:
• If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717578
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1212
1212
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS communication line
DTC detecting condition
ECM can not receive the information from
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” continuously.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• Dead (Weak) battery
INFOID:0000000001717579
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-462, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717580
Go to BRC-10 or BRC-50.
Revision: August 2007
EC-462
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717581
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
C
Cooling Fan Control
D
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
ECM function
Actuator
E
Cooling fan
control
IPDM E/R
(Cooling fan relay)
F
G
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
H
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
I
Cooling Fan Operation
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
PBIB3072E
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Revision: August 2007
EC-463
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1
2
3
Stop (OFF)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Low (LOW)
OFF
ON
OFF
Middle (MID)
ON
OFF
OFF
High (HI)
ON
OFF
ON
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan speed
Middle (MID)
High (HI)
Cooling fan motor terminals
(+)
(−)
1
3 and 4
2
3 and 4
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
4
1 and 2
3 and 4
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
middle speed condition.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717582
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
AIR COND SIG
COOLING FAN
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Engine coolant temperature: 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature: Between
95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature: Between
100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)
MID
Engine coolant temperature: 105°C
(221°F) or more
HI
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717583
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
Revision: August 2007
EC-464
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
•
•
P1217
1217
Engine over temperature
(Overheat)
•
•
A
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
Cooling fan does not operate properly
• IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
(Overheat).
• Cooling fan
Cooling fan system does not operate
• Radiator hose
properly (Overheat).
• Radiator
Engine coolant was not added to the sys• Radiator cap
tem using the proper filling method.
• Water pump
Engine coolant is not within the specified
• Thermostat
range.
For more information, refer to EC-471, "Main
12 Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check
EC
C
D
E
F
INFOID:0000000001717584
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
G
H
I
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
If the results are NG, go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure".
J
K
L
SEF621W
M
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors
operation, refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
If NG, go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-465
N
O
P
SEF621W
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717585
BBWA2528E
Revision: August 2007
EC-466
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2529E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717586
1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: August 2007
EC-467
2008 Quest
P
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to “COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT”.)
3.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
Without CONSULT-III
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-20, "Auto Active
Test".
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to “COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT”.)
1.
4.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
CO-10, "System Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump
5.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
CO-10, "System Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace radiator cap.
6.CHECK COMPONENT PARTS
Check the following.
Thermostat. Refer to CO-24.
Engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
7.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-471, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END
COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E123.
Revision: August 2007
EC-468
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
A
Voltage: Battery voltage
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB1681E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
• 40A fusible link
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
E
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
3.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121, E123 and E124.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 16, 38, 60 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
H
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
J
Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
K
L
M
BBIA0328E
2.
Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
N
Voltage: Battery voltage
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
P
PBIB1670E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• 40A fusible link
Revision: August 2007
EC-469
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8,
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminals
3, 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
BBIA0328E
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 10, 14,
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 13.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-471, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace cooling fan motors.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-470
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
INFOID:0000000001717587
A
Engine
Step
OFF
1
•
•
•
•
2
3
4
Inspection item
Equipment
Standard
Reference page
• Visual
No blocking
• Coolant mixture
• Coolant tester
50 - 50% coolant mixture
MA-11
• Coolant level
• Visual
Coolant up to MAX level in
reservoir tank and radiator
filler neck
CO-10
59 - 98 kPa
CO-16
Blocked radiator
Blocked condenser
Blocked radiator grille
Blocked bumper
• Radiator cap
• Pressure tester
EC
—
C
D
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
E
ON*2
5
• Coolant leaks
• Visual
No leaks
CO-10
ON*2
6
• Thermostat
• Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot
CO-24
ON*1
7
• Cooling fan
• CONSULT-III
Operating
See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-463).
OFF
8
• Combustion gas leak
• Color checker chemical
tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative
—
ON*3
9
• Coolant temperature
gauge
• Visual
Gauge less than 3/4 when
driving
—
• Coolant overflow to reservoir tank
• Visual
No overflow during driving
and idling
CO-10
OFF*4
10
• Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator
• Visual
Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
CO-10
OFF
11
• Cylinder head
• Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)
EM-94
12
• Cylinder block and pistons
• Visual
No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
EM-116
F
G
H
I
J
K
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
L
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717588
M
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
1.
2.
N
Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
O
Cooling fan speed
Middle (MID)
High (HI)
Cooling fan motor terminals
(+)
(−)
1
3 and 4
2
3 and 4
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
4
1 and 2
3 and 4
P
SEF734W
Cooling fan motor should operate.
Revision: August 2007
EC-471
2008 Quest
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
Revision: August 2007
EC-472
2008 Quest
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717589
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
INFOID:0000000001717590
F
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1225
1225
E
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position
learning performance
Closed throttle position learning value is excessively
low.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
G
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
INFOID:0000000001717591
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-473, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717592
H
I
J
K
L
M
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
N
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
O
P
BBIA0318E
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Revision: August 2007
EC-473
2008 Quest
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
3. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717593
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-17.
Revision: August 2007
EC-474
2008 Quest
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717594
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
INFOID:0000000001717595
F
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1226
1226
E
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position
learning performance
Closed throttle position learning is not performed
successfully, repeatedly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
G
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
INFOID:0000000001717596
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for 32 times.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-475, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
H
I
J
K
L
M
INFOID:0000000001717597
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
P
BBIA0318E
Revision: August 2007
EC-475
2008 Quest
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717598
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-17.
Revision: August 2007
EC-476
2008 Quest
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717599
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
EC
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation *1
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Electrical load
Electrical load signal *1
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed *1
TCM
Gear position, shifting signal *1
ECM function
Actuator
C
D
E
EGR volume
control
EGR volume control valve
F
G
H
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions.
• Engine stopped
• Engine starting
• Engine idling
• Low engine coolant temperature
• Excessively high engine coolant temperature
• High engine speed
• Wide open throttle
• Low battery voltage
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
PBIB1843E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
P
EGR Volume Control Valve
Revision: August 2007
EC-477
2008 Quest
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W
EGR Temperature Sensor
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEF599K
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
4.59
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
2.32
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.62
0.011 - 0.014
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
SEF068X
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717600
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
EGR TEMP SEN
• Engine: After warming up
EGR VOL CON/V
•
•
•
•
Revision: August 2007
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Shift lever: P or N
No load
SPECIFICATION
Less than 4.5V
Idle
0 step
Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
quickly
10 - 55 step
EC-478
2008 Quest
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717601
A
If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition that does not call for EGR, a high-flow
malfunction is diagnosed.
DTC No.
P1402
1402
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
EGR flow is detected under the condition
that does not call for EGR.
EGR function (Open)
EC
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• EGR volume control valve leaking or
stuck open
• EGR temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
C
D
INFOID:0000000001717602
NOTE:
• Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F).
Therefore, it will be better to turn ignition switch ON (start engine) at the engine coolant temperature below
30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation procedure.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
• Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of range below, the test cannot be
conducted.
E
F
G
H
I
COOLAN TEMP/S
EGR TEMP SEN
: −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)*
: Less than 4.8V
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the
engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine coolant temperature or EGR
temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
*: Although CONSULT-III screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it.
5.
K
L
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “START”.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take 80 seconds or more.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition OFF and cool the engine coolant temperature to the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Retry from step 1.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC482, "Diagnosis Procedure".
M
N
O
WITH GST
1.
2.
P
Turn ignition switch ON and select Service $01 with GST.
Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F).
Revision: August 2007
EC-479
2008 Quest
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature
sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Stop engine.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
7. Select Service $07 with GST.
8. Check 1st trip DTC.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-482, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIB1671E
Revision: August 2007
EC-480
2008 Quest
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717603
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2547E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-481
2008 Quest
P
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
17
18
19
20
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
G
L
L/W
ITEM
EGR volume control valve
54
P/L
EGR temperature sensor
67
B
Sensor ground
111
119
120
W/B
R/G
R/G
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
0.1 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Less than 4.5V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• EGR system: Operating
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717604
1.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0339E
4.
Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0627E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
Revision: August 2007
EC-482
2008 Quest
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and ECM
A
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
EGR volume control valve
17
6
18
3
19
4
20
1
EC
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
4.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
I
5.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EGR temperature sensor.
K
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-130.
M
>> INSPECTION END
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-483
2008 Quest
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL
Description
INFOID:0000000001717605
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition.
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1421
1421
INFOID:0000000001717606
Trouble diagnosis name
Cold start emission reduction
strategy monitoring
DTC detecting condition
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine
idle speed properly when engine is started with
prewarming up condition.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
• Lack of intake air volume
• Fuel injection system
• ECM
INFOID:0000000001717607
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
• If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C (39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go to the following step.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go
to step 1.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-484, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717608
1.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
• Crushed intake air passage
• Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part
Revision: August 2007
EC-484
2008 Quest
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
Perform EC-271, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" in DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.
OK or NG
EC
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
C
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-484, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1421 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-484, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
4. Is the 1st trip DTC P1421 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
E
F
G
H
5.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration".
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
I
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-485
2008 Quest
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717609
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
BBIA0688E
1.
ASCD steering switch
2.
MAIN switch
4
SET/COAST switch
5.
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
3.
CANCEL switch
Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717610
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
MAIN SW
• Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL SW
• Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
• Ignition switch: ON
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: Pressed
ON
MAIN switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717611
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-447.
DTC No.
P1564
1564
Trouble Diagnosis Name
ASCD steering switch
DTC Detecting Condition
• An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM.
• ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range.
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck
ON.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
Possible Cause
• Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
• ASCD steering switch
• ECM
INFOID:0000000001717612
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Revision: August 2007
EC-486
2008 Quest
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
A
b. Turn ignition switch ON.
c. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
D
8. Check DTC.
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-489, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-487
2008 Quest
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717613
BBWA2530E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-488
2008 Quest
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
67
99
A
WIRE
COLOR
B
G/Y
ITEM
CONDITION
Sensor ground
ASCD steering switch
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
Approximately 4V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• MAIN switch: Pressed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 1V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 3V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Approximately 2V
Diagnosis Procedure
C
D
E
F
INFOID:0000000001717614
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0691E
P
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-489
2008 Quest
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET/COAST SW” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
1.
2.
Switch
Monitor item
MAIN switch
MAIN SW
CANCEL switch
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
RESUME/ACC SW
SET/COAST switch
SET SW
1.
2.
Condition
Indication
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
SET/COAST switch
Condition
Voltage [V]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 1
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 3
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 2
Released
Approx. 4
PBIB0311E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
Revision: August 2007
EC-490
2008 Quest
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness connectors E26, M91
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
A
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
D
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
E
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E26, M91
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
H
Refer to EC-491, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace ASCD steering switch.
I
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-130.
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717615
L
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1.
2.
Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
SET/COAST switch
Revision: August 2007
Condition
Resistance [Ω]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 250
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 1,480
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 660
Released
Approx. 4,000
EC-491
M
N
O
PBIB1621E
2008 Quest
P
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717616
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function.
BBIA0329E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717617
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
• Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch)
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717618
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
• If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-447.
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC No.
P1572
1572
Trouble Diagnosis Name
DTC Detecting Condition
A)
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/
h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop
lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch
are sent to the ECM at the same time.
B)
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to
ECM for extremely long time while the
vehicle is driving
ASCD brake switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
• Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
• Stop lamp switch
• ASCD brake switch
• Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• ECM
INFOID:0000000001717619
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-492
2008 Quest
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
A
WITH CONSULT-III
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
C
1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF).
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indictor lights up.
D
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Shift lever
Suitable position
5.
6.
7.
E
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-495, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
F
G
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Shift lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Depress the brake pedal for more than 5
seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned vehicle speed.
8.
9.
H
I
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-495, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
J
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-493
2008 Quest
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717620
BBWA2531E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-494
2008 Quest
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
101
108
A
WIRE
COLOR
R/G
G/B
ITEM
Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Approximately 0V
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717621
E
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
F
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION
G
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
H
I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal: Fully released
J
VOLTAGE
K
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
L
MBIB0061E
M
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
N
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
O
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
Revision: August 2007
EC-495
P
2008 Quest
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1677E
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0329E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EC-496
2008 Quest
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
Refer to EC-498, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
EC
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
D
E
F
BBIA0329E
3.
G
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
J
PBIB1184E
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the following.
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
N
Continuity should exist.
O
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
P
10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-498, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
Revision: August 2007
EC-497
2008 Quest
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717622
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
Should exist
Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-5, and
perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
Should not exist
Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-5, and
perform step 3 again.
PBIB1185E
Revision: August 2007
EC-498
2008 Quest
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717623
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina- EC
tion meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-25 for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717624
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-141.
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer
to EC-432.
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-447.
DTC No.
P1574
1574
Trouble Diagnosis Name
ASCD vehicle speed
sensor
D
E
F
G
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified range.
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM
• ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
C
H
I
INFOID:0000000001717625
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF).
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-499, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717626
J
K
L
M
N
O
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
P
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-10 or BRC-50.
Revision: August 2007
EC-499
2008 Quest
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: August 2007
EC-500
2008 Quest
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717627
The VIAS control solenoid valve (2) cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator (1).
•
: Vehicle front
EC
C
D
BBIA0649E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717628
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VIAS S/V-1
E
F
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
G
INFOID:0000000001717629
H
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1800
1800
Trouble diagnosis name
VIAS control solenoid valve
circuit
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low or high voltage signal is
sent to ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
I
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
• VIAS control solenoid valve
INFOID:0000000001717630
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-503, "Diagnosis Procedure".
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-501
2008 Quest
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717631
BBWA2533E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-502
2008 Quest
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
29
111
119
120
A
WIRE
COLOR
Y/G
W/B
R/G
R/G
ITEM
VIAS control solenoid valve
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Between 1,800 and 3,600
rpm.
0 - 1.0V
C
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
E
F
INFOID:0000000001717632
G
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
-
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector (2).
Turn ignition switch ON.
: Vehicle front
Power valve actuator (1)
H
I
J
BBIA0649E
4.
Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
K
L
Voltage: Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
N
PBIB0173E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
O
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM
P
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
EC-503
2008 Quest
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-504, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717633
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition
VIAS S/V-1
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
ON
Yes
No
OFF
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No
No supply
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2532E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717634
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Revision: August 2007
EC-504
2008 Quest
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to EM-23.
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-505
2008 Quest
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000001717635
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717636
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
BRAKE SW
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717637
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1805
1805
Trouble diagnosis name
Brake switch
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
• Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
• Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition
Driving condition
When engine is idling
Normal
When accelerating
Poor acceleration
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INFOID:0000000001717638
Turn ignition switch ON.
Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
Erase the DTC.
Check 1st trip DTC.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-508, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-506
2008 Quest
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717639
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2534E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-507
2008 Quest
P
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
101
WIRE
COLOR
R/G
ITEM
Stop lamp switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717640
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal
Stop lamp
Fully released
Not illuminated
Slightly depressed
Illuminated
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0329E
2.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1184E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• 10A fuse
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Revision: August 2007
EC-508
2008 Quest
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A
Continuity should exist.
EC
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
D
Refer to EC-509, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
E
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
G
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717641
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
H
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
I
J
K
BBIA0329E
2.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Conditions
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
3.
L
Continuity
M
Should not exist
Should exist
N
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-5, and
perform step 2 again.
PBIB1185E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-509
2008 Quest
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717642
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717643
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL RELAY
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717644
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P2100
2100
Throttle control motor
relay circuit open
ECM detects a voltage of power source for
throttle control motor is excessively low.
• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
open)
• Throttle control motor relay
P2103
2103
Throttle control motor
relay circuit short
ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is
stuck ON.
• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
shorted)
• Throttle control motor relay
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717645
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
Check DTC.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-512, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-512, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-510
2008 Quest
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717646
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2526E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-511
2008 Quest
P
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
4
O/L
Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
5
W/L
Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
104
O
Throttle control motor relay
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717647
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EC-512
2008 Quest
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK FUSE
A
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
EC
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
C
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
D
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
E
F
MBIB0028E
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
H
I
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
J
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-513
2008 Quest
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
INFOID:0000000001717648
NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-510 or EC-526.
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717649
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2101
2101
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
performance
DTC detecting condition
Electric throttle control function does not operate properly.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or
shorted)
• Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717650
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1. If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Turn ignition switch ON.
c. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-516, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
EC-514
2008 Quest
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717651
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2525E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-515
2008 Quest
P
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
4
O/L
Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
5
W/L
Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
104
O
Throttle control motor relay
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717652
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-516
2008 Quest
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
K
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
L
M
N
MBIB0028E
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-517
2008 Quest
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Revision: August 2007
EC-518
2008 Quest
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
ECM terminal
3
6
A
EC
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
C
BBIA0318E
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
D
E
F
10.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
G
H
I
BBIA0318E
J
11.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-519, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
K
L
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
M
N
13.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
O
>> INSPECTION END
P
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717653
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-519
2008 Quest
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
PBIB0095E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717654
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-23.
Revision: August 2007
EC-520
2008 Quest
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717655
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
EC
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
C
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717656
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2118
2118
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
circuit short
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects short in both circuits between
ECM and throttle control motor.
D
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
E
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
G
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
H
INFOID:0000000001717657
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
Check DTC.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-523, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-521
2008 Quest
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717658
BBWA2527E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-522
2008 Quest
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
A
EC
C
0 - 14V
4
O/L
Throttle control motor
(Close)
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
E
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
5
W/L
Throttle control motor
(Open)
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
G
PBIB1105E
104
O
Throttle control motor relay
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
H
I
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717659
J
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-523
2008 Quest
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
3
6
ECM terminal
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
BBIA0318E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-525, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: August 2007
EC-524
2008 Quest
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC
5.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
C
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717660
E
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
F
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
G
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
H
I
PBIB0095E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717661
J
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-17.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-525
2008 Quest
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717662
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717663
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2119
2119
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
actuator
DTC detecting condition
A)
Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction.
B)
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
not in specified range.
C)
ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
Possible cause
• Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717664
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed,
perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Set shift lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
Set shift lever to N or P position.
Turn ignition witch OFF and wait at least 10 second.
Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Set shift lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
Set shift lever to N or P position.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
Check DTC.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
Revision: August 2007
EC-526
2008 Quest
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Set shift lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Set shift lever to P or N position.
4. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
5. Check DTC.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
A
EC
INFOID:0000000001717665
C
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
D
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
E
F
G
BBIA0318E
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
H
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-527
2008 Quest
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717666
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717667
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
CLSD THL POS
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717668
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-449.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P2122
2122
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the APP
sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
P2123
2123
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the APP
sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717669
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: August 2007
EC-528
2008 Quest
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-530, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717670
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA2026E
Revision: August 2007
EC-529
2008 Quest
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
82
B
APP sensor 1 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83
G
APP sensor 2 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90
R/V
APP sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
O
APP sensor 2 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
2.0 - 2.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
98
106
W/B
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717671
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-530
2008 Quest
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0335E
3.
O
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB1851E
Revision: August 2007
EC-531
2008 Quest
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717672
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
EC-532
2008 Quest
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
Fully depressed
0.2 - 2.5V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
EC
C
MBIB0023E
D
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Removal and Installation
E
INFOID:0000000001717673
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-533
2008 Quest
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717674
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717675
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
CLSD THL POS
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717676
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P2127
2127
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the APP
sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
P2128
2128
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the APP
sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717677
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: August 2007
EC-534
2008 Quest
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-536, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717678
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA1639E
Revision: August 2007
EC-535
2008 Quest
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
47
R
Throttle position sensor
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
82
B
APP sensor 1 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83
G
APP sensor 2 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90
R/V
APP sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
O
APP sensor 2 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
0.2 - 2.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
98
106
W/B
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717679
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-536
2008 Quest
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
K
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0335E
3.
O
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1852E
Revision: August 2007
EC-537
2008 Quest
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-535
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-541
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace electric throttle control actuator.
PerformEC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
Revision: August 2007
EC-538
2008 Quest
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
A
Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
EC
10.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
PerformEC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
D
E
>> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
F
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717680
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
G
H
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
I
J
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
Fully depressed
0.2 - 2.5V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
K
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Removal and Installation
L
M
INFOID:0000000001717681
N
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
O
Refer to ACC-3.
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-539
2008 Quest
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717682
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717683
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
TP SEN 1-B1
TP SEN 2-B1*
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: D
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717684
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2135
2135
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle position sensor
circuit range/performance
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
and TP sensor 2.
Possible cause
• Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717685
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
Revision: August 2007
EC-540
2008 Quest
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-542, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Wiring Diagram
A
INFOID:0000000001717686
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
BBWA1640E
Revision: August 2007
EC-541
2008 Quest
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
50
66
69
91
WIRE
COLOR
R
Y
G
L
O
ITEM
Throttle position sensor
power supply
Throttle position sensor 1
Throttle position sensor
ground
Throttle position sensor 2
APP sensor 2 power supply
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717687
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
EC-542
2008 Quest
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
I
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
K
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
N
BBIA0318E
3.
O
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
P
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
Revision: August 2007
EC-543
2008 Quest
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-541
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-548
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-552, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
PerformEC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Revision: August 2007
EC-544
2008 Quest
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
A
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
EC
Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
C
10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
D
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
E
>> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
G
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717688
H
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
I
J
K
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
L
PBIB1608E
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Removal and Installation
M
N
INFOID:0000000001717689
O
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-17.
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-545
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717690
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717691
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2*
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
CLSD THL POS
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717692
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-449.
DTC No.
P2138
2138
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to
ECM compared with the signals from
APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2.
Accelerator pedal position
sensor circuit range/performance
Possible cause
• Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717693
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
EC-546
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
C
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-549, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-547
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717694
BBWA1641E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-548
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
47
R
Throttle position sensor
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
82
B
APP sensor 1 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
C
83
G
APP sensor 2 ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
D
90
R/V
APP sensor 1 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
O
APP sensor 2 power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
0.2 - 2.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
98
106
W/B
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
E
F
G
H
I
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717695
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-549
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0335E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 7 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB1851E
Revision: August 2007
EC-550
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
A
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
1.
EC
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
D
PBIB1852E
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to wiring diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit.
G
5.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
H
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
I
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
91
APP sensor terminal 6
EC-548
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-541
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
6.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
M
7.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
N
O
>> INSPECTION END
8.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminals 1 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 3
and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
Revision: August 2007
EC-551
2008 Quest
P
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-552, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
>> INSPECTION END
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717696
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
4.2 - 4.8V
Fully released
0.25 - 0.5V
Fully depressed
0.2 - 2.5V
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Revision: August 2007
EC-552
2008 Quest
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717697
A
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-553
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717698
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717699
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
INFOID:0000000001717700
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No.
P2A00
2A00
(Bank 1)
P2A03
2A03
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit range/performance
• The output voltage computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for
a specified period.
• The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a
specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
•
•
•
•
•
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
Fuel pressure
Fuel injector
Intake air leaks
INFOID:0000000001717701
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
Revision: August 2007
EC-554
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
A
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
C
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
E
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
Check 1st trip DTC.
F
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-559, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-559, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
I
J
K
BBIA0327E
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-555
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717702
BANK 1
BBWA2503E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-556
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
Approximately 5V
C
2
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
16
BR
35
O/B
56
V
75
P
Approximately 3.1V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
E
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
F
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-557
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BANK 2
BBWA2504E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-558
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
24
W
EC
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
C
PBIB1584E
57
W/R
58
LG/R
76
O
77
LG
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Approximately 2.3V
E
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717703
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBIA0691E
P
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: August 2007
EC-559
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175
detected?
BBIA0327E
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-271 or EC-281.
No
>> GO TO 5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0656E
Revision: August 2007
EC-560
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
:
1.
Vehicle front
A
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2.
harness connector
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
harness connector
3.
Intake manifold collector
EC
3.
Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
C
6.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
F
G
PBIB1683E
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• IPDM E/R harness connector E122
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
I
J
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank1
Bank 2
L
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
M
N
O
P
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Revision: August 2007
EC-561
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
11.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> GO TO 12.
12.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13.CLEAR A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
1.
2.
3.
Revision: August 2007
EC-562
2008 Quest
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
A
EC
C
>> GO TO 14.
BBIA0541E
14.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717704
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
G
Refer to EM-25.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-563
2008 Quest
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717705
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function.
BBIA0329E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717706
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
• Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch)
• Ignition switch: ON
Revision: August 2007
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
EC-564
2008 Quest
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717707
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2542E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-565
2008 Quest
P
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
101
108
WIRE
COLOR
R/G
G/B
ITEM
Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Fully released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Approximately 0V
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717708
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
Revision: August 2007
EC-566
2008 Quest
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
A
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
C
PBIB1677E
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
E
F
G
BBIA0329E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
H
I
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
K
PBIB0857E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
L
Check the following.
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
M
N
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
O
P
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EC-567
2008 Quest
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-569, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0329E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB1184E
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-569, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
Revision: August 2007
EC-568
2008 Quest
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
EC
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717709
C
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
D
E
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
Should exist
F
Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-5, and
perform step 3 again.
G
SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
I
Continuity
J
Should not exist
Should exist
K
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-5, and
perform step 3 again.
PBIB1535E
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-569
2008 Quest
ASCD INDICATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717710
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
• CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD
setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717711
Specification data are reference value.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
CRUISE LAMP
• Ignition switch: ON
SET LAMP
• MAIN switch: ON
• When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
Revision: August 2007
SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
ON → OFF
ASCD: Operating
ON
ASCD: Not operating
OFF
EC-570
2008 Quest
ASCD INDICATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717712
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA2543E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717713
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
Revision: August 2007
EC-571
2008 Quest
P
ASCD INDICATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ASCD INDICATOR
CONDITION
CRUISE LAMP
• Ignition switch: ON
SET LAMP
• MAIN switch: ON
• When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
ON → OFF
ASCD: Operating
ON
ASCD: Not operating
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
Does combination meter operate normally?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-5.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-572
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717714
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred EC
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717715
C
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
LOAD SIGNAL
CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
HEATER FAN SW
• Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
OFF
Heater fan: Operating
ON
Heater fan: Not operating
OFF
Diagnosis Procedure
D
E
F
INFOID:0000000001717716
1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
G
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON
ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF
OFF
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
J
2.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
K
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
L
Condition
Indication
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position
ON
Lighting switch: OFF
OFF
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
N
3.CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
Condition
LOAD SIGNAL
Heater fan control switch: ON
ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF
OFF
P
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
O
EC-573
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to GW-76.
>> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-5 or LT-25.
>> INSPECTION END
6.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to ATC-28 or MTC-27.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-574
2008 Quest
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000001717717
EC
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*
ECM function
Actuator
Engine mount
control
Electronic controlled engine
mount
C
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
D
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The
control system has 2-step control [Soft/Hard]
E
Vehicle condition
Engine mount control
Engine speed: Below 950 rpm
Soft
Engine speed: Above 950 rpm
Hard
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
F
INFOID:0000000001717718
G
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENGINE MOUNT
CONDITION
• Engine: Running
SPECIFICATION
Engine speed: Below 950 rpm
IDLE
Engine speed: Above 950 rpm
TRVL
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-575
2008 Quest
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717719
BBWA2007E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-576
2008 Quest
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
8
9
A
WIRE
COLOR
W
W/R
ITEM
Electronic controlled engine
mount-1
Electronic controlled engine
mount-2
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 950 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm
or less
0 - 1.0V
C
[Engine is running]
• 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or
less
2.0 - 3.0V
D
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 950 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm
or more
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
• 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or
more
2.0 - 3.0V
E
F
G
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717720
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
H
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III and touch “ON/OFF” on the
CINSULT-II screen.
3. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5
seconds according to the switching condition of “ENGINE MOUNTING”.
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-III
Make sure that gear position is P or N.
Start engine and let it idle.
Change the engine speed from idle to more than 1,000 rpm and then return to idle (with vehicle stopped).
Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5
seconds when changing engine speed.
It is better to hear the operating sound around the left side front wheel house.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
I
J
K
L
M
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount harness connector.
O
P
BBIA0325E
Revision: August 2007
EC-577
2008 Quest
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SEC920C
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E8, F17
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open and short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and electronic engine mount terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
Electronic controlled engine mount
terminal
8
1
9
2
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Visually check electronic controlled engine mount.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace electronic controlled engine mount.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: August 2007
EC-578
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL INJECTOR
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717721
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
EC
C
D
SEF375Z
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717722
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
F
CONDITION
B/FUEL SCHDL
• EC-122.
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
•
•
•
•
Engine: After warming up
Shift lever: P or N
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load
E
SPECIFICATION
G
Idle
2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-579
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717723
BBWA2539E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
EC-580
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
21
22
23
40
41
42
L/W
R/Y
R/B
V/W
R/L
R/W
Fuel injector No. 5
Fuel injector No. 3
Fuel injector No. 1
Fuel injector No. 6
Fuel injector No. 4
Fuel injector No. 2
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
C
(11 - 14V)
D
SEC984C
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
G
SEC985C
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717724
I
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 7.
J
K
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
L
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
N
3.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
1.
O
Without CONSULT-III
Stop engine.
Revision: August 2007
P
EC-581
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
: Vehicle front
Intake manifold collector (1)
BBIA0657E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
PBIB2323E
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E8, F17
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and fuse
• Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Cylinder
Harness connector F101 terminal
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
PBIB2324E
Revision: August 2007
EC-582
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Operating sound should exist.
A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
EC
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
Start engine.
Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.
C
D
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
E
F
PBIB1986E
7.CHECK FULE INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
H
I
J
BBIA0237E
K
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
L
Voltage: Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
N
PBIB0582E
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
O
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E8, F17
• Harness connectors F44, F101
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
P
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EC-583
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F101, F44
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EC-584, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace fuel injector.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717725
FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717726
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-38.
Revision: August 2007
EC-584
2008 Quest
FUEL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL PUMP
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001717727
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Battery
Battery voltage*
ECM Function
Actuator
C
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump relay
D
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition
E
F
Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking
G
Operates.
When engine is stopped
Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above
Stops.
H
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
I
J
K
BBIA0081E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
FUEL PUMP RLY
L
INFOID:0000000001717728
M
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
• Engine running or cranking
ON
• Except above conditions
OFF
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-585
2008 Quest
FUEL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717729
BBWA2540E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-586
2008 Quest
FUEL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
113
A
WIRE
COLOR
B/O
ITEM
Fuel pump relay
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Ignition switch: ON]
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717730
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
F
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
G
H
BBIA0340E
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
J
K
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
L
M
PBIB1187E
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ECM terminal 113.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
O
Continuity should exist.
P
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power or short to ground in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK CONDENSER-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Revision: August 2007
EC-587
2008 Quest
FUEL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between condenser-2 terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage:
Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB0624E
5.CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace fuse.
6.CHECK CONDENSER-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser-2 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors B107, E139
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser-2
>> Repair harness or connectors.
8.CHECK CONDENSER-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between condenser-2 terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK CONDENSER-2
Refer to EC-589, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace condenser-2.
10.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Revision: August 2007
EC-588
2008 Quest
FUEL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
3. Disconnect harness connectors E139, B107
4. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and
fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B107 terminal 1,
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A
EC
C
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
BBIA0689E
D
E
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connector B107
• Harness connectors B148, E251
• Harness for open or short between harness connector B107 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”and ground
F
G
>> Repair harness or connectors.
12.CHECK FUEL PUPMP
H
Refer to EC-589, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
I
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection
K
INFOID:0000000001717731
L
FUEL PUMP
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 1 and 3.
M
N
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
O
P
SEC918C
CONDENSER-2
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-589
2008 Quest
FUEL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between condenser-2 terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717732
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-5.
Revision: August 2007
EC-590
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
Component Description
INFOID:0000000001717733
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
EC
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
C
D
E
BBIA0244E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-591
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717734
BBWA2535E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-592
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
111
119
120
A
WIRE
COLOR
W/B
R/G
R/G
ITEM
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-593
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBWA2536E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-594
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
0 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
60
61
62
P/L
L/R
Y/R
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
C
D
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
E
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
F
SEC987C
G
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-595
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBWA2537E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-596
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
0 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
79
80
81
GR/R
GR
G/R
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
C
D
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
E
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
F
SEC987C
G
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717735
H
1.CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 4.
I
J
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
K
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
L
M
3.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-III
Let engine idle.
Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
1.
2.
N
O
P
PBIB1186E
SEC986C
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
EC-597
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Go to EC-131.
MBIB0034E
5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
WBIA0542E
4.
Check voltage between condenser-1 terminal + and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB0851E
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser-1 terminal +.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to EC-131.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
Revision: August 2007
EC-598
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser-1
A
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8.CHECK CONDENSER-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between condenser-1 terminal – and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
E
9.CHECK CONDENSER-1
Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace condenser-1.
F
G
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
H
I
J
K
BBIA0244E
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
L
Voltage: Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
N
PBIB0138E
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F43, F201
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F14
P
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
12.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-599
O
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F201, F43
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
14.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F43, F201
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
16.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
17.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717736
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
Revision: August 2007
EC-600
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
A
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2
Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
2 and 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
EC
Except 0
If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils.
Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
C
PBIB0847E
D
E
F
G
BBIA0229E
H
I
Spark should be generated.
J
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
L
M
CONDENSER-1
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector.
Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals + and –.
N
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
O
P
PBIB0848E
Revision: August 2007
EC-601
2008 Quest
IGNITION SIGNAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717737
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-35.
Revision: August 2007
EC-602
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
A
INFOID:0000000001717738
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed in the RH side of the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to
voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
EC
C
D
BBIA0348E
E
F
G
H
PBIB2657E
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-603
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717739
BBWA2541E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-604
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
49
BR/Y
Refrigerant pressure sensor
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
67
B
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
Approximately 0V
C
Refrigerant pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 4.0V
D
70
W
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000001717740
E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
F
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
G
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
H
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
PBIB1188E
J
2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
3.
Stop engine.
Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-605
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BBIA0691E
: Vehicle front
1.
Body ground E24
4.
Body ground E15
2.
ECM
3.
Body ground E9
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0348E
3.
Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0188E
Revision: August 2007
EC-606
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
EC
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
C
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
F
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
I
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
K
L
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E19, F33
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
N
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
O
P
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717741
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to ATC-173, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" or MTC-155, "Removal and
Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor".
Revision: August 2007
EC-607
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
VIAS
Description
INFOID:0000000001717742
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Battery
Battery voltage*
ECM function
VIAS control
Actuator
VIAS control solenoid valve
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
PBIB1874E
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the
effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port
including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the
signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power
valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction
resistance under high speeds.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator (1) operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank.
The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve (2).
•
: Vehicle front
BBIA0649E
Revision: August 2007
EC-608
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve (2) cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator (1).
•
: Vehicle front
A
EC
C
BBIA0649E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
INFOID:0000000001717743
E
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VIAS S/V-1
CONDITION
• Engine: After warming up
D
SPECIFICATION
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-609
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717744
BBWA2538E
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: August 2007
EC-610
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINAL
NO.
A
WIRE
COLOR
29
Y/G
111
W/B
119
120
R/G
R/G
ITEM
VIAS control solenoid valve
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Between 1,800 and 3,600
rpm
0 - 1.0V
C
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnosis Procedure
E
F
INFOID:0000000001717745
G
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-III
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves as
shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Use an inspection mirror (A) to confirm the operation of power
valve actuator rod.
H
I
J
: Vehicle front
1.
Power valve actuator
K
L
PBIB3053E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine up to between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm and make sure
that power valve actuator rod moves as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Use an inspection mirror (A) to confirm the operation of power
valve actuator rod.
: Vehicle front
Power valve actuator (1)
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (With CONSULT-III) >>GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULT-III) >>GO TO 3.
M
N
O
P
PBIB3053E
2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
1.
With CONSULT-III
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Revision: August 2007
EC-611
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Install the vacuum gauge as shown in the figure.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
: Vehicle front
1.
Power valve actuator
2.
Vacuum gauge
3.
VIAS control solenoid valve
VIAS S/V-1
Vacuum
ON
Should exist
OFF
Should not exist
JMBIA1065ZZ
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-III
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Install the vacuum gauge as shown in the figure.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
PBIB3052E
:
1.
6.
Vehicle front
Power valve actuator
2.
Vacuum gauge
3.
VIAS control solenoid valve
Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition
Vacuum
12V direct current supply
Should exist
No supply
Should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1.
Stop engine.
Revision: August 2007
EC-612
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair hoses or tubes.
A
EC
C
SEF109L
5.CHECK VACUUM TANK
D
Refer to EC-614, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace vacuum tank.
E
6.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
3.
-
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve (2) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
: Vehicle front
Power valve actuator (1)
H
I
BBIA0649E
J
4.
Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
K
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
L
M
PBIB0173E
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
N
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E5, F14
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM
O
>> Repair harness or connectors.
8.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Revision: August 2007
EC-613
2008 Quest
P
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-614, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-130.
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717746
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition
VIAS S/V-1
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
ON
Yes
No
OFF
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No
No supply
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2532E
VACUUM TANK
Revision: August 2007
EC-614
2008 Quest
VIAS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the center port of vacuum tank.
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the other
port.
A
EC
C
PBIB0846E
D
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717747
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
E
Refer to EM-23.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-615
2008 Quest
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001717748
BBWA2544E
Revision: August 2007
EC-616
2008 Quest
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BBWA1653E
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-617
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
INFOID:0000000001717749
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
INFOID:0000000001717750
675 ± 50 rpm
Target idle speed
No load* (in P or N position)
Air conditioner: ON
In P or N position
825 rpm or more
Ignition timing
In P or N position
15 ± 5° BTDC
*: Under the following conditions:
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value
INFOID:0000000001717751
Conditions
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
At idle
5 - 35
At 2,500 rpm
5 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor
INFOID:0000000001717752
Supply voltage
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle
1.0 - 1.3*V
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
INFOID:0000000001717753
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.800 - 2.200
80 (176)
0.283 - 0.359
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
INFOID:0000000001717754
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
EGR Temperature Sensor
INFOID:0000000001717755
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
0 (32)
Revision: August 2007
0.73 - 0.88
EC-618
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
50 (122)
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.011 - 0.014
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
A
INFOID:0000000001717756
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
2.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
EC
C
INFOID:0000000001717757
D
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
5.0 - 7.0Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
INFOID:0000000001717758
E
INFOID:0000000001717759
F
INFOID:0000000001717760
G
Refer to EC-324, "Component Inspection".
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
Refer to EC-332, "Component Inspection".
Throttle Control Motor
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector
H
INFOID:0000000001717761
I
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump
INFOID:0000000001717762
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
J
Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EC-619
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
EI
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
Removal and Installation .........................................20
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
FENDER PROTECTOR .................................... 21
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution ................................................................. 2
Removal and Installation .........................................21
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ....................................................................... 4
Work Flow ................................................................. 4
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
Removal and Installation .........................................22
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER .............................. 23
ROOF RACK ..................................................... 24 EI
Removal and Installation .........................................24
ROOF SIDE MOLDING ..................................... 25
Removal and Installation .........................................25
Removal and Installation .........................................26
Removal and Installation .........................................27
L
DOOR FINISHER .............................................. 29
Removal and Installation .........................................29
BODY SIDE TRIM ............................................. 31
M
Removal and Installation .........................................31
FLOOR TRIM .................................................... 36
N
Removal and Installation .........................................36
COWL TOP .........................................................18
Removal and Installation ......................................... 18
K
SIDE GUARD MOLDING .................................. 27
FRONT GRILLE .................................................17
Removal and Installation ......................................... 17
J
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ............................. 26
REAR BUMPER .................................................15
Removal and Installation ......................................... 15
H
Removal and Installation .........................................23
FRONT BUMPER ...............................................13
Removal and Installation ......................................... 13
G
MUDGUARD ..................................................... 22
CLIP AND FASTENER .......................................10
Description .............................................................. 10
F
HEADLINING .................................................... 38
FRONT FENDER ................................................20
Removal and Installation .........................................38
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718713
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718714
• When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may
get in the way with cloth.
• When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping the tool with vinyl or tape.
• Keep removed parts protected with cloth.
• If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.
• If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.
• Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.
• After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.
• Remove stains in the following way.
- Water-soluble stains:
Dip a cloth in warm water, and squeeze tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
- Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the
stain with the cloth. Next, dip the soft cloth in fresh water, and then squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the
detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.
• Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.
Revision: August 2007
EI-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718715
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
B
Description
C
Locating the noise
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
D
E
F
SBT839
Repairing the cause of noise
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit
G
H
EI
J
SBT840
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718716
K
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
L
Locating the noise
M
N
SIIA0995E
(J-47126)
Net Hook Socket
Remove and install the net hook fasteners
O
P
WIIA0780E
Revision: August 2007
EI-3
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000001718717
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to EI-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
- Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
- Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
- Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
- Knock — (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
- Tick — (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
- Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
- Buzz — (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: August 2007
EI-4
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
• Close a door.
• Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
• Rev the engine.
• Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
• At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
• Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
E
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool F
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
G
• Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners
can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
H
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
• Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing
EI
the noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to EI-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25
mm (0.59 x 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50
mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
Revision: August 2007
EI-5
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
INFOID:0000000001718718
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and upper/lower cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
BACK DOOR
Luggage compartment noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the luggage compartment by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Back door bumpers out of adjustment
2. Back door striker out of adjustment
3. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: August 2007
EI-6
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
A
SUNROOF/HEADLINER
Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
B
C
D
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
E
F
SEATS
When isolating seat noises it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of G
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holders
H
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- EI
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noises include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-7
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000001718719
LAIA0072E
Revision: August 2007
EI-8
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
LAIA0071E
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-9
2008 Quest
CLIP AND FASTENER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CLIP AND FASTENER
Description
INFOID:0000000001718720
• Clips and fasteners in EI section correspond to the following numbers and symbols.
• Replace any clips and/or fasteners which are damaged during removal or installation.
Symbol
No.
Shapes
Removal & Installation
C101
SBF302H
SBF367BA
SBT095
SBF423H
SBF258G
LIIA0236E
MBT080A
SBF638CA
MBF519B
MBF520B
SBF104B
SBF147B
C103
C203
C205
C206
CE103
Revision: August 2007
EI-10
2008 Quest
CLIP AND FASTENER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symbol
No.
Shapes
Removal & Installation
A
B
CE107
C
SBF411H
SBF767B
D
CE117
E
SBF174D
SBF175DA
F
CF110
G
H
SBF648B
SBF649B
EI
CF118
J
SBF151D
SBF259G
K
CG101
L
SBF145B
SBF085B
CS101
M
N
O
SBF078B
SBF992G
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-11
2008 Quest
CLIP AND FASTENER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symbol
No.
Shapes
Removal & Installation
CR103
SBF768B
SBF770B
WBT072
WBT073
Metal Clip
Revision: August 2007
EI-12
2008 Quest
FRONT BUMPER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT BUMPER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718721
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIIA1130E
1.
Splash guard
2.
Front bumper fascia
3.
Side front bumper bracket
4.
Fog lamp assembly brackets (if
equipped)
5.
Fog lamp assemblies (if equipped)
6.
Energy absorbing foam
Revision: August 2007
EI-13
2008 Quest
FRONT BUMPER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Front bumper reinforcement
10. Front bumper stay assemblies
8.
Engine under cover seal
A.
Clip C205
9.
Engine under cover
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Remove splash guards RH/LH.
Partially remove front fender protectors RH/LH at front bumper fascia. Refer to EI-21.
Remove engine under cover.
Remove engine under cover seal.
Remove front grille. Refer to EI-17.
Disconnect fog lamps, if equipped.
Remove clips from top and screws from side of front bumper fascia.
Remove front bumper fascia.
Remove energy absorbing foam.
Remove front bumper reinforcement.
Remove front bumper stay assemblies.
Remove fog lamp assembly brackets RH/LH, if equipped.
Remove fog lamp assemblies RH/LH, if equipped.
Remove side front bumper brackets RH/LH.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-14
2008 Quest
REAR BUMPER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR BUMPER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718722
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIIA1155E
1.
Rear combination lamp LH
2.
Rear combination lamp RH
3.
Rear bumper reinforcement
4.
Rear bumper energy absorber
5.
Drafter duct
6.
Rear bumper side brackets RH/LH
Revision: August 2007
EI-15
2008 Quest
REAR BUMPER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Side retainer RH/LH
10. Rear bumper fascia
a.
8.
Sonar sensor harness (if equipped)
11. Sonar sensor (if equipped)
9.
Sonar sensor connector (if
equipped)
12. Rear bumper step pad
Clip C205
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove rear combination lamps RH/LH. Refer to LT-102.
Disconnect sonar sensor connectors, if equipped.
Remove C205 clips from rear bumper fascia.
Remove side retainers RH/LH.
• Rotate clip 1/4 turn to release retainer.
5. Remove screws and rear bumper fascia.
6. Remove rear bumper side brackets RH/LH.
7. Remove rear bumper reinforcement.
• Separate rear bumper energy absorber from rear bumper reinforcement.
8. Remove rear bumper step pad from rear bumper fascia.
9. Remove sonar sensors and retainers from rear bumper fascia, if equipped.
• Separate sonar sensors and retainers.
10. Remove sonar sensor harness from rear bumper fascia.
11. Remove drafter duct from rear bumper area.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-16
2008 Quest
FRONT GRILLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT GRILLE
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718723
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
WIIA1131E
1.
Front bumper fascia
2.
Front license plate bracket (if equipped)
3.
Front grille
J
REMOVAL
1.
Release the tabs attaching front grille to front bumper fascia, then remove front grille.
NOTE:
If equipped, remove the screws and remove the front license plate bracket from front bumper fascia.
INSTALLATION
K
L
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-17
2008 Quest
COWL TOP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718724
WIIA1134E
1.
Cowl top weatherstrip
2.
Fastener cover
3.
Brake fluid access cover
4.
Cowl top cover
5.
Cowl top seal
6.
Cowl top extension
A.
Clip C103
B.
Clip CE103
⇐
Vehicle front
REMOVAL
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms".
Remove cowl top cover.
Release fastener covers and clips.
Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl top cover, then releasing plastic clips.
Remove cowl top weatherstrip.
Remove windshield washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to WW-23, "Washer Tube Layout"
Revision: August 2007
EI-18
2008 Quest
COWL TOP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove cowl top extension.
a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to ATC-143.
b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension.
A
INSTALLATION
B
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-19
2008 Quest
FRONT FENDER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT FENDER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718725
WIIA1135E
1.
Front fender
4.
Outside corner cover
2.
Front bumper fascia
3.
Fender protector
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EI-13.
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21.
Remove outside corner cover.
Remove bolts, then remove front fender.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-20
2008 Quest
FENDER PROTECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FENDER PROTECTOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718726
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
WIIA0800E
1.
Front fender protector
a.
Metal clip-forged nut type
c.
Pushpin clip C205
⇐
Vehicle front
b.
Metal clip-stamped nut type
K
REMOVAL
L
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
M
Remove splash guard. Refer to EI-13.
Remove pushpin clips.
Remove screws.
Remove front fender protector.
Remove metal clips.
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-21
2008 Quest
MUDGUARD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MUDGUARD
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718727
WIIA1132E
1.
Front mudguard
2.
Center mudguard (front)
4.
Rear mudguard
A.
Pushpin CS101
3.
Center mudguard (rear)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove screws and pushpins from mudguard.
NOTE:
For center mudguard, remove rear first.
Remove mudguard (front/rear).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-22
2008 Quest
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718728
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
WIIA1136E
1.
Rubber bumper
B.
Clip C101
2.
License lamp finisher
A.
Clip CS101
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31.
Remove nuts from license lamp finisher.
Release clips, then remove license lamp finisher.
Remove rubber bumpers.
NOTE:
If replacing rubber bumpers, degrease surface where rubber bumpers will be mounted with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-23
2008 Quest
N
O
P
ROOF RACK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ROOF RACK
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718729
WIIA1127E
1.
Roof rack side bar (if equipped)
2.
Roof rack cross bar (if equipped)
4.
Foam washer
⇐
Vehicle front
3.
Gasket
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove headlining. Refer to EI-38.
Remove screws from end brackets, then remove roof rack cross bars, if equipped.
Remove nuts from underside of roof panel, then remove roof rack side bar RH/LH (if equipped).
Remove foam washers and gaskets from roof surface.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Make sure the arrows on the crossbar brackets are pointing forward, if equipped.
• During installation, always position the foam washers with the soft (non-plastic) side facing towards the roof
sheet metal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-24
2008 Quest
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718730
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
WIIA1137E
1.
Roof side molding
2.
Molding tape
3.
Molding clip
J
REMOVAL
Lift roof side molding upward from front edge, then work rearward.
NOTE:
Molding clips are attached to vehicle with molding tape.
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Degrease surface of roof where molding tape will be mounted as well as surface of molding clip where tape
is attached with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent.
• Use new molding tape on molding clips for installation.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-25
2008 Quest
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718731
WIIA0804E
1.
Double-faced adhesive tape
2.
Door outside molding
⇐
Front of vehicle
REMOVAL
1. Open windows fully.
2. Remove door mirror. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly".
3. Lift molding beginning from rear edge, disconnecting clips from flange.
NOTE:
Front end of molding has double-faced adhesive tape. Carefully separate double-faced adhesive tape from
door sheet metal.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-26
2008 Quest
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718732
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
WIIA0805E
1.
Door sash cover
4.
Sliding door rail cover
2.
Double-faced adhesive tape
3.
Side guard molding
J
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
K
Removal
CAUTION:
Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints.
NOTE:
Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape.
1. Heat side guard molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun.
2. Raise end of side guard molding and cut away tape to remove molding. Remove all traces of tape.
Installation
CAUTION:
To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation.
NOTE:
On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent,
after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200 or C-100 or equivalent.
The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape.
To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new double-faced
tape to the molding.
1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface.
2. Heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F).
3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface.
4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface.
SLIDING DOOR RAIL COVER
Revision: August 2007
EI-27
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove LH rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-102.
Remove screw from slide door rail cover.
Open sliding door and release the front clip.
Close sliding door. Carefully pull off slide door rail cover releasing clips so as not to deform body sheet
metal.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Always discard clips and replace with new clips.
DOOR SASH COVER
Removal
1.
2.
Open door and remove screw from top of door sash cover.
Pull bottom of door sash cover rearward, then pull up off hooks.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-28
2008 Quest
DOOR FINISHER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DOOR FINISHER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718733
FRONT DOOR
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
WIIA1133E
M
1.
Pull cup bracket
2.
Screw cover
3.
Power window and door lock/unlock
switch assembly
4.
Memory seat/fuel door release
switch assembly
5.
Step light
6.
Front door finisher
7.
Front door release handle
8.
Front corner cover
A.
Clip C101
B.
Clip CS101
⇐
Vehicle front
N
O
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Release clip and remove front corner cover.
Remove screw cover then screw from cup of power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly.
Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly.
• Release clip and disconnect harness connectors.
Remove memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly.
• Release clip and disconnect harness connectors.
Remove step light.
• Release tab and disconnect harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EI-29
2008 Quest
P
DOOR FINISHER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly.
• Release clips and remove door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to BL-168.
7. Remove screws and front door release handle from front door finisher.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR
WIIA0807E
1.
Sliding door garnish
2.
Screw cover
3.
Sliding door handle assembly
4.
Sliding door finisher
a.
Clip C101
5.
Lower seal
⇐
Vehicle front
b.
Metal clip
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove sliding door garnish.
Remove sliding door finisher assembly.
Remove sliding door handle screw covers and screws.
Remove sliding door handle assembly.
• Disconnect door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to BL-171.
Remove lower seal.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-30
2008 Quest
BODY SIDE TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BODY SIDE TRIM
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718734
LEFT SIDE
B
CAUTION:
• Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
• When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
finisher.
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIIA1128E
Revision: August 2007
EI-31
2008 Quest
BODY SIDE TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
Sliding door drip weatherstrip
LH
2.
Center pillar upper finisher LH
3.
Sliding door welt
4.
Assist grip end cap
5.
7.
Center pillar lower finisher LH
8.
Screw cover
6.
Center pillar assist grip
Sliding door open/close switch LH
9.
Center pillar lower escutcheon LH
10. Rear kicking plate
11.
13. Cargo net hook
14.
Back door close switch
12.
Rear pillar upper finisher LH
Power point cap
15.
16. Luggage side panel LH
17. 3rd row seat spring escutcheon RH
Power point
18.
Luggage side lower escutcheon LH
19. Rear kick escutcheon LH
20. Rear lower finisher assembly LH
21.
Rear center pillar finisher LH
22. Finisher cover
23. Luggage side cup holder LH
24.
Seat belt guide
25. Front kicking plate
26. Lower dash side finisher LH
27.
Upper dash side finisher LH
28. Front pillar finisher LH
29. Front door welt
A.
Clip C101
⇐
Vehicle front
RIGHT SIDE AND REAR
CAUTION:
• Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes.
• When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
garnish.
Revision: August 2007
EI-32
2008 Quest
BODY SIDE TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
WIIA1129E
1.
Roof finisher
2.
Luggage room lamp
3.
Rear center pillar finisher RH
4.
Screw cover
5.
Rear pillar upper finisher RH
6.
Cargo net
7.
Cup holder luggage side RH
8.
Rear kick escutcheon RH
9.
Rear lower finisher assembly RH
10. Luggage side lower escutcheon RH
11. Cargo net hook
12. 3rd row seat spring escutcheon RH
13. Gas leak check lid
14. Back door welt
15. Pull handle covers RH/LH
16. Back door pull handle
17. Release cover
18. Back door lower finisher
19. Back door upper finisher
A.
B.
⇐
Clip C101
Metal clip
Vehicle front
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER
Revision: August 2007
EI-33
2008 Quest
O
P
BODY SIDE TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove seat belt anchor. Refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt".
Remove front and rear kicking plates.
Remove center pillar lower finisher.
• Disconnect harness to power opening door switch.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt".
Remove front and rear kicking plates.
Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER".
Remove cover and screws.
Remove center pillar upper finisher.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR CENTER PILLAR FINISHER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear kicking plate.
Remove rear kick escutcheon.
Remove cargo net hook using Tool.
Tool number
4.
5.
6.
7.
: J-47126
Remove rear lower finisher assembly.
Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar finisher. Refer to SB-4, "Second Row Seat Belt".
Remove cover and screws from rear center pillar finisher.
Remove rear center pillar finisher.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER)
Removal
1. Remove front kicking plate.
2. Remove upper dash side finisher.
3. Remove lower dash side finisher.
CAUTION:
Insert screw driver rolled with cloth between panel on vehicle
and clip (as indicated with arrow), and disconnect clip.
SIIA0810E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER
Removal
Revision: August 2007
EI-34
2008 Quest
BODY SIDE TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper dash side finisher. Refer to "DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER)".
3. Release clips and remove front pillar finisher.
A
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY
C
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove rear kicking plate.
Remove rear kick escutcheon.
Remove 3rd row seat spring escutcheon.
Remove cargo net hooks using Tool.
Tool number
6.
D
E
: J-47126
F
Release clips and remove rear lower finisher assembly.
• For LH, disconnect harness connectors.
G
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR PILLAR UPPER FINISHER
H
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear kicking plate.
Remove rear kick escutcheon.
Remove cargo net hooks using Tool.
Tool number
4.
5.
6.
EI
J
: J-47126
Remove seat belt D rings from rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to SB-6, "Third Row Seat Belt".
Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to "REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY".
Remove screw covers and screws, then remove rear pillar upper finisher.
• For LH, disconnect harness connectors.
K
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L
BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER
M
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove pull handle covers.
Remove screws and remove back door pull handle.
Release clips and remove back door lower finisher.
N
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O
BACK DOOR UPPER FINISHER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
P
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER".
Disconnect top of door open/close link. Refer to BL-162.
Release clips and remove back door upper finisher.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-35
2008 Quest
FLOOR TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718735
WIIA1138E
1.
Floor mat hooks
2.
Front carpet
3.
Cargo organizer cover
4.
Cargo organizer
5.
Front floor spacer
6.
Rear seat striker covers
7.
Tailgate kicking plate
8.
Rear carpet
A.
Clip C103
⇐
Vehicle front
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31.
Remove front seats. Refer to SE-75.
Remove rear seats. Refer to SE-88.
Remove 3rd row rear seat assembly. Refer to SE-88.
Remove kicking plates. Refer to EI-31.
Remove center console. Refer to IP-10.
Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-3.
Remove rear seat striker covers.
Remove tailgate kicking plate.
Remove front carpet.
Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet.
Remove rear carpet.
Remove front floor spacer.
Remove cargo organizer cover.
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
EI-36
2008 Quest
FLOOR TRIM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EI-37
2008 Quest
HEADLINING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718736
Without Sunroof
WIIA1154E
1.
Rear roof console bracket
2.
Front roof console bracket
3.
Assist grip bracket
4.
Assist grip
5.
Rear audio control assembly
6.
Air vent grille
Sun visor assembly RH
7.
Headlining
8.
Sun visor holder
9.
10.
Lens
11.
Front roof console assembly
12. Sun visor assembly LH
13.
Rear roof console assembly
14. Interior lamp assembly
15. Rear air control rear
16.
Coat hanger
A.
⇐
Revision: August 2007
Clip C103
EI-38
Vehicle front
2008 Quest
HEADLINING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
With Sunroof
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIIA1153E
P
1.
Sunshade
2.
Coat hanger
3.
Assist grip
4.
Assist grip bracket
5.
Front roof console bracket
6.
Sun visor assembly RH
7.
Sun visor holder
8.
Rear audio control assembly
9.
Lens
10. Front roof console assembly
11. Sun visor assembly LH
12. Storage bin assembly, front
13. Front storage bin door
14. Sunroof welt
15.
16. Lamp assembly
17. Eyeball lamps
18. Air vent grille
Revision: August 2007
EI-39
Rear roof console assembly
2008 Quest
HEADLINING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
19. Storage bin assembly, center
20. Center storage bin door
21. Center sunglass bin
22. Rear storage bin door
23. Rear storage bin assembly
24. Rear roof console lower bracket
25. Rear air control
26. Headlining
27. Rear roof console upper bracket
28. Rear roof console front bracket
A.
⇐
Clip C103
Vehicle front
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Disconnect both negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least 3 minutes.
Remove sun visor assemblies.
• Disconnect harness from each sun visor assembly.
Remove sun visor holders.
Remove front roof console assembly.
• Disconnect harnesses from sunroof switch assembly.
Remove sunroof welt (if equipped).
Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front pillar finishers. Refer toEI-31.
Remove front kicking plates and door welts. Refer toEI-31.
Remove center pillar assist grips. Refer to EI-31.
Remove assist grips from headlining.
Remove rear kicking plates and door welts. Refer toEI-31.
Remove center pillar seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-3.
Remove center pillar lower finishers. Refer to EI-31.
• Disconnect harness from door open/close switch.
Remove center pillar lower then center pillar upper finishers. Refer to EI-31.
Remove tailgate kicking plate. Refer to EI-36.
Remove rear lower finisher assemblies RH/LH. Refer to EI-31.
Remove roof finisher. refer to EI-31.
Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar finishers and rear upper finishers. Refer to SB-3.
Remove front pillar upper finishers. Refer to EI-31.
Release clips from the rear, then remove rear roof console assembly (if equipped).
• Disconnect harness from rear roof console assembly.
Remove lower rear console bracket.
Remove rear audio control assembly (if equipped).
• Disconnect harness from audio control.
Remove rear air control assembly (if equipped).
• Disconnect harnesses from rear air control assembly.
Disconnect rear washer hose from headlining.
Remove headlining.
Remove the front roof console bracket.
Remove rear roof console front and upper brackets.
Remove assist grip brackets from roof.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EI-40
2008 Quest
ENGINE
SECTION
EM
ENGINE MECHANICAL
A
EM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Drain Coolant ..................................... 3
Precaution for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ................. 3
Precaution for Removal and Disassembly ................ 3
Precaution for Inspection, Repair and Replacement .......................................................................... 3
Precaution for Assembly and Installation .................. 3
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening .......................... 4
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 6
Special Service Tool ................................................. 6
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 8
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................10
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY
CATALYST ........................................................ 25
F
Removal and Installation .........................................25
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ......................... 29
G
Removal and Installation .........................................29
IGNITION COIL ................................................. 35
H
Removal and Installation .........................................35
SPARK PLUG ................................................... 36
Removal and Installation .........................................36
I
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ................ 38
Removal and Installation .........................................38
J
ROCKER COVER ............................................. 41
Removal and Installation .........................................41
K
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE ......................... 43
Removal and Installation .........................................43
L
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise ..................... 10
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause
of the Symptom ....................................................... 10
TIMING CHAIN .................................................. 54
CAMSHAFT ....................................................... 76
M
DRIVE BELTS ....................................................12
Removal and Installation .........................................76
Inspection After Installation .....................................84
Valve Clearance ......................................................85
N
Checking Drive Belts ............................................... 12
Tension Adjustment ................................................ 12
Removal and Installation ......................................... 14
Removal and Installation .........................................54
OIL SEAL .......................................................... 90
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ........................15
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal ..............90
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ..............90
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal ...............92
O
CYLINDER HEAD ............................................. 94
P
Removal and Installation ......................................... 15
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR ...................17
Removal and Installation ......................................... 17
On-Vehicle Service ..................................................94
Removal and Installation .........................................95
Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 103
Inspection After Disassembly ................................ 104
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ....................21
Removal and Installation ......................................... 21
INTAKE MANIFOLD ...........................................23
Removal and Installation ......................................... 23
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 110
Removal and Installation ....................................... 110
Revision: August 2007
EM-1
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK ......................................... 116
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................116
How to Select Piston and Bearing .........................127
Inspection After Disassembly ................................131
Revision: August 2007
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 142
Standard and Limit ................................................ 142
EM-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
EM
INFOID:0000000001717763
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Drain Coolant
INFOID:0000000001717764
C
D
E
F
G
H
• Drain coolant when engine is cooled.
Precaution for Disconnecting Fuel Piping
INFOID:0000000001717765
• Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
• Release fuel pressure before disassembly.
• After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage.
Precaution for Removal and Disassembly
J
INFOID:0000000001717766
K
• When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid
forceful or uninstructed operations.
• Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.
• Cover openings of engine system with tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
• Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly.
• When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally
opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used
where noted in the step.
Precaution for Inspection, Repair and Replacement
I
INFOID:0000000001717767
L
M
N
• Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and
replace if necessary.
Precaution for Assembly and Installation
O
INFOID:0000000001717768
• Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.
• When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the
ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified,
do exactly as specified.
• Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
• Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction
and blockage.
• Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust.
Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well.
Revision: August 2007
EM-3
2008 Quest
P
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Release air within route after draining coolant.
• Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped).
Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections.
• After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for
leakage.
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening
•
•
•
•
INFOID:0000000001717769
Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts:
Cylinder head bolts
Main bearing cap bolts
Connecting rod cap nuts
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil.
Precaution for Liquid Gasket
INFOID:0000000001717770
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to
lightly tap the Tool (1) where the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied.
Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the side.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed
screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering
to the gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket
application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating
surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign
materials.
Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
PBIC0003E
4.
Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified
location.
Tool number
: WS39930000 (
—
)
• If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove.
• As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the
holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes. Make
sure to read the text of this manual.
• Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component.
• If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
Revision: August 2007
EM-4
WBIA0567E
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Do not retighten after the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11.
A
EM
C
SEM159F
CAUTION:
Follow all specific instructions in this manual.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-5
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717771
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-47242)
Engine support table
Engine and transmission assembly removal
WBIA0658E
Disassembling valve mechanism
Part (1) is a component of KV10116200 (J26336-B), but Part (2) is not.
KV10116200
(J-26336-B)
Valve spring compressor
1 KV10115900
(J-26336-20)
Attachment
2 KV1019230
( — )
PBIC1650E
Removing valve oil seal
KV10107902
(J-38959)
Valve oil seal puller
S-NT011
(J-39386)
Valve oil seal drift
Installing valve oil seal
NT024
Installing rear main seal
KV991J0120
(J-47128)
Seal installer
LBIA0452E
Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore
EM03470000
(J-8037)
Piston ring compressor
NT044
Revision: August 2007
EM-6
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST16610001
(J-23907)
Pilot bushing puller
Removing crankshaft pilot bushing
A
EM
C
NT045
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
D
E
F
NT046
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
WS39930000
( — )
Tube presser
G
H
NT052
Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder
head, etc.
KV10112100
(BT-8653-A)
Angle wrench
I
J
NT014
K
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio A/F sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Unit: mm (in)
KV991J0050
(J-44626)
Air fuel sensor Socket
L
M
LBIA0444E
Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen
sensor
a: 22 (0.87)
Unit: mm (in)
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
N
O
NT636
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-7
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10117700
(J-44716)
Ring gear stopper
Removing and installing crankshaft pulley
NT822
Disconnecting fuel tube quick disconnect connectors in engine compartment
—
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
PBIC0198E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717772
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(BT-3373-F)
Belt tension gauge
Checking drive belt tension
AMA126
(J-24239-01)
Cylinder head bolt wrench
Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt
a: 13 (0.51) dia.
b: 12 (0.47)
c: 10 (0.39)
Unit: mm (in)
NT583
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plug
NT047
Revision: August 2007
EM-8
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Valve seat cutter set
Finishing valve seat dimensions
A
EM
C
NT048
Piston ring expander
Removing and installing piston ring
D
E
NT030
Valve guide drift
Removing and installing valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
a = 9.5 (0.374) dia.
b = 5.5 (0.217)
Unit: mm (in)
F
G
H
NT015
Valve guide reamer
Reaming valve guide 1 or hole for oversize
valve guide 2
Intake & Exhaust:
d1 = 6.0 (0.236) dia.
d2 = 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014)
Unit: mm (in)
I
J
NT016
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new heated oxygen sensor
(Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.)
a = (J-43897-18) 18 mm (0.71 in) for zirconia
heated oxygen sensor
b = (J-43897-12) 12 mm (0.47 in) for titania
heated oxygen sensor
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
L
M
AEM488
Lubricating heated oxygen sensor thread
cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust
system threads
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
K
N
O
AEM489
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-9
2008 Quest
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise
INFOID:0000000001717773
SEM706G
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001717774
Locate the area where noise occurs.
Confirm the type of noise.
Revision: August 2007
EM-10
2008 Quest
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Specify the operating condition of engine.
4. Check specified noise source. Repair or replace the identified part as necessary.
A
Operating condition of engine
Location
of noise
Type of
noise
Top of engine
Rocker
cover
Cylinder
head
Front of
engine
Timing
chain cover
Front of
engine
Reference page
EM
After
warmup
When
starting
When
idling
When
racing
While
driving
Ticking or
clicking
C
A
—
A
B
—
Tappet
noise
Valve clearance
EM-85
Rattle
C
A
—
A
B
C
Camshaft
bearing
noise
Camshaft journal clearance
Camshaft runout
EM-76
D
—
Piston pin
noise
Piston and piston pin
clearance
Connecting rod bushing
clearance
EM-94
E
Piston
slap noise
Piston-to-bore clearance
Piston ring side clearance
Piston ring end gap
Connecting rod bend
and torsion
EM-116
Connecting rod bushing
clearance (Small end)
Connecting rod bearing
clearance (Big end)
EM-116
EM-116
Slap or
knock
Crankshaft pulley
Cylinder
block
(Side of
engine)
Oil pan
Source of
noise
Before
warmup
—
Slap or
rap
A
A
—
—
—
B
B
B
B
A
Check item
Knock
A
B
C
B
B
B
Connecting rod
bearing
noise
Knock
A
B
—
A
B
C
Main bearing noise
Main bearing oil clearance
Crankshaft runout
B
Timing
chain and
chain tensioner
noise
Timing chain cracks
and wear
Timing chain tensioner
operation
Drive belts
(Sticking
or slipping)
Drive belts deflection
B
Drive belts
(Slipping)
Idler pulley bearing operation
B
Water
pump
noise
Water pump operation
Tapping or
ticking
A
Squeaking or fizzing
A
Creaking
A
Squall
Creak
A: Closely related B: Related
A
A
B
B
B
—
—
A
—
C: Sometimes related
B
B
B
B
B
—
A
A
C
C
F
G
H
I
J
EM-54
K
EM-12
L
M
CO-19
N
—: Not related
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-11
2008 Quest
DRIVE BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
INFOID:0000000001717775
WARNING:
Be sure to perform when the engine is not running.
1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one.
2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
on the belt midway between pulleys as shown.
3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown.
Tool number
: BT-3373-F
NOTE:
• Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold.
• Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not
within specifications.
CAUTION:
WBIA0325E
• When checking belt deflection or tension immediately
after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two
turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
• Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness.
PBIC1162E
Belt Deflection and Tension
Deflection adjustment
Unit: mm (in)
Used belt
Generator and
air conditioner
compressor
Power steering
oil pump
Limit
After adjustment
7 (0.28)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
11 (0.43)
7.3 - 8.0
(0.29 - 0.30)
Applied pushing
force
New belt
Tension adjustment*
Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f)
Used belt
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
6.5 - 7.2
(0.26 - 0.28)
196 (20, 44)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points as shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
Tension Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001717776
Belt description
Belt tightening method for adjustment
Power steering oil pump belt
Adjusting bolt on power steering oil pump
Generator and air conditioner compressor belt
Adjusting bolt on idler pulley bracket
CAUTION:
• When belt is replaced with a new one, adjust it to value for ″New belt″ to accommodate for insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves.
Revision: August 2007
EM-12
2008 Quest
DRIVE BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When deflection or tension of belt being used exceeds ″Used belt limit″ adjust it to value for ″After
adjustment″ of ″Used belt″.
A
• When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to
avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
EM
• When installing belt, make sure that it is correctly engaged with pulley groove.
• Keep oil and water away from belt.
• Do not twist or bend belt excessively.
C
GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine undercover.
Loosen idler pulley lock nut ″A″ and adjust the belt by turning
adjusting bolt ″B″.
• For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to EM-12,
"Checking Drive Belts".
Tighten lock nut ″A″.
Lock nut ″A″
4.
D
E
: 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
F
Tighten adjusting bolt ″B″.
Adjusting bolt ″B″
: 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)
G
H
I
J
WBIA0324E
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT
K
1.
2.
3.
L
4.
5.
Remove engine undercover.
Loosen adjusting bolt ″C″.
Loosen power steering oil pump bolt ″D″.
NOTE:
Bolt head ″D″ is at the engine rear side.
Adjust the belt by turning the adjusting bolt ″E″.
• For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to EM-12,
"Checking Drive Belts".
NOTE:
Adjusting bolt ″E″ is loosened with counterclockwise rotation.
Tighten adjusting bolt ″C″.
Adjusting bolt ″C″
6.
M
N
O
: 28.0 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
Tighten power steering oil pump bolt ″D″.
P
Power steering pump bolt ″D″ : 43.2 N·m (4.4 kg-m,
32 ft-lb)
WBIA0324E
Revision: August 2007
EM-13
2008 Quest
DRIVE BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717777
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove engine undercover.
Fully loosen each belt. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment". Remove generator and air conditioner compressor belt and then power steering oil pump belt.
CAUTION:
Grease is applied to idler pulley adjusting bolt. Be careful to keep grease away from the belts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Make sure belts are correctly engaged with the pulley groove.
• Clean off any for oil and coolant on belts and each pulley groove.
• Adjust belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment".
Revision: August 2007
EM-14
2008 Quest
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717778
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WBIA0500E
Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube
4.
Air cleaner case (upper)
5.
Air cleaner filter
6.
Air cleaner case (lower)
7.
Air cleaner case bracket
8.
Grommet
9.
Resonator (in fender)
10. Fresh air duct
2.
Mass air flow sensor
3.
K
1.
O-ring
L
11. PCV hose
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the fresh air duct.
Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor.
Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator.
Disconnect the PCV hose.
Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow
sensor attached.
Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary.
CAUTION:
Handle mass air flow sensor with care.
• Do not shock it.
• Do not disassemble it.
• Do not touch ithe sensor.
Remove the air cleaner case (lower).
Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EM-15
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
NOTE:
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7.
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle
control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor.
2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric
throttle control actuator tube.
3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air
cleaner case (upper).
4. Remove the air cleaner filter.
5. Install a new air cleaner filter.
6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of
removal.
Revision: August 2007
EM-16
LLIA0016E
2008 Quest
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717779
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WBIA0592E
1.
Electric throttle control actuator
2.
Intake manifold collector (upper)
3.
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
4.
Intake manifold collector (lower)
5.
Power valve
6.
VIAS control solenoid valve
7.
Vacuum tank
8.
Service port
9.
Fuel hose
Revision: August 2007
EM-17
2008 Quest
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Gasket
11. EGR temperature sensor
12. EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower)]
13. EGR volume control valve
14. EGR tube (to exhaust manifold)
15. EGR volume control valve bracket
16. Intake manifold collector (upper)
support bracket
17. Washers
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot.
• The gasket for intake manifold collector (upper) is secured together with intake manifold collector
(lower) bolt. Thus, when replacing only the upper gasket the lower gasket must also be replaced.
1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the engine cover using power tool.
3. Remove air cleaner case, (upper) mass air flow sensor, and air
cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly.
Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation".
4. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to CO11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
5. Disconnect the following:
• Power brake booster vacuum hose
• Coolant hoses from the intake manifold collector (upper)
• Vacuum lines from the intake manifold collector (lower) and
power valve
• Fuel injector electrical connectors
• PCV hose
• Electric throttle control actuator electrical connectors
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve hose
• EGR temperature sensor electrical connector
CAUTION:
• Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material.
6. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector, (lower)]
nuts.
7. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket from the back of the
WBIA0339E
intake manifold collector (upper).
8. Remove the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside.
9. Remove the VIAS control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside.
10. Remove the vacuum tank.
11. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper) support bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector (upper) using power tool.
12. Loosen the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as
shown using power tool, and remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower) and gasket.
WBIA0285E
Revision: August 2007
EM-18
2008 Quest
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
13. If necessary, remove the electric throttle control actuator bolts in
the order as shown and remove the electric throttle control actuator.
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle
control actuator.
• Do not disassemble.
A
EM
C
SEM711G
D
14. If necessary, remove the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts
in the order as shown, using power tool and remove the intake
manifold collector (upper).
CAUTION:
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle
control actuator, if installed.
E
F
G
SEM712G
15. If necessary, remove power valve bolts in the order as shown
and remove the power valve.
16. If necessary remove the following components:
• Vacuum tank
• VIAS control solenoid valve
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
H
I
J
SEM714G
K
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
• Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion
of intake manifold collector (lower).
Limit
L
M
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
• If it exceeds the limit, replace the intake manifold collector (lower).
N
O
PBIC1168E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows:
1. Perform the ″Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning″ when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
2. Perform the ″Idle Air Volume Learning″ when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC73, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Revision: August 2007
EM-19
2008 Quest
P
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If removed, install power valve bolts in the order as shown.
Power valve bolts
: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
SEM714G
• If removed, tighten the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the
order as shown.
Intake manifold
collector (upper)
bolts
: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m,
14 ft-lb)
SEM712G
• If removed, install the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the
order as shown. Install gasket with three protrusions facing down.
Electric throttle control actuator bolts
: 8.4 N·m (0.86 kg-m,
74 in-lb)
SEM711G
• Install the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as
shown.
Intake manifold
collector (lower) bolts
: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m,
14 ft-lb)
SEM713G
Revision: August 2007
EM-20
2008 Quest
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717780
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0591E
1.
Gasket
2.
EGR temperature sensor
3.
EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower)]
4.
EGR volume control valve
5.
EGR tube (to exhaust manifold)
6.
EGR volume control valve bracket
7.
Coolant lines
8.
Washers
REMOVAL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-21
2008 Quest
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the engine cover using power tool.
2. Remove air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor, and air
cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly.
Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation".
3. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to CO11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
CAUTION:
Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign
material.
4. Disconnect the EGR temperature sensor electrical connector
and bracket.
5. If necessary, remove the EGR temperature sensor.
6. Disconnect the EGR volume control valve electrical connector.
7. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts
at the intake manifold collector (lower).
8. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts
at the EGR volume control valve and remove the tube.
9. Loosen the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve.
10. If necessary remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) as follows:
a. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18,
"Removal and Installation".
b. Disconnect the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting.
c. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1).
d. Remove the RH heat shield.
e. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to exhaust manifold fitting.
11. Disconnect the coolant lines at the EGR volume control valve.
12. Remove the EGR volume control valve bolts and the valve.
WBIA0339E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the RH heat shield bolts to specification.
WBIA0341E
Revision: August 2007
EM-22
2008 Quest
INTAKE MANIFOLD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTAKE MANIFOLD
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717781
EM
C
D
E
F
PBIC1169E
1.
Intake manifold
2.
G
Gasket
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors. Refer to EM-38, "Removal and Installation".
4.
Loosen the intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order as shown
using power tool, and remove the intake manifold.
H
I
J
K
L
WBIA0043E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
M
Surface Distortion
Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion
of both the intake manifold and the intake manifold collector (lower).
N
Limit
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
O
P
WBIA0052E
Revision: August 2007
EM-23
2008 Quest
INTAKE MANIFOLD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PBIC0870E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• If removed, install the stud bolts.
Stud bolts
: 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb)
• Install intake manifold nuts and bolts inthe order in two steps as
shown.
Step 1
Step 2
: 7.4 N·m (0.75 kg-m, 65 in-lb)
: 29 N·m (3.0 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
SEM950F
Revision: August 2007
EM-24
2008 Quest
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001717782
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WBIA0743E
1.
Exhaust manifold (RH bank)
Exhaust manifold (LH bank)
3.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
4.
Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 5.
2)
Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank
1)
6.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1)
7.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
9.
Gasket
Revision: August 2007
2.
8.
EM-25
2008 Quest
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Three way catalyst supports
⇐
A.
Stud
B.
Bolt
Engine Front
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down.
• When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly
for safety. For engine slingers, refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation".
1. Disconnect battery. Refer to SC-8, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove cowl top. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector.
4. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool.
5. Remove the engine undercover.
6. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields.
7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time through the wheel well opening,
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV991J0050 (J-44626)
8.
If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO16, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation".
10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-16, "Removal
and Installation".
11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order as shown.
• ⇐: Engine front
WBIA0674E
12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2).
a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle
clamp.
b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool.
Tool numbers
: KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors.
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool.
14. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts using power tool.
Revision: August 2007
EM-26
2008 Quest
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
15. Remove the RH bank(1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds.
Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using
power tool.
• ⇐: Engine front
A
EM
C
WBIA0675E
D
E
F
G
WBIA0676E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
H
Surface Distortion
• Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness
of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces.
I
Limit
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
J
K
PBIC1173E
L
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• ⇐: Engine front
• Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in
the order as shown.
CAUTION:
• Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using Tool,
and apply anti-seize lubricant.
Tool numbers
N
O
: J-43897-18
: J-43897-12
• Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated
oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage.
Revision: August 2007
M
EM-27
WBIA0677E
2008 Quest
P
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool numbers
: KV10114400 (J-38365)
WBIA0678E
• Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support
bolts in the order as shown.
Three way catalyst
support bolts
: 22.0 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
WBIA0674E
• Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts.
WBIA0341E
• Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts.
Three way catalyst
manifold heat shield
bolts
Revision: August 2007
: 8.3 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb)
EM-28
2008 Quest
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717783
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0744E
1.
Front cover gasket
2.
Upper oil pan
3.
O-ring
4.
Oil pressure switch
5.
Relief valve
6.
Oil cooler
7.
Oil cooler connection
8.
Oil filter
9.
Gasket
J
10. Oil strainer (connects to oil pump
body)
11. Gasket (⇐ oil pan side)
12. Drain plug
13. Lower oil pan
14. Rear cover plate
15. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
16. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
shield
17. Rear oil seal retainer gasket
⇐
K
Oil pan side
L
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• You should not remove the oil pan until the exhaust system and cooling system have completely
cooled off.
• When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly
for safety.
CAUTION:
When removing the upper oil pan from the engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Be careful not to damage sensor edges or signal plate teeth.
1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil".
3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
4. Remove the oil dipstick.
5. Remove the engine undercover.
6. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield.
7. Remove the A/C drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove coolant pipe bolts.
10. Discharge and recover the A/C refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Revision: August 2007
I
EM-29
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor".
12. Remove oil cooler from the upper oil pan. Refer to LU-16, "Removal and Installation".
13. Remove the oil pressure switch, and the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the upper oil pan.
14. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-8.
15. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-16, "Removal and Installation".
16. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensors and air flow ratio (A/F) sensors and remove the two three way catalysts manifold from the exhaust manifolds using power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation".
17. Remove the rear cover plate from the upper oil pan.
SEM717G
18. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as
shown.
WBIA0258E
19. Remove the lower oil pan.
a. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan.
• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
• In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer
to lightly tap the Tool (1) where the Silicone RTV Sealant is
applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping
on the side.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flatbladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the
mating surfaces.
Revision: August 2007
EM-30
WBIA0566E
2008 Quest
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
20. Remove the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts.
A
EM
C
SEM469G
D
21. Remove the upper oil pan.
a. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, using power tool.
E
F
G
WBIA0503E
b.
c.
Insert a suitable tool into the notch (1) of the upper oil pan as
shown.
Pry off the upper oil pan by moving the suitable tool up and
down (2) as shown.
H
I
J
SEM155F
K
22. Remove the O-ring seals from the bottom of the cylinder block
and oil pump housing, use new O-rings for installation.
L
M
N
WBIA0327E
O
23. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket.
24. Remove the oil strainer.
P
WBIA0328E
Revision: August 2007
EM-31
2008 Quest
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
25. If re-installing the original oil pan, remove the old sealant from
the mating surfaces using a scraper.
• Also remove the old sealant from mating surface of the cylinder block.
• Remove the old sealant from the bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off the old sealant.
MEM108A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean oil strainer of any foriegn material.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes after completeing instalation before refilling the engine with oil.
1. Install oil strainer refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
2. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the front
cover gasket and the rear oil seal retainer gasket as shown.
Refer to GI-42.
SEM964E
3.
Install a new front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket.
WBIA0328E
4.
Apply a bead of sealant to the cylinder block mating surface of
the upper oil pan as shown.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
• Be sure the sealant is applied as shown, and the sealant is 4.0
- 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) or 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in)
wide.
• Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant.
SEM185FA
Revision: August 2007
EM-32
2008 Quest
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EM
C
SEM159F
D
5.
Install new O-rings on the cylinder block and oil pump body.
E
F
G
WBIA0327E
6.
Install the upper oil pan.
• Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown refer to EM29, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
H
I
J
PBIC1636E
7.
Install the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. Refer to EM-110,
"Removal and Installation".
K
L
M
N
SEM469G
8.
O
Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the lower oil pan.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
• Be sure the sealant is 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide.
• Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant.
P
SEM159F
Revision: August 2007
EM-33
2008 Quest
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9.
Install the lower oil pan. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order
as shown refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
WBIA0261E
10. Install rear plate cover refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
SEM717G
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Start the engine and check for leaks. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil".
• Inspect the engine oil level. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil".
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
Revision: August 2007
EM-34
2008 Quest
IGNITION COIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IGNITION COIL
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717784
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0344E
1.
Ignition coil
4.
Rocker cover (LH)
2.
Spark plug
3.
I
Rocker cover (RH)
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the engine cover using power tool.
Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and
remove the air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor and
air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM15, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the intake manifold collector (upper), gasket, and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove the six ignition coils.
CAUTION:
Do not shock it.
K
L
M
N
O
P
WBIA0339E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
EM-35
2008 Quest
SPARK PLUG
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717785
WBIA0344E
1.
Ignition coil
4.
Rocker cover (LH)
2.
Spark plug
3.
Rocker cover (RH)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the engine cover, using power tool.
Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine
Coolant".
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and
remove the air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor and
air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM15, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the intake manifold collector (upper), gasket, and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove the six ignition coils.
CAUTION:
Do not shock them.
WBIA0339E
Revision: August 2007
EM-36
2008 Quest
SPARK PLUG
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the six spark plugs using a suitable tool.
• If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs
(Platinum-Tipped Type)".
A
EM
C
SEM294A
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
• Do not drop or shock spark plug.
E
F
G
SMA773C
H
If plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time
I
: less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)
: less than 20 seconds
J
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Gap (nominal)
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
K
L
M
SMA806CA
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
• The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
- Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
• The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug
under conditions such as:
- Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution
Revision: August 2007
EM-37
2008 Quest
O
P
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717786
WBIA0745E
1.
Insulator
2.
Fuel tube assembly
3.
Quick connector cap
4.
Clip
5.
Fuel hose
6.
Quick connector cap
7.
O-ring
8.
Fuel injector
9.
Clip
10. Fuel damper retainer
11. Fuel damper
12. O-ring
⇐
Front
A.
Refer to EM-38
B.
Installed condition
C.
Protrusion
D.
Alignment protrusion
E.
Clip mounting groove
CAUTION:
• Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as specified to do so.
• Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side.
• Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector.
Tool number
Revision: August 2007
:
—
(J-45488)
EM-38
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
a. Remove quick connector cap.
A
EM
C
LBIA0090E
D
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool
onto fuel tube.
Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes
no further. Hold the Tool on that position.
CAUTION:
Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector.
Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further.
Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube.
CAUTION:
• Pull quick connector holding it at the ″A″ position, as
WBIA0295E
shown.
• Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick
connector may be damaged.
• Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
• Avoid fire and sparks.
• Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector Orings and use new O-rings for installation.
If necessary, remove fuel damper bolts and the fuel dampers. Remove fuel damper O-rings and use new
O-rings for installation.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
If necessary, install fuel dampers and fuel damper bolts. Use new O-rings for installation.
Install the fuel rails with fuel injectors attached.
NOTE:
• Carefully install O-ring.
• Lubricate O-rings by lightly coating with new engine oil.
• Be careful not to damage the O-rings and surfaces for O-ring
sealing surfaces. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
• Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
• Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with
cutouts of clips after installation.
• Position clips in grooves on the fuel injectors.
• Align the protrusions of the fuel tube assembly with those of
the fuel injectors.
• After properly inserting the fuel injectors onto the fuel tube
WBIA0287E
assembly, check that the fuel tube protrusions are engaged
with those of fuel injectors, and the flanges of the fuel tube assembly are fully engaged with the clips.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-39
2008 Quest
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts in the order as shown, in two
steps:
Fuel tube assembly bolts
Step 1
: 10.1 N·m (1.0 kg-m, 89 in-lb)
Step 2
: 22.0 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
CAUTION:
• After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector
and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
WBIA0255E
Install the quick connector as follows:
Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector and that
there is no damage.
Align the center to insert the quick connector straight onto the fuel tube.
Insert the fuel tube until a click is heard.
Install the quick connector cap.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
LBIA0090E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections as follows:
1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
CAUTION:
Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight.
Revision: August 2007
EM-40
2008 Quest
ROCKER COVER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ROCKER COVER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717787
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0346E
1.
PCV hose
2.
Oil filler cap
3.
Rocker cover (RH)
4.
PCV valve
5.
O-ring
6.
Rocker cover gasket
7.
Rocker cover (LH)
I
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the engine cover using power tool.
If removing rocker cover (RH), disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner to electric
throttle control actuator tube and air cleaner lid. Refer to EM-15,
"Removal and Installation".
3. If removing rocker cover (Rh), remove the front cowl panel.
Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
4. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the windshield wiper
arms and motor assembly. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and
Linkage".
5. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation".
6. If removing rocker cover (LH), disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor.
7. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation".
8. Position engine harness aside.
9. Disconnect PCV hoses.
10. Remove the engine oil dipstick.
11. Remove rocker covers bolts in the order as shown.
K
L
M
N
O
P
WBIA0339E
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
EM-41
2008 Quest
ROCKER COVER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply sealant to the areas on the front corners. Refer to EM-94.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42.
• Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps in the order as shown.
Rocker cover bolts
Step 1 : 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 2 : 8.33 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 74 in-lb)
WBIA0039E
• Install engine cover using power tools.
WBIA0339E
Revision: August 2007
EM-42
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717788
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WBIA0505E
1.
Timing chain tensioner
2.
Internal chain guide
3.
Timing chain tensioner
4.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
5.
Timing chain (secondary)
6.
Timing chain (primary)
7.
Camshaft sprocket (INT)
8.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
9.
Timing chain (secondary)
Revision: August 2007
EM-43
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
11. Slack guide
12. Crankshaft sprocket
13. Timing chain tensioner
14. IVT control valve cover - right
15. Chain tensioner cover
16. RH engine mounting bracket
17. Water hose clamp
18. Water pump cover
19. IVT control valve cover - left
20. Front oil seal
21. Crankshaft pulley
22. Idler pulley
23. Idler pulley bracket
24. Front timing chain case
25. Timing chain tension guide
26. Collared O-ring
27. Seal ring
28. O-ring
NOTE:
• This section describes procedures for removal/installation procedure of the front timing chain case and timing chain related parts without removing the upper oil pan from the vehicle.
• When upper oil pan needs to be removed or installed, or when rear timing chain case is removed or
installed, remove upper and lower oil pans first. Then remove front timing chain case, timing chain related
parts, and rear timing chain case in this order, and install in reverse order of removal. Refer to EM-54.
• Refer to EM-54 for component parts location.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil".
Remove engine cover using power tool.
Remove the upper air cleaner case, mass air flow sensor and air
cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-15,
"Removal and Installation".
Remove the engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to CO-16,
"Removal and Installation".
WBIA0339E
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the IPDM E/R and position aside. Remove the bracket. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6.
Remove the engine undercover.
Remove the RH inner fender splash shield.
Remove the drive belts and idler pulley. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
Recover the A/C refridgerant and remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a)
Service Procedure".
Remove engine oil cooler pipe bolts.
Remove the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank with lines attached and position them aside. Refer
to PS-21, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-44
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
16. Remove the lower oil pan. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
A
17. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and Installation".
18. Disconnect the engine harness and position aside.
19. Remove the A/C low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-168, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (ATC)or MTC-151, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC). EM
20. Support the engine and remove the RH engine mounting insulator, mount and bracket. Refer to EM-110,
"Removal and Installation".
C
21. Remove the chain tensioner cover and water pump cover using
plastic hammer to tap (1) and slide (2) Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
D
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage mating surface.
E
PBIC0846E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0566E
J
22. Loosen the IVT control cover bolts in the order as shown and
remove the IVT control covers.
NOTE:
The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the
intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight
out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket.
23. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation".
24. Remove the upper and lower intake manifold collectors. Refer to
EM-17, "Removal and Installation".
K
L
WBIA0260E
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-45
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
25. Remove the six ignition coils.
26. Remove the engine oil dipstick.
WBIA0513E
27. If necessary, remove the rocker covers. Loosen the rocker covers bolts in the order as shown.
NOTE:
Necessary only when removing secondary timing chains.
LBIA0078E
28. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves.
• Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation.
WBIA0169E
Revision: August 2007
EM-46
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
29. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved
line without color) with timing indicator.
A
EM
C
SEM918G
D
b.
Check that intake and exhaust camshaft lobes
on No. 1 cylinder (right bank of engine) are located as shown.
• If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as
shown.
E
F
G
WBIA0681E
H
30. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
I
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool.
J
K
WBIA0506E
31. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
b.
Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to
remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION:
Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
L
M
N
O
EMQ0477D
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-47
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
32. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in the order as
shown. Remove the lower oil pan.
WBIA0258E
33. Remove the lower oil pan.
a. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan.
Tool number
b.
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
• Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
• Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
Use the Tool by tapping (1) and sliding (2) using a plastic hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan.
WBIA0566E
34. Loosen upper oil pan front bolts in the order as shown.
WBIA0259E
35.
36.
37.
a.
Temporarily install lower oil pan.
Support front of engine under oil pan using a jack.
Remove the front timing chain case.
Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
WBIA0290E
Revision: August 2007
EM-48
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
b. Insert the suitable tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front
timing chain case to pry (2) it loose as shown.
A
EM
C
SEM156F
D
c.
Use the Tool by tapping (1) and sliding (2) using a plastic hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan.
Tool number
E
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
• Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool.
• After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or
warp under a load.
F
G
WBIA0566E
38. Remove the water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from the front timing chain case using Tool.
Tool number
H
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
• Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
39. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front cover.
40. Remove timing chain and related parts if necessary. Refer to
EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
I
J
K
L
WBIA0680E
M
41. Remove O-rings and seal rings from front and rear timing chain case.
N
42. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from
the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
O
P
SEM428G
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
EM-49
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Install timing chain and related parts. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up
to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length
using suitable tool.
NOTE:
If removed during disassembly make sure dowel pins are
installed correctly to insure proper assembly.
PBIC2615E
3.
Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it flush with front
of mounting surface using a suitable tool.
• Install new oil seal in the direction as shown.
Suitable drift
Outer diameter
Inner diameter
: 59 mm (2.32 in)
: 49 mm (1.93 in)
CAUTION:
Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil
seal.
4.
SEM715A
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
• Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin
hole in front timing chain case.
PBIC1133E
Revision: August 2007
EM-50
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as
shown.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
MA-11.
A
EM
C
PBIC1099E
D
6.
a.
Install front timing chain case.
Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper).
CAUTION:
Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place.
E
F
G
PBIC1100E
b.
While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as
shown, hammer dowel pin until the outer end becomes flush
with surface using suitable tool.
• Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin
hole in front timing chain case.
H
I
J
PBIC1115E
7.
K
Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
L
Bolt position Bolt diameter
1, 2
: 8 mm (0.31 in)
3 – 22
: 6 mm (0.24 in)
8.
M
Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
• Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as
shown.
Bolt position Tightening specification
1, 2
: 28.5 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
3 – 22
: 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
N
SEM730G
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-51
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9. Install the upper oil pan front bolts in the order as shown.
Upper oil pan
front bolts
: 17.2 N·m (1.8 kg-m,
13 ft-lb)
PBIC1116E
10. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH
sides).
WBIA0512E
b.
c.
Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
SEM437G
• Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation
groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes
to install the IVT control covers.
• Tighten the intake valve timing control cover bolts in the order
as shown.
Intake valve timing
control cover bolts
: 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
SEM728G
11. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover and the
chain tensioner cover.
Water pump cover bolts
Chain tensioner cover
bolts
: 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb)
: 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb)
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
SEM744GA
Revision: August 2007
EM-52
2008 Quest
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
12. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
• Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil.
• For the second step of angle tightening. Using Tool.
Step 1
Step 2
A
: 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb)
: 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
Tool number
EM
C
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
13. Remove Tool.
Tool number
D
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
E
F
WBIA0506E
14. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns
smoothly.
15. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
G
H
Inspection for Leaks
I
The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks.
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
specified level, if necessary.
J
K
L
M
N
Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluid*
Fuel
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
O
P
* Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
Revision: August 2007
EM-53
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TIMING CHAIN
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717789
WBIA0507E
*Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
1.
Timing chain tensioner
2.
Internal chain guide
3.
Timing chain tensioner
4.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
5.
Timing chain (secondary)
6.
Timing chain (primary)
7.
Camshaft sprocket (INT)
8.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
9.
Timing chain (secondary)
Revision: August 2007
EM-54
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
11. Slack guide
12. Crankshaft sprocket
13. Timing chain tensioner
14. IVT control valve cover - right
15. Chain tensioner cover
16. RH engine mounting bracket
17. Water hose clamp
18. Water pump cover
19. IVT control valve cover - left
20. Front oil seal
21. Crankshaft pulley
22. Idler pulley
23. Idler pulley bracket
24. Front timing chain case
25. Rear timing chain case
26. Timing chain tension guide
27. O-ring
28. Collared O-ring
29. Seal ring
A
EM
CAUTION:
• After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will
strike the pistons.
• When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting
surfaces with new engine oil.
• Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft
brackets, and crankshaft pulley.
• Before removing the upper oil pan, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
• Be careful not to damage sensor edges.
• Do not spill engine oil or coolant on drive belts.
NOTE:
• This section describes procedures for removal/installation procedure of the front timing chain case and timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case, when oil pan (upper) needs to be removed/installed for
engine overhaul, etc.
• To remove/install front timing chain case, timing chain, and its related parts without removing oil pan (upper),
refer to EM-43.
Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation".
Install engine slingers.
Engine slinger bolts
D
E
F
G
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
C
I
: 28 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
J
K
WBIA0353E
L
M
N
O
WBIA0354E
3.
4.
5.
Remove idler pulley and bracket.
Remove the upper and lower oil pans. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-55
P
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the chain tensioner cover and water pump cover using
plastic hammer to tap (1) and slide (2) Tool.
PBIC0846E
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage mating surface.
WBIA0566E
7.
8.
9.
Remove the IVT control cover bolts in the order as shown and
remove the IVT control covers.
NOTE:
The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the
intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight
out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket.
Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the intake manifold collectors (upper and lower). Refer
to EM-17, "Removal and Installation".
WBIA0260E
10. Remove the six spark plugs. Refer to EM-36, "Removal and Installation".
11. Remove the rocker covers. Refer to EM-41, "Removal and Installation".
12. Disconnect the connectors and remove the bank 1 and bank 2
IVT control solenoid valves.
• Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation.
WBIA0169E
Revision: August 2007
EM-56
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
13. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved
line without color) with timing indicator.
A
EM
C
SEM918G
D
b.
Check that intake and exhaust camshaft lobes
on No. 1 cylinder (right bank of engine) are located as shown.
• If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as
shown.
E
F
G
WBIA0681E
H
14. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
I
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool.
J
K
WBIA0506E
15. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
b.
Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to
remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION:
Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
L
M
N
O
EMQ0477D
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-57
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
16. Remove the front timing chain case.
a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
WBIA0290E
b.
Insert the suitable tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front
timing chain case to pry (2) it loose as shown.
SEM156F
c.
Use the Tool by tapping (1) and sliding (2) using a plastic hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
• Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool.
• After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or
warp under a load.
WBIA0566E
17. Remove the internal chain guide (1).
• Timing chain tensioner (2)
• Timing chain tensioner guide (3)
• Slack guide (4)
WBIA0682E
Revision: August 2007
EM-58
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
18. Remove the timing chain tensioner (1) and slack guide (6).
• Place paint marks on the timing chain and sprockets to indicate the correct position of the components for installation.
a. Pull lever (4) down and release plunger stopper tab (2). Plunger
stopper tab (2) can be pushed up to release [coaxial structure
with lever (4)].
• ⇐: pull lever
b. Insert stopper pin (3) into tensioner body hole to hold lever (4),
and keep the tab (2) released. An Allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098
in)] (3) is used for a stopper pin as an example.
c. Insert plunger (5) into tensioner body hole by pressing the slack
guide (6).
• ⇐: Press slack guide
d. Keep the slack guide (6) pressed and hold it by pushing the
stopper pin (3) through the lever hole and body hole as shown.
e. Remove the timing chain tensioner installation bolts (7) and
remove the timing chain tensioner (1).
f. Remove slack guide installation bolt and the slack guide (6).
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
WBIA0691E
19. Remove primary timing chain and crankshaft sprocket.
CAUTION:
After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will
strike the pistons.
20. Attach a suitable stopper pin (1) to the RH (2) and LH (3) secondary timing chain tensioners.
H
I
J
K
L
WBIA0683E
M
21. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts.
• Apply paint to the timing chain and camshaft sprockets for
alignment during installation.
• Secure the hexagonal portion of the camshaft using a wrench
to loosen the bolts as shown.
N
O
P
WBIA0172E
22. Remove the secondary timing chains (3) with camshaft sprockets.
Revision: August 2007
EM-59
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Illustration shows RH (1) secondary timing chain (3), and side
view (7) if needed.
a. Rotate camshaft slightly, and loosen secondary timing chain (3)
on secondary timing chain tensioner side.
b. Insert metal or resin plate (5) [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into plunger (6)
between secondary timing chain (3) and secondary timing chain
tensioner plunger (6). Remove camshaft sprocket and secondary timing chain (3) with secondary timing chain removed from
plunger (6) groove.
• Intake camshaft sprocket is two-for-one structure of primary
WBIA0684E
and secondary sprockets.
• Handle the intake sprockets as an assembly.
CAUTION:
• Secondary timing chain tensioner plunger (6) can move while stopper pin (4) is inserted in timing chain tensioner (2). Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use
caution during removal.
• Avoid impact or dropping the intake sprockets.
• Do not disassemble the intake sprockets (never loosen
bolts A and B as shown).
SEM734G
23. Loosen the No. 1 camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the
order as shown and remove No. 1 camshaft brackets.
LBIA0343E
24. Remove the timing chain tension guide.
Revision: August 2007
EM-60
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
25. Remove the rear timing chain case.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the plate metal covers for the oil passage.
• After removing the chain case, do not apply any load to
the case that might bend it.
A
EM
C
KBIA1307E
D
a.
Loosen and remove the rear timing chain case bolts in the order
as shown.
E
F
G
WBIA0685E
b.
Cut the sealant using Tool (A) and remove the rear timing chain
case.
Tool number
H
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
I
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage mating surface.
J
WBIA0686E
26. Remove the engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly.
27. Remove O-rings (3) on the RH (1) and LH (2) No. 1 camshaft
bracket, cylinder head and cylinder block.
K
L
M
N
WBIA0687E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-61
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PBIC0788E
28. If necessary, remove the water pump. Refer to CO-19,
"Removal and Installation".
LBIA0361E
29. Remove the camshaft chain tensioners (for secondary timing chains).
30. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from
the front and rear timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
SEM428G
31. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and
bolts.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces.
SEM161F
Revision: August 2007
EM-62
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
32. Use a scraper to remove all the old Silicone RTV Sealant from
the water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and IVT control
covers.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
A
EM
C
WBIA0173E
D
33. Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the camshaft No. 1
bracket mating surface using a scraper.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surface.
E
F
G
SEM892E
34. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front cover.
H
I
J
WBIA0680E
Inspection after removal
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at the roller links of the
timing chain. Replace the timing chain as necessary.
K
L
M
N
SEM928E
O
Installation
NOTE:
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-63
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
WBIA0280E
1.
Internal chain guide
2.
Camshaft sprocket (intake)
3.
Mating mark (yellow link)
4.
Mating mark (punched)
5.
Secondary timing chain tensioner
6.
Mating mark (gold link)
7.
Secondary timing chain
8.
Camshaft sprocket (exhaust)
9.
Timing chain tension guide
10. Water pump
1.
11. Crankshaft sprocket
12. Mating mark (notched)
13. Primary timing chain
14. Slack guide
15. Primary timing chain tensioner
16. Mating mark (back side)
17. Crankshaft key
Install the RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioners
(3).
Secondary timing
chain tensioner bolts
: 8.5 N·m (0.87 kg-m, 75 in-lb)
• O-ring (4)
• Stopper pin (5)
WBIA0688E
Revision: August 2007
EM-64
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Before installing No. 1 camshaft bracket, apply sealant to mating
surface.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
• Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant.
• Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket".
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
WBIA0509E
3.
Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown.
H
Camshaft bracket bolts
Step 1 (bolts 7 - 10) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 2 (bolts 1 - 6)
: 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 3
: 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Step 4
: 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb)
I
J
SEM885EA
K
L
M
N
SEM886EA
4.
Install the engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly and gasket and coolant inlet housing.
Engine coolant inlet and
thermostat assembly bolts
O
: 9.8 N·m (1.00 kg-m,
87 in-lb)
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-65
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Install rear timing chain case as follows:
a. Install new O-rings on cylinder block.
PBIC0788E
b.
Install new O-rings (4) on RH (1) and LH (2) cylinder heads.
• Secondary timing chain tensioner (3)
• Stopper pin (5)
WBIA0688E
6.
If removed, install the water pump. Refer to CO-19, "Removal
and Installation".
LBIA0361E
Revision: August 2007
EM-66
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to rear timing chain case as shown.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0336E
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-42.
• Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
8.
a.
Align the rear timing chain case with the dowel pins (RH and LH)
on the cylinder block and install the case. Make sure the O-rings
stay in place during installation.
Tighten the rear timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
There are two bolt lengths used. Follow the chart below for
proper bolt length specifications.
Bolt position
1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
4, 5, 11 - 26
b.
Bolt length
20 mm (0.79 in)
16 mm (0.63 in)
K
L
M
SEM735G
After all bolts are initially tightened, retighten them to the specification in the order as shown.
Rear timing chain case bolts
9.
J
N
: 12.7 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
After installing rear timing chain case, check surface height difference between the rear timing chain case
to cylinder block.
Standard
: -0.24 - 0.14 mm (-0.0094 - 0.0055 in)
P
• If not within standard, repeat above installation procedure.
10. Install the timing chain tension guide.
Timing chain tension guide bolts
Revision: August 2007
: 21.6 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
EM-67
O
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11. Position the crankshaft so No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke.
• Make sure that the dowel pin hole, dowel pin and crankshaft
key are located as shown.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side): at cylinder head upper
face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side): at cylinder head upper
face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key: at cylinder head side of RH bank.
CAUTION:
Hole on small diameter side must be used for intake camshaft sprocket dowel pin. Do not misidentify (ignore big
diameter side).
KBIA1073E
12. Install the secondary timing chains and camshaft sprockets.
CAUTION:
Matching marks between the timing chain and sprockets
slip easily. Confirm all matching mark positions repeatedly
during the installation process.
• Push the sleeve of the secondary chain tensioner and keep it
pressed in with a stopper pin.
SEM430G
a.
b.
Align the intake (1) and exhaust (9) sprockets (stamped) matching marks (4), (5), (7) and (10) to the secondary timing chain (8)
[gold link (2)] and install them.
• Illustration shows RH (rear view)
• Matching marks for the intake sprocket are on the back side of
the secondary sprocket.
• There are two types of matching marks, round (7) and (10)
and oval (4) and (5) types. They should be used for the RH
and LH banks, respectively.
RH bank: use round type (7) and (10).
LH (6) bank: use oval type (4) and (5).
Align the dowel pin (3) and pin hole on the camshaft (1) the
dowel pin groove (11) and dowel pin on the camshaft front end,
and install them.
• On the intake side, align the pin hole on the small diameter
side of the camshaft front end with the dowel pin (3) on the
back side of the camshaft sprocket (1), and install them.
• On the exhaust side, align the dowel pin on the camshaft front
end with the dowel pin groove (11) on the camshaft sprocket
(9), and install them.
• Camshaft sprocket bolts must be tightened in the next step.
Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation
of the dowel pins (3).
Revision: August 2007
EM-68
WBIA0689E
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating
marks during and after installation. To make the matching easier, make a mating mark on the sprocket teeth in advance with
paint.
A
EM
C
SEM811G
D
13. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts.
• Secure the camshaft using a wrench at the hexagonal portion
to tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts.
E
F
G
WBIA0172E
14. Pull the stopper pins (1) out from the secondary timing chain
tensioners (2) and (3).
H
I
J
WBIA0683E
15. Install the crankshaft sprocket on the crankshaft.
• Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face
the front of the engine.
K
L
M
N
SEM929E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-69
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
16. Install the primary timing chain.
• Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on
camshaft sprocket is aligned with the yellow link on the timing
chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft
sprocket is aligned with the gold link on the timing chain, as
shown.
• When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing
chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft using a
wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating
marks.
• During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating
mark alignments of the secondary timing chains.
WBIA0510E
17. Install the internal chain guide.
• Timing chain tensioner (2)
• Timing chain tensioner guide (3)
• Slack guide (4)
SEM740G
18. Install the slack guide.
• Do not overtighten the slack guide installation bolt. It is normal
for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when the installation bolt
are tightened to specification.
SEM741G
Revision: August 2007
EM-70
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
19. Install the timing chain tensioner (1) and slack guide (6).
a. Install the timing chain tensioner (1) and install the timing chain
tensioner installation bolts (7).
b. Keep the slack guide (6) pressed and hold it by pushing the
stopper pin (3) through the lever hole and body hole as shown.
c. Insert plunger (5) into tensioner body hole by pressing the slack
guide (6).
• ⇐: Press slack guide
d. Insert stopper pin (3) into tensioner body hole to hold lever (4),
and keep the tab (2) released. An Allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098
in)] (3) is used for a stopper pin as an example.
e. Pull lever (4) down and release plunger stopper tab (2). Plunger
stopper tab (2) can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure
with lever (4)).
• ⇐: pull lever
• When installing the chain tensioner, push in the sleeve and
keep it pressed in with the stopper pin.
• Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the
back and the mounting surfaces of the chain tensioner.
• After installation, pull out the stopper pin by pressing the slack
guide.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
WBIA0691E
20. Reconfirm that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped out of alignment.
21. Install new RH (1) and LH (2) O-rings (3) on the rear timing
chain case.
H
I
J
K
WBIA0690E
L
22. Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a
suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges.
• Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
Suitable drift
Outer diameter
Inner diameter
M
: 59 mm (2.32 in)
: 49 mm (1.93 in)
N
CAUTION:
Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil
seal.
SEM715A
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-71
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case
end face, using a suitable drift.
• Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and
seal lip is not inverted.
PBIC0790E
23. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
MA-11.
• Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
• If removed install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into
dowel pin hole in front timing chain case.
PBIC1133E
24. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
Bolt position Bolt diameter
1, 2
: 8 mm (0.31 in)
3 – 22
: 6 mm (0.24 in)
25. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
• Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as
shown.
Bolt position Tightening specification
1, 2
: 28.5 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
3 – 22
: 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
Revision: August 2007
EM-72
SEM730G
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
26. After installing the front timing chain case, check the surface
height difference between the following parts on the oil pan
mounting surface.
• If not within specification, repeat the installation procedure.
Front timing chain case to
rear timing chain case
Front timing chain case to
cylinder block
A
EM
: (–0.14) - 0.14 mm [(–
0.0055) - 0.0055 in]
: (–0.36) - (–0.10) mm [(–
0.0142) - (–0.0039) in]
C
SEM746G
D
27. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH
sides).
E
F
G
WBIA0512E
b.
c.
Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
H
I
J
SEM437G
• Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation
groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes
to install the IVT control covers.
• Tighten the intake valve timing control cover bolts in the order
as shown.
K
L
M
Intake valve timing
control cover bolts
: 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
N
SEM728G
28. Apply liquid gasket and install the chain tensioner cover.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
O
P
SEM744GA
Revision: August 2007
EM-73
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
29. Install the RH engine mounting insulator, mount and bracket. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation".
30. Install the rocker covers. Refer to EM-41, "Removal and Installation".
31. Install the IVT control solenoid valve bank 1 and bank 2.
IVT control solenoid
valve bolts
: 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m,
100 in-lb)
WBIA0169E
32. Install the six spark plugs in their original positions refer to EM-36, "Removal and Installation".
33. Install the intake manifold collectors (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation".
34. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
• Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil.
• For the second step of angle tightening. Using Tool.
Step 1
Step 2
: 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb)
: 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
35. Remove Tool.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
WBIA0506E
36. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns
smoothly.
37. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
38. Refill the engine with oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Wait at least 30 minutes for the Silicone RTV Sealant to set before filling the engine with fluids to
avoid leaks.
• Activate the fuel system. Check for any leaks when the system is repressurized and correct as
necessary.
• Start the engine and check all systems for leaks or improper operation. Correct as necessary.
• After starting engine, keep idling for three minutes. Then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no
load to purge air from the high-pressure oil chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may
produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of
concern.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspection for Leaks
The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks.
Revision: August 2007
EM-74
2008 Quest
TIMING CHAIN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
A
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
EM
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may C
generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after
hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids includ- D
ing engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the
E
specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items:
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Item
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluid*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
Fuel
F
G
* Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-75
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717790
WBIA0515E
1.
Oil filler cap
2.
Rocker cover (LH)
3.
Camshaft bracket (LH)
4.
Camshaft (INT)
5.
PCV valve
6.
Cylinder head (LH)
7.
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
8.
Spark plug
9.
Camshaft (EXH)
10. Tensioner sleeve
11. Tensioner spring
12. Secondary camshaft chain tensioner
13.
14. PCV hose
15. Gasket
17. Seal washer
18. Dowel pin
IVT control solenoid valve
16. O-ring
CAUTION:
Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-76
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. If necessary, remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (right
and left bank) from cylinder head back side.
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks.
• Do not disassemble.
• Do not allow any metal particles to adhere to magnetic
part at sensor tip.
• Do not place sensors in a location where they are
exposed to magnetism.
A
EM
C
KBIA1046E
D
3.
Remove the IVT control solenoid valves.
• Discard the IVT control solenoid valve gaskets and use new
gaskets for installation.
E
F
G
WBIA0169E
4.
Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft brackets and the camshafts.
• Mark the camshafts, camshaft brackets, and bolts so they are
placed in the same position and direction for installation.
• Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in
the order as shown.
H
I
J
SEM856E
K
L
M
N
SEM857E
5.
Remove valve lifters.
NOTE:
Identify installation positions to ensure proper installation.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-77
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove camshaft RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain
tensioner (3) from cylinder head with the stopper pin (5)
inserted.
NOTE:
Stopper pin (5) was installed when secondary timing chain was
removed.
• O-rings (4)
WBIA0688E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Visual Check
Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Replace if necessary.
Camshaft Runout
1.
2.
3.
Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown.
Set dial gauges vertically to No. 3 journal as shown.
Turn camshaft in one direction slowly by hand, measure the
camshaft runout on the dial gauges.
• Runout is the largest indicator reading after one full revolution.
Camshaft Runout
Standard : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
Limit
: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
4.
PBIC0929E
If actual runout exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Lobe Height
1.
2.
Measure camshaft cam lobe height as shown. Refer to EM-142,
"Standard and Limit".
If wear has reduced the lobe height below specifications,
replace the camshaft.
SEM549A
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal
• Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal as shown.
Standard outer diameter, No.1
Standard outer diameter, No.2, 3, 4
: 25.935 - 25.955 mm (1.0211
- 1.0218 in)
: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230
- 0.9238 in)
SEM012A
Revision: August 2007
EM-78
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket
1. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts to specified torque. Follow the
"INSTALLATION" procedure.
2. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter ″A″ of camshaft bearing.
Standard inner diameter
No. 1
Standard inner diameter
No. 2, 3, 4
: 26.000 - 26.021 mm
(1.0236 - 1.0244 in)
: 23.500 - 23.521 mm
(0.9252 - 0.9260 in)
A
EM
C
PBIC1645E
D
E
Calculation of Camshaft Journal to Bracket Clearance
(Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal)
Standard
No.1
Standard No.
2, 3, 4
Limit
F
: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in)
: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 in)
G
: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
• When out of the specified range, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTICE:
Inner diameter of camshaft bracket is manufactured together with cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder
head assembly.
I
Camshaft End Play
1.
2.
Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation".
Install dial gauge in thrust direction on front end of camshaft.
Measure end play when camshaft is moved forward/backward
(in direction to axis) as shown.
Standard
Limit
H
J
K
: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in)
: 0.24 mm (0.0094 in)
• If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again.
• If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head.
L
SEM864E
M
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
1.
2.
3.
Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown.
Install camshaft sprocket on camshaft.
Measure camshaft sprocket runout.
Limit
4.
N
O
: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
If sprocket runout exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
P
PBIC0930E
Valve Lifter
Revision: August 2007
EM-79
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or
cracks, replace as necessary.
KBIA0182E
Valve Lifter Clearance
Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter
• Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Refer to EM-142,
"Standard and Limit".
• If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter.
JEM798G
Valve Lifter Bore Diameter
• Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore of
cylinder head. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
• If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly.
SEM867E
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance
• (Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) – (outer diameter of valve lifter). Refer to EM-142,
"Standard and Limit".
• If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly.
INSTALLATION
1.
Before installation, remove any old Silicone RTV Sealant from
component mating surfaces using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces.
NOTE:
Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt holes and
threads.
SEM161F
Revision: August 2007
EM-80
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Before installing the No. 1 camshaft bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the mating surface using suitable
scraper.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surface.
A
EM
C
SEM892E
D
3.
Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke.
• The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder
center line as shown.
E
F
G
SEM532G
4.
Install the RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioners
(3) on the cylinder heads.
• O-rings (4)
• Stopper pins (5)
H
I
J
WBIA0688E
5.
6.
Install valve lifters.
NOTE:
Install them in original positions.
K
L
Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets.
• Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange.
M
N
O
WBIA0516E
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-81
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Follow your identification marks (2) and (3) made during removal, or follow the identification marks (1)
that are present on the new camshafts components for proper placement and direction of the components.
⇐ Indicates engine front
Bank
RH (4)
LH (5)
INT/EXH
Identification
mark (1)
Drill mark
INT
RE
EXH
Paint marks
M1 (3)
M2 (2)
Yes
Yes
No
RE
No
No
Yes
INT
LH
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
LH
No
No
Yes
WBIA0692E
• Position the camshafts:
RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock.
LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock.
KBIA1072E
7.
Before installing No. 1 camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 camshaft bracket.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
WBIA0509E
Revision: August 2007
EM-82
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant.
• Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket".
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
SEM446G
• Install remaining camshaft brackets in their original positions
and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown.
• If checking and adjusting any part of valve assembly or camshaft, check valve clearance according to the reference data.
Refer to EM-85, "Valve Clearance".
H
I
J
SEM564G
8.
K
Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown.
L
Camshaft bracket bolts
Step 1 (bolts 7 - 10) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 2 (bolts 1 - 6)
: 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 3
: 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Step 4
: 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb)
M
N
SEM885EA
O
P
SEM886EA
Revision: August 2007
EM-83
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of No.1
camshaft bracket and cylinder head.
Standard
: – 0.14 (– 0.0055 in)
• If measurement is outside the specified range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket.
EMQ0044D
10. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets.
WBIA0169E
11. If necessary, install camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank.)
12. Install the timing chains. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
Inspection After Installation
INFOID:0000000001717791
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE
CAUTION:
• Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0021 are detected in self-diagnostic results of
CONSULT-III and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-107,
"CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
• Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-8.
2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while
checking.
a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-76.
4. Crank the engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out
from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. End crank after checking.
WARNING:
Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.).
CAUTION:
Engine oil may squirt from intake valve timing control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop
cloth to protect the engine components and the vehicle. Do
not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as
drive belt or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off
PBIC2869E
any splashed engine oil.
• Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve if engine oil does not
come out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. Refer to LU-6.
5. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT),
and then check each oil groove for clogging.
Revision: August 2007
EM-84
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to LU-6.
6. After inspection, install removed parts.
Valve Clearance
A
INFOID:0000000001717792
EM
CHECKING
Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine
conditions regarding valve clearance.
NOTE:
Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running.
1. Remove the intake manifold collectors. Refer to EM-17,
"Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the rocker covers. EM-41, "Removal and Installation".
C
D
E
SEM713A
4.
F
Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
• Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
G
H
I
SEM918G
J
• Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and
valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full
revolution (360°) and align as shown.
- RH cylinder head (1)
- ⇐ Engine front
K
L
M
WBIA0681E
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-85
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Check only the valves as shown.
Crank Position
Valve No. 1
Valve No. 2
Valve No. 3
Valve No. 6
No. 1 TDC
Intake
Exhaust
Exhaust
Intake
SEM893E
• Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve
lifter and camshaft.
• Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size.
Valve Clearance for Checking (cold)
Intake
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
KBIA0185E
6.
7.
Turn crankshaft 240°.
Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
Revision: August 2007
EM-86
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Check only those valves as shown.
A
Crank Position
Valve No. 2
Valve No. 3
Valve No. 4
Valve No. 5
No. 3 TDC
Intake
Intake
Exhaust
Exhaust
EM
C
D
E
F
G
SEM894E
9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above.
10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
H
11. Check only those valves as shown.
I
Crank Position
Valve No. 1
Valve No. 4
Valve No. 5
Valve No. 6
No. 5 TDC
Exhaust
Intake
Intake
Exhaust
J
K
L
M
N
O
SEM958E
12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse
order of removal. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. Follow the
"VALVE ADJUSTING" procedure.
VALVE ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
NOTE:
• Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used).
Revision: August 2007
EM-87
2008 Quest
P
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences
caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances.
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a
micrometer as shown.
SEM754G
4.
Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation:
t = t1 + (C1 – C2 )
t
= Valve lifter thickness to be replaced
= Removed valve lifter thickness
t1
C1 = Measured valve clearance
C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake
: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)*
Exhaust
: 0.33 mm (0.013 in)*
*: Approximately 20°C (68°F)
• Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks
on the reverse side (inside the cylinder).
KBIA0119E
Intake and Exhaust
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Stamp mark
Thickness
788U
7.88 mm (0.3102 in)
840U
8.40 mm (0.3307 in)
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit" .
CAUTION:
Install identification letter at the end and top, “U” and “N”, at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.)
Install the selected replacement valve lifter.
Install the camshaft. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation".
Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand.
Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification.
After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within
specification.
Revision: August 2007
EM-88
2008 Quest
CAMSHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Valve Clearance
Cold
Hot* (reference data)
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in)
A
EM
* Approximately 80°C (176°F)
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level.
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel
and exhaust gas.
• Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to
specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Working fluid
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
—
Leakage
—
Fuel
Exhaust gas
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
*Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-89
2008 Quest
OIL SEAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal
INFOID:0000000001717793
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove camshaft and valve lifter relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and
Installation".
Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center. This prevents valve
from dropping inside cylinder.
CAUTION:
When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front timing chain case with the timing
chain.
Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring
using Tool.
Tool numbers
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
: KV10109230 ( — )
WBIA0578E
4.
Remove valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
WBIA0489E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
Press in valve oil seal to height ″H″ using Tool to specified
height.
Tool number
:
—
(J-39386)
NOTE:
Dimension ″H″: height measured before valve spring seat installation.
Intake and exhaust
3.
: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
WBIA0490E
INFOID:0000000001717794
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the following parts:
• Engine undercover.
• Drive belts. Refer to EM-12.
• Radiator fan. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-90
2008 Quest
OIL SEAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation".
b. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole.
A
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
EM
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear when setting the Tool.
C
Tool number
D
WBIA0506E
c.
Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
E
d.
Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to
remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION:
Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
F
G
H
EMQ0477D
3.
I
Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front timing chain case or crankshaft.
J
K
L
WBIA0680E
INSTALLATION
1.
M
Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a
suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges.
• Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
Suitable drift
Outer diameter
Inner diameter
: 59 mm (2.32 in)
: 49 mm (1.93 in)
O
CAUTION:
Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil
seal.
Revision: August 2007
N
EM-91
P
SEM715A
2008 Quest
OIL SEAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case
end face, using a suitable drift.
• Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and
seal lip is not inverted.
PBIC0790E
2.
Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
• Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil.
• For the second step of angle tightening. Use Tool.
Step 1
Step 2
: 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb)
: 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
Tool number
3.
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
Remove Tool attached to the starter bolt hole.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
WBIA0506E
4.
5.
Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns
smoothly.
Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
INFOID:0000000003248490
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove oil pan (upper). Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the transaxle. Refer to AT-224, "Removal".
Remove drive plate.
Remove rear oil seal retainer using Tool.
Tool Number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage mating surface.
• If rear oil retainer is removed, replace it with a new one
SEM830E
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
EM-92
2008 Quest
OIL SEAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove old liquid gasket material from mating surface of cylinder block and oil pan using a suitable
scraper.
A
2. Apply liquid gasket to the new rear oil seal retainer using suitable tool.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GIEM
42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant".
• Assembly should be completed within 5 minutes after coating.
C
D
AWBIA0028ZZ
3.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly.
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of
drivetrain components.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-93
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001717796
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure
Check".
Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to EM-36, "Removal and Installation".
Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder.
Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake
flow.
Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication.
Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7).
NOTE:
Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine
speed.
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
SEM387C
Standard
Minimum
Difference limit between
cylinders
1,275 (13.0, 185)
981 (10.0, 142)
98 (1.0, 14)
9.
a.
b.
If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes.
Retest compression (steps 5 - 8).
• If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so,
replace piston rings after checking piston.
• If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve
and/or valve seat. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged
excessively, replace as necessary.
• If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other:
- The cylinder head gasket may be leaking.
- Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary.
10. After inspection is complete, install removed components.
11. Start engine and confirm that engine runs smoothly.
12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-78.
Revision: August 2007
EM-94
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717797
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WBIA0747E
1.
Oil filler cap
2.
Oil seal
3.
Rocker cover
4.
PCV hose
5.
IVT control solenoid valve
6.
PCV valve
7.
Tensioner sleeve
8.
Spring
9.
Secondary timing chain tensioner
L
10. Valve
11. Cylinder head
12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
13. Spark plug
14. Valve spring seat
15. Valve spring
16. Valve spring retainer
17. Valve collet
18. Valve lifter
19. Camshaft (EXH)
20. Camshaft (INT)
21. Camshaft bracket
22. Spark plug tube
23. Gasket
24. O-ring
25. Seal washer
26. Dowel pin
A.
Refer to EM-41
B.
M
N
Selectable parts
Refer to EM-76
C.
Follow the "INSTALLATION" procedure
O
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the intake manifold. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three way catalysts (manifolds), exhaust manifold heat shields and RH exhaust manifold.
Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-95
2008 Quest
P
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts and the camshaft
brackets.
• Mark the camshaft brackets so they are placed in the same
position and direction for installation.
• Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in
the order as shown.
SEM856E
SEM857E
5.
6.
Remove the water outlet. Refer to CO-26, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the RH and LH cylinder head bolts, using power tool.
• The bolts should be loosened gradually in three steps in the
order as shown.
SEM859E
SEM860E
7.
Remove cylinder heads and gaskets.
• Discard the cylinder head gaskets and use new gaskets for
installation.
SEM863E
Revision: August 2007
EM-96
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. If necessary, remove the LH exhaust manifold. Loosen the
exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
A
EM
C
WBIA0289E
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
E
Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts
• Inspect the cylinder head bolts before installing the cylinder heads.
CAUTION:
Cylinder head bolts are tightened by degree rotation tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2
exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones.
F
G
Limit (d1 - d2)
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
• If a reduction in outer diameter appears in a position other than d2,
use it as the d2 measuring point.
• Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new engine
oil for installation.
H
I
SEM957E
INSTALLATION
1.
Before installing the rear timing chain case, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from mating surface using a scraper.
• Also remove old sealant from mating surface of cylinder block.
J
K
L
SEM891E
• Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt hole and
thread.
M
N
O
P
SEM161F
Revision: August 2007
EM-97
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Before installing the No. 1 camshaft bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the mating surface using a scraper.
• Do not scratch the mating surface.
SEM892E
3.
Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke.
• The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder
center line as shown.
SEM532G
4.
Install new gaskets on the cylinder heads.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately or valves
will strike piston heads.
SEM445G
5.
If necessary, install the LH exhaust manifold. Tighten the
exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
Exhaust manifold nuts
: 30.9 N·m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft - lb)
WBIA0278E
6.
Install the cylinder heads on the cylinder block. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in five steps in the order as shown using Tool.
Tool number
Step a
Step b
Step c
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
: 98 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb)
: Loosen in the reverse order of tightening.
: 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)
SEM879EA
Revision: August 2007
EM-98
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Step d
Step e
: 90° clockwise
: 90° clockwise
A
EM
C
D
SEM877EA
E
F
G
H
SEM878EA
7.
8.
Install the water outlet. Refer to CO-26, "Removal and Installation".
Install secondary timing chain tensioners (3) on both RH (1) and
LH (2) cylinder heads.
• O-rings (4)
• Stopper pin (5)
I
J
K
L
WBIA0688E
9.
Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets.
• Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange.
M
N
O
WBIA0516E
Revision: August 2007
EM-99
2008 Quest
P
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present
on the new camshaft components for proper placement.
⇐ Indicates engine front.
Bank
RH (4)
LH (5)
INT/EXH
Identification
mark
Drill mark
INT
RE
EXH
Paint marks
M1 (3)
M2 (2)
Yes
Yes
No
RE
No
No
Yes
INT
LH
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
LH
No
No
Yes
WBIA0692E
• Position the camshafts:
RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock
LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock.
KBIA1072E
10. Before installing No. 1 camshaft bracket, apply sealant to mating
surface.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
WBIA0509E
Revision: August 2007
EM-100
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant.
• Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket".
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
SEM446G
• Install No. 2 and 4 camshaft brackets in their original positions
and directions. Align the stamp marks as shown.
• If any part of the valve assembly or camshaft is replaced,
check and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to EM-85, "Valve
Clearance".
H
I
J
SEM564G
11. Tighten the camshaft brackets in four steps in the order as
shown.
NOTE:
Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the camshaft bracket
bolts with new engine oil before installation.
K
L
M
Camshaft bracket bolts
Step 1 (bolts 7 - 10) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 2 (bolts 1 - 6)
: 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 3
: 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Step 4
: 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb)
N
SEM885EA
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-101
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SEM886EA
12. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of camshaft No. 1 bracket and cylinder head.
Standard
: –– 0.14 mm (–0.0055 in)
NOTE:
If measurement is outside the specific range, re-install camshaft
and camshaft bracket.
EMQ0044D
13. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets.
WBIA0169E
14. Install new O-rings on the cylinder block.
SEM534G
15. Install RH (1) and LH (2) new O-rings (3) on the cylinder heads.
WBIA0687E
Revision: August 2007
EM-102
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
16. Install the RH exhaust manifold, three way catalysts (manifolds) and exhaust manifold heat shields. Refer
to EM-25, "Removal and Installation".
17. Install timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
18. Install the intake manifold. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation".
Disassembly and Assembly
A
EM
INFOID:0000000001717798
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WBIA0693E
1.
Cylinder head (right bank)
2.
Spark plug
3.
Valve lifter
4.
Valve collet
5.
Valve spring retainer
6.
Valve spring
7.
Valve oil seal
8.
Valve guide
9.
Valve seat (INT)
10. Valve (INT)
Revision: August 2007
11. Valve (EXH)
EM-103
12. Valve seat (EXH)
2008 Quest
P
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
13. Cylinder head (left bank)
14. Intake manifold
15. Valve spring seat
16. Spark plug tube
17. Gaskets
⇐
Engine front
CAUTION:
• When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting
surfaces with new engine oil.
• Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surface when installing cylinder head, camshaft sprocket,
crankshaft pulley, and camshaft bracket.
• Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove valve lifter.
• Mark position for installation.
Remove valve collet.
• Compress valve spring using Tool. Remove valve collet with
magnet driver.
Tool numbers
3.
4.
5.
Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring, and valve spring
seat.
WBIA0578E
Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove
valve, mark for assembly.
• Inspect valve guide clearance before removal. Refer to EM-104, "Inspection After Disassembly".
• Confirm installation point.
Remove the valve oil seals using Tool.
Tool number
6.
7.
8.
9.
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
: KV10109230 ( — )
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
If valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-104, "Inspection
After Disassembly".
If valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-104, "Inspection
After Disassembly".
Remove spark plug with spark plug wrench.
Remove spark plug tube, as necessary.
WBIA0489E
• Using a pair of pliers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage cylinder head.
• Once removed, a spark plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused. Do not remove it
unless absolutely necessary.
Inspection After Disassembly
INFOID:0000000001717799
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
• Clean the surface of the cylinder head. Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of
cylinder head surface.
• Check along six positions as shown.
Head surface distortion
Limit
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
• If beyond the specified limit, resurface or replace it.
• The limit for cylinder head resurfacing is determined by the cylinder block resurfacing.
SEM861E
Revision: August 2007
EM-104
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Resurfacing Limit
Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”.
Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”.
The maximum limit
: A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
A
EM
• After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates freely
by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head must be replaced.
Nominal cylinder
head height ″H″
C
: 126.3 - 126.5 mm
(4.972 - 4.980 in)
D
E
PBIC0924E
F
VALVE DIMENSIONS
Check dimensions of each valve, refer to EM-142, "Standard and
Limit".
G
H
I
SEM188A
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
1.
J
Measure valve deflection as shown. (Valve and valve guide
mostly wear in this direction.)
K
Valve deflection limit (dial gauge reading)
Intake
: 0.24 mm (0.0094 in)
Exhaust
: 0.28 mm (0.0110 in)
L
M
SEM178F
2.
a.
b.
If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance.
Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter.
Check that clearance is within specification.
N
O
Valve to valve guide clearance standard
Intake
: 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in)
Exhaust
: 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 - 0.0025 in)
Valve to valve guide clearance limit
Intake
: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Exhaust
: 0.09 mm (0.0035 in)
c.
P
SEM938C
If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide.
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
Revision: August 2007
EM-105
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOTE:
When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide.
1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230°
- 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
WARNING:
Cylinder head is hot. Wear protective equipment to prevent
getting burned.
SEM008A
2.
Drive out the valve guide with a press [under a 20 kn (2.2 US
ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool.
SEM931C
3.
Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable reamer.
Valve guide hole diameter
(for service parts), intake
and exhaust
: 10.175 - 10.196 mm
(0.4006 - 0.4014 in)
SEM932C
4.
Heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in
heated oil and press new valve guide from camshaft side into
the cylinder head to the dimensions as shown.
WARNING:
Cylinder head is hot. Wear protective equipment to prevent
getting burned.
Projection ″L″
: 12.6 - 12.8 mm (0.496 - 0.504 in)
SEM950E
Revision: August 2007
EM-106
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Apply a reamer finish to the valve guide, using suitable reamer.
A
Intake and exhaust
finished size
: 6.000 - 6.018 mm
(0.2362 - 0.2369 in)
EM
C
SEM932C
D
VALVE SEAT CONTACT
• After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are
within specifications, perform this procedure.
• Apply prussian blue onto contacting surface of valve seat to check
the condition of the valve contact on the surface.
• Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference.
• If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting
surface still has N.G conditions even after the re-check, replace
valve seat.
E
F
G
SBIA0322E
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue
beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder head. Set
the machine depth stop to ensure this.
Ream cylinder head recess for service valve seat.
Oversize
Intake
Exhaust
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H
I
: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
: 38.500 - 38.516 mm (1.5157 - 1.5164 in)
: 32.700 - 32.716 mm (1.2874 - 1.2880 in)
J
• Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
SEM795A
• This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.
Heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
WARNING:
Cylinder head is hot. Wear protective equipment to prevent getting burned.
Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom.
Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool to the specified dimensions. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and
Limit".
After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound.
Check valve seating condition.
Seat face angle “α”
Contacting width “W” for intake
Contacting width “W” for exhaust
: 45° 25' - 46° 15' degrees/minutes
(45.42° - 46.25° degree decimal)
: 1.09 - 1.31 mm
(0.043 - 0.052 in)
: 1.29 - 1.51 mm
(0.051 - 0.059 in)
EM-107
L
M
N
O
P
SEM892B
Revision: August 2007
K
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Use a depth gauge to measure the distance between the mounting surface of the cylinder head spring seat and the valve stem
end. If the distance is shorter than specified, repeat step 5 to
adjust it. If it is longer, replace the valve seat with a new one.
Valve seat resurface limit “L” intake
Valve seat resurface limit “L” exhaust
: 41.07 - 41.67 mm
(1.6169 - 1.6405 in)
: 41.00 - 41.60 mm
(1.6142 - 1.6378 in)
SEM621F
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
Set try square along the side of valve spring and rotate the spring.
Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of spring and
try square.
Out-of-square limit
: Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
PBIC0080E
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD
Check valve spring pressure at specified spring height.
Standard
Limit
: 166 - 188 N (16.9 - 19.2 kg, 37.3 - 42.3 lb) at
height 37.0 mm (1.457 in)
: 378 - 426 N (38.6 - 43.5 kg, 85.0 - 95.8 lb) at
height 27.8 mm (1.094 in)
If it is not within specifications, replace the spring.
SEM113
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Install valve guide. Follow the "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" procedure.
Install valve seat. Follow the "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" procedure.
Install new valve spring seats and new valve oil seals using Tool.
Tool number
: (J-39386)
• Install with valve oil seal drift to match dimension in illustration.
NOTE:
Dimension ″H″: Height measured before valve spring seat
installation.
Height ″H″
Intake and exhaust
4.
: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
WBIA0490E
Install the valves in their original position, as marked during disassembly.
Revision: August 2007
EM-108
2008 Quest
CYLINDER HEAD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Install valve spring (uneven pitch type).
• Install smaller pitch end (paint mark) to cylinder head side
(valve spring seat side).
6. Install valve spring retainer.
A
EM
Paint mark color
Blue
Violet
C
SEM085D
D
7.
Install valve collet.
Tool numbers
8.
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
: KV10109230 ( — )
E
F
• Compress valve spring using Tool and install valve collet.
• Tap stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to
check its installed condition.
Install valve lifter.
G
WBIA0578E
9.
a.
b.
c.
H
Install spark plug tube as follows:
Remove old liquid gasket from all cylinder head holes.
Apply liquid gasket to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in)
from edge of spark plug tube press fit side.
• Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
Press fit the spark plug tube so that it height ″H″ is as specified,
using suitable tool.
Standard press fit
height ″H″
: 38.55 - 38.65 mm
(1.5177 - 1.5217 in)
I
J
KBIA1248E
CAUTION:
• When press fitting, take care not to deform spark plug tube.
• After press fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto cylinder head upper face.
10. Install spark plug with spark plug wrench.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-109
2008 Quest
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717800
Engine mounting
WBIA0746E
1.
Rear engine mounting bracket
2.
RH engine mounting insulator
3.
RH engine mounting bracket
4.
Front engine mounting bracket
5.
Stopper
6.
Front engine mounting insulator
7.
LH transaxle mounting bracket
8.
LH transaxle mounting insulator
9.
Air guide
⇐
Front
10. Rear engine mounting insulator
Revision: August 2007
Stamping indication
EM-110
2008 Quest
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front suspension member mounting
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0379E
1.
Cup
2.
Member pin stay, RH
3.
Member pin stay, LH
WARNING:
• Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
• For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in the
NISSAN Parts Catalog.
CAUTION:
• Do not start working until exhaust system and coolant are cool.
• If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, follow the applicable procedures.
• Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-37.
• In removing the drive shafts, be careful not to damage any transaxle grease seals.
• Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
• Do not damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth.
J
K
L
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect battery positive and negative terminals.
Drain coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Drain A/T fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing A/T Fluid".
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect engine room harness from the PCM and the two connections at the RH strut tower. Disconnect engine harness ground connections.
6. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the fresh air intake tube and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube attached to air
cleaner lid. Remove air cleaner case (lower). Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove the engine cover using power tool.
9. Remove the battery and battery tray. Refer to SC-8, "Removal and Installation".
10. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
Revision: August 2007
EM-111
2008 Quest
N
O
P
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11. Disconnect fuel hose quick connection at vehicle piping side.
a. Remove connector cap from the fuel hose.
b. Squeeze the two tabs and pull the fuel hose from the fuel line.
NOTE:
If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by
pulling.
CAUTION:
• The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
• Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
• Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
• Prevent acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist the tube during removal or installation.
• Do not remove the remaining retainer on the tube.
• When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one.
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials entering, cover the ends of the
fuel tubes with plastic bags or something similar.
LBIA0370E
PBIC0163E
12. Remove the radiator assembly, engine coolant reservoir tank, and system hoses. Refer to CO-16,
"Removal and Installation".
13. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the back of the intake manifold collector.
14. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve hose.
15. Disconnect heater hoses at the water outlet and heater pipe.
16. Disconnect the two fusible link connectors at the battery positive terminal.
17. Disconnect two engine harness connectors below mass air flow sensor attached to the strut tower.
18. Disconnect the harness retainers and position the engine harness aside.
19. Remove the ground cable and ground wire from transaxle.
20. Disconnect the transaxle shift controls. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and Installation".
21. Remove the drive belts. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
22. Remove the front exhaust tube and hanger using power tools. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation".
23. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-8.
24. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then
separate the transverse link from the steering knuckle.
25. Remove the power steering line bracket from the front suspension member.
26. Remove the bolts on the lower side of the steering gear. Refer to
PS-15, "Removal and Installation".
27. Disconnect the front engine mount electrical connector.
WEIA0033E
Revision: August 2007
EM-112
2008 Quest
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
28. Disconnect the connecting rod from the front strut using power
tool.
A
EM
C
SFA796B
D
29. Disconnect power steering line brackets from rear engine mounting insulator and rear of lower intake
manifold collector.
30. Remove engine oil cooler pipe bolts.
31. Discharge and recover the A/C refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
32. Remove A/C low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-168, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure
Flexible Hose" (ATC) or MTC-151, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC).
33. Remove A/C high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-168, "Removal and Installation for High-pressure
Flexible Hose" (ATC) or MTC-151, "Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC).
34. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor".
35. Disconnect transaxle breather hose.
36. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch.
37. Disconnect harness retainer from power steering oil pump bracket.
38. Remove the idler pulley and idler pulley bracket and power steering pump, without disconnecting the piping, from the engine and position and secure it aside. Refer to PS-21, "Removal and Installation"
39. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
40. Remove the rear cover plate and bolts securing the torque converter to drive plate
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
SEM717G
M
41.
42.
43.
a.
b.
44.
45.
46.
47.
Position a transmission jack under the engine/transaxle assembly.
Remove the RH engine mounting insulator nuts and bolt.
Remove the front suspension member and engine/transaxle assembly as follows:
Remove the RH and LH member pin stay bolts.
Remove the front suspension member nuts and cups and carefully lower the front suspension member
and engine/transaxle assembly avoiding interference with the vehicle body.
CAUTION:
• Make sure to disconnect electrically controlled engine mounting insulator harness clips from the
front suspension member prior to removal.
• Before and during this procedure, always check if any harnesses are left connected.
• Avoid any damage to, or any oil/grease smearing or spills onto the engine mounting insulators.
Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the electrical connectors, harness retainers and remove harnesses.
Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses and remove the ATF cooler. Refer to AT-220, "ATF Cooler".
Remove the front and rear engine mount through bolts.
Revision: August 2007
EM-113
2008 Quest
N
O
P
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
48. Remove the LH transaxle mount bolts.
49. Raise the engine/transaxle and remove the front suspension member.
50. Remove the ATF cooler valve from the engine with the hoses attached. Refer to AT-220, "ATF Cooler".
51. Separate the engine and transaxle and mount the engine on a suitable engine stand.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
When installing the transaxle to the engine, use the specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence as shown.
Bolt No.
1
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
2
3
4
5
74.5 (7.6, 55)
6
7
8
9
41.5 (4.2, 31)
LBIA0355E
• Install converter to drive plate bolts.
Converter to drive
plate bolts 5 A/T
: 54 N·m (5.5 kg-m, 40 ft-lb)
NOTE:
With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transaxle rotates freely without binding.
• Install rear cover plate.
Rear cover plate bolt
: 6.91 N·m (0.70 kg-m, 61 in-lb)
• Install crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS) bolt
: 9.6 N·m (0.98 kg-m,
85 in-lb)
• Tighten the front suspension member nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation".
• Install the stabilizer bar bushings and clamps in the specified orientation. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and
Installation".
• Tighten the stabilizer bar and connecting rod nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Component".
• Tighten the steering gear bolts to specification. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to GI-42.
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
Revision: August 2007
EM-114
2008 Quest
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of Fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids includ- A
ing engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specEM
ified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluids*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
—
Leakage
—
Fuel
Exhaust gas
After engine stopped
C
D
E
*Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-115
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CYLINDER BLOCK
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001717801
WBIA0552E
1.
Rear oil seal retainer
2.
Cylinder block
3.
Knock sensor
4.
Upper main bearing
5.
Lower main bearing
6.
Water drain plug (LH side)
7.
Water connector (RH side)
8.
Water drain plug (water pump side)
9.
Main bearing cap
10. Main bearing beam
11. Crankshaft
12. Pilot converter
13. Drive plate with signal plate
14.
15. Oil ring set
16. Piston pin
17. Connecting rod bearing
19. Piston
20. Top ring
Drive plate reinforcement
18. Connecting rod
21. Second ring
22. Cylinder block heater (Canada only) 23. Oil jet
24. Key
25. Snap ring
26. Baffle plate
27. Gasket
28. Thrust bearing
29. Gasket
30. O-ring
31. Connector protector cap
CAUTION:
• Apply new engine oil to parts as marked in illustrations before installation.
• Place removed parts such as bearings and bearing caps in their proper order and direction.
Revision: August 2007
EM-116
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When installing the connecting rod nuts, and main bearing cap bolts, apply new engine oil to the
threads and mating surfaces
• Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal plate teeth on the drive plate.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0356E
I
1.
Cylinder block
4.
Connector protector cap
2.
O-ring
3.
Cylinder block heater
J
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove the engine assembly. Refer to EM-110.
Lift engine and mount it on Tool.
• A commercial engine stand can be used.
CAUTION:
Use an engine stand that has a load capacity of approximately 220kg (441 lb) or more.
NOTE:
This example is an engine stand for holding at the transaxle
mounting side with the drive plate removed.
K
L
M
N
PBIC0085E
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle sensor avoiding shocking it.
Drain the engine of all coolant and oil.
Remove the lower and upper oil pans. Refer to EM-29,
"Removal and Installation".
Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
Remove oil pump. Refer to LU-12, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the cylinder heads. Refer to EM-95, "Removal and
Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-117
O
P
PBIC0810E
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
9. Remove the driveplate. Secure the driveplate using Tool, and remove drive plate bolts.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
NOTE:
Match mark the driveplate position to the crankshaft dowel pin prior to removal to assist in installation.
• Loosen the bolts in diagonal order.
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble drive plate.
• Never place the drive plate with signal plate facing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becoming magnetized.
10. Remove pilot converter using Tool.
Tool number
: ST16610001 (J-23907)
WBIA0492E
11. Cut away liquid gasket using Tool and remove rear oil seal
retainer. Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket".
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage mounting surface.
• If rear oil seal retainer is removed, replace it with a new
one.
NOTE:
Rear oil seal and retainer form a single part and are handled as
an assembly.
WBIA0491E
12. Remove baffle plate from main bearing beam.
13. Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies.
a. Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod
to be removed onto the bottom dead center.
b. Remove the connecting rod cap.
c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out to the cylinder head side.
• Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly,
check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-142,
"Standard and Limit".
PBIC0086E
14. Remove the connecting rod bearings.
CAUTION:
• When removing the connecting rod side bearings, note the installation position. Keep them in
the correct order.
Revision: August 2007
EM-118
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
15. Remove the piston rings from the piston.
• Use a piston ring expander.
• Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side
clearance. Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After Disassembly".
CAUTION:
• When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damage
the piston. Do not expand the rings excessively.
• Be careful to mark the rings if they are to be reused so
they are installed in their original position.
A
EM
C
PBIC0087E
D
16. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows.
a. Remove the snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.
E
F
G
WBIA0553E
b.
Heat the pistons to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F).
H
I
J
SEM965A
c.
Push out the piston pin using a suitable tool, with an outer diameter approximately 20 mm (0.8 in).
K
L
M
N
WBIA0554E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-119
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
17. Loosen the main bearing cap bolts as shown and remove the
main bearing beam, bearing caps and crankshaft.
• Before loosening the main bearing cap bolts, measure the
crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After
Disassembly".
SEM842E
18. Remove the oil jets.
19. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder
block and main bearing caps.
CAUTION:
When removing them, note their direction and position.
Keep them in the correct order for installation.
PBIC0898E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Blow out the coolant and oil passages and cylinder bore to remove any foreign materials.
WARNING:
Use goggles to protect your eyes.
Apply liquid gasket and install each plug into the cylinder block.
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42.
Install the oil jets.
• Insert the oil jet dowel pin into the cylinder block dowel pin
hole, and tighten the oil jet bolts.
Oil jet bolts
: 27 N·m (2.8 kg-m, 20 ft-lb)
PBIC0898E
4.
a.
b.
Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings.
Remove dust, dirt, and oil on the bearing mating surfaces of the
cylinder block and the main bearing cap.
Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 journal housing on the cylinder block and the main bearing cap.
• Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside).
• Install bearing with a projection on one end on cylinder block
and bearing with a projection at center on cap. Align each projection with mating notch.
PBIC0807E
Revision: August 2007
EM-120
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Set the upper main bearings in their proper positions on the cylinder block.
• Confirm the correct main bearings are used. Refer to EM-131,
"Inspection After Disassembly".
A
EM
C
SEM175F
D
6.
Check specifications for the re-use of the main bearing cap
bolts.
• Measure d1 and d2 as shown.
• For d2, select the minimum diameter in the measuring area.
• If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace
the bolts for assembly.
Limit (d1 - d2)
E
F
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
G
SEM177F
7.
a.
b.
c.
After installing the crankshaft, lower main bearings, main bearing caps, main bearing beam, and bearing
cap bolts.
Make sure that the front marks on the main bearing beam faces
the front of the engine.
Prior to tightening all the bearing cap bolts, place the bearing
beam in its proper position by shifting the crankshaft in the axial
position.
Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new
engine oil.
H
I
J
K
SEM456G
d.
L
Tighten the bearing cap bolts in two steps in the order as shown:
Step 1
Step 2
: 35 N·m (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
: 90° - 95° degrees clockwise
M
CAUTION:
Measure the tighten angle with an angle wrench. Do not
measure visually.
Tool number
N
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
O
SEM851E
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-121
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WBIA0493E
e.
After tightening the bearing cap bolts, make sure the crankshaft turns smoothly.
8.
Using a dial indicator, measure the clearance between the thrust
bearings and the connecting rods when the crankshaft is moved
from front to rear.
Standard
Limit
: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
• If beyond the limit, replace the thrust bearings and measure
again. If still beyond the limit, replace the crankshaft.
SEM852E
9.
Install the rear oil seal retainer.
• Apply sealant to rear oil seal retainer using Tool. Refer to EM4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket".
Tool number
: WS39930000 (
—
)
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42.
Rear oil seal retainer bolts
: 8.8 N·m (0.90 kg-m, 78 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Rear oil seal is replaced with the rear oil seal retainer and
must be replaced as an assembly.
PBIC0922E
10. Install the piston to the connecting rod.
a. Install the snap ring into the pin-groove of the piston rear side
using suitable tool.
• Insert it fully into groove to install.
PBIC0099E
b.
Install the piston to the connecting rod.
Revision: August 2007
EM-122
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Heat the piston until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand
without excess force [approx. 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F)]. From
the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and
through the connecting rod.
A
EM
C
SEM965A
D
• Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the
oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown.
E
F
G
SEM838F
c.
Install the snap ring into the front of the piston pin-groove.
• After installing, check that the connecting rod pivots smoothly
on the pin.
H
I
J
WBIA0553E
11. Install the piston rings using a piston ring expander.
• Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. If the ring is not stamped it can face in
either direction.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the piston.
• When the piston rings are not replaced, remount the rings
in their original positions.
K
L
M
N
PBIC0087E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-123
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When replacing the piston rings, those without punch
marks can be installed either side up.
SEM757G
• Position each ring with the gap as shown, referring to the piston front mark.
PBIC0808E
12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the
connecting rod cap.
• When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil
to the bearing surface (crankshaft side). Do not apply oil to the
back surface (connecting rod and cap side), but thoroughly
clean it.
• When installing, align the connecting rod bearing protrusion
with the notch of the connecting rod to install.
• Check that the oil holes on the connecting rod and on the corresponding bearing are aligned.
WBIA0555E
13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly into the corresponding cylinder.
• Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting
rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center.
• Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and
crankshaft pin.
• Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install.
• Install the piston using Tool with the front mark on the piston
crown facing the front of the engine.
Tool number
WBIA0556E
: EM03470000 (J-8037)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin and cylinder wall, resulting from an interference of
the connecting rod big end.
Revision: August 2007
EM-124
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
14. Install the connecting rod cap.
• Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting
rod with those on the cylinder cap for installation.
• Install the piston connecting rod assembly and cap so that the
front mark on the cap and piston are facing the front of the
engine.
• Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces with new engine oil.
A
EM
C
SEM457G
D
15. Check the connecting rod cap bolts before reusing, then install
in their original position in the connecting rod. The bolts should
screw in smoothly by hand.
• Measure the outer diameter of the connecting rod cap bolt as
shown.
E
F
Outer diameter ″d″ of the connecting rod bolt
Standard
: 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in)
Limit
: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in)
G
SEM538G
H
16. Tighten the connecting rod bolts in two steps:
Connecting rod bolts
Step 1
: 20 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 15 ft-lb)
Step 2
: 90° - 95° degrees clockwise
I
CAUTION:
Always use either an angle wrench or protractor. Avoid
tightening based on visual check alone.
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
J
SEM953E
• Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting rod bolts.
• After tightening the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly.
• Check the connecting rod side clearance. If beyond the limit, replace the connecting rod and/or crankshaft.
Revision: August 2007
EM-125
L
M
Connecting rod side clearance:
Standard
: 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
Limit
: 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
17. Install the baffle plate.
18. Install the knock sensor.
• Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder
block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor.
• Install the knock sensor with the connector facing the rear of
the engine.
• Do not tighten the knock sensor bolt while holding the connector.
• Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other
parts.
CAUTION:
If any impact by dropping occurs to the knock sensor,
replace it with new one.
K
N
O
P
PBIC0810E
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
19. Install the pilot converter using suitable tool.
Outer diameter of drift
Pilot converter
: Approx. 33 mm (1.30 in)
PBIC0899E
• Install pilot converter as shown.
WBIA0358E
20. Install the drive plate and reinforcement plate aligning the matchmark.
CAUTION:
• Ensure the dowel pin is installed in the crankshaft.
• When installing the drive plate to crankshaft, be sure to
correctly align crankshaft side dowel pin and drive plate
side dowel pin hole.
KBIA2494E
• Install the driveplate and reinforcement plate in the direction
shown.
PBIC0910E
21. Secure the driveplate using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
• Tighten the driveplate bolts crosswise several times using a suitable tool.
22. Install the cylinder head. Refer to EM-95, "Removal and Installation".
23. Install the oil pump. Refer to LU-12, "Removal and Installation".
24. Install the timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
EM-126
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
25. Install the upper and lower oil pans. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation".
26. Remove the engine from the stand and install the engine assembly into the vehicle. Refer to EM-110, A
"Removal and Installation".
27. Assembly of the remaining parts is in the reverse order of disassembly.
EM
28. Fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes for the sealant to set-up before filling the engine with fluids and running it.
How to Select Piston and Bearing
INFOID:0000000001717802
DESCRIPTION
D
Selection points
Between cylinder block and
crankshaft
C
Selection parts
Selection items
Main bearing grade (bearing
thickness)
Main bearing
Selection methods
Determined by matching of cylinder block bearing housing
grade (inner diameter of housing) and crankshaft journal
grade (outer diameter of journal)
Between crankshaft and connecting rod
Connecting rod bearing
Connecting rod bearing grade
(bearing thickness)
Combining service grades for
connecting rod big end inner diameter and crankshaft pin outer
diameter determine connecting
rod bearing selection.
Between cylinder block and piston
Piston and piston pin assembly
(The piston is available together
with piston pin as an assembly.)
Piston grade (piston outer diameter)
Piston grade = cylinder bore
grade (inner diameter of bore)
–
–
*Between piston and connecting rod
E
F
G
H
I
–
* For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod.
(Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference.
• The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition.
This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
• For reused or repair parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values or each selection table.
• For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards and the selection method of the
selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure.
J
K
L
HOW TO SELECT A PISTON
When New Cylinder Block is Used
• Check the cylinder bore grade (1, 2 or 3) on rear side of cylinder
block, and select a piston of the same grade.
• The piston is available with piston pin as a set for the service part.
(Only 0 grade piston pin is available.)
M
N
O
SEM756G
When Cylinder Block is Reused
Revision: August 2007
EM-127
2008 Quest
P
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Measure the cylinder block bore inner diameter.
2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with
the values under the cylinder bore inner diameter of the "Piston
Selection Table".
3. Select the piston of the same grade.
PBIC0812E
Piston Selection Table
Unit: mm (in)
Grade
1
2 (or no mark)
3
Inner diameter of cylinder bore
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 3.7602)
95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 3.7606
95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 3.7610)
Outer diameter of piston
95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 3.7594)
95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 3.7598)
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 3.7602)
NOTE:
• The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.
• The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts,
no piston pin grades can be selected. (Only 0 grade is available.)
• No grade mark is indicated on 2 grade piston.
HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS
When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used
Check pin diameter grade number (0, 1 or 2) stamped in front of
crankshaft and select connecting rod bearing of same grade number.
NOTE:
There is no grading for connecting rod big end inner diameter.
SEM452G
When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused
1.
2.
3.
4.
Measure dimensions of the big end inner diameter of connecting rod and outer diameter of crankshaft pin
individually.
Confirm the big end inner diameter of connecting rod is within the standard value.
Apply the measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
Determine the grade of crankshaft pin diameter grade by comparing the measurement with the values
under the crankshaft pin outer diameter of the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
Revision: August 2007
EM-128
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit: mm (in)
Connecting rod big end inner diameter
A
55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659)
Crankshaft pin outer diameter
Grade (Mark)
– (No grade)
51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462)
0
Bearing grade No. STD 0
Bearing thickness range: 1.500 - 1.503 (0.00591 - 0.0592)
Color: Black
51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460)
1
Bearing grade No. STD 1
Bearing thickness range: 1.503 - 1.506 (0.00592 - 0.0593)
Color: Brown
C
51.956 - 51.962 (2.0455 - 2.0457)
2
Bearing grade No. STD 2
Bearing thickness range: 1.506 - 1.509 (0.00593 - 0.0594)
Color: Green
D
EM
Undersize Bearings Usage Guide
• When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings use undersize
bearings.
• When using undersize bearings measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed and grind the
crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
E
F
Bearing Undersize Table
Unit: mm (in)
Size
0.25 (0.0098)
Thickness
G
1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643)
CAUTION:
In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep
the fillet R (all crankshaft pins).
H
I
PBIC0813E
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARINGS
J
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used
1.
"Main Bearing Selection Table" rows correspond to bearing
housing grade on rear left side of cylinder block.
K
L
M
SEM756G
2.
3.
Apply journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side
to column in "Main Bearing Selection Table".
Find sign (main bearing grade) at crossing of row and column in
"Main Bearing Selection Table".
N
O
P
SEM452G
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused
Revision: August 2007
EM-129
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Measure inner diameter of cylinder block main bearing housing and outer diameter of crankshaft journal.
2. Find measured dimension in ″Cylinder block bearing housing inner diameter″ row of "Main Bearing Selection Table".
3. Find the measured dimension in ″Crankshaft main journal diameter″ column in "Main Bearing Selection
Table".
4. Select main bearing grade at the point where selected row and column intersect.
Main Bearing Selection Table
PBIC0814E
Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals)
Grade number
Revision: August 2007
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Width “W”
mm (in)
EM-130
Identification color
(UPR/LWR)
Remarks
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
0
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
Black
1
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
Brown
2
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
Green
3
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
Yellow
4
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
Blue
5
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
Pink
6
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
Purple
7
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
White
UPR
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
LWR
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
UPR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
LWR
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
UPR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
LWR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
UPR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
LWR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
UPR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
LWR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
UPR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
LWR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
UPR
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
LWR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
A
Grade is the same for
upper and lower bearings.
C
D
Brown/Black
19.9 - 20.1
(0.783 - 0.791)
EM
Green/Brown
E
Yellow/Green
F
Blue/Yellow
Grade is different for upper and lower bearings.
G
Pink/Blue
H
Purple/Pink
White/Purple
I
Undersize Bearing Usage Guide
• Use undersize bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification.
CAUTION:
Keep fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use
undersize bearing (all journals).
• When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and grind journal until oil clearance falls
within specification.
J
K
L
M
PBIC0813E
Bearing Undersize Table
Unit: mm (in)
Size
0.25 (0.0098)
2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843)
O
Inspection After Disassembly
INFOID:0000000001717803
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY
Revision: August 2007
N
Thickness
P
EM-131
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Using a dial indicator, measure the clearance between the thrust
bearings and the crankshaft arms when the crankshaft is moved
from front to rear.
Standard
Limit
: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
• If beyond the limit, replace the thrust bearings and measure again.
If still beyond the limit, replace the crankshaft.
SEM852E
1.
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE
• Measure the side clearance between the connecting rod and
crankshaft with a feeler gauge.
Standard
Limit
: 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
: 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
• If beyond the limit, replace the connecting rod and measure again.
If still beyond the limit, replace the crankshaft.
PBIC0815E
1.
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
Inner Diameter of Piston Pin Hole
• Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole ″dp″.
Standard diameter ″dp″
Grade No. 0 : 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in)
Grade No. 1 : 21.999 - 22.005 mm (0.8661 - 0.8663 in)
AEM023
Outer Diameter of Piston Pin
• Measure outer diameter of piston pin ″Dp″.
Standard diameter ″Dp″
Grade No. 0 : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
Grade No. 1 : 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 - 0.8662 in)
AEM024
Piston and Piston Pin Interference Fit
Revision: August 2007
EM-132
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Standard Interference Fit = ″Dp″ – ″dp″
A
Standard
: 0.002 mm - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in)
• If clearance is exceeds specification, replace piston/piston pin
assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each part.
• When replacing piston/piston pin assembly, follow the "PISTONTO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" procedure.
EM
C
SEM838F
D
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
• Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove with
feeler gauge.
E
Standard Side Clearance
Top ring
: 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 in)
2nd ring
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
Oil ring
: 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 in)
F
G
Maximum Limit
Top ring
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
2nd ring
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Oil ring
:—
SEM024AA
H
• If out of specification, replace piston ring assembly. If clearance exceeds maximum limit with new rings,
replace piston
I
PISTON RING END GAP
• Check if inner diameter of cylinder bore is within specification. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
• Insert piston ring until it is in the middle of the cylinder bore and
measure the end gap.
Standard
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Limit:
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
J
K
: 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in)
: 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130 - 0.0189 in)
: 0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.0079 - 0.0197 in)
L
M
SEM599A
: 0.54 mm (0.0213 in)
: 0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
: 0.95 mm (0.0374 in)
N
• If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder
and use oversized piston and piston ring.
O
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-133
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Bend
Torsion
: Limit 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm
(3.94 in) length
: Limit 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm
(3.94 in) length
SEM038F
• If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
SEM003F
CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END)
• Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing
installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified
torque, measure the connecting rod bearing housing big end inner
diameter using an inside micrometer.
Standard
: 55.000 - 55.013 mm (2.1654 - 2.1659 in)
PBIC1641E
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)
Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End)
• Measure inner diameter of piston pin bushing.
Standard
Grade No. 0
Grade No. 1
: 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 - 0.8664 in)
: 22.006 - 22.012 mm (0.8664 - 0.8666 in)
PBIC0120E
Outer Diameter of Piston Pin
Revision: August 2007
EM-134
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Measure outer diameter of piston pin.
A
Standard
Grade No. 0
Grade No. 1
: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
: 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 -0.8662 in)
EM
C
PBIC0117E
D
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)
(Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin)
Standard
Limit
E
: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in)
: 0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
• If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly.
• If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, use the Table for
Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding to the
applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to
EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
• If replacing the connecting rod assembly, refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
F
G
SEM457G
H
Factory installed parts grading:
• Service parts apply only to grade 0.
I
Unit: mm (in)
Grade
0
1
Piston pin bushing inner
diameter*
22.000 - 22.006
(0.8661 - 0.8664)
22.006 - 22.012
(0.8664 - 0.8666)
Piston pin outer diameter
21.989 - 21.995
(0.8657 - 0.8659)
21.995 - 22. 001
(0.8659 - 0.8662)
Piston pin hole diameter
21.993 - 21.999
(0.8659 - 0.8661)
21.999 - 22.005
(0.8661 - 0.8663)
J
K
SEM838F
L
*: After installing in connecting rod
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION
• Remove any old gasket material on the cylinder block surface, and
remove any oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow gasket flakes to enter the oil or coolant
passages.
• Measure the distortion on the block upper face at different points in
six directions.
Distortion limit
M
N
O
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
SEM123C
• If out of specification, resurface the cylinder block. The allowable
amount of resurfacing is dependent on the amount of any cylinder
head resurfacing. The resurfacing limit is [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] + [amount of cylinder head
resurfacing] = 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
Cylinder block height
: 214.95 - 215.05 mm (8.4626 - 8.4665 in)
INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING
Revision: August 2007
EM-135
2008 Quest
P
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed, and
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
• Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main bearing housing.
Standard
: 63.993 - 64.017 mm (2.5194 - 2.5203 in)
• If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and main bearing
caps as an assembly.
NOTE:
These components cannot be replaced individually, since they
were processed together.
PBIC1643E
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
1.
Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper. The X axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine.
Cylinder bore inner diameter
Grade No.
Standard inner diameter
No. 1
95.500 - 95.510 mm (3.7598 - 3.7602 in)
No. 2
95.510 - 95.520 mm (3.7602 - 3.7606 in)
No. 3
95.520 - 95.530 mm (3.7606 - 3.7610 in)
Wear limit
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
SEM843E
If it exceeds the limit, re bore all cylinders. Replace cylinder
block if necessary.
Out-of-round (Difference between, X - Y)
Taper (Difference between, C - A)
: less than 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
: less than 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
SEM321AA
2.
Check for scratches and seizure. If seizure is found, hone it.
• If both cylinder block and piston are replaced with new ones,
select piston of the same grade number punched on cylinder
block rear position. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
SEM756G
Revision: August 2007
EM-136
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Measure piston skirt diameter.
A
Piston diameter “A”
Measuring point “a”
(distance from the top)
: Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
: 41.0 mm (1.614 in)
EM
C
SEM258C
D
4.
Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification.
Piston-to-bore
clearance at “B”
: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in)
E
• The piston-to-bore clearance is measured at the ″B″ level in
the cylinder as shown.
F
G
SEM321AA
5.
6.
Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder wear.
• Oversize pistons are available for service.
• If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston ring. Refer to EM-142, "Standard
and Limit".
Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter ″A″.
Rebored size calculation
where,
D
A
B
C
:D=A+B−C
H
I
J
: Bored diameter
: Piston diameter as measured
: Piston-to-bore clearance
: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
K
L
7.
Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted
after boring.
8. Cut cylinder bores.
• When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
• Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a
time.
9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance.
10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.
• Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
M
N
O
OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-137
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Measure outer diameter of crankshaft journals. Follow the "OUT-OFROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT" procedure.
PBIC0127E
OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN
Measure outer diameter of crankshaft pin. Follow the "OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT"
procedure.
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT
• Check the crankshaft main and pin journals for scoring, wear, or
cracks.
• Measure the journals for taper and out-of-round.
Standard
Out-of-round (differ- : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
ence between, X - Y)
Taper (difference
: 0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
between, A - B)
SEM316A
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
• Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on the both ends of the crankshaft.
• Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal.
• While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on
the dial gauge.
Runout limit (total indicator
reading)
: less than 0.10 mm
(0.0039 in)
SEM346D
OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Method by Calculation
1.
2.
Install the connecting rod bearing to the connecting rod and cap.
Install the connecting rod cap to the connecting rod. Tighten to specification. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Revision: August 2007
EM-138
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Measure the inner diameter ″C″ of each connecting rod (big
end) as shown.
A
EM
C
WBIA0335E
D
4.
5.
Measure the outer diameter ″Dp″ of each crankshaft pin journal.
Calculate the connecting rod bearing clearance.
Connecting rod bearing clearance = C - Dp
Standard
Limit
6.
E
: 0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 in)
: 0.070 mm (0.0028 in)
F
If the clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any
bearing, grind the crankshaft journal and use undersized bearings. Refer to EM-127, "How to Select Piston and Bearing".
G
AEM034
Method of Using Plastigage
• Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of
each bearing completely.
• Cut a Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place
it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
• Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap, and
tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
EM-116
CAUTION:
Never rotate the crankshaft.
• Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the scale
on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width.
SEM142
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is same as that described in "Method by
Calculation".
H
I
J
K
L
OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING
Method by Calculation
1.
2.
Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and bearing cap. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and
Assembly".
Calculate the main bearing clearance. (Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of main bearing) - (Outer diameter
of crankshaft journal)
Standard
Limit
3.
: 0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 in)
: 0.065 mm (0.0026 in)
P
PBIC1644E
Method of Using Plastigage
EM-139
N
O
If the calculated clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace
the bearings. Refer to EM-127, "How to Select Piston and Bearing".
Revision: August 2007
M
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of
each bearing completely.
• Cut a Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place
it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
• Install the main bearings and main bearing caps. Refer to EM-116,
"Disassembly and Assembly".
CAUTION:
Never rotate the crankshaft.
• Remove the main bearing caps and bearings, and using the scale
on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit
is same as that described in "Method by Calculation".
SEM142
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING
• When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of the
bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and
Assembly" for tightening procedure.
Standard
: There must be a crush height.
• If the standard is not met, replace main bearings.
SEM502G
CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING
• When the connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with connecting rod bearings installed,
the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly" for tightening procedure.
Standard
: There must be a crush height.
• If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings.
PBIC1646E
OUTER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING CAP BOLTS
Check specifications for the re-use of the main bearing cap bolts.
• Measure d1 and d2 as shown.
• For d2, select the minimum diameter in the measuring area.
• If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the
bolts for assembly.
Limit (d1 - d2)
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
PBIC0911E
OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLTS
Revision: August 2007
EM-140
2008 Quest
CYLINDER BLOCK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Measure outer diameter d as shown.
A
Standard
Limit
: 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150
in)
: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in)
EM
• When the value of d exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner)
replace the bolt with a new one.
C
PBIC0912E
D
DRIVE PLATE
Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or damage.
CAUTION:
• The signal plate is built into the drive assembly. Be careful not
to damage the signal plate, particularly the teeth.
• Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or
cracks.
• Keep any magnetized objects away from the signal plate, particularly the teeth.
E
F
G
SEM760G
OIL JET
H
• Check nozzle for deformation and damage.
• Blow compressed air from nozzle, and check for clogs.
• If it is not satisfied, clean or replace oil jet.
I
OIL JET RELIEF VALVE
• Using a clean plastic stick, press check valve in oil jet relief valve.
Make sure that valve moves smoothly with proper reaction force.
• If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet relief valve.
J
K
L
EMU0468D
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-141
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
INFOID:0000000001717804
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
cm3
Bore and stroke
V-6
3,498 (213.45)
(cu in)
mm (in)
95.5 x 81.4 (3.760 x 3.205)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Number of piston rings
Compression
2
Oil
1
Number of main bearings
4
Compression ratio
10.0:1
Compression pressure
kPa
(kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
Standard
1,275 (13.0, 185)
Minimum
981 (10.0, 142)
Differential limit between cylinders
98 (1.0, 14)
Cylinder number
SEM713A
Valve timing (IVTC - OFF)
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
240°
238°
- 6°
64°
8°
52°
DRIVE BELT
Revision: August 2007
EM-142
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0385E
1. Power steering oil pump
2.
Idler pulley
3.
Power steering oil pump
4. Crankshaft pulley
5.
Air conditioner compressor
6.
Generator
Deflection adjustment
Unit: mm (in)
Used belt
Limit
After adjustment
Generator and
air conditioner
compressor
7 (0.28)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
Power steering
oil pump
11 (0.43)
7.3 - 8.0
(0.29 - 0.31)
Applied pushing
force
New belt
I
Tension adjustment*
Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f)
Used belt
J
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
K
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
6.5 - 7.2
(0.26 - 0.28)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
L
196 (20, 44)
98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
M
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
N
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Surface distortion
Limit
Intake manifold collector
0.1 (0.004)
Intake manifold
0.1 (0.004)
Exhaust manifold
0.3 (0.012)
O
P
SPARK PLUG
Make
NGK
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Revision: August 2007
EM-143
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
Gap (nominal)
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
CYLINDER HEAD
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0924E
Head surface distortion
Nominal cylinder head height ″H″
Standard
Limit
—
0.1 (0.004)
126.3 - 126.5 (4.972 - 4.980)
—
VALVE
Valve Dimensions
Unit: mm (in)
SEM188
Valve head diameter ″D″
Valve length ″L″
Valve stem diameter ″d″
Valve seat angle ″α″ degree/minute
(degree decimal)
Valve margin ″T″
Intake
37.0 - 37.3 (1.4567 - 1.4685)
Exhaust
31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240)
Intake
96.21 - 96.71 (3.7878 - 3.8075)
Exhaust
93.74 - 94.24 (3.6905 - 3.7102)
Intake
5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354)
Exhaust
5.945 - 5.960 (0.2341 - 0.2346)
Intake
45°25′ - 46°75′ (45.42° - 46.25°)
Exhaust
Intake
1.15 - 1.45 (0.0453 - 0.0571)
Exhaust
1.45 - 1.75 (0.0571 - 0.0689)
Valve margin ″T″ limit
More than 0.5 (0.020)
Valve stem end surface grinding limit
Less than 0.2 (0.008)
Valve oil seal installation height
14.3 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
Valve Clearance
Revision: August 2007
EM-144
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit: mm (in)
Cold
Hot* (reference data)
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013)
0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015)
0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017)
A
EM
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Valve Spring
Free height
Pressure
C
mm (in)
46.90 (1.8465)
N (kg, lb) at height mm (in)
Out-of-square
Standard
166 - 188 (16.9 - 19.2, 37.3 - 42.3) at 37.0 (1.457)
Limit
378 - 426 (38.6 - 43.5, 85.0 - 95.8) at 27.8 (1.094)
mm (in)
D
Less than 2.0 (0.079)
E
Valve Lifter
Unit: mm (in)
Valve lifter outer diameter
33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381)
Lifter lifter bore diameter
34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392)
Clearance between lifter and lifter guide
F
0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015)
G
Available Valve Lifter
H
I
J
SEM758G
Revision: August 2007
K
Identification Mark
Thickness mm (in)
788U
7.88 (0.3102)
790U
7.90 (0.3110)
792U
7.92 (0.3118)
794U
7.94 (0.3126)
796U
7.96 (0.3134)
798U
7.98 (0.3142)
800U
8.00 (0.3150)
802U
8.02 (03.157)
804U
8.04 (0.3165)
806U
8.06 (0.3173)
808U
8.08 (0.3181)
810U
8.10 (0.3189)
812U
8.12 (0.3197)
814U
8.14 (0.3205)
816U
8.16 (0.3213)
818U
8.18 (0.3220)
820U
8.20 (0.3228)
EM-145
L
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SEM758G
Identification Mark
Thickness mm (in)
822U
8.22 (0.3236)
824U
8.24 (0.3244)
826U
8.26 (0.3252)
828U
8.28 (0.3260)
830U
8.30 (0.3268)
832U
8.32 (0.3276)
834U
8.34 (0.3283)
836U
8.36 (0.3291)
838U
8.38 (0.3299)
840U
8.40 (0.3307)
Valve Guide
Unit: mm (in)
SEM950E
Valve guide
Outer diameter
Valve guide
Inner diameter (Finished size)
Valve guide hole diameter
Standard
Service
10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950)
10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029)
6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369)
9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935)
Interference fit of valve guide
Valve to valve guide clearance
Valve deflection
10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014)
0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Standard
Limit
Intake
0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021)
0.08 (0.0031)
Exhaust
0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025)
0.09 (0.0035)
Intake
—
0.24 (0.0094)
Exhaust
—
0.28 (0.0110)
Projection length “L”
12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504)
Valve Seat
Revision: August 2007
EM-146
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
WBIA0498E
D
E
F
G
SEM621F
Cylinder head seat recess diameter
(D)
Valve seat interference fit
Valve seat outer diameter (d)
Height (h)
Service
Intake
38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967)
38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164)
Exhaust
32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683)
32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880)
Intake
0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044)
Exhaust
0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038)
Intake
38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005)
38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202)
Exhaust
32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715)
32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912)
Intake
5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236)
5.05 - 5.15 (0.1988 - 0.2028)
Exhaust
5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236)
4.95 - 5.05 (0.1949 - 0.1988)
Depth (H)
Valve seat resurface limit (L)
H
Standard
41.07 - 41.67 (1.6169 - 1.6405)
Exhaust
41.00 - 41.60 (1.6142 - 1.6378)
Standard
Limit
No. 1
0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034)
No. 2, 3, 4
0.035 - 0.076 (0.0014 - 0.0030)
0.15 (0.0059)
O
Inner diameter of camshaft bracket
—
Outer diameter of camshaft journal
No. 1
25.935 - 25.955 (1.0211 - 1.0218)
No. 2, 3, 4
23.445 - 23.465 (0.9230 - 0.9238)
—
Less than 0.02 (0.0008)
0.05 (0.0020)
EM-147
M
N
No. 1
26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244)
No. 2, 3, 4
23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260)
Revision: August 2007
K
L
Unit: mm (in)
Camshaft runout [TIR*]
J
5.9 - 6.1 (0.232 - 0.240)
Intake
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
Camshaft journal to bracket clearance
I
P
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*]
Camshaft end play
—
0.15 (0.0059)
0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074)
0.24 (0.0094)
*: Total indicator reading
SEM671
Cam lobe height “A”
Intake and exhaust
44.865 - 45.055 (1.7663 - 1.7738)
Wear limit of cam lobe height
0.2 (0.008)
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)
SEM022EA
Surface distortion
Cylinder bore
Main Bearing
Housing
Limit
Inner diameter
Inner Diameter
0.10 (0.0039)
Standard
Grade No. 1
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602)
Grade No. 2
95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 - 3.7606)
Grade No. 3
95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 - 3.7610)
Wear limit
0.20 (0.0079)
Standard
: 63.993 - 64.017 mm (2.5194 - 2.5203 in)
Out-of-round (Difference between X - Y)
Revision: August 2007
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
EM-148
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Taper (Difference between C - A)
Main journal inner
diameter grade
(Without bearing)
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
63.993 - 63.994 (2.5194 - 2.5194)
63.994 - 63.995 (2.5194 - 2.5195)
63.995 - 63.996 (2.5195 - 2.5195)
63.996 - 63.997 (2.5195 - 2.5196)
63.997 - 63.998 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
63.998 - 63.999 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
63.999 - 64.000 (2.5196 - 2.5197)
64.000 - 64.001 (2.5197 - 2.5197)
64.001 - 64.002 (2.5197 - 2.5198)
64.002 - 64.003 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
64.003 - 64.004 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
64.004 - 64.005 (2.5198 - 2.5199)
64.005 - 64.006 (2.5199 - 2.5199)
64.006 - 64.007 (2.5199 - 2.5200)
64.007 - 64.008 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
64.008 - 64.009 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
64.009 - 64.010 (2.5200 - 2.5201)
64.010 - 64.011 (2.5201 - 2.5201)
64.011 - 64.012 (2.5201 - 2.5202)
64.012 - 64.013 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
64.013 - 64.014 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
64.014 - 64.015 (2.5202 - 2.5203)
64.015 - 64.016 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
64.016 - 64.017 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN
H
Available Piston
Unit: mm (in)
I
J
K
L
SEM882E
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Standard
Grade No. 1
95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 - 3.7594)
Grade No. 2
95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 - 3.7598)
Grade No. 3
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602)
0.20 (0.0079) oversize (service)
95.680 - 95.710 (3.7669 - 3.7681)
“a” measuring point (distance from the top)
Piston pin hole diameter
41.0 (1.614)
N
Grade No. 0
21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661)
Grade No. 1
21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663)
Piston-to-bore clearance to cylinder block
M
0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012)
O
Piston Ring
Unit: mm (in)
Side clearance
Standard
Limit
Top
0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031)
0.11 (0.0043)
2nd
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
0.1 (0.004)
Oil ring
0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053)
—
Revision: August 2007
EM-149
2008 Quest
P
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
End gap
Top
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
0.54 (0.0213)
2nd
0.33 - 0.48 (0.0130 - 0.0189)
0.80 (0.0315)
Oil (rail ring)
0.20 - 0.50 (0.0079 - 0.0197)
0.95 (0.0374)
Piston Pin
Unit: mm (in)
Piston pin outer diameter
Grade No. 0
21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659)
Grade No. 1
21.995 - 22.001 (0.8659 - 0.8662)
Interference fit of piston pin to piston
Piston pin to connecting rod bushing oil
clearance
0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002)
Standard
0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007)
Limit
0.030 (0.0012)
CONNECTING ROD
Unit: mm (in)
Center distance
144.15 - 144.25 (5.6752 - 5.6791)
Bend [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
Piston pin bushing inner diameter*
Grade No. 0
22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664)
Grade No. 1
22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666)
Connecting rod big end inner diameter
Connecting rod side clearance
55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659)
Standard
0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Limit
0.40 (0.0157)
*: After installing in connecting rod
CRANKSHAFT
Revision: August 2007
EM-150
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
SEM645
Main journal dia. “Dm” grade
Pin journal dia. “Dp”
SEM715
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
59.975 - 59.974 (2.3612 - 2.3612)
59.974 - 59.973 (2.3612 - 2.3611)
59.973 - 59.972 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
59.972 - 59.971 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
59.971 - 59.970 (2.3611 - 2.3610)
59.970 - 59.969 (2.3610 - 2.3610)
59.969 - 59.968 (2.3610 - 2.3609)
59.968 - 59.967 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
59.967 - 59.966 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
59.966 - 59.965 (2.3609 - 2.3608)
59.965 - 59.964 (2.3608 - 2.3608)
59.964 - 59.963 (2.3608 - 2.3607)
59.963 - 59.962 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
59.962 - 59.961 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
59.961 - 59.960 (2.3607 - 2.3606)
59.960 - 59.959 (2.3606 - 2.3606)
59.959 - 59.958 (2.3606 - 2.3605)
59.958 - 59.957 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
59.957 - 59.956 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
59.956 - 59.955 (2.3605 - 2.3604)
59.955 - 59.954 (2.3604 - 2.3604)
59.954 - 59.953 (2.3604 - 2.3603)
59.953 - 59.952 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
59.952 - 59.951 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
Grade No. 0
51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462)
Grade No. 1
51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460)
Grade No. 2
51.956 - 51.962 (2.0445 - 2.0457)
Center distance “r”
Standard
Less than 0.002 (0.0001)
Taper (Difference between, A B)
Standard
Less than 0.002 (0.0001)
Runout [TIR*]
Limit
Less than 0.10 (0.0039)
End play
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
40.36 - 40.44 (1.5890 - 1.5921)
Out-of-round (Difference between, X - Y)
D
M
Standard
N
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
O
*: Total indicator reading
AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-151
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SEM175F
Grade number
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Width “W”
mm (in)
Identification color
(UPR/LWR)
0
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
Black
1
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
Brown
2
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
Green
3
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
Yellow
4
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
Blue
5
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
Pink
6
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
Purple
7
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
White
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
UPR
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
LWR
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
UPR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
LWR
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
UPR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
LWR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
UPR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
LWR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
UPR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
LWR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
UPR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
LWR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
UPR
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
LWR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
Remarks
Grade is the same for
upper and lower bearings.
Brown/Black
19.9 - 20.1
(0.783 - 0.791)
Green/Brown
Yellow/Green
Blue/Yellow
Grade is different for upper and lower bearings.
Pink/Blue
Purple/Pink
White/Purple
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098)
Thickness
Main journal diameter “Dm”
2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843)
Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Grade number
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Identification color (mark)
0
1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592)
Black
1
1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593)
Brown
2
1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594)
Green
Revision: August 2007
EM-152
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098)
Thickness
Crank pin journal diameter “Dp”
1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643)
Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
A
EM
BEARING CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)
Main bearing clearance
Connecting rod bearing clearance
Standard
C
0.035 - 0.045 (0.0014 - 0.0018)*
Limit
0.065 (0.0026)
Standard
D
0.034 - 0.059 (0.0013 - 0.0023)*
Limit
0.070 (0.0028)
*: Actual clearance
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EM-153
2008 Quest
ENGINE
SECTION
EX
EXHAUST SYSTEM
A
EX
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PREPARATION .................................................. 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 4
Checking Exhaust System ........................................ 4
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EX-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000003261021
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
EX-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717830
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
EX
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors:
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
C
D
E
S-NT636
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717831
F
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new heated oxygen sensor
(Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below):
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia , 0.71 in) for zirconia heated oxygen sensor.
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia., 0.49 in) for titania heated oxygen sensor.
G
H
I
AEM488
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads.
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
J
K
AEM489
Power tool
L
Loosening nuts and bolts.
M
N
PBIC0190E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
EX-3
2008 Quest
EXHAUST SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Checking Exhaust System
INFOID:0000000001717832
Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting components for
incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, or deterioration.
SMA211A
Revision: August 2007
EX-4
2008 Quest
EXHAUST SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717833
A
EX
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
WBIA0741E
1.
Rear muffler hanger
2.
4.
Center exhaust tube hanger
5.
7.
Center exhaust tube
8.
Rear muffler
3.
U clamp
Dynamic damper
6.
Center exhaust tube hanger bracket
Gasket
9.
Front exhaust tube
10. Ring gasket
11. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 12. Front exhaust tube hanger bracket
13. Main muffler hanger
14. Main muffler
B.
⇐
Slit
A.
Button
Vehicle front
WARNING:
Revision: August 2007
EX-5
2008 Quest
O
P
EXHAUST SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Perform the procedures with the exhaust system fully cooled down to avoid injury from the hot
exhaust system.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edge.
NOTE:
Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat resistance,
corrosion resistance, and shape.
REMOVAL
Remove exhaust system components using power tool.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tool number
Tool number
:
:
—
—
(J-43897-12)
(J-43897-18)
CAUTION:
• Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
• Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean the exhaust tube threads using commercial service tool and approved anti-seize lubricant.
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; install a new one.
• Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
• If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on
the mounting insulator, clean and inspect them.
• Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side. Check
each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and unusual noises.
• Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration.
Revision: August 2007
EX-6
2008 Quest
DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
FAX
FRONT AXLE
A
B
C
FAX
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ............. 5
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution ................................................................. 2
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ...................................... 8
F
G
Removal and Installation (Left Side) ......................... 8
Removal and Installation (Right Side) ...................... 9
Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) ...................11
Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side) .................16
H
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 22
I
Wheel Bearing .........................................................22
Drive Shaft ...............................................................22
Damper ....................................................................22
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FAX-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718124
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718125
CAUTION:
• When installing each rubber part, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition*
with tires on the ground.
*Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
• After installing the removed suspension parts, check the front wheel alignment.
• Do not jack up the vehicle by the transverse link .
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft.
• Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
• Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
• Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service location.
• Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover
must be placed over parts.
• Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering
to parts.
• Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by
blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718126
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HT72520000
(J-25730-A)
Ball joint remover
Removing outer tie-rod
B
C
FAX
E
NT146
Installing drive shaft
LH: KV38106700 (J-34296)
RH: KV38106800 (J-34297)
KV38106700
(J-34296)
KV38106800
(J-34297)
Differential side oil seal protector
F
G
NT147
H
Installing boot bands
KV40107300
(
—
)
Boot Band crimping tool
I
J
ZZA1229D
Removing drive shaft
KV40107500
(
—
)
Drive shaft attachment
K
L
ZZA1230D
M
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718127
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Removing nuts and bolts
N
O
P
PBIC0190E
Revision: August 2007
FAX-3
2008 Quest
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000001718128
Symptom
FRONT
AXLE
Refer to FRONT AXLE in this chart.
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart.
BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FRONT AXLE
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
STEERING
×
FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-5
Wheel bearing damage
—
Parts interference
FAX-5
×
×
SUSPENSION
DRIVE
SHAFT
Improper installation, looseness
×
Shake
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
FAX-8, FAX-9
FAX-11, FAX-16
Joint sliding resistance
Noise
Reference page
Imbalance
—
Excessive joint angle
Use chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: August 2007
FAX-4
2008 Quest
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
A
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
INFOID:0000000001718129
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear,
damage) are normal.
B
FRONT WHEEL BEARING
• Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play limit
C
: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
• Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any FAX
irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718130
E
F
G
H
I
J
WDIA0032E
K
1.
Cotter pin
2.
Disc rotor
3.
4.
Splash guard
5.
Steering knuckle
Wheel hub and bearing assembly
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with
wire. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor".
NOTE:
Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing
assembly, then remove disc rotor.
Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-85,
"Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
Remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using
power tool.
Remove steering outer tie-rod cotter pin at steering knuckle,
then loosen nut using power tool. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and
SDIA1480E
Installation".
Revision: August 2007
FAX-5
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Disconnect the outer tie-rod end from steering knuckle using
Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from
coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut.
Tool number
: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
WGIA0101E
8.
9.
Remove transverse link and steering knuckle pinch bolt and nut using power tool. Refer to FSU-14,
"Removal and Installation".
Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft using
a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• When removing wheel hub and bearing assembly, do not
apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint.
• Support drive shaft when removing.
SDIA0972J
10. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool.
11. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
12. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts using power tool. Refer to
FSU-6, "Component".
13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
AFA047
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
Ball Joint Inspection
• Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to FSU-14,
"Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
• Refer to "Removal and Installation" for tightening torques.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
• When installing wheel hub and bearing assembly to steering knuckle, align cutout in toner ring cover with
wheel sensor mounting hole in steering knuckle.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-6
2008 Quest
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly,
align the marks.
(When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-28, "Disassembly
and Assembly of Caliper Assembly".)
A
B
C
SDIA1480E
FAX
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FAX-7
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Removal and Installation (Left Side)
INFOID:0000000001718131
WDIA0351E
1.
Differential side oil seal
2.
⇐: Front
Cotter pin
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation".
Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft.
Remove brake hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut.
Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering
knuckle. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation".
Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly,
using a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive
angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint.
SDIA0972J
7.
Remove drive shaft from transaxle using Tool and drive shaft
puller or suitable tool.
• Set Tool and a drive shaft puller or suitable tool between drive
shaft (slide joint side) and transaxle as shown and remove
drive shaft.
Tool number
: KV40107500 (
—
)
WDIA0098E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-8
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage.
• If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair
or replace as necessary.
A
B
C
SFA108A
FAX
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
• Refer to "Removal and Installation (Left Side)" for tightening torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
• In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool
"A" onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft as shown. Slide drive
shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely.
Tool number
E
F
: KV38106700 (J-34296)
G
• Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to FAX-11, "Disassembly and Assembly (Left
Side)".
CAUTION:
Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened.
• After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand.
If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the transaxle side gear.
H
WDIA0298E
I
Removal and Installation (Right Side)
INFOID:0000000001718132
J
K
L
M
N
WDIA0352E
1.
Cotter pin
2.
Dust shield
3.
Support bearing bracket
⇐: Front
P
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation".
Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
Remove brake hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut.
Revision: August 2007
O
FAX-9
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering
knuckle. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly,
using a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive
angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint.
SDIA0972J
7.
Remove support bearing bolts using power tool, and pry drive
shaft from transaxle.
• Pry off drive shaft from transaxle.
SFA989
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness.
• Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage.
• If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair
or replace as necessary.
SFA108A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
• Refer to "Removal and Installation (Right Side)" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
• In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool
"A" onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft as shown. Slide drive
shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely.
Tool number
: KV38106800 (J-34297)
• Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to FAX-11, "Disassembly and Assembly (Left
Side)".
CAUTION:
Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened.
• After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand.
If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the transaxle side gear.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-10
WDIA0298E
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)
INFOID:0000000001718133
A
B
C
FAX
E
F
WDIA0354E
1.
Circlip
2.
Dust shield
4.
7.
Snap ring
5.
Boot band
8.
10. Damper band
3.
Slide joint housing
Spider assembly
6.
Stopper ring
Boot
9.
Shaft
11. Damper
12. Boot band
13. Boot
14. Ball cage / Steel ball / Inner race assembly
15. Circlip
16. Joint sub-assembly
⇐: Front
G
H
I
DISASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mount front drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft.
Remove boot bands and slide the boot back.
Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing.
Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating joint assembly.
Remove stopper ring with a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint
housing.
J
K
L
M
N
O
SFA476
P
Revision: August 2007
FAX-11
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft.
SFA963
7.
8.
9.
Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider
assembly from shaft.
Remove boot from shaft.
Clean the old grease off of the slide joint assembly.
SFA612
Wheel Side
1.
2.
3.
Mount the front drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft.
Remove boot bands and slide the boot back.
Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more
into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly
out of shaft.
CAUTION:
• Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then
remove joint sub-assembly by pulling directly.
• If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft
assembly.
SDIA0606E
4.
5.
6.
Remove boot from shaft.
Remove circlip from shaft.
While rotating ball cage, clean the old grease off of the joint sub-assembly.
Damper
• Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shaft
• Replace shaft if there is bending, cracking, or other damage.
Joint Sub-Assembly
• Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.
• Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly.
• Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
CAUTION:
If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint subassembly.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-12
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Slide Joint Housing
• Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks or fractures or unusual wear of ball rolling surface.
• Make sure there is no damage to shaft screws.
• Make sure there is no deformation of boot installation parts.
A
B
Ball Cage
• Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures of sliding surface.
Steel Ball
• Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures or unusual wear.
C
Inner Race
• Check ball sliding surface for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
FAX
• Make sure there is no damage to serrated part.
CAUTION:
If there are any irregular conditions in the component, replace with a new set of joint sub-assembly,
ball cage, steel ball and inner race.
E
Damper
• Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands.
F
ASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1.
2.
Install new boot and new small boot band on shaft.
CAUTION:
• Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to
boot during installation.
Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
G
H
I
SFA800
3.
4.
5.
Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly
are properly aligned.
Install new snap ring using a suitable tool.
Pack drive shaft with specified amount of new grease (Genuine
NISSAN Grease or equivalent).
Grease amount
J
K
L
: 134 – 144 g (4.73 – 5.08 oz)
M
N
SFA023A
6.
7.
Install new stopper ring to housing of slide joint assembly.
After installation, pull shaft to check engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FAX-13
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as
shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by *
marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Clean all
grease from surfaces.
9. Make sure boot installation length “L” is the length specified
below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the
large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
SDIA1505E
Boot installation length “L”
: 167.9 mm (6.61 in)
CAUTION:
• Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
• Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
10. Secure large and small ends of boot with new boot bands as
shown.
CAUTION:
Discard old boot bands and replace with new ones.
SFA395
11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing.
12. After installing housing and shaft, make sure boot position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove
old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands.
Wheel Side
1.
Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins
to ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting
grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed
out.
SDIA1127E
2.
3.
Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot band and
boot to shaft. Be careful not to damage boot.
CAUTION:
Discard old boot band and boot; replace with new one.
Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
SFA800
Revision: August 2007
FAX-14
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft
groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly.
Use a suitable tool to press-fit.
CAUTION:
Discard old circlip and replace with new one.
A
B
C
RAC0049D
FAX
5.
Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from
large end of boot.
Grease amount
6.
7.
E
: 170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz)
Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as
shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by *
marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove
all grease from surfaces.
Make sure boot installation length “L” is the specified length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into
the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
F
G
H
SDIA1505E
Boot installation length “L”
8.
I
: 163 mm (6.42 in)
CAUTION:
• Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
• Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40107300 (
—
J
K
)
NOTE:
Do not reuse boot bands.
L
M
RAC1133D
N
CAUTION:
• Secure boot band so that dimension “M” meets specification as shown.
O
Dimension “M”
: 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in)
P
DSF0047D
9.
After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot
position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-15
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Damper
1.
2.
Use new damper bands for installation.
Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely.
“A”
“B”
: 205 – 215 mm (8.07 – 8.46 in)
: 70 mm (2.76 in)
SFA313B
Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)
INFOID:0000000001718134
WDIA0353E
1.
Joint sub-assembly
2.
Circlip
3.
Ball cage / Steel ball / Inner race assembly
4.
Boot bands
5.
Boot
6.
Shaft
7.
Damper bands
8.
Damper
9.
Boot band
10.
Boot
11.
Stopper ring
12
Spider assembly
13.
Snap ring
14.
Slide joint housing
15.
Dust cover
16.
Snap ring
17.
Bearing
18.
Bracket
19.
Snap ring
20.
Dust shield
21.
Dust shield
22.
Circlip
⇐:
Front
DISASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1.
2.
3.
Press shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When retaining shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft.
Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing.
Remove boot bands and slide the boots back.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-16
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating slide joint housing.
5. Remove stopper ring using a suitable tool, then pull out slide
joint housing.
A
B
C
SFA476
6.
FAX
Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft.
E
F
G
SFA963
7.
8.
9.
H
Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider
assembly from shaft.
Remove boot from shaft.
Clean old grease off of the slide joint housing.
I
J
K
SFA612
Wheel Side
1.
2.
3.
Mount the front drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft.
Remove boot bands and slide the boot back.
Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more
into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly
out of shaft.
CAUTION:
• Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then
remove joint sub-assembly by pulling directly.
• If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft
assembly.
L
M
N
O
P
SDIA0606E
4.
5.
6.
Remove boot from shaft.
Remove circlip from shaft.
While rotating ball cage, clean the old grease off of the joint sub-assembly.
Support Bearing
Revision: August 2007
FAX-17
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove dust shield from slide joint assembly using a suitable
tool.
SFA442B
2.
Remove snap ring using a suitable tool.
SFA692
3.
Press support bearing assembly off slide joint assembly using a
suitable tool.
SFA693
4.
Separate support bearing from bracket using a suitable tool.
SFA617
Damper
• Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shaft
• Replace shaft if there is any bending, cracking, or other damage.
Joint Sub-assembly
• Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.
• Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly.
• Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
FAX-18
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint subassembly.
Sliding Joint Housing and Spider Assembly
• If roller surface of spider assembly has scratches or wear, replace housing and spider assembly.
NOTE:
Housing and spider assembly are components which are used as a set.
A
B
Support Bearing
• Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.
C
Damper
• Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands.
FAX
ASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1.
2.
E
Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot
band onto shaft. Be careful not to damage boot.
CAUTION:
• Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones.
Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
F
G
SFA800
3.
4.
5.
Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly
are properly aligned.
Install new snap ring using a suitable tool.
Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent).
Grease amount
H
I
J
: 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz)
K
L
SFA023A
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install new stopper ring to slide joint assembly.
After installation, pull shaft to check engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring.
Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as
shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by *
marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove
all grease from surfaces.
Make sure boot installation length “L” is the length indicated
below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the
large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
M
N
O
P
SDIA1505E
Boot installation length “L”
: 189.30 mm (7.45 in)
CAUTION:
• Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
• Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
Revision: August 2007
FAX-19
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Secure big and small ends of boot with new boot bands as
shown.
CAUTION:
Discard old boot bands; replace with new ones.
11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing.
12. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether
or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct,
remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with
new boot bands.
SFA395
Wheel Side
1.
Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins
to ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting
grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed
out.
SDIA1127E
2.
3.
Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot
band onto shaft. Be careful not to damage boot.
CAUTION:
Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones.
Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
SFA800
4.
Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft
groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly.
Use a suitable tool to press-fit.
CAUTION:
Discard old circlip; replace with new ones.
RAC0049D
5.
Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from
large end of boot.
Grease amount
Revision: August 2007
: 170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz)
FAX-20
2008 Quest
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as
shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by *
marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove
all grease from surfaces.
7. Make sure boot installation length “L” is the specified length.
Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end
of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length “L”
8.
: 163 mm (6.42 in)
A
B
C
SDIA1505E
FAX
CAUTION:
• Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
• Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40107300 (
—
E
)
F
NOTE:
Do not reuse boot bands.
G
RAC1133D
CAUTION:
• Secure boot band so that dimension “M” meets specification as shown.
Dimension “M”
H
I
: 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in)
J
K
DSF0047D
9.
After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot
position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands.
L
M
Damper
1.
2.
Use new damper bands for installation.
Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely.
“A”
“B”
N
: 205 – 215 mm (8.07 – 8.46 in)
: 70 mm (2.76 in)
O
P
SFA313B
Revision: August 2007
FAX-21
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing
INFOID:0000000001718135
Axial end play limit
0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
Drive Shaft
INFOID:0000000001718136
SDIA1505E
Joint type
Grease quantity
Boots installed length
Wheel side
LH
Transaxle side
RH
LH
170 - 190 g (6.00 - 6.70 oz)
163 mm (6.42 in)
RH
134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz)
167.9 mm (6.61 in)
Damper
189.30 (7.45 in)
INFOID:0000000001718137
SFA313B
"A"
205 - 215 mm (8.07 -8.46 in)
"B"
70 mm (2.76 in)
Revision: August 2007
FAX-22
2008 Quest
ENGINE
SECTION
FL
FUEL SYSTEM
A
FL
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
General Precaution ................................................... 4
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER
AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ......................... 5
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
FUEL TANK ....................................................... 9
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
FUEL SYSTEM .................................................... 4
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 13
Checking Fuel Line ................................................... 4
Standard and Limit ..................................................13
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FL-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001717805
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
FL-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717806
The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991J0090
(J-46214)
Fuel tank lock ring tool
Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring
FL
C
D
E
LBIA0353E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717807
Tool name
Description
Power tools
Loosening bolts and nuts
F
G
H
I
PBIC0190E
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FL-3
2008 Quest
FUEL SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL SYSTEM
Checking Fuel Line
INFOID:0000000001717808
Inspect fuel lines, filler cap and tank for improper attachment, leaks,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. Repair
or replace faulty parts as necessary.
SMA803A
General Precaution
INFOID:0000000001717809
WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the work area.
• Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and have a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work
area.
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in
safe area.
- Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
- Disconnect the battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones.
• Do not kink or twist tubes when they are being installed.
• After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure
the quick connectors are secure.
Ensure that the connector and resin tube do not contact any
adjacent parts.
• After installing the tubes, run the engine and check for fuel
leaks at the connections using the following steps:
- a) Apply fuel pressure to the fuel lines by turning the ignition
switch to ON (without starting the engine). Then check for fuel
leaks at the fuel tube connections.
- b) Start the engine and rev the engine, then check for fuel
leaks at the fuel tube connections.
• Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If
an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
• For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to
EC-28.
• For servicing “On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)”
parts, refer to EC-34.
PBIC0199E
Revision: August 2007
FL-4
2008 Quest
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001717810
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
WBIA0749E
1.
Lock ring
2.
Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly
4.
Fuel tank
←
Front
3.
O-ring
M
REMOVAL
N
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system.
Refer to FL-4, "General Precaution".
1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to FL-9, "Removal and Installation".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FL-5
2008 Quest
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as
shown.
Tool number
: KV991J0090 (J-46214)
WBIA0376E
3.
Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
from the fuel tank.
CAUTION:
• Do not bend the float arm during removal.
WBIA0377E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with
the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle.
LBIA0338E
• Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank
lock tabs as shown.
LBIA0378E
Revision: August 2007
FL-6
2008 Quest
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight
into the tube until a click is heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by
pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are
securely connected.
A
FL
C
SFE562A
D
• Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
quick connector.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PBIC0199E
K
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the
electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FL-7
2008 Quest
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001717811
Fuel Level Sender Unit
LBIA0458E
1.
Harness connectors
2.
Fuel sensor
4.
Wire connector
5.
Floater arm assembly
3.
Tabs
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4).
Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly.
Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5).
Assembly
Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: August 2007
FL-8
2008 Quest
FUEL TANK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUEL TANK
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717812
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0750E
N
1.
Fuel filler cap
2.
Grommet
3.
Fuel filler tube
4.
Fuel tank
5.
Fuel filler hose
6.
Fuel tank protector
7.
Fuel tank mounting straps
8.
O-ring
9.
Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and
fuel pump assembly
O
10. Lock ring
P
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system.
Refer to FL-4, "General Precaution".
Revision: August 2007
FL-9
2008 Quest
FUEL TANK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Check the fuel level with the vehicle on a level surface. If the fuel
gauge indicates more than the level as shown (7/8 full), drain
the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates a level at
or below as shown (7/8 full).
• In case the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure.
a. Insert fuel tubing of less than 25 mm (0.98 in) diameter into the
fuel filler tube through the fuel filler opening to drain fuel from the
fuel filler tube.
b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler tube.
WBIA0753E
c. Insert fuel tubing into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to
drain fuel from the fuel tank.
• As a guide, the fuel level reaches or is less than the level on the fuel gauge as shown, when approximately 10 (2 5/8 US gal, 2 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel is drained from a full fuel tank.
2. Open the fuel filler lid and unscrew the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".
4. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
5. Remove the center exhaust tube, with mufflers. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation".
6.
Disconnect the parking brake cables from the equalizer, then disconnect the three parking brake cable
mounting brackets on each cable and position the cables out of the way. Refer to PB-5, "Component".
7. Remove the fuel tank protector.
8. Disconnect the fuel filler hose, recirculation hose and EVAP canister hose at the fuel tank as shown.
9. Disconnect the fuel tank mounting straps while supporting the
fuel tank.
10. Lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level sensor
unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
LBIA0341E
11. Disconnect the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump
assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose from the
fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
LBIA0338E
Revision: August 2007
FL-10
2008 Quest
FUEL TANK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
a. Disconnect the quick connectors as follows:
• Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
A
tube.
• If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
FL
by pulling.
CAUTION:
• The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
C
• Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
• Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
SFE562A
when welding near the tube.
D
• Prevent liquid acids, such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal.
• Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor,
E
fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
• When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace
the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer).
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damF
age and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags or something similar.
G
H
PBIC0163E
12. Remove the fuel tank.
13. If replacing the fuel tank, disconnect the EVAP hose and remove the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and
fuel pump assembly to transfer to the new fuel tank. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
I
J
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Before tightening the fuel tank mounting straps, temporarily install the fuel filler hose, recirculation hose, and
EVAP canister hose. Tighten all fasteners to specification.
• Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight
into the tube until a click is heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by
pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are
securely connected.
K
L
M
N
SFE562A
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FL-11
2008 Quest
FUEL TANK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
quick connector.
• Check the parking brake for proper operation. Adjust the parking
brake as necessary. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service".
PBIC0199E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the
electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections.
Revision: August 2007
FL-12
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
Standard and Limit
INFOID:0000000001717813
Fuel Tank
FL
unit:
Fuel tank capacity
(US gal, Imp gal)
75.6 (20, 16 5/8)
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FL-13
2008 Quest
SUSPENSION
SECTION
FSU
FRONT SUSPENSION
A
B
C
D
FSU
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution ................................................................. 2
Removal and Installation .........................................10
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................10
STABILIZER BAR ............................................. 12
Removal and Installation .........................................12
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
TRANSVERSE LINK ......................................... 14
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ..................... 16
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 19
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 6
Component ................................................................ 6
On-vehicle Service .................................................... 6
Front Wheel Alignment .............................................. 7
Removal and Installation .........................................14
Removal and Installation .........................................16
General Specification (Front) ...................................19
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ........................19
Lower Ball Joint .......................................................20
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ..................................20
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ........10
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FSU-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution
INFOID:0000000001717814
• When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried
out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off
any spilled oil.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
• After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
• Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes.
• Always torque brake lines when installing.
• Lock nuts are unreusable parts; always use new ones.
When replacing, do not wipe the oil off the new lock nut
before tightening.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-2
SBR686C
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717815
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HT72520000
(J25730-A)
Ball joint remover
Removing outer tie-rod end and lower ball
joint
C
D
FSU
NT146
Front suspension member removal
KV101J0010
(J-47242)
Engine support table
F
G
WBIA0658E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717816
H
Tool name
Description
I
Attachment wheel alignment
Measure wheel alignment
a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
d: 56 mm (2.20 in)
e: 12 mm (0.47 in)
J
K
NT148
Spring compressor
Removing and installing coil spring
L
M
NT717
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FSU-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool name
Description
Engine lifting bracket
Removing and installing suspension member
LEIA0062E
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: August 2007
FSU-4
2008 Quest
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
A
INFOID:0000000001717817
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-12
FSU-7
FSU-6
FSU-10
—
FSU-10
C
D
FSU
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
STEERING
×
BRAKES
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
TIRES
×
AXLE
Shake
DRIVE SHAFT
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Stabilizer bar fatigue
×
Incorrect wheel alignment
×
Suspension looseness
Parts interference
×
G
Spring fatigue
Bushing or mounting
deterioration
Symptom
FSU-10
Shock absorber deformation,
damage or deflection
Noise
Possible Cause and SUSPECTED
PARTS
B
F
Improper installation, looseness
Reference page
FSU-6
Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
H
I
J
K
L
×: Applicable
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FSU-5
2008 Quest
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Component
INFOID:0000000001717818
WEIA0107E
1.
Strut spacer
2.
Strut mount insulator
3.
Mounting insulator bracket
4.
Thrust bearing
5.
Upper spring seat
6.
Upper rubber seat
7.
Dust cover
8.
Lower rubber seat
9.
Coil spring
10. Shock absorber (Strut)
11. Front suspension member
12. Cup
13. Member pin stay
14. Wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly
15. Cotter pin
16. Transverse link
17. Connecting rod
18. Stabilizer bar
19. Drive shaft
20. Stabilizer clamp
21. Stabilizer bushing
On-vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001717819
FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS
Check the front axle and front suspension parts for any excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-6
2008 Quest
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Raise the vehicle on a hoist and shake each front wheel to check
for excessive play.
• Make sure that the cotter pin is inserted in the lower ball joint.
• Retighten all of the axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
A
B
: Refer to FSU-6, "Component".
C
SMA525A
D
• Check the strut (shock absorber) for any oil leakage or other damage.
• Check the suspension ball joint for grease leakage and the ball
joint dust cover for any cracks or other damage.
If the ball joint dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace the
transverse link.
FSU
F
G
SFA392B
H
• Check the wheelarch height "Hf" and "Hr" from the top of the
wheelarch to the ground.
- For proper measurement of the wheelarch height, the vehicle must
be unladen*, parked on a level surface, and tires checked for
proper inflation and wear (the tread wear indicators must not be
showing).
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand
tools and mats in designated positions.
- Bounce the vehicle up and down several times before measuring
the height.
Wheelarch height
I
J
WEIA0030E
: Refer to FSU-20, "Wheelarch
Height (Unladen*)".
- The wheelarch height is not adjustable. If the height is out of specification, check for worn springs or suspension parts.
Front Wheel Alignment
INFOID:0000000001717820
K
L
M
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*).
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Refer to WT-29, "Tire".
Check the wheel runout. Refer to WT-5, "Inspection".
Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
Check the front suspension for looseness. Refer to FSU-6, "On-vehicle Service".
Check the steering linkage for looseness. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service".
Check that the front shock absorbers work properly.
Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to FSU-6, "On-vehicle Service".
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1.
A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
• This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-7
2008 Quest
N
O
P
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel
is centered.
• The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
• The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
• Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
• Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to FSU-19, "Front
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or
minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators.
• The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators
may not be correct.
• This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional “Rolling Compensation” method to “compensate” the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this “Rolling Compensation”
method.
• Use the “Jacking Compensation” method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the
vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
• See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION
NOTE:
Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted.
1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the
right and left wheels using attachment Tool and a suitable alignment gauge.
Camber, caster and
kingpin inclination
2.
: Refer to FSU-19, "Front
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension parts. Replace any damaged
or worn out parts.
SRA096A
TOE-IN
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires
at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are
measuring points.
AFA050
Revision: August 2007
FSU-8
2008 Quest
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Measure the distance “A” on the rear side of the front tires as
shown.
5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180°
degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION:
If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2
turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never
push the vehicle backward.
6. Measure the distance “B” on the front side of the front tires at the
same marks as shown.
A
B
C
SFA234AC
Total toe-in
7.
a.
b.
Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tierods.
Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts.
Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length “L”
c.
D
: Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
FSU
F
: Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear
and Linkage".
G
Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque.
Lock nut
: Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation".
SFA486A
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1.
2.
H
I
Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the
vehicle forward until the front wheels rest on the turning radius
gauge as shown.
Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure the
turning angles “A” and “B” as shown.
J
K
Wheel turning angle
(full turn)
: Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel
Alignment (Unladen*1)".
L
SFA439BA
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FSU-9
2008 Quest
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717821
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the wheel sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front shock absorber
(strut).
Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool.
Support the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly with a suitable wire.
Remove the shock absorber (strut) lower bolts and nuts using
power tool.
Remove the three upper strut mounting nuts using power tool.
CAUTION:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle.
Remove the coil spring and shock absorber (strut) assembly.
SFA956A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-7, "Front Wheel
Alignment".
• When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown.
• Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Component".
WARNING:
• Always replace the shock absorber (strut) lower mounting
nuts.
• When installing shock absorber (strut) to steering knuckle,
be sure to hold bolts when tightening nuts.
• Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and
Wheel".
WEIA0108E
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001717822
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Set the shock absorber (strut) in a vise, then loosen (without
removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time.
Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the
shock absorber (strut) mounting insulator can be turned by
hand.
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are
firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must
be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the
spring.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-10
SSU002
2008 Quest
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the piston rod lock nut.
A
B
C
SSU003
D
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly
• Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
• Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
• Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
FSU
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts
Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and
replace if necessary.
F
Thrust Bearing
Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary.
G
Coil Spring
• Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
• Check the free spring height.
H
Front spring free height
SE model
: 340 mm (13.39 in)
Base, S and
: 350 mm (13.78 in)
SL models
I
J
ASSEMBLY
1.
When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as
shown.
K
L
M
SFA508A
2.
Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer
side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points.
N
O
P
SFA564B
Revision: August 2007
FSU-11
2008 Quest
STABILIZER BAR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STABILIZER BAR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717823
WEIA0109E
1.
Connecting rod
4.
Stabilizer clamp
2.
Stabilizer bar
3.
Stabilizer bushing
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Remove the steering gear bolts on the lower side. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation".
• Support steering gear.
Disconnect the connecting rod end at the stabilizer bar using
power tool.
• Prevent the connecting rod from turning by inserting a hex
wrench into the end of the ball stud, then remove nut.
Remove the two stabilizer bar clamps from the front suspension
member.
Remove the stabilizer bar by withdrawing from side.
• Remove the two stabilizer bushings as necessary.
SFA796B
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check the stabilizer bar for deformation or cracks and replace if
necessary.
• Check the stabilizer bushings for deterioration or cracks. Replace if
necessary.
• Check that the connecting rod ball joint can rotate in all directions.
If movement is not smooth and free, replace connecting rod.
ARA027
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-12
2008 Quest
STABILIZER BAR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When installing stabilizer bar, make sure that the stabilizer clamps
are facing in the correct direction as shown.
A
B
C
WEIA0032E
D
• Make sure that slit in stabilizer bushing is in the position as shown.
• Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the stabilizer bushing
using a silicone lubricant.
FSU
F
G
SFA604B
H
• Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed as shown.
• When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire
and Wheel".
I
J
K
SFA449BB
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FSU-13
2008 Quest
TRANSVERSE LINK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TRANSVERSE LINK
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717824
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut using power tool, then
separate transverse link from the wheel hub and steering
knuckle assembly.
WEIA0033E
3.
4.
Remove the two transverse link pivot bolts and transverse link bolt using power tool.
Remove the transverse link.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Visual Check
• Check the transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation. Replace it if necessary.
• Check the bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace the transverse link if necessary.
Lower Ball Joint
• Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the transverse link assembly if any of the following exists:
• Lower ball joint stud is worn.
• Lower ball joint is hard to swing.
• Lower ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
Swinging Force
Check ball joint swinging force.
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball
joint is properly broken in.
Swinging force “A” (measuring at groove of ball
stud)
: 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f,
1.8 - 12.3 lb-f)
SFA858A
Turning Force
Check ball joint turning force.
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball
joint is properly broken in.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-14
2008 Quest
TRANSVERSE LINK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Turning torque “B”
: 0.49 - 3.43 N·m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm,
4.3 - 30.4 in-lb)
A
B
C
SFA858A
D
Vertical End Play
Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball
joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play “C”
FSU
: 0 mm (0 in)
F
G
SFA858A
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the transverse link mounting bolts and nuts to specified torque, refer to FSU-6, "Component". During
installation, the final tightening must be done with the vehicle at curb weight and the tires on the ground.
CAUTION:
Discard the old pinch nut and use a new pinch nut for installation of the lower ball joint pinch bolt.
• After installation, check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Front Wheel Alignment".
• Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
FSU-15
2008 Quest
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717825
WEIA0145E
1.
Front engine mount
2.
Dynamic damper
3.
Front suspension member
4.
Cup
5.
LH transaxle mounting insulator
6.
Member pin stay, LH
7.
Member pin stay, RH
8.
Rear engine mount
⇐
Front
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
b.
Remove the front wheels and tires using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Remove the engine under cover.
Remove the splash shields.
Remove the LH transaxle mounting insulator nuts using power tool.
Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Install a commercially available engine lifting bracket onto the
transaxle with bolt as shown.
LEIA0060E
Revision: August 2007
FSU-16
2008 Quest
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
c. Support engine from engine lifting bracket using suitable tool as
shown.
CAUTION:
Be sure suitable tool is securely resting on hoodledge as
shown.
A
B
C
LEIA0061E
D
d.
Remove the three LH transaxle mounting insulator nuts using
power tool.
FSU
F
G
WEIA0042E
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut using power tool,
then separate the transverse link from the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly. Refer to FSU-6, "Component".
Remove the front exhaust tube using power tool. Refer to EX-5,
"Removal and Installation".
Remove the power steering line bracket from the front suspension member.
Remove the bolts on the lower side of the steering gear. Refer to
PS-15, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the front engine mount electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the connecting rod from the front strut using power
tool.
11. Set a transmission jack under the front suspension member,
then remove the nuts from the front suspension member using
power tool.
12. Remove the bolts from the member pin stay on the vehicle body
side using power tool.
13. Remove the through bolts from the front and rear engine
mounts.
14. Lower the transmission jack slowly to remove the front suspension member.
• If necessary, remove the exhaust hanger bracket from the front suspension member.
• If necessary, remove the front and rear engine mounts.
• If necessary, remove the transverse link.
• If necessary, remove dynamic damper.
H
I
J
WEIA0033E
L
M
N
SFA796B
O
P
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the front suspension member for deformation, cracks, or any other damage. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal noting the following:
• Install the stabilizer bar bushings and clamps in the specified orientation. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and
Installation".
• Tighten the stabilizer bar and connecting rod nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Component".
Revision: August 2007
FSU-17
K
2008 Quest
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Tighten the steering gear bolts to specification. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation".
• Tighten the transverse link bolts and nuts to specification. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation".
• Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Front Wheel Alignment".
Revision: August 2007
FSU-18
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
General Specification (Front)
INFOID:0000000001717826
Unit: mm (in)
Model
SE
B
Base, S and SL
Suspension type
Independent strut with coil springs
Shock absorber type
C
Double-acting hydraulic
Stabilizer bar
Standard equipment
Free spring height
340 (13.39)
350 (13.78)
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
D
INFOID:0000000001717827
FSU
Market
Camber
degree minute (decimal degree)
United States
and Canada
Mexico
Minimum
−1° 15′ (−1.25°)
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
Nominal
−0° 30′ (−0.50°)
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
0° 41′ (0.68°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
Minimum
1° 57′ (1.95°)
2° 27′ (2.45°)
Nominal
2° 42′ (2.70°)
2° 27′ (2.45°)
Maximum
3° 27′ (3.45°)
3° 12′ (3.20°)
Left and right difference
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
Minimum
13° 39′ (13.65°)
13° 42′ (13.70°)
Nominal
14° 24′ (14.40°)
13° 42′ (13.70°)
Maximum
15° 09′ (15.15°)
14° 27′ (14.45°)
Maximum
Left and right difference
Caster
degree minute (decimal degree)
Kingpin inclination
degree minute (decimal degree)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SFA234AC
Total toe-in
Minimum
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Angle (left plus right)
degree minute (decimal degree)
Wheel turning angle
full turn*2
Inside
degree minute (decimal degree)
Outside
degree minute (decimal degree)
Revision: August 2007
−0.75 (−0.0295)
−0.75 (−0.0295)
Nominal
0.25 (0.0098)
0.25 (0.0098)
Maximum
1.25 (0.0492)
1.25 (0.0492)
Minimum
-0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°)
-0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°)
Nominal
0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°)
0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°)
Maximum
0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°)
0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°)
Minimum
35° 15′ (35.25°)
38° 00′ (38.00°)
Nominal
38° 45′ (38.75°)
41° 30′ (41.50°)
Maximum
39° 45′ (39.75°)
42° 30′ (42.50°)
Nominal
32° 30′ (32.5°)
33° 24′ (33.4°)
FSU-19
2008 Quest
N
O
P
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg-f, 22 to 33 lb-f) with
engine idle.
Lower Ball Joint
INFOID:0000000001717828
SFA858A
Swinging force “A”
(Measuring point: groove of ball stud)
Turning torque “B”
7.8 - 54.9 (0.8 - 5.6, 1.8 - 12.3)
N (kg-f, lb-f)
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
Vertical end play “C”
0.49 - 3.43 (5.0 - 35.0, 4.3 - 30.4)
mm (in)
0 (0)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
INFOID:0000000001717829
Unit: mm (in)
WEIA0030E
Market
United States and Canada
Mexico
Front (Hf)
740 (29.13)
770 (30.31)
Rear (Hr)
749 (29.49)
779 (30.67)
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Revision: August 2007
FSU-20
2008 Quest
QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
Edition: August 2007
Revision: August 2007
Publication No. SM8E-1V42U0
A GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
General Information
B ENGINE
EM
Engine Mechanical
LU
Engine Lubrication System
CO
Engine Cooling System
EC
Engine Control System
FL
Fuel System
EX
Exhaust System
ACC
C
TRANSMISSION/
TRANSAXLE
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
E SUSPENSION
F BRAKES
Accelerator Control System
AT
Automatic Transaxle
FAX
Front Axle
RAX
Rear Axle
FSU
Front Suspension
RSU
Rear Suspension
WT
Road Wheels & Tires
BR
Brake System
PB
Parking Brake System
BRC
Brake Control System
G STEERING
PS
Power Steering System
H RESTRAINTS
SB
Seat Belts
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
I
BODY
J AIR CONDITIONER
K ELECTRICAL
L MAINTENANCE
BL
Body, Lock & Security System
GW
Glasses, Window System & Mirrors
RF
Roof
EI
Exterior & Interior
IP
Instrument Panel
SE
Seat
AP
Adjustable Pedal
ATC
Automatic Air Conditioner
MTC
Manual Air Conditioner
SC
Starting & Charging System
LT
Lighting System
DI
Driver Information System
WW
Wiper, Washer & Horn
BCS
Body Control System
LAN
LAN System
AV
Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System
ACS
Auto Cruise Control System
PG
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
MA
Maintenance
© 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of Nissan North America, Inc.
-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the
2008 NISSAN QUEST.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information
at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of
the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a
manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician
and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service
procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal
safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service
method selected.
-2
PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER!
Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals.
Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals.
Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to:
Nissan North America, Inc.
Technical Service Information
39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200
Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331
FAX: (248) 488-3910
SERVICE MANUAL:
Model:
Year:
PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ):
Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail:
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
Page number(s)
Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
If no, what page number(s)?
Please describe the issue or problem in detail:
Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Please comment:
What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or
repairing customer vehicles?
DATE:
DEALER:
CITY:
YOUR NAME:
DEALER NO.:
STATE/PROV./COUNTRY:
POSITION:
ADDRESS:
ZIP/POSTAL CODE:
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST
2008
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST
Engine Tune-up Data
INFOID:0000000003332592
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder arrangement
V-6
3
3,498 (213.45)
Displacement cm (cu in)
Bore and stroke
mm (in)
95.5 x 81.4 (3.760 x 3.205)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Number of piston rings
Compression
2
Oil
1
Number of main bearings
4
Compression ratio
10.0:1
Compression pressure
kPa
(kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
Standard
1,275 (13.0, 185)
Minimum
981 (10.0, 142)
Differential limit between cylinders
98 (1.0, 14)
Cylinder number
SEM713A
Valve timing (IVTC - OFF)
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
240°
238°
- 6°
64°
8°
52°
SPARK PLUG
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST
2008
Make
NGK
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
Gap (nominal)
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
INFOID:0000000003332591
Market
Camber
degree minute (decimal degree)
United States
and Canada
Mexico
Minimum
−1° 15′ (−1.25°)
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
Nominal
−0° 30′ (−0.50°)
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
0° 41′ (0.68°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
Minimum
1° 57′ (1.95°)
2° 27′ (2.45°)
Nominal
2° 42′ (2.70°)
2° 27′ (2.45°)
Maximum
3° 27′ (3.45°)
3° 12′ (3.20°)
Left and right difference
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or
less
Minimum
13° 39′ (13.65°)
13° 42′ (13.70°)
Nominal
14° 24′ (14.40°)
13° 42′ (13.70°)
Maximum
15° 09′ (15.15°)
14° 27′ (14.45°)
Minimum
−0.75 (−0.0295)
−0.75 (−0.0295)
Nominal
0.25 (0.0098)
0.25 (0.0098)
Maximum
1.25 (0.0492)
1.25 (0.0492)
Minimum
-0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°)
-0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°)
Nominal
0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°)
0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°)
Maximum
0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°)
0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°)
Minimum
35° 15′ (35.25°)
38° 00′ (38.00°)
Nominal
38° 45′ (38.75°)
41° 30′ (41.50°)
Maximum
39° 45′ (39.75°)
42° 30′ (42.50°)
Nominal
32° 30′ (32.5°)
33° 24′ (33.4°)
Maximum
Left and right difference
Caster
degree minute (decimal degree)
Kingpin inclination
degree minute (decimal degree)
SFA234AC
Total toe-in
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Angle (left plus right)
degree minute (decimal degree)
Wheel turning angle
full turn*2
Inside
degree minute (decimal degree)
Outside
degree minute (decimal degree)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg-f, 22 to 33 lb-f) with
engine idle.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST
2008
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
INFOID:0000000003332589
United States
and Canada
Mexico
Minimum
−1° 3' (−1.05°)
0° 3' (0.05°)
Nominal
−0° 33′ (−0.55°)
0° 33′ (0.55°)
Maximum
-0° 3′ (-0.05°)
1° 3′ (1.05°)
Minimum
1.6 (0.063)
1.6 (0.063)
Nominal
3.2 (0.126)
3.2 (0.126)
Maximum
4.8 (0.189)
4.8 (0.189)
Minimum
-2.0 (-0.079)
-2.0 (-0.079)
Nominal
0 (0)
0 (0)
Market
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
SFA234AC
Distance (“A” − “B”)
mm (in)
Total toe-in
Difference between LH, RH
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Maximum
2.0 (0.079)
2.0 (0.079)
Minimum
0° 3′ 35" (0.06°)
0° 3′ 35" (0.06°)
Nominal
0° 7′ 48" (0.13°)
0° 7′ 48" (0.13°)
Maximum
0° 12′ 0" (0.20°)
0° 12′ 0" (0.20°)
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
INFOID:0000000003332590
Unit: mm (in)
WEIA0030E
Market
United States and Canada
Mexico
Front (Hf)
740 (29.13)
770 (30.31)
Rear (Hr)
749 (29.49)
779 (30.67)
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST
2008
Brake Specification
INFOID:0000000003332586
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
AD35VB disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake
47.62 (1.87)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
132.0 × 53.5 × 10 (5.20 × 2.11 × 0.39)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
290 × 28 (11.42 × 1.10)
Brake model
AD14VE disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Rear brake
42.86 (1.69)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.27 × 1.30 × 0.33)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Master cylinder
308 × 16 (12.13 × 0.63)
Cylinder bore diameter
25.4 (1.00)
Booster model
Brake booster
Diaphragm diameter
M245T
Primary
252 (9.92)
Secondary
230 (9.06)
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
equivalent, DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Recommended brake fluid
Disc Brake
INFOID:0000000003332587
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Pad wear limit
Minimum thickness
Maximum runout
Rotor repair limit
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation
(measured at 8 positions)
AD35VB (Front)
AD14VE (Rear)
2.0 (0.079)
2.0 (0.079)
0.04 (0.0016)
0.05 (0.0020)
26.0 (1.02)
14.0 (0.55)
0.015 (0.0006) or less
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST
2008
Brake Pedal
INFOID:0000000003332588
Unit: mm (in)
WFIA0160E
Free height “H” *
156.3 - 166.3 (6.15 - 6.55)
Depressed pedal height “D” [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] *
Clearance
switch
“C1”
or
“C2”
more than 90.3 (3.55)
between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD
Pedal play “A”
0.74 - 1.96 (0.029 - 0.077)
3 - 11 (0.12 - 0.43)
*: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad
Fluids and Lubricants
INFOID:0000000003332585
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Metric
US measure
Imp measure
75.6
20 gal
16 5/8 gal
With oil filter change
4.0
4 1/4 qt
3 1/2 qt
Without oil filter change
3.7
3 7/8 qt
3 1/4 qt
5.0
5 1/4 qt
4 3/8 qt
10.5
2 3/4 gal
2 3/8 gal
Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)
7.4
7 7/8 qt
6 1/2 qt
Power steering fluid (PSF)
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
—
—
Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Cooling system
With reservoir at “MAX”
level
Brake fluid
—
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
Brake grease
—
—
—
1 1/4 gal
1 gal
1.98 ± 0.11 lb
1.98 ± 0.11 lb
7.44 fl oz
7.7 fl oz
Windshield washer fluid
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
4.5
900 ± 50 g
220 m
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION
GI
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident ..............................................................24
Control Units and Electrical Parts ............................31
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Description ................................................................ 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If
Equipped) .................................................................. 2
General Precaution ................................................... 3
Precaution for Three Way Catalyst ........................... 4
Precaution for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline
Recommended) ......................................................... 4
Precaution for Multiport Fuel Injection System or
Engine Control System ............................................. 5
Precaution for Hoses ................................................. 5
Precaution for Engine Oils ........................................ 6
Precaution for Air Conditioning ................................. 6
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................ 7
Description ................................................................ 7
Terms ........................................................................ 7
Units .......................................................................... 7
Contents .................................................................... 7
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ...... 8
Component ................................................................ 8
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 9
How to Read Wiring Diagram .................................. 12
Abbreviations .......................................................... 19
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM ................. 34
Description ...............................................................34
Function and System Application ............................34
CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit....35
G
H
LIFTING POINT ................................................. 37
Special Service Tool ................................................37
Garage Jack and Safety Stand ................................37
2-Pole Lift ................................................................38
Board-on Lift ............................................................39
I
J
TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 40
Tow Truck Towing ...................................................40
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............40
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD
BOLTS ............................................................... 41
K
Tightening Torque Table .........................................41
L
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS
AND SEALANTS ............................................... 42
M
Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant .......42
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION .................... 43
Model Variation ........................................................43
Identification Number ...............................................44
Dimensions ..............................................................45
Wheels & Tires ........................................................45
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL
INCIDENT ...........................................................21
TERMINOLOGY ................................................ 46
How to Check Terminal ........................................... 21
SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................46
Revision: August 2007
F
GI-1
2008 Quest
N
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Description
INFOID:0000000001718145
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718146
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS) (If Equipped)
INFOID:0000000001718147
NVIS/IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS/IVIS
(NATS).
Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS/IVIS (NATS) registered.
The security indicator is located on the instrument panel. The indicator blinks when the immobilizer system is
functioning.
Therefore, NVIS/IVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
• When NVIS/IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition switch is in "ON"
position.
This lighting up indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning, so prompt service is required.
• When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of
other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), CONSULT-III hardware and CONSULT-III NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software is necessary.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS/IVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-III operation manual, NVIS/IVIS (NATS).
Therefore, CONSULT-III NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software (program card and operation manual) must be kept
strictly confidential to maintain the integrity of the anti-theft function.
• When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of
other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key identification.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. A maximum of four or five key IDs can be registered into NVIS/IVIS (NATS).
• When failing to start the engine first time using the key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS), start as follows.
1. Leave the ignition key in "ON" position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition key to "OFF" or "LOCK" position and wait approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while keeping the key separate from any others on key-chain.
Revision: August 2007
GI-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
General Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718148
GI
• Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without
proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any flammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any flammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas,
etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
B
C
D
SGI285
E
• Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at
the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
• When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop
them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
F
G
SGI231
• Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
• If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
H
I
J
K
SEF289H
L
• To prevent serious burns:
Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
• Dispose of or recycle drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning
parts in an appropriate manner.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray
and possibly a fire.
• Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
prior to inspection or assembly.
• Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers,
cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones.
• Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
• Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
• Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
• After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
• Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
• Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.
Revision: August 2007
GI-3
M
N
O
SGI233
P
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended
special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs.
• When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leaks.
PBIC0190E
• Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.
SGI234
WARNING:
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections.
Precaution for Three Way Catalyst
INFOID:0000000001718149
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To
prevent this, follow the instructions.
• Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
• When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary.
• Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the
catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three
way catalyst.
Precaution for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)
INFOID:0000000001718150
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91).
For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN/INFINITI recommend the use of unleaded premium gasoline with
an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15%
unleaded gasoline) may only be used in vehicles specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle
- FFV models).
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Do not use E-85
fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) unless the vehicle is specifically designed for E-85 fuel
(i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models). Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity.
Revision: August 2007
GI-4
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Precaution for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System
INFOID:0000000001718151
GI
• Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the
multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
• Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
• Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow
sensor.
B
C
D
SGI787
Precaution for Hoses
INFOID:0000000001718152
E
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
• To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with
tapered tool or screwdriver.
F
G
H
SMA019D
• To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion
length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose
stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose
stopper.)
I
J
K
L
SMA020D
HOSE CLAMPING
M
• If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace
of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at
that position.
• Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
N
O
P
SMA021D
Revision: August 2007
GI-5
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of
the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around.
SMA022D
Precaution for Engine Oils
INFOID:0000000001718153
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Precaution for Air Conditioning
INFOID:0000000001718154
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" for specific instructions.
Revision: August 2007
GI-6
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
GI
Description
INFOID:0000000001718155
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”.
Terms
B
INFOID:0000000001718156
C
• The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information.
Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment.
Units
D
E
INFOID:0000000001718157
F
• The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and
alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the
standard tightening torque.
“Example”
Range
Outer Socket Lock Nut
G
H
: 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
I
Standard
Drive Shaft Installation Bolt
J
: 44.3 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)
Contents
INFOID:0000000001718158
• ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page
you are searching for.
• A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g.
) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the
first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab.
• THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
• THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
• THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section
and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
• THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of
work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations.
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle
or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-7
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions
INFOID:0000000001718159
The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in
the text and the service procedures.
SAIA0519E
Component
INFOID:0000000001718160
• THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to
perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG.
Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is
used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration.
Revision: August 2007
GI-8
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
GI
B
C
D
E
SFIA2959E
1.
Union bolt
2.
Copper washer
3.
Brake hose
4.
Cap
5.
Bleed valve
6.
Sliding pin bolt
7.
Piston seal
8.
Piston
9.
Piston boot
G
10. Cylinder body
11.
Sliding pin
12.
Torque member mounting bolt
13. Washer
14.
Sliding pin boot
15.
Bushing
16. Torque member
17.
Inner shim cover
18.
Inner shim
19. Inner pad
20.
Pad retainer
21.
Pad wear sensor
22. Outer pad
23.
Outer shim
24.
1: PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease
or silicone-based grease
2: Rubber grease
F
H
Outer shim cover
I
: Brake fluid
Refer to GI section for additional symbol definitions.
J
SYMBOLS
K
L
M
N
SAIA0749E
How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718161
P
DESCRIPTION
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the
“Work Flow”.
2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
Revision: August 2007
O
GI-9
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG
section for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure
that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were.
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SAIA0256E
1.
2.
Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group.
The meaning of are as follows:
a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V
b. Voltage
: Approximately 0V → Less than 1V
3.
4.
Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem,
familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below.
Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown
in the left upper portion of each test group.
Reference Information
Refer to GI-8, "Component".
Revision: August 2007
GI-10
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SAIA0750E
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-11
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SAIA0751E
How to Read Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000001718162
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
Revision: August 2007
GI-12
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by
a single line and followed by the direction mark.
• Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by
a double line and followed by the direction mark.
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
SAIA0257E
• Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
SGI363
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-13
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• For detail, refer to following “DESCRIPTION”.
SGI091A
Revision: August 2007
GI-14
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Optional Splice
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SGI942
DESCRIPTION
I
Number
1
Item
Description
Power condition
• This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated).
2
Fusible link
• The double line shows that this is a fusible link.
• The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
3
Fusible link/fuse location
• This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.
4
Fuse
• The single line shows that this is a fuse.
• The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
5
Current rating
• This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.
6
Connectors
• This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male.
• The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors.
• Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector.
Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION).
7
Optional splice
• The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
8
Splice
• The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle.
9
Page crossing
• This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page.
• The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page.
10
Common connector
• The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector.
11
Option abbreviation
• This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application.
12
Relay
• This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY.
13
Connectors
• This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut.
Revision: August 2007
GI-15
J
K
L
M
N
O
2008 Quest
P
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Number
Item
Description
• This shows a code for the color of the wire.
14
Wire color
BR = Brown
OR or O = Orange
P = Pink
PU or V (Violet) = Purple
GY or GR = Gray
SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
L = Blue
Y = Yellow
LG = Light Green
When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown
below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
15
Option description
• This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
16
Switch
• This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
17
Assembly parts
• Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly.
18
Cell code
• This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page
number.
• Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically
downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow.
19
Current flow arrow
• A double arrow “
operation.
” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on circuit
20
System branch
• This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and
system).
21
Page crossing
• This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code.
• The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding
pages.
22
Shielded line
• The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
23
Component box in
wave line
• This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by
wave line) within the system.
24
Component name
• This shows the name of a component.
25
Connector number
• This shows the connector number.
• The letter shows which harness the connector is located in.
• Example: M: main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main
Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in locating connectors.
26
Ground (GND)
• The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the grounded connector.
27
Ground (GND)
• This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to
"Ground Distribution" in PG section.
28
Connector views
• This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page.
29
Common component
• Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component.
30
Connector color
31
Fusible link and fuse
box
• This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section.
The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out.
32
Reference area
• This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors
(J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details.
• This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes,
Number 14 of this chart.
Harness Indication
Revision: August 2007
GI-16
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
• Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
AGI070
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
H
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition.
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
• ignition switch is “OFF”,
• doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
• pedals are not depressed, and
• parking brake is released.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
SGI860
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
Revision: August 2007
GI-17
2008 Quest
P
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable line
for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for DTC” is
a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
• A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable
line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which
ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
SGI862-B
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
• The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
• The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
SGI875
Reference Area
Revision: August 2007
GI-18
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the
end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, GI
these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
SGI092A
Abbreviations
INFOID:0000000001718163
N
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
A/C
Air Conditioner
A/T
Automatic Transaxle/Transmission
ATF
Automatic Transmission Fluid
D1
Drive range 1st gear
D2
Drive range 2nd gear
D3
Drive range 3rd gear
D4
Drive range 4th gear
FR, RR
Revision: August 2007
M
O
P
Front, Rear
GI-19
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ABBREVIATION
LH, RH
DESCRIPTION
Left-Hand, Right-Hand
M/T
Manual Transaxle/Transmission
OD
Overdrive
P/S
Power Steering
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
SDS
Service Data and Specifications
SST
Special Service Tools
2WD
2-Wheel Drive
22
2nd range 2nd gear
21
2nd range 1st gear
12
1st range 2nd gear
11
1st range 1st gear
Revision: August 2007
GI-20
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
GI
INFOID:0000000001718164
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
B
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors
and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/
INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (NISSAN)
(J38751-95INF)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (INFINITI)
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD and terminal repair
kit
(J42992-2000UPD)
OBD-II Connector Kit Update
C
D
Description
E
F
G
H
WAIA0004E
WAIA0005E
I
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during
circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator
clip.
J
K
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
• If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector,
remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
• Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to
the seal between wire and connector may result.
L
M
N
SGI841
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
• There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each
terminal with the “T” pin through the notch.
Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal
into female terminal.
O
P
SEL265V
Revision: August 2007
GI-21
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
SEL266V
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin.
Do not bend terminal.
SEL267V
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.
SEL270V
3.
While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male
terminal into the female terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with
your hands.
SEL271V
Revision: August 2007
GI-22
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not.
GI
B
C
SEL272V
D
• If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal,
replace the female terminal.
E
F
G
SEL273V
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
H
I
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
• Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing,
the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
• The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected.
Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal
is properly installed on either side of male or female connector.
J
K
L
SEL275V
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is
installed properly.
M
N
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector.
An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
O
P
SEL330V
Revision: August 2007
GI-23
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
INFOID:0000000001718165
WORK FLOW
SGI838
STEP
DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
STEP 1
WHAT
Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).
WHEN
Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
WHERE
Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
HOW
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
STEP 2
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.
STEP 3
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
• Power Supply Routing
• System Operation Descriptions
• Applicable Service Manual Sections
• Check for any Service Bulletins
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
STEP 4
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts.
STEP 5
Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
STEP 6
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
• Vehicle vibration
• Heat sensitive
• Freezing
• Water intrusion
• Electrical load
Revision: August 2007
GI-24
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the GI
problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration.
B
C
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SGI839
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
• Connectors not fully seated.
• Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
• Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
• Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
• Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or
pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Revision: August 2007
GI-25
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs
while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
SGI842
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing
somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside
overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of
those electrical components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
replace the component.
SGI843
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
SGI844
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog
lamps) turned on.
SGI845
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorRevision: August 2007
GI-26
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
GI
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
B
OPEN
A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
There are two types of shorts.
SHORT
C
• SHORT CIRCUIT
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
change.
• SHORT TO GROUND
When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
D
NOTE:
Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal.
Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
E
F
G
H
SGI846-A
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start
with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
• Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
• Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit
has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
• Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the
circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
• Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
• With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
• Close SW1 and probe at relay.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
Revision: August 2007
GI-27
2008 Quest
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
• Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
SGI847-A
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
• Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
• Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known
good ground.
• With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground.
Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a
known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
• Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground).
• With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for
voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Revision: August 2007
GI-28
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
GI
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
B
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
C
D
E
F
G
H
SGI853
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will
give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire
is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked
up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
• Undersized wiring (single strand example)
• Corrosion on switch contacts
• Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
I
J
K
L
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD
• Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
• Operate the circuit.
• The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-29
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
SGI974
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in
“Computer Controlled Systems”).
Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire
gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
SAIA0258E
Control Unit Circuit Test
System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.
MGI034A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Revision: August 2007
GI-30
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Pin
No.
Item
1
Switch
2
Lamp
Voltage
value [V]
Condition
In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] *
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
GI
B
C
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
*:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
D
E
F
G
MGI035A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Pin
No.
Item
1
Lamp
2
Switch
H
Voltage
value [V]
Condition
In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] *
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 5
Approx. 5
I
J
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
*:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does
not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp.
Control Units and Electrical Parts
INFOID:0000000001718166
K
L
PRECAUTIONS
• Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
• Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
• Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and
functions of the component parts.
• Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
• If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting
it, then take it out by hand.
M
N
O
SAIA0251E
Revision: August 2007
GI-31
2008 Quest
P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or
damaged, and then correctly connect it.
When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening
the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector
becomes even with the surface.
SAIA0252E
• For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the
direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove
the connector.
SAIA0253E
• For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to
the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push
the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
SAIA0254E
• Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
• Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid
temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water
is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle.
• Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
• Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
• Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper
and lower covers.
SAIA0255E
Revision: August 2007
GI-32
2008 Quest
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from
damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
• When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the
specified check adapter.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
SEF348N
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-33
2008 Quest
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
INFOID:0000000003289216
• When the CONSULT-III is connected with a data link connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
• Refet to "CONSULT-III Operation Manual" for more information.
Function and System Application
Function
ENGINE
ABS (including VDC)
AIR BAG
IPDM E/R
BCM
METER/M&A
AUTO DRIVE POS.
TRANSMISSION
REARVIEW CAMERA
HVAC
NVIS (NATS)*1
NVIS (NATS BCM OR S/ENT)*1
INFOID:0000000003289217
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster
and more accurately by following indications on CONSULT-III.
x
x
-
-
x
-
x
x
x
-
-
-
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
x
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
x
x
Trouble diagnostic
record
Current self-diagnostic results and all trouble diagnostic records
previously stored can be read.
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECU can be read.
x
x
-
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
-
Data monitor (spec)
Data monitor specification can be read.
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CAN diagnosis
Based on the condition of CAN communication line, diagnosis
is automatically carried out.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
x
-
-
CAN diagnostic support
monitor
The communication condition of CAN communication line can
be read.
x
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives actuators
apart from ECU shifting some parameters in a specified range.
x
x
-
x
-
-
x
x
-
-
-
-
Function test
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either
"OK" or "NG". For engines, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
x
x
x
-
-
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
DTC & SRT confirmation
The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTC work support
The operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes
can be selected.
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ECM/ECU part number
ECM/ECU part number can be read.
x
x
-
-
x
-
x
x
x
x
-
-
ECU discriminated No.
Classification number of a replacement ECU can be read to prevent an incorrect ECU from being installed.
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Passenger airbag
Displays the STATUS (readiness) of front passenger air bag.
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Diagnostic test mode
Configuration
Sets control module parameters to match vehicle options.
-
-
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
initialization
Write new data in the EEPROM of the control unite.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
x
-
-
-
Control unit initialization
All registered ignition key IDs in NATS components can be initialized and new IDs can be registered.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
x
-
PIN Read
This mode enables technician to get BCM-specific 5-digit code.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
x
x: Applicable.
*1: NVIS (NATS) [NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (Nissan Anti-theft System)].
Revision: August 2007
GI-34
2008 Quest
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INFOID:0000000003289218
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WAWA0007E
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT-III cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.
Revision: August 2007
GI-35
2008 Quest
P
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Check item
CONSULT-III cannot access
any system.
CONSULT-III DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4).
CONSULT-III cannot access individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.)
• Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system).
• Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-III DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system).
• Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-13.
NOTE:
The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 6, 7 and 14 may be connected to more than one system. A short
in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-III access to other systems.
Revision: August 2007
GI-36
2008 Quest
LIFTING POINT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LIFTING POINT
GI
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718173
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
B
Description
C
D
LM4086-0200
( — )
Board-on attachment
E
S-NT001
F
LM4519-0000
( — )
Safety stand attachment
G
S-NT002
H
CAUTION:
• Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle,
suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or
equivalent.
• Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
INFOID:0000000001718174
WARNING:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
• Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-37
2008 Quest
LIFTING POINT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels.
WAIA0021E
2-Pole Lift
INFOID:0000000001718175
WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the
vehicle are well balanced.
Revision: August 2007
GI-38
2008 Quest
LIFTING POINT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and
sill spoiler.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WAIA0022E
Board-on Lift
INFOID:0000000001718176
CAUTION:
Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
• The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle
should be set on the front of the sill under the front door
opening.
• Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
I
J
K
L
M
AGI016
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-39
2008 Quest
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
INFOID:0000000001718177
CAUTION:
• Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
• Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving
(front) wheels off the ground as shown.
CAUTION:
• Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle
with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the
ground.
WAIA0027E
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
INFOID:0000000001718178
Front
• Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise,
the vehicle body will be damaged.
• Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the
towing hook.
• The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a
stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or
rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Rear
WAIA0023E
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural
members of the vehicle.
• Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling
systems.
• Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle.
• Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.
Revision: August 2007
GI-40
2008 Quest
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
GI
Tightening Torque Table
INFOID:0000000001718179
B
Grade
4T
7T
9T
Bolt size
Bolt diameter *
mm
M6
6.0
M8
8.0
M10
10.0
Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Pitch
mm
Hexagon head bolt
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
Hexagon flange bolt
in-lb
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
1.0
5.1
0.52
3.8
45.1
6.1
0.62
4.5
53.8
1.25
13
1.3
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
1.0
13
1.3
9
—
16
1.6
12
—
1.5
25
2.5
18
—
29
3.0
22
—
1.25
25
2.6
19
—
30
3.1
22
—
1.75
42
4.3
31
—
51
5.2
38
—
M12
12.0
1.25
46
4.7
34
—
56
5.7
41
—
M14
14.0
1.5
74
7.5
54
—
88
9.0
65
—
M6
6.0
1.0
8.4
0.86
6.2
74.6
10
1.0
7
87
M8
8.0
1.25
21
2.1
15
—
25
2.5
18
—
1.0
22
2.2
16
—
26
2.7
20
—
M10
10.0
1.5
41
4.2
30
—
48
4.9
35
—
1.25
43
4.4
32
—
51
5.2
38
—
M12
12.0
1.75
71
7.2
52
—
84
8.6
62
—
1.25
77
7.9
57
—
92
9.4
68
—
M14
14.0
1.5
127
13.0
94
—
147
15.0
108
—
M6
6.0
1.0
12
1.2
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
M8
8.0
1.25
29
3.0
22
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.0
31
3.2
23
—
37
3.8
27
—
M10
10.0
1.5
59
6.0
43
—
70
7.1
51
—
1.25
62
6.3
46
—
74
7.5
54
—
M12
12.0
M14
14.0
1.75
98
10.0
72
—
118
12.0
87
—
1.25
108
11.0
80
—
137
14.0
101
—
1.5
177
18.0
130
—
206
21.0
152
—
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
*: Nominal diameter
M
1.
Special parts are excluded.
2.
This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head.
N
O
P
MGI044A
Revision: August 2007
GI-41
2008 Quest
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant
INFOID:0000000001718180
Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.
1
2
3
6
Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos.
Rear View Mirror Adhesive
Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to
windows.
999MP-AM000P
99998-50505
Permatex 81844
Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
For metal-to-metal flange
sealing.
Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015
inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications.
999MP-AM001P
99998-50503
Permatex 51813 and
51817
High Performance
Thread Sealant
Provides instant sealing on
any threaded straight or
parallel threaded fitting.
(Thread sealant only, no
locking ability.)
• Do not use on plastic.
999MP-AM002P
999MP-AM002P
Permatex 56521
99998-50506
(Ultra Grey)
Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond
1207,1215, 1216,
1217F and 1217G;
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007
999MP-AM003P
(Ultra Grey)
Silicone RTV
Gasket Maker for Maxima/
Quest 5-speed automatic
transmission
(RE5F22A)
5
Nissan Canada Part
No. (Canada)
Purpose
Gasket Maker
4
Nissan North America
Part No. (USA)
Product Description
High Temperature,
High Strength Thread
Locking Sealant (Red)
Medium Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Blue)
Revision: August 2007
Threadlocker
Threadlocker (service tool
removable)
–
999MP-AM004P
999MP-AM005P
GI-42
–
Three Bond 1281B
or exact equivalent in
its quality
999MP-AM004P
Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
1307N, 1335,
1335B, 1363B,
1377C, 1386B, D&E
and 1388
999MP-AM005P
Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240,
24283 and 09178;
Three Bond 1322,
1322N, 1324 D&N,
1333D, 1361C,
1364D, 1370C and
1374
2008 Quest
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
GI
Model Variation
INFOID:0000000001718181
B
Body
Wagon
Engine
VQ35DE
Destination
Transmission
Grade
USA
Canada
Mexico
5 A/T
SE
TLJ2LGB-EUA
TLJ2LGB-ENA
TLJ2LGB-EJA
5 A/T
SL
TLJ2LJB-EUA
TLJ2LJB-ENA
TLJ2LJB-EJA
5 A/T
S
TLJ2LHB-EUA
TLJ2LHB-ENA
TLJ2LFB-EJA
5 A/T
Base
TLJ2LFB-EUA
TLJ2LFB-ENA
TLJ2LHB-EJA
C
D
Model code designations:
E
Position (Left to
Right)
Character
1
T
Body type
T: Wagon
LJ
Engine
LJ: VQ35DE
4
2
Axle
2: 2WD
5
L
Handle
L: LH drive
2
3
Qualifier
Definition
F
G
6
H
Grade
F: Base
H: 3.5 S
J: 3.5 SL
G: 3.5 SE
7
B
Transmission
B: 5 A/T
482
Model
482: Quest
11
E
Intake
E: EGI
U
Zone
U: Federal (50 state)
N: Canada
J: Mexico
K
12
13
A
Equipment
A: Standard
L
H
I
8
9
J
10
14
15
16
xxxxx
M
Option Codes
17
18
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-43
2008 Quest
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Identification Number
INFOID:0000000001718182
WAIA0025E
Vehicle identification number arrangement:
VIN Position (Left
to Right)
Character
Qualifier
Definition
1
2
5N1
Country code and vehicle
manufacturer
5N1: USA produced multi-purpose vehicle
1N6: USA produced truck
B: VQ35DE
3
4
B
Engine
5
V
Vehicle type
V: NISSAN, Quest
6
3
Model change
0 to 9
7
8
Body type
8: 4 door wagon (passenger vehicle, 4-door van (cargo van))
8
U
Gross vehicle weight rating
U: Standard (2-wheel drive with 4-wheel ABS, class D)
9
*
Check digit
0 to 9 or X
10
8
Model year
8: 2008 Model year
11
N
Manufacturing Plant
N: Canton Mississippi
Vehicle serial number
Chassis number
12
13
14
15
XXXXXX
16
17
Revision: August 2007
GI-44
2008 Quest
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine Serial Number
GI
B
C
WAIA0017E
D
Transaxle Serial Number
E
F
G
LAIA0039E
H
Dimensions
INFOID:0000000001718183
Unit:mm (in)
Overall length
5185 (204.13)
Overall width
1972 (77.64)
Overall height
Tread width
With roof rack
J
1826 (71.90)
Without roof rack
1778 (70.0)
Front
1710 (67.32)
Rear
1710 (67.32)
Wheelbase
3150 (124.02)
Minimum ground clearance
148 (5.83)
I
K
L
Wheels & Tires
INFOID:0000000001718184
M
Conventional
Road wheel/offset mm (in)
Tire size
16 X 6.5JJ Steel wheel/40 (1.57)
16 X 6.5JJ Aluminum/40 (1.57)
17 X 6.5JJ Aluminum/40 (1.57)
P225/65R16
Spare
N
16 X 4t
T135/80D16
P225/60R17
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-45
2008 Quest
TERMINOLOGY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TERMINOLOGY
SAE J1930 Terminology List
INFOID:0000000001718185
All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new
terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart.
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Air cleaner
ACL
Air cleaner
Barometric pressure
BARO
***
Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD
BAROS-BCDD
BCDD
Camshaft position
CMP
***
Camshaft position sensor
CMPS
Crank angle sensor
Canister
***
Canister
Carburetor
CARB
Carburetor
Charge air cooler
CAC
Intercooler
Closed loop
CL
Closed loop
Closed throttle position switch
CTP switch
Idle switch
Clutch pedal position switch
CPP switch
Clutch switch
Continuous fuel injection system
CFI system
***
Continuous trap oxidizer system
CTOX system
***
Crankshaft position
CKP
***
Crankshaft position sensor
CKPS
***
Data link connector
DLC
***
Data link connector for CONSULT-III
DLC for CONSULT-III
Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-III
Diagnostic test mode
DTM
Diagnostic mode
Diagnostic test mode selector
DTM selector
Diagnostic mode selector
Diagnostic test mode I
DTM I
Mode I
Diagnostic test mode II
DTM II
Mode II
Diagnostic trouble code
DTC
Malfunction code
Direct fuel injection system
DFI system
***
Distributor ignition system
DI system
Ignition timing control
Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater
EFE-mixture heater
Mixture heater
Early fuel evaporation system
EFE system
Mixture heater control
Electrically erasable programmable read
only memory
EEPROM
***
Electronic ignition system
EI system
Ignition timing control
Engine control
EC
***
Engine control module
ECM
ECCS control unit
Engine coolant temperature
ECT
Engine temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ECTS
Engine temperature sensor
Engine modification
EM
***
Engine speed
RPM
Engine speed
Erasable programmable read only memory
EPROM
***
Evaporative emission canister
EVAP canister
Canister
Evaporative emission system
EVAP system
Canister control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation valve
EGR valve
EGR valve
Revision: August 2007
GI-46
2008 Quest
TERMINOLOGY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT
valve
EGRC-BPT valve
BPT valve
Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid
valve
EGRC-solenoid valve
EGR control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor
EGRT sensor
GI
B
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
C
D
EGR temperature sensor
Flash electrically erasable programmable
read only memory
FEEPROM
***
Flash erasable programmable read only
memory
FEPROM
***
Flexible fuel sensor
FFS
***
Flexible fuel system
FF system
***
Fuel pressure regulator
***
Pressure regulator
Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid
valve
***
PRVR control solenoid valve
Fuel trim
FT
***
Heated Oxygen sensor
HO2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Idle air control system
IAC system
Idle speed control
Idle air control valve-air regulator
IACV-air regulator
Air regulator
Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control
valve
IACV-AAC valve
Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve
Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
FICD solenoid valve
Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve
IACV-idle up control solenoid valve
Idle up control solenoid valve
Idle speed control-FI pot
ISC-FI pot
FI pot
Idle speed control system
ISC system
***
Ignition control
IC
***
Ignition control module
ICM
***
Indirect fuel injection system
IFI system
***
Intake air
IA
Air
Intake air temperature sensor
IAT sensor
Air temperature sensor
Knock
***
Detonation
Knock sensor
KS
Detonation sensor
Malfunction indicator lamp
MIL
Check engine light
Manifold absolute pressure
MAP
***
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
MAPS
***
Manifold differential pressure
MDP
***
Manifold differential pressure sensor
MDPS
***
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Manifold surface temperature
MST
***
Manifold surface temperature sensor
MSTS
***
Manifold vacuum zone
MVZ
***
Manifold vacuum zone sensor
MVZS
***
Mass air flow sensor
MAFS
Air flow meter
Mixture control solenoid valve
MC solenoid valve
Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve
Multiport fuel injection System
MFI system
Fuel injection control
Revision: August 2007
GI-47
P
2008 Quest
TERMINOLOGY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Nonvolatile random access memory
NVRAM
***
On board diagnostic system
OBD system
Self-diagnosis
Open loop
OL
Open loop
Oxidation catalyst
OC
Catalyst
Oxidation catalytic converter system
OC system
***
Oxygen sensor
O2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Park position switch
***
Park switch
Park/neutral position switch
PNP switch
Park/neutral switch
Inhibitor switch
Neutral position switch
Periodic trap oxidizer system
PTOX system
***
Positive crankcase ventilation
PCV
Positive crankcase ventilation
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
PCV valve
PCV valve
Powertrain control module
PCM
***
Programmable read only memory
PROM
***
Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve
PAIRC solenoid valve
AIV control solenoid valve
Pulsed secondary air injection system
PAIR system
Air induction valve (AIV) control
Pulsed secondary air injection valve
PAIR valve
Air induction valve
Random access memory
RAM
***
Read only memory
ROM
***
Scan tool
ST
***
Secondary air injection pump
AIR pump
***
Secondary air injection system
AIR system
***
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
SFI system
Sequential fuel injection
Service reminder indicator
SRI
***
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
***
Simultaneous fuel injection
Smoke puff limiter system
SPL system
***
Supercharger
SC
***
Supercharger bypass
SCB
***
System readiness test
SRT
***
Thermal vacuum valve
TVV
Thermal vacuum valve
Three way catalyst
TWC
Catalyst
Three way catalytic converter system
TWC system
***
Three way + oxidation catalyst
TWC + OC
Catalyst
Three way + oxidation catalytic converter
system
TWC + OC system
***
Throttle body
TB
Throttle chamber
SPI body
Throttle body fuel injection system
TBI system
Fuel injection control
Throttle position
TP
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
TPS
Throttle sensor
Throttle position switch
TP switch
Throttle switch
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
TCC solenoid valve
Lock-up cancel solenoid
Lock-up solenoid
Revision: August 2007
GI-48
2008 Quest
TERMINOLOGY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Transmission control module
TCM
A/T control unit
Turbocharger
TC
Turbocharger
Vehicle speed sensor
VSS
Vehicle speed sensor
Volume air flow sensor
VAFS
Air flow meter
Warm up oxidation catalyst
WU-OC
Catalyst
Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system
WU-OC system
***
Warm up three way catalyst
WU-TWC
Catalyst
Warm up three way catalytic converter sysWU-TWC system
tem
***
Wide open throttle position switch
Full switch
WOTP switch
GI
B
C
D
E
***: Not applicable
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GI-49
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
GW
GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Handling for Adhesive and Primer ............................ 3
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 5
Work Flow ................................................................. 5
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 9
WINDSHIELD GLASS ........................................11
Removal and Installation ......................................... 11
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING .........13
Removal and Installation ......................................... 13
SKYVIEW ROOF ................................................15
Removal and Installation ......................................... 15
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ..............................17
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 17
System Description ................................................. 17
CAN Communication System Description ............... 20
Schematic (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) .... 21
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (Without Rear Power
Vent Windows) ........................................................ 22
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................ 24
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power
Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Without
Rear Power Vent Windows) .................................... 25
Revision: August 2007
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
(Without Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness
Connector Terminal Layout .....................................26
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window
and Door Lock/ Unlock Switch RH (Without Rear
Power Vent Windows) .............................................26
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Without
Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................27
Schematic (With Rear Power Vent Windows) .........28
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (With Rear Power
Vent Windows) ........................................................29
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch (With Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness
Connector Terminal Layout .....................................32
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power
Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (With Rear
Power Vent Windows) .............................................33
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
(With Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................34
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window
and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With Rear
Power Vent Windows) .............................................34
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (With
Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................35
Work Flow ................................................................35
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................35
Symptom Chart (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) .......................................................................36
Symptom Chart (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
....37
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
....38
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection (Without
Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................38
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection (With
Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................39
GW-1
2008 Quest
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 40
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection... 42
Front Power Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection... 42
Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without
Rear Power Vent Windows) ................................... 43
Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (With
Rear Power Vent Windows) ................................... 45
Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front RH ................ 47
Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear
Power Vent Windows) ............................................ 50
Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear
Power Vent Windows) ............................................ 52
Encoder Circuit Inspection Front RH ...................... 54
Door Switch Check ................................................. 56
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ...................................................................... 57
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (With Rear Power Vent Windows)... 59
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and
RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ............... 60
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and
RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) .................... 62
Rear Power Vent Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection .................................................................. 64
Rear Power Vent Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection .................................................................. 65
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ..... 67
Removal and Installation ........................................ 67
SLIDE DOOR GLASS ........................................ 70
Removal and Installation ........................................ 70
SIDE WINDOW GLASS ..................................... 72
Removal and Installation (without Rear Power
Vent Windows) ....................................................... 72
Revision: August 2007
Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent
Windows) ................................................................ 73
INSIDE MIRROR ................................................ 74
Wiring Diagram - I/MIRR - ....................................... 74
Removal and Installation ......................................... 75
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ........................... 76
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 76
System Description ................................................. 76
CAN Communication System Description .............. 77
Schematic ............................................................... 78
Wiring Diagram - DEF - ........................................... 79
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 81
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 81
Work Flow ............................................................... 82
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 82
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart ......................... 82
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
... 83
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection... 83
Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection ................................................................... 84
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection .............. 85
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection ................................................................... 86
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection ............ 88
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection ........... 89
Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection .............. 89
Filament Check ....................................................... 90
Filament Repair ....................................................... 91
DOOR MIRROR ................................................. 92
Automatic Drive Positioner Reverse Tilt Mirror ....... 92
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ................................... 92
Door Mirror Assembly ............................................. 93
Door Mirror Glass .................................................... 93
GW-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001718604
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Handling for Adhesive and Primer
INFOID:0000000001718605
C
D
E
F
G
H
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after
the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
GW
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder.
• Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found,
J
do not use it.
• If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with
soap.
• When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718606
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Locating the noise
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
SIIA0993E
Repairing the cause of noise
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718607
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
( –
)
Suction lifter
Holding the door glass
LIIA1991E
Revision: August 2007
GW-4
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
A
INFOID:0000000001718608
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any H
customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
GW
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
K
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
N
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: August 2007
GW-5
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
Revision: August 2007
GW-6
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
A
B
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
INFOID:0000000001718609
C
D
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
F
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
G
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
H
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harGW
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
J
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
K
L
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
GW-7
N
O
P
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: August 2007
M
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINER
Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: August 2007
GW-8
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000001718610
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
LIWA0276E
Revision: August 2007
GW-9
2008 Quest
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LAIA0071E
Revision: August 2007
GW-10
2008 Quest
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WINDSHIELD GLASS
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718611
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0652E
G
REMOVAL
1. Remove inside mirror. Refer to GW-75, "Removal and Installation".
H
2. Partially remove the headliner (front edge). Refer to EI-38, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
4. Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
GW
• Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
• If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
J
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
K
• When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
L
M
N
PIIA0186E
O
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
Revision: August 2007
GW-11
2008 Quest
P
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase
under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
LIIA0850E
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: August 2007
GW-12
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718612
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
LIIA1562E
1.
Foam dam
4.
Back door outer panel
2.
Back door window glass
3.
Bond
J
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear wiper arm and motor. Refer to EI-31.
2. Remove the connectors and grounds for the rear window defogger.
• Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
• If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the
glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety
glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting
knife or power cutting tool.
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
K
L
M
N
SBF034B
INSTALLATION
P
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
Revision: August 2007
O
GW-13
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water leaks for Rear Window Glass
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward.
To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: August 2007
GW-14
2008 Quest
SKYVIEW ROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SKYVIEW ROOF
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718613
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
LIIA0851E
J
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner. Refer to EI-38.
2. Apply protective tape around the skyview roof glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• When a skyview roof glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
K
L
M
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by
passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured
(preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
Revision: August 2007
GW-15
2008 Quest
O
P
SKYVIEW ROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of
the skyview roof in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower
temperature and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Skyview Roof Glass
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the glass area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: August 2007
GW-16
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718614
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
LIIA2453E
1.
4.
A. Rear power vent window motor
LH B52, RH B147
B. Condenser-3 B65, -4 B68 (view
with rear finishers removed)
2.
A. A-pillar LH
B. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with
instrument panel removed)
3.
A. Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch D7, D8
Power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH D105
B. Front door switch LH B8, RH B108
C. Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) D14
Front power window motor LH D9,
RH D104 (view with door finisher removed)
K
L
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718615
Power is supplied at all times
• from 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70
• through BCM terminal 69
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 (without rear power vent windows) or 19 (with
rear power vent windows)
• to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 10.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No.16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38
• through BCM terminal 68
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10.
With ignition switch in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
Revision: August 2007
J
GW-17
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15 (without rear power vent windows) or 17 (with
rear power vent windows)
• to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
MANUAL OPERATION
Front Door LH
WINDOW UP
When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the up position,
power is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8
• to front power window motor LH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11
• to front power window motor LH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11
• to front power window motor LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8
• to front power window motor LH terminal 2.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front Door RH
POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the up position, power is supplied
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8
• to front power window motor RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9
• to front power window motor RH terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9
• to front power window motor RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8
• to front power window motor RH terminal 2.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION
Power window serial link signal is sent
• though main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) or 14
(with rear power vent windows)
• to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16.
The operation of power window after receiving the signal is the same as operating the power window with
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
VENT WINDOW CLOSE (WITH REAR POWER VENT WINDOWS)
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the close position, power is
supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1
• to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3
• to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 2.
Then, the motor closes the window until the switch is released.
Revision: August 2007
GW-18
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the close position, power is
supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7
• to rear power vent window motor RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5
• to rear power window motor RH terminal 2.
Then, the motor closes the window until the switch is released.
VENT WINDOW OPEN (WITH REAR POWER VENT WINDOWS)
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the open position, power is
supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3
• to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1
• to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 1.
Then, the motor opens the window until the switch is released.
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the open position, power is
supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5
• to rear power vent window motor RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7
• to rear power vent window motor RH terminal 1.
Then, the motor opens the window until the switch is released.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
AUTO OPERATION
The AUTO feature allows the front window LH or RH (driver) or front window RH (passenger) to open or close
without holding the window switch in the down or up position.
GW
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, and BCM
transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link and BUS signal.
The following signals are transmitted from BCM to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power
window and door lock/unlock switch RH
• Front door window RH operation signal
• Power window control by front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch) signal
• Power window lock signal
• Keyless power window down signal
• Retained power operation signal
J
K
L
POWER WINDOW LOCK
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for front door window LH.
When in the lock position, the power window lock signal is transmitted to power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH by power window serial link. This prevents the power window motor from operating.
M
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45
seconds
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10
• from BCM terminal 68.
When power and ground are supplied, the BCM continues to be energized, and the power window can be
operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the front LH or front RH door is opened.
Retained power operation period can be changed by CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function
(BCM)".
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH monitor
the power window motor operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for front LH and front
RH power window by the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window motor LH and RH.
When main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
detects interruption during the following close operations
Revision: August 2007
GW-19
2008 Quest
N
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position
• automatic close operation during retained power operation
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH controls
each front power window motor for open and the power window will be lowered.
POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH)
When ignition switch is OFF, front power window LH and RH can be opened or closed by turning the front door
lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) to the UNLOCK/LOCK position for more than 1 second.
• Front power windows can be opened as the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is kept fully
turned to the UNLOCK position.
• Front power windows can be closed as the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is kept fully
turned to the LOCK position.
• While performing open/close operation for the windows, power window is stopped when the front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is placed in the NEUTRAL position.
• When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening operation is performed, the power
window opening stops.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001718616
Refer toLAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
GW-20
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718617
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1774E
Revision: August 2007
GW-21
2008 Quest
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718618
WIWA1775E
Revision: August 2007
GW-22
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1776E
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-23
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1777E
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Without Rear Power Vent Win-
Revision: August 2007
GW-24
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
dows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718619
A
B
C
LIIA2454E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
(Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718620
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Encoder power supply
Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates
10
L
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) lock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Locked)
5→0
7
R
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) unlock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Unlocked)
5→0
8
G/R
Front power window motor LH UP
signal
Front power window motor LH is
operated UP
Battery voltage
Front door window LH is between
fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON)
0
Front door window LH is between
just before fully-closed position
and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
Terminal
Wire Color
1
W/R
5
G/R
6
9
10
11
12
G/W
W/L
G/W
Y
Item
Limit switch signal
RAP signal
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 second after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 second after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
0
Front door LH or RH open or power window timer operates
0
Front power window motor LH
DOWN signal
Front power window motor LH is
operated DOWN
Battery voltage
Power window serial link
Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates
L
M
N
O
P
PIIA2344J
Revision: August 2007
GW-25
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
13
G/Y
Item
Encoder pulse signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front power window motor LH operates
OCC3383D
14
W/B
15
B
Limit switch and encoder ground
—
0
Ground
—
0
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718621
LIIA2454E
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/ Unlock Switch RH
(Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718622
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
3
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
—
0
4
G/R
Encoder power supply
Ignition switch ON or power window
timer operates
10
8
L
Front power window motor RH
UP signal
Front power window motor RH is operated UP
Battery voltage
9
G
Front power window motor RH
DOWN signal
Front power window motor RH is operated DOWN
Battery voltage
10
W/R
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
11
B
Ground
—
0
12
G/Y
Encoder pulse signal
Front power window motor RH operates
OCC3383D
Revision: August 2007
GW-26
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
15
16
Wire Color
G/W
Y/B
Item
Limit switch signal
Power window serial link
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window RH is between
fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON)
0
Front door window RH is between
just before fully-closed position and
fully-closed position (OFF)
5
A
B
C
D
Ignition switch ON or power window
timer operates
E
PIIA2344J
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718623
F
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-27
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718624
WIWA1778E
Revision: August 2007
GW-28
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718625
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1779E
Revision: August 2007
GW-29
2008 Quest
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1780E
Revision: August 2007
GW-30
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1781E
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-31
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1782E
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
Revision: August 2007
GW-32
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718626
A
B
C
LIIA2455E
D
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
(With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718627
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
Condition
Rear LH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
CLOSE
1
R/Y
Rear power vent window LH
CLOSE signal
2
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
3
R/B
Rear power vent window LH
OPEN signal
Rear LH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
OPEN
4
L
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) lock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Locked)
Rear power window vent
OPEN signal
Rear RH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
OPEN
—
5
L/Y
6
R
Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) unlock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Unlocked)
7
R
Rear power window RH
CLOSE signal
8
G/R
Front power window motor LH UP
signal
9
10
11
G/W
W/L
G/W
Revision: August 2007
Limit switch signal
RAP signal
Front power window motor LH
DOWN signal
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
E
F
G
0
H
Battery voltage
GW
5→0
J
Battery voltage
5→0
K
Rear RH switch in
main power window and door
lock/unlock switch is operated
CLOSE
Battery voltage
L
Front power window motor LH is
operated UP
Battery voltage
M
Front door window LH is between
fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON)
0
Front door window LH is between
just before fully-closed position
and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
N
O
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
Battery voltage
More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF
0
Front door LH or RH open or power window timer operates
0
Front power window motor LH is
operated DOWN
Battery voltage
GW-33
2008 Quest
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
13
G/Y
Item
Encoder pulse signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front power window motor LH operates
OCC3383D
14
Y
Power window serial link
Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates
PIIA2344J
15
G/R
17
B
19
W/R
Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates
10
Ground
—
0
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Encoder power supply
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718628
LIIA2454E
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
(With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718629
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
—
0
Encoder power supply
Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates
10
L
Front power window motor RH UP
signal
Front power window motor RH is
operated UP
Battery voltage
9
G
Front power window motor RH
DOWN signal
Front power window motor RH is
operated DOWN
Battery voltage
10
W/R
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
11
B
Ground
—
0
Terminal
Wire Color
3
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
4
G/R
8
Revision: August 2007
Item
GW-34
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
A
B
12
G/Y
Front power window motor RH
operates
Encoder pulse signal
C
OCC3383D
15
G/W
Limit switch signal
Front door window RH is between
fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON)
0
D
Front door window RH is between
just before fully-closed position
and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
E
F
16
Y/B
Power window serial link
Ignition switch is ON or power
window timer operating
G
PIIA2344J
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
H
INFOID:0000000001718630
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
GW
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INFOID:0000000001718631
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-17, "System Description".
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction.
Refer to GW-36, "Symptom Chart (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)" or GW-37, "Symptom Chart (With
Rear Power Vent Windows)".
Does power window system operate normally? Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718632
J
K
L
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
M
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Content
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
ACTIVE TEST
Revision: August 2007
GW-35
2008 Quest
N
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Test Item
RETAINED PWR
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM (body control module) to power window
system and power sunroof system (if equipped). Those systems can be operated when turning on
“RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-III screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-III can be operated with ignition switch in OFF position. “RETAINED
PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch is ON. Then
turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-III might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch is OFF.
WORK SUPPORT
Work item
RETAINED PWR
Description
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power
supply period between three steps
• MODE1 (45 sec.) / MODE2 (OFF) / MODE3 (2 min.).
DATA MONITOR
Work item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates (ON/OFF) condition of ignition switch
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates (ON/OFF) condition of front door switch driver side
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates (ON/OFF) condition of front door switch passenger side
Symptom Chart (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718633
• Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Symptom
None of the power windows can be operated using any switch
Front power window LH alone does not operate
Front power window RH alone does not operate
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front LH)
Revision: August 2007
Repair order
Refer to page
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
BCS-15
2. Main power window and door lock/unlock
supply and ground circuit check
GW-38
3. Power window serial link check
GW-60
1. Front power window motor LH circuit check
GW-42
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
EI-29
1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH power and ground circuit check
GW-40
2. Power window serial link check
GW-60
3. Front power window motor RH circuit check
GW-42
4. Replace BCM
BCS-18
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
• A foreign material adheres to window glass or
glass run rubber.
• Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
• Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
—
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-67
3. Limit switch circuit check LH
GW-43
4. Encoder circuit check LH
GW-50
GW-36
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Repair order
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
• A foreign material adheres to window glass or
glass run rubber.
• Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
• Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front RH)
Power window retained power operation does not operate properly
Front power windows do not operate by front door lock assembly
LH (key cylinder switch)
Power window lock switch does not function
Refer to page
A
—
B
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-67
3. Limit switch circuit check RH
GW-47
4. Encoder circuit check RH
GW-54
1. Check the retained power operation mode
setting.
GW-35
2. Door switch check
GW-56
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-18
1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check
GW-57
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
1. Power window lock switch circuit check
Symptom Chart (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
EI-29
C
D
E
F
GW-60
INFOID:0000000001718634
G
• Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
H
Symptom
Repair order
Refer to page
1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
BCS-15
2. Main power window and door lock/unlock
supply and ground circuit check
GW-39
3. Power window serial link check
GW-60
1. Front power window motor LH circuit check
GW-42
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
EI-29
1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH power and ground circuit check
GW-40
2. Power window serial link check
GW-62
3. Front power window motor RH circuit check
GW-42
4. Replace BCM
BCS-18
Rear power vent window LH alone does not operate
1. Rear power vent window motor LH circuit
check
GW-64
Rear power vent window RH alone does not operate
1. Rear power vent window motor RH circuit
check
GW-65
None of the power windows can be operated using any switch
Front power window LH alone does not operate
Front power window RH alone does not operate
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front LH)
Revision: August 2007
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
• A foreign material adheres to window glass or
glass run rubber.
• Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
• Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
J
K
L
M
N
—
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-67
3. Limit switch circuit check LH
GW-45
4. Encoder circuit check LH
GW-50
GW-37
GW
2008 Quest
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front RH)
Power window retained power operation does not operate properly
Front power windows do not operate by front door lock assembly
LH (key cylinder switch)
Power window lock switch does not function
Repair order
Refer to page
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
• A foreign material adheres to window glass or
glass run rubber.
• Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
• Sash is tilted too much, or not enough.
—
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-67
3. Limit switch circuit check RH
GW-47
4. Encoder circuit check RH
GW-54
1. Check the retained power operation mode
setting.
GW-35
2. Door switch check
GW-56
3. Replace BCM.
BCS-18
1.Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check
GW-59
2. Replace main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
1. Power window lock switch circuit check
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
EI-29
GW-62
INFOID:0000000001718635
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection
(Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718636
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 10 and ground.
10 - Ground
1 - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2312E
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground.
15 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0604E
3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-38
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
A
B
Connector
A
Terminal
68
BCM: M20
Connector
B
Main power window and
door lock/unlock switch:
D7
69
Terminal
Continuity
10
Yes
1
Yes
C
LIIA2363E
3.
Check continuity between BCM and ground.
Connector
A
Terminal
BCM: M20
68
D
Continuity
Ground
E
No
69
No
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69
and ground.
H
GW
68 - Ground
69 - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
J
LIIA0917E
Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection
(With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718637
K
L
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 10, D8 terminal 19 and
ground.
10 - Ground
19 - Ground
N
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
LIIA2297E
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-39
2008 Quest
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
3. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground.
17 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0392E
3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
Check continuity between BCM connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connectors.
Connector
A
Connector
Terminal
B
Main power window and
door lock/unlock switch:
D7
68
Terminal
Continuity
10
Yes
LIIA2215E
BCM: M20
C
Main power window and
door lock/unlock switch:
D8
69
3.
19
Yes
Check continuity between BCM and ground.
Connector
A
Terminal
BCM: M20
68
Continuity
Ground
69
No
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69
and ground.
68 - Ground
69 - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
LIIA0917E
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718638
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-40
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 10 and ground.
10 - Ground
A
: Battery voltage
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
LIIA1257E
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
11 - Ground
E
F
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
LIIA1258E
3.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
Check continuity between BCM connector and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH connectors.
Connector
A
BCM: M20
B
Power window and door
lock/unlock switch RH:
D105
69
GW
J
Connector
Terminal
H
Terminal
Continuity
10
Yes
K
LIIA2364E
3.
Check continuity between BCM and ground.
Connector
A
Terminal
BCM: M20
Ground
69
L
Continuity
M
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
O
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and
ground.
69 - Ground
P
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
WIIA0508E
Revision: August 2007
GW-41
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718639
1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
8
D7
Ground
11
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
0
Closing
0
Opening
Battery voltage
LIIA0317E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and front power window motor LH connector D9 terminals 1, 2.
8-2
11 - 1
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Front Power Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection
LIIA1260E
INFOID:0000000001718641
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
8
D105
Ground
9
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
0
Closing
0
Opening
Battery voltage
LIIA1261E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-42
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH.
3. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH (A) connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and front power
window motor RH (B) connector D104 terminals 1, 2.
8-2
9-1
A
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2296E
D
Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
E
INFOID:0000000001718642
1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground.
Connector
D7
Terminals
(+)
9
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
(-)
Ground
G
H
GW
LIIA0339E
Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position (OFF)
J
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
O
LIIA0923E
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
P
GW-43
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
2. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector.
Connector
A
Connector
Terminal
Main power window
and door lock/unlock
switch: D7
B
Terminal
Continuity
6
Yes
Front power window motor LH: D9
14
LIIA2276E
3.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
B
Continuity
Ground
Front power window motor
LH: D9
6
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector.
Connector
A
Main power window
and door lock/unlock
switch: D7
2.
Connector
Terminal
9
B
Terminal
Continuity
5
Yes
Front power
window motor
LH: D9
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor
LH: D9
Terminal
LIIA2277E
Continuity
Ground
5
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Main power window door
lock/unlock switch: D7
14
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
LIIA2278E
Revision: August 2007
GW-44
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground.
15 - Ground
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
LIIA0604E
7.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
E
Connect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector.
Connector
Main power window
and door
lock/unlock
switch: D7
Terminals
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
(-)
9
14
F
G
H
LIIA2279E
GW
Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation" .
Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
K
INFOID:0000000001718643
1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground.
Connector
D7
Terminals
(+)
9
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
(-)
Ground
M
N
O
LIIA0339E
Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position (OFF)
P
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-45
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front power window motor LH.
3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LIIA0923E
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector.
Connector
A
Connector
Terminal
Main power window
and door lock/unlock
switch: D7
B
Terminal
Continuity
6
Yes
Front power window motor LH: D9
2
LIIA2222E
3.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
B
Continuity
Ground
Front power window motor
LH: D9
6
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector.
Connector
A
Main power window
and door lock/unlock
switch: D7
2.
Connector
Terminal
9
B
Terminal
Continuity
5
Yes
Front power
window motor
LH: D9
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor
LH: D9
Terminal
LIIA2277E
Continuity
Ground
5
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: August 2007
GW-46
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND
A
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector and ground.
B
Connector
Terminal
Main power window door
lock/unlock switch: D7
2
Continuity
Ground
Yes
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
D
LIIA2224E
6.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
E
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground.
17 - Ground
F
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
H
LIIA1253E
7.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
GW
Connect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector.
Connector
Main power window
and door
lock/unlock
switch: D7
Terminals
(+)
9
(-)
2
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
J
K
LIIA2225E
M
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation" .
Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front RH
O
INFOID:0000000001718645
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH LIMIT SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
GW-47
L
P
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between power window motor RH connector
D105 terminal 15 and ground.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
D105
15
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window RH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
(-)
Ground
LIIA1263E
Front door window RH is between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LIIA0923E
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector and front power window motor RH connector.
Connector
A
Power window and
door lock/unlock
switch RH: D105
Connector
Terminal
3
B
Terminal
Continuity
6
Yes
Front power window motor RH:
D104
LIIA2285E
3.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor
RH: D104
Terminal
Continuity
Ground
6
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
GW-48
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector and front power window motor RH connector.
Connector
A
Power window and
door lock/unlock
switch RH: D105
2.
Connector
Terminal
B
Terminal
Continuity
5
Yes
Front power
window motor
RH: D104
15
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor
RH: D104
Terminal
A
B
C
LIIA2286E
D
Continuity
E
Ground
5
No
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
5.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector and ground.
Connector
Power window door lock/
unlock switch RH: D105
Terminal
3
H
Continuity
Ground
GW
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
J
LIIA2283E
6.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH GROUND CIRCUIT
K
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
11 - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
N
LIIA1258E
7.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH LIMIT SIGNAL
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-49
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Connect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH and
front power window motor RH.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
Power window and
door lock/
unlock
switch RH:
D105
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door window RH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position
(ON)
0
Front door window RH is between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position (OFF)
5
(-)
15
3
LIIA2284E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation".
Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718646
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector
D9 terminal 4 and ground.
4 - Ground
: Approx. 10V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA2299E
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
Connector
A
Main power window
and door lock/unlock
switch: D7
4.
Terminal
5
Connector
B
Terminal
Continuity
4
Yes
Front power window motor LH:
D9
LIIA2287E
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor LH: D9
Terminal
4
Ground
Continuity
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
GW-50
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK ENCODER GROUND
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
D
LIIA0923E
4.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
E
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 14.
6 - 14
F
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
LIIA1158E
5.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
GW
Connect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector and ground with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Condition
J
K
Signal
L
LIIA0364E
D7
13
Ground
Opening
M
OCC3383D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 6.
N
O
6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-51
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
Connector
Terminal
A
Main power window and door lock/
unlock switch: D7
4.
Connector
B
Terminal
Continuity
3
Yes
Front power window motor LH: D9
13
LIIA2210E
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
B
Continuity
Ground
Front power window motor LH:
D9
3
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718647
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector
D9 terminal 4 and ground.
4 - Ground
: Approx. 10V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA2299E
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
Connector
A
Main power window
and door lock/unlock
switch: D7
4.
Terminal
15
Connector
B
Terminal
Continuity
4
Yes
Front power window motor LH:
D9
LIIA2289E
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor LH: D9
Revision: August 2007
Terminal
4
Ground
Continuity
No
GW-52
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
A
3.CHECK ENCODER GROUND
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
E
LIIA0923E
4.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
F
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 2.
6-2
G
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
GW
WIIA0511E
5.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
J
Connect front power window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector and ground with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Condition
K
L
Signal
M
LIIA0364E
D7
13
Ground
Opening
N
OCC3383D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-53
2008 Quest
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
Connector
Terminal
A
Main power window and door lock/
unlock switch: D7
4.
Connector
B
Terminal
Continuity
3
Yes
Front power window motor LH: D9
13
LIIA2210E
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
B
Continuity
Ground
Front power window motor LH:
D9
3
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Encoder Circuit Inspection Front RH
INFOID:0000000001718649
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor RH connector
D104 terminal 4 and ground.
4 - Ground
: Approx. 10V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA2290E
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector.
Connector
A
Power window and
door lock/unlock
switch RH: D105
4.
Terminal
4
Connector
B
Terminal
Continuity
4
Yes
Front power window motor RH:
D104
LIIA2294E
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
B
Front power window motor RH:
D104
Revision: August 2007
Terminal
Continuity
Ground
4
No
GW-54
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
A
3.CHECK ENCODER GROUND
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground.
6 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
E
LIIA0923E
4.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
F
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 3.
6-3
G
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
GW
LIIA1264E
5.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
J
Connect front power window motor RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the signal between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector and ground with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Condition
K
L
Signal
M
LIIA1267E
D105
12
Ground
Opening
N
OCC3383D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-55
2008 Quest
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window
and door lock/unlock switch RH.
3. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector.
Connector
A
Power window and
door lock/unlock
switch RH: D105
4.
Connector
Terminal
B
Terminal
Continuity
3
Yes
Front power window motor RH:
D104
12
LIIA2295E
Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal
B
Continuity
Ground
Front power window motor
RH: D104
3
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Door Switch Check
INFOID:0000000001718650
1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check front door switches (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Monitor item
Condition
OPEN: ON
DOOR SW-DR
CLOSE: OFF
OPEN: ON
DOOR SW-AS
CLOSE: OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
Item
Connector
Front RH
M18
Terminals
(+)
(-)
12
Ground
Front LH
M19
47
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
OPEN
0
CLOSE
Battery voltage
OPEN
0
CLOSE
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WIIA0515E
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-56
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door switch LH or RH and BCM.
3. Check continuity between front door switch LH or RH and BCM.
Connector
A
4.
Connector
Terminal
B
Terminal
Continuity
BCM: M18
12
Front door switch
RH: B108
1
Yes
BCM: M19
47
Front door switch
LH: B8
1
Yes
A
B
C
WIIA1126E
D
Check continuity between front door switch LH or RH and
ground.
E
Connector
Terminal
A
Front door switch LH:
B8
1
Front door switch RH:
B108
1
Continuity
Ground
F
No
No
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check continuity between each front door switch terminal 1 and
body ground part of front door switch.
Terminal
1
Body ground part
of front door
switch
Door switch
GW
Continuity
Pushed
No
Released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom
chart.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning front door switch.
J
K
WIIA0782E
L
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Without Rear Power Vent
Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718651
M
With CONSULT-III
• Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL LK-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
N
1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
O
“KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in
door key cylinder is turned to lock.
• Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
“KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in
door key cylinder is turned to unlock.
Without CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
GW-57
2008 Quest
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector and ground.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
(-)
7
D7
Ground
6
Key position
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Unlock
5
Unlock
0
Neutral/Lock
5
Lock
0
LIIA1161E
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6.
7-6
6-1
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1602E
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1572E
4.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5.
Terminals
6
5
1
Key position
Continuity
Neutral/Lock
No
Unlock
Yes
Neutral/Unlock
No
Lock
Yes
OK or NG
LIIA1573E
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom
chart.
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
GW-58
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With Rear Power Vent
Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718652
1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
A
B
With CONSULT-III
• Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL LK-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
C
“KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in
door key cylinder is turned to lock.
D
• Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
E
“KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in
door key cylinder is turned to unlock.
F
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
6
D7
Ground
4
Key position
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral/Lock
5
Lock
0
Neutral/Unlock
5
Unlock
0
G
H
GW
LIIA1269E
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6.
6-6
4-1
L
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
LIIA1571E
O
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-59
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1572E
4.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5.
Terminals
6
5
1
Key position
Continuity
Neutral/Lock
No
Unlock
Yes
Neutral/Unlock
No
Lock
Yes
OK or NG
LIIA1573E
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom
chart.
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation".
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718653
1.CHECK BUS OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door lock and unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”, “UNLK SW DR/AS”) in DATA MONITOR mode for
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item".
• When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK
LOCK SW DR/AS
: ON
• When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK
UNLK SW DR/AS
: ON
Without CONSULT-III
Remove key from ignition switch, and close front door LH and
RH.
2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with
oscilloscope when door lock and unlock switch (front LH and
front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be
detected during 10 seconds just after door lock and unlock
switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or
“UNLOCK”.
1.
LIIA0391E
Revision: August 2007
GW-60
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
A
Terminals
(+)
Signal
(-)
B
M18
22
Ground
C
PIIA1297E
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
2.CHECK BCM BUS SIGNAL
Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "MULTI REMOTE
ENT" with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item".
When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, is the front power window LH and RH lowered?
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND
1.
2.
3.
G
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground.
15 - Ground
F
GW
J
: Continuity should exist.
K
LIIA0604E
4.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
11 - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
LIIA1270E
4.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-61
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect BCM.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and
main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7
terminal 12.
22 - 12
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA0649E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105
terminal 16.
22 - 16
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1271E
Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718654
1.CHECK BUS SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door lock and unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”, “UNLK SW DR/AS”) in DATA MONITOR mode for
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item".
• When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK
LOCK SW DR/AS
: ON
• When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK
UNLK SW DR/AS
: ON
Without CONSULT-III
Remove key from ignition switch, and close front door LH and
RH.
2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with
oscilloscope when door lock and unlock switch (front LH and
front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be
detected during 10 seconds just after door lock and unlock
switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or
“UNLOCK”.
1.
LIIA0391E
Revision: August 2007
GW-62
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
A
Terminals
(+)
Signal
(-)
B
M18
22
Ground
C
PIIA1297E
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
2.CHECK BCM BUS OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "MULTI REMOTE
ENT" with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item".
When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, is the front power window LH and RH lowered?
OK or NG
OK
>> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND
1.
2.
3.
G
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground.
17 - Ground
F
GW
J
: Continuity should exist.
K
LIIA0392E
4.
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground.
11 - Ground
L
: Continuity should exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
LIIA1270E
4.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-63
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect BCM.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and
main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7
terminal 14.
22 - 14
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA0394E
3.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105
terminal 16.
22 - 16
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1271E
Rear Power Vent Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718655
1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power vent window motor LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power vent window motor LH connector B52 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Connector
Rear power
vent window
motor LH:
B52
Terminals
(+)
(-)
1
Ground
2
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
0
Closing
0
Opening
Battery voltage
LIIA2273E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power vent window motor LH. Refer to GW-73, "Removal and Installation (with Rear
Power Vent Windows)".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR POWER VENT WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 1, 3 and rear power
vent window motor LH (B) connector B52 terminals 1, 2.
3-2
1-1
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: August 2007
LIIA2274E
GW-64
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position.
Connect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 3 and connector D8 terminal 17.
1 - 17
3 - 17
B
C
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
Rear Power Vent Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection
D
LIIA0623E
E
INFOID:0000000001718656
1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power vent window motor RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power vent window motor RH connector B147 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
G
H
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Rear power
vent window
motor RH:
B147
(-)
1
Ground
2
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
0
Closing
0
Opening
Battery voltage
GW
LIIA2273E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear power vent window motor RH. Refer to GW-73, "Removal and Installation (with Rear
Power Vent Windows)".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK REAR POWER VENT WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 5, 7 and rear power
vent window motor RH connector (B) B147 terminals 1, 2.
5-2
7-1
N
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2275E
3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
GW-65
P
2008 Quest
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position.
2. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/
unlock switch connector D7 terminals 5, 7 and connector D8 terminal 17.
5 - 17
7 - 17
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
GW-66
LIIA0331E
2008 Quest
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718657
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WIIA0793E
1.
Door glass run
2.
Door glass regulator nuts
3.
GW
Regulator motor
FRONT DOOR GLASS
J
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt.
Connect the battery negative cable.
Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness.
Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be
seen.
Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Remove the inside seal.
Remove the door glass bolts.
While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the
glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door.
K
L
M
N
O
P
LIIA1687E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Revision: August 2007
GW-67
2008 Quest
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt.
Connect the battery negative cable.
Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness.
Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be
seen.
Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Remove the door glass bolts.
Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in
place with a suitable tool (A).
WIIA0767E
9. Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly.
10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body
grease.
LIIA0670E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER
INSTALLATION".
Door glass bolts
: 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Disassembly
1.
2.
Remove the regulator motor bolts.
Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
Revision: August 2007
GW-68
2008 Quest
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator nuts, guide
rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
A
Setting of Limit Switch
B
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
• Removal and installation of the regulator.
• Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator.
• Removal and installation of the door glass.
• Removal and installation of the door glass run.
C
Resetting
After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door
glass to the bottom position.
D
E
F
G
SIIA0347E
H
Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the
door glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
GW
Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position.
3.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-69
2008 Quest
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718658
LIIA0673E
REMOVAL
1. Apply protective tape around the slide door glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
2. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• When a slide door glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by
passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured
(preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air.
Revision: August 2007
GW-70
2008 Quest
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of
the slide door glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower
temperature and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Slide Door Glass
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the glass area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-71
2008 Quest
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation (without Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718659
WBIA0751E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31.
Remove the rear side window latch bolts.
Disconnect the antenna.
Remove the side window front bolts and glass.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of the opening. Tighten side
window front bolts to the specified torque.
Install rear side window latch bolts.
Connect the antenna.
Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31.
Revision: August 2007
GW-72
2008 Quest
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows)
INFOID:0000000001718660
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0751E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GW
Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31.
Disconnect the antenna.
Disconnect the rear side window motor harness.
Remove the rear side window motor bolts.
Remove the side window front bolts and glass.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
J
K
L
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of the opening. Tighten side
window front bolts to the specified torque.
Install rear side window motor bolts.
Connect the rear side window motor harness.
Connect the antenna.
Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-73
2008 Quest
INSIDE MIRROR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSIDE MIRROR
Wiring Diagram - I/MIRR -
INFOID:0000000001718661
WIWA1783E
Revision: August 2007
GW-74
2008 Quest
INSIDE MIRROR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718662
A
B
C
D
E
LIIA0277E
1.
Inside mirror
2.
F
Inside mirror finisher
REMOVAL
G
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
Remove inside mirror finisher.
Remove inside mirror screw.
Slide the mirror upward to remove.
Disconnect the connector.
GW
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-75
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718663
LIIA2456E
1.
A. Hood opener
B. Rear window defogger relay B4
2.
IPDM E/R E119, E121, E124
3.
A. A-pillar LH
B. BCM M18, M19 (view with instrument panel removed)
4.
Door mirror LH (door mirror defogger) D13
Door mirror RH (door mirror defogger) D113
5.
Rear window defogger D504 (view of 6.
back door LH with back door upper
finishers removed)
Rear window defogger ground connector D515 (view of back door RH
with back door upper finishers removed)
7.
Front air control M49, M50 (with au- 8.
tomatic air conditioner)
Front air control M49, M50 (with
manual air conditioner)
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718664
The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM (body control module) and IPDM E/R (intelligent
power distribution module engine room).
The rear window defogger operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 20A fuses (No. 32 and 37, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 6
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch turned to ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to rear window defogger relay terminal 1
• through 10A fuse [No.16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38
• through 10A fuse [No. 2, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Revision: August 2007
GW-76
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to front air control terminal 15.
Ground is supplied
A
• to BCM terminal 67
• to front air control terminal 36
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79
B
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
When front air control (rear window defogger switch) is turned to ON, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 9
C
• through front air control terminal 16
• through front air control terminal 36
• through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
D
Then rear window defogger switch is illuminated.
Then BCM recognizes that rear window defogger switch is turned to ON.
Then it sends rear window defogger switch signals to IPDM E/R and display control unit (with color display) via
E
CAN communication (CAN-H, CAN-L).
When IPDM E/R receives rear window defogger switch signals, ground is supplied
• to rear window defogger relay terminal 2
• through IPDM E/R terminal 52
F
• through IPDM E/R terminal 60
• through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Then rear window defogger relay is energized.
G
With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When rear window defogger relay is turned to ON (with door mirror defogger), power is supplied
• through rear window defogger relay terminal 5
• through fuse block (J/B) terminal 2Q
H
• through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• through fuse block (J/B) terminal 5N
• to door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 6.
GW
Door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 5 is grounded through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
With power and ground supplied, door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog the mirror.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001718665
J
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-77
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718666
WIWA1784E
Revision: August 2007
GW-78
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - DEF -
INFOID:0000000001718667
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0136GB
Revision: August 2007
GW-79
2008 Quest
P
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1786E
Revision: August 2007
GW-80
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1787E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
P
INFOID:0000000001718668
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001718669
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
GW-81
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INFOID:0000000001718670
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-76, "System Description".
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-82,
"Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart".
Does rear window defogger operate normally? YES: GO TO 5, NO: GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718671
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Content
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Monitor item “Operation”
Content
REAR DEF SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “Press (ON)/others (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger
switch.
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “IGN (ON)/OFF” status determined with the ignition switch signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Display Item List
Test item
Content
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Gives a drive signal to the rear window defogger to activate it.
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001718672
• Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Symptom
1.
Rear window defogger and door mirror defoggers do not
operate. (With door mirror defogger)
Revision: August 2007
Diagnoses/Service procedure
Refer to page
BCM power supply and ground circuit check
BCS-15
2. IPDM E/R auto active test check
PG-20
3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check
GW-83
4. Rear window defogger power supply circuit check
GW-84
5. Replace IPDM E/R
PG-28
GW-82
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
1.
Diagnoses/Service procedure
Refer to page
BCM power supply and ground circuit check
BCS-15
2. IPDM E/R auto active test check
PG-20
3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check
GW-83
4. Rear window defogger power supply circuit check
GW-84
5. Rear window defogger circuit check
GW-85
6. Filament check
GW-90
7. Replace IPDM E/R
PG-28
1. Rear window defogger circuit check
GW-85
2. Filament check
GW-90
Both door mirror defoggers do not operate but rear window
defogger operates. (With door mirror defogger)
1. Door mirror defogger power supply circuit check
GW-86
Door mirror LH defogger does not operate.
1. Door mirror LH defogger circuit check
GW-88
Door mirror RH defogger does not operate.
1. Door mirror RH defogger circuit check
GW-89
Rear window defogger does not operate.
(Without door mirror defogger)
Rear window defogger does not operate but both door mirror defoggers operate. (With door mirror defogger)
Rear window defogger switch does not light, and rear window defogger is not displayed on the color display (if
equipped), but rear window defogger operates.
A
B
C
D
E
F
1. Rear window defogger signal check
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
GW-89
G
INFOID:0000000001718673
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection
H
INFOID:0000000001718674
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION
GW
With CONSULT-III
Check (“REAR DEF SW”, “IGN ON SW”) in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT-III.
J
When rear window defogger switch is turned to ON
REAR DEF SW: ON
When ignition switch is turned to ON
IGN ON SW: ON
K
L
Without CONSULT-III
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector ground.
M
Connector
M18
Terminals
(+)
9
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch is pressed.
0
Rear window defogger
switch is OFF.
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear window defogger switch check is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
N
O
LIIA0402E
P
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
GW-83
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM and front air control.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 (A) terminal 9
and front air control connector M49 (B) terminal 16.
9 - 16
4.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and
ground
9 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA2459E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and
ground.
9 - Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
LIIA0402E
Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718675
1.CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses in fuse block (J/B) and IPDM E/R are blown.
COMPONENT PARTS
TERMINAL NO. (SIGNAL)
AMPERE
FUSE NO.
Fuse block (J/B)
2T (Ignition power supply)
10A
12
5 (Battery power supply)
20A
32
6 (Battery power supply)
20A
37
IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse, refer to PG3.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector
and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
1
B4
3
PIIA4233E
6
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: August 2007
GW-84
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
A
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals 3
and 5, 6 and 7.
Terminals
6
7
3
5
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
B
C
D
SEC202B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
E
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
3.
Install rear window defogger relay.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 52
and ground.
Connector
E121
Terminals
(+)
52
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
When rear window defogger switch ON
0
When rear window defogger switch OFF
Battery
voltage
G
H
GW
LIIA2315E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear window defogger power supply circuit check is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
K
5.CHECK IPDM E/R HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 (A) terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay connector B4 (B) terminal 2.
52 - 2
L
M
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection
N
LIIA2316E
O
INFOID:0000000001718676
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
GW-85
P
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear window defogger.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector D504
terminal + and ground.
Terminals
Connector
(+)
D504
+
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch ON.
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF.
0
LIIA0655E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear window defogger connector
D515 terminal - and ground.
- - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>>
NG
Check filament. Refer to GW-90, "Filament Check".
• If filament is OK.
Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
• If filament is NG.
Repair filament.
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0409E
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector
B4 terminal 5 and rear window defogger connector D504 terminal +.
5-+
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0656E
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718677
1.CHECK FUSE
Check if the following fuse in fuse block (J/B) is blown.
COMPONENT PARTS
TERMINAL NO. (SIGNAL)
AMPERE
FUSE NO.
Fuse block (J/B)
5N (Battery power supply)
10A
8
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1
Revision: August 2007
GW-86
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground.
Connector
E30
Terminals
(+)
2Q
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
(-)
Ground
A
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0411E
D
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
E
Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground.
Connector
M3
Terminals
(+)
5N
(-)
Ground
F
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
G
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
LIIA0412E
GW
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) and door mirror LH or RH.
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) connector M3 terminal 5N and door mirror connector D13 (LH) or D113 (RH) terminal 6.
5N - 6
J
K
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
LIIA0657E
5.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
M
Check continuity between each door mirror connector D13 (LH) or
D113 (RH) terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
N
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
P
LIIA0658E
6.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Revision: August 2007
GW-87
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 5 and 6.
6-5
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to
GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly".
LIIA2457E
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718678
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror LH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Connector
D13
Terminals
(+)
6
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(-)
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
LIIA2212E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D13 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0658E
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check continuity between door mirror LH terminals 5 and 6.
6-5
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror
Assembly".
LIIA2457E
Revision: August 2007
GW-88
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718679
A
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror RH.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
B
C
Connector
D113
Terminals
(+)
6
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger
switch ON
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
0
(-)
Ground
D
LIIA2212E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
F
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D113 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
H
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
GW
LIIA0658E
J
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check continuity between each door mirror RH connector D113 terminals 5 and 6.
6-5
K
: Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror
Assembly".
M
LIIA2457E
Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718680
1.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LINE
O
AV communication line check is executed. Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color
Display)".
Is rear window defogger displayed on the display?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Revision: August 2007
N
GW-89
2008 Quest
P
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN communication line check is executed. Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color
Display)".
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> In addition, it is necessary to check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)".
Filament Check
1.
INFOID:0000000001718681
When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.
SEL122R
2.
Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
SEL263
3.
4.
If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery
voltage.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
SEL265
Revision: August 2007
GW-90
2008 Quest
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Filament Repair
INFOID:0000000001718682
A
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent)
Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
Drawing pen
Heat gun
Alcohol
Cloth
B
C
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
D
Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
E
F
PIIA0215E
4.
After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
G
H
GW
J
SEL012D
K
5.
Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area
for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
L
M
N
SEL013D
O
P
Revision: August 2007
GW-91
2008 Quest
DOOR MIRROR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DOOR MIRROR
Automatic Drive Positioner Reverse Tilt Mirror
INFOID:0000000001718683
Automatic drive positioner reverse tilt mirror. Refer to SE-11.
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR -
INFOID:0000000001718684
WIWA1788E
Revision: August 2007
GW-92
2008 Quest
DOOR MIRROR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Door Mirror Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718685
A
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
B
C
D
E
F
WIIA0790E
G
1.
Door mirror bolts
2.
Door mirror assembly
3.
Door mirror connectors
Removal
H
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the door mirror assembly.
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to EI-29.
2. Disconnect the door mirror connectors.
3. Remove the door mirror bolts and the door mirror assembly.
GW
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
Door Mirror Glass
INFOID:0000000001718686
K
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
L
Set mirror assembly mirror glass upward.
Apply tape to protect mirror housing.
Insert a screwdriver as shown and remove mirror glass by pushing up two hooks.
M
N
O
WIIA0160E
4.
Disconnect electrical connectors from mirror holder.
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
GW-93
2008 Quest
P
DOOR MIRROR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Set mirror holder bracket (1) and mirror glass (2) in the horizontal position.
2. Connect electrical connectors to the back of the mirror holder.
3. Heat lower hooks with a heat gun to prevent breaking the hooks.
4. Align upper hooks to bracket.
5. Align lower hooks to bracket and push lower part of mirror glass
(2) down into holder bracket (1) until you hear a click. Ensure
that mirror glass is secure in door mirror assembly.
WIIA0792E
Revision: August 2007
GW-94
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
IP
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ................. 10
Instrument Panel .....................................................10
Cluster Lid A ............................................................11
Combination Meter ..................................................12
Instrument Lower Panel LH .....................................12
Steering Column Cover ...........................................12
Cluster Lid C ............................................................13
Cluster Lid D ............................................................13
Center Stack Trim Panel .........................................13
Glove Box ................................................................14
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ....................................................................... 4
F
G
H
IP
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY .................... 16
Work Flow ................................................................. 4
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
Component ..............................................................16
Removal ..................................................................17
Disassembly ............................................................17
Assembly .................................................................19
Installation ...............................................................19
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
IP-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718737
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
IP-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718738
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
B
Description
C
Locating the noise
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
D
E
F
SBT839
Repairing the cause of noise
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit
G
H
IP
J
SBT840
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718739
K
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
L
Locating the noise
M
N
SIIA0995E
Power Tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
O
P
PBIC0191E
Revision: August 2007
IP-3
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000001718740
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
- Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
- Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
- Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
- Knock — (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
- Tick — (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
- Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
- Buzz — (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: August 2007
IP-4
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1. Close a door.
2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3. Rev the engine.
4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
E
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool F
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565, and mechanics stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
G
• Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners
can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
H
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
• Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing
IP
the noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25
mm (0.59 x 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50
mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
Revision: August 2007
IP-5
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
INFOID:0000000001718741
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: August 2007
IP-6
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
B
C
D
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
E
F
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the G
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
H
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- IP
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
IP-7
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000001718742
LAIA0072E
Revision: August 2007
IP-8
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
N
O
LAIA0071E
P
Revision: August 2007
IP-9
2008 Quest
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Instrument Panel
INFOID:0000000001718743
COMPONENTS
LIIA2487E
1.
Steering member assembly
2.
Defrost grille
3.
Speaker cover LH
4.
Meter cover
5.
Instrument panel
6.
Combination meter
Revision: August 2007
IP-10
2008 Quest
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Cluster lid A
10. Instrument lower panel LH
8.
LH vent grille
9.
Instrument panel side finisher LH
11.
Storage bin
12.
Steering column upper cover
13. Steering column lower cover
14.
Ignition switch bezel
15.
Knee protector
16. Instrument panel side cover LH
17.
Instrument panel side cover RH
18.
Center stack trim panel
19. Center lower trim
20.
DVD door
21.
DVD deck
22. Audio unit
23.
Cluster lid C
24.
AV switch
25. Assistant under cover panel
26.
Glove box assembly
27.
Front air control
28. RH vent grille
29.
Instrument panel side finisher RH
30.
Display unit
31. Cluster lid D
32.
Speaker cover RH
A
B
C
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D
Disconnect the battery negative and positive terminals.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C".
Remove steering column. Refer to PS-9.
Remove combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
Remove display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect center speaker.
Disconnect GPS antenna.
Remove defrost grille.
Remove front pillar finishers LH and RH.
Remove front speakers. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation".
Remove instrument panel assembly.
E
F
G
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
IP
Cluster Lid A
INFOID:0000000001718744
REMOVAL
1.
J
Remove instrument panel side finisher.
K
L
M
LIIA2484E
2.
Remove screw (1) and LH vent grille.
N
O
P
LIIA2485E
3.
4.
Remove upper and lower steering column covers.
Pull to release clips and remove cluster lid A.
Revision: August 2007
IP-11
2008 Quest
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000001718745
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect battery negative terminal.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-11, "Cluster Lid A".
Remove the combination meter, using power tool.
Disconnect combination meter electrical connectors.
LIIA2486E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Instrument Lower Panel LH
INFOID:0000000001718746
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect battery negative terminal.
Remove the ignition switch bezel (1), screws (A), and instrument
lower panel LH (2).
LIIA2479E
3.
Disconnect harness connectors.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Steering Column Cover
INFOID:0000000001718747
REMOVAL
1.
Remove tilt lever knob from tilt lever by inserting a suitable tool
into slot of tilt knob, then depress tab and withdraw tilt lever
knob.
WGIA0061E
Revision: August 2007
IP-12
2008 Quest
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the screws and the steering column upper and lower covers.
A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Cluster Lid C
INFOID:0000000001718748
B
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
To prevent damage, place shop cloths onto surrounding parts.
1. Disconnect battery negative and positive terminals.
2. Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
3. Remove selector knob. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and Installation".
4. Pull up to release cluster lid C clips.
5. Disconnect harness connectors and remove cluster lid C.
C
D
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
Cluster Lid D
INFOID:0000000001718749
REMOVAL
1.
G
Pull up to release clips and remove cluster lid D.
H
IP
J
LIIA2488E
INSTALLATION
K
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Center Stack Trim Panel
INFOID:0000000001718750
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Remove glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the screws (A) and center lower trim (1).
M
N
O
P
LIIA2480E
Revision: August 2007
IP-13
2008 Quest
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove center stack lower trim RH and LH.
LIIA2481E
5.
Remove lower screws using power tool.
LIIA2482E
6.
7.
Pull to release clips and remove center stack trim panel.
Disconnect both power point electrical connectors.
LIIA2483E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glove Box
INFOID:0000000001718751
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
To prevent damage, place shop cloths onto surrounding parts.
1. Place the door weatherstrip by the glove box aside.
Revision: August 2007
IP-14
2008 Quest
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove glove box screws using power tool.
3. Carefully remove the clips by prying loose.
4. Disconnect glove box lamp harness.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage, do not let the glove box hang from
glove box lamp harness.
A
B
C
LIIA2478E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
IP-15
2008 Quest
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Component
INFOID:0000000001718752
LIIA2468E
1.
Cup holder
2.
Top cover assembly
3.
RH console side trim panel
4.
Clip
5.
RH case
6.
Front bin latch assembly
7.
Front bin assembly
8.
Front bin latch handle
9.
Console mat
10. LH case
11. LH console side trim panel
13. Storage bin door assembly
14. Rear console trim cover
Revision: August 2007
IP-16
12. Storage bin insert
2008 Quest
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal
INFOID:0000000001718753
A
1.
Remove storage bin insert (1) and console mat (2).
B
C
D
E
F
G
LIIA2470E
2.
H
Remove top cover assembly.
IP
J
K
LIIA2471E
3.
L
Open the front bin (1), remove the bolts (A), and center console
(2).
M
N
LIIA2473E
Disassembly
1.
INFOID:0000000001718754
P
Remove center console. Refer to IP-17, "Removal".
Revision: August 2007
O
IP-17
2008 Quest
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove front bin assembly.
LIIA2472E
3.
Remove rear console trim cover.
LIIA2474E
4.
Remove RH and LH console side trim panels.
LIIA2475E
5.
Remove storage bin door assembly.
LIIA2476E
6.
Remove screws and split RH from LH case.
LIIA2477E
Revision: August 2007
IP-18
2008 Quest
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718755
A
INFOID:0000000001718756
B
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
C
D
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
IP-19
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
LAN
LAN SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
CAN FUNDAMENTAL
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 2
Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................... 3
CAN Communication System .................................... 3
Diag on CAN ............................................................. 4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 6
Condition of Error Detection ...................................... 6
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System ............................................................ 6
Self-Diagnosis ........................................................... 9
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor .............................. 9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW ............12
Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis ............. 12
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart ...... 12
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart ................................. 13
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 13
CAN
SERVICE INFORMATION ........................... 35
INDEX FOR DTC ................................................35
DTC No. Index ........................................................ 35
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ...........................36
Caution .................................................................... 36
Abbreviation List ...................................................... 36
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................37
Revision: August 2007
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................37
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ............................37
Precaution for Harness Repair ................................37
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 38
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor .............................38
CAN System Specification Chart .............................41
CAN Communication Signal Chart ..........................42
Schematic ................................................................47
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ...........................................48
Interview Sheet ........................................................51
Data Sheet ...............................................................51
CAN System (Type 1) ..............................................53
CAN System (Type 2) ..............................................54
CAN System (Type 3) ..............................................55
Component Parts Location ......................................56
Harness Layout .......................................................56
Malfunction Area Chart ............................................56
Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector
....57
ECM Branch Line Circuit .........................................58
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
Branch Line Circuit ..................................................58
TCM Branch Line Circuit .........................................59
Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit ...........59
BCM Branch Line Circuit .........................................60
Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit .................61
Display Unit Branch Line Circuit ..............................61
Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit ................62
Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit .......................62
Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit ...................63
Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit .............64
IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit .................................64
CAN Communication Circuit ....................................65
LAN-1
2008 Quest
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000003032415
CAUTION:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
Precaution for Harness Repair
INFOID:0000000003032416
• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
SKIB8766E
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.
SKIB8767E
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-2
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
CAN Communication System
INFOID:0000000003032417
• CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive
large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two communication lines (CAN-H and
CAN-L).
• Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit. They
receive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions.
• CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
SKIB8887E
Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN communication
signal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L. CAN
communication system transmits and receives CAN communication signals by the potential difference.
Component
L
Description
Main line
CAN communication line between splices
Branch line
CAN communication line between splice and a control unit
Splice
A point connecting a branch line with a main line
Termination circuit
Refer to "CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-3
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT
SKIB8713E
Component
System description
CAN controller
It controls CAN communication signal transmission and reception, error detection, etc.
Transceiver IC
It converts digital signal into CAN communication signal, and CAN communication signal into digital
signal.
Noise filter
It eliminates noise of CAN communication signal.
Termination circuit*
(Resistance of approx. 120 Ω)
It produces potential difference.
*: These are the only control units wired with both ends of CAN communication system.
Diag on CAN
INFOID:0000000003032418
DESCRIPTION
“Diag on CAN” is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1 and DDL2 communication
lines, between control units and diagnosis unit.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-4
2008 Quest
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System Diagram
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
SKIB8714E
Name
Harness
Description
L
DDL1
Tx
Rx
It is used for trouble diagnosis. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling)
DDL2
K-LINE
It is used for trouble diagnosis. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling)
Diag on CAN
CAN-H
CAN-L
It is used for trouble diagnosis and control.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-5
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Condition of Error Detection
INFOID:0000000003032419
“U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication signal is
not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR
• CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)
• CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses)
• Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line
WHEN “U1000” OR “U1001” IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IS
NORMAL
• Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit
and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may be
detected.)
• Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease.
• Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition
switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
• Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication,
malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
• Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally.
NOTE:
CAN communication system is normal if “U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of CONSULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each unit.
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System
INFOID:0000000003032420
In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit cannot transmit
and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, multiple control units
related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode.
ERROR EXAMPLE
NOTE:
• Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring.
• Refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List" for the unit abbreviation.
Example: TCM branch line open circuit
SKIB8738E
Unit name
Symptom
ECM
Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
BCM
Reverse warning chime does not sound.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-6
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit name
Symptom
A
EPS control unit
Normal operation.
Combination meter
• Shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF.
• Warning lamps turn ON.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Normal operation.
TCM
No impact on operation.
IPDM E/R
Normal operation.
B
C
Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit
D
E
F
G
H
SKIB8739E
I
Unit name
Symptom
ECM
J
BCM
EPS control unit
Combination meter
Normal operation.
LAN
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
TCM
L
IPDM E/R
NOTE:
• When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals
are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit.
• When data link connector branch line is open, “ECU list” displayed on the CONSULT-III “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” may be the same as when the CAN communication line has short-circuit. However, symptoms differ depending on the case. See below chart for the differences.
“ECU list” on the “CAN DIAG
SUPPORT MNTR”
(CONSULT-III)
Revision: August 2007
N
Difference of symptom
O
Normal operation.
Data link connector branch line open circuit
CAN-H, CAN-L harness short-circuit
M
All Diag on CAN units are not
indicated.
LAN-7
Most of the units which are connected to the CAN
communication system enter fail-safe mode or are
deactivated.
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit
SKIB8740E
Unit name
Symptom
ECM
Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
BCM
• Reverse warning chime does not sound.
• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front wiper switch being in the intermittent position.
EPS control unit
The steering effort increases.
Combination meter
• The shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF.
• The speedometer is inoperative.
• The odo/trip meter stops.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Normal operation.
TCM
No impact on operation.
IPDM E/R
When the ignition switch is ON,
• The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.
• The cooling fan continues to rotate.
Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit
SKIB8741E
Revision: August 2007
LAN-8
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Unit name
Symptom
A
ECM
• Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
• Engine speed drops.
BCM
• Reverse warning chime does not sound.
• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front
wiper switch being in the intermittent position.
• The room lamp does not turn ON.
• The engine does not start (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning the ignition switch OFF.)
• The steering lock does not release (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning
the ignition switch OFF.)
EPS control unit
The steering effort increases.
Combination meter
• The tachometer and the speedometer do not move.
• Warning lamps turn ON.
• Indicator lamps do not turn ON.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Normal operation.
TCM
No impact on operation.
IPDM E/R
When the ignition switch is ON,
• The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.
• The cooling fan continues to rotate.
Self-Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
INFOID:0000000003032421
H
DTC
U1000
Self-diagnosis item
(CONSULT-III indication)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC detection condition
Inspection/Action
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal of OBD (emission-related
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
When a control unit (except for ECM) is not
transmitting or receiving CAN communication
signal for 2 seconds or more.
I
Refer to LAN-12.
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal other than OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
U1002
SYSTEM COMM
When a control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or
less.
Start the inspection. Refer to the applicable section of the indicated
control unit.
U1010
CONTROL UNIT [CAN]
When an error is detected during the initial diagnosis for CAN controller of each control unit.
Replace the control unit
indicating “U1010”.
U1001
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
J
LAN
L
M
INFOID:0000000003032422
N
CONSULT-III and CAN diagnostic support monitor (on-board diagnosis function) are used for detecting root
cause.
O
MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III)
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-9
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
PKID1075E
Without PAST
Item
Initial diagnosis
Transmission diagnosis
PRSNT
OK
Normal at present
NG
Control unit error (Except for some control units)
OK
Normal at present
UNKWN
OK
Control unit name
(Reception diagnosis)
Description
Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more.
Diagnosis not performed
Normal at present
Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more.
UNKWN
Diagnosis not performed
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)
With PAST
Item
PRSNT
PAST
OK
Transmission diagnosis
OK
UNKWN
1 – 39
0
OK
OK
Control unit name
(Reception diagnosis)
1 – 39
UNKWN
0
–
–
Description
Normal at present and in the past
Normal at present, but unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more
in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles
from OFF to ON.)
Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more at present.
Normal at present and in the past
Normal at present, but unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more
in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles
from OFF to ON.)
Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more at present.
Diagnosis not performed.
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)
MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
NOTE:
• For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III
is not available.)
• Refer to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor" for the details.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-10
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Example: Vehicle Display
Item
CAN_COMM
(Initial diagnosis)
CAN_CIRC_1
(Transmission diagnosis)
CAN_CIRC_2 – 9
(Reception diagnosis of each unit)
Result indicated
Error counter
OK
0
NG
1 – 50
OK
0
UNKWN
1 – 50
OK
0
A
Description
Normal at present
Control unit error
(The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been
run.)
B
Normal at present
C
Unable to transmit for 2 seconds or more at present.
(The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been
run.)
Unable to transmit for 2 seconds or more at present.
(The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been
run.)
UNKWN
1 – 50
D
Normal at present
E
Diagnosis not performed.
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional
parts)
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-11
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000003032423
CAN communication system performs trouble diagnosis with the following tools.
Tool
Usage
Interview sheet
For filling in vehicle information and interview with customer.
Data sheet
For copying on-board diagnosis data.
Diagnosis sheet
For detecting the root cause. (Diagnosis sheet includes system diagram for every CAN system type)
ECU list
(On the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR”)
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
(CONSULT-III)
For checking the condition of control units and the status of CAN communication.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
(CONSULT-III)
CAN communication signal
chart
For converting information received from a customer into CAN communication signal transmission
and reception. This information can be used to judge whether a circuit between control units is normal or abnormal.
Abbreviation list
For checking abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart and diagnosis sheet.
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart
INFOID:0000000003032424
The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for detecting
the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and reception unit.
SKIB8715E
Revision: August 2007
LAN-12
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
INFOID:0000000003032425
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
PKID1210E
O
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000003032426
INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER
Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and to
understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis.
Points in interview
•
•
•
•
What: Parts name, system name
When: Date, Frequency
Where: Road condition, Place
In what condition: Driving condition/environment
Revision: August 2007
LAN-13
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Result: Symptom
NOTE:
• Check normal units as well as error symptoms.
- Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates
tachometer functions normally.
• When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into failsafe mode.
• Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to
the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units.
SKIB8717E
INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION
• Check whether or not “U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” by CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Root cause cannot be detected using the procedure in this section if “U1000” or “U1001” is not indicated.
• Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not.
NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error
may temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause.
• The procedures for present errors differ from the procedures for past errors. Refer to "DETECT THE
ROOT CAUSE".
CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)
Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet.
NOTE:
There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available system
types, either style A or style B may be used.
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
LAN-14
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB8888E
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)
NOTE:
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-15
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.
SKIB8889E
CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET
Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interview
sheet.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-16
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Interview Sheet (Example)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKID1211E
COLLECT DATA
M
Collect CONSULT-III Data
Print out or save the following CONSULT-III data.
• SELF-DIAG RESULTS
• CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (“ECU list” included)
NOTE:
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-17
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Some items may not be needed depending on CAN system type of vehicle.
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
PKID1212E
Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet
Display the trouble diagnosis result of CAN communication with the on-board diagnosis function on the vehicle
monitor, etc. Copy them on the on-board diagnosis copy sheet.
NOTE:
• For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III
is not available.)
Revision: August 2007
LAN-18
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• For the details, refer to LAN-51, "Data Sheet".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SKIB8722E
LAN
CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET
NOTE:
Be sure to use the diagnosis sheet for the correct CAN system type.
L
Print Diagnosis Sheet
Print the diagnosis sheet for the applicable CAN system type.
M
Check Collected Data
Make sure that all ECUs are received, referring to “ECU list”.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-19
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• For abbreviations, refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List".
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
PKID1213E
DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE
Identify the root cause using the created diagnosis sheet.
Identifying the root cause
• Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible cause. Narrow the search.
NOTE:
• Color-code when drawing lines.
• Do not draw a line onto a existing line.
• Drawing a line is not necessary if the circuit is shorted. Refer to "Present Error — Short Circuit —", "Past
Error — Short Circuit —".
Refer to the following for details of the trouble diagnosis procedure.
• "Present Error — Open Circuit —"
• "Present Error — Short Circuit —"
• "Past Error — Open Circuit —"
• "Past Error — Short Circuit —"
NOTE:
When the root cause appears to be a branch line or short circuit, be sure to check the control unit as well as
the communication line.
Present Error — Open Circuit —
Revision: August 2007
LAN-20
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Identify the error circuit using information from the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” (“ECU list” included).
1. ECU list: Check the items indicated in “ECU list”. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error
circuit.
NOTE:
CAN communication line has no error if units other than Diag on CAN units are not indicated. An error
may be on the power supply of the control unit, DDL1 line or DDL2 line.
a. “TCM” which is Diag on CAN unit, is not indicated on “ECU list”. This indicates that DLC is not receiving a
signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between DLC and TCM (line 1-a in the figure below).
NOTE:
• Diag on CAN units are not indicated on the “ECU list” when the CAN line between Diag on CAN unit and
the data link connector is open.
• For a description of Diag on CAN, refer to LAN-4, "Diag on CAN".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
PKID1214E
2.
a.
b.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR: Check each item on “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”. Draw a line on the
diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit.
Reception item of “ECM”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means ECM cannot receive the signal
from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ECM and TCM (line 2-a in the figure below).
NOTE:
If “UNKWN” is indicated on “TRANSMIT DIAG”, then the control unit cannot transmit CAN communication
signal to each unit. Draw a line between the control unit and the splice.
Reception item of “AFS”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means AFS cannot receive the signal
from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between AFS and TCM (line 2-b in the figure below).
Revision: August 2007
LAN-21
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
c. Reception item of “AV”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between AV and
its receiving units. Do not draw any line.
PKID1215E
d.
e.
Reception item of “BCM”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means BCM cannot receive the signal
from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between BCM and TCM (line 2-d in the figure below).
Reception item of “EPS” and “I-KEY”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between EPS and I-KEY and their receiving units. Do not draw any line.
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
LAN-22
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
On CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST), “UNKWN” is indicated even though the item is not used
in the trouble diagnosis. For the details of each item on CAN diagnostic support monitor, refer to LAN-38,
"CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKID1216E
f.
g.
Reception item of “M&A”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means M&A cannot receive the signal
from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between M&A and TCM (line 2-f in the figure below).
Reception item of “ADP”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means ADP cannot receive the signal
from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ADP and TCM (line 2-g in the figure below).
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-23
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
h. Reception item of “ABS”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between ABS
and its receiving units. Do not draw any line.
PKID1217E
i.
3.
a.
b.
Reception item of “IPDM-E”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between
IPDM-E and its receiving units. Do not draw any line.
Based on information received from “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, place a check mark on the known
good CAN communication line between ECM and IPDM-E.
Through the previous procedure, the circuit between ADP splice and TCM has the most amount of lines
(shade 3-a in the figure below).
Place a check mark on the known good lines to establish the error circuit.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-24
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Reception item of “IPDM-E”: On “ECM”, “OK” is indicated. IPDM-E communicates normally with ECM. Put
a check mark on the normal circuit between ECM and IPDM-E (check mark 3-b in the figure below).
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKID1218E
4.
Through the above procedure, the error is detected in the TCM branch line (shaded in the figure below).
NOTE:
For abbreviations, refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-25
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Perform the inspection for the detected error circuit. For the inspection procedure, refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart".
PKID1219E
Present Error — Short Circuit —
When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause.
Received data
Item (CONSULT-III)
Indication
ECU list (on the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR)
All Diag on CAN units are not indicated.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
“UNKWN” is indicated under “TRANSMIT DIAG” and most reception items.
Error symptom
• Most the units connected to the CAN communication system go into fail-safe mode or are deactivated.
Inspection procedure
Revision: August 2007
LAN-26
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PKID1220E
Past Error — Open Circuit —
Review CAN communication signal chart based on information received from the interview with the customer
and on past error information from SELF-DIAG RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR.
LAN
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-27
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. SELF-DIAG RESULTS: Inspect the control units indicating “U1000” or “U1001” on SELF-DIAG RESULTS.
PKID1221E
2.
a.
b.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST) of units
indicating “U1000” or “U1001” on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate
the possible error circuit.
NOTE:
For the details of each indication on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, refer to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
Reception item of “ECM”: “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “3” is indicated in the “PAST”. This means ECM could not
receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between ECM and ABS (line 2-a in the figure below).
Reception item of “M&A”: “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “3” is indicated in the “PAST”. This means M&A could not
receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between M&A and ABS (line 2-b in the figure below).
Revision: August 2007
LAN-28
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
c. Reception item of “TCM”: “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “3” is indicated in the “PAST”. This means TCM could not
receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between TCM and ABS (line 2-c in the figure below).
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKID1222E
3.
a.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST) of
units indicating “U1000” or “U1001” on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit.
NOTE:
• While an error occurred in the past according to SELF-DIAG RESULTS, it is unclear which signal is not
received. Assume that errors were detected from all reception items.
• Draw a single line among the unit and all reception items. (Work flow differs from CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR (with PAST).)
Reception item of “EPS”: Assume that the unit could not receive the signals from ECM, ABS, and M&A.
Draw a line among EPS, ECM, ABS, and M&A (line 3-a in the figure below).
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-29
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
b. Reception item of “ABS”: Assume that the unit could not receive the signal from ECM. Draw a line
between ABS and ECM (line 3-b in the figure below).
PKID1223E
4.
a.
Search for the possible cause using CAN communication signal chart using information from the interview
with the customer.
NOTE:
For the details of CAN communication signal, refer to LAN-42, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: This means that “ABS warning lamp signal”
and “Vehicle speed signal” could not communicate between M&A and ABS (4-a in the figure below).
Revision: August 2007
LAN-30
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
b. The tachometer moved normally: This means that “Engine speed signal” could communicate normally
between ECM and M&A (4-b in the figure below).
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB8895E
5.
a.
Fill out the diagnosis sheet based on information from step 4.
The ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: Assume that a possible cause is no
communication between M&A and ABS. Draw a line between M&A and ABS. (Line 5-a in the figure
below).
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-31
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
b. The tachometer moved normally: Put check marks between ECM and M&A. The circuit between ECM and
M&A is functioning properly (check marks 5-b in the figure below).
SKIB8735E
6.
The circuit which has the most amount of lines are the possible cause. Error is detected from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line (shaded in the figure below).
NOTE:
For abbreviations, refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List".
Revision: August 2007
LAN-32
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. Perform the inspection procedure for the possible cause. Refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKID1224E
Past Error — Short Circuit —
When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause.
Item (CONSULT-III)
Indication
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
“U1000” and “U1001” is indicated in the past for most units.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Only on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST), “1 - 39” is indicated on “PAST” of “TRANSMIT DIAG” and the reception item.
Inspection procedure
M
N
Refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction
Area Chart".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-33
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PKID1225E
Revision: August 2007
LAN-34
2008 Quest
INDEX FOR DTC
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index
DTC
U1000
U1001
U1002
U1010
INFOID:0000000001719329
Self-diagnosis item
(CONSULT-III indication)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
SYSTEM COMM
CONTROL UNIT [CAN]
DTC detection condition
Inspection
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal of OBD (emission-related
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
When a control unit (except for ECM) is not
transmitting or receiving CAN communication
signal for 2 seconds or more.
B
C
D
Refer to LAN-36.
E
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal other than OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
When a control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or
less.
Start the inspection. Refer to the applicable section of the indicated
control unit.
When an error is detected during the initial diagnosis for CAN controller of each control unit.
Replace the control unit
indicating “U1010”.
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-35
2008 Quest
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Caution
INFOID:0000000001719330
• This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle, sheets for trouble diagnosis, and inspection procedures.
• For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure".
Abbreviation List
INFOID:0000000001719331
Abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart, and the diagnosis sheet are as per the following list.
Abbreviation
Unit name
SELECT SYSTEM
(CONSULT-III)
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
(CONSULT-III)
A-BAG
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
AIR BAG
–
ABS
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
ABS
VDC/TCS/ABS
ADP
Driver seat control unit
AUTO DRIVE POS.
–
BCM
BCM
BCM
BCM/SEC
Display unit
–
–
Display control unit
–
DISPLAY
DISP
DLC
Data link connector
–
–
ECM
ECM
ENGINE
ECM
HVAC
Front air control
HVAC
HVAC
IPDM-E
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R
M&A
Combination meter
METER/M&A
METER/M&A
STRG
Steering angle sensor
–
STRG
TCM
TCM
TRANSMISSION
TCM
Revision: August 2007
LAN-36
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PRECAUTIONS
A
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000003032428
B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis
C
D
E
F
G
INFOID:0000000001719334
CAUTION:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
Precaution for Harness Repair
H
I
INFOID:0000000001719335
J
• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
LAN
L
M
SKIB8766E
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.
N
O
P
SKIB8767E
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-37
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
INFOID:0000000001719336
Use “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for detecting the root cause.
MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-III)
ECM
0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON)
Normal
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Description
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
VDC/TCS/ABS
Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
ITEM
METER/M&A
Signal receiving status from the combination meter
BCM/SEC
Signal receiving status from the BCM
ICC
PRSNT
PAST
PRSNT
PAST
OK
OK
or
UNKWN
0
UNKWN
0
UNKWN
0
1 – 39*
Not used even though indicated
HVAC
ECM
TCM
Error
Signal receiving status from the TCM
OK
OK
or
1 – 39*
EPS
IPDM E/R
Not used even though indicated
Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R
OK
OK
or
1 – 39*
e4WD
Not used even though indicated
AWD/4WD
*: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased.
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
• Models with TCS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ITEM
ABS
Description
INITIAL DIAG
Status of CAN controller
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
TCM
Signal receiving status from the TCM
Normal
Error
PRSNT
NGCaution
OK
UNKWN
CAUTION:
Never replace the unit even when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG” at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures.
• Models with VDC
Revision: August 2007
LAN-38
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ITEM
ABS
Status of CAN controller
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
TCM
Signal receiving status from the TCM
METER/M&A
Error
A
PRSNT
NGCaution
INITIAL DIAG
STRG
Normal
Description
B
OK
UNKWN
C
Not used even though indicated
Signal receiving status from the steering angle sensor
ICC
OK
UNKWN
D
Not used even though indicated
CAUTION:
Never replace the unit even when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG” at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures.
TCM
NOTE:
Replace the unit when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG”.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ITEM
INITIAL DIAG
TCM
E
F
Normal
Description
Error
PRSNT
Status of CAN controller
G
NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
VDC/TCS/ABS
Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
METER/M&A
Signal receiving status from the combination meter
H
OK
UNKWN
I
Driver Seat Control Unit
J
0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON)
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ITEM
TRANSMIT DIAG
METER/M&A
ADP
Normal
Description
PRSNT
Error
PAST
PRSNT
PAST
UNKWN
0
LAN
Not used even though indicated
Signal receiving status from the combination meter
BCM/SEC
Signal receiving status from the BCM
TCM
Signal receiving status from the TCM
OK
OK
or
L
1 – 39*
M
*: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased.
BCM
NOTE:
Replace the unit when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG”.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ITEM
BCM
Description
INITIAL DIAG
Status of CAN controller
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
IPDM E/R
Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R
METER/M&A
Signal receiving status from the combination meter
I-KEY
N
Normal
Error
NG
P
OK
UNKWN
Not used even though indicated
Front Air Control
Revision: August 2007
O
PRSNT
LAN-39
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON)
ITEM
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Description
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
TCM
BCM/SEC
Signal receiving status from the BCM
VDC/TCS/ABS
Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DISPLAY
Error
PRSNT
PAST
PRSNT
PAST
OK
OK
or
UNKWN
0
UNKWN
0
UNKWN
0
1 – 39*
Not used even though indicated
IPDM E/R
HVAC
Normal
OK
or
OK
1 – 39*
Not used even though indicated
Signal receiving status from the display
control unit
OK
or
OK
1 – 39*
I-KEY
EPS
AWD/4WD
e4WD
Not used even though indicated
ICC
LANE KEEP
TIRE-P
*: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased.
Combination Meter
0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON)
ITEM
M&A
Normal
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Description
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
TCM
Signal receiving status from the TCM
BCM/SEC
Signal receiving status from the BCM
VDC/TCS/ABS
Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
IPDM E/R
Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R
Error
PRSNT
PAST
PRSNT
PAST
OK
OK
or
UNKWN
0
1 – 39*
DISPLAY
I-KEY
EPS
AWD/4WD
e4WD
Not used even though indicated
ICC
LANE KEEP
TIRE-P
*: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased.
IPDM E/R
Revision: August 2007
LAN-40
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON)
IPDM-E
Normal
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Description
TRANSMIT DIAG
Signal transmission status
ECM
Signal receiving status from the ECM
BCM/SEC
Signal receiving status from the BCM
ITEM
A
Error
PRSNT
PAST
PRSNT
PAST
OK
OK
or
UNKWN
0
B
1 – 39*
C
*: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased.
MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
Display Control Unit
NOTE:
CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to the following.
• Models with color display: Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)".
• Models with navigation system: Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check".
D
E
F
G
H
PKIB6080E
I
Indicated items on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
Normal
Unit name
Diagnosis item
Description
Result indicated
Display control
unit
CAN_COMM
Status of CAN controller
CAN_CIRC_1
Signal transmission status
CAN_CIRC_2
Signal receiving status from the
BCM
CAN_CIRC_3
Signal receiving status from the
ECM
CAN_CIRC_4
Signal receiving status from the
front air control
CAN_CIRC_5
Signal receiving status from the
combination meter
CAN_CIRC_6
CAN_CIRC_7
J
Error
Error
counter
(Reference)
Result indicated
Error
counter
(Reference)
L
OK
0
or
1 – 50
*
UNKWN
1 – 50*
M
N
Not used even though indicated
Signal receiving status from the
IPDM E/R
CAN_CIRC_8
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
0
or
O
UNKWN
1–
50*
1 – 50*
P
Not used even though indicated
*: The error counter stops counting when it reaches “50” and holds “50” until it is deleted.
CAN System Specification Chart
INFOID:0000000001719337
Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet.
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
LAN
NG
LAN-41
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Refer to LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" for how to use CAN system specification chart.
Body type
Wagon
Axle
2WD
Engine
VQ35DE
Transmission
A/T
Brake control
TCS
VDC
Automatic drive positioner
X
Color display
X
X
Monochrome display
X
CAN system type
1
2
3
LAN-53
LAN-54
LAN-55
Diagnosis sheet
CAN communication signal chart
“TYPE 1/TYPE 2”
“TYPE 3”
X: Applicable
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
NOTE:
Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment.
AWMIA0223GB
CAN Communication Signal Chart
INFOID:0000000001719338
Refer to LAN-12, "How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart" for how to use CAN communication signal
chart.
TYPE 1/TYPE 2
NOTE:
Refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List" for the abbreviations of the connecting units.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-42
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
ASCD CRUISE indicator signal
T
ASCD OD cancel request signal
T
R
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD SET indicator signal
T
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
R
HVAC
DISP*
B
C
R
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
E
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
T
T
R
ABS operation signal
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
T
R
Brake warning lamp signal
T
R
SLIP indicator lamp signal
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
T
TCS OFF indicator lamp signal
T
TCS operation signal
T
H
R
J
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
P range signal
LAN
R
L
T
R
Shift position signal
R
T
T
R
I
R
T
O/D OFF indicator lamp signal
Output shaft revolution signal
G
R
T
A/T self-diagnosis signal
F
R
A/T shift schedule change demand signal
Vehicle speed signal
D
R
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
R
R
R
Fuel consumption monitor signal
A
R
T
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
R: Receive
IPDM-E
T
T: Transmit
M&A
A/C compressor request signal
BCM
TCM
ABS
Signal name/Connecting unit
ECM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
T
T
R
Turbine revolution signal
R
A/C switch signal
R
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
T
M
T
Buzzer output signal
T
Cornering lamp request signal
T
Door switch signal
T
R
N
R
R
R
R
Front fog light request signal
T
R
Front wiper request signal
T
R
High beam request signal
T
Horn chirp signal
T
R
Ignition switch signal
T
R
Low beam request signal
T
R
Position light request signal
T
Revision: August 2007
LAN-43
R
R
O
R
R
R
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
R
Sleep wake up signal
T
R
R
ABS
T
R
R
T
Tire pressure data signal
T
R
Tire pressure signal
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
System setting signal
A/C switch/indicator signal
BCM wake up request signal
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
R
T
R
T
T
T
R
T
R
T
Front wiper stop position signal
High beam status signal
R
R
Seat belt buckle switch signal
Cooling fan speed signal
T
R
Distance to empty signal
IPDM-E
HVAC
R
M&A
DISP*
T
TCM
Rear window defogger switch signal
Signal name/Connecting unit
ECM
BCM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
R
T
R
T
Ignition power supply confirmation signal
R
T
IPDM E/R refuse to sleep signal
R
T
IPDM E/R wake up sleep request signal
Low beam status signal
R
T
R
T
Oil pressure switch signal
Rear window defogger control signal
R
T
R
T
*: Models with color display
NOTE:
CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted.
TYPE 3
NOTE:
Refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List" for the abbreviations of the connecting units.
A/C compressor request signal
T
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
ASCD CRUISE indicator signal
T
ASCD OD cancel request signal
T
R
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD SET indicator signal
T
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
R
IPDM-E
STRG
M&A
HVAC
DISP
BCM
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Engine speed signal
T
Revision: August 2007
R: Receive
R
T
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
ADP
TCM
ABS
Signal name/Connecting unit
ECM
T: Transmit
R
R
LAN-44
R
R
R
R
R
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fuel consumption monitor signal
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
T
R
R
ABS operation signal
T
R
ABS warning lamp signal
T
R
Brake warning lamp signal
T
R
SLIP indicator lamp signal
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
T
C
R
E
R
R
T
VDC operation signal
T
R
R
R
T
R
T
R
G
R
T
R
T
R
R range signal
R
T
R
H
T
R
F
R
P range signal
Turbine revolution signal
R
R
T
O/D OFF indicator lamp signal
Shift position signal
D
R
T
VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
Output shaft revolution signal
B
T
T
A/T self-diagnosis signal
R
I
T
System setting signal
T
T
R
R
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
T
Blower fan motor switch signal
R
T
Buzzer output signal
J
R
T
Cornering lamp request signal
R
T
LAN
R
T
Door switch signal
R
R
R
R
Front fog light request signal
T
R
Front wiper request signal
T
R
High beam request signal
T
Horn chirp signal
T
R
R
Ignition switch signal
R
T
Key fob door unlock signal
R
T
Key fob ID signal
R
T
Key switch signal
R
T
R
T
Position light request signal
T
Rear window defogger switch signal
T
Sleep wake up signal
T
Tire pressure data signal
T
Tire pressure signal
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
LAN-45
R
L
M
N
O
Low beam request signal
Revision: August 2007
A
R
A/T shift schedule change demand signal
Vehicle speed signal
STRG
M&A
HVAC
DISP
BCM
ADP
TCM
ABS
ECM
Signal name/Connecting unit
IPDM-E
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BCM wake up request signal
R
STRG
T
M&A
R
T
T
T
T
R
Steering angle sensor signal
T
R
T
R
T
Front wiper stop position signal
High beam status signal
R
R
Seat belt buckle switch signal
Cooling fan speed signal
T
R
Distance to empty signal
Fuel level sensor signal
HVAC
A/C switch/indicator signal
DISP
BCM
ADP
TCM
ABS
ECM
Signal name/Connecting unit
IPDM-E
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
R
T
R
T
Ignition power supply confirmation signal
R
T
IPDM E/R refuse to sleep signal
R
T
IPDM E/R wake up sleep request signal
R
T
Low beam status signal
R
T
Oil pressure switch signal
Rear window defogger control signal
R
R
T
T
NOTE:
CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-46
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719339
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
AWMWA0110GB
Revision: August 2007
LAN-47
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
INFOID:0000000001719340
BKWA0693E
Revision: August 2007
LAN-48
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
AWMWA0111GB
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-49
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AWMWA0140GB
Revision: August 2007
LAN-50
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Interview Sheet
INFOID:0000000001719341
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
SKIB8898E
P
Data Sheet
INFOID:0000000001719342
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET
NOTE:
CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to the following.
• Models with color display: Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)".
Revision: August 2007
LAN-51
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Models with navigation system: Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check".
SKIB8771E
Revision: August 2007
LAN-52
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN System (Type 1)
INFOID:0000000001719343
A
DIAGNOSIS SHEET
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
P
JPMIA0709GB
Revision: August 2007
LAN-53
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN System (Type 2)
INFOID:0000000001719344
DIAGNOSIS SHEET
JPMIA0710GB
Revision: August 2007
LAN-54
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN System (Type 3)
INFOID:0000000001719345
A
DIAGNOSIS SHEET
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
N
O
P
JPMIA0711GB
Revision: August 2007
LAN-55
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001719347
BKIA0205E
1.
TCM E143
2.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E125
3.
IPDM E/R E121
4.
Display control unit M95
5.
Display unit M93
6.
Combination meter M24
7.
BCM M18
8.
Steering angle sensor M47
9.
Data link connector M22
10. Driver seat control unit B401
11. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit M35
12. Front air control M50
13. ECM E16
Harness Layout
INFOID:0000000001719348
Refer to PG-40, "Harness Layout".
Malfunction Area Chart
INFOID:0000000001719349
MAIN LINE
Malfunction Area
Reference
LAN-57, "Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector"
Main line between TCM and data link connector
BRANCH LINE
Malfunction Area
Reference
ECM branch line circuit
LAN-58, "ECM Branch Line Circuit"
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line circuit
LAN-58, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch
Line Circuit"
TCM branch line circuit
LAN-59, "TCM Branch Line Circuit"
Driver seat control unit branch line circuit
LAN-59, "Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit"
BCM branch line circuit
LAN-60, "BCM Branch Line Circuit"
Display control unit branch line circuit
LAN-61, "Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit"
Display unit branch line circuit
LAN-61, "Display Unit Branch Line Circuit"
Data link connector branch line circuit
LAN-62, "Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit"
Front air control branch line circuit
LAN-62, "Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit"
Combination meter branch line circuit
LAN-63, "Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit"
Revision: August 2007
LAN-56
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Malfunction Area
Reference
Steering angle sensor branch line circuit
LAN-64, "Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit"
IPDM E/R branch line circuit
LAN-64, "IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit"
A
B
SHORT CIRCUIT
Malfunction Area
Reference
C
LAN-65, "CAN Communication Circuit"
CAN communication circuit
Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector
INFOID:0000000001719350
D
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
E
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
Harness connector E26
Harness connector M91
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.
Connector No.
Harness connector
Terminal No.
3
E143
4
G
H
Disconnect the harness connectors E26 and M91.
Check the continuity between the TCM harness connector and the harness connector.
TCM harness connector
F
Connector No.
Terminal No.
E26
I
Continuity
J
5
Yes
14
Yes
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the main line between the TCM and the harness connector E26.
L
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Harness connector
Connector No.
M91
M
Data link connector
Terminal No.
5
14
Connector No.
M22
Terminal No.
Continuity
6
Yes
14
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Check the following items again.
- Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (“ECU
list” included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
• Past error: Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the data link connector.
NG
>> Repair the main line between the harness connector M91 and the data link connector.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-57
2008 Quest
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ECM Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719351
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector of ECM.
Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector
Connector No.
E16
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
94
86
Approx. 108 – 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the ECM branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-131, "Wiring Diagram".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-72, "Procedure After Replacing ECM".
• Past error: Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719352
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
-
Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
Models with TCS
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
E125
-
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
22
9
Approx. 54 – 66
Models with VDC
Revision: August 2007
LAN-58
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
E125
7
9
A
Approx. 54 – 66
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
C
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the
following.
• Models with TCS: BRC-14, "Schematic"
• Models with VDC: BRC-54, "Schematic"
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following.
- Models with TCS: BRC-41, "Removal and Installation"
- Models with VDC: BRC-87, "Removal and Installation"
• Past error: Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
TCM Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719353
D
E
F
G
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
LAN
Disconnect the connector of TCM.
Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals.
L
TCM harness connector
Connector No.
E143
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
3
J
4
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the TCM branch line.
M
N
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to AT-49, "Circuit Diagram".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the TCM. Refer to AT-47, "A/T Electrical Parts Location".
• Past error: Error was detected in the TCM branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit
O
P
INFOID:0000000001719354
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-59
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Driver seat control unit
Harness connector B400
Harness connector B37
Harness connector B1
Harness connector M11
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit.
Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals.
Driver seat control unit harness connector
Connector No.
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
B401
3
19
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the driver seat control unit branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-13, "Schematic".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-67, "Removal and Installation".
• Past error: Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
BCM Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719355
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector of BCM.
Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector
Connector No.
M18
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
39
40
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the BCM branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Inspection".
Revision: August 2007
LAN-60
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
• Past error: Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
A
Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit
B
INFOID:0000000001719356
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
C
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
D
E
F
Disconnect the connector of display control unit.
Check the resistance between the display control unit harness connector terminals.
G
Display control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M95
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
25
26
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the display control unit branch line.
H
I
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
J
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display control unit. Refer to .
• Models with color display: AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit"
• Models with navigation system: AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control
Unit"
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
• Past error: Error was detected in the display control unit branch line.
L
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Display Unit Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000003032430
M
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
N
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the display unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side
and connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector of display unit.
Check the resistance between the display unit harness connector terminals.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-61
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Display unit harness connector
Connector No.
M93
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
14
16
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the display unit branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display unit. Refer to AV-95, "Schematic (With Monochrome Display)".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation".
• Past error: Error was detected in the display unit branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719357
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
6
14
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Check the following items again.
- Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (“ECU
list” included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
• Past error: Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NG
>> Repair the data link connector branch line.
Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719358
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-62
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect the connector of front air control.
Check the resistance between the front air control harness connector terminals.
B
Front air control harness connector
Connector No.
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
M50
41
40
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the front air control branch line.
C
D
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the front air control. Refer to the following.
• Models with automatic air conditioner: ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control"
• Models with manual air conditioner: MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control"
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the front air control. Refer to the following.
- Models with automatic air conditioner: ATC-127, "Removal and Installation"
- Models with manual air conditioner: MTC-113, "Removal and Installation"
• Past error: Error was detected in the front air control branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719359
E
F
G
H
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection J
(unit side and connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
LAN
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
M
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
M24
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
9
11
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the combination meter branch line.
O
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to DI-17, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter".
• Past error: Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-63
N
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719360
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor.
Check the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals.
Steering angle sensor harness connector
Connector No.
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
M47
4
5
Approx. 54 – 66
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair the steering angle sensor branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-54, "Schematic".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation".
• Past error: Error was detected in the steering angle sensor branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit
INFOID:0000000001719361
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
IPDM E/R
Harness connector E25
Harness connector M90
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
E121
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
48
49
Approx. 108 – 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-64
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN]
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground
Circuit Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> • Present error: Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
• Past error: Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NG
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
CAN Communication Circuit
B
C
INFOID:0000000001719362
D
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
E
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the terminal and connector.
F
G
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
H
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22
Continuity
Terminal No.
6
I
14
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.
J
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
LAN
Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22
Continuity
Terminal No.
Ground
6
14
L
No
M
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.
N
4.CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
Remove the ECM and the IPDM E/R.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LAN-65
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
ECM
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
94
3.
[CAN]
86
Approx. 108 – 132
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals.
IPDM E/R
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
48
LKIA0037E
49
Approx. 108 – 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace the ECM and/or the IPDM E/R.
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.
6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION
Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.
Revision: August 2007
LAN-66
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
LT
LIGHTING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 4
Aiming Adjustment ...................................................33
Bulb Replacement ...................................................33
Removal and Installation .........................................33
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................34
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4
General precautions for service operations .............. 4
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................35
System Description ..................................................35
CAN Communication System Description ...............36
Major Component and Functions ............................36
Schematic ................................................................37
Wiring Diagram - AUTO/L - .....................................38
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................40
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........40
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................41
Preliminary Check ...................................................41
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................41
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) .........................43
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .....................44
Lighting Switch Inspection .......................................45
Optical Sensor System Inspection ...........................45
Removal and Installation .........................................46
FRONT FOG LAMP .......................................... 47
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME
LIGHT SYSTEM - ...............................................25
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 25
System Description ................................................. 25
CAN Communication System Description ............... 27
Schematic ............................................................... 28
Wiring Diagram - DTRL - ......................................... 29
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 32
Revision: August 2007
G
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM ..................................... 35
HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ..................................... 5
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 5
System Description ................................................... 5
CAN Communication System Description ................. 6
Schematic ................................................................. 7
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP - ....................................... 8
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 11
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 11
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 12
Preliminary Check ................................................... 12
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 12
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 14
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ...... 15
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ........ 17
High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate .... 18
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) .... 18
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....... 20
Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF ................................. 21
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 21
Bulb Replacement ................................................... 22
Removal and Installation ......................................... 23
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 24
F
LT-1
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................47
System Description ..................................................47
CAN Communication System Description ...............48
Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .......................................49
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................50
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........50
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................51
Preliminary Check ...................................................51
CONSULT-III Functions ...........................................51
Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ....51
Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....52
Aiming Adjustment ...................................................52
Bulb Replacement ...................................................53
Front Fog Lamp Assembly ......................................54
2008 Quest
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
LAMPS ............................................................... 55
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 55
System Description ................................................. 55
CAN Communication System Description .............. 57
Schematic ............................................................... 58
Wiring Diagram - TURN - ........................................ 59
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 62
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 62
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
... 63
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 63
Front Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ............ 64
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ............ 65
Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But
Turn Signal Lamp Operates ................................... 66
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate ...... 67
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 67
Removal and Installation ........................................ 67
Bulb Replacement ................................................... 88
Removal and Installation ......................................... 89
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL
LAMPS ............................................................... 90
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 90
System Description ................................................. 90
CAN Communication System Description .............. 91
Schematic ............................................................... 92
Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L - ....................................... 93
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 96
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 96
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 97
Preliminary Check ................................................... 97
CONSULT-III Functions .......................................... 97
Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not
Illuminate ................................................................. 97
Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not
Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) ................... 100
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 100
Removal and Installation ....................................... 100
CORNERING LAMP .......................................... 68
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 68
System Description ................................................. 68
CAN Communication System Description .............. 69
Schematic ............................................................... 70
Wiring Diagram - CORNER - .................................. 71
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 73
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 73
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 74
Preliminary Check .................................................. 74
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ........................ 74
Cornering Lamp Does Not Operate ........................ 75
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 76
Removal and Installation ........................................ 76
REAR COMBINATION LAMP .......................... 102
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 102
Removal and Installation ....................................... 102
TRAILER TOW ................................................. 103
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 103
System Description ............................................... 103
Wiring Diagram - T/TOW - .................................... 104
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 104
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP .................................. 106
Wiring Diagram - COMBSW - ................................. 79
Combination Switch Reading Function ................... 79
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 80
Combination Switch Inspection .............................. 81
Removal and Installation ........................................ 83
Switch Circuit Inspection ........................................ 83
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 106
System Description ............................................... 107
Schematic ............................................................. 111
Wiring Diagram - INT/L - ....................................... 113
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 119
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ............... 119
Preliminary Check ................................................. 120
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .............................. 120
Room/Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate ........ 122
Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate (Room/
Map Lamps Operate) ............................................ 123
Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not
Operate ................................................................. 124
All Step/Foot Lamps Do Not Operate ................... 125
All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate ............. 126
STOP LAMP ...................................................... 84
ILLUMINATION ................................................ 127
System Description ................................................. 84
Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - ..................................... 85
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 86
Removal and Installation ........................................ 87
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 127
System Description ............................................... 127
CAN Communication System Description ............ 129
Schematic ............................................................. 130
Wiring Diagram - ILL - ........................................... 132
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ......... 77
Removal ................................................................. 77
Installation .............................................................. 77
HAZARD SWITCH ............................................. 78
Removal and Installation ........................................ 78
COMBINATION SWITCH .................................. 79
BACK-UP LAMP ................................................ 88
Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - ..................................... 88
Revision: August 2007
LT-2
2008 Quest
BULB SPECIFICATIONS ................................. 140
Headlamp .............................................................. 140
Exterior Lamp ........................................................ 140
Interior Lamp/Illumination ...................................... 140
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-3
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719031
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
General precautions for service operations
INFOID:0000000001719032
• Never work with wet hands.
• Turn the lighting switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector.
• When checking the headlamp on/off operation, check it on vehicle and with the power connected to the vehicle-side connector.
• Do not touch the headlamp bulb glass surface with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it. Do not
touch the headlamp bulb just after the headlamp is turned off, because it is very hot.
• When the bulb has burned out, wrap it in a thick vinyl bag and discard. Do not break the bulb.
• Leaving the bulb removed from the headlamp housing for a long period of time can deteriorate the performance of the lens and reflector (dirt, clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb.
• Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner or gasoline) to clean lamps and to remove old sealant.
Revision: August 2007
LT-4
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719033
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5259E
1.
IPDM E/R
4.
Combination meter M24
2.
BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
3.
System Description
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
INFOID:0000000001719034
Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2ND position, the BCM (body control module) receives input
requesting the headlamps (and tail lamps) illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent
power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing
unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high and headlamp low relay coils. When energized, these relays
direct power to the respective headlamps, which then illuminate.
J
LT
L
M
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to IPDM E/R CPU, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to IPDM E/R CPU, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 40.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
Revision: August 2007
LT-5
N
O
P
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 38.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• to combination meter terminal 20
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Low Beam Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This
input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
• through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 20
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 1, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 30
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 2
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R and combination
meter across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of
the HIGH BEAM indicator. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized,
this relay directs power
• through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 27
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 3, and
• through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 28
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON) and the ignition switch is turned from
ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps
are turned off.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Refer to LT-35, "System Description" for auto light operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (PANIC ALARM)
The vehicle security system (panic alarm) will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to BL-48,
"System Description".
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719035
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
LT-6
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719036
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4679E
Revision: August 2007
LT-7
2008 Quest
P
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -
INFOID:0000000001719037
WKWA4680E
Revision: August 2007
LT-8
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4681E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-9
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4682E
Revision: August 2007
LT-10
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0138GB
P
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719038
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719039
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
LT-11
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000001719040
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-5, "System Description".
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-12, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the headlamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719041
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719042
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
Display Item List
Item
Description
CONSULT-III
Factory setting
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed
in this mode. Selects exterior lamp battery saver control
mode between ON/OFF.
ON
×
BATTERY SAVER SET
OFF
—
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
Revision: August 2007
LT-12
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
B
C
Display Item List
D
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from
lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from
lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the front door LH as judged from the front door switch LH signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the front door RH as judged from the front door switch RH signal. (Door
is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (RH) signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (LH) signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the back door as judged from the back door switch signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
CARGO LAMP SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of cargo lamp switch.
OPTICAL SENSOR
[0 - 5V]
Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical
sensor signal.
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
P
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
LT-13
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Test item
Description
TAIL LAMP
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
HEAD LAMP
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF.
FR FOG LAMP
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CARGO LAMP
Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CORNERING LAMP
Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching ON-OFF.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
Display Item List
Monitored item
CAN communication
CAN communication system
CONSULT-ll display
Description
CAN communication [U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
CAN communication system 1 to 6
[U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN system.
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000001719043
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
DATA MONITOR
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
All items will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitor the predetermined item.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select any item for monitoring.
3.
4.
5.
Touch “START”.
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are
monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Revision: August 2007
LT-14
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT−III screen
display
Display or
unit
TAIL&CLR REQ
Headlamp low beam request
Headlamp high beam request
Item name
A
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
CRNRNG LMP REQ
ON/OFF
×
–
×
Signal status input from BCM
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
Parking, license plate
and tail lamps request
Cornering lamp
Monitor item selection
Front fog lamps request
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
B
C
D
E
F
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation.
Touch "START".
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test item
H
CONSULT−III screen display
Description
TAIL LAMP
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your
option.
I
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF,
HI, LO) at your option (Head lamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1
second).
J
Tail lamp relay output
Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output
LAMPS
Front fog lamp relay (FOG)
output
Cornering lamp relay (RH,
LH) output
G
Allows fog lamp relay (FOG) to operate by switching operation ON-OFF
at your option.
CORNERING LAMP
Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching operation
ON-OFF at your option.
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
INFOID:0000000001719044
LT
L
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HI BEAM SW" turns ON-OFF
linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
HIGH position
: HI BEAM SW ON
M
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
O
2.HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure headlamp high beam operates.
Headlamp high beam should operate.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
LT-15
2008 Quest
P
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "HL LO REQ" and "HL HI REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in HIGH position.
When lighting switch is in
HIGH position
: HL LO REQ ON
: HL HI REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
4.CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When headlamp high beam is operating, check voltage between
front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector terminals
and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E13
LH
E45
(–)
Voltage
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
3
WKIA4130E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector
terminals.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
B
Terminal
Front combination
lamp connector
27
RH
E13
28
LH
E45
Terminal
Continuity
3
Yes
WKIA4044E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
6.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: August 2007
LT-16
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between front combination lamp RH and LH
harness connector terminals and ground.
A
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E13
LH
E45
Terminal
4
Ground
Continuity
B
Yes
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or
poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
WKIA4131E
D
INFOID:0000000001719045
E
1.BULB INSPECTION
F
Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement".
G
2.CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect inoperative front combination lamp connector.
Turn the high beam headlamps ON.
Check voltage between inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground.
H
I
Terminals
(+)
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E13
LH
E45
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
J
Terminal
3
LT
WKIA4256E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
3.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
M
Turn the high beam headlamps OFF.
Check continuity between inoperative front combination lamp
harness connector terminal and ground.
N
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E13
LH
E45
Continuity
Terminal
4
Ground
O
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or
poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground.
P
WKIA4131E
4.INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS
1.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Revision: August 2007
LT-17
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
B
Terminal
Front combination
lamp connector
27
RH
E13
28
LH
E45
Terminal
Continuity
3
Yes
WKIA4044E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair
as necessary.
High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate
INFOID:0000000001719046
1.CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INSPECTION
Inspect CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-38.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter".
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
INFOID:0000000001719047
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD
LAMP SW 2" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
2ND position
: HEAD LAMP SW 1 ON
: HEAD LAMP SW 2 ON
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
2.HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure headlamp low beam operates.
Headlamp low beam should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "HL LO REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 2ND position.
When lighting switch is in
2ND position
: HL LO REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Revision: August 2007
LT-18
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When headlamp low beam is operating, check voltage between
front combination lamp RH and LH harness connectors and
ground.
B
C
D
Terminals
(+)
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E12
LH
E44
(–)
Voltage
Ground
Battery voltage
E
Terminal
1
WKIA4184E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
F
G
5.CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front combination lamp harness connector terminal.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
I
B
Front combination
lamp connector
Terminal
E122
20
RH
E12
30
LH
E44
Terminal
Continuity
1
J
Yes
WKIA4185E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LT
L
6.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground.
N
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E12
LH
E44
Voltage
Terminal
2
O
Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or
poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
LT-19
P
WKIA4186E
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
INFOID:0000000001719048
1.BULB INSPECTION
Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement".
2.CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect inoperative front combination lamp connector.
Turn the low beam headlamps ON.
Check voltage between inoperative front combination lamp connector terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E12
LH
E44
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
1
WKIA4184E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
Turn the low beam headlamps OFF.
Check continuity between inoperative front combination lamp
connector terminal and ground.
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E12
LH
E44
Continuity
Terminal
2
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp and IPDM E/R connector. Repair as
necessary.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground.
WKIA4186E
4.INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and inoperative front combination lamp harness connector
terminals.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
B
Terminal
Front combination
lamp connector
20
RH
E12
30
LH
E44
Terminal
Continuity
1
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
LT-20
WKIA4185E
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair
as necessary.
Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF
INFOID:0000000001719049
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
B
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD
LAMP SW 2" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
OFF position
A
C
: HEAD LAMP SW 1 OFF
: HEAD LAMP SW 2 OFF
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH
Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-83, "Removal and Installation".
F
3.CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN BCM AND IPDM E/R
G
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III and perform self-diagnosis for BCM.
Display of self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>>Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Refer to BCS-17, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)".
Aiming Adjustment
H
I
INFOID:0000000001719050
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKIA5278E
1.
RH headlamp (low beam) adjustment screw
2.
LH headlamp (low beam) adjustment screw
P
For details, refer to the regulations in your area.
NOTE:
If vehicle front body has been repaired and /or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check headlamp
aiming.
HEADLAMP AIMING
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
LT-21
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following:
- Confirm headlamp aiming switch is set to "0" (zero) position (if equipped).
- Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
- Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
- Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full.
- Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
- Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
WKIA1053E
• Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust
headlamps accordingly.
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
NOTE:
Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen.
1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719051
CAUTION:
• Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result.
• Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it.
• Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to
replace it with a new one.
• After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness.
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Turn headlamp switch OFF.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Revision: August 2007
LT-22
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM
Removal
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn headlamp switch OFF.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP
Removal
1.
2.
E
Turn the front turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it.
Pull bulb to remove it from socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719052
G
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
Removal
1.
2.
H
Remove front fascia. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front combination lamp bolts.
I
J
LT
WKIA1054E
3.
Pull front combination lamp toward front of the vehicle, disconnect connectors, and remove front combination lamp.
Installation
1.
2.
L
M
Connect front combination lamp connectors.
Install front combination lamp bolts.
N
O
P
WKIA1054E
3.
4.
Install front fascia. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation".
Verify headlamp aiming. Refer to LT-21, "Aiming Adjustment".
Revision: August 2007
LT-23
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001719053
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
WKIA1055E
1. Headlamp bulb (High beam)
2. Headlamp assembly
3. Cornering lamp bulb
4. Cornering lamp bulb socket
5. Parking/turn signal lamp bulb socket
6. Parking/turn signal lamp bulb
7. Headlamp bulb (Low beam)
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn high beam bulb counterclockwise to unlock and remove high beam bulb.
Turn low beam bulb counterclockwise to unlock and remove low beam bulb.
Turn turn signal/parking lamp (front) bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove turn signal/parking lamp (front) bulb.
Turn cornering lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove cornering lamp bulb.
Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: August 2007
LT-24
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
A
INFOID:0000000001719054
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5260E
1.
BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
IPDM E/R E121, E122, E124
3.
4.
Combination meter M24
5.
Daytime light control unit E103, E104 6.
7.
Daytime light relay E148
Generator F1, E112
J
Parking brake switch E140
LT
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719055
The headlamp system for Canada vehicles is equipped with a daytime light control unit that activates the high
beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running and the lighting switch is in
the OFF or 1st position. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be
illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights
will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied.
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
• to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 29, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to daytime light control unit terminals 2 and 3, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU in the IPDM E/R.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to daytime light control unit terminal 12, and
Revision: August 2007
LT-25
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 9, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to daytime light control unit terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60, and
• to daytime light control unit terminal 9
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to BCM terminal 67
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
HEADLAMP OPERATION
Low Beam Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This
input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing
unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
• through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 30, and
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 1, and
• to daytime light control unit terminal 4
• through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 20
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 1, and
• through diode 3
• to daytime light control unit terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 2
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator.
The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
• through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 27
• to daytime light relay terminal 2, and
• through diode-3
• to daytime light control unit terminal 1, and
When energized, the daytime light relay directs power
• through daytime light relay terminal 3
• to daytime light control unit terminal 8 and
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 3.
Also when the headlamp high relay is energized, it directs power
• through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 28
• to daytime light control unit terminal 5
• through daytime light control unit terminal 6
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 4
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 4
• to daytime light control unit terminal 7
• through daytime light control unit terminal 9
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Revision: August 2007
LT-26
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
A
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), and the ignition switch is turned
from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps
are turned off.
B
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
C
For auto light operation, refer to LT-35, "System Description".
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION
With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is
supplied
• through daytime light control unit terminal 6
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 3
• through front combination lamp LH terminal 4
• to daytime light control unit terminal 7, and
• through daytime light control unit terminal 8
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 4
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719056
D
E
F
G
H
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-27
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719057
WKWA4684E
Revision: August 2007
LT-28
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - DTRL -
INFOID:0000000001719058
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4685E
Revision: August 2007
LT-29
2008 Quest
P
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4686E
Revision: August 2007
LT-30
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4687E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-31
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719059
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
WKIA5200E
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Terminal
No.
Wire color
1
BR/W
2
SB
Battery
Ignition switch in all positions
Battery voltage
3
SB
Battery
Ignition switch in all positions
Battery voltage
4
L
Lighting switch in the headlamp ON (2ND) position and
low beam (B) position
Battery voltage
5
6
7
G
L/W
Y/G
Item
Ignition switch start signal
Lighting switch headlamp
LH low beam output
Lighting switch headlamp
LH high beam output
Headlamp LH high beam
Headlamp LH (high) control
Condition
Ignition switch in START position
All other conditions
All other conditions
Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position
All other conditions
8
Y
Revision: August 2007
Battery voltage
0V
0V
Battery voltage
0V
Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position
Battery voltage
With parking brake released, engine running and lighting switch in OFF or parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) positions
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P or N
position.
Battery voltage
All other conditions
0V
Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position and
high beam position
0V
With parking brake released, engine running and lighting switch in OFF or parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) positions
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P or N
position.
Battery voltage
All other conditions
Lighting switch headlamp
RH high beam output
Voltage (Approx.)
0V
Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position
Battery voltage
With parking brake released, engine running and lighting switch in OFF or parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) positions
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P or N
position.
6V
All other conditions
0V
LT-32
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
9
B
10
Y/G
11
BR/Y
12
G
Ground
Parking brake switch
Generator
(L terminal)
Ignition switch on signal
—
Parking brake released
—
Battery voltage
Parking brake set
When engine is running
0V
Battery voltage
All other conditions
0V
Ignition switch OFF, ACC positions
0V
Ignition switch ON, START positions
Aiming Adjustment
A
Battery voltage
B
C
INFOID:0000000001719060
D
Refer to LT-21, "Aiming Adjustment".
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719061
E
Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719062
F
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation".
G
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
H
Remove the daytime light control unit bolt.
Disconnect connectors.
Remove daytime light control unit.
I
J
WKIA1057E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LT
L
DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY
Removal
NOTE:
The daytime light relay is taped to the main wiring harness near the lower dash side finisher RH.
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
2. Carefully remove the tape holding the daytime light relay to the
main harness.
3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Remove daytime light relay.
M
N
O
P
WKIA1093E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
LT-33
2008 Quest
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001719063
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
Refer to LT-24, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Revision: August 2007
LT-34
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719064
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5261E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Combination switch M28
3.
Optical sensor M16
4.
Sliding door switch LH B46, RH
B135
5.
Front door switch LH B8, RH B108
6.
Back door latch (door ajar switch)
D511
System Description
J
LT
INFOID:0000000001719065
Automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with ambient light.
Timing for when the lamps turn on/off can be selected using eight modes. Mode selections are accessed
through the vehicle electronic settings menu of the color display (refer to owners manual) or with CONSULTIII.
L
M
OUTLINE
The auto light control system uses an optical sensor that detects outside brightness.
When the lighting switch is in "AUTO" position, it automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with the ambient light. Sensitivity can be adjusted using four modes. For the details of the
setting, refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
Optical sensor ground is supplied
• to optical sensor terminal 3
• through BCM (body control module) terminal 18.
When ignition switch is turned to "ON" position and when outside brightness is darker than prescribed level,
input is supplied
• to BCM terminal 58
• from optical sensor terminal 4.
The headlamps will then illuminate. For a description of headlamp operation, refer to LT-5, "System Description".
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Revision: August 2007
LT-35
2008 Quest
N
O
P
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the AUTO position, the ignition switch is turned from ON or
ACC to OFF, and one of the front doors is opened, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the headlamp are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III.
DELAY TIMER FUNCTION
When the ignition switch is ON and auto light switch is ON, the BCM turns on/off the headlamps. In delay timer
function, ignition is OFF, auto light sensor power source is OFF and the headlamps are not turned on/off by the
BCM. On condition that:
• when the state of ignition switch ON or ACC is ON and output judgment by auto light function is headlamp
ON changes to ignition switch and ACC are OFF and any door switch is ON, output judgment by BCM
should be headlamp ON for 5 minutes by timer. After time out, output judgment by BCM should be headlamp
OFF.
• when the state of any door switch is turned to ON from OFF while 45 second or 5 minute timer is counting,
timer stops, and restarts counting for 5 minutes, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON. After time out,
BCM judges output as headlamp OFF.
• when the state of front door switch LH, front door switch RH, rear door switch LH, rear door switch RH or
back door latch (door ajar switch) is ON turns to all door switches are OFF while 45 second or 5 minute timer
is counting, timer stops, and restarts counting for 45 seconds, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON.
After timer out, BCM judges output as headlamp OFF.
• when the state is ignition switch ON or ACC is ON or auto light switch OFF while timer is counting, timer
stops counting and BCM turns on/off lamps according to headlamp function, front fog lamp function, auto
light function and headlamp battery save function.
Delay timer control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III or with the display (with color
display).
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719066
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Major Component and Functions
INFOID:0000000001719067
Components
Functions
BCM
• Turns on/off circuits of tail light and headlamp according to signals from light sensor, lighting switch
(AUTO), front door switch LH, front door switch RH, sliding door switch LH and RH, back door latch
(door ajar switch), and ignition switch (ON, OFF).
Optical sensor
• Converts ambient light (lux) to voltage and sends it to BCM. (Detects lightness of 50 to 1,300 lux)
Revision: August 2007
LT-36
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719068
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4688E
Revision: August 2007
LT-37
2008 Quest
P
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AUTO/L -
INFOID:0000000001719069
WKWA4689E
Revision: August 2007
LT-38
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4690E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-39
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4691E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719070
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719071
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
LT-40
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719072
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-35, "System Description".
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-41, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to LT-44, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart
by Symptom".
Does the auto light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719073
B
C
D
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS
• Sensitivity of auto light system can be adjusted using CONSULT-III. Refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function
(BCM)".
E
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
1.CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
F
Confirm BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration".
OK or NG
OK
>> Continue preliminary check. Refer to "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT".
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration".
G
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
H
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
I
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719074
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
J
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
LT
L
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
M
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
N
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING" or "ILL DELAY SET" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch “START”.
Touch "MODE 1-4" of setting to be changed (CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING). Touch "MODE1-8" of setting
to be changed (ILL DELAY SET).
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
Revision: August 2007
LT-41
2008 Quest
O
P
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Work Support Setting Item
• Sensitivity of auto light can be selected and set from four modes.
Work item
Description
CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING
ILL DELAY SET
Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes.
• MODE 1 (Normal)/ MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE4 (Insensitive)
Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer
period among eight modes.
• MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/MODE 5 (90 sec.)/
MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.)
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting
switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position:
ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
PASSING SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from lighting switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the front door LH as judged from the front door switch LH signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the front door RH as judged from the front door switch RH signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the sliding door as judged from the sliding door switch (RH) signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the sliding door as judged from the sliding door switch (LH) signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the back door as judged from the back door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/
Door is closed: OFF)
Revision: August 2007
LT-42
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item
Contents
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal.
CARGO LAMP SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of cargo lamp.
OPTICAL SENSOR
[0 - 5V]
A
B
Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical sensor
signal.
C
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
D
E
Display Item List
Test item
F
Description
TAIL LAMP
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
HEAD LAMP
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF.
FR FOG LAMP
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CARGO LAMP
Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CORNERING LAMP
G
H
Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching ON-OFF.
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000001719075
I
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Description
J
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
DATA MONITOR
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
LT
DATA MONITOR
L
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
N
ALL SIGNALS
All items will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitor the predetermined item.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select any item for monitoring.
3.
4.
5.
Touch "START".
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are
monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Revision: August 2007
M
LT-43
2008 Quest
O
P
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT-III screen
display
Display or
unit
TAIL&CLR REQ
Headlamp low beam request
Headlamp high beam request
Item name
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
CRNRNG LMP REQ
ON/OFF
×
–
×
Signal status input from BCM
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
Parking, license plate
and tail lamps request
Cornering lamp
Monitor item selection
Front fog lamps request
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch "START".
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test item
Tail lamp relay output
CONSULT-III screen display
Description
TAIL LAMP
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your
option.
Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output
LAMPS
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your
option.
Front fog lamp relay output
Cornering lamp relay (RH,
LH) output
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF,
HI, LO) at your option (Headlamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1
second).
CORNERING LAMP
Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching operation
ON-OFF at your option.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
INFOID:0000000001719076
Trouble phenomenon
Malfunction system and reference
• Parking lamps and headlamps will not illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.)
• Parking lamps and headlamp will not go out when outside of
the vehicle becomes light. (Lighting switch 1st position and
2nd position operate normally.)
• Headlamps go out when outside of the vehicle becomes
light, but parking lamps stay on.
• Refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• Refer to LT-45, "Lighting Switch Inspection".
• Refer to LT-45, "Optical Sensor System Inspection".
If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Parking lamps illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes
dark, but headlamps stay off. (Lighting switch 1st position and
2nd position operate normally.)
• Refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
• Refer to LT-45, "Optical Sensor System Inspection".
If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Auto light adjustment system will not operate. (Lighting switch
AUTO, 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.)
• Refer to LT-45, "Optical Sensor System Inspection".
If above systems is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
Revision: August 2007
LT-44
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble phenomenon
Malfunction system and reference
Auto light adjustment system will not operate.
• CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to BCS-17,
"CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)".
Shut off delay feature will not operate.
• CAN communication line inspection between BCM and combination
meter. Refer to BCS-17, "CAN Communication Inspection Using
CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)".
• Refer to BL-35, "Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door
System)".
If above systems is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
A
B
C
D
Lighting Switch Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719077
1.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
E
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "AUTO LIGHT SW" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
AUTO position
F
: AUTO LIGHT SW ON
G
Without CONSULT-III
Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
Optical Sensor System Inspection
H
INFOID:0000000001719078
I
1.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "OPTICAL SENSOR" data monitor, check difference in the voltage when
the optical sensor is illuminated and not illuminated.
J
LT
Illuminated
OPTICAL SENSOR
Not illuminated
OPTICAL SENSOR
: 3.1V or more
L
: 0.6V or less
CAUTION:
Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently
illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy the standard.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
M
N
O
2.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-45
2008 Quest
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and optical sensor connector.
3. Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM harness connector
M18 terminal 18 and optical sensor harness connector M16 terminal 3.
18 - 3
4.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector
M18 terminal 18 and ground.
18 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WKIA1059E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM connector M20 (A)
terminal 58 and optical sensor connector M16 (B) terminal 4.
58 - 4
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector
M20 terminal 58 and ground.
58 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace optical sensor. Refer to LT-46, "Removal and
Installation". Recheck sensor output with CONSULT-III.
If NG, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Removal and Installation
WKIA5416E
INFOID:0000000001719079
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove defrost grille. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Disconnect the connector.
Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
WKIA5279E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
LT-46
2008 Quest
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT FOG LAMP
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719080
B
C
D
WKIA5262E
1.
BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
F
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719081
Control of the fog lamps is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) for front fog lamp operation.
When the lighting switch is placed in the fog lamp position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the fog lamps to illuminate. When the headlamps are illuminated, this input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication
lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the front fog lamp relay coil. When activated, this relay directs power to the front fog lamps.
G
H
I
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to front fog lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57.
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38.
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
FOG LAMP OPERATION
The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or
AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the fog lamp switch must be ON for fog lamp operation.
With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, the CPU of the IPDM E/R grounds the coil side of the fog lamp
relay. The fog lamp relay then directs power
• through IPDM E/R terminal 37
• to front fog lamp LH terminal +, and
Revision: August 2007
E
LT-47
2008 Quest
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through IPDM E/R terminal 36
• to front fog lamp RH terminal +.
Ground is supplied
• to front fog lamp LH and RH terminal –
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), the fog lamp switch is ON and the
ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the fog lamps (and headlamps) remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the fog lamps (and
headlamps) are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719082
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
LT-48
2008 Quest
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - F/FOG -
INFOID:0000000001719083
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4692E
Revision: August 2007
LT-49
2008 Quest
P
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4693E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719084
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719085
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
LT-50
2008 Quest
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719086
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-47, "System Description".
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-51, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the front fog lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
B
C
INFOID:0000000001719087
D
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
1.CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
E
Confirm BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration".
OK or NG
OK
>> Continue preliminary check. Refer to "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT".
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration".
F
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
CONSULT-III Functions
INFOID:0000000001719088
H
Refer to LT-12, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Refer to LT-14, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
I
INFOID:0000000001719089
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
J
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "FR FOG SW" turns ON-OFF
linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
FOG position
LT
: FR FOG SW ON
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
L
2.FOG LAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "FOG" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure fog lamps operate.
Fog lamps should operate.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
P
3.CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "FR FOG REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in FOG position.
When lighting switch is in
FOG position
Revision: August 2007
N
: FR FOG REQ ON
LT-51
2008 Quest
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
4.IPDM E/R INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect front fog lamp LH/RH harness connector.
Start auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". When
front fog lamp relay is operating, check voltage between left/right
front fog lamp connector terminals and ground.
Front fog lamp
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
RH
E101
LH
E102
+
Ground
Battery voltage
WKIA1064E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front fog lamp bulbs and replace as necessary.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
INFOID:0000000001719090
1.BULB INSPECTION
Inspect bulb of lamp which does not illuminate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace fog lamp bulb. Refer to LT-53, "Bulb Replacement".
2.INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND FRONT FOG LAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative front fog lamp connector.
Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM
E/R and inoperative front fog lamp harness connector terminal.
IPDM E/R
Connector
E124
Front fog lamp
Terminal
Connector
36
RH
E101
37
LH
E102
Terminal
+
Continuity
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ground circuit. If NG, repair harness or connector.
WKIA1063E
If OK, replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and inoperative front fog
lamp.
Aiming Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001719091
NOTE:
• If vehicle front body has been repaired and /or the fog lamp assembly has been replaced, check fog lamp
aiming.
• Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following:
- Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
- Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
- Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
Coolant and engine oil is filled to correct level, and fuel tank full.
- Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
Revision: August 2007
LT-52
2008 Quest
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the front
fog lamp lens as shown.
A
B
C
MEL327G
D
2.
3.
Position fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21.
Turn front fog lamps ON and adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw (1) so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is
100 mm (4 in) below the height of the front fog lamp centers as
shown.
E
F
G
LKIA0704E
H
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719092
I
J
LT
L
M
N
MEL328G
O
The front fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Turn fog lamp switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector.
• Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
• Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the
glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. Keep grease and other oily
substances away from bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc., may
affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
Revision: August 2007
LT-53
2008 Quest
P
FRONT FOG LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
2.
3.
Position the front fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21.
Disconnect electrical connector.
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
LKIA0705E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Fog Lamp Assembly
INFOID:0000000001719093
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it.
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
• Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the
glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance.
• Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc., may
affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
1.
2.
3.
Position the fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the front fog lamp assembly.
• Remove the screw (5).
• Pull the bracket (2) toward the rear of vehicle to release the
snap clip (1).
• Remove the front fog lamp screws (3) and remove the front
fog lamp housing (4).
LKIA0706E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install front fog lamp assembly.
• Position the front fog lamp housing (4) and install the front fog
lamp screws (3)
• Press the bracket (2) onto the snap clip (1).
• Install the screws (5).
Connect the electrical connector.
Verify fog lamp aiming. Refer to LT-52, "Aiming Adjustment".
Install the fender protector. Refer to EI-21.
LKIA0706E
Revision: August 2007
LT-54
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719094
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5263E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
4.
Hazard switch M55
2.
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
3.
System Description
Combination meter M24
J
INFOID:0000000001719095
OUTLINE
L
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 40.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 38.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67 and
• to combination meter terminal 20
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
M
N
O
P
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION
LH Turn
Revision: August 2007
LT-55
LT
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When the turn signal switch is moved to the left position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs
turn signal from BCM terminal 60.
The BCM supplies power
• through BCM terminal 60
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 7
• through front combination lamp LH terminal 6
• to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to rear combination lamp LH terminal 3
• through rear combination lamp LH terminal 5
• to grounds B7 and B19.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator
lamp within combination meter.
RH Turn
When the turn signal switch is moved to the right position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs
turn signal from BCM terminal 61.
The BCM supplies power
• through BCM terminal 61
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 7
• through front combination lamp RH terminal 6
• to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to rear combination lamp RH terminal 3
• through rear combination lamp RH terminal 5
• to grounds B117 and B132.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator
lamp within combination meter.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
When the hazard switch is depressed, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 29
• through hazard switch terminal 2
• through hazard switch terminal 1
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the hazard switch is depressed, the BCM, interpreting it as hazard warning lamps are ON, outputs turn
signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61.
The BCM supplies power
• through BCM terminals 60 and 61
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 7
• through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6
• to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to rear combination lamp LH terminal 3
• through rear combination lamp LH terminal 5
• to grounds B7 and B19, and
• to rear combination lamp RH terminal 3
• through rear combination lamp RH terminal 5
• to grounds B117 and B132.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator
lamps within combination meter.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION
When the remote keyless entry system is triggered by input from the keyfob, the BCM, interpreting it as turn
signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61.
The BCM supplies power
• through BCM terminals 60 and 61
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 7
• through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6
• to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to rear combination lamp LH terminal 3
• through rear combination lamp LH terminal 5
• to grounds B7 and B19, and
• to rear combination lamp RH terminal 3
• through rear combination lamp RH terminal 5
Revision: August 2007
LT-56
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to grounds B117 and B132.
BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator
lamps within combination meter.
With power and input supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps when keyfob is
used to activate the remote keyless entry system.
A
B
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719096
C
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-57
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719097
WKWA4694E
Revision: August 2007
LT-58
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - TURN -
INFOID:0000000001719098
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4695E
Revision: August 2007
LT-59
2008 Quest
P
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4696E
Revision: August 2007
LT-60
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4697E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-61
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4698E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719099
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001719100
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-55, "System Description".
Revision: August 2007
LT-62
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Perform preliminary check. Refer to LT-63, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
5. Do turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
6. Inspection End.
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
C
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719102
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
D
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
B
INFOID:0000000001719101
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
BCM diagnostic
test item
A
E
F
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
G
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
H
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
I
1.
2.
3.
J
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
LT
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
L
M
Display Item List
Monitor item
IGN ON SW
N
Contents
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
HAZARD SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Hazard ON (ON)/Hazard OFF (OFF)" status, determined from hazard switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
BRAKE SW
"OFF"
Displays status of parking brake switch.
P
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
Revision: August 2007
LT-63
O
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Description
FLASHER (RH)
Turn signal lamp (RH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
FLASHER (LH)
Turn signal lamp (LH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719103
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "FLASHER" data monitor, mak sure "TURN SIGNAL R" and "TURN SIGNAL L" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
TURN RH position
When lighting switch is in
TURN LH position
: TURN SIGNAL R ON
: TURN SIGNAL L ON
Without CONSULT-III
Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
2.ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-III
Select "FLASHER" during active test. Refer to LT-63, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
Make sure "FLASHER RH" and "FLASHER LH" operate.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and inoperative front combination
lamp harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal.
A
BCM connector
RH
LH
B
Terminal
M20
Front combination
lamp connector
61
RH
E107
60
LH
E11
Terminal
Continuity
6
Yes
WKIA5265E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK GROUND
Revision: August 2007
LT-64
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground.
A
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
Terminal
5
Ground
Continuity
B
Yes
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA4508E
D
5.CHECK BULB
Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18,
"Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement".
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719104
E
F
G
1.CHECK TAIL LAMPS AND STOP LAMPS
Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement".
H
I
2.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMPS CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and rear combination lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM (A) connector M20 terminal 61
and rear combination lamp RH (B) connector B130 (without
trailer tow), B306 (with trailer tow) terminal 3.
61 - 3
3.
J
LT
: Continuity should exist.
L
Check continuity between BCM (A) connector M20 terminal 60
and rear combination lamp LH harness connector B35 (without
trailer tow), B302 (with trailer tow) terminal 3.
WKIA5266E
60 - 3
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
N
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
O
Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector
B35 (without trailer tow), B302 (with trailer tow) LH and B130 (without trailer tow), B306 (with trailer tow) RH terminal 5 and ground.
P
5 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check rear combination lamp connector for proper connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1255E
Revision: August 2007
LT-65
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operates
INFOID:0000000001719105
1.CHECK BULB
Make sure bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement" for front turn signal bulb. Refer
to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement" for rear turn signal bulb.
2.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make sure "HAZARD SW" turns ON-OFF
linked with operation of hazard switch.
When hazard switch is in
ON position
: HAZARD SW ON
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29
and ground.
BCM
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M18
29
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Hazard switch is ON
0V
Hazard switch is OFF
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SKIA5911E
3.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and hazard switch connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
29 and hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 2.
29 - 2
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
SKIA5912E
4.CHECK GROUND
Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
SKIA5913E
Revision: August 2007
LT-66
2008 Quest
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH
A
Check continuity of hazard switch.
Hazard switch
Terminal
1
2
Condition
B
Continuity
Hazard switch is ON
Yes
Hazard switch is OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if hazard warning lamps do not work after
setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace hazard switch. Refer to LT-78, "Removal and Installation".
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate
C
D
SKIA5914E
E
INFOID:0000000001719106
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
F
Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-6, "Condition of Error Detection".
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter".
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
Bulb Replacement
G
INFOID:0000000001719107
H
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement".
I
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement".
J
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719108
LT
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation".
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP
L
Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-67
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CORNERING LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719109
WKIA5267E
1.
BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719110
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to cornering lamp relay LH and RH, and
• to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
CORNERING LAMP OPERATION
LH Turn
When the lighting switch is in the 2nd position or in the AUTO position (headlamp ON) and turn signal switch is
moved to the left position, BCM sends signal through CAN communication lines to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R then
operates cornering lamp relay LH. When this relay is energized, power is supplied
• through IPDM E/R terminal 34
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 9.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp LH terminal 8
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
RH Turn
When the lighting switch is in the 2nd position or in the AUTO position (headlamp ON) and turn signal switch is
moved to the right position, BCM sends signal through CAN communication lines to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R then
operates cornering lamp relay RH. When this relay is energized, power is supplied
Revision: August 2007
LT-68
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through IPDM E/R terminal 23
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 9.
Ground is supplied
• to front combination lamp RH terminal 8
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
A
B
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719111
C
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-69
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719112
WKWA4699E
Revision: August 2007
LT-70
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - CORNER -
INFOID:0000000001719113
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4700E
Revision: August 2007
LT-71
2008 Quest
P
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALLWA0139GB
Revision: August 2007
LT-72
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0140GB
P
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719114
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719115
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
LT-73
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000001719116
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-68, "System Description".
Perform preliminary check. Refer to LT-74, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719117
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" and PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground
Circuit Inspection"
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000001719118
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
3.
4.
5.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Item name
Cornering lamp
CONSULT−III
screen display
Display or
unit
CRNRNG LMP REQ
ON/OFF
Monitor item selection
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
×
–
×
Signal status input from BCM
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "CORNERING LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "RH" or "LH" item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
Revision: August 2007
LT-74
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
A
Display Item List
Test item
Description
CORNERING LAMP (RH)
Cornering lamp (RH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
CORNERING LAMP (LH)
Cornering lamp (LH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
Cornering Lamp Does Not Operate
B
INFOID:0000000001719119
C
1.ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-III
1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "CORNERING LAMP" during active test.
3. Select "RH", then "LH" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
4. Make sure cornering lamp LH and RH operate.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Make sure "CRNRNG LMP REQ" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
NOTE:
Lighting switch must not be in OFF position.
D
E
F
G
H
I
When lighting switch is in
TURN RH position
When lighting switch is in
TURN LH position
: CRNRNG LMP REQ R
J
: CRNRNG LMP REQ L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
LT
3.CHECK BULB
L
Check bulb standard of each cornering lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace cornering lamp bulb. Refer to LT-76, "Bulb Replacement".
M
4.CHECK CORNERING LAMPS CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and front combination lamp LH and RH connectors.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front combination lamp harness connector terminal.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
O
B
Terminal
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E122
23
RH
E137
LH
E124
34
LH
E43
Terminal
7
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: August 2007
P
Continuity
WKIA4189E
LT-75
2008 Quest
CORNERING LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK GROUND
Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector
terminal and ground.
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E137
LH
E43
Continuity
Terminal
8
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Bulb Replacement
WKIA4190E
INFOID:0000000001719120
Refer to "LT-22, "Bulb Replacement".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719121
Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
LT-76
2008 Quest
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal
1.
2.
A
INFOID:0000000001719122
Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-12, "Steering Column Cover".
While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward
driver door and disconnect from the base.
B
C
D
LKIA0013E
Installation
E
INFOID:0000000001719123
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-77
2008 Quest
HAZARD SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719124
Removal
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C".
Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1).
LKIA0707E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
LT-78
2008 Quest
COMBINATION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COMBINATION SWITCH
A
Wiring Diagram - COMBSW -
INFOID:0000000001719125
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
WKWA4703E
Combination Switch Reading Function
INFOID:0000000001719126
For details, refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Revision: August 2007
LT-79
2008 Quest
COMBINATION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719127
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the signals will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn Right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn Left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch
signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Headlamp switch 1 (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting
switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Auto light switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front fog lamp switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
INT VOLUME
Revision: August 2007
[1 - 7]
Displays intermittent operation knob setting (1 - 7), determined from wiper switch signal.
LT-80
2008 Quest
COMBINATION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
A
RR WIPER ON
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Rear Wiper (ON)/(OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
RR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Rear Wiper INT (ON)/(OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
RR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Rear Washer (ON)/(OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
Combination Switch Inspection
B
INFOID:0000000001719128
C
1.SYSTEM CHECK
1.
Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs.
D
System 1
System 2
System 3
System 4
System 5
—
FR WASHER
FR WIPER LO
TURN LH
TURN RH
FR WIPER HI
—
FR WIPER INT
PASSING
HEAD LAMP1
INT VOLUME 1
RR WASHER
—
HEAD LAMP2
HI BEAM
RR WIPER INT
INT VOLUME 3
AUTO LIGHT
—
TAIL LAMP
INT VOLUME 2
RR WIPER ON
—
FR FOG
—
E
F
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.SYSTEM CHECK
With CONSULT-III
1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR".
3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.
Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT
WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, turn ON-OFF normally.
H
I
Without CONSULT-III
J
Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.
Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER
INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally.
LT
Check results
Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.>>Replace lighting switch or wiper switch.
Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally.>>GO TO 3.
L
HARNESS INSPECTION
3.
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-81
2008 Quest
COMBINATION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Suspect
system
BCM
Connector
1
2
3
M18
4
5
4.
Combination switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Input 1
6
6
Output 1
36
1
Input 2
5
7
Output 2
35
2
Input 3
4
Output 3
34
Input 4
3
9
Output 4
33
4
Input 5
2
8
Output 5
32
5
M28
10
3
Continuity
Yes
LKIA0284E
Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system
and ground.
Suspect
system
BCM
Connector
1
2
3
M18
4
5
Continuity
Terminal
Input 1
6
Output 1
36
Input 2
5
Output 2
35
Input 3
4
Output 3
34
Input 4
3
Output 4
33
Input 5
2
Output 5
32
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit.
4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF.
Set wiper dial to position 4.
Connect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Revision: August 2007
LT-82
2008 Quest
COMBINATION SWITCH
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Turn ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input
(BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system.
A
B
Combination switch
Suspect system
(+)
Connector
Terminal
1
Input 1
1
2
Input 2
2
3
Input 3
3
4
M28
Input 4
4
5
Input 5
5
C
D
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
F
G
SKIA4976E
5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
H
Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection.
Procedure
1
Replace
lighting
switch.
2
Confirm
check results.
3
OK
INSPECTION END
NG
Replace wiper
switch.
4
Confirm
check results.
5
OK
INSPECTION END
NG
Replace switch
base.
6
Confirm
check results.
7
OK
INSPECTION END
NG
Confirm symptom
again.
>> Inspection End.
I
J
LT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719129
L
Refer to LT-77, "Removal".
Switch Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719130
M
Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-83
2008 Quest
STOP LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STOP LAMP
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719131
Power is supplied at all times
• through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• to stop lamp switch terminal 1.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the stop lamp switch is closed and power is supplied
• through stop lamp switch terminal 2
• to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and
• to high-mounted stop lamp terminal +.
Ground is supplied
• to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5
• through grounds B7 and B19, and
• to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5
• through grounds B117 and B132, and
• to high-mounted stop lamp terminal –
• through grounds D403 and D404.
With power and ground supplied, the stop lamps illuminate.
Revision: August 2007
LT-84
2008 Quest
STOP LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - STOP/L -
INFOID:0000000001719132
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4704E
Revision: August 2007
LT-85
2008 Quest
P
STOP LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4705E
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719133
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
Removal
Revision: August 2007
LT-86
2008 Quest
STOP LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-35, "Rear
Washer Nozzle".
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the nuts and remove the high-mounted stop lamp.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the
high-mounted stop lamp housing.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket.
A
B
C
WKIA1260E
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
STOP LAMP
E
Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719134
F
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
Removal
1.
2.
3.
G
Remove the rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-35, "Rear
Washer Nozzle".
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the nuts and remove the high-mounted stop lamp.
H
I
J
WKIA1260E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LT
STOP LAMP
Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-87
2008 Quest
BACK-UP LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram - BACK/L -
INFOID:0000000001719135
WKWA4706E
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719136
Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement".
Revision: August 2007
LT-88
2008 Quest
BACK-UP LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719137
A
Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation".
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-89
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719138
WKIA5268E
1.
BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719139
Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting
switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control
module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN
communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This
relay, when energized, directs power to the parking, license plate and tail lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34 located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives
input signal requesting the parking, license plate and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU in the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp
relay coil, which when energized, directs power
• through IPDM E/R terminal 22
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5
• to license plate lamp LH and RH terminal +
• to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
Revision: August 2007
LT-90
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and
• to license plate lamp LH and RH terminal –
• through grounds D403 and D404, and
• to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5
• through grounds B7 and B19, and
• to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5
• through grounds B117 and B132.
With power and ground supplied, the parking, license plate and tail lamps illuminate.
A
B
C
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
D
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position and the ignition switch is turned
from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the parking, license and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the parking,
license plate and tail lamps are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III.
CAN Communication System Description
E
F
INFOID:0000000001719140
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-91
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719141
WKWA4707E
Revision: August 2007
LT-92
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -
INFOID:0000000001719142
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4708E
Revision: August 2007
LT-93
2008 Quest
P
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4709E
Revision: August 2007
LT-94
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4710E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-95
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4711E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719143
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719144
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
LT-96
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719145
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-90, "System Description".
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-97, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do the parking, license and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
B
C
INFOID:0000000001719146
D
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" and PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground
Circuit Inspection".
CONSULT-III Functions
E
INFOID:0000000001719147
F
Refer to LT-12, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Refer to LT-14, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate
INFOID:0000000001719148
G
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "LIGHT SW 1ST" turns ON-OFF
linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
1ST position
H
I
: LIGHT SW 1ST ON
Without CONSULT-III
Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection".
J
LT
2.ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-III
1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
4. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamp operation.
Parking, license plate and tail lamp should operate
L
M
N
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
2. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamp operation.
O
Parking, license plate and tail lamp should operate
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
P
3.CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "TAIL&CLR REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 1ST position.
Revision: August 2007
LT-97
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When lighting switch is in
1ST position
: TAIL&CLR REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
4.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp, license plate lamp and rear combination lamp connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
2. When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Terminals
(+)
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
(–)
Voltage
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
4
WKIA4194E
License plate lamp
(+)
Connector
RH
D508
LH
D509
(–)
Voltage
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
+
WKIA1076E
Rear combination lamp
(+)
Connector
RH
B130 (without trailer tow)
B306 (with trailer tow)
LH
B35 (without trailer tow)
B302 (with trailer tow)
(–)
Voltage
Ground
Battery
voltage
Terminal
2
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: August 2007
WKIA1257E
LT-98
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
front combination lamp harness connector.
A
B
B
IPDM E/R
connector
Terminal
E122
22
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
C
Continuity
Terminal
4
D
Yes
WKIA4195E
4.
E
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
license plate lamp harness connector.
F
IPDM E/R
Connector
License plate lamp
Terminal
E122
Connector
22
RH
D508
LH
D509
Continuity
Terminal
G
+
Yes
H
WKIA1078E
5.
I
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
rear combination lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
Connector
RH
E122
J
Rear combination lamp
22
Terminal
B130 (without trailer tow)
B306 (with trailer tow)
B35 (without trailer tow)
B302 (with trailer tow)
LH
Continuity
LT
2
Yes
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1258E
M
6.CHECK GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground.
N
O
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E107
LH
E11
Continuity
Terminal
P
5
Ground
Yes
WKIA4197E
Revision: August 2007
LT-99
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between license lamp plate harness connector
and ground.
License plate lamp
Connector
RH
D508
LH
D509
Continuity
Terminal
–
Ground
Yes
WKIA1080E
4.
Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Rear combination lamp
Connector
RH
B130 (without trailer tow)
B306 (with trailer tow)
LH
B35 (without trailer tow)
B302 (with trailer tow)
Continuity
Terminal
5
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check bulbs.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1259E
Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)
INFOID:0000000001719149
1.CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
Turn ignition switch ON. Turn the combination switch (lighting switch) to the OFF position. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
2. Verify that the parking, license plate, and tail lamps turn on and off after approximately 10 minutes.
OK or NG
OK
>> Ignition relay malfunction. Refer to PG-18, "Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction".
NG
>> Inspection End.
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719150
FRONT PARKING LAMP
Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement".
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer toEI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove license plate lamp socket.
Remove license plate lamp.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TAIL LAMP
Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719151
FRONT PARKING LAMP
Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
LT-100
2008 Quest
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
A
Removal
1.
2.
Remove license plate finisher. Refer to EI-23.
Remove license plate lamp.
B
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
C
TAIL LAMP
Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-101
2008 Quest
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Bulb Replacement
INFOID:0000000001719152
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Turn rear combination lamp socket counterclockwise and remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove bulb from rear combination lamp socket..
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719153
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Turn rear combination lamp socket counterclockwise and remove rear combination lamp.
Remove rear combination lamp bolts.
Pull rear combination lamp to remove from vehicle.
WKIA1081E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Install rear combination lamp harness and grommet so that paint
mark on grommet is at top and harness points down.
WKIA1641E
Revision: August 2007
LT-102
2008 Quest
TRAILER TOW
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TRAILER TOW
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719154
B
C
D
WKIA4513E
1.
Fuse and fusible link box
2.
A. Trailer tow control unit B303
B. Trailer tow ground
(View with rear lower finisher assembly LH removed)
System Description
E
F
INFOID:0000000001719155
G
Power is supplied at all times
• through 20A fuse (No. 24, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to trailer tow control unit terminal 7.
Ground is supplied
• to trailer tow control unit terminal 5, and
• to trailer connector terminal 4
• through grounds B7 and B19.
H
I
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION
With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied
J
• through rear combination lamp LH
• to trailer tow control unit terminal 3.
The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow control unit. The trailer tow control unit supplies power
LT
• through trailer tow control unit terminal 1
• to trailer connector terminal 3.
TRAILER STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
The trailer stop, turn signal and hazard lamps are all controlled by the trailer tow control unit. The trailer tow
control unit regulates the amount of voltage supplied to the trailer lamps. If either turn signal or the hazard
lamps are turned on and the trailer tow control unit gets a brake lamp input, the trailer tow control unit supplies
more voltage to the trailer lamps to make them illuminate brighter.
Stop lamp input is supplied
• through rear combination lamp LH
• to trailer tow control unit terminal 8.
Left turn signal and hazard lamp input is supplied
• through rear combination lamp LH
• to trailer tow control unit terminal 4.
Right turn signal and hazard lamp input is supplied
• through rear combination lamp RH
• to trailer tow control unit terminal 9.
Based on the stop lamp, turn signal lamp and hazard lamp inputs to the trailer tow control unit, power is supplied to trailer stop/turn lamp LH
• through trailer tow control unit terminal 2
• to trailer harness connector terminal 2.
Power is also supplied to trailer stop/turn lamp RH
• through trailer tow control unit terminal 6
• to trailer harness connector terminal 1.
Revision: August 2007
LT-103
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
TRAILER TOW
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - T/TOW -
INFOID:0000000001719156
WKWA4712E
Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719157
TRAILER TOW CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Revision: August 2007
LT-104
2008 Quest
TRAILER TOW
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Wire color
1
BR
2
Y
Item
Tail lamps signal output
Stop/LH turn lamp (output)
Condition
When tail lamps operate
All other conditions
4
R/L
G/B
Tail lamps signal input
LH turn lamps input
When brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
When LH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate
Battery voltage
(intermittently)
0V
When tail lamps operate
All other conditions
6
W
When LH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate
G
Ground
Stop/RH turn lamp (output)
R
—
8
R/G
9
G/Y
Stop lamps signal input
RH turn lamps input
Battery voltage
(intermittently)
—
When brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
When RH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate
Battery voltage
(intermittently)
Power supply
C
D
E
F
0V
—
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
When RH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate
All other conditions
B
Battery voltage
0V
All other conditions
7
A
0V
All other conditions
5
Battery voltage
0V
All other conditions
3
Voltage (Approx.)
Battery voltage
G
Battery voltage
0V
Battery voltage
(intermittently)
0V
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-105
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719158
WKIA5269E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Lamps on demand switch M108
4.
Foot lamp LH M99
RH M100
5.
Personal lamp with rear roof console 6.
R52, R54
Revision: August 2007
LT-106
3.
Key switch M27
Ignition keyhole illumination M25
Personal lamp without rear roof console R2, R7, R12, R13
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Cargo lamp R11
8.
Room/map lamps R9
9.
Vanity lamp ( if equipped), LH R3
RH R8
10. Back door switch (without power
back door) D512
Back door latch (door ajar switch)
(with power back door) D511
11. Main power window and door lock/ 12. Front door lock assembly LH (key
cylinder switch) D14
unlock switch D7, D8
Power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH D105
13. Front door switch LH B8
RH B108
14
Sliding door switch LH B46
RH B135
A
B
15. Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
C
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719159
When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, room/map lamp and personal lamp ON/OFF is controlled
by timer according to signals from switches including key switch, door switches, unlock signal from keyfob,
door lock and unlock switch, key cylinder switch, and ignition switch.
When room/map lamp and personal lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room/
map lamp and personal lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second.
The room/map lamp and personal lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module).
Room/map lamp and personal lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-III.
Ignition keyhole illumination turns ON when front door LH is opened (door switch ON) or key is removed from
key cylinder. Illumination turns OFF when front door LH is closed (door switch OFF).
Step and foot lamp turns ON when any door is opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when all doors are
closed (all door switches OFF).
D
E
F
G
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
Power is supplied at all times
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
H
• to key switch terminal 1, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57, and
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I
• to BCM terminal 70.
When the key is inserted in key switch, power is supplied
• through the key switch terminal 2
J
• to BCM terminal 37.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
LT
• to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
L
When the front door LH is opened, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 47
• through front door switch LH terminal 1
M
• through case ground of front door switch LH.
When the front door RH is opened, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 12
• through front door switch RH terminal 1
N
• through case ground of front door switch RH.
When the sliding door LH is opened, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 48
O
• through sliding door switch LH terminal 1
• through case ground of sliding door switch LH.
When the sliding door RH is opened, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 13
P
• through sliding door switch RH terminal 1
• through case ground of sliding door switch RH.
When the liftgate is opened, ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 43
• through back door switch terminal 1 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar switch) terminal
7 (with power back door)
• through back door switch terminal 3 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar switch) terminal
8 (with power back door)
Revision: August 2007
LT-107
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through grounds D403 and D404.
When doors are locked or unlocked by either door lock/unlock switch, BCM receives a ground signal
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows)
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 15 (without rear power vent windows), or
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16
• through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is unlocked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows)
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 7 (without rear power vent windows)
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 6
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is locked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows)
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 4 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 6 (without rear power vent windows)
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 1
• through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by BCM, ground is supplied
• through BCM terminal 63
• to lamps on demand switch terminal 3
• through lamps on demand switch terminal 4 (with switch in DOOR position)
• to room/map lamps terminal 2
• to personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row terminal 2 (without rear roof console) or personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row
terminal 3 (with rear roof console).
With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate.
SWITCH OPERATION
When front door switch LH is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied
• to ignition keyhole illumination terminal –
• through BCM terminal 1.
And power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 56
• to ignition keyhole illumination terminal +.
When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied
• to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and
• to foot lamp LH and RH terminal –
• through BCM terminal 62.
And power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 56
• to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 2
• to foot lamp LH and RH terminal +.
When room/map lamps switch is ON, ground is supplied
• to room/map lamps terminal 3
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 56
• to room/map lamps terminal 1.
When vanity lamp (if equipped), LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied
• to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal –
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied
Revision: August 2007
LT-108
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through BCM terminal 56
• to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal +.
When personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied
• to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 2nd
row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly)
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 56
• to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 1 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 2nd
row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly).
When personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied
• to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 3rd
row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly)
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 56
• to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 1(without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 3rd
row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly).
When cargo lamp is ON, ground is supplied
• to cargo lamp terminal 1
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 56
• to cargo lamp terminal 2.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION
H
When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs
timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room/map lamp ON/OFF.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I
• to key switch terminal 1.
Key is removed from ignition key cylinder (key switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
J
• to BCM terminal 22
• through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or 12
(without rear power vent windows).
At the time that front door LH is opened, BCM detects that front door LH is unlocked. It determines that interior LT
room/map lamp timer operation conditions are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds.
Key is in ignition key cylinder (key switch ON), power is supplied
• through key switch terminal 2
L
• to BCM terminal 37.
When key is removed from key switch (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM
detects that key has been removed, determines that interior room/map lamp timer conditions are met, and
M
turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds.
When front door LH opens → closes and the key is not inserted in the key switch (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door open) → 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior room/map lamp operation are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds.
N
Timer control is canceled under the following conditions.
• Front door LH is locked [when locked with keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front
door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)]
O
• Front door LH is opened (front door switch LH turns ON)
• Ignition switch ON.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
If interior lamp is left "ON", it will not be turned out even when door is closed.
BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned OFF.
BCM controls interior lamps listed below:
• Vanity lamp (if equipped)
• Room/map lamp
• Cargo lamp
• Personal lamp
• Step lamps
Revision: August 2007
LT-109
2008 Quest
P
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Foot lamps
• Ignition keyhole illumination
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when
• signal received from keyfob, or main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly
LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked
• door is opened or closed
• key is removed from or inserted in ignition key cylinder.
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III and through
the display (with color display).
Revision: August 2007
LT-110
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719160
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0141GB
Revision: August 2007
LT-111
2008 Quest
P
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4714E
Revision: August 2007
LT-112
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - INT/L -
INFOID:0000000001719161
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4715E
Revision: August 2007
LT-113
2008 Quest
P
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4716E
Revision: August 2007
LT-114
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4717E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-115
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4718E
Revision: August 2007
LT-116
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0142GB
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-117
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE
WKWA4720E
Revision: August 2007
LT-118
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4721E
P
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719162
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1.
INFOID:0000000001719163
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Revision: August 2007
LT-119
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-107, "System Description".
3. Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-120, "Preliminary Check".
4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
5. Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
6. Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719164
SWITCH INSPECTION
• Ensure lamps on demand switch is in the DOOR or ON position.
BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719165
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
Display Item List
Item
Description
CONSULT-III
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
The 30 seconds operating function of the interior room lamps and the
ignition keyhole illumination can be selected when front door LH is released (unlocked).
ON/OFF
ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET
The time in order to escalate illumination can be adjusted when the
interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned on.
MODE 1 - 7
ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET
The time in order to diminish illumination can be adjusted when the
interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned off.
MODE 1 - 7
Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF".
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Time (sec.)
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
0
Revision: August 2007
LT-120
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DATA MONITOR
A
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
C
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
B
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
D
E
Display Item List
Monitor item
F
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
KEY ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Key inserted (ON)/key removed (OFF)" status judged from the key switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the front door LH as judged from the front door switch LH signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from front door switch RH signal.
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from sliding door switch RH
signal.
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from sliding door switch LH
signal.
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from back door switch signal.
KEY CYL LK-SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door locked (ON)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in front door LH.
KEY CYL UN-SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in front door
LH.
CDL LOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door locked (ON)/Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection
switch in front door LH.
CDL UNLOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in front door
RH.
KEYLESS LOCK
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Locked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lock signal.
KEYLESS UNLOCK
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Unlocked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from unlock signal.
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
N
1.
2.
3.
4.
O
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
P
Test item
Description
INT LAMP
Interior room lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
IGN ILLUM
Ignition keyhole illumination can be operated by ON-OFF operation.
STEP LAMP TEST
Step lamps can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
LUGGAGE LAMP TEST
Cargo lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
Revision: August 2007
LT-121
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Room/Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719166
1.CHECK EACH SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list
turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-120, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" for switches and
their functions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
2.ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. Select "INT LAMP" active test.
When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, use active test to make sure interior room lamp operates.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ROOM/MAP LAMPS INPUT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between room/map lamps harness connector terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Room/map
lamps connector
Terminal
R9
1
(–)
Voltage
(approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
WKIA4253E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK LAMPS ON DEMAND SWITCH
1.
2.
Disconnect lamps on demand switch connector.
Check continuity between lamps on demand switch terminals.
Lamps on demand switch
Terminal
3
4
Condition
Continuity
Lamps on demand
switch position: DOOR
Yes
Lamps on demand
switch position: OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace lamps on demand switch.
WKIA1085E
5.CHECK LAMPS ON DEMAND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Connect lamps on demand switch connector.
Turn lamps on demand switch to DOOR position.
Revision: August 2007
LT-122
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect BCM connector.
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
lamps on demand switch harness connector terminal.
A
A
B
B
BCM
connector
Terminal
Lamps on demand
switch connector
Terminal
M20
63
M108
3
Continuity
C
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if room/map lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA5270E
D
6.CHECK ROOM/MAP LAMPS CIRCUIT
1.
2.
E
Disconnect BCM connector and room/map lamps connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
room/map lamps harness connector terminal.
A
BCM
connector
M20
F
B
Terminal
Room/map lamps
connector
Terminal
56
R9
1
G
Continuity
Yes
H
OK or NG
WKIA5271E
OK
>> Replace BCM if room/map lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector between BCM and room/map lamps or between room/map lamps
and lamps on demand switch.
Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate (Room/Map Lamps Operate)
I
J
INFOID:0000000001719167
1.CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH
LT
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list
turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-107, "System Description" for switches and their function.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning door switch.
L
M
2.CHECK PERSONAL LAMP OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Confirm lamps on demand switch is in the DOOR position.
Disconnect personal lamp connector.
Open any door.
Check voltage between personal lamp harness connector terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
N
O
: Battery voltage should exist.
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1088E
Revision: August 2007
LT-123
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK PERSONAL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect lamps on demand switch connector.
Check continuity between lamps on demand switch harness
connector M108 terminal 4 and personal lamp harness connector terminal 2 (without rear roof console assembly) or terminal 3
(with rear roof console assembly).
4 - 2 or 3
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace personal lamp.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1089E
Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719168
1.CHECK EACH SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list
turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-120, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" for switches and
their functions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
2.ACTIVE TEST
1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. Select "INT LAMP".
2. Select "IGN ILLUM" active test to make sure lamp operates.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION INPUT
1.
Check voltage between ignition keyhole illumination harness
connector M25 terminal + and ground.
+ - Ground
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
WKIA1090E
4.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION BULB
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ignition keyhole illumination connector.
Check continuity between ignition keyhole illumination terminals
+ and –.
+-–
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace ignition keyhole illumination bulb.
WKIA1248E
5.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
LT-124
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
1 and ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal –.
–-1
A
B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not
work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18,
"Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WKIA1911E
D
6.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and ignition keyhole illumination
connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 56
and ignition keyhole illumination connector M25 (B) terminal +.
+ - 56
E
F
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not
work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18,
"Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
All Step/Foot Lamps Do Not Operate
G
WKIA5272E
H
INFOID:0000000001719169
I
1.CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list
turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-120, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" for switches and J
their functions.
OK or NG
LT
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
2.CHECK STEP LAMP POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between front step lamp LH harness connector
terminal and ground.
M
Terminals
(+)
Front step lamp
LH connector
Terminal
D11
2
(–)
Voltage
(approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
N
O
WKIA5273E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
P
3.CHECK STEP LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
LT-125
2008 Quest
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
front step lamp LH harness connector terminal.
A
B
BCM connector
Terminal
Front step lamp
LH connector
Terminal
M20
62
D11
1
Continuity
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if front step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA5274E
4.CHECK STEP LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
front step lamp LH harness connector terminal.
A
B
BCM connector
Terminal
Front step lamp
LH connector
Terminal
M20
56
D11
2
Continuity
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if front step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate
WKIA5275E
INFOID:0000000001719170
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
All interior room lamps switch are OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 and ground.
56 - Ground
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair harness or connector. In a case of making a
short circuit, be sure to disconnect battery negative
cable after repairing harness and then reconnect.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Revision: August 2007
LT-126
WKIA5276E
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ILLUMINATION
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719171
B
C
D
WKIA5277E
1.
BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed)
2.
Combination switch (lighting switch)
M28
3.
E
Combination meter M24 (illumination
control)
F
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719172
Control of the illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position or if the auto light system (if equipped) G
is activated the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room)
across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail H
lamp relay. This relay, when energized, directs power to the illumination lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
I
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
J
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 57, and
LT
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse [No.19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
L
• to combination meter terminal 40.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
M
• to BCM terminal 38, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 38.
N
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
O
• to BCM terminal 67 and
• to combination meter terminals 20 and 21
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
P
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position or if the auto light system (if equipped) is activated, the
BCM receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to
the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay
which, when energized, directs power
Revision: August 2007
LT-127
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through IPDM E/R terminal 22
• to A/T device (illumination) terminal 3
• to front heated seat switch LH (illumination) terminal 5 (with heated seats)
• to pedal adjusting switch (illumination) terminal 5 (with adjustable pedals)
• to TCS OFF switch (illumination) terminal 3 (without VDC)
• to VDC OFF switch (illumination) terminal 3 (with VDC)
• to AV switch (illumination) terminal 3
• to hazard switch (illumination) terminal 3
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 16
• to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 5
• to audio unit terminal 8
• to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 5 (with rear sonar system)
• to lamps on demand switch terminal 5
• to DVD player terminal 12 (with DVD entertainment system)
• to glove box lamp terminal +
• to display unit terminal 4 (with monochrome display unit)
• to display control unit terminal 14 (with color display unit)
• to front air control terminal 8
• to NAVI control unit terminal 61 (with NAVI)
• to rear air control (rear) terminal 10
• to front heated seat switch RH (illumination) terminal 5 (with heated seats)
• to console lamp terminal 2
• to automatic door main switch terminal 5 (with power sliding door)
• to Bluetooth on indicator terminal 3 (with Bluetooth)
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 6 (with rear audio remote control unit)
• through resistor-1 terminal 2 (with steering wheel audio control switches)
• through resistor-1 terminal 1 (with steering wheel audio control switches)
• through combination switch (spiral cable) terminal 26 (with steering wheel audio control switches)
• to spiral cable (steering switch) terminal 18 (with steering wheel audio control switches).
Illumination is controlled
• through combination meter (illumination control) terminal 1
• to A/T device terminal 4
• to TCS OFF switch terminal 4 (without VDC)
• to VDC OFF switch terminal 4 (with VDC)
• to AV switch terminal 4
• to hazard switch terminal 4
• to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12
• to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 1
• to audio unit terminal 7
• to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 4 (with rear sonar system)
• to lamps on demand switch terminal 6
• to DVD player terminal 10 (with DVD entertainment system)
• to front air control terminal 9
• through combination switch (spiral cable) terminal 27 (with steering wheel audio control switches)
• to spiral cable (steering switch) terminal 21 (with steering wheel audio control switches).
• to console lamp terminal 1 (with power sliding door) and
• to automatic door main switch terminal 7 (with power sliding door).
Ground is supplied
• to glove box lamp terminal –
• to display unit terminal 6 (with monochrome display unit)
• to display control unit terminal 3 (with color display unit)
• to console lamp terminal 1 (without power sliding door)
• to rear air control (front) terminal 1
• to combination meter terminals 20 and 21
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 (with rear audio remote control unit)
• through grounds B7 and B19, and
• to NAVI control unit terminal 1 (with NAVI)
• to rear air control (rear) terminal 9
• through grounds B117 and B132.
With power and ground supplied, illumination lamps illuminate.
Revision: August 2007
LT-128
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST or 2ND position or if auto light system (if equipped)
is activated and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control function is activated.
Under this condition, the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the illumination lamps are
turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) after
illumination lamps are turned off by the battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III and the display (with NAVI).
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719173
A
B
C
D
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-129
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719174
ALLWA0143GB
Revision: August 2007
LT-130
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4723E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-131
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - ILL -
INFOID:0000000001719175
WKWA4724E
Revision: August 2007
LT-132
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4725E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-133
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4726E
Revision: August 2007
LT-134
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4727E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-135
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4728E
Revision: August 2007
LT-136
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0144GB
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-137
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4730E
Revision: August 2007
LT-138
2008 Quest
ILLUMINATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
N
O
WKWA4731E
P
Revision: August 2007
LT-139
2008 Quest
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
INFOID:0000000001719176
Item
Wattage (W)*
Low
51 (HB4)
High
60 (HB3)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Exterior Lamp
INFOID:0000000001719177
Item
Wattage (W)*
Turn signal lamp/parking lamp
Front combination lamp
Cornering lamp
27
Stop/Tail lamp
Rear combination lamp
29/8
27/7
Turn signal lamp
27
Back-up lamp
18
Fog lamp
55 (H11)
License plate lamp
5
High-mounted stop lamp
13
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Interior Lamp/Illumination
INFOID:0000000001719178
Item
Wattage (W)*
Glove box lamp
3.4
Ignition keyhole illumination lamp
0.74
Room/Map lamp
8
Console lamp
LED
A/T device lamp
3
Foot lamp
3.4
Step lamp
3.8
Cargo lamp
7
Vanity lamp
1.32
Personal lamp (with rear roof console assembly)
8
Personal lamp (without rear roof console assembly)
8
Running board lamp
3.4
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: August 2007
LT-140
2008 Quest
ENGINE
SECTION
LU
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A
LU
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 2
Inspection ................................................................. 8
Changing Engine Oil ................................................. 9
OIL FILTER ....................................................... 10
Removal and Installation .........................................10
LUBRICATION SYSTEM .................................... 6
Lubrication Circuit ..................................................... 6
Schematic ................................................................. 7
G
OIL PUMP ......................................................... 12
Removal and Installation .........................................12
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................13
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
F
OIL COOLER .................................................... 16
H
Removal and Installation .........................................16
I
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 18
J
Standard and Limit ..................................................18
ENGINE OIL ........................................................ 8
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001717129
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Liquid Gasket
INFOID:0000000001717130
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the sealant using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to
lightly tap (1) the Tool to slide (2) it in the areas where the sealant
is applied.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed
screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the mating
surface.
• Remove the sealant completely from the groove, bolts, and
bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surface removing any adhering
moisture, grease and foreign material.
PBIC0003E
3.
Attach the sealant tube to the Tool.
Tool number
: WS39930000 (
—
)
• Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42.
Revision: August 2007
LU-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions using Tool.
• If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove.
A
LU
C
WBIA0567E
D
• As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of service manual.
• Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating
component.
• If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Do not retighten after the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
the engine with the proper oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11.
E
F
G
SEM159F
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001717131
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST25051001
(J-25695-1)
Oil pressure gauge
Measuring oil pressure
Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25
kg-cm2, 356 psi)
NT050
Adapting oil pressure gauge to upper oil pan
ST25052000
(J-25695-2)
Hose
S-NT559
Removing and installing oil filter
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench
S-NT772
WS39930000
(
—
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
)
NT052
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
NT046
Commercial Service Tool
Revision: August 2007
INFOID:0000000001717132
LU-4
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool name
Description
Deep socket
Removing and installing oil pressure switch
Deep socket size 26 mm, 3/8 drive
A
LU
C
NT818
Power tools
Loosening nuts and bolts
D
E
PBIC0190E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-5
2008 Quest
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication Circuit
INFOID:0000000001717133
WBIA0366E
1.
Intake camshaft journal (No. 2)
2.
Intake camshaft
3.
Main oil gallery
4.
Piston oil jet
5.
Chain case oil gallery
6.
Oil pan
7.
Oil cooler
8.
Oil filter
9.
Oil strainer
10. Oil pump
11. Timing chain oil jet
12. Chain case
13. IVT control cover
14. IVT controller
15. No. 1 camshaft bracket
16. IVT control solenoid valve
17. Exhaust camshaft journal (No. 1)
18. Camshaft chain tensioner oil gallery
19. Exhaust camshaft
Revision: August 2007
LU-6
2008 Quest
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001717134
A
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
SBIA0534E
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-7
2008 Quest
ENGINE OIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001717135
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
• Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat
and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already
running, turn it off and allow five minutes before checking.
• Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as
indicated on the dipstick.
• If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to
MA-11.
SMA954C
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
• Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
• If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or
replace damaged parts.
ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE
Check for oil leakage around the following areas:
• Upper and lower oil pan
• Oil pan drain plug
• Oil pressure sensor
• Oil filter
• Oil cooler
• Water pump cover
• Timing chain tensioner cover
• Intake valve timing (IVT) control cover and intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve
• Front cover
• Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
• Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
• Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case
• Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case
• Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear)
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• Put the selector lever in the Park “P” position.
1. Check the oil level. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection".
2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Remove the oil pressure sensor.
4. Install Tools.
WBIA0571E
5.
Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Revision: August 2007
LU-8
2008 Quest
ENGINE OIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
A
7.
a.
b.
Engine Speed
Approximate Discharge Pressure
Idle speed
More than 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)
2,000 rpm
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
LU
CAUTION:
If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages.
After the inspections, install the oil pressure sensor as follows:
Remove the old sealant adhering to sensor and engine.
Apply thread sealant and tighten the oil pressure sensor to specification using Tool.
• Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-42.
Oil pressure sensor
C
D
E
: 14.8 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Changing Engine Oil
INFOID:0000000001717136
F
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin
contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as
possible.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil.
2. Check for oil leaks from the engine.
3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap.
5. Drain the engine oil.
6. Install the oil drain plug.
G
H
I
J
Oil pan drain plug
: Refer to EM-29 .
CAUTION:
• Clean the drain plug and install using a new washer.
K
SMA096D
Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to MA-11 .
CAUTION:
• The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only.
• Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Warm up the engine and check the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks.
9. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection" .
L
7.
M
N
O
P
SMA954C
Revision: August 2007
LU-9
2008 Quest
OIL FILTER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717137
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the RH splash shield.
Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
• The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine
NISSAN oil filter.
• Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine
oil are hot.
• When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb
any oil leaks or spills.
• Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
• Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and
the vehicle.
SMA096D
INSTALLATION
1.
Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface on the oil cooler.
2.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter
as shown.
SMA010
3.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as shown. Or
tighten to specification using Tool.
Oil filter
Tool number
: 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 lb-ft)
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
SMA229B
4.
5.
After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks.
Install the RH splash shield.
Revision: August 2007
LU-10
2008 Quest
OIL FILTER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to
LU-8, "Inspection" .
A
LU
C
SMA954C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-11
2008 Quest
OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717138
WBIA0601E
1.
Cylinder block
2.
Oil strainer
3.
Oil pump
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the engine. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the oil strainer.
Remove the oil pump.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
LU-12
2008 Quest
OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001717139
A
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0602E
I
1.
Oil pump cover
2.
Inner rotor
3.
Outer rotor
4.
Oil pump body
5.
Oil strainer
6.
Regulator valve
7.
Regulator spring
8.
Regulator plug
9.
Regulator valve set (6, 7, and 8)
J
10. O-ring
DISASSEMBLY
K
1.
2.
3.
L
Remove oil pump cover.
Remove oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor from oil pump body.
Remove the regulator valve plug, regulator valve spring and regulator valve.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Clearance of Oil Pump Parts
• Measure the rotor clearance with a feeler gauge as shown.
- Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1).
Position 1
M
N
: 0.114 - 0.200 mm (0.0045 - 0.0079 in)
- Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2).
Position 2
O
: less than 0.180 mm (0.0071 in)
P
SLC932A
Revision: August 2007
LU-13
2008 Quest
OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Measure the rotor clearance with a feeler gauge and straightedge
as shown.
- Side clearance is between the inner rotor and the oil pump body
(position 3).
Position 3
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
- Side clearance is between the outer rotor and the oil pump body
(position 4).
Position 4
: 0.050 - 0.110 mm (0.0020 - 0.0043 in)
SLC933A
• Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as
follows.
- Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor
(position A).
- Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside micrometer (position B).
- Clearance 5 = (inner diameter of oil pump body B) – (outer diameter of inner rotor A).
Clearance 5
: 0.045 - 0.091 mm (0.0018 - 0.0036 in)
SLC934AB
Regulator Valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
Visually inspect the components for wear and damage.
Check the regulator valve sliding surface and the regulator
spring.
Coat the regulator valve with engine oil. Check that the regulator
valve falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight.
If damaged, replace the regulator valve set or the oil pump body
as necessary.
WBIA0321E
Regulator Valve to Oil Pump Body Clearance
• Clearance 6 = (regulator valve hole diameter D) – (outer regulator
valve diameter E).
• If the calculated clearance 6 exceeds the standard, replace the oil
pump body.
Clearance 6
: 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in)
CAUTION:
• Coat the regulator valve with clean engine oil.
• Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own
weight.
SLC935AA
ASSEMBLY
Revision: August 2007
LU-14
2008 Quest
OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Assemble the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punch marks on
the oil pump cover side.
A
LU
C
SLC324B
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-15
2008 Quest
OIL COOLER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL COOLER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001717140
WBIA0497E
1.
Oil filter
2.
Oil cooler bolt
3.
Coolant outlet pipe
4.
Coolant outlet hose
5.
Oil cooler
6.
O-ring
7.
Oil pan
8.
Coolant inlet pipe
9.
Relief valve
10. Drain plug
11. Copper gasket
12. Water connector
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drain the engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil".
Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool.
Remove the splash shield.
Disconnect the coolant hoses from the oil cooler.
CAUTION:
Do not spill coolant on the drive belt.
Remove the oil cooler from the upper oil pan.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Revision: August 2007
LU-16
2008 Quest
OIL COOLER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Oil Cooler
Check the oil cooler for cracks. Check the oil cooler for clogging by blowing through the coolant inlet. If necessary, replace the oil cooler.
A
Relief Valve
Inspect the relief valve for movement, cracks, and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, LU
remove the relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve by tapping it into place with
a suitable tool.
INSTALLATION
C
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• When installing the oil cooler, align the stopper slot with the stopper on the upper oil pan.
• Install the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional
Tire and Wheel" for torque specification.
D
E
F
WBIA0369E
G
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection" and CO-10, "System
Inspection".
Start the engine and check that there are no leaks of engine oil or engine coolant.
Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check engine oil level and engine coolant level.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
LU-17
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
INFOID:0000000001717141
OIL PRESSURE
Engine speed
Approximate discharge pressure
Idle speed
More than 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)
2,000 rpm
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
REGULATOR VALVE
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump body clearance
0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
OIL PUMP
Unit: mm (in)
Oil pump body to outer rotor radial clearance
0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079)
Oil pump inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance
Below 0.18 (0.0071)
Oil pump body to inner rotor axial clearance
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Oil pump body to outer rotor axial clearance
0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043)
Inner rotor outer diameter to oil pump body inner diameter clearance
0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2)
Without oil filter change
3.7 (3 7/8, 3 1/4)
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Revision: August 2007
(US qt, Imp qt)
5.0 (5 1/4, 4 3/8)
LU-18
2008 Quest
MAINTENANCE
SECTION
MA
MAINTENANCE
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................ 5
Explanation of General Maintenance ........................ 5
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ................................ 7
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ........................ 7
Schedule 1 ................................................................ 7
Schedule 2 ................................................................ 9
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................................11
Fluids and Lubricants .............................................. 11
Engine Oil Recommendation .................................. 11
ENGINE MAINTENANCE ...................................13
Checking Drive Belts ............................................... 13
Changing Engine Coolant ........................................13
Checking Fuel Line ..................................................17
Changing Air Cleaner Filter .....................................17
Changing Engine Oil ................................................18
Changing Oil Filter ...................................................18
Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type) ......20
Checking EVAP Vapor Line .....................................22
F
G
H
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ........... 23
Changing In-cabin Microfilter ...................................23
Checking Exhaust System .......................................23
Checking A/T Fluid ..................................................23
Changing A/T Fluid ..................................................24
Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type) ..............25
Tire Rotation ............................................................27
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks ...................27
Checking Brake Line and Cables ............................27
Checking Disc Brake ...............................................27
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ......................28
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Line ................28
Axle and Suspension Parts .....................................29
Drive Shaft ...............................................................30
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch .............30
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters .................................................30
I
J
K
MA
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MA-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719561
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
MA-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001719562
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter cap wrench
Removing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
B
C
D
E
NT375
For refilling engine cooling system
KV991J0070
(J-45695)
Coolant refill tool
F
G
LMA053
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
KV991J0010
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
H
I
J
WBIA0539E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001719563
K
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(BT-3373-F)
Belt tension gauge
Checking drive belt tension
MA
M
N
AMA126
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MA-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plugs
S-NT047
Power Tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: August 2007
MA-4
2008 Quest
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
A
Explanation of General Maintenance
INFOID:0000000001719564
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform
checks and inspections themselves or have their NISSAN dealers do them.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Tires
Wheel nuts
C
Reference page
Check the pressure including the spare, at least once a month and always prior
to a long distance trip with a gauge. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
WT-29, "Tire"
When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
WT-6
Windshield
Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.
GW-11
Tire rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
MA-27
Transmitter components in tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS)
Replace grommet seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter on TPMS every tire
replacement by reaching wear limit of tire.
Wheel alignment and
balance
If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
Windshield wiper
blades
Doors and engine
hood
Lamps
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Replace as necessary.
Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back
hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make
sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Make sure that the head lamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and
other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check head
lamp aim. Clean the eclampsia on a regular basis.
WT-27
Item
E
F
G
H
—
I
MA-30
LT-21, "Aiming Adjustment" (US), LT-33, "Aiming Adjustment"
(Canada)
Reference page
Warning lamps and
chimes
Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly.
—
Windshield wiper and
washer
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not
streak.
—
Windshield defroster
Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient
quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
—
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering
condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Seats
Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. to
make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the
locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches
lock securely for folding-down rear seat backs.
—
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and
retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the
belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
MA-30
Revision: August 2007
D
FSU-7, "Front Wheel
Alignment" and MA-25,
"Balancing Wheels
(Bonding Weight Type)"
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle,
etc.
Seat belts
B
J
K
MA
M
N
MA-5
O
PS-7
P
2008 Quest
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Item
Reference page
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
Brakes
Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Brake pedal and
booster
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance
under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep
the floor mats away from the pedal.
BR-5 and BR-21
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held
securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied.
PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service"
Automatic transaxle
“Park” mechanism
Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly and
smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the “P” position without applying any brakes.
—
—
BR-25
UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Item
Reference page
Windshield washer
fluid
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Engine coolant level
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Radiator and hoses
Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that
may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
—
Brake fluid level
Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the
reservoir.
MA-27
Battery
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
SC-4
—
MA-13
Engine drive belts
Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
MA-13
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine.
MA-18
Power steering fluid
level and lines
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
MA-28
Automatic transaxle
fluid level
Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the engine idling.
MA-23
Exhaust system
Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate
the trouble and correct it.
MA-23
The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt
can easily accumulate.
—
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle
has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is
normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for
the cause and correct it immediately.
—
Underbody
Fluid leaks
Revision: August 2007
MA-6
2008 Quest
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance
INFOID:0000000001719565
Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in
which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic
maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
Schedule 1
Schedule 2
Emission Control System Maintenance
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include
one or more of the following driving conditions:
• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures
remaining below freezing.
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
• Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads.
• Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.
C
MA-7
D
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in
Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits.
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-7
Emission Control System Maintenance
MA-9
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-9
Schedule 1
E
F
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
H
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Drive belts
NOTE (1)
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (2)
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
30
(48)
24
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
[R]
MA-17
I*
MA-22
Fuel lines
I*
MA-17
Fuel filter
NOTE (3)
—
Engine coolant
NOTE (4)
MA-13
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Engine oil filter (use genuine
NISSAN engine oil filter or
equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
MA-20
NOTE (5)
K
MA
N
EM-85
O
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
Drive belts
NOTE (1)
I*
MA-13
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (2)
[R]
MA-17
EVAP vapor lines
I*
MA-22
Fuel lines
I*
MA-17
Revision: August 2007
J
M
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
I
MA-13
EVAP vapor lines
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
G
INFOID:0000000001719566
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
B
MA-7
2008 Quest
P
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Fuel filter
NOTE (3)
Engine coolant
NOTE (4)
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
-
R*
MA-13
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Engine oil filter (use genuine
NISSAN engine oil filter or
equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
MA-20
NOTE (5)
EM-85
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to the FL section.
(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
Brake lines & cables
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
I
Brake pads & rotors
I
Automatic transaxle fluid
I
NOTE (1)
I
Steering gear & linkage,
axle & suspension parts
I
Tire rotation
I
I
I
30
(48)
24
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content Title
I
MA-27
I
MA-27
I
MA-24
I
MA-28, MA-29
NOTE (2)
MA-27
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
MA-23
Front drive shaft boot
I
I
I
I
MA-30
R
MA-23
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content Title
I
MA-27
I
MA-27
I
MA-24
I
MA-28, MA-29
In-cabin microfilter
R
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
Brake lines & cables
I
Exhaust system
Revision: August 2007
I
NOTE (1)
Steering gear & linkage,
axle & suspension parts
Tire rotation
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
I
Brake pads & rotors
Automatic transaxle fluid
45
(72)
36
I
I
I
I
I
56.25
(90)
45
NOTE (2)
MA-27
I
I
MA-8
I
I
MA-23
2008 Quest
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
Front drive shaft boots
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
I
48.75
(78)
39
I
In-cabin microfilter
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content Title
I
MA-30
R
MA-23
I
R
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. For 5 A/T models, using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid K
ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
A
B
C
D
(2) Refer to MA-5.
Schedule 2
INFOID:0000000001719567
E
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
Drive belts
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content Title
I*
MA-13
NOTE (1)
G
Air cleaner filter
[R]
[R]
MA-17
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
MA-22
Fuel lines
I*
I*
MA-17
Fuel filter
NOTE (2)
Engine coolant
NOTE (3)
R*
MA-13
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Engine oil filter (Use genuine
NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
H
I
J
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
F
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
MA-20
NOTE (4)
K
EM-85
MA
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to FL section.
M
(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
O
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference Section - Page or Content Title
Brake lines & cables
I
I
I
I
MA-27
Brake pads & rotors
I
I
I
I
MA-27
I
I
I
I
MA-23
Automatic transaxle fluid
Revision: August 2007
NOTE (1)
N
MA-9
2008 Quest
P
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
Steering gear & linkage, axle &
suspension parts
Tire rotation
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference Section - Page or Content Title
I
I
I
I
MA-23
NOTE (2)
MA-28, MA-29
MA-27
Exhaust system
Front drive shaft boots
I
I
I
I
MA-30
In-cabin microfilter
R
R
R
R
MA-23
(1) For 5 A/T models, using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
(2) Refer to MA-5.
Revision: August 2007
MA-10
2008 Quest
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
A
Fluids and Lubricants
INFOID:0000000001719568
B
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Metric
Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill
With oil filter
change
Without oil filter
change
US measure
Imp measure
75.6
20 gal
16 5/8 gal
4.0
4 1/4 qt
3 1/2 qt
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30
3.7
3 7/8 qt
3 1/4 qt
5.0
5 1/4 qt
4 3/8 qt
10.5
2 3/4 gal
2 3/8 gal
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
Coolant or equivalent
Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)
7.4
7 7/8 qt
6 1/2 qt
Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *3
Power steering fluid (PSF)
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *4
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Cooling system
With reservoir at
“MAX” level
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake
Fluid *5 or equivalent
DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)
—
—
PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease or equivalent
1 1/4 gal
1 gal
1.98 ± 0.11 lb
1.98 ± 0.11 lb
7.44 fl oz
7.7 fl oz
Windshield washer fluid
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
—
4.5
900 ± 50 g
220 m
D
E
Brake fluid
Brake grease
C
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer
Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or
equivalent
HFC-134a (R-134a) *6
F
G
H
I
J
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6
*1: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI
(Research octane number 96).
*2: For further details, refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation".
*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*4: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM IV ATF may also be used.
K
MA
M
*5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”.
Engine Oil Recommendation
INFOID:0000000001719569
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MA-11
2008 Quest
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification and International Lubricant
Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and
SAE viscosity standard (2). These oils have the API certification
mark (1) on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the
specified quality label should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.
ALPIA0001ZZ
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant
solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system
additives are not necessary.
For outside temperatures down to:
Anti-freeze coolant mixture ratio
°C
°F
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze coolant
Demineralized water or distilled
water
– 35°
– 30°
50 %
50 %
CAUTION:
• When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or
distilled water.
• Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Revision: August 2007
MA-12
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
A
Checking Drive Belts
INFOID:0000000003301698
WARNING:
Be sure to perform when the engine is not running.
1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one.
2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
on the belt midway between pulleys as shown.
3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown.
B
C
D
Tool number
: BT-3373-F
NOTE:
• Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold.
• Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not
within specifications.
CAUTION:
WBIA0325E
• When checking belt deflection or tension immediately
after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two
turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
• Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness.
E
F
G
H
I
PBIC1162E
J
Belt Deflection and Tension
Deflection adjustment
Unit: mm (in)
Used belt
Limit
Generator and
air conditioner
compressor
Power steering
oil pump
After adjustment
7 (0.28)
11 (0.43)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
7.3 - 8.0
(0.29 - 0.30)
Applied pushing
force
New belt
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
6.5 - 7.2
(0.26 - 0.28)
98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
Tension adjustment*
Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f)
Used belt
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
196 (20, 44)
MA
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
Remove engine undercover.
Revision: August 2007
N
O
INFOID:0000000003301699
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
• Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to
release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
1.
M
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points as shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
Changing Engine Coolant
K
MA-13
2008 Quest
P
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove
the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial
cooling system drain.
3. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank
and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before
installation.
• Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts.
LBIA0063E
4.
When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove
the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front
drain plug and the cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs.
PBIC0846E
CAUTION:
If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in
place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the
engine block heater.
PBIC1285E
5.
Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
• If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant".
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
Revision: August 2007
MA-14
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained
completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain
plugs and tighten to specification.
CAUTION:
If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in
place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the
engine block heater.
• The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
• Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs.
Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent.
Refer to GI-42 .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
PBIC1285E
H
I
J
PBIC0846E
K
Radiator drain plug
Cylinder block front drain plug
Cylinder block RH drain plug
Cylinder block LH drain plug
2.
3.
: Refer to CO-16 .
: Refer to EM-116 .
: Refer to EM-116 .
: Refer to EM-116 .
MA
If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MA-15
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number
5.
: KV991J0070 (J-45695)
Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is
placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed
position.
• Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent.
Refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation".
Engine coolant capacity
(with reservoir)
6.
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure
7.
8.
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids
and Lubricants".
: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2
, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION:
LLIA0058E
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air
dryer.
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is
full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, use the vacuum specifications below, based on the
altitude above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 - 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)
Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
LLIA0057E
9.
When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then
open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling
system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into
the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and
reinstall radiator filler cap.
Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
Revision: August 2007
MA-16
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant".
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
A
Checking Fuel Line
INFOID:0000000001719572
Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improper hose attachment,
leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts.
B
C
D
E
SMA803A
Changing Air Cleaner Filter
INFOID:0000000001719573
F
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
N
O
WBIA0500E
Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube
4.
Air cleaner case (upper)
5.
Air cleaner filter
6.
Air cleaner case (lower)
7.
Air cleaner case bracket
8.
Grommet
9.
Resonator (in fender)
10. Fresh air duct
2.
Mass air flow sensor
3.
P
1.
O-ring
11. PCV hose
NOTE:
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7.
Revision: August 2007
MA-17
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle
control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor.
2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric
throttle control actuator tube.
3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air
cleaner case (upper).
4. Remove the air cleaner filter.
5. Install a new air cleaner filter.
6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of
removal.
Changing Engine Oil
LLIA0016E
INFOID:0000000001719574
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin
contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as
possible.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil.
2. Check for oil leaks from the engine.
3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap.
5. Drain the engine oil.
6. Install the oil drain plug.
Oil pan drain plug
: Refer to EM-29.
CAUTION:
• Clean the drain plug and install using a new washer.
SMA096D
7.
Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to MA-11.
CAUTION:
• The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only.
• Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Warm up the engine and check the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks.
9. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection".
SMA954C
Changing Oil Filter
1.
INFOID:0000000001719575
Remove the RH splash shield.
Revision: August 2007
MA-18
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
A
Tool number
3.
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
• The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine
NISSAN oil filter.
• Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine
oil are hot.
• When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb
any oil leaks or spills.
• Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
• Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and
the vehicle.
Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface on the oil cooler.
B
C
SMA096D
D
E
4.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter
as shown.
F
G
H
SMA010
5.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as shown. Or
tighten to specification using Tool.
Oil filter
Tool number
I
J
: Refer to LU-10.
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
K
SMA229B
6.
7.
8.
After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks.
Install the RH splash shield.
Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to
LU-8, "Inspection".
MA
M
N
O
SMA954C
Revision: August 2007
MA-19
2008 Quest
P
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)
INFOID:0000000001719576
WBIA0344E
1.
Ignition coil
4.
Rocker cover (left bank)
2.
Spark plug
3.
Rocker cover (right bank)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the engine cover, using power tool.
Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine
Coolant".
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and
remove the air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor and
air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM15, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the intake manifold collector (upper), gasket, and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove the six ignition coils.
CAUTION:
Do not shock them.
WBIA0339E
Revision: August 2007
MA-20
2008 Quest
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the six spark plugs using a suitable tool.
• If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum
- Tipped Type)".
A
B
C
SEM294A
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
• Do not drop or shock spark plug.
E
F
G
SMA773C
H
If plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time
I
: less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)
: less than 20 seconds
J
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Gap (nominal)
: Refer to EM-142, "Standard and
Limit".
K
MA
M
SMA806CA
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit".
• The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
- Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
• The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug
under conditions such as:
- Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution
Revision: August 2007
MA-21
2008 Quest
O
P
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Checking EVAP Vapor Line
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001719577
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, and sticking.
Revision: August 2007
MA-22
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Changing In-cabin Microfilter
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
INFOID:0000000001719578
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box"
Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter
cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION:
When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure
that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the
direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is
printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters.
Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Install the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Checking Exhaust System
B
C
D
E
LJIA0058E
F
INFOID:0000000001719579
Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and exhaust mounts for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, chafing, or deterioration.
G
H
I
J
SMA211A
Checking A/T Fluid
1.
2.
3.
INFOID:0000000001719580
Warm up the engine.
Check for any transaxle fluid leaks.
Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the “COLD” range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
K
MA
M
Temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
a.
b.
c.
N
Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake.
Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through
each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the “P” park position.
Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
MA-23
WLIA0014E
O
P
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an
accurate reading on the gauge.
d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lintfree paper.
e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far
as it will go.
f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the
reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and
LLIA0065E
then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION:
• Do not overfill the transaxle.
• Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper,
this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving.
4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds.
5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the “HOT”
range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION:
Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an
accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in
position while driving.
Temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
6.
WLIA0014E
Check the fluid for the following conditions:
• If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the AT section
for checking the operation of the transaxle. Flush the AT fluid
cooling system after repairing the transaxle.
• If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or
bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a
cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs
to the transaxle. Refer to CO-16.
SMA853B
Changing A/T Fluid
1.
INFOID:0000000001719581
Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature “HOT”.
Temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
2.
3.
Stop the engine.
Remove the engine undercover.
Revision: August 2007
MA-24
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain
plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer.
Drain plug
A
: Refer to AT-225, "Component".
B
C
LLIA0066E
5.
Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill the transaxle.
Fluid grade and capacity
(with torque converter)
6.
7.
D
E
: Refer to MA-11.
F
Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes.
Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-23, "Checking A/T Fluid". If the fluid is still contaminated,
repeat step 2 through 5.
Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)
G
INFOID:0000000001719582
H
PAX Run Flat Tire and Wheel
CAUTION:
• Servicing a PAX run flat tire and wheel requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service
PAX run flat tire and wheel with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and
wheel will result.
• If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
I
J
Conventional Tires and Wheels
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel.
K
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
Use a releasing agent to remove the double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.
MA
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
• After removing the double-faced adhesive tape, wipe off any traces of the releasing agent from
M
the road wheel.
Set the road wheel on the wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
NOTE:
If a tire balance machine has an adhesion balance weight mode setting and drive-in weight mode setting, N
select and adjust in the drive-in weight mode suitable for the road wheels.
When the inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the
wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6
O
to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the
outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value, then install it at the designated outer position of, or at the
P
designated angle position on the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Do not install the inner balance weight before installing
the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the
mating surface of the road wheel.
SMA054D
Calculation:
Indicated unbalance value × 1.6 = balance weight to be installed
Revision: August 2007
MA-25
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 1.6 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance
weight value)
NOTE:
The selected balance weight value must be the closest balance weight available to the calculated balance
weight value.
Example:
37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz)
a.
b.
Install the balance weight in the position as shown.
When installing the balance weight to the road wheels, set it into
the grooved area on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown,
so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
• Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
• Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight.
SMA055D
c.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
SMA056D
5.
6.
7.
Start the wheel balancer.
Install the drive-in balance weight on the inner side of the road wheel in the wheel balancer indication
position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights in one position (angle).
Start the wheel balancer. Make sure that the inner and outer residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz)
each or less.
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Unbalance)
Maximum allowable unbalance
Dynamic (at rim flange)
Static (at rim flange)
Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
• If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat the installation procedures.
Revision: August 2007
MA-26
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tire Rotation
INFOID:0000000001719583
A
1.
Rotate the tires as shown.
• ⇐ : Front
B
Wheel nuts
2.
3.
: Refer to WT-6.
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure to specification.
Retighten the wheel nuts to specification after the vehicle has
been driven the first 1,000 km (600 miles). Also retighten the
wheel nuts to specification after a flat tire repair, or any type of
service where the wheels have been removed and installed.
CAUTION:
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks
C
D
WEIA0044E
E
INFOID:0000000001719584
• Check the brake fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between
the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the sub tank.
• Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks.
• If the brake fluid level is extremely low or below the “MIN” level,
check the brake system for leaks.
• Release the parking brake lever and check that the brake warning
lamp goes off. If not, check the brake system for leaks.
F
G
H
LFIA0204E
Checking Brake Line and Cables
I
INFOID:0000000001719585
J
Check the brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper
attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, and damage.
Repair or replace parts as necessary.
K
MA
SBR389C
Checking Disc Brake
M
INFOID:0000000001719586
N
ROTOR
Check the rotor condition and thickness. Resurface or replace the
rotor as necessary. Refer to BR-38, "Disc Brake".
O
P
SMA260A
CALIPER
Revision: August 2007
MA-27
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check the caliper for leakage.
SMA922A
PAD
Check the brake pads for wear or damage. Refer to BR-38, "Disc
Brake".
BRA0010D
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage
INFOID:0000000001719587
STEERING GEAR
• Check the gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and power steering fluid leaks.
• Check the power steering hose connections for leaks.
• Check the steering column for looseness.
STEERING LINKAGE
Check the ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leaks.
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Line
INFOID:0000000001719588
CHECKING FLUID LEVEL
Check the power steering fluid level in the reservoir tank with the
engine off.
Use the “HOT” range or the “COLD” range fluid temperatures.
“HOT” range PSF temperature
“COLD” range PSF temperature
: 50° – 80° C
(122° – 176° F)
: 0° – 30° C
(32° – 86° F)
CAUTION:
• Do not overfill the power steering reservoir tank.
• Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
• Use the recommended power steering fluid. Refer to MA-11.
LGIA0021E
CHECKING FLUID LEAKS
Revision: August 2007
MA-28
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° – 80°C
(140° – 176°F).
2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times.
3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and
carefully check for fluid leaks.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
SGIA0506E
than 15 seconds.
4. If fluid leaks at the connectors are noticed, loosen the flare nut and then retighten to specification.
Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
5. If fluid leaks from the power steering oil pump are noticed, check the power steering oil pump. Refer to
PS-23, "Disassembly and Assembly".
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear fluid leak.
C
Axle and Suspension Parts
F
INFOID:0000000001719589
Check the front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive
play, cracks, wear, or other damage.
• Shake each wheel as shown to check for excessive play.
• Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise.
A
B
D
E
G
H
I
SMA525A
J
• Check the strut mount nuts for looseness.
K
MA
M
SMA614
• Check the axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
N
O
P
LLIA0019E
Revision: August 2007
MA-29
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Check the struts for oil leakage or other damage.
• Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust
cover for cracks or other damage.
SFA392B
Drive Shaft
INFOID:0000000001719590
• Check the boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and
grease leakage as shown.
SFA108A
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch
INFOID:0000000001719591
WBIA0752E
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters
INFOID:0000000001719592
Check the seat belt buckles, webbing, retractors, anchors and adjusters. Replace any seat belt assembly as
necessary. Refer to SB-9, "Seat Belt Inspection".
• Check the seat belt anchors for loose bolts, damage, or excessive wear.
• Check the seat belt webbing for any damage, cuts, fraying, or excessive wear.
• Check the retractor for smooth operation.
Revision: August 2007
MA-30
2008 Quest
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Check the function of the buckles by inserting the seat belt tongue and checking for proper engagement of
the buckle and press the button on the buckle to check for proper release of the seat belt tongue.
CAUTION:
• After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached components, such as the guide rail set. NISSAN recommends replacing all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision, unless they are not damaged and are inspected to confirm they are operating
properly after a minor collision.
Also inspect all seat belt assemblies that are not in use during a collision, and replace any components if damaged or not operating properly. The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if
the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags have
been deployed.
• If any component of the seat belt assembly is suspected of being damaged or not operating properly, do not repair the component. Replace the components as an assembly.
• If the seat belt webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged then replace the seat belt assembly.
• Never lubricate the seat belt buckle or tongue.
• When replacing any seat belt assembly always use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MA-31
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
MTC
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...... 3
Contaminated Refrigerant ......................................... 3
General Refrigerant Precaution ................................ 4
Precaution for Leak Detection Dye ........................... 4
A/C Identification Label ............................................. 4
Precaution for Refrigerant Connection ...................... 4
Precaution for Service of Compressor ...................... 8
Precaution for Service Equipment ............................. 9
PREPARATION ..................................................11
Special Service Tool ............................................... 11
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment.... 11
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 13
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..............................15
Refrigerant Cycle .................................................... 15
Refrigerant System Protection ................................ 15
Component Part Location ....................................... 16
OIL ......................................................................19
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor ........... 19
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL .........................21
Description .............................................................. 21
Operation ................................................................ 21
Description of Control System ................................. 22
Control Operation .................................................... 23
Discharge Air Flow .................................................. 25
System Description ................................................. 26
CAN Communication System Description ............... 26
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................27
CONSULT-III Function (HVAC) ............................... 27
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 28
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 29
Revision: August 2007
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................30
Schematic ................................................................34
Wiring Diagram - A/C,M - ........................................35
Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value ....43
A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function .......................44
Operational Check (Front) .......................................45
Operational Check (Rear) ........................................47
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air
Control .....................................................................48
Mode Door Motor Circuit .........................................50
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit .......................................54
Intake Door Motor Circuit .........................................63
Defroster Door Motor Circuit ....................................67
Front Blower Motor Circuit .......................................69
Rear Blower Motor Circuit .......................................75
Rear Temperature Control Circuit ...........................84
Magnet Clutch Circuit ..............................................90
Insufficient Cooling ..................................................94
Insufficient Heating ................................................ 101
Heater Pump Circuit .............................................. 102
Noise ..................................................................... 105
Self-Diagnosis ....................................................... 107
Ambient Sensor Circuit .......................................... 108
Intake Sensor Circuit ............................................. 110
CONTROL UNIT .............................................. 113
Removal and Installation ....................................... 113
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
AMBIENT SENSOR ........................................ 115
Removal and Installation ....................................... 115
O
INTAKE SENSOR ........................................... 116
Removal and Installation ....................................... 116
P
BLOWER MOTOR .......................................... 118
Component ............................................................ 118
Removal and Installation ....................................... 119
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ............................... 120
Removal and Installation ....................................... 120
MTC-1
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ....... 121
REFRIGERANT LINES ..................................... 143
Component ............................................................121
Removal and Installation .......................................122
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ................ 143
Component ........................................................... 145
Removal and Installation for Compressor ............. 147
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch . 148
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 151
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 151
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 151
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure
Pipe ....................................................................... 152
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor ................................................................... 155
Removal and Installation for Condenser ............... 156
Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator ..... 157
Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator ...... 159
Removal and Installation for Front Expansion
Valve ..................................................................... 160
Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion
Valve ..................................................................... 160
Checking of Refrigerant Leaks .............................. 161
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Dye Leak Detector ................................................ 161
Dye Injection ......................................................... 161
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 162
HEATER CORE ............................................... 124
Component ............................................................124
Removal and Installation .......................................125
HEATER PUMP ............................................... 127
Removal and Installation .......................................127
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ......................... 128
Removal and Installation .......................................128
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR .................................. 129
Component ............................................................129
Removal and Installation .......................................130
MODE DOOR MOTOR .................................... 132
Removal and Installation .......................................132
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR .................................. 134
Component ............................................................134
Removal and Installation .......................................134
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL ................... 136
Component ............................................................136
Removal and Installation .......................................137
DUCTS AND GRILLES .................................... 138
Component ............................................................138
Removal and Installation .......................................141
Revision: August 2007
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 165
Service Data and Specification (SDS) .................. 165
MTC-2
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001718925
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
INFOID:0000000001718926
C
D
E
F
G
H
WARNING:
I
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". To
determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier.
MTC
• Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If
oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
K
handling precautions must be observed:
- When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
- When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just L
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible
to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without
M
proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
- Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling N
equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
- Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
O
Contaminated Refrigerant
INFOID:0000000001718927
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
• Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
• Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant
supply.
• Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
• If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does
Revision: August 2007
MTC-3
2008 Quest
P
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition,
replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
• If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718928
WARNING:
• Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
• Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
• Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation.
• Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have
been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or
property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Precaution for Leak Detection Dye
INFOID:0000000001718929
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet
(UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
• Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
• The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J41995).
• For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions prior to performing work.
• A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should
only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
• Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future
service.
• Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of
time cannot be removed.
• Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC134a (R134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in
HFC-134a (R134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs.
A/C Identification Label
INFOID:0000000001718930
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have an identification label on the underside of hood.
Precaution for Refrigerant Connection
INFOID:0000000001718931
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
• Expansion valve to cooling unit
• Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
Revision: August 2007
MTC-4
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This reduces
the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the Oring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics.
• The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SHA815E
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-5
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
WJIA1967E
1.
High-pressure service valve
2.
Low-pressure service valve
3.
High-pressure pipe
4.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
5.
Low-pressure flexible hose
6.
High-pressure flexible hose
7.
Shaft seal
8.
Condenser
9.
Liquid tank
10. Pressure relief valve
11. Compressor
12. High/low pressure pipe (production)
13. High/low pressure pipe - upper
(service)
14
15
Revision: August 2007
High/low pressure pipe - lower
(service)
MTC-6
Expansion valve (front)
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear A/C
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
LJIA0016E
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or
around the connection.
K
L
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
M
Connection type
O-ring
size
Part number*
D
New
8
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
Former
10
J2476 89956
9.25 (0.3642)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.091)
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
92195 AH300
21.8 (0.858)
2.4 (0.094)
New
Former
New
Former
New
SHA814E
Former
New
12
16
19
24
mm (in)
W mm (in)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
WARNING:
Revision: August 2007
MTC-7
2008 Quest
N
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low pressure chamber.
• When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
• After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
• When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Always replace used O-rings.
• When connecting tube, apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply
oil to threaded portion.
• O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
• When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
• Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
• After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
WJIA1774E
1.
Plug
2.
O-ring
A.
Torque wrench
B.
Apply oil
C.
Do not apply oil to threads
D.
NG (no good)
E.
OK (okay)
F.
Inflated portion
Precaution for Service of Compressor
INFOID:0000000001718932
• Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
• When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor”
exactly. Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor".
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated with oil, wipe
it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
• After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both
directions. This will equally distribute oil inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed,
let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour.
• After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal
operation. Refer to MTC-148, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch"
Revision: August 2007
MTC-8
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Precaution for Service Equipment
INFOID:0000000001718933
A
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any
refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
B
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
C
VACUUM PUMP
The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the
specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of
the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose.
This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
• Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual
shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose
from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
D
E
F
G
H
I
RHA270D
MTC
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-134a) Make
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified oil.
K
L
M
SHA533D
N
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite the manifold gauge.
O
P
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS
Revision: August 2007
MTC-9
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. If an improper
connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified
oils have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant
flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME.
RHA274D
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-10
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718934
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-38873-A)
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
B
C
D
E
LHA171
Removing pulley
KV99233130
(J-29884)
Pulley puller
F
G
LHA172
H
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment
INFOID:0000000001718935
Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified oil with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its oil.
I
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/oil.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or oil) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed
MTC
use of the refrigerants/oil.
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used refrigerant/oil contamination will occur
and compressor failure will result.
K
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HFC-134a (R-134a)
( — )
Refrigerant
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
• large container 1/2”-16 ACME
L
M
N
S-NT196
Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG),
type S
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a)
swash plate compressors (NISSAN
only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp
fl oz)
—
( — )
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
S-NT197
Revision: August 2007
MTC-11
2008 Quest
O
P
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991J0130
(ACR2005-NI)
ACR5 A/C Service Center
Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
WJIA0293E
Checking for refrigerant leaks
(Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal)
—
(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector
AHA281A
Leak detection dye
(Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal)
—
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447)
Quantity 24, 1/4 ounce bottles of
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
ZHA200H
Checking for refrigerant leaks when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal)
—
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak detector
SHA438F
Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a)
PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after
charging system with dye.)
—
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
SHA439F
For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent
leak detection dye into A/C system.
—
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector
Use with (J-41447) 1/4 ounce bottles
SHA440F
Revision: August 2007
MTC-12
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills.
A
B
C
SHA441F
Identification:
• The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size: Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
—
(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses
and couplers)
D
E
F
G
RJIA0196E
Hose colors:
• Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
• High side hose: Red with black stripe
• Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
• 1/2”-16 ACME
Service hoses:
• (J-39500-72B)
High side hose
• (J-39500-72R)
Low side hose
• (J-39500-72Y)
Utility hose
H
I
S-NT201
Hose fitting to service hose:
• M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.
Service couplers:
• (J-39500-20A)
High side coupler
• (J-39500-24A)
Low side coupler
MTC
K
L
S-NT202
For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size - thread size:
• 1/2” - 16 ACME
—
(J-39699)
Refrigerant weight scale
M
N
S-NT200
Capacity:
• Air displacement: 4 CFM
• Micron rating: 20 microns
• Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size: Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
—
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)
S-NT203
Commercial Service Tool
Revision: August 2007
INFOID:0000000001718936
MTC-13
2008 Quest
O
P
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
Tool name
Description
(J-41810-NI)
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a)
For checking refrigerant purity and
system contamination
RJIA0197E
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
(J-44614)
Clutch disc holding tool
Clutch disc holding tool
WHA230
Revision: August 2007
MTC-14
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A
Refrigerant Cycle
INFOID:0000000001718937
Refrigerant flow
B
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the front and rear evaporators, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the
evaporator coils are controlled by a front and rear externally equalized expansion valves, located inside the
front and rear evaporator cases.
Refrigerant System Protection
C
INFOID:0000000001718938
D
Refrigerant pressure sensor
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM.
The ECM de-energizes the A/C relay to disengage the magnetic compressor clutch when pressure on the high
pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2, 398 psi), or below
about 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2, 17.4 psi).
E
F
Pressure Relief Valve
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor.
When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 2,990 kPa (30.5 kg/
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-15
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
cm2, 433.6 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
WJIA1342E
Component Part Location
INFOID:0000000001718939
FRONT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Revision: August 2007
MTC-16
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA2219E
1.
Defroster nozzle (part of the
instrument panel)
2.
Fresh air duct
3.
P
Defroster duct
4.
RH side demister duct
5.
RH side demister duct extension
6.
LH side demister duct extension
7.
LH side demister duct
8.
RH ventilator duct
9.
Center ventilator duct
10. LH ventilator duct
11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly
13. Floor junction duct extension
14. Floor junction duct
15. Floor distribution duct
⇐
16. Floor duct
Revision: August 2007
12. Floor connector duct
MTC-17
Front
2008 Quest
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
LJIA0086E
1
Rear overhead duct
2
Rear heat duct
3
Rear heater and cooling unit assembly
4. Clips
Revision: August 2007
MTC-18
2008 Quest
OIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OIL
A
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
INFOID:0000000001718940
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when
replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount.
If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
• Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
• Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
Oil
B
C
D
Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation.
Start the engine and set the following conditions:
• Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
• A/C switch: On
• Blower fan speed: Maximum position
• Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
• Intake position: Recirculation (
)
• Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table.
E
F
G
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
H
Amount of Oil to be Added
I
Oil to be added to system
Part replaced
m
Amount of oil
(US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
Remarks
MTC
Front evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
Rear evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not replaced.
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *1
In case of refrigerant leak
—
K
L
*1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of oil is needed.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-19
2008 Quest
OIL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA1716E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.
New compressor
2.
Old compressor
3.
Recovery/recycling equipment
4.
Measuring cup X
5.
Measuring cup Y
6.
New oil
A.
Drain oil from the new compressor
into clean container
B.
Record amount of oil recovered
C.
Add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz,
0.2 Imp fl oz) of new oil when replacing
liquid tank
D.
Install new oil equal to recorded
amounts in measuring cups X plus Y
Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the
recovery/recycling equipment.
Drain the oil from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of
oil drained.
Drain the oil from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container.
Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this oil to
“new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to “new”
compressor through the suction port opening.
If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this
time.
CAUTION:
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-20
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001718941
The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the position of the front air controls temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following three sensors:
• Ambient sensor
• Intake sensor
• PBR (position balanced resistor).
The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to control:
• Outlet air volume
• Air temperature
• Air distribution
The front air control also provides separate regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature for the rear passenger area. The system is based on the temperature and rear blower settings selected from rear air control
(front) control dials located in the overhead console, or from the rear temperature and blower settings from the
rear air control (rear) control dials, when the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator light is on) on the rear
air control (front).
B
C
D
E
F
The front air control is used to select:
• Outlet air volume
• Air temperature/distribution
G
Operation
INFOID:0000000001718942
H
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL
The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature changed based on the position of the temperature
switch.
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
I
Blower speed is controlled based on front and rear blower control dial settings.
When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower conMTC
trol dial is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower control dial switch is turned
counterclockwise.
K
INTAKE DOORS CONTROL
The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (recirculation is not allowed in
floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes) switch setting.
L
MODE DOOR CONTROL
The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode switch.
M
DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL
The defroster door is controlled by pressing the defroster mode switch.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-21
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
WJIA2161E
When the A/C switch is pressed, or the defroster mode switch is pressed, the front air control outputs a compressor ON signal to BCM.
The BCM then sends a compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line.
ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line.
Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
The self-diagnostic system is built into the front air control to quickly locate the cause of certain symptoms.
Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Description of Control System
INFOID:0000000001718943
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-22
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA2160E
Control Operation
INFOID:0000000001718944
MTC
Front air control
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA2162E
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-23
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear air control (rear)
WJIA2015E
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (FRONT)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (REAR)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
RECIRCULATION (
) SWITCH
• When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
• When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
• REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor mode.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
When switch is ON, rear window is defogged.
OFF SWITCH
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet
doors are set to the foot position.
A/C SWITCH
The compressor is ON or OFF.
MODE SWITCHS (FRONT)
Controls the air discharge outlets through control of the mode and defroster doors.
MODE DIAL (REAR)
Controls the air/temperature at discharge outlets.
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL
Manually control the blower speed. Fourteen speeds are available for manual control.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (FRONT)
When the REAR CTRL switch is off (indicator off) the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor
speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower control dial (rear) position. The rear air control (front) controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (REAR)
When the REAR CTRL switch is on (indicator on) the rear air control (rear) controls the rear blower motor
speed regardless of the rear air control (front) blower control dial (front) position. The rear air control (rear)
controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-24
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Discharge Air Flow
INFOID:0000000001718945
A
FRONT
B
C
D
WJIA2016E
E
REAR
NOTE:
Hot air comes from the floor vents, cold air comes from the roof
vents, and blended air comes from both vents.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
LJIA0127E
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-25
2008 Quest
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718946
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
WJIA0531E
WJIA2163E
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001718947
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-26
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)
INFOID:0000000001718948
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
B
Description
Displays front air control self-diagnosis results.
C
Displays front air control input/output data in real time.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
D
Front air control part number can be read.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
E
Operation Procedure
1.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen to view all set DTC's.
F
Display Item List
DTC
Reference page
B2573
Battery voltage out of range
SC-4
B2575
BCM not responding to A/C request
MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit"
B2576
BCM not responding to rear defroster request
GW-76
B2577
Air mix door motor (front) circuit failure
MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
B257A
Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure
MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
B257B
Ambient sensor circuit open
B257C
Ambient sensor circuit short
B2581
Intake sensor circuit short
B2582
Intake sensor circuit open
B2583
Defroster door motor circuit failure
MTC-67, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
B2584
Intake door motor (passenger) circuit failure
MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
U1000
CAN bus fault
LAN-6
B2586
Intake door motor (driver) circuit failure
MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
B2587
Stuck button
MTC-113, "Removal and Installation"
B2587
Mode door motor circuit failure
MTC-50, "Mode Door Motor Circuit"
G
H
I
MTC-108, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
MTC
MTC-110, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
K
L
M
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
N
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch either “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen.
O
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
SELECTION FROM
MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
3.
4.
5.
P
When “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch items to be monitored. When “MAIN SIGNALS” is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch “START”.
Touch “RECORD” while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch “STOP”.
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
MTC-27
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item
Value
BATT VIA CAN
IGN VIA CAN
Contents
"V"
Displays battery voltage signal.
"ON/OFF"
Displays ignition switch signal.
AMB TEMP SEN
"°C/°F"
Displays ambient temperature sensor signal.
EVAP TEMP SEN
"°C/°F"
RR TEMPSET FR
"V"
Displays air mix door (front) set point signal.
RR TEMPSET RR
"V"
Displays air mix door (rear) set point signal.
MODE FDBCK
"V"
Displays mode door motor feedback signal.
DVR MIX FDBCK
"V"
Displays intake door motor (driver) feedback signal.
PAS MIX FDBCK
"V"
Displays intake door motor (passenger) feedback signal.
RR FDBCK
"V"
Displays air mix door motor (rear) feedback signal.
DEF FDBCK
"V"
Displays defroster door motor feedback signal.
Displays intake sensor signal.
RECIRC
"ON/OFF"
Displays recirculation switch signal.
A/C
"ON/OFF"
Displays A/C switch signal.
MODE
"ON/OFF"
Displays MODE dial signal.
RR DEFOG
"ON/OFF"
Displays rear defroster request signal.
" [ PNL ]"
" [ MIX ]"
" [ FLR ]"
" [ DEFR ]"
" [ MAX ]"
" [ DENT ]"*
MODE SELECT
Displays mode door motor position.
*: DENT is displayed when MODE dial is between selections.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718949
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch “AIR CONDITIONER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch either “ALL SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
SELECTION FROM
MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
Touch “START”.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-28
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. When “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch items to be monitored. When “ALL SIGNALS” is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
6. Touch “RECORD” while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch “STOP”.
A
Display Item List
B
Monitor item name “operation or
unit”
Contents
C
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays “IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)” status as judged from ignition switch signal.
COMP ON SIG
“ON/OFF”
Displays “COMP (ON)/COMP (OFF)” status as judged from air conditioner switch signal.
FAN ON SIG
“ON/OFF”
Displays “FAN (ON)/FAN (OFF)” status as judged from blower motor switch signal.
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
D
INFOID:0000000001718950
E
WORK FLOW
F
G
H
SHA900E
*1
I
MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)"
SYMPTOM TABLE
MTC
Symptom
Reference Page
A/C system does not come on.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System.
MTC-48, "Power
Supply and
Ground Circuit for
Front Air Control"
A/C system cannot be controlled.
Go to Self-diagnosis Function.
MTC-44, "A/C
System Self-Diagnosis Function"
Air outlet does not change.
Mode door motor is malfunctioning.
MTC-50, "Mode
Door Motor Circuit"
M
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor.
MTC-54, "Air Mix
Door Motor Circuit"
N
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor.
MTC-63, "Intake
Door Motor Circuit"
O
Intake door does not change.
Intake door motor is malfunctioning.
Defroster door motor is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Defroster Door Motor.
MTC-67, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor.
MTC-69, "Front
Blower Motor Circuit"
Rear blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Blower Motor.
MTC-75, "Rear
Blower Motor Circuit"
Revision: August 2007
L
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor.
Discharge air temperature does not change.
Air mix door motor is malfunctioning.
K
MTC-29
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Reference Page
Rear discharge air temperature and/or air
outlet does not change.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Air Control circuit.
MTC-84, "Rear
Temperature Control Circuit"
Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
MTC-90, "Magnet
Clutch Circuit"
Insufficient cooling
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
MTC-94, "Insufficient Cooling"
Insufficient heating
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
MTC-101, "Insufficient Heating"
Noise
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
MTC-105, "Noise"
Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis.
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
MTC-107, "SelfDiagnosis"
INFOID:0000000001718951
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Revision: August 2007
MTC-30
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
WJIA2221E
1.
Refrigerant pressure sensor E111
4.
Heater pump E127
2.
Compressor F3 (view from right tire
housing)
3.
Ambient Sensor E1
O
P
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Revision: August 2007
MTC-31
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA2164E
1.
Intake door motor (driver) M58
4.
Intake sensor M305
7.
Defroster door motor M303
2.
Air mix door motor (front) M307
3.
Evaporator
5.
Variable blower control (front) M122
6.
Mode door motor M304
8.
Intake door motor (passenger) M302 9.
Front air control M49, M50
10. Front blower motor M62
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Revision: August 2007
MTC-32
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
WJIA2172E
1.
Rear air control (rear) B150
4.
Air mix door motor (rear) B146
2.
Rear blower motor B134
3.
Variable blower control (rear) B151
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-33
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718952
WJWA0424E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-34
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - A/C,M -
INFOID:0000000001718953
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0425E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-35
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJWA0426E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-36
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0427E
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-37
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJWA0428E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-38
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
WJWA0429E
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-39
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJWA0430E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-40
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
LJWA0013E
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-41
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJWA0432E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-42
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value
INFOID:0000000001718954
A
FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
B
C
D
WJIA2020E
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUES FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
Terminal
No.
Wire
Color
3
Y
4
L/R
Compressor ON signal
5
L/Y
Blower ON signal
6
Y/B
Air mix door motor (front) feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
7
LG
Mode door motor feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
10
R/L
Heater pump
ON
11
R/W
Intake sensor
ON
-
0 - 5V
12
W/G
Aux blower speed
ON
-
0 - 5V
13
O
Variable blower control (front) signal
ON
-
0 - 5V
15
G/Y
Power supply for IGN
ON
-
Battery voltage
16
W/L
Rear defroster request
ON
17
L/B
Air mix door motor (front) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
18
L/W
Air mix door motor (front) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
19
L/O
Mode door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
20
SB
Mode door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
21
R
Intake door motor (driver) CW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
22
R/B
Intake door motor (driver) CCW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
23
W
Defroster door motor CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
24
W/B
Defroster door motor CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
25
GR/R
Ambient sensor
ON
-
0 - 5V
26
O/B
Sensor return
ON
-
0 - 5V
27
Y/R
Power supply for BAT
-
-
Battery voltage
28
W/G
Position balanced resistor (PBR)
power
ON
-
5V
30
G/B
Air mix door motor (rear) feedback
ON
-
0 - 5V
33
R/G
AUX Rear select switch
ON
-
0 - 5V
34
BR/Y
AUX backlight dim
ON
Headlamps OFF
Battery voltage
35
V/W
AUX tell tale LED
ON
Tell tale OFF
Battery voltage
Item
Position balance resistor (PBR)
ground
Revision: August 2007
Ignition
Switch
Condition
ON
-
E
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
F
0V
ON
A/C switch OFF
5V
ON
A/C switch ON
0V
ON
Fan switch OFF
5V
ON
Fan switch ON
0V
Heater pump OFF
Battery voltage
Heater pump ON
0V
-
G
H
I
MTC
K
Battery voltage
L
M
N
O
P
MTC-43
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
No.
Wire
Color
Item
Ignition
Switch
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
36
B
Ground
-
-
40
P
CAN-L
ON
-
-
41
L
CAN-H
ON
-
-
43
P/L
Air mix door motor (rear) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
44
LG/R
Air mix door motor (rear) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
45
P
Intake door motor (passenger) CW
ON
Clockwise rotation
Battery voltage
46
P/B
Intake door motor (passenger) CCW
ON
Counterclockwise rotation
Battery voltage
47
Y/L
Rear aux blower pot
ON
Rear blower motor
0 - 5V
48
W/R
Rear aux temp pot
ON
Rear air control (rear) temperature control dial
0 - 5V
49
G/O
Front aux blower pot
ON
Rear air control (front)
blower motor
0 - 5V
50
GR/L
Front aux temp pot
ON
Rear air control (front) temperature control dial
0 - 5V
A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function
0V
INFOID:0000000001718955
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
If using CONSULT-III, refer to MTC-27, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)".
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, CAN system, battery voltage, and stuck button on front air
control. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system
is accomplished by the following:
The ignition switch must be on and ambient temperature must be at least 10°C (50°F). Press the A/C switch to
turn on the HVAC system. Press the vent ( and defrost
button at the same time. Then press the recirculation (
) switch. the fault codes (if any are present) will display in the ambient temperature area. Refer to
Revision: August 2007
MTC-44
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". The fault codes will continue to scroll until self-diagnostic
mode is exited. To exit self-diagnostic mode, press any button.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WJIA2166E
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART
NOTE:
If using CONSULT-III, refer to MTC-27, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)".
Code No.
03
I
MTC
Reference page
Battery voltage out of range
SC-4
20
BCM not responding to A/C request
GW-76
21
BCM not responding to rear defroster request
GW-76
22
Air mix door motor (front) circuit failure
MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
38
Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure
MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
40
Ambient sensor circuit short
41
Ambient sensor circuit open
56
Intake sensor circuit short
57
Intake sensor circuit open
62
Defroster door drive short /open/out of limits
MTC-67, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit"
72
Intake door motor (passenger) short/open
MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
80
CAN bus fault
LAN-6
82
Intake door motor (driver) short/open
MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
90
Stuck button
MTC-113, "Removal and Installation"
92
Mode door motor short/open/out of limits
MTC-50, "Mode Door Motor Circuit"
K
L
ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
M
ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
Operational Check (Front)
N
O
P
INFOID:0000000001718956
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
Conditions
Revision: August 2007
: Engine running and at normal operating temperature
MTC-45
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CHECKING BLOWER
1. Turn blower control dial clockwise. Blower should operate on low speed.
2. Turn the blower control dial again, and continue checking each blower speed until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on maximum speed.
If NG, Refer to MTC-69, "Front Blower Motor Circuit"
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR
1.
2.
Press each mode switch.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-25, "Discharge Air Flow".
Mode door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-50, "Mode Door
Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual
inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF or D/F
is selected.
WJIA0528E
CHECKING RECIRCULATION
1. Press recirculation (
) switch one time. Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Press recirculation (
) switch one more time. Recirculation indicator should go off.
3. Listen for intake door position change (blower sound should change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh
when the DEF, D/F or floor is selected.
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Rotate temperature dial counterclockwise.
2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-94,
"Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for
MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Rotate temperature dial clockwise.
2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-101,
"Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, Refer to MTC-54, "Air Mix Door
Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECK A/C SWITCH
1.
2.
Press A/C switch with the blower ON.
A/C switch indicator will turn ON.
• Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection).
NOTE:
If current mode setting is DEF or D/F compressor clutch may already be engaged
If NG, Refer to MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-46
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If OK, continue with next check.
A
Operational Check (Rear)
INFOID:0000000001718957
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
B
Conditions
: Engine running and at normal operating temperature
CHECKING REAR BLOWER MOTOR
C
1. Press the A/C switch on the front air control.
2. Rotate rear air control (front) blower control dial to low speed.
3. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked.
4. Leave blower on maximum speed.
5. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
6. Rotate rear air control (rear) blower control dial to low speed.
7. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked.
8. Leave blower on maximum speed.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
CHECKING REAR DISCHARGE AIR
D
E
F
G
1.
Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial
from maximum heat to maximum cold.
2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow".
3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial
from maximum heat to maximum cold.
5. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow".
Air mix door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-57, "Air Mix Door
Motor Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
LJIA0127E
N
CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.
2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.
5. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-102,
"Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor
Circuit".
If OK, continue with next check.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-47
2008 Quest
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat.
2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front).
4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat.
5. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets.
If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-109,
"Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor
Circuit".
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-93, "Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit".
If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble
Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform tests as outlined. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-30,
"How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis
procedures.
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control
INFOID:0000000001718958
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK
1. Press A/C switch.
2. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection).
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated
YES >> Refer toMTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM".
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors
needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motors, defroster
door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are
operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air
conditioner system.
Potentio Temperature Control (PTC)
Revision: August 2007
MTC-48
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The PTC is built into the front air control. It can be set from cold to
hot or any intermediate position by rotating the temperature dial.
A
B
C
WJIA2171E
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
E
F
G
WJIA2024E
H
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connectors.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 15 and connector M50 (B) terminal 27, and ground.
Terminals
I
MTC
Ignition switch position
(+)
Front air
control
connector
Terminal No.
M49 (A)
15
(-)
Ground
M50 (B)
27
OFF
ACC
ON
Approx. 0V
Approx. 0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
K
WJIA2025E
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check 10A and 15A fuses [Nos. 2 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78.
• If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
• If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
M
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
O
N
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-49
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 36 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2026E
Mode Door Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718959
SYMPTOM:
• Air outlet does not change.
• Mode door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DISCHARGE AIR
1.
2.
Press each of the four mode position switches and then press the
(DEF) switch.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational
Check (Front)".
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH
when DEF (
) or D/F (
) is selected.
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MODE DOOR OPERATION
Check and verify mode door mechanism for smooth operation in each mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK THE MODE DOOR MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT
Perform diagnostic procedure for the mode door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE
DOOR MOTOR".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-50
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair PBR circuit or replace motor.
A
7.RECHECK FOR CODES
B
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnostic codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 8.
C
8.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Repair as necessary.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
D
E
F
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
G
• Front air control
• Mode door motor
• PBR (built into mode door motor)
System Operation
The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door
motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the
mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it.
The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit.
H
I
MTC
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit assembly. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the front
air control Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the
mode door.
K
L
M
WJIA0424E
N
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-51
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Press the B/L ( ) mode switch.
3. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 20 and terminal 19 while pressing the floor ( ) mode
switch.
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
19
20
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Press floor
mode
switch
Battery
voltage
WJIA2027E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check resistance between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 20, 19 and ground.
20 - Ground
19 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2028E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
Press the D/F (
) mode switch.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 19 and terminal 20 while pressing the mode switch to
the vent ( ) mode.
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
20
19
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Press vent
mode
switch
Battery
voltage
WJIA2029E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 20 and terminal 19.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2030E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-52
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
A
Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 20, 19 and the mode door motor harness connector (B) terminal 5, 6.
20 - 5
19 - 6
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
C
D
WJIA2031E
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
E
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (B)
terminal 28.
Connector
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (M50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
F
G
H
WJIA2032E
I
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 28 and ground.
MTC
K
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
L
WJIA2033E
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
M
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
O
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
P
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
MTC-53
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector.
2. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M304 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50
(C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M304 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
3-1
: Continuity should exist.
WJIA2035E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 7 and ground while cycling mode switch through all
modes.
Voltage
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
WJIA2036E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 7 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2037E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector and front
air control harness connector.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M304 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 7.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
WJIA2038E
INFOID:0000000001718960
SYMPTOM:
• Discharge air temperature does not change.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-54
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Air mix door motor does not operate.
A
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1.
2.
B
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to maximum heat.
Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
C
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Turn the temperature control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
D
E
3.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
F
G
H
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 5.
I
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION
Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation from maximum cold to maximum heat in each MTC
mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
K
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 7.
L
M
7.CHECK THE AIR MIX DOORS MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT
Perform diagnostic procedure for the air mix door motors. Refer to "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair PBR circuit or replace air mix door motor. Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation".
8.RECHECK FOR CODES
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnostic codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 9.
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
MTC-55
O
P
9.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Revision: August 2007
N
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Air mix door motors (Front and rear)
• PBR (built-into air mix door motor)
System Operation
The front air control receives data based on the temperature selected by the driver and rear passenger. The
front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while ground is
applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is
determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door.
Air Mix Door Control Specification
WJIA0435E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motors
The air mix door motor (front) (1) is attached to the front heater &
cooling unit assembly. The rear air mix door motor is attached to the
rear heater & cooling unit. These motors rotate so that the air mix
door is opened or closed to a position set by the front (or rear) air
control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air
mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR
built into the air mix door motors.
WJIA2173E
WJIA0498E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)
Revision: August 2007
MTC-56
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial to maximum heat.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control
dial (front) to maximum cold.
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
18
17
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
B
C
D
WJIA2039E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 18, 17 and ground.
18 - Ground
17 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
H
I
WJIA2040E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
MTC
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (front) to maximum cold.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control
dial (front) to maximum heat.
K
L
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
17
(-)
18
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
M
WJIA2041E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
N
4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-57
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2042E
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 18, 17 and the air mix door motor (front) harness connector M307 (B) terminal 5, 6.
18 - 5
17 - 6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (front). Refer to MTC-134,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2043E
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
(B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A)
terminal 3.
Connectors
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
WJIA2032E
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 28 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2033E
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Revision: August 2007
MTC-58
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
C
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness
connector M307 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
D
E
F
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness
connector M39 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3.
3-1
: Continuity should exist.
G
WJIA2035E
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (front). Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
I
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 6 and ground while rotating temperature control dial
from maximum heat to maximum cold.
Voltage
MTC
K
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
L
WJIA2044E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 6 and ground.
N
O
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
P
WJIA2045E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
MTC-59
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) harness connector and
front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness
connector M307 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 6.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to MTC-134.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2046E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum heat.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control
dial (rear) to maximum cold.
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
43
44
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
WJIA2055E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 43, 44 and ground.
43 - Ground
44 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2056E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum cold.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control
dial (rear) to maximum hot.
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Revision: August 2007
Terminals
(+)
(-)
44
43
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Rotate
temp control dial
Battery
voltage
MTC-60
WJIA2057E
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
A
4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44.
C
Continuity should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
E
WJIA2058E
5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
F
Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 43, 44 and the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 1, 6.
43 - 1
44 - 6
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
H
WJIA2059E
6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
MTC
Reconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
(B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A)
terminal 3.
Connectors
Front air control: M49/M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
28 (M50)
3 (M49)
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
K
L
M
WJIA2032E
N
7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 28 and ground.
O
P
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2033E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-61
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
WJIA2034E
9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28.
28 - 3
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3.
3-2
: Continuity should exist.
WJIA2060E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect the front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 30 and ground while rotating temperature control dial
(rear) from maximum cold to maximum hot.
Voltage
: Approx. 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
WJIA2061E
11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 30 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2062E
12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
MTC-62
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector and
front air control harness connector.
3. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 4 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 30.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to MTC-134,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2063E
D
Intake Door Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718961
E
SYMPTOM:
• Intake door does not change.
• Intake door motor does not operate normally.
NOTE:
Recirculation is not allowed in defrost, defrost/floor or floor modes.
F
INSPECTION FLOW
G
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REC (
)
1. Press the vent mode ( ).
2. Press REC (
) switch. The REC (
)indicator should illuminate.
3. Press REC (
) switch again. The REC (
) indicator should go out.
4. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound changes slightly).
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
MTC
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)"
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
K
L
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
M
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THE INTAKE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS
N
Perform diagnostic procedure for the intake door motor. Refer to "Intake Door Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace front air control or repair wiring. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
O
5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR OPERATION
P
Check and verify intake door mechanism for smooth operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor. Refer to MTC-129.
NG
>> Repair intake door mechanism.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Revision: August 2007
MTC-63
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
• Front air control
• Intake door motor (driver and passenger)
System Operation
The intake door control determines the intake door (driver and passenger) positions based on the position of
the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motors rotate closing off
the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door
motors rotate in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motors
The driver and passenger intake door motors are attached to the
intake unit. They rotate so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front
air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the
intake door.
WJIA0433E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
22
21
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery voltage
WJIA2064E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 22, 21 and ground.
22 - Ground
21 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2065E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
Revision: August 2007
MTC-64
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Press any button to exit out of self-diagnostic mode.
2. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
21
22
Condition
Self-diagnostic
mode
A
B
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery
voltage
C
WJIA2066E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
D
4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
E
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21.
F
G
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
WJIA2067E
5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
I
Disconnect the intake door motor (driver) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 22, 21 and the intake door motor (driver) harness connector M58 (B) terminal 1, 6.
1 - 22
6 - 21
MTC
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
K
L
WJIA2068E
M
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
N
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 45 and terminal 46 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
45
46
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery voltage
O
P
WJIA2069E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-65
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 46, 45 and ground.
46 - Ground
45 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2070E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
Press the any button to exit out of self-diagnostic mode.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50
terminal 46 and terminal 45 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M50
Terminals
(+)
(-)
46
45
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery
voltage
WJIA2071E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 46 and terminal 45.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2072E
5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 46, 45 and the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector terminal 1, 6.
46 - 1
45 - 6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-66
WJIA2073E
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718962
A
SYMPTOM:
• Defroster door does not change.
• Defroster door does not operate normally.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DEFROSTER DOOR
C
1. Press the vent switch ( ).
2. Press the defrost switch (
). Defroster indicator should illuminate.
3. Listen for defroster door position change (blower sound should change slightly).
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
F
G
Check for any service bulletins.
H
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
I
Perform diagnostic procedure for defroster door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR".
MTC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair PBR circuit or replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-128.
K
CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR OPERATION
5.
Check and verify defroster door mechanism for smooth operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-128.
NG
>> Repair defroster door mechanism.
L
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
M
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> System OK.
N
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
O
Component Parts
Defroster door control system components are:
P
• Front air control
• Defroster door motor
System Operation
The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the mode dial. When the
mode dial is in the defroster position, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts.
When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing
off air flow to the defroster ducts.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-67
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Defroster door motor
The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling
assembly unit. The front air control sends voltage to rotate the
defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to
the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are
applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever
which activates the defroster door.
LJIA0063E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 24 and terminal 23 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Terminals
(+)
(-)
23
24
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery voltage
WJIA2074E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 23, 24 and ground.
24 - Ground
23 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
WJIA2075E
3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER
1.
2.
Press any button to exit self-diagnostic mode.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 23 and terminal 24 while placing the HVAC system into
self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Connector
Front air control:
M49
Revision: August 2007
Terminals
(+)
(-)
24
23
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Self-diagnostic
mode
Battery
voltage
MTC-68
WJIA2076E
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
A
4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front air control harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 23 and terminal 24.
C
Continuity should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
E
WJIA2077E
5.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
F
Disconnect the defroster door motor harness connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 24, 23 and the defroster door motor harness
connector M303 (B) terminal 1, 6.
24 - 1
23 - 6
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness as necessary.
Front Blower Motor Circuit
H
WJIA2078E
I
INFOID:0000000001718963
MTC
SYMPTOM:
• Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
K
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - FRONT BLOWER
1.
2.
Rotate the blower control dial clockwise. Blower should operate.
Rotate the blower control dial clockwise, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all
speeds are checked.
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
N
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer the symptom table. Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
O
P
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-69
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> GO TO appropriate malfunctioning sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis
Function".
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Check and verify blower motor operates in all speeds.
Does blower motor operate in all speeds?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR".
6.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
• Front air control
• Front blower switch
• Variable blower control
• Front blower motor
• Front blower motor relay
System Operation
WJIA1898E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control
The variable blower control (front) is located on the cooling unit
assembly. The variable blower control (front) receives a gate voltage
from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.).
WJIA0442E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-70
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting
blower speed control.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA2080E
1.CHECK FUSES
H
Check 20A fuses (No. 28 and 30, located in the fuse and fusible link box). For fuse layout. Refer to PG-79.
I
Fuses are good.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
MTC
2.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Press the A/C switch.
Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector
M62 terminal (+) and ground.
K
L
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
WJIA0326E
N
3.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor relay connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 3 and 6 and ground.
O
P
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1896E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-71
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY
Check voltage between front blower motor relay connector H-2 terminal 1 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0080E
5.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor connector.
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 5 and 7 and front blower motor harness
connector M62 terminal (+).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA0968E
6.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace blower motor relay.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2147E
7.REPLACE FUSES
1. Replace fuses.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Activate the front blower motor.
4. Does fuse blow?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> Inspection End.
8.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check front blower motor relay. Refer to ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor relay.
9.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Check front blower motor. Refer to ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
MTC-72
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation".
A
10.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 6 and 3 and ground.
B
Continuity should not exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
D
WJIA2148E
11.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect variable blower control (front) harness connector.
Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 terminal 1 and ground.
E
F
Continuity should not exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to MTC137, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
WJIA2083E
I
12.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect variable blower control (front) connector and front
blower motor relay connector.
Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 (A) terminals 5 and 7 and variable blower control
(front) harness connector M122 (B) terminal 1.
MTC
K
Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2081E
13.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Check front blower motor. Refer to ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Replace front blower motor relay.
M
N
O
14.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-73
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 (A) terminal 3 and front blower motor harness connector M62 (B) terminal (-).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2149E
15.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2150E
16.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control connector M49 (B)
terminal 13 and variable blower control (front) connector M122
(A) terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2084E
17.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all disconnected parts except the variable blower
control (front) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn front blower motor to maximum speed.
Check voltage between variable blower control (front) harness
connector M122 terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
2
Ground
5V
Front air control: M122
WJIA2158E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to MTC-137, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front Blower Motor Relay
Revision: August 2007
MTC-74
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and
ground to coil side terminals of relay.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LJIA0068E
Front Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
• Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit.
• Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and verify
that the motor operates freely and quietly.
H
I
MTC
K
WJIA2168E
Rear Blower Motor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718964
SYMPTOM:
• Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear).
• Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (front) only.
• Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (rear) only.
• Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected.
• Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (rear) speed selected.
• Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (front).
• Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (rear).
L
M
N
O
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
1.
2.
Press A/C switch.
Turn the rear air control (front) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation
(REAR CTRL indicator off).
3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise.
Does the rear blower motor operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-75
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
1.
Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower
motor back the rear air control (rear).
2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation.
3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise.
Does the rear blower motor operate correctly?
YES >> • Rear blower motor does not operate at any speed from the rear air control (front). Refer to
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1 ".
• Rear blower motor operates in high speed all the time or does not match the rear air control
(front) speed selected. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2 ".
NO
>> • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control
(rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3 ".
3.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
1.
Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower
motor back the rear air control (rear).
2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation.
3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise.
Does the rear blower motor operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check rear air control (rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4 ".
4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 5.
5.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check (Rear)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> INSPECTION END.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Rear blower speed control system components are:
• Front air control
• Rear air control (front)
• Rear air control (rear)
• Variable blower control (rear)
• Rear blower motor
• Rear blower motor relay
Revision: August 2007
MTC-76
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System Operation
A
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA2085E
Rear Blower Control
NOTE:
The rear blower motor can only operate when the front blower motor is on.
When the rear air control (front) blower control dial is turned on and the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), it allows the rear air control (rear) to control the rear blower motor speed. If the REAR CTRL switch is
off (indicator off), the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower speed control dial position.
G
H
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
I
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
The variable blower control (rear) (1) is located on the rear blower
motor case. The variable blower control (rear) receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower fan
motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.).
MTC
K
L
WJIA2086E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1
M
SYMPTOM:
• Rear blower motor does not operate at any speed from the rear air control (front).
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
P
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Revision: August 2007
MTC-77
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
6
Ground
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2099E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front).
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2093E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2
SYMPTOM:
• Rear blower motor operates in high speed all the time or does not match the rear air control (front) speed
selected.
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
6
Ground
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WJIA2099E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
MTC-78
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground.
A
Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front).
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2093E
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 49 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 6.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
WJIA2101E
H
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3
SYMPTOM:
• Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear).
I
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
1. Disconnect rear air control (front) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Press A/C switch.
Does rear blower motor operate in high speed?
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
MTC
K
2.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear blower motor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Press A/C switch.
Rotate rear air control (front) blower speed control dial to maximum speed (REAR CTRL indicator off).
Check voltage between rear blower motor harness connector
B134 terminal (+) and ground.
M
N
Battery voltage should exist.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
LJIA0099E
P
3.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) POWER SUPPLY
Revision: August 2007
MTC-79
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect variable blower control (rear) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between variable blower control connector B151
terminal 1 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2154E
4.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check voltage between variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Front air control: B151
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
2
Ground
4.5 V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
WJIA2155E
5.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between variable blower control (rear) harness
connector B151 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2150E
6.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Check rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation".
7.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear blower motor connector B134 terminal (-) and variable blower control (rear) connector B151 terminal 3.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2156E
8.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
MTC-80
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 12 and variable blower control (rear) harness
connector B151 (B) terminal 2.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2157E
D
9.CHECK FUSES
Check 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
E
10.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
F
Check rear blower motor relay. Refer to ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace rear blower motor relay.
G
11.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR BLOWER MOTOR AND FUSE BLOCK (J/
H
B)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector
M3 terminal 3N and 8N and rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+).
I
MTC
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0107E
L
12.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector M3
terminal 7N and ground.
M
Continuity should exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
O
LJIA0102E
13.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
MTC-81
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector E30 terminal
3Q and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0101E
14.REPLACE FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace fuses.
3. Reconnect all disconnected parts.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Activate the rear blower motor from the rear air control (front).
6. Does fuse blow?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 15.
No
>> Inspection End.
15.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Check rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation".
16.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector and variable
blower control (rear).
Check continuity between rear blower motor harness connector
B134 terminal (+) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace variable blower control (rear). Refer to MTC137, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LJIA0104E
17.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
18.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FRONT AUX BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Revision: August 2007
MTC-82
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control harness connector M50.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground.
A
B
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front) Refer to MTC-113,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2152E
D
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4
SYMPTOM:
• Inoperative rear air control (rear).
E
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear air control (rear) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector
B150 terminal 6 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (rear): B150
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
6
Ground
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
F
G
H
WJIA2099E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
I
MTC
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1, and 9 and ground.
K
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to MTC-113,
"Removal and Installation"
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
M
WJIA2100E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 6 and ground.
O
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WJIA2152E
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT BETWEEN FRONT AIR CONTROL
AND REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
Revision: August 2007
MTC-83
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect front air control harness connector.
2. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 47 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 6.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2153E
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Rear Blower Motor Relay
Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and
ground to coil side terminals of relays.
WJIA0973E
Rear Blower Motor
Check that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and ensure
that the blower motor rotates freely and quietly.
LJIA0115E
Rear Temperature Control Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718965
SYMPTOM:
• Temperature cannot be adjusted from the rear air control (rear).
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
1.
Turn front blower switch on (rear air control only operates when front blower is on).
Revision: August 2007
MTC-84
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Press REAR CTRL switch on the rear air control (front).
3. Turn rear air control (rear) temperature control dial clockwise.
4. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets.
Does hot air blow from rear floor discharge air outlets?
YES >> Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check
(Rear)".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
A
B
2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
C
1. Turn rear air control (rear) temperature control dial counterclockwise.
2. Check for cold air at rear vent discharge air outlets.
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
D
3.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
E
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check (Rear)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
F
4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
G
Check for any service bulletins.
Have any service bulletins been issued?
YES >> Refer to applicable service bulletin.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
H
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
I
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK REAR BLOWER AIR OUTLET POSITION CHANGE
K
1. Turn front blower switch on.
2. Turn the rear temperature/mode (front) dial to maximum heat.
3. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets.
4. Turn the rear temperature/mode (front) dial to maximum cold.
5. Check for cold air at rear vent discharge air outlets.
Does rear outlet position and temperature change when adjusted from front air control?
YES >> Check the rear air control circuit. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)".
NO
>> Check air mix door motor circuit. Refer to MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
L
M
N
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Rear air control system components are:
• Front air control
• Rear air control (front)
• Rear air control (rear)
• Air mix door motor (rear)
• Rear blower motor relay
• Rear blower motor
Revision: August 2007
MTC
O
P
MTC-85
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
System Operation
WJIA2102E
Rear Air Control
The front air control must be turned on before either rear air control can be used. When the REAR CTRL indicator is off the rear air control (front) will control all rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode
operations. When the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), the rear air control (rear) will control all the
rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode operations.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
SYMPTOM:
• Temperature/mode operation is malfunctioning.
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2087E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 3 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
3
Ground
4.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
WJIA2103E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) AUX TEMP POT VOLTAGE
Revision: August 2007
MTC-86
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 7 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (front): R19
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
7
Ground
4.5V
A
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
WJIA2104E
D
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground.
E
Continuity should exist.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
WJIA2093E
5.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT
H
Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 terminal 8 and ground.
I
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to MTC-113,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> GO TO 8.
MTC
K
WJIA2105E
6.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 3.
N
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
O
WJIA2108E
7.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) BLOWER POT CIRCUIT
Revision: August 2007
MTC-87
P
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 (A) terminal 50 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 7.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2109E
8.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (front) harness connector
R19 (B) terminal 8.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2107E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AUX TEMPERATURE POT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear air control (rear).
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector
B150 terminal 7 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (rear): B150
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
7
Ground
4.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA2110E
2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector
B150 terminal 3 and ground.
Connector
Rear air control (rear): B150
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Voltage (Approx.)
3
Ground
4.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6
WJIA2103E
3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE RETURN GROUND
Revision: August 2007
MTC-88
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 8 and ground.
A
Continuity should exist.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
C
WJIA2105E
4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS
1.
D
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 9 and ground.
E
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1 and ground.
F
Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to MTC-113,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2106E
H
5.CHECK REAR AUX TEMP CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 48 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 7.
I
MTC
K
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
WJIA2111E
6.CHECK REFERENCE VOLATAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR
M
CONTROL FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 3.
N
O
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WJIA2108E
7.CHECK REFERENCE RETURN GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND
FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN
Revision: August 2007
MTC-89
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 8.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal
and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Magnet Clutch Circuit
WJIA2107E
INFOID:0000000001718966
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - MAGNET CLUTCH
1. Rotate blower control dial clockwise. Press vent switch ( ).
2. Press A/C switch. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection).
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Are any self-diagnosis codes present?
YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Check and verify ambient sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-108, "Ambient Sensor Circuit".
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Check and verify intake sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-110, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
>> GO TO 7.
7.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-90
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal
from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control
The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor.
When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns
OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature. Refer to the following table.
Ambient temperature °C (°F)
Compressor ON
intake
temperature C (°F)
Compressor OFF
intake temperature C (°F)
0 (32)
2.5 (37)
2.0 (36)
10 (50)
2.5 (37)
2.0 (36)
20 (68)
2.5 (37)
1.5 (35)
30 (86)
2.0 (36)
1.0 (34)
40 (104)
2.0 (36)
1.0 (34)
50 (122)
2.0 (36)
1.0 (34)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
H
I
MTC
K
L
WJIA2112E
1.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT
M
Check intake sensor. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Malfunctioning intake sensor. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
N
2.PERFORM AUTO ACTIVE TEST
O
Perform Auto Active Test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
Does magnet clutch operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> •
WITH CONSULT-III
GO TO 5.
•
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
GO TO 6.
No
>> Check 10A fuse (No. 33, located in IPDM E/R), and GO TO 3.
P
3.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR
Revision: August 2007
MTC-91
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and compressor (magnet
clutch) connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E124
terminal 33 and compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1.
33 – 1
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA0331E
4.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT
Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage direct current to terminal.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-165, "Removal
and Installation for Compressor Clutch".
SJIA0197E
5.CHECK BCM INPUT (COMPRESSOR ON) SIGNAL
Check compressor ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
A/C SW ON
A/C SW OFF
: COMP ON SIG ON
: COMP ON SIG OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 27 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 4.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2113E
7.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL)
Revision: August 2007
MTC-92
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 4 and ground.
A
B
Terminals
(+)
Front air control connector
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
A/C switch: ON
0V
A/C switch: OFF
5V
(-)
Terminal No.
C
WJIA2114E
M49
4
Ground
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when A/C switch is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113,
"Removal and Installation".
NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when A/C switch is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
E
F
8.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
G
Start engine.
Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal
70 and ground.
H
Terminals
(+)
ECM connector
Terminal No.
F54
70
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
I
A/C switch: ON
0.36 - 3.88V
MTC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Refer to EC-603.
LJIA0124E
K
9.CHECK BCM INPUT (FAN ON) SIGNAL
Check FAN ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
FAN CONTROL SWITCH ON
FAN CONTROL SWITCH OFF
L
: FAN ON SIG ON
: FAN ON SIG OFF
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
N
10.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 5.
O
P
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA2115E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-93
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
11.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (FAN ON SIGNAL)
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 5 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Front air control connector
(-)
Terminal No.
M49
5
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
A/C switch: ON
Blower motor
operates
0V
A/C switch: OFF
5V
WJIA2116E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when blower motor is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113,
"Removal and Installation".
NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when blower motor is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal
and Installation of BCM".
12.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Check CAN communication. Refer to ATC-27, "CAN Communication System Description".
• BCM – ECM
• ECM – IPDM E/R
• ECM – Front air control
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part(s).
Insufficient Cooling
INFOID:0000000001718967
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Turn front and rear temperature control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold.
2. Press the A/C switch.
3. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
Can the symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 3.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-94
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
A
5.CHECK DRIVE BELTS
B
Check compressor belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Adjust or replace compressor belt. Refer to EM-12.
C
6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION
D
Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation.
Does air mix door operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace air mix door control linkage.
E
7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION
Check and verify cooling fan motor for smooth operation. Refer to EC-463, "Description".
Does cooling fan motor operate correctly?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check cooling fan motor. Refer to EC-463.
F
G
8.CHECK RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT BEFORE USAGE
Check recovery/recycling equipment before connecting to vehicle. Verify there is no pressure in the recovery/
recycling equipment by checking the gauges. If pressure exists, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
>> GO TO 9.
H
I
9.CHECK REFRIGERANT PURITY
1. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle.
2. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling and refrigerant identifier.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Check contaminated refrigerant. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
MTC
K
10.CHECK FOR EVAPORATOR FREEZE UP
Start engine and run A/C. Check for evaporator freeze up.
Does evaporator freeze up?
YES >> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES".
NO
>> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
Check refrigerant pressure with manifold gauge connected. Refer to "Test Reading".
OK or NG
OK
>> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES".
NG
>> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK AIR DUCTS
Check ducts for air leaks.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> Repair air leaks.
M
N
O
P
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES
Revision: August 2007
L
MTC-95
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA0533E
*1
"PERFORMANCE CHART"
*4
MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
Revision: August 2007
*2
"PERFORMANCE CHART"
MTC-96
*3
"Trouble Diagnoses for UNUSUAL
Pressure"
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
WJIA0534E
P
*1
MTC-148, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*2
MTC-69, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" *3
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts"
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
Testing must be performed as follows:
Revision: August 2007
MTC-97
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode dial
(Ventilation) set
Recirculation (REC) switch
(Recirculation) set
Max. speed set
Blower speed (FR and RR)
Engine speed
Idle speed
RR system
ON
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator
°C (°F)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
25 (77)
9.7 - 13.7 (49 - 57)
30 (86)
12.6 - 16.6 (55 - 62)
35 (95)
14.9 - 19.9 (59 - 68)
40 (104)
17.3 - 23.3 (63 - 74)
50-70
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
High-pressure (Discharge side)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
25 (77)
1,059 - 1,294
(10.8 - 13.2, 153.6 - 187.7)
216 - 255
(2.2 - 2.6, 31.3 - 37.0)
30 (86)
1,206 - 1,481
(12.3 - 15.1, 174.9 - 214.8)
255 - 304
(2.6 - 3.1, 37.0 - 44.1)
35 (95)
1,393 - 1,706
(14.2 - 17.4, 202.0 - 247.5)
275 - 343
(2.8 - 3.5, 39.8 - 49.8)
40 (104)
1,510 - 1,844
(15.4 - 18.8, 219.0 - 267.4)
343 - 422
(3.5 - 4.3, 49.8 - 61.2)
50-70
Trouble Diagnoses for Unusual Pressure
Whenever system′s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperatureto-operating pressure table).
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High
Revision: August 2007
MTC-98
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser.
Excessive refrigerant charge in
refrigeration cycle.
• Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
• When compressor is
stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approx-
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
• Clean condenser.
• Check and repair cooling fan
as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge system.
Engine tends to overheat.
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair engine cooling system.
• An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas
near the evaporator outlet.
• Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
• Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side.
• Excessive refrigerant discharge flow.
• Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification.
↓
Improper expansion valve adjustment.
AC359A
Refrigerant cycle
E
F
G
H
Replace expansion valve.
I
MTC
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low
Gauge indication
C
D
Poor heat exchange in condenser.
(After compressor operation
stops, high-pressure decreases too slowly.)
↓
Air in refrigeration cycle.
imately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2,
28 psi). It then decreases
gradually thereafter.
A
B
Insufficient condenser cooling
performance.
↓
Air suction by cooling fan is in1.
Condenser fins are
sufficient.
clogged.
2.
Improper fan rotation of
cooling fan.
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too high.
Corrective action
Probable cause
Corrective action
K
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor
and condenser are clogged or
crushed.
• Check and repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.
• Check oil for contamination.
L
M
AC360A
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
Refrigerant cycle
N
Probable cause
Corrective action
High- and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor.
No temperature difference between high- and low-pressure
sides.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor.
AC356A
O
P
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low
Revision: August 2007
MTC-99
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Gauge indication
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
• There is a big temperature
difference between liquid
tank outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
• Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted.
Liquid tank inside is slightly
clogged.
• Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
• Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
• Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side.
High-pressure pipe located be- • Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
tween liquid tank and expan• Check oil for contamination.
sion valve is clogged.
Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
Low refrigerant charge.
↓
Leaking fittings or components.
Check refrigerant system for
leaks. Refer to MTC-161,
"Checking of Refrigerant
Leaks".
There is a big temperature difference between expansion
valve inlet and outlet while the
valve itself is frosted.
Expansion valve closes a little
compared with the specification.
↓
1.
Improper expansion
valve adjustment.
2.
Malfunctioning expansion
valve.
3.
Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
• Remove foreign particles by
using compressed air.
• Check oil for contamination.
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas near
the evaporator outlet.
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
or crushed.
• Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
• Check oil for contamination.
Evaporator is frozen.
• Check intake sensor circuit.
Refer to MTC-110, "Intake
Sensor Circuit".
• Replace compressor.
AC353A
Air flow volume is too low.
• Replace liquid tank.
• Check oil for contamination.
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative.
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
• Air conditioning system does
not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air.
• The system constantly functions for a certain period of
time after compressor is
stopped and restarted.
Refrigerant does not discharge
cyclically.
↓
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
↓
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
• Drain water from refrigerant
or replace refrigerant.
• Replace liquid tank.
AC354A
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative
Revision: August 2007
MTC-100
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
↓
Expansion valve or liquid tank
is frosted.
Leave the system at rest until
no frost is present. Start it
again to check whether or not
the malfunction is caused by
water or foreign particles.
• If water is the cause, initially
cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from
refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
• If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and
remove the particles with dry
and compressed air (not
shop air).
• If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion
valve.
• Replace liquid tank.
• Check oil for contamination.
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
Liquid tank or front/rear side of
expansion valve′s pipe is frosted or dewed.
AC362A
Insufficient Heating
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
INFOID:0000000001718968
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
H
INSPECTION FLOW
1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE
I
1. Press the
switch.
2. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to the maximum heat.
3. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
MTC
Can this symptom be duplicated?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform complete system operational check (front). Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check K
(Front)".
2.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
L
Check for any service bulletins.
>> GO TO 3.
M
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function".
N
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
O
1.
2.
3.
4.
P
Check for proper engine coolant level. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
Check hoses for leaks or kinks.
Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection".
Check for air in cooling system.
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATER PUMP
1.
Rotate temperature control dial to maximum heat.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-101
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Rotate fan control dial clockwise to maximum speed.
3. Heater pump should be activated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check heater pump circuit. Refer to MTC-102, "Heater Pump Circuit".
6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION
Check the operation of the air mix door.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the air mix door motor circuit. Refer to MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
7.CHECK AIR DUCTS
Check for disconnected or leaking air ducts.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair all disconnected or leaking air ducts.
8.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses.
OK or NG
OK
>> Hot inlet hose and a warm outlet hose: GO TO 9.
NG
>> Both hoses warm: GO TO 10.
9.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM
Check engine control temperature sensor. Refer to EC-188.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary. Retest.
10.CHECK HEATER HOSES
Check heater hoses for proper installation.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> 1. Back flush heater core.
2. Drain the water from the system.
3. Refill system with new engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
4. GO TO 11 to retest.
11.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses.
OK or NG
OK
>> System OK.
NG
>> Replace heater core. Refer to MTC-124.
Heater Pump Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718969
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Heater pump control system components are:
• Front air control
• Heater pump relay
• Heater pump
• Intake sensor
System Operation
Revision: August 2007
MTC-102
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The heater pump improves heater performance specifically at idle conditions. It is designed to operate in
either of the following 2 situations:
1. Front blower motor set to maximum speed and temperature control dial set to full hot or
2. Engine coolant temperature (signal via CAN communication) minus heater core outlet temperature (intake
sensor input to front air control) is greater than 20° C (68° F). If the difference is less than 16° C (61° F),
the heater pump will not operate unless the conditions in item No. 1 above are met.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA1780E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR HEATER PUMP CIRCUIT
H
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO HEATER PUMP
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect heater pump connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set front blower motor to maximum speed.
Turn temperature control dial to maximum heat.
Check voltage between heater pump harness connector E127
terminal 1 and ground.
(1) - Ground
I
MTC
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
K
WJIA2117E
2.CHECK HEATER PUMP GROUND
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between heater pump harness connector E127
terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
M
: Continuity should exist.
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace heater pump. Refer to ATC-143.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
O
WJIA2118E
3.CHECK HEATER PUMP RELAY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check heater pump relay. Refer to ATC-110, "Heater Pump Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace heater pump relay.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-103
L
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4.CHECK RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 terminals 1, 5 and ground.
1 - Ground
5 - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1783E
5.CHECK HEATER PUMP MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (A) terminal 3 and heater pump harness connector E127
(B) terminal 1.
3-1
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (A) terminal 3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2119E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN HEATER PUMP RELAY AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 (A) terminal 10 and heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (B) terminal 2.
2 - 10
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector
E128 (B) terminal 2 and ground.
2 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2120E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Heater Pump Relay
Revision: August 2007
MTC-104
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5.
A
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
B
If NG, replace relay.
C
LHA160
D
Noise
INFOID:0000000001718970
SYMPTOM: Noise
E
INSPECTION FLOW
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-105
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WJIA1972E
*1
MTC-148, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*4
MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)" *5
Revision: August 2007
*2
MTC-148, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*3
MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor"
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts"
MTC-106
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Self-Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718971
A
SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
1.CONFIRM A/C MODE OPERATION
1. Press the A/C switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
C
2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK
D
Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Can a symptom be duplicated?
YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> System OK.
3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS
Check for any service bulletins.
Have any service bulletins been issued?
YES >> Refer to appropriate service bulletin.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
E
F
G
H
4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air
Control".
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refer to MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control".
MTC
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT
5.
Check ambient sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
K
L
6.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
M
7.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) PBR CIRCUIT
N
Check air mix door motor PBR circuit. Refer to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
O
8.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS
P
Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)".
Does another symptom exist?
YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-107
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Ambient Sensor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718972
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left
side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is then input into the front air control.
WJIA0338E
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100
seconds.
This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving.
Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor
will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the
CONSULT-III, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of
conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
WJIA2121E
1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ambient sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E1
terminal 1 and ground.
Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WJIA0526E
2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
Revision: August 2007
MTC-108
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E1 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 25.
A
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
WJIA2122E
3.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
D
Check ambient sensor. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> 1. Replace ambient sensor. ATC-129.
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
E
F
4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E1 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 26.
H
Continuity should exist.
4.
I
Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E1 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2123E
MTC
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
COMPONENT INSPECTION
L
Ambient Sensor
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-109
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
After disconnecting ambient sensor connector, measure resistance
between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor component side, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
12.73
−10 (14)
9.92
−5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
WJIA0339E
If NG, replace ambient sensor.
Intake Sensor Circuit
INFOID:0000000001718973
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit. It converts
temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control
WJIA0482E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III,
code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
WJIA2140E
1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND
Revision: August 2007
MTC-110
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect intake sensor connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M305
terminal 2 and ground.
A
B
Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
C
WJIA0465E
2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M305 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 26.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
WJIA2141E
3.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
H
Check intake sensor. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> 1. Replace intake sensor. Refer to ATC-132.
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
I
MTC
4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M305 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49
(A) terminal 11.
K
L
Continuity should exist.
4.
M
Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector
M305 (B) terminal 2 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WJIA2142E
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation".
2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
O
COMPONENT INSPECTION
P
Intake Sensor
Revision: August 2007
N
MTC-111
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance
between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
209.0
−10 (14)
160.0
−5 (23)
123.0
0 (32)
95.8
5 (41)
74.9
10 (50)
58.9
15 (59)
46.7
20 (68)
37.3
25 (77)
30.0
30 (86)
24.2
35 (95)
19.7
40 (104)
16.1
45 (113)
13.2
WJIA0978E
If NG, replace intake sensor.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-112
2008 Quest
CONTROL UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CONTROL UNIT
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718974
FRONT AIR CONTROL
B
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the control knobs from the front air control.
Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C".
Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid
C (2).
C
D
E
F
LJIA0196E
4.
G
Remove the front air control.
Installation
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
H
REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
I
Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front).
Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to
EI-38.
MTC
Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the
front roof console assembly (2).
K
L
M
LJIA0195E
4.
Remove the rear air control (front).
N
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
O
Removal
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-113
2008 Quest
CONTROL UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining,
located over the sliding door, RH.
WJIA2143E
2.
Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-114
2008 Quest
AMBIENT SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AMBIENT SENSOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718975
REMOVAL
1.
2.
B
Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE:
The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening,
in front of the condenser.
Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient
sensor.
C
D
E
WJIA0341E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-115
2008 Quest
INTAKE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718976
Intake Sensor
WJIA0513E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
6.
Intake sensor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim (1).
LIIA2480E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-116
2008 Quest
INTAKE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH.
A
B
C
LIIA2481E
D
4.
5.
Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-117
2008 Quest
BLOWER MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BLOWER MOTOR
Component
INFOID:0000000001718977
Front Blower Motor
LJIA0017E
1.
Front blower motor
4.
Heater core and evaporator case
2.
Blower motor side cover
3.
Blower motor case
Rear Blower Motor
WJIA2145E
1.
Rear blower motor
Revision: August 2007
2.
Rear blower motor case
MTC-118
3.
Variable blower control (rear)
2008 Quest
BLOWER MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718978
A
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the RH and LH ventilator duct. Refer to MTC-141, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to MTC-141, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the blower motor side cover.
Remove the front blower motor.
C
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
E
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-119
2008 Quest
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718979
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin
microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the
recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located
in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and
cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear
heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin
microfilters.
LJIA0012E
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving
conditions. Refer to MA-7. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter
cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION:
When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure
that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the
direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is
printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters.
Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Install the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-120
LJIA0058E
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718980
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
WJIA1968E
1.
High/low pressure pipe (production)
2.
4.
Front heater core pipe and hose as- 5.
sembly
7.
High/low pressure pipe - upper
(service)
⇐
High/low pressure pipe bracket
3.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
Heater pump
6.
High/low pressure pipe - lower
(service)
Front
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-121
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0066E
1.
Rear heater and cooling unit assembly
2.
Rear A/C pipes
3.
Rear heater core pipes
4.
Rear heater core hose
5.
Rear blower motor
6.
Underfloor rear A/C pipes
7.
Underfloor rear heater core pipes
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718981
FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18.
Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core.
Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve.
Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-122
2008 Quest
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse
block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to PG-40, "Harness Layout".
9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front heater and
cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new one,
then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
• Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
• Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
A
B
C
D
E
F
REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
G
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
H
Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core.
I
Disconnect the rear A/C pipes from the rear expansion valve.
Disconnect the following electrical connectors:
MTC
• Rear blower motor
• Rear blower motor resistor
• Rear air mix door motor
Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit
K
assembly.
Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly.
L
LJIA0021E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new one,
then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
• Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
• Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-123
2008 Quest
HEATER CORE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATER CORE
Component
INFOID:0000000001718982
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
LJIA0017E
1.
Front blower motor
4.
Heater core and evaporator case
Revision: August 2007
2.
Blower motor side cover
MTC-124
3.
Blower motor case
2008 Quest
HEATER CORE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
WJIA2146E
1.
Front cover
2.
Evaporator and heater core case
3.
Evaporator
4.
Side cover
5.
Heater core
6.
Rear blower motor
7.
Blower motor case
8.
Variable blower control (rear)
⇐
Front
M
N
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718983
FRONT HEATER CORE
O
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the side cover.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-125
2008 Quest
P
HEATER CORE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove the front heater core.
NOTE:
If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking
from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new
ones before installing the new front heater core.
LJIA0019E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR HEATER CORE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core.
LJIA0069E
4.
5.
Remove the rear heater core bracket.
Remove the rear heater core.
LJIA0071E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-126
2008 Quest
HEATER PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATER PUMP
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718984
Heater Pump
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
WJIA2220E
1.
Cowl top extension
2.
Heater pump electrical connector
3.
Heater pump
4.
Front heater core pipe and hose assembly
5.
Heater hose
⇐
Front
K
REMOVAL
L
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Remove the cowl top. Refer to EI-18.
Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant".
Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension.
Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly.
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-127
2008 Quest
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718985
Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0513E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
6.
Intake sensor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the steering member from the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-128
2008 Quest
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718986
Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
WJIA0446E
1.
Intake door motor (driver)
2.
Air mix door motor (front)
3.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-129
2008 Quest
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0513E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
6.
Intake sensor
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718987
DRIVER SIDE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
LJIA0082E
Installation
Revision: August 2007
MTC-130
2008 Quest
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
PASSENGER SIDE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
B
C
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-131
2008 Quest
MODE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718988
Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0513E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
6.
Intake sensor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor.
LJIA0083E
INSTALLATION
Revision: August 2007
MTC-132
2008 Quest
MODE DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-133
2008 Quest
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Component
INFOID:0000000001718989
Air Mix Door Motor (Front) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA0446E
1.
Intake door motor (driver)
2.
Air mix door motor (front)
3.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718990
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-134
2008 Quest
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
A
B
C
LJIA0084E
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR)
E
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector.
Remove the three screws and remove the rear air mix door
motor.
F
G
H
I
LJIA0021E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-135
2008 Quest
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Component
INFOID:0000000001718991
Variable Blower Control (Front)
WJIA0513E
1.
Defroster door motor
2.
Intake door motor (passenger)
3.
Mode door motor
4.
Variable blower control (front)
5.
Front heater and cooling unit assembly
6.
Intake sensor
Revision: August 2007
MTC-136
2008 Quest
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
A
B
C
D
E
WJIA2145E
1.
Rear blower motor
2.
Rear blower motor case
3.
F
Variable blower control (rear)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718992
G
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT)
H
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel".
Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front).
I
MTC
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR)
K
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the variable blower control (rear) electrical connector.
Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear).
L
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-137
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Component
INFOID:0000000001718993
Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
WJIA2219E
1.
Defroster nozzle (part of the
instrument panel)
2.
Fresh air duct
3.
Defroster duct
4.
RH side demister duct
5.
RH side demister duct extension
6.
LH side demister duct extension
Revision: August 2007
MTC-138
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
LH side demister duct
8.
RH ventilator duct
10. LH ventilator duct
11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly
13. Floor junction duct extension
14. Floor junction duct
9.
Center ventilator duct
A
12. Floor connector duct
15. Floor distribution duct
⇐
16. Floor duct
Front
B
Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
LJIA0086E
1.
Rear overhead duct
4.
Clips
2.
Rear floor duct
3.
Rear heater and cooling unit assembly
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-139
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Grilles
LJIA0197E
1.
Overhead console
2.
Overhead console front grilles
3.
Overhead console rear grilles
4.
Front demister grille
5.
LH ventilator grille
6.
Center LH ventilator grille
7.
Center ventilator grille screws
8.
Center RH ventilator grille
9.
Cluster lid C
10. RH ventilator grille
11. Instrument panel
12. RH side demister grille
13. Front pillar finisher RH
Revision: August 2007
MTC-140
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718994
A
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
NOTE:
The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly.
B
Removal
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel" .
C
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRESH AIR DUCT
D
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel" .
Remove the defroster nozzle.
Remove the fresh air duct.
E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
DEFROSTER DUCT
G
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the defroster duct.
H
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
I
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
K
RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
L
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct.
M
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT
N
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
P
FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Installation
Revision: August 2007
O
MTC-141
2008 Quest
DUCTS AND GRILLES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Remove the floor junction duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-36.
Remove the floor duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR OVERHEAD DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct.
NOTE:
The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is
replaced as an assembly. Refer to EI-38.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR FLOOR DUCT
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
GRILLES
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to EI-31 or EI38.
Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-142
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REFRIGERANT LINES
A
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718995
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
B
Discharging Refrigerant
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA2195E
1.
Shut-off valve
A.
Preferred (best) method
2.
A/C service valve
3.
H
Recovery/recycling equipment
I
WARNING:
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting MTC
requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a)
recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil man- K
ufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
L
M
N
O
P
WJIA2196E
1.
Shut-off valve
2.
A/C service valve
3.
Recovery/recycling equipment
4.
Refrigerant container (HFC-134a)
5.
Weight scale (J-39650)
6.
Evacuating vacuum pump (J-39699)
Revision: August 2007
MTC-143
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Manifold gauge set (J-39183)
C.
For charging
A.
Preferred (best) method
B.
Alternative method
WJIA1923E
1
MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quan- 3
tity in Compressor".
MTC-161, "Checking of Refrigerant
Leaks".
2
MTC-161, "Checking of Refrigerant
Leaks".
MTC-94, "Insufficient Cooling".
Revision: August 2007
4
MTC-144
5
MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant".
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Component
INFOID:0000000001718996
A
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
WJIA1967E
1.
High-pressure service valve
2.
Low-pressure service valve
4.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
5.
Low-pressure flexible hose
6.
High-pressure flexible hose
7.
Shaft seal
8.
Condenser
9.
Liquid tank
Revision: August 2007
MTC-145
3.
High-pressure pipe
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Pressure relief valve
11. Compressor
12. High/low pressure pipe (production)
13. High/low pressure pipe - upper
(service)
14
15
High/low pressure pipe - lower
(service)
Expansion valve (front)
Rear A/C
LJIA0016E
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or
around the connection.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-146
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Compressor
INFOID:0000000001718997
A
Compressor Mounting
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0371E
G
1.
Stud
2.
Compressor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield.
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-14.
Remove the compressor mounting stud.
Disconnect the compressor connector.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose from the compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools.
H
I
MTC
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one,
then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-147
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
INFOID:0000000001718998
Magnet Clutch Assembly
WJIA0372E
1.
Magnet clutch assembly
2.
Magnet coil
3.
Pulley
4.
Clutch disc
5.
Snap ring
6.
Thermal protector (built in)
7.
Compressor
REMOVAL
NOTE:
For clarity, the compressor is shown out of the vehicle, but the compressor does not need to be removed to
remove the compressor clutch.
1. Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield.
2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
4.
: J-44614
Remove the clutch disc.
WHA228
5.
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable
tool.
RHA072C
Revision: August 2007
MTC-148
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the
small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the
puller on the small adapter.
Tool number
A
: KV99233130 (J-29884)
B
CAUTION:
To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller
claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not
into the pulley groove.
C
WJIA1017E
D
7.
Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver,
remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the
magnet coil.
E
F
G
WHA212
INSPECTION
H
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat,
replace clutch disc and pulley.
I
MTC
K
WHA183
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving,
replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable
solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
L
M
N
INSTALLATION
1.
Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION:
Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the
compressor front head.
O
P
WHA213
2.
Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-149
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install
the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
Tool number
:
—
(J-38873-A)
WJIA1016E
4.
Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the
original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand.
WHA184
5.
Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc
from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Refer to MTC145, "Component".
Tool number
: J-44614
CAUTION:
After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch
pulley rotates smoothly.
WHA229
6.
Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as
shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
7.
8.
9.
: 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting
spacer to readjust.
Install the drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation".
Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
WHA194
Revision: August 2007
MTC-150
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
INFOID:0000000001718999
A
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the engine under cover.
Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
C
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
INFOID:0000000001719000
E
F
G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the engine under cover.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
H
I
INSTALLATION
MTC
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it K
when installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
INFOID:0000000001719001
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Reposition the IPDM E/R aside.
Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck.
Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside.
Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-151
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe
INFOID:0000000003261161
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
WARNING:
• Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose
and throat.
• If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal.
Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way.
Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the
way. Refer to ATC-143, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the
way.
Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage".
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool
(ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other
surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
• A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the
pipe when it is cut.
• Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe.
LJIA0182E
9.
Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool
(ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other
surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
• A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the
pipe when it is cut.
LJIA0183E
10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of
the cut A/C pipes.
11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure
pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located
near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
LJIA0184E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-152
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from
the front expansion valve as shown.
• Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
• Electric throttle control actuator (3)
• ⇐: Front
A
B
C
LJIA0185E
D
13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the
threaded stud on the dash panel as shown.
• ⇐: Front
E
F
G
LJIA0186E
14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as
shown.
• ⇐: Front
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable
material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
H
I
MTC
LJIA0187E
15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe.
a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from
under the vehicle.
b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A).
c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe
clamp (2).
NOTE:
Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe
as necessary.
K
L
M
N
LJIA0188E
d.
O
Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel
threaded stud, using a suitable tool.
P
LJIA0189E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-153
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
e.
Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe
(1).
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable
material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
LJIA0190E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
• Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
• Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
NOTE:
The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly.
1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections.
NOTE:
To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and
secure it to the dash panel threaded stud.
2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment.
a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve
and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown.
• Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
• Electric throttle control actuator (3)
• ⇐: Front
LJIA0185E
b.
Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown.
• ⇐: Front
LJIA0191E
c.
d.
e.
f.
Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low
pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension
strut tower (3) as shown.
Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip
(secured to the dash panel threaded stud).
Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure
pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut
tower (3) as shown to specification.
LJIA0184E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-154
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.
a.
b.
c.
Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe.
CAUTION:
• Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
• Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
• Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection
(1) bolt (A) as shown to specification.
Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp
bolt (B).
As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3).
A
B
C
D
E
LJIA0188E
d.
e.
Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud.
From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the
upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure
pipe (B) as shown to specification.
• ⇐: Front
CAUTION:
• Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other
surrounding parts when tightening the fittings.
F
G
H
I
LJIA0191E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector.
MTC
Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer
bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to ATC-160, "HFCK
134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
INFOID:0000000001719003
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
M
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and
remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
N
O
P
WJIA0123E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-155
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
Removal and Installation for Condenser
INFOID:0000000001719004
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-16.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such
as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor.
WJIA0124E
6.
Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its
mounts as shown.
WJIA0373E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-156
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator
INFOID:0000000001719005
A
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
LJIA0017E
1.
Front blower motor
4.
Heater core and evaporator case
2.
Blower motor side cover
3.
Blower motor case
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the blower motor side cover.
Remove the front blower motor.
Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover.
L
M
N
O
LJIA0018E
5.
Remove the blower motor case.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-157
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters.
7. Remove the evaporator.
LJIA0019E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones.
Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them.
• When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction
arrow printed on the side of the filters.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-158
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator
INFOID:0000000001719006
A
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
LJIA0020E
1.
Front cover
2.
Evaporator and heater core case
3.
Evaporator
4.
Side cover
5.
Heater core
6.
Rear blower motor
7.
Blower motor case
8.
Variable blower control (rear)
N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
O
Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove the rear blower motor.
Remove the variable blower control (rear).
Revision: August 2007
MTC-159
2008 Quest
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove the rear air mix door motor.
5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to MTC141, "Removal and Installation".
6. Disassemble the rear heater and cooling unit assembly to
remove the evaporator.
LJIA0021E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when
installing them.
Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve
INFOID:0000000001719007
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the cooler grommet.
Remove the expansion valve.
WJIA0128E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve bolts
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt
: 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
: Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve
INFOID:0000000001719008
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pipes from the expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air and contaminants.
Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-160
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Expansion valve bolts
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt
: 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
: Refer to MTC-145, "Component".
A
CAUTION:
• Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
C
Checking of Refrigerant Leaks
INFOID:0000000001719009
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra
inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not
properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all
system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe
along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the
component.
CAUTION:
Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will
improve the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000001719010
INFOID:0000000001719011
NOTE:
This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must
be replaced.
3.
D
Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a
I
low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye
will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
MTC
If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or
cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent
K
future misdiagnosis.
Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak
detector (J-41995).
L
NOTE:
• Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be
checked are clean.
M
• Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
• Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
N
Dye Injection
1.
2.
B
Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi).
Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into
the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459).
CAUTION:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service
procedures.
Connect the injector tool (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve.
Revision: August 2007
MTC-161
2008 Quest
O
P
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON.
5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a
(R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve.
7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and
location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
INFOID:0000000001719012
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE:
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent.
Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate
device. To use the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995)
properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform
any specified maintenance.
AHA281A
1.
Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the
point to be checked as shown.
SHA707EA
2.
When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the
probe as shown.
SHA706E
Revision: August 2007
MTC-162
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown.
A
B
C
SHA708EA
D
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette
smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the
leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R134a) Service Procedure".
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
E
F
Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) above a temperature of
16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified G
amount of refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa H
(3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) pressure.
Conduct the leak test from the high pressure side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low
pressure side (evaporator drain hose to shaft seal). Refer to MTC-145, "Component". Clean the compoI
nent to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around
the following connections and components.
• Compressor
MTC
• High and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal
• Liquid tank
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Service valves. Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the ser- K
vice valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE:
After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the ser- L
vice valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
• Evaporator
With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in
the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the M
manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant
leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose.
NOTE:
N
Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water
or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak,
O
then repeat the leak check.
Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and
connections.
P
If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11.
Start the engine.
Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
NOTE:
For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually.
A/C switch: ON
Air flow: VENT mode
Revision: August 2007
MTC-163
2008 Quest
REFRIGERANT LINES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
c. Intake position: RECIRCULATION mode
d. Temperature: MAX cold
e. Blower fan speed: HIGH
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following
steps 4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning
the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor.
The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after
the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks
are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
SHA839E
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier
equipment (J-41810-NI).
14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI).
15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as
necessary.
16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant
leaks.
17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check
(Front)".
Revision: August 2007
MTC-164
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
Service Data and Specification (SDS)
INFOID:0000000001719013
COMPRESSOR
B
Make
ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL
Model
DKS-17D
Type
Swash plate
Displacement
175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3) / revolution
Cylinder bore x stroke
30.5 x 24.0 mm (1.201 x 0.94 in)
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V ribbed
C
D
E
OIL
F
Name
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
Total in system
220 m
Compressor (service part) charging amount
Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor".
Capacity
(7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 lmp fl oz)
REFRIGERANT
G
H
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb)
I
MTC
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
MTC-165
2008 Quest
BRAKES
SECTION
PB
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ........................... 5 PB
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Component ............................................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
PARKING BRAKE SHOE .................................. 7
Component ............................................................... 7
Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ............................... 4
G
H
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 10
On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 4
Parking Drum Brake ................................................10
Parking Brake Control .............................................10
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PB-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718280
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
PB-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718281
B
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Removing fasteners
C
D
PBIC0190E
E
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PB-3
2008 Quest
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
On-Vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001718282
PEDAL STROKE
• When parking brake pedal is operated at specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified number
of notches. (Check it by listening and counting the ratchet clicks.)
Pedal force
Pedal stroke
: 196 N (20 kg-f, 44 lb-f)
: 5 to 6 notches
• If the pedal stroke is not within specification, perform the adjustment operation. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT".
INSPECT COMPONENTS
•
•
•
•
Make sure the components are attached properly (check for looseness, backlash, etc.).
Check parking brake pedal assembly for bend, damage and cracks, and replace if necessary.
Check cable for wear and damage, and replace if necessary.
Check parking brake warning lamp switch for malfunction, and replace if necessary. Refer to DI-24, "Wiring
Diagram - WARN -".
ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove lower instrument panel LH using power tool. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH".
Insert a deep socket wrench to rotate adjusting nut and loosen
the cable sufficiently. Then, return the pedal to the free height.
Remove wheel and tire from the vehicle using power tool.
Using wheel nuts, secure the disc to the hub and prevent it from
tilting.
WFIA0138E
5.
6.
7.
a.
b.
c.
Remove adjusting hole plug installed on the disc rotor. Rotate
the adjuster in direction "A" as shown, until the disc rotor is
locked, using a suitable tool. After locking, turn the adjuster in
the opposite direction by 5 or 6 notches.
Rotate the disc rotor to make sure there is no drag. Install the
adjusting hole plug.
Adjust cable as follows:
Operate pedal 10 or more times with a force of 294 N (30 kg-f,
66 lb-f).
Rotate adjusting nut with deep socket to adjust pedal stroke.
PFIA0295E
NOTE:
Do not reuse the adjusting nut after removing it.
When parking brake pedal is operated at specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified number of notches. (Check it by listening and counting the ratchet clicks.)
Pedal force
Pedal stroke
d.
: 196 N (20 kg-f, 44 lb-f)
: 5 to 6 notches
With the pedal completely returned, make sure there is no drag on the rear brake.
Revision: August 2007
PB-4
2008 Quest
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718283
B
C
D
E
PB
G
H
I
J
WFIA0338E
1.
Parking brake pedal assembly
2.
Equalizer
3.
Return spring
6.
Rear left cable
4.
Rear right cable
5.
Pin
7.
Front cable
8.
Adjusting nut
K
L
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718284
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
M
Remove instrument lower panel LH and knee protector using power tool. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument
Lower Panel LH".
Disconnect parking brake switch electrical connector.
Remove adjusting nut from threaded end of front cable.
Remove parking brake pedal assembly nuts.
Disconnect front cable from parking brake pedal assembly while
compressing legs of spring clip.
Remove parking brake pedal assembly.
Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Remove front cable bolts, then remove front cable from vehicle.
Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor".
WFIA0138E
Revision: August 2007
PB-5
2008 Quest
N
O
P
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Remove rear cables from toggle levers.
11. Remove right and left rear cables nuts and bolts, then remove
right and left cable assemblies from vehicle.
LFIA0095E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the nuts and bolts to specification.
• Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service".
NOTE:
Do not reuse the adjusting nut.
Revision: August 2007
PB-6
2008 Quest
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718285
B
C
D
E
PB
G
H
I
J
PFIA0443E
1.
Return spring
4.
Shoe (primary)
7.
Anti-rattle springs
2.
Adjuster assembly
3.
Shoe (secondary)
5.
Anti-rattle pins
6.
Retainers
8.
Toggle lever
K
L
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718286
REMOVAL
M
CAUTION:
Clean dust on the disc and back plate with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air.
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove the disc rotor with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position.
3. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows:
a. Secure the disc rotor in place with wheel nuts and remove disc rotor plug.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PB-7
2008 Quest
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
b. Rotate adjuster in direction "B" to retract and loosen brake
shoes, using a suitable tool.
4. Remove the anti-rattle pins, retainers, and anti-rattle springs,
then return springs.
5. Remove the parking brake shoes, adjuster assembly, and toggle
lever.
PFIA0309E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lining Thickness Inspection
• Check thickness of lining.
Standard thickness (new) "A"
Repair limit thickness "A"
: 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
SBR021A
Drum Inner Diameter Inspection
• Check drum inner diameter.
Standard inner diameter (new)
Wear limit of inner diameter
: 190 mm (7.48 in)
: 191 mm (7.52 in)
Other Inspections
•
•
•
•
•
Check shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage.
Check anti-rattle pin for excessive wear and corrosion.
Check return spring for sagging.
Check that adjuster moves smoothly.
Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any
excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside the drum.
SBR768A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, observing the following:
• Refer to PB-7, "Component" and apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly.
• There is a difference between the adjusters orientation from left
and right. Assemble the adjuster so the threaded part expands
when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow.
• Shorten adjuster by rotating it.
• When disassembling the adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil)
grease or silicone based grease to the threads. Refer to MA-11.
• After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows.
1. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke to the specified stroke.
Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service".
2. Perform break-in (drag run) operation by driving the vehicle
under the following conditions:
SFIA0153E
Drive forward
• Vehicle speed approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) set (forward)
Revision: August 2007
PB-8
2008 Quest
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Parking brake operating force approx. 147 N (15 kg-f, 33 lb-f) set
• Distance approx. 100 m (328 ft)
3.
A
After break-in operation, check lever stroke of the parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified
stroke.
• To prevent the lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every
break-in operation.
• Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of the lining.
B
C
D
E
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PB-9
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Drum Brake
INFOID:0000000001718287
Type
Brake lining
Drum (disc)
DS19HC
Standard thickness (new)
3.2 mm (0.126 in)
Wear limit thickness
1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Standard inner diameter (new)
190 mm (7.48 in)
Wear limit of inner diameter
191 mm (7.52 in)
Parking Brake Control
INFOID:0000000001718288
Control type
Foot pedal
Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg-f, 44 lb-f)]
5 to 6 notches
Number of notches
when warning lamp switch activates warning lamp
Revision: August 2007
1 notch
PB-10
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
PG
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
GROUND CIRCUIT ........................................... 30
Ground Distribution ..................................................30
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
HARNESS ......................................................... 40
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ............... 3
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION .................... 67
Schematic ................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagram - POWER - ...................................... 5
Fuse ........................................................................ 16
Fusible Link ............................................................. 16
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) .............................. 16
Circuit Breaker (PTC) .............................................. 16
Electrical Units Location ..........................................67
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) .................17
System Description ................................................. 17
CAN Communication System Description ............... 18
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction .... 18
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 18
Auto Active Test ...................................................... 20
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement ........................... 23
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 24
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection ........... 27
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) ....... 28
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R .................... 28
F
Harness Layout .......................................................40
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) .......................63
HARNESS CONNECTOR ................................. 71
Description ...............................................................71
G
H
I
ELECTRICAL UNITS ........................................ 74
Terminal Arrangement .............................................74
J
STANDARDIZED RELAY ................................. 75
Description ...............................................................75
PG
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) ............. 77
Terminal Arrangement .............................................77
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) .............. 78
L
Terminal Arrangement .............................................78
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX ...................... 79
M
Terminal Arrangement .............................................79
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719534
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
PG-2
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Schematic
A
INFOID:0000000001719535
For detailed ground distribution, refer to PG-30, "Ground Distribution".
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKWA4809E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-3
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4810E
Revision: August 2007
PG-4
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - POWER -
INFOID:0000000001719536
A
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
WKWA4811E
Revision: August 2007
PG-5
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4812E
Revision: August 2007
PG-6
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKWA4813E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-7
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4814E
Revision: August 2007
PG-8
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
ALMWA0128GB
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-9
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
WKWA4816E
Revision: August 2007
PG-10
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
ALMWA0129GB
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-11
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4818E
Revision: August 2007
PG-12
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
ALMWA0130GB
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-13
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4820E
Revision: August 2007
PG-14
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKWA4944E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-15
2008 Quest
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Fuse
INFOID:0000000001719537
• If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before
installing new fuse.
• Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified
rating.
• Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly.
• Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not
used for a long period of time.
CEL083
Fusible Link
INFOID:0000000001719538
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is
questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
• If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
• Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
• Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719539
For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20
seconds.
A circuit breaker is used for the following systems:
• Power windows
• Power sunroof
SBF284E
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
INFOID:0000000001719540
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The
temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with
current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the
electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current.
This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the
resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume.
SEL109W
Revision: August 2007
PG-16
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)
System Description
A
INFOID:0000000001719541
B
• IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block
which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits.
• IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil
pressure switch signal reception, etc.
• It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION:
None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
C
D
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E
Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps:
• Headlamps (High, Low)
F
• Parking lamps
• Tail and license plate lamps
• Cornering lamps
• Front fog lamps
G
Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
H
Rear window defogger relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger
relay.
A/C compressor control
I
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor
(magnet clutch).
Starter control
J
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay.
Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays.
PG
Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
L
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN
H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can
transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
• When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control.
After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
• Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
Controlled system
Headlamp
Tail, license plate and parking lamps
N
Fail-safe mode
O
• With the ignition switch ON, the headlamp (low relay) is ON.
• With the ignition switch OFF, the headlamp (low relay) is OFF.
• With the ignition switch ON, the tail lamp relay is ON.
• With the ignition switch OFF, the tail lamp relay is OFF.
P
Cooling fan
• With the ignition switch ON, the cooling fan HI relay is ON.
• With the ignition switch OFF, the cooling fan relays are OFF.
Front wiper
Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper relays remain in the same status they
were in just before fail−safe control was initiated.
Rear window defogger
Rear window defogger relay OFF
Revision: August 2007
M
PG-17
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Controlled system
Fail-safe mode
A/C compressor
A/C relay is OFF
Front fog lamps
Front fog lamp relay OFF
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
• CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
• Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
• When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
• Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
• All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
• IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
• CAN communication is stopped.
• When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status.
• When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001719542
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
INFOID:0000000001719543
• When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/
R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
• When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal
received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Ignition switch signal
Ignition relay status
Tail lamp relay
ON
ON
—
OFF
OFF
—
ON
OFF
—
OFF
ON
ON (10 minutes)
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000001719544
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Item List
Revision: August 2007
PG-18
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TIME
Display items
CONSULT-III
display code
Malfunction detection
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
—
—
U1000
• If CAN communication reception/transmission data has a malfunction, or if any of the
control units fail, data reception/transmission
cannot be confirmed.
• When the data in CAN communication is not
received before the specified time.
CAN COMM CIRC
Possible causes
A
—
—
B
X
Any of items listed below have errors:
• TRANSMIT DIAG
• ECM
• BCM/SEC
CRNT
PAST
—
X
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
• CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
• PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
C
D
E
DATA MONITOR
F
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Item name
CONSULT-III
screen display
Monitor item selection
Display or unit
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
Motor fan request
MOTOR FAN
REQ
1/2/3/4
X
X
X
Signal status input from ECM
Compressor request
AC COMP REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from ECM
G
H
I
Parking, license,
and tail lamp request
TAIL & CLR REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Headlamp low
beam request
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Headlamp high
beam request
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Front fog request
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
FR wiper request
FR WIP REQ
STOP/1LO/LO/HI
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Wiper auto stop
WIP AUTO
STOP
ACT P/STOP P
X
X
X
Output status of IPDM E/R
Wiper protection
WIP PROT
OFF/LS/HS/Block
X
X
X
Control status of IPDM E/R
Starter request
ST RLY REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
Status of input signal NOTE
Ignition relay
status
IGN RLY
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Ignition relay status monitored
with IPDM E/R
Rear defogger request
RR DEF REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Oil pressure
switch
OIL P SW
OPEN/CLOSE
X
X
Signal status input from IPDM
E/R
Hood switch
HOOD SW (*1)
OFF
X
X
Signal status input from IPDM
E/R
Theft warning
horn request
THFT HRN REQ
(*1)
ON/OFF
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Horn chirp
HORN CHIRP
ON/OFF
X
X
Output status of IPDM E/R
Cornering lamp
request
CRNRNG LMP
REQ
OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
J
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
PG-19
2008 Quest
PG
L
M
N
O
P
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is in ACC position, display may not be correct.
• (*1) This item is displayed, but does not function.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
ACTIVE TEST
Test name
CONSULT-III screen display
Description
Tail lamp output
TAIL LAMP
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the tail lamp relay can be operated.
Rear defogger output
REAR DEFOGGER
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the rear defogger relay can be operated.
Front wiper (HI, LO) output
FRONT WIPER
With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON), the front wiper relay (Lo,
Hi) can be operated.
Cooling fan output
MOTOR FAN
With a certain operation (1, 2, 3, 4), the cooling fan can be operated.
Lamp (HI, LO, FOG) output
LAMPS
With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON, FOG ON), the lamp relay
(Lo, Hi, Fog) can be operated.
Cornering lamp output
CORNERING LAMP
Horn output
HORN
—
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the horn relay can be operated.
Auto Active Test
INFOID:0000000001719545
DESCRIPTION
• In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the
following systems:
- Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license and parking lamps
- Cornering lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (High, Low)
- A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by
wiper operation).
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition
switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF.
When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform BL-37, "Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System)" or BL-35,
"Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System)" when the auto active test cannot be
performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
Revision: August 2007
PG-20
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times.
A
B
C
D
E
WKIA4484E
(A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating.
F
Item Number
Test Item
Operation Time/Frequency
1
Rear window defogger
10 seconds
2
Front wipers
LOW 5 seconds then HIGH 5 seconds
3
Cornering lamps
10 seconds
4
Tail, license, and parking lamps
10 seconds
5
Front fog lamps
10 seconds
6
Headlamps (low)
10 seconds
7
Headlamps (high)
ON-OFF 5 times
8
A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
ON-OFF 5 times
9
Cooling fan
LOW 2 seconds → MID 2 seconds → HIGH 2 seconds →
MID 2 seconds → LOW 2 seconds
G
H
I
J
Concept of Auto Active Test
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5163E
• IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between
IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
• If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed
using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Revision: August 2007
PG-21
2008 Quest
P
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Inspection contents
Possible cause
YES
Rear window defogger
does not operate.
Any of front wipers, tail
and parking lamps, front
fog lamps, cornering
lamps, and headlamps
(High, Low) do not operate.
A/C compressor does
not operate.
Cooling fan does not operate.
Oil pressure warning
lamp does not operate.
Revision: August 2007
Perform auto active
test. Does rear window defogger operate?
Perform auto active
test. Does system in
question operate?
Perform auto active
test. Does magnet
clutch operate?
Perform auto active
test. Does cooling fan
operate?
Perform auto active
test. Does oil pressure
warning lamp blink?
NO
• BCM signal input circuit
•
•
•
•
Rear window defogger relay
Open circuit of rear window defogger
IPDM E/R malfunction
Harness or connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and rear window
defogger
YES
• BCM signal input system
NO
• Lamp/wiper motor malfunction
• Lamp/wiper motor ground circuit malfunction
• Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and system in question
• IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
YES
• BCM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM.
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R
NO
• Magnet clutch malfunction
• Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
YES
• ECM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R
NO
• Cooling fan motor malfunction
• Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
YES
• Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and oil pressure
switch
• Oil pressure switch malfunction
• IPDM E/R
NO
• CAN communication signal between BCM and Combination Meter
• Combination meter
PG-22
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
INFOID:0000000001719546
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA1203E
Revision: August 2007
PG-23
2008 Quest
P
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719547
Measuring condition
Terminal
Wire
color
Signal name
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
1
R
Battery power supply
Input
OFF
—
Battery voltage
2
B/Y
Battery power supply
Input
OFF
—
Battery voltage
3
B/W
Starter motor
Output
START
—
Battery voltage
4
B/R
Ignition switch
Input
—
5
W
Rear window defogger
Output
—
—
Battery voltage
6
L
Battery power supply
(Rear window defogger)
Output
—
—
Battery voltage
7
B/W
Input
—
8
10
11
L
L/B
R
Ignition switch supplied power
Cooling fan motor low
1
Cooling fan motor high
2
Cooling fan motor high
1
Revision: August 2007
Input
Output
Input
—
—
—
OFF or ACC or ON
START
0V
Battery voltage
OFF or ACC
0V
ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature above 100 °C (212 °F) or
with air conditioner switch :
ON
0V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC,
with engine coolant temperature below 100 °C (212 °F) or
with air conditioner switch :
OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher
with air conditioner switch :
ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F)
and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air
conditioner switch : OFF
Less than battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher
with air conditioner switch :
ON
0V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC,
with engine coolant temperature 94 °C (201 °F) or less or
with air conditioner switch :
OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F)
and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air
conditioner switch : OFF
Less than battery voltage
PG-24
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
12
13
14
Wire
color
R
R/Y
L/B
Signal name
Cooling fan motor
ground 2
Cooling fan motor low
2
Cooling fan motor
ground
Signal
input/
output
Input
Output
Output
Measuring condition
Ignition
switch
—
—
—
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F)
and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air
conditioner switch : OFF
Less than battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC, or
with engine coolant temperature below 95 °C (203 °F) or
with engine coolant temperature above 99 °C (210 °F) but
below 105 °C (221 °F) or with
air conditioner switch : OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher
with air conditioner switch :
ON
0V
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature above 100 °C (212 °F) or
with air conditioner switch :
ON
Battery voltage
B
C
F
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F)
and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air
conditioner switch : OFF
Less than battery voltage
I
0V
L
G
Battery power supply
Input
—
—
Battery voltage
16
B
Ground
Input
—
—
0V
17
R
ECM Relay
Output
—
18
R/G
ECM relay
Output
—
20
R/Y
RH Low beam headlamp
Output
—
21
L
Wiper low speed signal
Output
ON or
START
22
R/L
Rear parking, license
plate, and tail lamp
Output
—
Lighting
switch 1ST
position
23
W/L
RH Cornering lamp
Output
—
Lighting switch ON or AUTO
and turn signal switch in the
RIGHT position
Battery voltage
24
G
Ignition 1
Output
—
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
M
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
PG-25
J
PG
Ignition switch ON or START,
with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher
with air conditioner switch :
ON
15
Revision: August 2007
G
H
0V
Wiper switch
D
E
Ignition switch OFF or ACC,
with engine coolant temperature below 100 °C (212 °F) or
with air conditioner switch :
OFF
Lighting switch in 2nd position
A
N
Battery voltage
O
OFF
0V
LO
Battery voltage
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
P
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Measuring condition
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Ignition 1
Output
—
Ignition 1
Output
—
L/W
RH High beam headlamp
Output
—
Lighting switch in 2nd position
and placed in HIGH or PASS
position
Battery voltage
28
G
LH High beam headlamp
Output
—
Lighting switch in 2nd position
and placed in HIGH or PASS
position
Battery voltage
30
L
LH Low beam headlamp
Output
—
Lighting switch in 2nd position
Battery voltage
31
L/B
Wiper high speed signal
Output
ON or
START
Terminal
Wire
color
25
P
26
P
27
32
33
34
36
L/Y
Y/B
WG
W/G
Signal name
Wiper auto stop signal
A/C compressor
LH Cornering lamp
Front fog lamp (RH)
37
W/R
Front fog lamp (LH)
38
B
39
B/Y
Fuel pump
40
B/O
41
42
Ground
Input
ON or
START
Output
ON or
START
Output
Output
Output
—
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
Wiper switch
OFF
0V
HI
Battery voltage
Wipers not in park position
Wipers in park position
Battery voltage
0V
A/C switch or auto A/C request ON
Battery voltage
A/C switch or auto A/C request OFF
0V
Lighting switch ON or AUTO
and turn signal switch in the
LEFT position
Battery voltage
OFF
0V
ON or
START
Lighting
switch must
be in the 2ND
position or
AUTO position (LOW
beam is ON)
and the front
fog lamp
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0V
ON or
START
Lighting
switch must
be in the 2ND
position or
AUTO position (LOW
beam is ON)
and the front
fog lamp
switch
ON
Battery voltage
Input
—
Output
—
Fuel pump relay control
Input
—
G
Battery power supply
Output
—
R
Throttle control motor
relay
Output
—
Revision: August 2007
Operation or condition
—
0V
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
Ignition switch ON or START
0V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Battery voltage
—
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
PG-26
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire
color
43
GR
44
Y/R
46
W/B
Ignition
switch
Ignition 1
Output
—
Ignition 1
Output
—
ECM relay control
47
O
Throttle control motor
relay control
48
L
49
50
51
Measuring condition
Signal
input/
output
Signal name
Input
—
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0V
Ignition switch ON or START
0V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START
0V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Battery voltage
Input
—
CAN-H
—
ON
—
—
P
CAN-L
—
ON
—
—
B
Ground
Input
—
—
0V
G/W
Horn relay control
Input
—
52
G/R
Rear window defogger
relay control
Input
ON or
START
53
G/R
Starter relay (inhibit
switch)
Input
ON or
START
57
P/L
Oil pressure switch
Input
60
B
Ground
Input
A
B
C
D
E
F
Horn switch : PUSHED or
when a door is locked or unlocked via the keyfob
0V
Horn switch: RELEASED or
with no door lock feature activated via the keyfob
Battery voltage
G
Defogger Switch: ON
0V
Defogger Switch: OFF
Battery voltage
Selector lever in "P" or "N"
Battery voltage
H
I
Selector lever any other position
0V
ON or
START
—
Battery voltage
—
—
0V
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719548
J
PG
1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION
L
Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown.
Terminal No.
Signal name
Fuse, fusible link No.
1, 2
Battery power
c, d
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace fuse or fusible link.
N
2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-27
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness.
SKIA1987E
3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector
E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness.
WKIA4319E
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
INFOID:0000000001719549
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
CONSULT-III Display
CRNT
PAST
—
—
—
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
CAN COMM CIRC
TIME
CONSULT-III
display code
U1000
X
X
Details of diagnosis result
No malfunction
Any of items listed below have errors:
• TRANSMIT DIAG
• ECM
• BCM/SEC
NOTE:
The Details for Display for the Period are as follows:
• CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
• PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed
NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.>>INSPECTION END.
CAN COMM CIRC>>Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719550
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect negative battery cable.
Remove coolant reservoir fasteners.
Move coolant reservoir aside.
Revision: August 2007
PG-28
2008 Quest
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
A
B
C
WKIA1204E
D
5.
Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
E
F
G
WKIA0121E
6.
7.
Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
H
I
J
WKIA0122E
PG
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-29
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
GROUND CIRCUIT
Ground Distribution
INFOID:0000000001719551
Main Harness
ALMIA0411GB
Revision: August 2007
PG-30
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
ALMIA0412GB
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-31
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine Room Harness
WKIA5235E
Revision: August 2007
PG-32
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5236E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-33
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKIA5237E
Revision: August 2007
PG-34
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine Control Harness
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5238E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-35
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Body Harness
WKIA5239E
Revision: August 2007
PG-36
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA4491E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-37
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Body No. 2 Harness
WKIA5240E
Revision: August 2007
PG-38
2008 Quest
GROUND CIRCUIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Back Door No. 2 Harness
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5241E
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-39
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HARNESS
Harness Layout
INFOID:0000000001719552
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the drawings:
• Main Harness and Air Conditioner Control Sub-harness
• Engine Room Harness (RH View) Engine Compartment
• Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
• Engine Room Harness (LH View) Engine Compartment
• Engine Control Harness, Engine Control Sub-harness-1, Engine
Control Sub-harness-2 and Engine Control Sub-harness-3
• Body Harness, Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness and Trailer Tow
Sub-harness
• Body No. 2 Harness and Fuel Tank Sub-harness
• Room Lamp Harness and Overhead Console harness
• Back Door Harness and Back Door No. 2 Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
SEL252V
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated below.
Connector type
Water proof type
Male
Female
Standard type
Male
Female
• Cavity: 4 or Less
• Relay connector
• Cavity: From 5 to 8
• Cavity: 9 or More
• Ground terminal etc.
—
Revision: August 2007
PG-40
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OUTLINE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5381E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-41
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
MAIN HARNESS
ALMIA0413GB
A1
M1
W/16
A1
M2
W/32
: To R2
D3
M55
W/4
: Hazard switch
A2
M3
W/8
: Fuse block (J/B)
D4
M56
B/3
: Front power socket LH
A3
M4
W/16
: Fuse block (J/B)
A2
M57
—
: Body ground
B3
M6
GR/6
: TCS OFF switch (without VDC)
C3
M58
B/6
: Intake door motor driver
Revision: August 2007
: To R1
E2
PG-42
M53
W/16
: To M301
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
B3
M6
GR/6
: VDC OFF switch (with VDC)
G3
M59
BR/2
: Glove box lamp
A3
M8
W/12
: To D2
F2
M61
—
: Body ground
A3
M9
GR/12
: To D1
E2
M62
W/2
: Front blower motor
B3
M10
W/4
: To E29
G3
M74
W/16
: To D102
A4
M11
W/16
: To B1
G4
M75
W/8
: To D101
A
B
A3
M12
GR/24
: To B2
F3
M77
Y/4
: Front passenger air bag module (service
replacement)
B4
M13
L/4
: Fuel lid opener relay
F2
M79
—
: Body ground
B3
M14
W/16
: Pedal adjusting control unit
A4
M81
W/16
: To B20
A3
M15
W/20
: To D15
B3
M83
W/12
: To E134
D1
M16
B/4
: Optical sensor (with auto lights)
F4
M84
W/16
: To B101
A2
M18
W/40
: BCM (body control module)
G3
M85
BR/24
: To B102
A2
M19
W/15
: BCM (body control module)
F3
M86
BR/20
: To B103
A2
M20
B/15
: BCM (body control module)
B4
M88
Y/4
: To E42
C3
M21
W/4
: NATS antenna amp.
A4
M90
W/24
: To E25
C4
M22
W/16
: Data link connector
G3
M91
BR/16
: To E26
C2
M24
W/40
: Combination meter
C1
M93
W/24
: Display unit
C3
M25
W/2
: Ignition keyhole illumination
D2
M94
W/24
: Display control unit (with color display)
C3
M26
W/6
: Ignition switch
C1
M95
W/32
: Display control unit (with color display)
C3
M27
W/2
: Key switch
D2
M98
W/16
: AV switch
C3
M28
W/16
: Combination switch
C4
M99
BR/2
: Foot lamp LH
C4
M29
Y/6
: Combination switch (spiral cable)
E4
M100
BR/2
: Foot lamp RH
C3
M30
GR/8
: Combination switch (spiral cable)
F2
M105
Y/2
: Front passenger air bag module
D2
M31
W/3
: Passenger air bag OFF indicator
F2
M106
O/2
: Front passenger air bag module
C3
M32
W/4
: In-vehicle sensor
A2
M108
BR/6
: Lamps on demand switch
D4
M33
B/3
: Front power socket RH
B1
M109
BR/2
: Front tweeter LH
C4
M34
GR/8
: A/T device
D1
M110
BR/2
: Center speaker (with BOSE)
D5
M35
Y/28
: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
G2
M111
BR/2
: Front tweeter RH
D4
M39
B/6
: Air mix door motor (driver)
F2
M112
B/24
: BOSE speaker amp.
B4
M41
W/32
: Automatic drive positioner control unit
F3
M113
GR/8
: BOSE speaker amp.
B3
M42
W/16
: Automatic drive positioner control unit
F3
M114
W/24
: To B104
D3
M43
W/10
: Audio unit
G2
M115
W/4
: To B105
E3
M44
W/6
: Audio unit
B3
M116
GR/8
: Rear sonar system OFF switch
D3
M45†
W/8
: Audio unit (with base audio system)
D1
M117
B/2
: Sonar buzzer
D3
M45†
†
W/6
: Audio unit (except base audio system)
G2
M120
W/4
: Remote keyless entry receiver
D3
M46
W/20
: Audio unit
E3
M122
GR/4
: Variable blower control
B2
M47
W/8
: Steering angle sensor
C3
M123
W/2
: Tire pressure warning check connector
E2
M48
BR/2
: To M501
E3
M127
W/12
: Audio unit (with satellite radio tuner)
D2
M49
B/26
: Front air control
E3
M128
W/16
: Satellite radio tuner
E3
M50
L/24
: Front air control
F3
M129
V/1
: Satellite radio tuner
B2
M152
B/2
: Resistor-1
D4
M153
GR/16
: DVD player
D4
M154
L/16
: DVD player
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
Air conditioner control sub-harness
Revision: August 2007
C
PG-43
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
E2
M301
W/16
: To M53
E3
M302
B/6
: Intake door motor passenger
E3
M303
B/6
: Defrost door motor
E3
M304
B/6
: Mode door motor
D4
M305
W/2
: Intake sensor
E3
M306
B/6
: Air mix door motor (passenger)
E3
M307
B/6
: Air mix door motor (front) (with MTC)
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)
Revision: August 2007
PG-44
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine Compartment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5385E
Refer to "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness.
E5
E1
B/2
: Ambient sensor
B3
E2
GR/10
: To F32
E4
E3
B/1
: Horn (low)
D5
E4
Y/2
: Crash zone sensor
D3
E6
GR/2
: Fusible link box (battery)
Revision: August 2007
PG-45
P
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
B3
E7
G/10
: To F15
B3
E8
B/12
: To F17
E2
E11
GR/3
: Front combination lamp LH
D2
E14
—
: Engine ground
D2
E15
—
: Engine ground
C2
E18
GR/2
: Front wheel sensor LH
C2
E21
GR/2
: Brake fluid level switch
B2
E23
GR/6
: Front wiper motor
C3
E27
BR/2
: Fusible link box (battery)
E2
E43
GR/2
: Front combination lamp LH (cornering lamp)
E2
E44
BR/2
: Front combination lamp LH (headlamp low)
E3
E45
B/2
: Front combination lamp LH (headlamp high)
E4
E102
B/2
: Front fog lamp LH
D2
E103
GR/8
: Daytime light control unit
D2
E104
GR/6
: Daytime light control unit
C3
E151
B/1
: To F66
Revision: August 2007
PG-46
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Passenger Compartment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5384E
P
Passenger compartment
C3
E20
B/8
: Accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor
A3
E25
W/24
: To M90
G3
E26
BR/16
: To M91
B3
E29
W/4
: To M10
Revision: August 2007
PG-47
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A2
E30
W/8
: Fuse block (J/B)
A3
E31
B/2
: Fuse block (J/B)
A2
E32
B/1
: Fuse block (J/B)
B3
E37
BR/2
: ASCD brake switch
B3
E38
W/4
: Stop lamp switch
A3
E42
Y/4
: To M88
C2
E109
GR/2
: Pedal adjusting motor
C2
E110
W/3
: Pedal adjusting motor
G2
E128
L/4
: Heater pump relay
A3
E134
W/12
: To M83
G3
E138
W/20
: To B106
F3
E139
W/6
: To B107
B3
E140
B/1
: Park brake switch
A3
E141
W/2
: To B40
G2
E142
GR/28
: TCM
F1
E143
GR/20
: TCM
G1
E144
L/4
: A/T PV IGN relay
A3
E145
W/8
: To B41
A2
E146
/3
: Diode-3
B2
E147
/2
: Diode-1
F2
E148
W/3
: Daytime light relay
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)
Revision: August 2007
PG-48
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Engine Compartment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5383E
Refer to "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness.
D2
E5
B/8
: To F14
E2
E9
—
: Engine ground
D3
E12
BR/2
: Front combination lamp RH (headlamp low)
Revision: August 2007
PG-49
P
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
D4
E13
B/2
: Front combination lamp RH (headlamp high)
E2
E16
B/32
: ECM
D2
E19
GR/9
: To F33
D2
E24
—
: Engine ground
D5
E101
B/2
: Front fog lamp RH
D4
E105
GR/2
: Washer motor
D5
E106
BR/2
: Washer fluid level switch
D2
E107
GR/3
: Front combination lamp RH
D5
E108
B/1
: Horn (high)
E5
E111
B/3
: Refrigerant pressure sensor
F4
E112
—
: Generator
F5
E113
GR/4
: Cooling fan motor-1
F5
E114
GR/4
: Cooling fan motor-2
D3
E116
—
: Body ground (generator)
F3
E117
GR/2
: Front wheel sensor RH
E3
E118
B/4
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
E3
E119
W/4
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
E3
E120
B/2
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
E4
E121
W/16
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
E4
E122
GR/16
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
E3
E123
W/6
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
E4
E124
W/12
: IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
F2
E125
B/32
: ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) (without VDC)
F2
E125
B/46
: ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) (with VDC)
F3
E126
—
: Engine ground
G2
E127
B/2
: Heater pump
C3
E137
GR/2
: Front combination lamp RH (cornering
lamp)
Revision: August 2007
PG-50
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5386E
P
B4
F1
W/2
: Generator
C4
F2
—
: Generator
D1
F46
B/3
: Power steering pressure sensor
B4
F3
B/1
: Mass air flow sensor
E2
F50
GR/6
: Electric throttle control actuator
B3
F4
G/2
: Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve (Bank 2)
B2
F54
B/76
: ECM
C5
F5
B/6
: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Bank 2)
F3
F62
GR/6
: Terminal cord assembly
Revision: August 2007
D1
F44
PG-51
G/8
: To F101
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
C4
F6
GR/3
: Ignition coil No. 2 (with power transistor)
E3
F63
GR/2
: EGR temperature sensor
D4
F7
GR/3
: Ignition coil No. 4 (with power transistor)
F2
F64
GR/6
: EGR volume control valve
D4
F8
GR/3
: Ignition coil No. 6 (with power transistor)
C1
F65
B/6
: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Bank 1)
B3
F9
—
: Engine ground
G4
F66
B/1
: To E151
Engine control sub-harness-1
D5
F10
BR/3
: Front electronic controlled engine
mount
E4
F11
B/3
: Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
D1
F101
G/8
: To F44
C4
F12
L/4
: Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
C2
F102
GR/2
: Fuel injector No. 1
D3
F13
G/4
: Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
D2
F103
GR/2
: Fuel injector No. 3
A2
F14
B/8
: To E5
D3
F104
GR/2
: Fuel injector No. 5
G3
F15
G/10
: To E7
E2
F105
L/2
: EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
C3
F16
—
: Engine ground
D5
F106
B/1
: Oil pressure switch
G3
F17
B/12
: To E8
C1
F107
G/2
: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank-1)
C3
F18
GR/2
: Fuel injector No. 2
Engine control sub-harness-2
C3
F19
B/2
: VIAS control solenoid valve
D1
F201
G/6
: To F43
D3
F20
GR/2
: Fuel injector No. 4
C2
F202
GR/3
: Ignition coil No. 1 (with power transistor)
C3
F21
W/2
: Condenser-1
D2
F203
GR/3
: Ignition coil No. 3 (with power transistor)
D3
F22
GR/2
: Fuel injector No. 6
D2
F204
GR/3
: Ignition coil No. 5 (with power transistor)
E4
F23
B/3
: Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 2)
Engine control sub-harness-3
E4
F24
GR/2
: Engine coolant temperature sensor
E3
F301
GR/6
: To F26
E3
F26
GR/6
: To F301
D3
F302
B/2
: Knock sensor
D5
F27
—
: Starter motor
E3
F303
G/3
: Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1)
E5
F28
GR/1
: Starter motor
F4
F29
GR/
10
: Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
F4
F30
BR/8
: Terminal cord assembly
G3
F31
B/6
: Mass air flow sensor
G3
F32
GR/
10
: To E2
A1
F33
GR/9
: To E19
F4
F37
L/2
: Turbine revolution sensor
F2
F38
L/2
: Revolution sensor
G4
F39
—
: Fusible link box (battery)
F3
F40
—
: Fusible link box (battery)
F3
F41
—
: Fusible link box (battery)
D1
F43
G/6
: To F201
Revision: August 2007
PG-52
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BODY HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5387E
P
A3
B1
W/16
: To M11
C3
B58
W/4
: Sliding door open/close switch LH
A3
B2
GR/24
: To M12
D4
B59
W/4
: Sliding door motor assembly LH (sliding door encoder)
A3
B4
BR/6
: Rear window defogger relay
E4
B60
W/24
: Sliding door control unit LH
B4
B7
—
: Body ground
D4
B61
W/8
: Sliding door control unit LH
C3
B8
W/3
: Front door switch LH
E4
B62
B/2
: Fuel door interlock switch
Revision: August 2007
PG-53
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
B3
B9
Y/12
: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
E3
B63
GR/6
: Back door close switch
B3
B10
Y/2
: Front LH side air bag module
B4
B64
W/6
: Front heated seat switch LH
B3
B11
W/8
: Subwoofer
F4
B65
W/2
: Condenser-3
B3
B12
W/3
: Seat belt buckle switch LH
F5
B66
—
: Body ground
C4
B14
Y/2
: Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
E4
B67
—
: Body ground
C4
B15
Y/2
: LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
F4
B68
W/2
: Condenser-4
E2
B19
—
: Body ground
D4
B69
W/6
: Sliding door control unit LH
A3
B20
W/16
: To M81
F3
B71
—
: Body ground
B3
B22
BR/6
: Pedal adjusting switch
Rear sonar sensor sub-harness
C2
B23
W/16
: Rear audio remote control unit
F5
B201
GR/6
: To B47
E4
B28
W/4
: Fuel lid opener actuator
F4
B202
B/3
: Rear sonar sensor LH outer
F4
B35
W/6
: Rear combination lamp LH (without
trailer tow)
F4
B203
B/3
: Rear sonar sensor LH inner
F4
B35
W/6
: To D301 (with trailer tow)
G4
B204
B/3
: Rear sonar sensor RH outer
B4
B37
W/16†
: To B400 (with memory seat)
G4
B205
B/3
: Rear sonar sensor RH inner
B4
B37
W/
10††
: To B400 (without memory seat)
Trailer tow sub-harness
B4
B37
W/6
: To B400 (heated seat only)
F5
B301
W/6
: To B35
C2
B38
Y/2
: LH side rear curtain air bag module
F4
B302
W/6
: Rear combination lamp LH (with trailer
tow)
A2
B40
W/2
: To E141
E4
B303
W/10
: Trailer tow control unit (with trailer tow)
A3
B41
W/8
: To E145
E5
B304
GR/4
: Trailer (with trailer tow)
A3
B42
W/6
: Fuse block (J/B)
G4
B305
W/6
: To B130
D4
B43
W/10
: To B111
G3
B306
W/6
: Rear combination lamp RH (with trailer
tow)
A3
B44
W/2
: Circuit breaker-2
E5
B308
W/1
: To B53
D4
B45
W/2
: Rear speaker LH
C4
B46
W/3
: Sliding door switch LH
C5
B47
GR/6
: To B201
E2
B48
W/12
: To D401 (without power back door)
E2
B48
W/24
: To D401 (with power back door)
E3
B49
W/4
: To D402
D4
B50
B/3
: Rear power socket (2nd row)
F4
B51
B/3
: Rear power socket (cargo)
E3
B52
W/2
: Rear power vent window motor LH
E5
B53
W/1
: To B308
D2
B54
Y/2
: LH side front curtain air bag module
F4
B55
W/26
: Back door control unit
E4
B56
W/16
: Sonar control unit
C3
B57
W/8
: Sliding door contact switch LH (pillar)
Revision: August 2007
PG-54
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5388E
P
G2
B101
W/16
: To M84
B3
B144
W/8
: Sliding door control unit RH
G2
B102
BR/24
: To M85
B3
B145
W/4
: Sliding door motor assembly RH (sliding
door encoder)
G1
B103
BR/20
: To M86
A3
B146
B/6
: Air mix door (rear)
G2
B104
W/24
: To M114
B3
B147
W/2
: Rear power vent window motor RH
G1
B105
W/4
: To M115
B4
B148
GR/6
: To B251
Revision: August 2007
PG-55
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
G1
B106
W/20
: To E138
A3
B149
GR/2
: Running board lamps pre-wiring
G1
B107
W/6
: To E139
E1
B150
B/10
: Rear air control (rear)
E2
B108
W/3
: Front door switch RH
D1
B151
W/4
: Variable blower control (rear)
G2
B109
L/4
: Heated seat relay
C3
B141
W/6
: Sliding door control unit RH
E2
B110
W/3
: Seat belt buckle switch RH
Fuel tank sub-harness
C3
B111
W/10
: To B43
B4
B251
GR/6
: To B148
F1
B113
Y/12
: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
B2
B252
GR/5
: Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
E3
B114
Y/2
: RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
F3
B115
W/6
: To B501
E2
B116
W/48
: To B502
E2
B117
—
: Body ground
F2
B118
W/12
: To B503
B3
B119
GR/3
: EVAP control system pressure sensor
G2
B120
W/2
: Circuit breaker-1
A3
B121
B/2
: EVAP canister vent control valve
B4
B122
GR/2
: Rear wheel sensor RH
A4
B123
L/2
: Rear wheel sensor LH
F3
B124
BR/6
: Front heated seat switch RH
F1
B125
B/6
: Yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor
F3
B126
Y/2
: Front RH side air bag module
E3
B127
Y/2
: Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
C1
B128
Y/2
: RH side rear curtain air bag module
D1
B129
Y/2
: RH side front curtain air bag module
A4
B130
W/6
: Rear combination lamp RH (without
trailer tow)
A4
B130
W/6
: To B305 (with trailer tow)
C4
B131
W/2
: Rear speaker RH
E3
B132
—
: Body ground
A4
B133
W/4
: Rear blower motor resistor
A4
B134
W/2
: Rear blower motor
C3
B135
W/3
: Sliding door switch RH
F3
B136
W/8
: To B508
E3
B137
B/3
: Belt tension sensor
E3
B138
W/2
: Condenser-2
E3
B139
W/8
: Sliding door contact switch RH (pillar)
E2
B140
W/4
: Sliding door open/close switch RH
C3
B143
W/24
: Sliding door control unit RH
Revision: August 2007
PG-56
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5389E
P
A5
R1
W/16
: To M1
A5
R2
W/32
: To M2
B4
R3
W/2
: Vanity lamp LH
B3
R4
W/10
: Sunroof motor assembly
E3
R5
W/3
: Personal lamp 2nd row LH (without
rear roof console)
Revision: August 2007
PG-57
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
B2
R6
GR/6
: Sunroof switch
D1
R7
W/3
: Personal lamp 2nd row RH (without
rear roof console)
A2
R8
W/2
: Vanity lamp RH
B3
R9
W/3
: Room/map lamps
C3
R10
W/8
: Automatic door main switch
G1
R11
W/3
: Cargo lamp
F2
R12
W/3
: Personal lamp 3rd row LH (without
rear roof console)
F1
R13
W/3
: Personal lamp 3rd row RH (without
rear roof console)
E2
R14
W/4
: To R51 (without DVD entertainment
system)
E2
R14
W/24
: To R51 (with DVD entertainment
system)
C2
R15
W/12
: Video monitor (with DVD entertainment system except models with
overhead console)
B2
R16
W/4
: Bluetooth ON indicator
A4
R17
B/10
: Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror
A3
R18†
W/2
: Console lamp (without power sliding
door)
A3
R18†
†
W/2
: Console lamp
A3
R19
B/10
: Rear air control (front)
B3
R20
W/4
: Microphone
Overhead console harness
E2
R51
W/4
: To R14 (without DVD entertainment
system)
E2
R51
W/24
: To R14 (with DVD entertainment
system)
D2
R52
W/3
: Personal lamp 2nd row (with
rear roof console)
C2
R53
W/12
: Front video monitor
F1
R54
W/3
: Personal lamp 3rd row (with
rear roof console)
E2
R55
W/12
: Rear video monitor (with dual monitor DVD entertainment system)
Revision: August 2007
PG-58
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA5390E
D1
GR/12
: To M9
D8
W/3
: Main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
D2
W/12
: To M8
D9
GR/6
: Front power window motor LH
D3
W/2
: Front door speaker LH (without
BOSE audio system)
D10
W/10
: Door mirror remote control switch
D3
BR/2
: Front door speaker LH (with
BOSE audio system)
D11
W/2
: Front step lamp LH
D4
W/8
: Door mirror LH
D13
W/6
: Door mirror LH
D5
W/8
: Seat memory switch
D14
B/6
: Front door lock assembly LH
D6
W/4
: Fuel lid open switch
D15
W/20
: To M15
W/16
: Main power window and door lock/
unlock switch
D7
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-59
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT DOOR HARNESS RH
WKIA5391E
D101
W/8
: To M5
D105
W/16
: Power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH)
D102
W/16
: To M74
D107
W/8
: Door mirror RH
D103
W/2
: Front door speaker RH (without
BOSE audio system)
D109
W/2
: Front step lamp RH
D103
BR/2
: Front door speaker RH (with BOSE
audio system)
D113
W/6
: Door mirror RH
D104
GR/6
: Front power window motor RH
D114
B/6
: Front door lock actuator RH
Revision: August 2007
PG-60
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SLIDING DOOR HARNESS LH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA5392E
D201
GR/8
: Sliding door contact switch LH
D205
GR/4
: Sliding door lock actuator LH
D202
W/4
: Cinch latch switch LH
D206
W/2
: Latch release actuator LH
D203
W/2
: Cinch latch Motor LH
D207
W/3
: Sliding door remote control switch
LH
D204
W/10
: Sliding door latch control unit LH
I
J
SLIDING DOOR HARNESS RH
PG
L
M
N
O
P
WKIA5393E
Revision: August 2007
PG-61
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
D301
GR/8
: Sliding door contact switch RH
D305
GR/4
: Sliding door lock actuator RH
D302
W/4
: Cinch latch switch LH
D306
W/2
: Latch release actuator RH
D303
W/2
: Cinch latch Motor LH
D307
W/3
: Sliding door remote control switch
RH
D304
W/10
: Sliding door latch control unit RH
BACK DOOR HARNESS
WKIA5394E
Revision: August 2007
PG-62
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Back door No.2 harness
A
C1
D401
W/12
: To B48 (without power back door)
C1
D401
W/24
: To B48 (without power back door)
C2
D402
W/4
: To B49
B
D1
D403
W/2
: Body ground
D1
D404
W/10
: Body ground
D1
D405
W/6
: To D501
D2
D406
W/12
: To D501 (without power back door)
D2
D406
W/24
: To D501 (with power back door)
C
D
Back door harness
E1
D501
W/6
: To D405
E2
D502
W/12
: To D406 (without power back door)
E2
D502
W/24
: To D406 (with power back door)
E1
D503
W/2
: High mounted stop lamp
F3
D504
B/1
: Rear window defogger (+)
G4
D505
BR/2
: Pinch strip RH
F4
D506
BR/2
: Rear tweeter RH
E3
D507
W/4
: Rear wiper motor
E4
D508
BR/2
: License plate lamp RH
E4
D509
BR/2
: License plate lamp LH
E4
D510
GR/2
: Back door handle switch
D4
D511
W/8
: Back door latch
D5
D512
W/3
: Back door switch
E4
D513
W/4
: Back door lock actuator
D4
D514
BR/2
: Back door warning chime
C3
D515
B/1
: Rear window defogger (-)
C4
D516
BR/2
: Rear tweeter LH
E
C4
D517
BR/2
: Pinch strip LH
D4
D518
W/4
: Rear view camera
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
INFOID:0000000001719553
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring
diagram.
Code
1STSIG
Section
AT
A/T 1st Signal
2NDSIG
AT
A/T 2nd Signal
AT
A/T 3rd Signal
4THSIG
AT
A/T 4th Signal
AT
A/T 5th Signal
A/C,A
ATC
Auto Air Conditioner
A/C,M
MTC
Manual Air Conditioner
AF1B1
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 1
AF1B2
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 2
AF1HB1
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 1
AF1HB2
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 2
APPS1
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Revision: August 2007
N
Wiring Diagram Name
3RDSIG
5THSIG
M
PG-63
O
P
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
APPS2
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
APPS3
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
ASC/BS
EC
ASCD Brake Switch
ASC/SW
EC
ASCD Steering Switch
ASCBOF
EC
ASCD Brake Switch
ASCIND
EC
ASCD Indicator
AT/IND
DI
A/T Indicator Lamp
AUDIO
AV
Audio
AUT/DP
SE
Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTO/L
LT
Auto Light Control
B/CLOS
BL
Back Door Auto Closure System
BACK/L
LT
Back-up Lamp
BRK/SW
EC
Brake Switch
CAN
AT
CAN Communication Line
CAN
EC
CAN Communication Line
CAN
LAN
CAN System
CHARGE
SC
Charging System
CHIME
DI
Warning Chime
COOL/F
EC
Cooling Fan Control
COMBSW
LT
Combination Switch
COMM
AV
Audio Visual Communication System
CORNER
LT
Cornering Lamps
D/LOCK
BL
Power Door Lock
DEF
GW
Rear Window Defogger
DTRL
LT
Headlamp - With Daytime Light System
DVD
AV
DVD Entertainment System
ECM/PW
EC
ECM Power Supply for Back-Up
ECTS
EC
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
EGR/TS
EC
EGR Temperature Sensor
EGRC1
EC
EGR Function
EGVC/V
EC
EGR Volume Control Valve
EMNT
EC
Engine Mount
ETC1
EC
Electric Throttle Control Function
ETC2
EC
Throttle Control Motor Relay
ETC3
EC
Throttle Control Motor
F/FOG
LT
Front Fog Lamp
F/LID
BL
Fuel Lid Opener
F/PUMP
EC
Fuel Pump
FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
FTSP
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor Failure
FTTS
EC
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
FUELB1
EC
Fuel Injection System Bank 1
FUELB2
EC
Fuel Injection System Bank 2
H/LAMP
LT
Headlamp
H/PHON
AV
Hands Free Telephone
HORN
WW
Horn
HSEAT
SE
Heated Seat
I/MIRR
GW
Inside Mirror (Auto Anti-Dazzling Mirror)
IATS
EC
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
IGNSYS
EC
Ignition System
ILL
LT
Illumination
INF/D
AV
Vehicle Information and Integrated Switch System
Revision: August 2007
PG-64
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INJECT
EC
Injector
INT/L
LT
Room/Map, Vanity, Cargo, Personal, Foot, Step, Puddle and Running Board
Lamps
IVCB1
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 1
IVCB2
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 2
KEYLES
BL
Remote Keyless Entry System
KS
EC
Knock Sensor
LVRSW
AT
A/T Device Lever Switch
MAFS
EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor
MAIN
EC
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
METER
DI
Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges
MIL/DL
EC
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MIRROR
GW
Door Mirror
NATS
BL
Nissan Anti-Theft System
NAVI
AV
Navigation System
O2H2B1
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 1
O2H2B2
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 2
O2S2B1
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 1
O2S2B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 2
P/SCKT
WW
Power Socket
PC/A
AT
AT
Shift Pressure Solenoid Valve
PC/C
AT
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve
PC/CS
AT
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Failure
PEDAL
AP
Adjustable Pedal System
PGC/V
EC
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve
PHSB1
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1)
PHSB2
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2)
PNP/SW
AT
Park/Neutral Position Switch
PNP/SW
EC
Park/Neutral Position Switch
POS
EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
POWER
PG
Power Supply Routing
PRE/SE
EC
EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor
PS/SEN
EC
Power Steering Pressure Sensor
PWR/IN
AT
TCM Ignition Power
R/VIEW
DI
Rear View Camera
RP/SEN
EC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
S/CLOS
BL
Slide Door Auto Closure System
SEAT
SE
Power Seat
SEN/PW
EC
Sensor Power Supply
SFTFNC
AT
Unusual Shifting
SHIFT
AT
A/T Shift Lock System
SONAR
DI
Rear Sonar System
SROOF
RF
Sunroof
SRS
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
Supplemental Restraint System
SSV/A
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve A
SSV/B
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve B
SSV/C
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve C
SSV/CS
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve C Failure
SSV/D
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve D
SSV/E
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve E
START
SC
Starting System
Revision: August 2007
B
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
PC/B
SRS
A
PG-65
P
2008 Quest
HARNESS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STOP/L
LT
Stop Lamp
T/TOW
LT
Trailer Tow
T/WARN
WT
Low Tire Pressure Warning System
TAIL/L
LT
Parking, License and Tail Lamps
TCCSIG
AT
A/T TCC Signal (Lock Up)
TCS
BRC
Traction Control System
TPS1
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS2
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS3
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TRNSCV
BL
HOMELINK® Universal Transceiver
TRSC
AT
Turbine Revolution Sensor
TURN
LT
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps
VDC
BRC
Vehicle Dynamic Control System
VEHSEC
BL
VENT/V
EC
EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve
VIAS
EC
Variable Air Induction Control System
VIAS/V
EC
Variable Air Induction Control System Valve
VSSATC
AT
Revolution Sensor
W/ANT
AV
Audio Antenna
WARN
WINDOW
Vehicle Security (Theft Warning) System
DI
Warning Lamps
GW
Power Window
WIP/R
WW
Rear Wiper and Washer
WIPER
WW
Front Wiper and Washer
Revision: August 2007
PG-66
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
A
Electrical Units Location
INFOID:0000000001719554
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
WKIA5366E
Revision: August 2007
PG-67
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
ALMIA0414GB
Revision: August 2007
PG-68
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
WKIA5245E
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-69
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALMIA0415GB
Revision: August 2007
PG-70
2008 Quest
HARNESS CONNECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HARNESS CONNECTOR
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001719555
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
B
• The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
• The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
SEL769DA
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
• A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
• The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
• The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration
below.
Revision: August 2007
PG-71
2008 Quest
P
HARNESS CONNECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAUTION:
• Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
• Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
AEL299C
HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE)
• Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM,
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.
• Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors.
• Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection.
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
PG-72
2008 Quest
HARNESS CONNECTOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect these
connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
LKIA0670E
J
1.
Control unit with single lever
A. Fasten
B. Loosen
C. Lever
2.
Control unit with dual levers
A. Levers
B. Fasten
C. Loosen
3.
SMJ connector
A. Lever
B. Fasten
C. Loosen
PG
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
L
• SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules
and seat belt pre-tensioners.
• Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
• Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the
black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION:
• Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors
from SRS components.
M
N
O
P
WHIA0103E
Revision: August 2007
PG-73
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL UNITS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ELECTRICAL UNITS
Terminal Arrangement
INFOID:0000000001719556
WKIA5412E
Revision: August 2007
PG-74
2008 Quest
STANDARDIZED RELAY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STANDARDIZED RELAY
A
Description
INFOID:0000000001719557
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
B
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
C
D
E
F
G
SEL881H
H
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
I
J
PG
L
M
SEL882H
1M
1 Make
2M
2 Make
1T
1 Transfer
1M·1B
1 Make 1 Break
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PG-75
2008 Quest
STANDARDIZED RELAY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKIA0253E
Revision: August 2007
PG-76
2008 Quest
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
Terminal Arrangement
A
INFOID:0000000001719558
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
LKIA0358E
Revision: August 2007
PG-77
2008 Quest
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
INFOID:0000000001719559
WKIA4511E
Revision: August 2007
PG-78
2008 Quest
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
A
Terminal Arrangement
INFOID:0000000001719560
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
N
O
P
WKIA5415E
Revision: August 2007
PG-79
2008 Quest
STEERING
SECTION
PS
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................12
Inspection ................................................................12
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Steering System ................................ 2
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE .... 14
F
PS
H
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
On-Vehicle Service ..................................................14
Removal and Installation .........................................15
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................17
Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force ...........................19
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ....................... 21
I
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5
On-Vehicle Service ..................................................21
Removal and Installation .........................................21
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................23
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5
J
HYDRAULIC LINE ............................................ 24
POWER STEERING FLUID ................................ 6
Removal and Installation .........................................24
Checking Fluid Level ................................................. 6
Checking Fluid Leakage ............................................ 6
Bleeding Hydraulic System ....................................... 6
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 25
STEERING WHEEL ............................................. 7
On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 7
Removal and Installation ........................................... 8
STEERING COLUMN .......................................... 9
General Specification ..............................................25
Steering Wheel ........................................................25
Steering Column ......................................................25
Power Steering ........................................................25
Steering Gear and Linkage ......................................25
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PS-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718382
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Steering System
INFOID:0000000001718383
• Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
• Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might
interfere with their operation.
• Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic
parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease.
• Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated.
Revision: August 2007
PS-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718384
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV48102500
(J-33914)
Pressure gauge adapter
Measuring oil pressure
B
C
D
E
S-NT542
Measuring oil pressure
KV48103500
(J-26357 and J-26357-10)
Pressure gauge
F
PS
S-NT547
Removing ball joint
HT72520000
(J-25730-A)
Ball joint remover
H
I
J
NT146
Removing steering wheel
KV481J0010
(J-1859-A)
Steering wheel puller
K
L
LHIA0043E
Removing steering wheel
KV481J0020
(J-42578)
Steering wheel puller legs
M
N
LHIA0044E
O
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718385
P
Revision: August 2007
PS-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Tool number
Description
Spring gauge
Measuring steering wheel turning force or
rack sliding force
LST024
Oil pump attachment
Disassembling and assembling oil pump
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT774
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: August 2007
PS-4
2008 Quest
Symptom
Revision: August 2007
Tie-rod ball joint end play
Steering gear fluid leakage
Steering wheel play
Steering gear rack sliding force
Drive belt looseness
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
Shudder
Shake
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PS-5
×
AXLE
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
×
DRIVE SHAFT
Steering linkage looseness
Improper installation or looseness of steering column
Steering column deformation or damage
Mounting rubber deterioration
Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever
Improper steering wheel
Tie-rod ball joint rotating torque
Noise
Tie-rod ball joint swinging force
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Air in hydraulic system
BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-14
PS-12
PS-12
PS-14
PS-12
PS-7
EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts"
PS-19
PS-7
PS-6
PS-17
PS-17
PS-17
PS-6
PS-6
Reference page
Fluid level
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
INFOID:0000000001718386
A
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
2008 Quest
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
×: Applicable
N
O
P
POWER STEERING FLUID
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
INFOID:0000000001718387
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank.
Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° – 80°C (122° – 176°F).
Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° – 30°C (32° – 86°F).
CAUTION:
• Do not overfill.
• Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
• Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Refer to MA-11.
LGIA0021E
Checking Fluid Leakage
INFOID:0000000001718388
Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° – 80°C
(140° – 176°F).
2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times.
3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and
carefully check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
SGIA0506E
than 15 seconds.
4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten.
Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from power steering oil pump is noticed, check the power steering oil pump. Refer to PS21, "On-Vehicle Service".
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear leak.
Bleeding Hydraulic System
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001718389
Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground.
Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent into the steering fluid
reservoir tank to the specified level. Refer to MA-11. Then
quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly
touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until
the fluid level no longer decreases.
LGIA0021E
3.
Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following symptoms:
• Air bubbles in reservoir tank
• Clicking noise in oil pump
• Excessive buzzing in oil pump
If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This
is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not affect the
performance or durability of the system.
Revision: August 2007
PS-6
2008 Quest
STEERING WHEEL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STEERING WHEEL
A
On-Vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001718390
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY
B
• With wheels in a straight-ahead position, check steering wheel
play.
Steering wheel play
C
: 35 mm (1.38 in) or less
• If it is not within specification, check the following for looseness or
worn components:
- Steering gear assembly
- Steering column
- Front suspension and axle
- Check steering system for looseness while moving the steering
wheel in all directions.
Axial end play
D
E
WGIA0034E
F
: 0 mm (0 in)
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL
PS
Pre-checking
• Make sure that wheel alignment is correct. Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
• Verify that the steering gear is centered before removing the steering wheel.
H
Checking
1.
2.
3.
Check that the steering wheel is in neutral position when driving
straight ahead.
If it is not in neutral position, remove the steering wheel and reinstall it correctly.
If the neutral position is between two teeth, loosen tie-rod lock
nuts. Turn the tie-rods by the same amount in opposite directions on both left and right sides.
I
J
K
WGIA0036E
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
L
1.
2.
3.
M
4.
Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake.
Start engine.
Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. Make sure the fluid temperature is
approximately 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F).
Tires need to be inflated to normal pressure.
Check steering wheel turning force using a suitable spring
gauge after turning steering wheel 360° from the neutral position.
N
O
Steering wheel
turning force
5.
6.
7.
8.
: 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less
If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, check rack
sliding force. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service".
If rack sliding force is not within specifications, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-19, "Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force".
If rack sliding force is OK, inspect steering column. Refer to PS12, "Inspection".
If the steering column is OK, check the fluid pressure. Refer to PS-21, "On-Vehicle Service".
Revision: August 2007
PS-7
P
WGIA0035E
2008 Quest
STEERING WHEEL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning
angle. Refer to FSU-19, "General Specification (Front)".
2. If it is not within specifications, check rack stroke. Refer to PS25, "Steering Gear and Linkage".
SMA127
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718391
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-34, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the steering wheel center nut.
Remove the steering wheel using Tools.
Tool numbers
A: KV481J0010 (J-1859-A)
B: KV481J0020 (J-42578)
CAUTION:
Do not tap or bump the steering wheel to remove.
• Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated
out of position.
• Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If
damaged, replace the steering wheel.
• Disconnect the horn connector.
WHIA0124E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make
sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral
position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right
end position and ending with the knob at the top.
CAUTION:
• The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the
cable is installed in an improper position.
• With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap
by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of
turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise
about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
• Tighten steering wheel center nut to specification. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
PS-8
WGIA0038E
2008 Quest
STEERING COLUMN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STEERING COLUMN
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718392
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
WGIA0176E
1.
Driver air bag module
2.
Steering wheel
3.
Steering wheel side cover
4.
Combination switch and spiral cable 5.
Ignition switch
6.
Steering column assembly
7.
Tilt lever knob
Spring
9.
Self-shear bolt
8.
10. Upper joint
11. Hole cover seal
12. Clamp
13. Hole cover
14. Lower joint
⇐: Front
M
N
CAUTION:
• Care must be taken not to give axial impact to steering column assembly during removal and installation.
• Care must be taken not to move steering gear during removal of steering column assembly.
P
REMOVAL
1.
Remove spiral cable from steering column assembly with combination switches attached. Refer to SRS36, "Removal and Installation".
2.
3.
Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-12, "Steering Column Cover".
Remove instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Revision: August 2007
O
PS-9
2008 Quest
STEERING COLUMN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Remove screws of knee protector, then remove knee protector
from vehicle.
SGIA0470E
5.
Remove lock nut and bolt, then separate lower joint from upper
joint.
WGIA0062E
6.
Remove nuts and bolt from steering member, remove steering
column assembly from steering member.
LGIA0028E
7.
8.
9.
Remove hole cover seal and clamp.
Remove nuts, then remove hole cover from dash panel.
Raise vehicle, then remove bolt (lower side) of lower joint and
remove lower joint from vehicle.
SGIA0474E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check for damage to steering column jacket tube, if damage is found, replace steering column with new one.
Revision: August 2007
PS-10
2008 Quest
STEERING COLUMN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If vehicle has been in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard
during a turn, check the column length “L” as shown. If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Steering column length “L”
A
: 428 mm (16.85 in)
B
• Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary.
C
WGIA0064E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Removal and Installation".
E
NOTE:
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
• When installing steering column to steering member, install nut from front side of vehicle.
CAUTION:
F
When installing the steering column, finger-tighten all of the lower bracket and joint retaining bolts;
then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column.
NOTE:
PS
Align slit of the coupling joint with projection on dust cover. Insert
the joint until surface A contacts surface B.
H
I
SST491C
• After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves smoothly. Ensure the number of turns are the
same from the straight-forward position to left and right locks. Be sure that the steering wheel is in a neutral
position when driving straight ahead.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
J
K
L
• After installing steering column to vehicle, check tilt device and its
operation range. Ranges of operation are shown.
• Check if steering wheel operation can turn to the end of the left and
right stops smoothly.
M
N
O
WGIA0063E
P
Revision: August 2007
PS-11
2008 Quest
STEERING COLUMN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718393
WGIA0177E
1.
Steering column assembly
2.
Ignition switch
3.
Upper joint
4.
Spring
5.
Tilt lever knob
6.
Self-shear bolt
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove spring from steering column assembly and tilt lever.
Remove bolt from upper joint, then remove upper joint from
steering column assembly.
WGIA0055E
3.
Remove ignition switch tamper resistant self-shear type screws with a drill or other suitable tool.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Disassembly and Assembly".
• Install new tamper resistant self-shear type screws as shown.
WGIA0009E
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718394
• When the steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows:
1. Check the column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose
grease. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
2. Check the column tube for deformation or breakage. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
Revision: August 2007
PS-12
2008 Quest
STEERING COLUMN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, or if noise and rattles
are heard during a turn, check the length “L” of the column.
If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Steering column length “L”
•
•
•
•
A
: 428 mm (16.85 in)
B
Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary.
Check for wear around the seal edges, replace as necessary.
Check for corrosion or pitting around the seal sliding area.
Replace the seal and shaft in case of seal edge wear or damage.
C
WGIA0064E
D
• After installing the steering column, check the tilt mechanism for proper operation.
Tilt mechanism range (manual tilt)
E
: 3° per notch at 6 steps
CAUTION:
• Do not exert any load or impact in the axial direction immediately before or after column removal.
F
• After installation, check for smooth steering wheel rotation, without any catches or noise.
• Replace the column if it is depleted of grease, worn, damaged, or if any scratches or coating separation is present on the shaft seal area.
• The nut on the upper joint may not be reused.
PS
• During lower joint detachment, insert a tool into the yoke groove to prevent gouging damage.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PS-13
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
On-Vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001718395
CHECKING STEERING GEAR
•
•
•
•
Check gear housing and boots for looseness and damage.
Check gear housing and boots for fluid leakage. Refer to PS-6, "Checking Fluid Leakage".
Check connection with steering column for looseness.
Prior to removing the steering gear from the vehicle, check rack sliding force. Refer to "Checking rack sliding
force".
• If rack sliding force is not within specification, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-19, "Adjustment of Rack
Sliding Force".
CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE
• Check ball joint, and other component parts for looseness, wear, and damage.
CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT
1.
Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface.
• Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg-f, 11 lb-f) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement.
Turn off ignition key while checking.
Movement of gear housing
2.
: ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less
If movement exceeds the limit, replace or repair as necessary.
CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from the gear.
Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature.
Using a suitable spring gauge, pull tie-rod slowly to move it from
neutral position to ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm
(0.138 in)/s. Check that rack sliding force is within specification.
Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage".
SST090B
Revision: August 2007
PS-14
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718396
A
B
C
D
E
F
WGIA0155E
1.
Steering gear assembly
2.
Cotter pin
3.
Gear housing mounting bracket
4.
Gear housing insulator
5.
Sleeve
⇐
Front
REMOVAL
H
CAUTION:
• The rotation of the driver air bag spiral cable is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the
front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering
gear is removed.
• Remove the steering wheel and spiral cable before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable.
1. Remove the two front wheels and tires using power tool.
2. Remove cotter pins and nuts, then disconnect the outer tie-rods
using Tool.
Tool number
3.
PS
I
J
K
: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
Disconnect the outer stabilizer bar ends from connecting rods
using power tool. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
WGIA0101E
4.
N
Remove the front stabilizer bar bracket rear bolts and loosen the
front bolts. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation".
O
P
WGIA0046E
Revision: August 2007
PS-15
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Remove the lower joint pinch bolt. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and
Installation".
WGIA0047E
6.
7.
8.
Drain the power steering fluid.
Disconnect the power steering high and low pressure lines from the steering gear.
Reposition the stabilizer bar up and out of the way.
9.
Remove the two gear housing bolts using power tool. Refer to
"Removal and Installation".
• Do not remove the gear housing mounting bracket from the
gear housing.
10. Remove the power steering gear and linkage assembly.
WGIA0048E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
• Use the specified tightening torque when installing the high-pressure tube and low-pressure hose connections. Refer to PS-24, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Excessive tightening will damage threads of connection or O-ring.
• The O-ring in low-pressure hose connector is larger than that in high-pressure connector. Take care to install
the proper O-ring.
• Initially, tighten nut on outer tie-rod socket and knuckle arm to
specification. Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin
hole so that the cotter pin can be installed.
CAUTION:
Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N·m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb).
• Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer
to PS-6.
SST824A
Revision: August 2007
PS-16
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718397
A
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
WGIA0175E
1.
Steering gear housing
2.
Gear housing fluid tubes
3.
Boot clamp
4
Dust boot
5.
Boot band
6.
Tie-rod inner socket
7.
Inner tie-rod
8.
Outer tie-rod
9.
Cotter pin
⇐
Front
N
O
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of
aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise.
• Do not disassemble steering gear housing. Replace as an assembly.
1. Remove the outer tie-rods.
2. Remove the boot clamps and boot bands
3. Remove the inner tie-rods and dust boots.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Revision: August 2007
M
PS-17
2008 Quest
P
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-11. Blow
dry the parts with compressed air.
Boot
• Check condition of boot. If cracked, replace it.
• Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating a steering gear leak. If found, replace the
steering gear as an assembly.
Gear
• Thoroughly examine steering gear. If damaged, cracked, leaking, or worn, replace it.
Inner and Outer Tie-rods
• Check ball joints for swinging force:
Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force “A”. Refer to
PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage".
• Check ball joint for rotating torque:
Outer tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque “B”. Refer to PS-25,
"Steering Gear and Linkage".
• Check ball joints for axial end play:
Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play “C”. Refer to
PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage".
• Check condition of dust cover. If cracked, replace outer tie-rod.
SST468C
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Install the inner tie-rods.
Install the outer tie-rods to the specified length and tighten the
outer tie-rod lock nut to specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering
Gear and Linkage".
Use Genuine High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking
Sealant (Red) or equivalent. Refer to GI-42.
WGIA0114E
3.
Measure rack stroke. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage".
SST086BA
Revision: August 2007
PS-18
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Before installing the dust boot, coat the contact surfaces
between the boot and the inner tie-rod with grease.
A
B
C
SST967A
D
5.
Install the boot clamps and boot bands securely.
E
F
PS
H
I
J
WGIA0117E
Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force
K
INFOID:0000000001718398
DECREASE
L
Decrease rack sliding force as follows:
1. Loosen adjusting screw two rotations counterclockwise.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove adjusting screw.
• Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations.
2. Tighten adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding
force is within specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and
Linkage".
NOTE:
Steering gear must be replaced if adjusting screw rotation
torque is less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb).
M
N
O
P
LGIA0018E
3.
4.
5.
Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service".
If rack sliding force is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again.
If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification replace steering gear.
Revision: August 2007
PS-19
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INCREASE
Increase rack sliding force as follows:
1. Tighten adjusting screw until it is flush with housing surface.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove adjusting screw.
• Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed
or loosened more than two rotations.
WGIA0030E
2.
Loosen adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding
force is within specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and
Linkage".
NOTE:
Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is
less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb).
LGIA0018E
3.
4.
5.
Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service".
If rack sliding force is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again.
If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification replace steering gear.
Revision: August 2007
PS-20
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
A
On-Vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001718399
CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
B
Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure.
1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to PS-6,
"Bleeding Hydraulic System".
C
Tool numbers
2.
3.
: KV48103500 (J-26357 and J-26357-10),
KV48102500 (J-33914)
Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60° – 80°C (140°
– 176°F).
WARNING:
Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine
SST834-F
is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in oil
pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature abnormally.
Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds.
Oil pump maximum standard pressure
4.
5.
D
: 8,800 kPa (89.76 kg/cm2, 1,276 psi)
F
PS
H
• If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK.
• If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow control valve. Refer to PS-25, "Power Steering".
If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and
check pressure again.
CAUTION:
Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds.
• If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to PS-15,
"Removal and Installation".
• If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to PS-21,
"Removal and Installation".
After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out
of system. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System".
Removal and Installation
E
I
J
K
L
INFOID:0000000001718400
M
REMOVAL
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
PS-21
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WGIA0173E
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Joint
2.
Washers
3.
Power steering oil pump
4.
Bracket
5.
Pulley
6.
Spring washer
7.
Suction pipe
8.
O-ring
⇐
Front
Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove side splash guard.
Remove heat insulator.
Loosen adjustment screw and oil pump bolt, then remove belt.
Drain power steering fluid.
Remove power steering oil pump union bolt and hose.
Remove power steering oil pump bracket bolts.
Remove power steering oil pump.
SGIA0502E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten component connections to specification. Refer to PS-23, "Disassembly and Assembly".
• Adjust belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts".
• Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to PS-6.
Revision: August 2007
PS-22
2008 Quest
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718401
A
B
C
D
E
F
WGIA0173E
1.
Joint
2.
Washers
3.
Power steering oil pump
4.
Bracket
5.
Pulley
6.
Spring washer
7.
Suction pipe
8.
O-ring
⇐
Front
PS
H
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
If the following conditions are found, replace as necessary.
• Oil leakage from oil pump
• Deformed or damaged pulley
• Poor performance
I
DISASSEMBLY
J
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble pump body. Replace as an assembly.
NOTE:
Mount the oil pump in a soft jawed vise as necessary.
1. Remove nut, washer and pulley from drive shaft.
2. Remove the following from the power steering oil pump:
• Union bolt, washers, and joint.
• Bolts and bracket.
• Bolts and suction pipe.
• Suction pipe O-ring.
K
L
M
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Mount oil pump in soft jawed vise as required.
1. Check if drive shaft assembly turns smoothly.
2. Install bracket to power steering oil pump, and tighten the two bracket bolts to specification.
3. Install pulley to drive shaft assembly, then tighten lock nut to specification.
4. Install washers and joint to power steering oil pump, then tighten union bolt to specification.
NOTE:
Do not reuse washers.
5. Apply a coat of NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring and install O-ring to suction pipe. Refer to MA-11.
6. Install suction pipe to power steering oil pump and tighten bolts to the specification.
Revision: August 2007
PS-23
2008 Quest
N
O
P
HYDRAULIC LINE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718402
WGIA0174E
1.
Power steering fluid reservoir
2.
Return line
3.
Power steering cooler
4.
Power steering pressure switch
5.
Power steering gear
6.
Power steering oil pump
7.
Washers
8.
Tube
9.
Hose
D
3 - 8 mm (0.1 - 0.3 in)
⇐
Front
REMOVAL
Refer to the illustration for hydraulic tube and hose routing. Remove any components necessary to access the
lines.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to kink or bend the tubes.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Refer to PS-14 and PS-21 for tightening torques.
NOTE:
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
• Ensure that hose is properly installed on tube to specification.
CAUTION:
Do not apply power steering fluid to surface between tube and hose.
• To install the eye joint on the power steering pump, align the projection of the eye joint into the notch of the
power steering pump. Make sure the eye joint is properly installed on the power steering pump, then tighten
the eye bolt to specification.
• Connect the harness connector into the power steering pressure switch securely.
Revision: August 2007
PS-24
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
General Specification
INFOID:0000000001718403
B
Steering model
Power steering
Steering gear type
PR26AD
Steering overall gear ratio
C
17.1:1
Turns of steering wheel (lock to lock)
3.0
Steering column type
Collapsible, manual tilt
D
Steering Wheel
INFOID:0000000001718404
Unit: mm (in)
Steering wheel axial play
E
0 (0)
Steering wheel play
35 (1.38) or less
F
± 2 (± 0.08) or less
Movement of gear housing
Steering Column
INFOID:0000000001718405
Unit: mm (in)
PS
H
I
J
WGIA0064E
Applied model
K
All
Steering column length “L”
428 (16.85)
Power Steering
INFOID:0000000001718406
Applied model
All
Steering gear type
L
M
PR26AD
Pump type
F40
Steering wheel turning force
(Measured at one full turn from the neutral position)
39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less
Fluid capacity (approximate)
1.0
(2 1/8 US pt, 1 3/4 Imp pt)
8,800 kPa (89.76 kg/cm2, 1,276 psi)
Oil pump maximum pressure
N
Steering Gear and Linkage
O
INFOID:0000000001718407
P
Applied model
All
Steering gear type
Revision: August 2007
PR26AD
PS-25
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SST468C
Tie-rod outer ball joint
Tie-rod inner ball joint
Swinging force at cotter pin hole “A”
6.47 - 64.63 N (0.66 - 6.59 kg-f, 1.46 - 14.53 lb-f)
Rotating torque “B”
0.29 - 2.94 N·m (3.0 - 30.0 kg-cm, 2.6 - 26.0 in-lb)
Axial end play “C”
0.4 mm (0.016 in) or less
Swinging force* “A”
* Measuring point: 172 mm (6.77 in)
Axial end play “C”
5.69 - 45.60 N (0.58 - 4.65 kg-f, 1.28 - 10.25 lb-f)
0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less
WGIA0114E
Tie-rod standard length “L”
Rack sliding force
Under normal operating oil pressure
204.7 mm (8.059 in)
Range within ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in)
from the neutral position at rack
speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s
Average force
235 - 314 N (24 - 32 kg-f, 53 71 lb-f)*
Minimum force
186 N ( 19 kg-f, 41.8 lb-f)
SST086BA
Rack stroke “S”
73.5 mm (2.89 in)
*: Target force of 279.5 N (kg-f, lb-f)
Revision: August 2007
PS-26
2008 Quest
DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
RAX
REAR AXLE
A
B
C
RAX
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Rear Axle ........................................... 2
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 4
F
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
WHEEL HUB ...................................................... 5
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
G
H
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .................................................................. 8
Wheel Bearing (Rear) ............................................... 8
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RAX-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718138
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Rear Axle
INFOID:0000000001718139
CAUTION:
• When installing each rear suspension rubber component, the final fastener tightening must be carried out with the vehicle under unladen condition* with the tires on the ground.
*Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated
positions.
• After installing suspension components, check the rear wheel alignment.
• Do not jack up the vehicle at the rear suspension components.
Revision: August 2007
RAX-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718140
B
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening and removing bolts and nuts
C
RAX
PBIC0190E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RAX-3
2008 Quest
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000001718141
RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BRAKES
×
×
×
×
Symptom
Vibration
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
Shudder
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (brakes)
PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service" (parking brake)
TIRES
×
×
ROAD WHEEL
RAX-5
Wheel bearing damage
×
Shake
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
REAR SUSPENSION
RAX-5
Parts interference
Noise
Reference page
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-6
Improper installation, looseness
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: August 2007
RAX-4
2008 Quest
WHEEL HUB
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHEEL HUB
A
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
INFOID:0000000001718142
Check the axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear, or damage.
• Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play.
B
C
RAX
E
SMA525A
REAR WHEEL BEARING
• Check that the wheel hub bearing axial end play is within specification as shown.
Axial end play
F
: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
• Check that the wheel hub bearing operates smoothly.
• Replace the wheel hub assembly if the axial end play exceeds
specification, or if the wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Refer
to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
The wheel hub assembly does not require maintenance. If any
of the following symptoms are noted, replace the wheel hub
assembly.
• Growling noise is emitted from the wheel hub bearing during operation.
• Wheel hub bearing drags or turns roughly.
G
H
LDIA0029E
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RAX-5
2008 Quest
WHEEL HUB
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718143
Rear Wheel Hub Assembly
WDIA0111E
1.
Wheel nut
4.
Rear ABS sensor
2.
Brake rotor
3.
Wheel hub assembly
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the rear wheel and tire using power tool.
Reposition the cylinder body assembly out of the way using a suitable wire without disconnecting the
hydraulic hose. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor".
• The brake hose should not be disconnected from the cylinder body.
• Suspend the cylinder body assembly using a suitable wire so that the brake hose is not stretched.
CAUTION:
• Do not depress brake pedal, piston will pop out with cylinder body removed.
• Do not twist the brake hose.
Remove the brake rotor.
NOTE:
The parking brake must be fully released.
Remove the rear ABS sensor, then position it away from the hub assembly using wire. Refer to BRC-39
(TCS/ABS), BRC-85 (VDC/TCS/ABS).
CAUTION:
• Failure to remove the rear ABS sensor may result in damage to the sensor, causing the sensor to
become inoperative.
• Do not stretch the rear ABS sensor wire harness.
Remove the wheel hub assembly from the knuckle using power tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks, and damage on the wheel hub assembly, replace if necessary.
CAUTION:
The wheel hub assembly does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted,
replace the wheel hub assembly.
• Growling noise is emitted from the wheel hub bearing during operation.
• Wheel hub bearing drags or turns roughly.
Revision: August 2007
RAX-6
2008 Quest
WHEEL HUB
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check that the wheel bearing operates smoothly.
• Check that the wheel hub bearing axial end play is within specification as shown.
Axial end play
B
: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
C
RAX
LDIA0029E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RAX-7
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing (Rear)
INFOID:0000000001718144
Axial end play
Revision: August 2007
0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
RAX-8
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
RF
ROOF
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution ................................................................. 2
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 4
Work Flow ................................................................. 4
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
SUNROOF ..........................................................10
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 10
System Description ................................................. 10
CAN Communication System Description ...............12
Wiring Diagram - SROOF - ......................................12
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................13
Sunroof Motor Assembly Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................................14
Terminal and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor
Assembly .................................................................14
Work Flow ................................................................14
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................14
Work Support ...........................................................15
Data Monitor ............................................................15
Active Test ...............................................................15
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .....................15
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
....16
Sunroof Switch System Inspection ..........................16
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Inspection ........................................16
Door Switch Check ..................................................18
Removal and Installation .........................................20
Fitting Adjustment ....................................................25
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718687
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718688
•
•
•
•
Disconnect both battery cables in advance.
Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance.
Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may
get in the way with cloth.
• When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape.
• Keep removed parts protected with cloth.
• If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.
• If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.
• Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.
• After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.
• Remove stains in the following way.
Water-soluble stains:
Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain
with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely.
Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.
• Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.
Revision: August 2007
RF-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718689
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
B
C
D
E
SIIA0993E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and
Rattle Kit
G
H
SIIA0994E
RF
J
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718690
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
K
L
M
SIIA0995E
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-3
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000001718691
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions. Hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often drought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: August 2007
RF-4
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle "twist".
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
D
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
E
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
F
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken G
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- H
porarily.
• Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
RF
• Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)
76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)
76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll.
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Revision: August 2007
RF-5
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
INFOID:0000000001718692
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: August 2007
RF-6
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
B
C
D
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
E
F
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the G
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
H
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- RF
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-7
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000001718693
LAIA0072E
Revision: August 2007
RF-8
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
N
O
LAIA0071E
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-9
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718694
LIIA2450E
1.
BCM M18, M19, M20
2.
(view with instrument panel removed)
Front pillar LH
3.
Sunroof switch R6
4.
Sunroof motor assembly harness
connector R4
Sunroof motor
6.
Front door switch LH B8
RH B108
5.
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718695
OUTLINE
Electric sunroof system consists of
• Front door switches
• Sunroof switch
• Sunroof motor assembly
• BCM (body control module)
BCM supplies power to the sunroof motor. Sunroof operation depends on sunroof switch condition.
OPERATION
Sunroof can be opened or closed and tilted up or down with sunroof switch.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fusible link (letter j located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70 and
• through BCM terminal 69
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 5.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67 and
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 7
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
TILT UP OPERATION
When the tilt switch is operated for tilt up, ground is supplied
Revision: August 2007
RF-10
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 4
• through sunroof switch terminal 4
• through sunroof switch terminal 2
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will tilt up.
A
B
TILT DOWN OPERATION
When the tilt switch is operated for tilt down, ground is supplied
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 10
• through sunroof switch terminal 6
• through sunroof switch terminal 2
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will tilt down.
C
D
E
SLIDE OPEN OPERATION
When the switch is operated for slide open, ground is supplied
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 9
• through sunroof switch terminal 3
• through sunroof switch terminal 2
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will slide open.
F
G
H
SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION
When the switch is operated for slide close, ground is supplied
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 3
• through sunroof switch terminal 1
• through sunroof switch terminal 2
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8
• through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then, the sunroof will slide closed.
RF
J
K
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds
• through BCM terminal 68
• to sunroof motor assembly terminal 1.
When power is supplied, the sunroof can be operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to RF-14, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
L
M
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE
If the battery is disconnected, or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the slide switch will
become inoperable and the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from
any sunroof position (full open, partially open, closed, partially vented, and vented), push and hold the sunroof
tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. After it has closed all the way, push
and hold the switch forward (DOWN) position for more than 2 seconds to re-establish the motor preset position. The sunroof should now operate normally.
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION
O
P
The CPU (central processing unit) of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof
position (fully-closed or other) by the signals from the sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following sliding close operation, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until it reaches full open position.
• automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position
• automatic close operation during retained power operation
Revision: August 2007
N
RF-11
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001718696
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Wiring Diagram - SROOF -
INFOID:0000000001718697
WIWA1770E
Revision: August 2007
RF-12
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1771E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718698
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Revision: August 2007
RF-13
2008 Quest
P
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Sunroof Motor Assembly Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718699
LIIA2447E
Terminal and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly
Terminal
Wire Color
Item
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is
3
W/L
P/B
turned OFF*
RAP signal
Sunroof switch CLOSE signal
O
0
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
CLOSE position
0
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
TILT UP position
Sunroof switch TILT UP signal
Other than above
5
W/R
7
Battery voltage
When front door LH or RH is open while
retained power is operating
Other than above
4
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch ON
1
INFOID:0000000001718700
0
Battery voltage
BAT power supply
—
Battery voltage
B
Ground
—
—
8
Y
Ground signal
—
—
9
P
Sunroof switch OPEN signal
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
OPEN position
0
Other than above
10
L/R
Sunroof switch TILT DOWN signal
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
TILT DOWN position
Other than above
0
Battery voltage
*: When MODE1 is selected. For more details, refer to RF-15, "Work Support".
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INFOID:0000000001718701
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to RF-10, "System Description".
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause or replace of the malfunction.
Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom".
Does sunroof system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718702
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Revision: August 2007
RF-14
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
A
B
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
C
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
D
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
Work Support
INFOID:0000000001718703
Work item
E
Description
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Select RAP signal’s
power supply period between the following three modes:
• MODE 1 (45 sec.) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.)
RETAINED PWR SET
Data Monitor
INFOID:0000000001718704
Monitored item
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
Active Test
G
H
Description
IGN ON SW
F
RF
INFOID:0000000001718705
J
Test item
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM to power window system, power
sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED PWR" on
CONSULT-III screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-III can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position.
"RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power operation. CONSULT-III might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or "OFF" on
CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch is OFF.
RETAINED PWR
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
K
L
M
INFOID:0000000001718706
N
Symptom
Sunroof does not operate.
Retained power operation does not operate properly.
Revision: August 2007
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
Refer to page
1. Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground
circuit check
RF-16
2. Sunroof switch system check
RF-16
3. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-20
1. Check the retained power operation mode setting
RF-15
2. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
RF-16
3. Door switch check
RF-18
4. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-20
RF-15
2008 Quest
O
P
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
Refer to page
Motor does not stop at the sunroof fully-open or fully-closed
position.
1. Initialization procedure check
RF-10
2. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-20
Sunroof interruption detection does operate properly.
1. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-20
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718707
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Sunroof Switch System Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718708
1.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sunroof motor assembly and sunroof switch.
Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 3, 4, 8, 9 and 10 and sunroof
switch connector R104 terminals 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6.
3-1
4-4
8-2
9-3
10 - 6
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1245E
2.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH
Operate sunroof switch, and check continuity of the sunroof switch
as follows.
Terminals
1
3
2
4
6
Condition
Continuity
Sunroof switch in CLOSE position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in OPEN position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in TILT UP position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position
Yes
Other than above
No
WIIA0232E
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof switch and harness are OK. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom".
NG
>> Replace sunroof switch.
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718709
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the sunroof motor assembly.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 1, 5 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
RF-16
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
Terminals
(+)
1
R4
(–)
Ground
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after
ignition switch is turned
OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF
B
C
When front door LH or RH
is open while retained
power is operating
5
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
0
WIIA0250E
D
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminal 7 and ground.
7 - Ground
F
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuits are OK. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart
by Symptom".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
RF
WIIA0251E
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69
and ground.
68 - Ground
69 - Ground
K
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
M
WIIA0425E
4.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68, 69
and sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 1, 5.
68 - 1
69 - 5
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
P
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68, 69
and ground.
68 - Ground
69 - Ground
Revision: August 2007
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
RF-17
LIIA1246E
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof motor assembly power supply circuits are OK. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart
by Symptom".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly.
Door Switch Check
INFOID:0000000001718710
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR" and "DOOR SW-AS") in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
Monitor item
Condition
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
1.
2.
OPEN
: ON
CLOSE
: OFF
OPEN
: ON
CLOSE
: OFF
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
Item
RH
Connector
M18
Terminals
(+)
(–)
12
Ground
LH
M19
47
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Door open
(switch closed)
0
Door closed
(switch open)
Battery voltage
Door open
(switch closed)
0
Door closed
(switch open)
Battery voltage
WIIA0234E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switches are OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front door switches and BCM.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) (B) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 (A) terminals 12 and 47.
Front door switch LH
1 - 47
Front door switch RH
1 - 12
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH)
or B108 (RH) (B) terminal 1 and ground.
1 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly.
WIIA1126E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
Revision: August 2007
RF-18
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between each front door switch terminal 1 and body ground part of front door switch.
A
Terminal
1
Body ground part
of door switch
Condition
Continuity
Door switch pushed
No
Door switch released
Yes
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning front door switch.
C
WIIA0782E
D
4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 12, M19 terminal 47 and ground.
12 - Ground
47 - Ground
E
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
G
H
WIIA0234E
RF
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-19
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718711
WIIA1141E
1.
Glass lid assembly
2.
Wind deflector
3.
Rear drain hoses
4.
Shade stoppers
5.
Sunroof frame assembly
6.
Front drain hose
7.
Front overhead console bracket
9.
Side cover
10. Sunshade assembly
13. Sunroof rear bracket
8.
11.
Sunroof motor assembly
Sunroof bracket
12. Front rear overhead console bracket
Sunroof bracket LH
• After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and glass lid assembly alignment.
Revision: August 2007
RF-20
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Handle glass lid assembly with care to avoid damage.
• For easier installation, mark each point before removal.
CAUTION:
• Always work with a helper.
• Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly. Then, after removal, do not move the sunroof
motor assembly.
• After installing the glass lid assembly, check gap adjustment to make sure there is no malfunction.
SUNROOF UNIT
B
C
Removal
CAUTION:
• Always work with a helper.
• When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage.
• After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid assembly, be sure to check gap adjustment to make
sure there is no malfunction.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-38.
2. Remove the glass lid assembly. Refer to "GLASS LID ASSEMBLY".
3. Remove front overhead console bracket.
4. Remove front rear overhead console bracket.
5. Disconnect the drain hoses.
6. Remove front sunroof frame assembly bolts.
7. Remove sunroof bracket RH/LH bolts.
8. Remove the side sunroof frame assembly bolts, then the sunroof unit.
D
E
F
G
H
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A
Position the sunroof frame assembly and install the side bolts.
Install the sunroof bracket RH/LH bolts.
Install the front sunroof frame assembly bolts.
Install the front rear overhead console bracket.
Connect drain hoses.
Install the front overhead console bracket.
Install the glass lid assembly. Refer to "GLASS LID ASSEMBLY".
Install headlining. Refer to EI-38.
RF
J
K
GLASS LID ASSEMBLY
L
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open sunroof shade and confirm glass lid assembly is closed.
Remove the side covers RH/L/H.
Remove the screws securing glass lid assembly to the sunroof
unit.
Lift and remove the glass lid assembly.
M
N
O
P
WIIA0556E
Installation
1.
2.
3.
Position glass lid assembly to sunroof assembly.
Install the glass lid assembly screws. First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid
assembly to prevent movement while tightening other bolts.
Adjust the sunroof glass. Refer to RF-25, "Fitting Adjustment".
Revision: August 2007
RF-21
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIND DEFLECTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Open the sunroof.
Remove screws from left and right sides of wind deflector
holder.
Remove the wind deflector from the sunroof frame assembly.
PIIA3510E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SUNSHADE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the sunroof unit. Refer to "SUNROOF UNIT".
Remove the shade stoppers (2 points) from the rear end of the
sunroof frame assembly.
Remove the shade assembly from the rear end of the sunroof
frame assembly.
SBT251A
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
Removal
CAUTION:
• When removing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure that the glass lid assembly is in the fully
closed position.
• Never run the removed sunroof motor assembly as a single unit.
1. Position the glass lid assembly in the fully closed position.
2. Remove the front roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38.
3. Disconnect the harness connector (1).
• ⇐ Vehicle front
4. Remove the sunroof motor assembly screws (2).
WIIA0771E
Installation
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
RF-22
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position.
• ⇐: Vehicle front
1. Move the sunroof motor assembly (1) laterally little by little so
that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof
frame assembly, and the mounting surface becomes parallel.
2. Secure the sunroof motor assembly (1) with screws (3).
3. Connect the harness connector (2).
A
B
C
D
WIIA0772E
E
4.
5.
Install the roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38.
Check sunroof unit for proper operation.
F
DRAIN HOSES
G
H
RF
J
K
WIIA1142E
Removal
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-23
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the headlining. Refer to EI-38, "Removal and Installation".
LIIA1563E
2. Check visually for proper connections, damage or deterioration.
3. Remove each drain hose and check visually for damage, cracks or deterioration.
4. Pour water through the drain hose to check for damage.
• If any damage is found, replace the drain hose.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Before replacing any suspect part, be sure it is the source of the noise being experienced.
1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to the wire or rail
groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required.
2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, remove rear guide then replace wire.
Revision: August 2007
RF-24
2008 Quest
SUNROOF
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Fitting Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001718712
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WIIA0557E
GAP AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
RF
If any gap or height difference between glass lid assembly and roof is found, check glass lid assembly fit.
Adjust the sunroof glass lid assembly as follows:
1. Open sunshade, tilt glass lid assembly up and remove side trim.
2. Loosen glass lid assembly screws (2 each on left and right sides), then tilt glass lid assembly down.
NOTE:
To prevent glass lid assembly from moving after adjustment, first gently tighten the glass lid assembly screw at
left front, then right rear.
3. For gap adjustments:
• Manually adjust glass lid assembly forward or rearward until gap becomes equal in distance between
front and rear of roof panel edge.
4. For height adjustments:
• Manually adjust glass lid assembly up or down from outside of vehicle until it is within the specification
“A-A” as shown.
5. After gap/height adjustment, tilt glass lid assembly up and tighten all screws.
6. Tilt mechanism up and down several times to check that it operates smoothly.
NOTE:
After glass lid assembly gap or height adjustments are performed, always cover the entire surface of the roof
with water to check for leaks.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RF-25
2008 Quest
SUSPENSION
SECTION
RSU
REAR SUSPENSION
A
B
C
D
RSU
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Removal and Installation .........................................12
Inspection ................................................................12
Precaution ................................................................. 2
RADIUS ROD .................................................... 13
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Removal and Installation .........................................13
Inspection ................................................................13
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
FRONT LOWER LINK ....................................... 14
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ..................... 5
Component ................................................................ 5
On-vehicle Service .................................................... 6
Rear Wheel Alignment .............................................. 6
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER ......................... 9
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ........ 15
H
I
Removal and Installation .........................................15
Inspection ................................................................16
J
STABILIZER BAR ............................................. 17
Removal and Installation .........................................17
Inspection ................................................................17
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 18
SHOCK ABSORBER .........................................11
General Specification (Rear) ...................................18
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ..........................18
Ball Joint ..................................................................18
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ..................................19
SUSPENSION ARM ...........................................12
G
Removal and Installation .........................................14
Inspection ................................................................14
Removal and Installation ........................................... 9
Removal and Installation ......................................... 11
Inspection ................................................................ 11
F
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718186
• When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off
any spilled oil.
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
• Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes.
• After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment.
• Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link.
• Always torque brake lines when installing.
• Lock nuts are not reusable parts; always use new ones.
When replacing, do not wipe the oil off of the new lock nut before tightening.
Revision: August 2007
RSU-2
SBR686C
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718187
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HT72520000
(J-25730-A)
Ball joint remover
Removing suspension arm ball joint
C
D
RSU
NT146
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718188
F
Tool name
Description
1.
2.
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
Flare nut crowfoot
Torque wrench
G
H
I
S-NT360
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
J
K
PBIC0190E
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-3
2008 Quest
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000001718189
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
STEERING
Shudder
BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
BRAKES
×
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Shimmy
TIRES
×
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
AXLE
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
DRIVE SHAFT
Vibration
RSU-17
Symptom
Stabilizer bar fatigue
×
RSU-6
×
×
Incorrect wheel alignment
×
×
RSU-5
RSU-5
Parts interference
×
×
Suspension looseness
RSU-5
Bushing or mounting
×
Shake
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
RSU-16
RSU-11
Shock absorber deformation,
damage or deflection
Noise
Reference page
Spring fatigue
RSU-5
Improper installation, looseness
Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: August 2007
RSU-4
2008 Quest
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
A
Component
INFOID:0000000001718190
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WEIA0110E
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Stabilizer bar
3.
Stabilizer bar bushing
4.
Stabilizer bar clamp
5.
Connecting rod
6.
Member stay
7.
Member stopper
8.
Radius rod
9.
Adjusting bolt cam
Revision: August 2007
RSU-5
2008 Quest
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Front lower link
11.
12.
Wheel hub and spindle assembly
13. Rear lower link
14. Suspension arm
Bushing
15.
Lower rubber seat
16. Coil spring
17. Upper rubber seat
18.
Shock absorber
19. Bound bumper cover
20. Bound bumper
21.
Lower bushing
22. Upper bracket
23. Upper bracket sleeve
24.
Gasket
25. Upper bushing
26. Washer
On-vehicle Service
INFOID:0000000001718191
• Check suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or damage. Shake each rear wheel to check for
excessive play.
• Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
• Make sure that the suspension arm cotter pin is inserted.
• Check the shock absorber for any oil leakage or other damage.
• Check wheelarch height. Refer to RSU-19, "Wheelarch Height
(Unladen*)".
• Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust
cover for cracks or other damage.
LEIA0040E
Rear Wheel Alignment
INFOID:0000000001718192
Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
• Check tires for wear and for improper inflation.
• Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout. Refer to WT-5, "Inspection".
• Check rear wheel bearings for looseness.
• Check rear suspension for looseness.
• Check that rear shock absorber works properly.
• Check wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to RSU-19, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)".
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1.
2.
A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
• This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
• The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel
is centered.
• The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
• The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
• Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
• Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to RSU-18, "Rear
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)".
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or
minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators.
• The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators
may not be correct.
• This may result in an ERROR.
Revision: August 2007
RSU-6
2008 Quest
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional “Rolling Compensation” method to “compensate” the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this “Rolling Compensation”
method.
• Use the “Jacking Compensation” method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the
vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
• See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
A
B
CAMBER
• Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in accordance with
the following procedures.
Camber
: Refer to RSU-18, "Rear Wheel Alignment
(Unladen*)".
C
D
• If camber is not within specification, adjust by turning the adjusting
bolts in the same direction.
RSU
F
SFA948A
G
1.
Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate.
NOTE:
Camber changes about 5' minutes with each graduation of the
adjusting bolt.
H
I
J
LEIA0041E
K
L
M
LEIA0009E
2.
Tighten adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
N
TOE-IN
Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn
rear suspension parts.
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture.
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
Revision: August 2007
RSU-7
2008 Quest
O
P
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at
the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point.
SFA614B
4.
5.
6.
Measure distance “A” (rear side).
Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180°
degrees (1/2 turn).
If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), try
the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push
vehicle backward.
Measure distance “B” (front side).
Total toe-in
7.
: Refer to RSU-18, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)".
SFA234AC
Adjust toe-in by turning the adjusting bolts.
NOTE:
Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [one side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt.
LEIA0041E
LEIA0009E
8.
Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
Revision: August 2007
RSU-8
2008 Quest
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718193
Rear Suspension Assembly
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WEIA0110E
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Stabilizer bar
3.
Stabilizer bar bushing
4.
Stabilizer bar clamp
5.
Connecting rod
6.
Member stay
7.
Member stopper
8.
Radius rod
9.
Adjusting bolt cam
Revision: August 2007
RSU-9
2008 Quest
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Front lower link
11.
12.
Wheel hub and spindle assembly
13. Rear lower link
14. Suspension arm
Bushing
15.
Lower rubber seat
16. Coil spring
17. Upper rubber seat
18.
Shock absorber
19. Bound bumper cover
20. Bound bumper
21.
Lower bushing
22. Upper bracket
23. Upper bracket sleeve
24.
Gasket
25. Upper bushing
26. Washer
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensors from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensors becoming inoperative.
1. Remove the center exhaust tube with mufflers using power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable assemblies from the front cable. Refer to PB-5, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the brake caliper assemblies from the rear wheel hub and spindle assemblies without disconnecting the brake lines, using power tool. Position the brake caliper assemblies aside using suitable wire.
Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor".
• Leave the brake line connected to the brake caliper.
• Do not to depress the brake pedal, or the piston will pop out.
• Do not pull or twist the brake hose.
4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool.
LEIA0042E
5.
6.
7.
8.
Disconnect the LH and RH ABS sensor harness connectors,
and disconnect the ABS sensor harness from the rear suspension member.
Remove the LH and RH member stay bolts using power tool.
Use a support jack or suitable tool, to support the rear suspension member.
Remove the rear suspension member nuts using power tool.
Then lower the rear suspension member assembly using the
support jack.
LEIA0043E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
RSU-10
2008 Quest
SHOCK ABSORBER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SHOCK ABSORBER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718194
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6.
Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, under the rear lower link
to relieve the coil spring tension, then remove the shock
absorber lower end bolt using power tool.
NOTE:
The rear brake rotor has been removed for clarity only.
Remove the transmission jack supporting the rear lower link.
C
D
RSU
LEIA0044E
F
4.
Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool.
G
H
I
LEIA0042E
INSTALLATION
J
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718195
K
• Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
• Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
• Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and
replace if necessary.
L
M
N
LEIA0040E
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-11
2008 Quest
SUSPENSION ARM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SUSPENSION ARM
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718196
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the rear suspension member assembly using power tool. Refer to RSU-9, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the connecting rod upper joint from the suspension arm using power tool.
Remove the suspension arm nuts and bolts on the suspension member side using power tool.
Remove the suspension arm cotter pin and lock nut on the wheel hub and spindle assembly side using
power tool.
Disconnect the suspension arm from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using Tool.
Tool number
: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION:
• Do not damage ball joint with Tool.
• While using Tool, temporarily tighten the lock nut so as not to damage the ball joint stud threads.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
• After installing the suspension arm, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6,
"Rear Wheel Alignment".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718197
• Check suspension arm for damage, cracks, deformation and
replace if necessary.
• Check rubber bushing for damage, cracks and deformation.
Replace suspension arm assembly if necessary.
• Check ball joint. Replace suspension arm assembly if any of the
following exists:
- Ball stud is worn.
- Joint is hard to swing.
- Play in axial direction is excessive.
• Before checking, turn ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that ball
joint is properly broken in.
Swinging force “A”
Turning force “B”
Vertical end play “C”
Revision: August 2007
SFA858A
: Refer to RSU-18, "Ball Joint".
: Refer to RSU-18, "Ball Joint".
: Refer to RSU-18, "Ball Joint".
RSU-12
2008 Quest
RADIUS ROD
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
RADIUS ROD
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718198
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6.
Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the radius rod.
Disconnect the radius rod from the rear suspension member
using power tool.
C
D
RSU
F
LEIA0045E
4.
Disconnect the radius rod nut and bolt from the wheel hub and
spindle assembly using power tool, then remove the radius rod.
G
H
I
LEIA0046E
J
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
• After installing the radius rod, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear
Wheel Alignment".
Inspection
K
INFOID:0000000001718199
L
• Check radius rod for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-13
2008 Quest
FRONT LOWER LINK
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT LOWER LINK
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718200
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6.
Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the front lower link.
Disconnect the shock absorber lower end bolt using power tool.
LEIA0044E
4.
Remove the front lower link adjusting bolt using power tool.
LEIA0041E
5.
Disconnect the front lower link nut and bolt from the wheel hub
and spindle assembly using power tool, then remove front lower
link.
LEIA0047E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
• After installing the front lower link, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear
Wheel Alignment".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718201
Check front lower link for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
Revision: August 2007
RSU-14
2008 Quest
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001718202
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6.
Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the rear lower link.
Loosen the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut connected to
the rear suspension member, using power tool.
C
D
RSU
F
LEIA0009E
4.
Remove the rear lower link bolt and nut from the wheel hub and
spindle assembly using power tool.
G
H
I
LEIA0048E
J
5.
6.
Slowly lower the transmission jack to release the coil spring tension. Then remove upper rubber seat, coil
spring and lower rubber seat from the rear lower link.
Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the rear
suspension member using power tool, then remove the rear
lower link.
K
L
M
LEIA0009E
N
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-15
2008 Quest
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Check that the projecting part inside the upper seat and the flange
part of bracket are attached as shown.
• Check that the projection part outside the upper seat directs to
vehicle front.
• Position the hollow of the rubber seat with the groove part of rear
lower link to install.
• Install coil spring with the side of two paint markers directing to
lower side.
• After installing the rear lower link and coil spring, check the wheel
alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel
Alignment".
WEIA0043E
Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718203
Check for deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary.
Revision: August 2007
RSU-16
2008 Quest
STABILIZER BAR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STABILIZER BAR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718204
REMOVAL
1.
B
Disconnect the stabilizer bar ends from the connecting rods
using power tool.
C
D
RSU
LEIA0049E
2.
3.
Remove the stabilizer bar clamps using power tool, and remove
the stabilizer bar bushings.
Remove the stabilizer bar.
F
G
H
LEIA0050E
I
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component".
• Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamp so they are positioned
inside of the crimp ring on the stabilizer bar.
J
K
L
WEIA0111E
Inspection
M
INFOID:0000000001718205
N
• Check stabilizer bar for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
• Check rubber bushings for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-17
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification (Rear)
INFOID:0000000001718206
Suspension type
Independent multi-link suspension
Shock absorber type
Double-acting hydraulic
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
INFOID:0000000001718207
United States
and Canada
Mexico
Minimum
−1° 3' (−1.05°)
0° 3' (0.05°)
Nominal
−0° 33′ (−0.55°)
0° 33′ (0.55°)
Maximum
-0° 3′ (-0.05°)
1° 3′ (1.05°)
Minimum
1.6 (0.063)
1.6 (0.063)
Nominal
3.2 (0.126)
3.2 (0.126)
Maximum
4.8 (0.189)
4.8 (0.189)
Minimum
-2.0 (-0.079)
-2.0 (-0.079)
Nominal
0 (0)
0 (0)
Maximum
2.0 (0.079)
2.0 (0.079)
Minimum
0° 3′ 35" (0.06°)
0° 3′ 35" (0.06°)
Nominal
0° 7′ 48" (0.13°)
0° 7′ 48" (0.13°)
Maximum
0° 12′ 0" (0.20°)
0° 12′ 0" (0.20°)
Market
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
SFA234AC
Distance (“A” − “B”)
mm (in)
Total toe-in
Difference between LH, RH
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Ball Joint
INFOID:0000000001718208
SFA858A
Swinging force “A”
(measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud)
Revision: August 2007
7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f, 1.8 - 12.3 lb-f)
RSU-18
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Turning torque “B”
0.49 - 3.43 N·m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 30.4 in-lb)
Vertical end play “C”
A
0 mm (0 in)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
INFOID:0000000001718209
B
Unit: mm (in)
C
D
RSU
WEIA0030E
Market
F
United States and Canada
Mexico
Front (Hf)
740 (29.13)
770 (30.31)
Rear (Hr)
749 (29.49)
779 (30.67)
G
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
RSU-19
2008 Quest
RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SB
SEAT BELTS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
Second Row Seat Belt .............................................. 4
Third Row Seat Belt .................................................. 6
Seat Belt Inspection .................................................. 9
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Seat Belt Service ............................... 2
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER
FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM ............................... 12
SEAT BELTS ....................................................... 3
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ..... 13
Front Seat Belt .......................................................... 3
Removal and Installation .........................................13
Removal and Installation .........................................12
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SB-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718408
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Seat Belt Service
INFOID:0000000001718409
CAUTION:
• Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the
battery ground cable and wait at least 3 minutes.
• Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
• After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check".
• Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly.
• Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
• Never oil tongue and buckle.
• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
assembly.
• If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
• When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
• The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
Revision: August 2007
SB-2
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SEAT BELTS
A
Front Seat Belt
INFOID:0000000001718410
COMPONENTS
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
WHIA0309E
1.
Center pillar upper trim
2.
Seat belt height adjuster
3.
Center pillar
4.
Seat belt pre-tensioner connector
5.
Seat belt retractor and belt assembly
6.
Seat belt buckle
7.
Center pillar lower trim
8.
Seat belt anchor cover
9.
Seat belt guide
10. Assist handle
11. Assist handle bolt covers
O
12. Center pillar upper bolt cover
P
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal
CAUTION:
• Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
SB-3
N
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Separate the seat belt guide from the center pillar.
3. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly.
• On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor.
WHIA0310E
4.
Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
CAUTION:
• For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector,
insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch,
lift the lock and remove the connector.
• Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the
lock into the connector.
PHIA0341E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the screws and seat cushion inner finisher.
Remove the anchor bolt and buckle.
LHIA0033E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Second Row Seat Belt
INFOID:0000000001718411
COMPONENTS
Revision: August 2007
SB-4
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Second Row
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
WHIA0311E
1.
Seat belt height adjuster
2.
Seat belt guide
3.
Seat belt retractor and belt assembly
4.
Seat belt lower anchor
5.
D-ring anchor
6.
D-ring anchor bolt cover
M
N
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt.
Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt.
Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the seat belt guide bolt.
Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the assembly.
Remove the height adjuster assembly.
O
P
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
SB-5
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the seat back recliner handle.
Remove the screws and seat cushion finisher.
Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle.
WHIA0312E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Third Row Seat Belt
INFOID:0000000001718412
COMPONENTS
Revision: August 2007
SB-6
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Third Row Outboard
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
LHIA0029E
1.
D-ring mounting bracket
2.
Retractor mounting bracket
3.
Seat belt retractor and belt assembly
4.
Seat belt lower anchor
5.
D-ring anchor bolt cover
6.
D-ring anchor
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SB-7
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Third Row Center
WHIA0313E
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OUTBOARD SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the upper anchor bolt cover.
Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt.
Remove the seat belt lower anchor.
Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolt and retractor assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Lower the rear portion of the headliner.
Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and retractor assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Rotate third row seat assembly rearward to expose underside.
Release seat cushion trim cover locking strip.
Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Seat belt buckle anchor bolt
Revision: August 2007
: 49 N·m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb)
SB-8
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Seat Belt Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718413
A
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
• The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
C
D
E
F
G
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
a.
B
Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should SB
sound for about seven seconds.
Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should
stop.
I
If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning
lamp. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check".
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.
J
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels
freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and
holds securely.
K
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the L
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built
up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does
M
not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET”
and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening.
Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut
while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean
cloth.
Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly.
Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Revision: August 2007
SB-9
2008 Quest
N
O
P
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop)
the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a
specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to
fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending
further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is
in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop.
The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock.
Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.
Remove the seat belt retractor assembly.
Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting
the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration.
Revision: August 2007
SB-10
2008 Quest
SEAT BELTS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
PHIA0257E
15 degrees or less tilt
35 degrees or more tilt
: Belt can be pulled out.
: Belt locks and cannot be pulled out.
SB
I
If retractor does not operate within specifications, replace the retractor assembly.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SB-11
2008 Quest
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718414
NOTE:
The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
Revision: August 2007
SB-12
2008 Quest
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001718415
NOTE:
The top tether strap child restraint is not serviceable.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SB-13
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
SC
STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
System Description ..................................................10
Wiring Diagram - START - .......................................11
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester .........................................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................15
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 17
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
System Description ..................................................17
Wiring Diagram - CHARGE - ...................................18
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester .........................................................18
Removal and Installation .........................................23
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
BATTERY ............................................................ 4
How to Handle Battery .............................................. 4
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ........................................................... 6
Removal and Installation ........................................... 8
Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection...... 9
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 25
STARTING SYSTEM ..........................................10
Battery .....................................................................25
Starter ......................................................................25
Generator ................................................................25
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719014
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
SC-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001719015
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-48087)
Battery Service Center
Tests battery.
For operating instructions, refer to Technical
Service Bulletin and Battery Service Center
User Guide.
C
D
E
WKIA5280E
Tests starting and charging systems.
For operating instructions, refer to Technical
Service Bulletin.
—
(J-44373) Model 620
Starting/Charging system tester
F
G
SEL403X
H
I
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001719016
J
Tool number
Tool name
Description
SC
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
L
M
PBIC0190E
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-3
2008 Quest
BATTERY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
INFOID:0000000001719017
CAUTION:
• If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
• After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
• Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging
a battery.
• The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept
clean and dry.
• The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
• At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and
“maintenance-free”.
MEL040F
• When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of
time, disconnect the negative battery terminal.
MEL041F
• Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a
close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.
MEL042F
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
WARNING:
Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Revision: August 2007
SC-4
2008 Quest
BATTERY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
• Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
A
B
C
MEL043F
D
Sulfation
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulfation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been sulfated, note its voltage and
current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current
and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging
sulfated batteries.
A sulfated battery may sometimes be brought back into service
by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by
a battery capacity test.
E
F
G
WKIA4166E
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK
1.
2.
H
Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading
according to electrolyte temperature.
I
J
SC
MEL042FA
Hydrometer Temperature Correction
L
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
71 (160)
0.032
66 (150)
0.028
60 (140)
0.024
54 (130)
0.020
49 (120)
0.016
43 (110)
0.012
38 (100)
0.008
32 (90)
0.004
27 (80)
0
21 (70)
−0.004
16 (60)
−0.008
10 (50)
−0.012
4 (40)
−0.016
−1 (30)
−0.020
Revision: August 2007
SC-5
M
N
O
P
2008 Quest
BATTERY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
−7 (20)
−0.024
−12 (10)
−0.028
−18 (0)
−0.032
Corrected specific gravity
Approximate charge condition
1.260 - 1.280
Fully charged
1.230 - 1.250
3/4 charged
1.200 - 1.220
1/2 charged
1.170 - 1.190
1/4 charged
1.140 - 1.160
Almost discharged
1.110 - 1.130
Completely discharged
CHARGING THE BATTERY
CAUTION:
• Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery.
• Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
• When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the
charger first, as this may cause a spark.
• If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55°C (131°F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a
temperature below 55°C (131°F).
Charging Rates
Amps
Time
50
1 hour
25
2 hours
10
5 hours
5
10 hours
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
NOTE:
The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps
indicated above refer to initial charge rate.
• If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced.
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
INFOID:0000000001719018
CAUTION:
When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection.
NOTE:
• To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.
• If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to
remove the surface charge.
• If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C (32°F).
Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to make the
selection.
Revision: August 2007
SC-6
2008 Quest
BATTERY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair
as necessary.
2. Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends
with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
NOTE:
The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends
and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean
the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the
test.
3. Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal.
4. The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys,
select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER”
key.
A
B
C
SEL404X
D
E
F
G
SEL405X
H
5.
6.
7.
Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top
case of the battery to be tested.
NOTE:
The battery rating will be either of the following:
• CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.)
• JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard.
When using the Battery Tester use the CCA rating only.
• The tester requires the CCA rating for the battery be entered
exactly as it is written or stamped on the battery.
• (U.S. market) Refer to the latest "Battery Testing" Technical
Service Bulletin (TSB) for a chart which contains these ratings
listed by vehicle.
• You must not use the JIS rating.
Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating.
NOTE:
The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA.
Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM
CHART".
I
J
SC
WKIA4228E
L
M
N
O
P
SEL407X
Revision: August 2007
SC-7
2008 Quest
BATTERY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
9. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
NOTE:
• If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection
by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press the
“ENTER” button to make the selection.
• When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently
been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”.
• If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE &
RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user
“BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”.
SEL576X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
Service procedure
GOOD BATTERY
Battery is OK. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester".
REPLACE BATTERY
Replace battery.
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery
test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
BAD CELL-REPLACE
Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to
confirm repair.
GOOD-RECHARGE
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester.
CHARGE & RETEST
Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.)
Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair.
NOTE:
If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER
CHARGE”.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719019
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect negative battery terminal and positive battery terminal.
CAUTION:
When removing, remove negative battery terminal first.
Remove battery frame mounting nuts and battery frame.
Remove battery cover.
Remove battery.
LKIA0163E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When installing, install positive battery terminal first.
Battery frame mounting nut
Battery terminal nut
: 4.5 N·m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb)
: 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb)
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to SC-9, "Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection".
Revision: August 2007
SC-8
2008 Quest
BATTERY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection
INFOID:0000000003288861
A
SYSTEM
Engine Control
Brake Control
ITEM
Reference
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
EC-73
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
EC-73
Idle Air Volume Learning
EC-73
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
BL-92
Automatic Back Door
BL-137
Glasses, Window & Mirrors
Power Window System Initialization
GW-67
Roof
Sunroof Memory Reset/Initialization
RF-10
Seats
Automatic Drive Positioner System Initialization
Audio (Radio Preset)
Audio-visual System
C
BRC-84
Power Sliding Door
Body, Lock & Security
B
D
E
Refer to Owner’s
Manual
—
Navi
F
AV-150
Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment
DI-62
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-9
2008 Quest
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719020
Power is supplied at all times:
• to starter motor terminal B, and
• through 40A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to ignition switch terminal B.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied:
• from ignition switch terminal ST
• to IPDM E/R terminal 4.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
• through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 1.
With the selector lever in the P or N position, power is supplied:
• through PNP switch terminal 5
• to IPDM E/R terminal 53.
Ground is supplied at all times:
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38, 50 and 60
• through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Provided that the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the
IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied:
• from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R
• to terminal S of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates.
Revision: August 2007
SC-10
2008 Quest
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - START -
INFOID:0000000001719021
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
N
O
WKWA5124E
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
INFOID:0000000001719022
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
Revision: August 2007
SC-11
2008 Quest
P
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester".
3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test.
SEL408X
4.
Start the engine.
SEL409X
5.
Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART".
NOTE:
• If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start,
perform engine diagnosis.
• For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION”
incidents, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2".
SEL410X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL
CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW
Service procedure
Go to “WORK FLOW”, "WORK FLOW".
CHARGE BATTERY
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester".
REPLACE BATTERY
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery
test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester". If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do
so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
WORK FLOW
Revision: August 2007
SC-12
2008 Quest
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
N
WKIA4532E
*1
"Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/
Starting/Charging System Tester"
*4
"Check Magnetic Switch Circuit"
*2
"Check Starter Motor Circuit"
*3
"DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1"
P
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check Starter Motor Circuit
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO STARTER MOTOR
1.
2.
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Revision: August 2007
O
SC-13
2008 Quest
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Check that the starter motor connector F27 connection is clean and tight.
5. Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B
and ground using a digital circuit tester.
Battery voltage should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter
motor for open circuit.
WKIA0137E
2.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B
and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START
: Less than 0.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter
motor for poor continuity.
WKIA0138E
3.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative
terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Starter motor ground circuit is OK. Further inspection is
necessary. Refer to "WORK FLOW".
NG
>> Check harness between the starter motor case and
ground for poor continuity.
WKIA0139E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check Magnetic Switch Circuit
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAGNETIC SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter motor connector F28.
Revision: August 2007
SC-14
2008 Quest
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S
and ground using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START
A
: Battery voltage
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following:
• 40A fusible link (letter k, located in fuse and fusible
link box)
• 15A fuses [No. 34 and 41, located in the intelligent
power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)]
• Ignition switch
• Starter relay [within the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)]
• Starter relay request ON signal
• Harness for open or short
C
WKIA5243E
D
E
2.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON MAGNETIC SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
F
Connect starter motor connector F28.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S
and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
G
Ignition switch in
START
: Less than 1V
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Magnetic switch circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to "WORK FLOW".
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the magnetic
switch for poor continuity.
I
WKIA5244E
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Engine coolant temperature
SC
Voltage V
−30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F)
8.4
−19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F)
8.9
−9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F)
9.3
More than 1°C (More than 34°F)
9.7
J
L
M
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001719023
REMOVAL
1.
N
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-15
2008 Quest
STARTING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the starter insulator.
WKIA1015E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the harness bracket and harness protector from the starter engine room harness.
Disconnect the starter harness connectors.
Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools.
Remove the starter.
WKIA1234E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
SC-16
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CHARGING SYSTEM
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719024
The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal S through:
• 10A fuse (No. 26, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is
controlled by the IC regulator at terminal S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the
140A fusible link [letter a, located in the fusible link box (battery)].
Ground is supplied:
• to generator terminal E
• through body ground E116.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
• through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to combination meter terminal 38 for the charge warning lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of the combination meter through terminal L of the generator. With power and
ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage
with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off.
If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-17
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - CHARGE -
INFOID:0000000001719025
WKWA4658E
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
INFOID:0000000001719026
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
Revision: August 2007
SC-18
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/
Charging system tester.
3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test.
4. Start engine.
A
B
C
SEL417X
D
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed.
Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about
5 seconds, then return the engine to idle.
Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to
continue.
NOTE:
• If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display.
• Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting,
particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect this
without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue
on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected.
The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the
DIODE/RIPPLE check.
When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads.
• Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster.
• Headlamp high beam
• Rear window defogger
NOTE:
Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads.
E
F
G
SEL418X
H
I
J
SC
SEL419X
9.
L
Press “ENTER” to continue.
M
N
SEL420X
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-19
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about
5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in
engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue.
NOTE:
If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press
“ENTER” to restart the test.
SEL421X
11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART".
SEL422X
12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
SEL577X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL
Service procedure
Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result.
NO CHARGING VOLTAGE
LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to "WORK FLOW".
HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE
DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL
Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result.
EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED
Replace the generator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging
system tester to confirm repair.
DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED
Go to "WORK FLOW".
Revision: August 2007
SC-20
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
N
WKIA4022E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
O
Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit
P
1.CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT CONNECTION
Check to see if terminal “L” is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal "L" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
Revision: August 2007
SC-21
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect F1 connector from generator.
Apply ground to connector F1 terminal L with the ignition switch
in the ON position.
CHARGE lamp should light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO "WORK FLOW".
NG
>> Check the following.
• 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• CHARGE lamp
• Harness for open or short between combination meter
and fuse
• Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator
WKIA0142E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check Battery Circuit
1.CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION
Check to see if terminal "B" is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal "B" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
2.CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B and
ground using a digital circuit tester.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
• 140A fusible link [letter a, located in fusible link box
(battery)]
• Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link
WKIA1237E
3.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and
Installation". Confirm repair by performing complete
Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
WKIA1238E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Check Voltage Regulator Circuit
Revision: August 2007
SC-22
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT CONNECTION
A
Check to see if terminal "S" is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal "S" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
B
2.CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
C
Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S and
ground using a digital circuit tester.
D
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
• 10A fuse (No. 26, located in fuse and fusible link box)
• Harness for open or short between generator and fuse
E
F
WKIA0145E
3.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
G
Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm
H
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and
Installation". Confirm repair by performing complete
Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
I
J
WKIA0146E
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
SC
The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following
symptoms occur while generator is operating:
• Excessive voltage is produced.
• No voltage is produced.
Removal and Installation
L
INFOID:0000000001719027
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-16.
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12.
Remove the idler pulley.
Remove the generator adjustable top mount, using power tools.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-23
2008 Quest
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
6. Remove the generator lower bolt and nut, using power tools.
7. Disconnect the generator harness connectors.
8. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools.
9. Remove the generator.
WKIA1239E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the generator and check tension of drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment".
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten B terminal nut carefully.
B terminal nut tightening torque
Revision: August 2007
: 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
SC-24
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
Battery
INFOID:0000000001719028
B
Type
Gr. 24
Capacity (20 HR) minimum
V-AH
12-63
Cold cranking current A
(For reference value)
Starter
INFOID:0000000001719029
D
Mitsubishi
M000T20771ZC
Manufacturer
Type
E
Reduction gear type
System voltage
12V
Terminal voltage
No-load
C
550 @ -18°C (0°F)
F
11V
Current
90A Max.
Revolution
2,800 rpm Min.
Minimum diameter of commutator
28.8 mm
Minimum length of brush
7.0 mm
Brush spring tension
G
H
18.3-24.8 N (1.87-2.53 kg, 4.11-5.58 lb)
Clearance between pinion front edge and
pinion stopper
0.5-2.0 mm
I
Generator
INFOID:0000000001719030
J
TG15C025
Type
Valeo
Nominal rating
12V-130A
Ground polarity
Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied)
1100 rpm
SC
L
More than 27A/1,500 rpm
More than 100A/2,500 rpm
More than 120A/5,000 rpm
Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied)
Regulated output voltage
14.2 - 14.6V @ 25°C
Minimum length of brush
4.4 mm (0.173 in)
Brush spring pressure
M
1.8 - 3.1 N (0.184 - 0.32 kg, 0.40 - 0.70 lbs)
Slip ring minimum outer diameter
N
12.0 mm (.47 in)
Rotor (Field coil) resistance
2.3 ohms
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SC-25
2008 Quest
BODY
SECTION
SE
SEAT
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) .........................................33
Symptom Chart ........................................................33
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection ...............................35
Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection .....................36
Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection ....................37
Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection .....................38
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection .................39
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Inspection ...........................40
Mirror Motor RH Circuit Inspection ..........................42
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection .............................43
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection .........................44
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection ..................45
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection ...................46
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection ...............47
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Inspection .........................48
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Inspection ........................49
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection ..............................51
Reclining Switch Inspection .....................................52
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection ...................53
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection ....................54
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection ....................56
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection ...............56
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover
Switch) Circuit Inspection ........................................58
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror
Switch) Circuit Inspection ........................................59
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit
Inspection ................................................................61
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection ...................61
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection ......62
Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground
Circuit inspection .....................................................63
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection ...........................................................................64
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection ..................65
UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection ........66
Removal and Installation .........................................67
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Work .................................................. 3
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 5
Work Flow ................................................................. 5
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 9
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ...................11
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 11
System Description ................................................. 11
CAN Communication System Description ............... 12
Schematic ............................................................... 13
Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - ..................................... 15
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 23
Driver Seat Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................................ 24
Terminal and Reference Value for Driver Seat
Control Unit ............................................................. 24
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Harness
Connector Terminal Layout ..................................... 26
Terminal and Reference Value for Automatic
Drive Positioner Control Unit ................................... 27
Work Flow ............................................................... 28
Preliminary Check ................................................... 29
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
.... 29
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 29
CONSULT-III Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.) ......... 30
POWER SEAT ................................................... 68
Schematic ................................................................68
Revision: August 2007
SE-1
2008 Quest
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Wiring Diagram - SEAT - ........................................ 69
Seat Cushion .......................................................... 84
Seat Cushion .......................................................... 85
Lifter Motor .............................................................. 85
Slide Motor and Slide Gear ..................................... 86
HEATED SEAT .................................................. 72
Description .............................................................. 72
Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - ..................................... 73
FRONT SEAT .................................................... 75
REAR SEAT ...................................................... 88
Removal and Installation ........................................ 75
Seatback Assembly ................................................ 82
Seatback Assembly ................................................ 84
Revision: August 2007
SE-2
Removal and Installation ......................................... 88
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 89
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000001718757
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for Work
INFOID:0000000001718758
C
D
E
F
G
H
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
SE
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them.
J
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally.
K
• Follow the steps below to clean components.
- Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the
fouled area.
L
Then rub with a soft and dry cloth.
- Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe
the fouled area.
Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub with M
a soft and dry cloth.
• Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline.
• For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-3
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718759
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Locating the noise
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
SIIA0993E
Repairing the cause of noise
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718760
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0191E
Revision: August 2007
SE-4
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
A
INFOID:0000000001718761
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
Customer Interview
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any H
customer's comments; refer to SE-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
SE
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics.The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
K
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces =lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
N
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great affect on noise level.
Duplicate the Noise and Test Drive
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: August 2007
SE-5
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle "twist".
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
Check Related Service Bulletins
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
Locate the Noise and Identify the Root Cause
1.
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to SE-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
Repair the Cause
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02:
15×25mm(0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials, not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
Revision: August 2007
SE-6
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
A
B
Confirm the Repair
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
INFOID:0000000001718762
C
D
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Instrument Panel
E
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
F
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
G
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
H
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harSE
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
J
Center Console
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
K
L
Doors
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Trunk
SE-7
N
O
P
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: August 2007
M
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
Sunroof/Headliner
Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
Overhead Console (Front And Rear)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
Seats
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
Underhood
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: August 2007
SE-8
2008 Quest
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000001718763
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
LAIA0072E
Revision: August 2007
SE-9
2008 Quest
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LAIA0071E
Revision: August 2007
SE-10
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001718764
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
LIIA2458E
1.
2.
A. Fuse block (J/B)
B. Automatic drive positioner control
unit M41, M42 (view with instrument
panel removed)
Pedal adjusting motor E109, E110
3.
A. A/T selector lever
B. A/T device M34
J
4.
5.
A. Door mirror LH D4, D13
Door mirror RH D107, D113
B. Door mirror remote control switch
D10
C. Seat memory switch D5
D. Front door switch LH B8
A. Sliding motor LH B403
Reclining motor LH B404
Lifting motor (front) B405
Lifting motor (rear) B406
B. Power seat switch LH B407
C. Pedal adjusting switch B22
D. Driver seat control unit B401,
B402
(front seat LH view)
6.
A. A-pillar
B. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with
instrument panel removed)
K
System Description
L
M
INFOID:0000000001718765
N
• Refer to Owner's Manual for Automatic Drive Positioner system operating instructions.
• The settings (ON/OFF) of the automatic sliding seat (entry/exiting operation) at entry/exit can be changed as
desired, using the display unit in the center of the instrument panel. The set content is transmitted by CAN
communication, from display control unit to driver seat control unit.
• Using CONSULT-Ill, the seat slide amount at entry/exit setting can be changed.
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-11
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Function
Description
The front seat LH, pedal (accelerator, brake) and door mirrors move to the stored driving position by pushing seat memory switch (1 or 2).
Memory operation
Entry/exiting function
Exiting operation
At exit, the front seat LH moves backward. (exiting position)
Entry operation
At entry, the front seat LH returns from exiting position to the previous driving position
before the exiting operation.
Keyfob interlock operation
Perform a linked memory operation by pressing keyfob unlock button.
NOTE:
• Disconnecting the battery erases the stored memory.
• After connecting the battery, insert the key into the ignition cylinder, turn ignition switch ON→OFF and then operate the front door
switch LH ON (open)→OFF (close)→ON (open)→OFF (close), the entry/exiting function becomes possible.
• After exiting operation is carried out, return operation can be operated.
Auto operation temporary stop
conditions.
When ignition switch is turned to START during seat memory switch operation and return
operation, seat memory switch operation and return operation is stopped.
Auto operation stop conditions.
• When the vehicle speed becomes 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher (memory switch operation
and entry operation).
• When the setting switch, seat memory switch 1 or 2 are pressed.
• When A/T selector lever is in any position other than P.
• When the door mirror switch is operated (when ignition switch turned to ON).
• When power seat switch LH turned ON.
• When pedal adjusting switch turned ON.
• When front seat sliding entry/exiting setting is OFF (entry/exiting operation).
NOTE:
During automatic operation, if the ignition switch is turned ON→START, the automatic operation is suspended. When the ignition switch
returns to ON, it resumes.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of front seat LH or
pedals are detected for T2 or more, status is judged “Output error”.
OPERATED PORTION
T2
Seat sliding
Approx. 0.1 sec.
Seat reclining
Same as above
Seat lifting (Front)
Same as above
Seat lifting (Rear)
Same as above
Pedal adjust
Same as above
CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE
The mode is cancelled when the A/T selector lever is shifted to P position from any other position.
NOTE:
The front seat LH position and pedal adjustment functions (see the following table) operate simultaneously in
the order of priority.
Priority
Function
Priority
Function
1
Seat sliding, (door mirror LH/RH)*
4
Seat lifter-FR
2
Pedal
5
Seat lifter-RR
3
Seat reclining
*: In conjunction with sliding the seat, the door mirrors are positioned.
CAN Communication System Description
INFOID:0000000001718766
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Revision: August 2007
SE-12
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718767
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1791E
Revision: August 2007
SE-13
2008 Quest
P
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1792E
Revision: August 2007
SE-14
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP -
INFOID:0000000001718768
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1793E
Revision: August 2007
SE-15
2008 Quest
P
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1794E
Revision: August 2007
SE-16
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1795E
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-17
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1796E
Revision: August 2007
SE-18
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
ALJWA0040GB
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-19
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1798E
Revision: August 2007
SE-20
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1799E
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-21
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALJWA0041GB
Revision: August 2007
SE-22
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WIWA1801E
P
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718769
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Revision: August 2007
SE-23
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Driver Seat Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718770
LIIA2449E
Terminal and Reference Value for Driver Seat Control Unit
Terminal
Wire
Color
1
R
UART LINE (RX)
3
L
CAN-H
6
LG/R
Ignition switch (START)
Ignition switch (START position)
9
L
Reclining sensor signal
ON (seat reclining motor operation)
Item
Condition
INFOID:0000000001718771
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4813E
—
—
Battery voltage
LIIA2339E
Other than above
10
L/Y
Rear lifting sensor signal
0 or 5
ON (rear lifting motor operation)
SIIA0693J
Other than above
11
12
R/B
O/B
Revision: August 2007
Sliding switch BACKWARD signal
Reclining switch BACKWARD
signal
ON (seat sliding switch BACKWARD operation)
Other than above
ON (seat reclining switch BACKWARD operation)
Other than above
SE-24
0 or 5
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire
Color
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
13
L/B
Front lifting switch DOWN signal
ON (front lifting switch DOWN operation)
0
Other than above
14
G/W
Rear lifting switch DOWN signal
ON (rear lifting switch DOWN operation)
Other than above
15
16
GR
L
Pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD signal
ON (pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD operation)
Other than above
Seat sensor power
—
A
Battery voltage
B
0
Battery voltage
C
0
Battery voltage
D
5
E
17
R/W
UART LINE (TX)
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
F
PIIA4814E
19
P
21
G/Y
CAN-L
A/T device (park position switch)
signal
—
Selector lever in P position
Selector lever in other than P position
G
—
0
H
Battery voltage
SE
24
Y/G
Seat sliding sensor signal
ON (seat sliding motor operation)
J
SIIA0691J
Other than above
K
0 or 5
L
25
R/L
Front lifting sensor signal
ON (front lifting motor operation)
M
SIIA0691J
Other than above.
26
27
28
P/B
G/B
Y/B
Seat sliding switch FORWARD
signal
Seat reclining switch FORWARD
signal
Front lifting switch UP signal
ON (seat sliding switch FORWARD operation)
Other than above
ON (seat reclining switch FORWARD operation)
Other than above
ON (front lifting switch UP operation)
Other than above
29
R/W
Rear lifting switch UP signal
ON (rear lifting switch UP operation)
Other than above
Revision: August 2007
SE-25
0 or 5
N
0
Battery voltage
O
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
2008 Quest
P
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire
Color
30
V
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ON (pedal adjusting switch FORWARD operation)
0
Item
Pedal adjusting switch FORWARD signal
Other than above
Battery voltage
31
Y
Sensor ground
—
0
32
B
Ground
—
0
33
W
Battery power supply (PTC)
—
Battery voltage
35
R
Sliding motor FORWARD output
signal
Sliding switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated)
Battery voltage
36
37
38
39
R/W
Y/B
L
L/W
40
Y/R
42
G
44
45
48
G/W
Y
B
Reclining motor FORWARD output signal
Front lifting motor DOWN output
signal
Rear lifting motor UP output signal
Rear lifting motor DOWN output
signal
Other than above
Reclining switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Front lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Rear lifting switch UP operation
(Motor operated)
Other than above
Rear lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Battery power supply
Sliding motor BACKWARD output signal
Reclining motor BACKWARD
output signal
Front lifting motor UP output signal
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
—
Battery voltage
Sliding switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated)
Battery voltage
Other than above
Reclining switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Front lifting switch UP operation
(Motor operated)
Other than above
Ground
—
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
0
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
INFOID:0000000001718772
LIIA2449E
Revision: August 2007
SE-26
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal and Reference Value for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
INFOID:0000000001718773
A
Terminal
Wire Color
2
L/R
Item
Changeover switch RH signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Changeover switch in RH position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in UP position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in LEFT position
0
B
C
3
Y/B
Mirror switch UP signal
4
G/B
Mirror switch LEFT signal
5
R/B
Mirror sensor (RH vertical) signal
Mirror motor RH is UP or DOWN operation
Changes between 3.5 (close to
peak) 0.5 (close to valley)
6
L/Y
Mirror sensor (LH vertical) signal
Mirror motor LH is UP or DOWN operation
Changes between 3.5 (close to
peak) 0.5 (close to valley)
8
W/R
Pedal sensor input signal
9
LG/B
Seat memory switch 1 signal
Other than above
D
5
Pedal position front end
0.5
Pedal position rear end
4.5
Memory switch 1 ON
0
Memory switch 1 OFF
5
E
F
G
H
10
R
UART LINE (TX)
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
SE
PIIA4813E
J
12
GR/L
Seat memory switch indicator1 signal
Memory switch 1 ON
1
Memory switch 1 OFF
Battery voltage
13
Y
Seat memory switch indicator2 signal
Memory switch 2 ON
1
Memory switch 2 OFF
Battery voltage
14
GR/R
15
V/W
Mirror motor RH UP signal
Mirror motor RH LEFT signal
Mirror motor LH DOWN signal
16
O
Mirror motor LH RIGHT signal
Mirror motor RH UP operation
Other than above
Mirror motor RH LEFT operation
Other than above
Mirror motor LH DOWN operation
Other than above
Mirror motor LH RIGHT operation
1.7 - Battery voltage
0
L
1.7 - Battery voltage
0
1.7 - Battery voltage
1.7 - Battery voltage
Other than above
0
Changeover switch in LH position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in DOWN position
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch in RIGHT position
0
Other than above
5
Y/R
Changeover switch LH signal
19
L/B
Mirror switch DOWN signal
20
V
Mirror switch RIGHT signal
21
L/W
Mirror sensor (RH horizontal)
signal
Mirror motor RH is LEFT or RIGHT
operation
Changes between 3.5 (close to left
edge) 0.5 (close to right edge)
22
G
Mirror sensor (LH horizontal)
signal
Mirror motor LH is LEFT or RIGHT
operation
Changes between 3.5 (close to
right edge) 0.5 (close to left edge)
SE-27
M
0
18
Revision: August 2007
K
N
O
P
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminal
Wire Color
24
G/W
Seat set switch signal
25
P/L
Seat memory switch 2 signal
26
R/W
UART LINE (RX)
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Set switch 1 ON
0
Set switch 1 OFF
5
Memory switch 2 ON
0
Memory switch 2 OFF
5
Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4814E
Mirror motor RH DOWN signal
30
SB
Mirror motor RH RIGHT signal
31
R/Y
Mirror motor LH UP signal
32
BR
Mirror motor LH LEFT signal
33
W/L
Sensor power supply
34
BR/Y
Battery power supply
37
G
39
W
40
B/W
41
V
45
48
G/O
B
Pedal adjusting motor FORWARD signal
Mirror motor RH DOWN operation
Other than above
Mirror motor RH RIGHT operation
Other than above
Mirror motor LH UP operation
Other than above
Mirror motor LH LEFT operation
Other than above
5.
6.
7.
8.
0
1.7 - Battery voltage
0
1.7 - Battery voltage
0
1.7 - Battery voltage
0
—
5
—
Battery voltage
Pedal adjusting motor FORWARD
operation (Motor operated)
Other than above
Battery voltage
0
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Ground
—
0
—
0
Pedal adjusting motor BACKWARD
operation (Motor operated)
Battery voltage
Sensor ground
Pedal adjusting motor BACKWARD signal
Other than above
Ground
—
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7 - Battery voltage
0
0
INFOID:0000000001718774
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the system description. Refer to SE-11, "System Description".
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to SE-29, "Preliminary Check".
Check the self-diagnosis results using CONSULT-III. Refer to SE-30, "CONSULT-III Function (AUTO
DRIVE POS.)".
Repair or replace depending on the self-diagnostic results.
Based on the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to SE-33,
"Symptom Chart".
Does the automatic drive positioner system operate normally?
If it is normal, GO TO 8.
If it is not normal, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
Revision: August 2007
SE-28
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001718775
A
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION
The settings of the automatic drive positioner system can be changed using CONSULT-III and the display in
the center of the instrument panel.
B
×: Applicable –: Not applicable
Setting item
CONSULT–III
(WORK SUPPORT)
Content
Sliding Front Seat
When Entering/Exiting
Vehicle
Default
setting
Factory
setting
×
×
—
—
—
—
40mm
The distance at exiting operation can be selected from the
following 3 modes.
SEAT SLIDE
VOLUME SET
Display unit
80mm
—
150mm
The seat sliding and return at
entry/exit can be selected: ON
(operated)–OFF (not operated)
ON
ON: Indicator lamp ON
—
×
OFF
OFF: Indicator lamp OFF
×
—
C
D
E
F
Reset custom settings*
Returns all settings to default.
—
Default: Setting button
ON
—
—
*: Setting of sliding front seat for entry/exit of vehicle is ON at factory-shipment. But if custom settings are reset, setting turns OFF.
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718776
H
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" .
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718777
SE
1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check if any of the following fuses for the driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit are
blown.
Unit
Power source
G
J
Fuse No.
Driver seat control unit
START power supply
9 (10A)
Driver seat control unit and automatic
drive positioner control unit
Battery power supply
17 (10A)
Battery power supply
m (40A)
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3.
L
M
2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
N
O
Connector
Terminals
Power
source
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(+)
(-)
B402
33, 40
Ground
Battery
power
supply
Ignition
switch
OFF
Battery
voltage
B401
6
Ground
START
power
supply
Ignition
switch
START
Battery
voltage
P
LIIA1897E
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
SE-29
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between the driver seat control unit connectors
B401 terminal 32, B402 terminal 48 and ground.
32 - Ground
48 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Driver seat control unit circuit check is OK. Check the
automatic drive positioner control unit. GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
PIIA4542E
4.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 34, 39 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
Ignition switch
OFF
Battery voltage
Ground
Ignition switch
OFF
Battery voltage
(+)
(-)
34
39
M42
PIIA4543E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 40, 48 and ground.
40 - Ground
48 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Automatic drive positioner control unit circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
PIIA4544E
CONSULT-III Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)
INFOID:0000000001718778
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
AUTO DRIVE POS.
diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the driver seat
control unit for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals
are received from the driver seat control unit and received data is displayed.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Revision: August 2007
Displays driver seat control unit self-diagnosis results.
Displays driver seat control unit input/output data in real time.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
SE-30
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AUTO DRIVE POS.
diagnostic mode
Description
ACTIVE TEST
A
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
ECU PART NUMBER
Driver seat control unit part number can be read.
B
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
DISPLAY ITEM LIST
C
CONSULT-III display
Item
Malfunction is detected when...
Reference
page
CAN COMM CIRC
[U1000]
CAN communication
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
LAN-3
D
SEAT SLIDE
[B2112]
Seat slide motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any
motor operations of seat slide is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”.
SE-35
SE-43
E
SEAT RECLINING
[B2113]
Seat reclining motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any
motor operations of seat reclining is detected for 0.1 second or more,
status is judged “Output error”.
SE-36
SE-44
SEAT LIFTER FR
[B2114]
Seat lifting FR motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any
motor operations of seat lifting FR is detected for 0.1 second or more,
status is judged “Output error”.
SE-37
SE-45
Seat lifting RR motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any
motor operations of seat lifting RR is detected for 0.1 second or more,
status is judged “Output error”.
SE-38
SE-46
Pedal adjust motor
When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if motor operations of seat pedal is detected for 0.1 second or more, status
is judged “Output error”.
SE-39
SE-47
ADJ PEDAL SENSOR
[B2120]
Pedal adjust sensor
When pedal adjust sensor detects 0.5V or lower, or 4.5V or higher, for
0.5 seconds or more.
SE-47
DETENT SW
[B2126]
Park SW
With the A/T selector lever in P position (park position switch OFF), if
the vehicle speed of 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher was input the park position switch input system is judged malfunctioning.
SE-64
UART COMM
[B2128]
UART communication
Malfunction is detected in UART communication.
SE-66
SEAT LIFTER RR
[B2115]
ADJ PEDAL MOTOR
[B2117]
SE
J
DATA MONITOR
CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR
Monitor item [UNIT]
Revision: August 2007
Contents
[OK/NG]
When CAN communication circuit is malfunctioning, it displays “NG”.
SE-31
G
H
NOTE:
• If park switch error is detected, manual adjustable pedal operation cannot be performed when ignition switch
turns ON.
• The displays of CAN communication and detection switch display error detecting condition from memory
erase to the present on “TIME”.
- If error is detected in the past and present error is detected, “CRNT” is displayed.
- If error is detected in the past and present error is not detected, “PAST” is displayed.
- If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”.
• Any items other than CAN communication and park switch count error detection frequency occurred after
erase history to “1-127”.
- If error was detected in the past, error detection frequency from memory erase to the present is displayed on
“TIME”.
- If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”.
- Can clear the detected memory.
Normal: Clear memory in normal condition, history is erased and nothing is displayed on “TIME”.
Error: Clear memory in error condition, error is detected again and “1” is displayed on “TIME”.
INITIAL DIAG
F
2008 Quest
K
L
M
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item [UNIT]
Contents
TRANSMIT DIAG
[OK/UNKWN]
BCM
[OK/UNKWN]
METER/M&A
[OK/UNKWN]
ECM
[OK/UNKWN]
Displays [OK/UNKWN] condition of the CAN communication judged by each signal
input.
SELECTIOM FROM MENU
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
SLIDE SW-FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal is displayed.
SLIDE SW-RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal is displayed.
RECLN SW-FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed.
RECLN SW-RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed.
LIFT FR SW-UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed.
LIFT FR SW-DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW-UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW-DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW-UP
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (UP) signal is displayed.
MIR CON SW-DN
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (DOWN) signal
is displayed.
MIR CON SW-RH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (RIGHT) signal
is displayed.
MIR CON SW-LH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (LEFT) signal s
displayed.
MIR CHNG SW-R
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to
RIGHT) signal is displayed.
MIR CHNG SW-L
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to
LEFT) signal is displayed.
SET SW
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal is displayed.
PEDAL SW-FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (FR) signal is displayed.
PEDAL SW-RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (RR) signal is displayed.
MEMORY SW 1
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal is displayed.
MEMORY SW 2
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal is displayed.
DETENT SW
“ON/OFF”
The A/Tselector lever position “OFF (P position)/ON (other than P position)” judged
from the park switch signal is displayed.
STARTER SW
“ON/OFF”
Ignition key switch ON (START, ON)/OFF (ignition switch IGN, ACC, or OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal is displayed.
SLIDE PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves BACKWARD, the
value increases. If it moves FORWARD, the value decreases.
RECLN PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves BACKWARD, the
value increases. If it moves FORWARD, the value decreases.
LIFT FR PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value
increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
LIFT RR PULSE
—
Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value
increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
MIR/SEN RH R-L
“V”
Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed.
MIR/SEN RH U-D
“V”
Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH R-L
“V”
Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed.
Revision: August 2007
SE-32
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
A
MIR/SEN LH U-D
“V”
Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed.
PEDAL SEN
“V”
The pedal position (voltage) judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed.
B
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
During vehicle driving, do not perform active test.
NOTE:
If active test is performed, reset automatic drive positioner seat memory after performing work.
DISPLAY ITEM LIST
Test item
C
D
Description
SEAT SLIDE
The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
SEAT RECLINING
The reclining motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
SEAT LIFTER FR
The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
SEAT LIFTER RR
The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
PEDAL MOTOR
The pedal adjusting motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
MEMORY SW INDCTR
The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal.
MIRROR MOTOR RH
The door mirror RH motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the
drive signal.
MIRROR MOTOR LH
The door mirrorLH motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the
drive signal.
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
E
F
SE
1. Connect to CONSULT-III, and select “AUTO DRIVE POS” on the “SELECT DIAG SYSTEM” screen.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Check U1000 displayed in self-diagnostic results.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001718780
Symptom
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Preliminary check
A part of seat system does not operate (both automatically and manually).
Revision: August 2007
H
INFOID:0000000003303103
1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
Only setting change function cannot be set with display.
G
2. CAN communication inspection using CONSULT-III (selfdiagnosis)
Refer to page
K
L
M
SE-29
LAN-9, "SelfDiagnosis"
3. If the above systems are normal, check display system
AV-150
1. Sliding motor circuit inspection
SE-35
2. Reclining motor circuit inspection
SE-36
3. Lifting motor (front) circuit inspection
SE-37
4. Lifting motor (rear) circuit inspection
SE-38
5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
SE-33
J
2008 Quest
N
O
P
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate
(both automatically and manually).
A part of seat system does not operate (only automatic
operation).
A part of door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation).
All of the automatic operations do not operate.
A part of seat system does not operate (only manual operation).
A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate
(only manual operation).
Automatic drive positioner system does not operate (only
memory switch operation).
Diagnoses/service procedure
Refer to page
1. Pedal adjusting motor circuit inspection
SE-39
2. Mirror motor LH circuit check
SE-40
3. Mirror motor RH circuit check
SE-42
4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit.
SE-11
1. Sliding sensor circuit inspection
SE-43
2. Reclining sensor circuit inspection
SE-44
3. Lifting sensor (front) circuit inspection
SE-45
4. Lifting sensor (rear) circuit inspection
SE-46
5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Mirror sensor LH circuit check
SE-48
2. Mirror sensor RH circuit check
SE-49
3. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit.
SE-11
1. A/T device (park position switch) circuit inspection
SE-64
2. UART communication line circuit inspection
SE-66
3. Pedal adjusting sensor circuit inspection
SE-47
4. If all the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit.
SE-11
1. Sliding switch circuit inspection
SE-51
2. Reclining switch circuit inspection
SE-52
3. Lifting switch (front) circuit inspection
SE-53
4. Lifting switch (rear) circuit inspection
SE-54
5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Pedal adjusting switch circuit inspection
SE-56
2. Door mirror remote control switch (change over switch)
circuit inspection
SE-58
3. Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) switching circuit inspection
SE-59
4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic
drive positioner control unit
SE-11
1. Seat memory switch circuit inspection
SE-61
2. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit
SE-11
1. Seat memory indicator lamp circuit inspection
SE-62
Seat memory indicator lamps 1 and 2 do not illuminate.
2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat
control unit.
SE-11
The entry/exiting does not operate when door is opened
and closed.
(entry/exiting operates with key switch)
1. Front door switch circuit inspection
SE-65
Door mirror system does not operate (only manual operation).
1. Door mirror remote control switch ground circuit inspection
SE-61
Door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation).
1. Door mirror sensor power supply and ground circuit inspection
SE-63
Seat system does not operate (only manual operation).
1. Power seat switch ground circuit inspection
SE-56
Revision: August 2007
2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the BCM.
SE-34
BCS-18
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Symptom
Reverse tilt mirrors do not operate.
Diagnoses/service procedure
Refer to page
1. Door mirror remote control switch is not in L or R position.
—
2. CAN communication inspection using CONSULT-III (selfdiagnosis)
LAN-9, "SelfDiagnosis"
3. Door mirror sensor power supply and ground circuit inspection
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection
A
B
SE-63
INFOID:0000000001718781
C
Check the following.
• Operation malfunction caused by sliding rail deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials
• Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the sliding motor LH or sliding rail connector
rod
• Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
D
1.CHECK SEAT SLIDING MECHANISM
E
F
2.CHECK FUNCTION
G
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “SEAT SLIDE” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
SEAT SLIDE
H
Description
The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding motor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SE
J
3.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
35 - 4
42 - 6
4.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 terminals 35, 42 and sliding motor connector B403 terminals 4, 6.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 terminals 35, 42 and ground.
35 - Ground
42 - Ground
L
M
LIIA0696E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
O
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
P
4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
N
SE-35
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Connect the driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Condition
(-)
Sliding switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
35
B402
Ground
42
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
Sliding switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4801E
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75.
Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718782
1.CHECK SEAT RECLINING MECHANISM
Check the following.
• Operation malfunction caused by an interference with the center pillar or center console
• Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “SEAT RECLINING” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
Description
SEAT RECLINING
The reclining motor LH is activated by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Reclining motor LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 (A) terminals 36, 44 and reclining motor LH connector
B404 (B) terminals 3, 4.
36 - 4
44 - 3
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 (A) terminals 36, 44 and ground.
36 - Ground
44 - Ground
LIIA2460E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: August 2007
SE-36
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
A
Connect the driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(-)
Reclining switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
36
B402
Ground
44
B
C
Battery voltage
D
Other than above
0
Reclining switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4802E
Battery voltage
Other than above
E
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75.
Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection
F
INFOID:0000000001718783
G
1.CHECK FRONT END SEAT LIFTING MECHANISM
Check the following.
• Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials
• Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (front) or lead screws
• Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER FR” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
Description
SEAT LIFTER FR
The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
4.
M
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front).
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 terminals 37, 45 and lifting motor (front) connector B405
terminals 4, 6.
O
P
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 terminals 37, 45 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
J
L
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
37 - 6
45 - 4
SE
K
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting motor (front) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
H
SE-37
LIIA0698E
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
37 - Ground
45 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front).
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Condition
(-)
Lifting switch (front) ON
(DOWN operation)
37
B402
Ground
45
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Other than above
Llifting switch (front) ON
(UP operation)
0
PIIA4805E
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75.
Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718784
1.CHECK REAR SEAT LIFTING MECHANISM
Check the following.
• Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials
• Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (rear) or lead screws
• Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER RR” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
SEAT LIFTER RR
Description
The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting motor (rear) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
SE-38
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear).
3. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B402 terminals 38, 39 and lifting motor (rear) connector B406
terminals 4, 6.
38 - 6
39 - 4
4.
A
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit B402 terminals
38, 39 and ground.
38 - Ground
39 - Ground
C
LIIA0699E
D
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
F
1.
2.
Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear).
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(UP operation)
38
B402
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(-)
Ground
39
G
H
Battery voltage
SE
Other than above
0
PIIA4804E
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(DOWN operation)
Battery voltage
Other than above
J
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75.
K
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718785
L
Check the following.
• Operation malfunction caused by pedal adjusting mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials
• Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again.
M
1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MECHANISM
2.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “ADJ PEDAL MOTOR” in ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
ADJ PEDAL MOTOR
Description
The pedal adjusting motor is activated by receiving the
drive signal.
SE-39
O
P
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
Revision: August 2007
N
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting motor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal
adjusting motor.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 37, 45 and pedal adjusting motor connector E109 terminals 4, 5.
37 - 5
45 - 4
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 37, 45 and ground.
37 - Ground
45 - Ground
LIIA0700E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal
adjusting motor.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
37
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (FORWARD operation)
Battery voltage
PIIA4806E
M42
Ground
45
Other than above
0
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (BACKWARD operation)
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting motor. Refer to SE-67, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718786
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH MECHANISM
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR LH” in the ACTIVE TEST.
Revision: August 2007
SE-40
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Test item
Description
MIRROR MOTOR LH
A
The mirror motor LH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and
LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal.
B
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror motor LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR LH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 16, 31, 32 and door mirror LH connector D13 terminals 9, 10, 11.
E
F
16 - 11
31 - 10
32 - 9
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
G
LIIA0701E
4.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 16, 31, 32 and ground.
16 - Ground
31 - Ground
32 - Ground
H
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
SE
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
4.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
K
Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
10
D13
9
11
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Mirror motor is operated UP
1.7 - Battery voltage
Other than above
Ground
Mirror motor is operated
LEFT
M
0
N
LIIA0703E
1.7 - Battery voltage
Other than above
Mirror motor is operated
DOWN or RIGHT
L
0
O
1.7 - Battery voltage
Other than above
P
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: August 2007
SE-41
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Mirror Motor RH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718787
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH MECHANISM
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
2.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR RH” in the ACTIVE TEST.
Test item
Description
MIRROR MOTOR RH
The mirror motor RH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and
LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror motor RH circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 14, 15, 30 and door mirror RH connector D113 terminals 9, 10, 11.
14 - 10
15 - 9
30 - 11
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA0704E
4.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 14, 15, 30 and ground.
14 - Ground
15 - Ground
30 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
LIIA0705E
Revision: August 2007
SE-42
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Mirror motor is operated UP
1.7 - Battery
voltage
(-)
10
Other than above
D113
9
Ground
B
0
Mirror motor is operated
LEFT
1.7 - Battery
voltage
Other than above
C
0
Mirror motor is operated
DOWN or RIGHT
11
A
1.7 - Battery
voltage
Other than above
D
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror motor RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
E
INFOID:0000000001718788
1.CHECK FUNCTION
F
G
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “SLIDE PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes.
H
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
SLIDE PULSE
1.
2.
—
Contents
The seat sliding position (pulse) judged
from the sliding sensor signal is displayed
SE
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
J
K
Connector
B401
Terminals
(+)
(-)
24
Ground
Condition
Signal
L
M
Sliding
motor operation
PIIA4556E
N
SIIA0691J
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
SE-43
P
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding motor
LH connector.
2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 16, 24, 31 and sliding motor B403 terminals 1, 2,
3.
16 - 3
24 - 2
31 - 1
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit B401 terminals
16, 24, 31 and ground.
16 - Ground
24 - Ground
31 - Ground
LIIA0706E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718789
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “RECLN PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
RECLN PULSE
1.
2.
—
Contents
The seat reclining position (pulse) judged
from the reclining sensor is displayed
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
B401
Terminals
(+)
(-)
9
Ground
Condition
Signal
Reclining
motor operation
PIIA4559E
LIIA2339E
OK or NG
OK
>> Reclining sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
SE-44
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH.
2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 9, 31 and reclining motor LH connector B404 terminals 1, 2.
9-2
31 - 1
3.
A
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 9, 31 and ground.
9 - Ground
31 - Ground
C
LIIA2461E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718790
F
1.CHECK FUNCTION
G
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “LIFT FR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes.
H
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
LIFT FR PULSE
1.
2.
—
Contents
The front lifting position (pulse) judged from
the lifting sensor (front) is displayed
SE
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
J
K
Condition
Signal
L
B401
25
Ground
Lifting motor (front)
operation
PIIA4561E
M
N
SIIA0691J
OK or NG
OK
>> Front lifting sensor is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK FRONT LIFTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-45
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front).
2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 16, 25, 31 and lifting motor (front) connector
B405 terminals 1, 2, 3.
16 - 3
25 - 2
31 - 1
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 16, 25, 31 and ground.
16 - Ground
25 - Ground
31 - Ground
LIIA0708E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718791
1.CHECK REAR END LIFTING SENSOR INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
Check operation with “LIFT RR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure pulse changes.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
LIFT RR PULSE
1.
2.
—
Contents
The rear lifting position (pulse) judged from
the lifting sensor (rear) is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
B401
Terminals
(+)
(-)
10
Ground
Condition
Signal
Lifting motor (rear)
operation
PIIA4563E
SIIA0691J
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear lifting sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR LIFTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
SE-46
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear).
2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 10, 16, 31 and lifting motor (rear) connector
B406 terminals 1, 2, 3.
10 - 2
16 - 3
31 - 1
3.
A
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 10, 16, 31 and ground.
C
LIIA0709E
D
10 - Ground
16 - Ground
31 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-75.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection
F
INFOID:0000000001718792
G
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Operate the pedal adjusting switch with “PEDAL SEN” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the voltage
changes.
Contents
SE
The pedal adjusting position (voltage)
judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is
displayed.
J
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
PEDAL SEN
1.
2.
“V”
H
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
K
L
Connector
M41
Terminals
(+)
8
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Pedal front end
position
0.5
Pedal back end
position
4.5
M
PIIA4569E
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting sensor circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
N
O
2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-47
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal
adjusting sensor.
2. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner connector
M41, M42 terminals 8, 33, 41 and pedal adjusting sensor connector E110 terminals 1, 2, 3.
8-2
33 - 1
41 - 3
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41, M42 terminals 8, 33, 41 and ground.
8 - Ground
33 - Ground
41 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace pedal adjusting motor. Refer to SE-67,
"Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0710E
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718793
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction in memory control
NOTE:
If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR INSPECTION
With CONSULT-III
Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SEN LH R-L, MIR/SEN LH U-D" in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
1.
2.
Contents
MIR/SEN LH R-L
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor
(LH/RH) is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH U-D
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor
(UP/DOWN) is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
7
D4
Ground
6
Revision: August 2007
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
When motor is
operated LEFT
or RIGHT
Changes between
3.5 (close to right edge) –
0.5 (close to left edge)
When motor is
operated UP or
DOWN
Changes between
3.5 (close to peak) –
0.5 (close to valley)
SE-48
LIIA1616E
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror sensor LH is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
A
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror LH connector
D2 terminals 5, 8.
C
D
33 - 5
41 - 8
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
E
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and ground.
33 - Ground
41 - Ground
LIIA1617E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2
1.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 6, 22 and door mirror LH connector D4
terminals 6, 7.
6-6
22 - 7
2.
H
SE
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
J
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 6, 22 and ground.
K
6 - Ground
22 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1618E
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Inspection
M
INFOID:0000000001718794
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION
N
Check the following items.
Operation malfunction in memory control
NOTE:
If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again.
2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR INSPECTION
With CONSULT-III
Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SEN RH R-L, MIR/SEN RH U-D" in the DATA MONITOR.
Revision: August 2007
SE-49
2008 Quest
O
P
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
1.
2.
Contents
MIR/SEN RH R-L
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (LH/RH) is displayed.
MIR/SEN RH U-D
“V”
Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
7
D107
Ground
6
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
When motor is
operated LEFT
or RIGHT
Changes between
3.5 (close to left edge) –
0.5 (close to right edge)
When motor is
operated UP or
DOWN
Changes between
3.5 (close to peak) –
0.5 (close to valley)
LIIA0714E
OK or NG
OK
>> Mirror sensor RH is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror RH connector
D107 terminals 5, 8.
33 - 5
41 - 8
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and ground.
33 - Ground
41 - Ground
LIIA0715E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2
1.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 5, 21 and door mirror RH connector
D107 terminals 6, 7.
5-6
21 - 7
2.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 5, 21 and ground.
5 - Ground
21 - Ground
Revision: August 2007
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
SE-50
LIIA0716E
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection
A
INFOID:0000000001718795
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
With “SLIDE SW-FR, SLIDE SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the sliding switch to check ON/OFF
operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
D
Contents
SLIDE SW-FR
"ON/OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding
switch (FR) signal is displayed.
SLIDE SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding
switch (RR) signal is displayed.
E
F
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminal
(+)
(-)
11
B401
Ground
26
Condition
Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Sliding switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
0
Other than above
Battery voltage
Sliding switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
Other than above
G
H
SE
PIIA4577E
J
0
Battery voltage
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Sliding switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and power seat
switch LH connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 11, 26 and power seat switch LH connector
B407 terminals 1, 7.
11 - 7
26 - 1
3.
M
N
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 11, 26 and ground.
11 - Ground
26 - Ground
O
LIIA0717E
P
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH
Revision: August 2007
C
SE-51
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows.
Terminal
Condition
7
3
1
Continuity
Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
LIIA2193E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75.
Reclining Switch Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718796
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
With “RECLN SW-FR, RECLN SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the reclining switch to check ON/
OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
1.
2.
Contents
RECLN SW-FR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed.
RECLN SW-RR
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
12
B401
Ground
27
Condition
Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Reclining switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
0
Other than above
Reclining switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
Other than above
Battery voltage
PIIA4580E
0
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Reclining switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
SE-52
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH.
2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 12, 27 and power seat switch LH connector
B407 terminals 9, 10.
12 - 9
27 - 10
3.
A
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 12, 27 and ground.
12 - Ground
27 - Ground
C
LIIA0719E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
E
3.RECLINING SWITCH INSPECTION
F
Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows.
G
Terminal
9
3
10
Condition
Continuity
Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Reclining switch ON (FORWARD
operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
H
SE
LIIA2194E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75.
J
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718797
K
With CONSULT-III
With “LIFT FR SW-UP, LIFT FR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the lifting switch (front) to check
ON/OFF operation.
L
1.CHECK FUNCTION
M
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
LIFT FR SW-DN
"ON/OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter
switch (DOWN) signal is displayed.
LIFT RR SW-UP
"ON/OFF"
ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter
switch (UP) signal is displayed.
N
O
Without CONSULT-III
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-53
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(-)
Lifting switch (front) ON
(DOWN operation)
13
B401
Ground
28
0
Other than above
Battery voltage
PIIA4583E
Lifting switch (front) ON
(UP operation)
0
Other than above
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Lifting switch (front) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 13, 28 and power seat switch LH connector
B407 terminals 5, 6.
13 - 5
28 - 6
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 13, 28 and ground
13 - Ground
28 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0721E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows.
Terminals
Condition
5
3
6
Continuity
Lifting switch (front) ON
(DOWN operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Lifting switch (front) ON
(UP operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
LIIA2195E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75.
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718798
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
SE-54
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
With “LIFT RR SW-UP, LIFT RR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the rear lifting switch to check ON/
OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged
from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed.
B
LIFT RR SW-UP
LIFT RR SW-DN
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged
from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is
displayed.
C
D
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
14
B401
Ground
29
A
Condition
Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(DOWN operation)
0
Other than above
F
G
Battery voltage
PIIA4586E
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(UP operation)
Other than above
E
0
H
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear lifting switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SE
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
14 - 8
29 - 2
3.
J
Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 14, 29 and power seat switch connector B407
terminals 2, 8.
K
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
L
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 14, 29 and ground.
M
14 - Ground
29 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0723E
N
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-55
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows.
Terminals
Condition
8
3
2
Continuity
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(DOWN operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Lifting switch (rear) ON
(UP operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
LIIA2196E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75.
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718799
1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between power seat switch LH connector B407 terminal 3 and ground.
3 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0725E
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718800
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
With “PEDAL SW-FR, PEDAL SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the pedal adjusting switch to check
ON/OFF operation.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
1.
2.
Contents
PEDAL SW-FR
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status
judged from the pedal adjusting switch
(FR) signal is displayed.
PEDAL SW-RR
“ON/OFF”
Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status
judged from the pedal adjusting switch
(RR) signal is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and
ground.
PIIA4591E
Revision: August 2007
SE-56
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
Connector
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V) (Approx.)
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (BACKWARD operation)
0
(-)
15
B401
Ground
30
Other than above
B
Battery voltage
C
Pedal adjusting switch
ON (FORWARD operation)
Other than above
A
0
D
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Pedal adjusting switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and pedal adjusting switch.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 15, 30 and pedal adjusting switch connector B22
terminals 2, 3.
15 - 3
30 - 2
3.
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 15, 30 and ground.
15 - Ground
30 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0726E
SE
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH
K
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch terminals as follows.
Terminals
Condition
2
4
3
L
Continuity
Pedal adjusting switch ON
(BACKWARD operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
Pedal adjusting switch ON
(FORWARD operation)
Yes
Other than above
No
M
N
LIIA0727E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace pedal adjusting switch.
O
4.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-57
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 4 and ground.
4 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0728E
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718801
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check the operation on “MIR CHNG SW-R” or “MIR CHNG SW-L" in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
1.
2.
Contents
MIR CHNG SW-R
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door
mirror remote control switch (switching
to RIGHT) signal is displayed.
MIR CHNG SW-L
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door
mirror remote control switch (switching
to LEFT) signal is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
2
M41
Ground
18
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Changeover switch
RIGHT position
0
Other than above
5
Changeover switch
LEFT position
0
Other than above
5
PIIA4767E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door mirror remote control switch (changeover switch) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch .
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 (A) terminals 2, 18 and door mirror remote control switch connector D10 (B) terminals 5, 6.
2-5
18 - 6
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 (A) terminals 2, 18 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
SE-58
LIIA2197E
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2 - Ground
18 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
A
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
B
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH)
C
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals as follows.
D
Terminals
Condition
5
7
6
Continuity
Changeover switch
RIGHT position
Yes
Other than above
No
Changeover switch LEFT
position
Yes
Other than above
No
E
F
LIIA2198E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
G
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718802
H
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH) SIGNAL
SE
With CONSULT-III
Check the operation on “MIR CON SW-UP/DN” and “MIR CON SW-RH/LH” in the DATA MONITOR.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (UP) signal is
displayed.
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (DOWN) signal
is displayed.
MIR CON SW-RH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (RIGHT) signal
is displayed.
MIR CON SW-LH
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (LEFT) signal is
displayed.
MIR CON SW-UP
MIR CON SW-DN
J
Contents
K
L
M
N
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
2. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(-)
O
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
P
PIIA4771E
Revision: August 2007
SE-59
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3
4
M41
Ground
19
20
Mirror switch UP operation
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch LEFT operation
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch DOWN operation
0
Other than above
5
Mirror switch RIGHT operation
0
Other than above
5
OK or NG
OK
>> Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 (A) terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and door mirror remote
control switch connector D10 (B) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4.
3-2
4-4
19 - 1
20 - 3
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
LIIA2199E
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 (A) terminals 3, 4, 19, 20
and ground.
3 - Ground
4 - Ground
19 - Ground
20 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH)
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals as follows.
Terminals
3
4
7
2
1
Condition
Continuity
Mirror switch RIGHT operation
Yes
Other than above
No
Mirror switch LEFT operation
Yes
Other than above
No
Mirror switch UP operation
Yes
Other than above
No
Mirror switch DOWN operation
Yes
Other than above
No
LIIA2200E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
Revision: August 2007
SE-60
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718803
A
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch.
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminal 7 and ground.
B
C
7 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
LIIA2201E
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH)
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals as follows.
Terminals
Condition
5
7
6
E
F
Continuity
Changeover switch
RIGHT position
Yes
Other than above
No
Changeover switch LEFT
position
Yes
Other than above
No
G
H
LIIA2198E
SE
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
J
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718804
1.CHECK FUNCTION
K
With CONSULT-III
With “SET SW, MEMORY SW 1, MEMORY SW 2” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the switch to check ON/
OFF operation.
L
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
Contents
MEMORY SW 1
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat
memory switch 1 signal is displayed.
MEMORY SW 2
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the seat
memory switch 2 signal is displayed.
“ON/OFF”
ON/OFF status judged from the setting
switch signal is displayed.
SET SW
M
N
O
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat memory switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
P
2.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
Revision: August 2007
SE-61
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect seat memory switch.
3. Operate the setting switch and seat memory switch.
4. Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals as follows.
Terminal
Condition
1
2
4
3
Continuity
Memory switch 1: ON
Yes
Memory switch 1: OFF
No
Memory switch 2: ON
Yes
Memory switch 2: OFF
No
Set switch: ON
Yes
Set switch: OFF
No
PIIA4575E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 9, 24, 25 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 1, 2, 3.
9-1
24 - 3
25 - 2
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 9, 24, 25 and ground.
9 - Ground
24 - Ground
25 - Ground
PIIA4576E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between seat memory switch D5 terminal 4 and
ground.
4 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
PIIA4821E
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718805
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
With “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in ACTIVE TEST, check operation.
Revision: August 2007
SE-62
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Test item
Description
MEMORY SW INDCTR
A
The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the
drive signal.
B
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat memory switch indicator lamp circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat memory switch.
Check voltage between seat memory switch connector D5 terminal 5 and ground.
5 - Ground
E
: Battery voltage
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
PIIA4595E
3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
12 - 6
13 - 7
3.
H
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 12, 13 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 6, 7.
SE
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
J
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M41 terminals 12, 13 and ground.
K
12 - Ground
13 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA0735E
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR SIGNAL
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 12, 13 and ground.
12 - Ground
13 - Ground
N
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
O
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
NG
>> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal
and Installation".
P
PIIA4597E
Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection
INFOID:0000000001718806
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
Revision: August 2007
SE-63
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror (LH and RH).
2. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror LH connector
D4 LH, D107 RH terminals 5, 8.
33 - 5
41 - 8
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and ground.
33 - Ground
41 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0736E
2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror
LH.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminal 33 and ground.
33 - Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
LIIA1136E
3.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit
connector M42 terminal 41 and ground.
41 - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
LIIA1135E
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718807
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF.
Revision: August 2007
SE-64
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
DETENT SW
Contents
A
The A/T selector lever position “P position
(OFF)/other than P position (ON)” judged
from the park position switch signal is displayed.
“ON/OFF”
B
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device (park position switch) circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
2.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH) HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T device and driver seat control unit.
Check continuity between A/T device (park position switch) connector M34 (A) terminal 7 and driver seat control unit connector
B401 (B) terminal 21.
7 - 21
4.
E
F
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between A/T device (park position switch) connector M34 (A) terminal 7 and ground.
7 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
G
LIIA2202E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
SE
3.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH)
Check continuity between A/T device (park position switch) terminals
as follows.
Terminals
6
Condition
7
J
Continuity
P position
Yes
Other than
P position
No
K
L
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T device is OK.
NG
>> Replace A/T device.
LIIA2203E
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718808
1.CHECK FUNCTION
N
With CONSULT-III
Touch “DOOR SW DR” on the DATA MONITOR, check ON/OFF operation when the front door is open and
closed.
Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT]
DOOR SW DR
“ON/OFF”
O
Contents
P
Door open (ON)/door closed (OFF) status
judged from the front door switch is displayed.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switch LH circuit is OK.
Revision: August 2007
M
SE-65
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door switch LH.
Check continuity between front door switch LH terminal and
ground part of door switch as follows.
Terminals
1
Condition
Ground
Continuity
With the front door switch
LH pressed
No
With the front door switch
LH released
Yes
WIIA0782E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace front door switch LH.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 47
and front door switch LH connector B8 (B) terminal 1.
47 - 1
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 47
and ground.
47 - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switch LH circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA2489E
UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001718809
1.CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and
ground, with oscilloscope.
Connector
B401
Terminals
(+)
17
(-)
Ground
Condition
Signal
Pedal adjusting
switch ON
(FORWARD or
BACKWARD operation)
PIIA4599E
PIIA4814E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
• When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace driver
seat control unit.
• When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace automatic driver seat control unit.
Revision: August 2007
SE-66
2008 Quest
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2.CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 2
A
Check signal between automatic drive positioner control unit connector ground, with oscilloscope.
B
Connector
M41
Terminals
(+)
10
(-)
Ground
Condition
Signal
C
Pedal adjusting
switch ON
(FORWARD or
BACKWARD operation)
D
PIIA4816E
E
PIIA4813E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
• When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
• When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace driver
seat control unit.
F
G
3.CHECK UART LINE HARNESS
1.
2.
1 - 10
17 - 26
3.
H
Disconnect driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 1, 17 and automatic drive positioner connector
M41 terminals 10, 26.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector
B401 terminals 1, 17 and ground.
1 - Ground
17 - Ground
SE
J
K
PIIA4598E
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
Does the automatic drive positioner operate when the driver seat control unit is exchanged?
N
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver seat control unit.
NG
>> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit.
O
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718810
Refer to ACC-3 and BR-5.
Revision: August 2007
SE-67
2008 Quest
P
POWER SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER SEAT
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718811
WIWA1802E
Revision: August 2007
SE-68
2008 Quest
POWER SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - SEAT -
INFOID:0000000001718812
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
ALJWA0042GB
Revision: August 2007
SE-69
2008 Quest
P
POWER SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ALJWA0043GB
Revision: August 2007
SE-70
2008 Quest
POWER SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
ALJWA0044GB
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-71
2008 Quest
HEATED SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HEATED SEAT
Description
INFOID:0000000001718813
• When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit.
• To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated for front seat cushion LH. For seatback and
front seat cushion RH, complete cushion or seatback assembly must be replaced.
• Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim.
WIIA0031E
Revision: August 2007
SE-72
2008 Quest
HEATED SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - HSEAT -
INFOID:0000000001718814
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
ALJWA0045GB
Revision: August 2007
SE-73
2008 Quest
P
HEATED SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WIWA1807E
Revision: August 2007
SE-74
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT SEAT
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718815
Power Driver Seat
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WAIA0099E
1.
Headrest
2.
Seatback board
3.
Seat cushion trim cover
4.
Seat cushion heating element
5.
Seat cushion pad
6.
Silk film bag
7.
Seat cushion frame
8.
RH inner hinge cover
9.
LH inner hinge cover
Revision: August 2007
SE-75
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Driver seat power frame assembly
11. Seat cushion outer finisher
12. Power seat switch
13. Power seat switch escutcheon
14. Recliner switch knob
15. Slide switch knob
16. Driver seat wiring harness
17. Slide motor
18. Rear lifter motor
19. Bushing
20. Front lifter motor
21. Driver seat control unit
22. Drive cable
23. Outer pedestal finisher
24. Pedestal
25. Sub woofer
26. Seat cushion front finisher
27. Inner pedestal finisher (without tray
table)
28. Inner pedestal finisher (with tray table)
29. Slide Gear
30. Seat cushion inner finisher
31. Tray table bracket outer finisher
(without family entertainment)
32. Center tray table (without family entertainment)
33. Tray table bracket inner finisher (without family entertainment)
34. Tray table assembly (without family
entertainment)
35. Seatback heating element (without
side air bag)
36. Lumbar support handle
37. Armrest assembly
38. Armrest bolt cover
39. Armrest bushing (cloth armrest only)
40. Seatback assembly (with side air
bag)
41
42. Headrest guide with multi position
lock
43. Seatback trim (without side air bag)
44. Seatback pad (without side air bag)
46. Armrest bolt
47. Buckle
Revision: August 2007
Headrest guide
SE-76
45. Seatback frame (without side air bag)
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Manual Driver Seat
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WAIA0100E
1.
Seatback board
2.
Seatback frame
3.
Lumbar support handle
4.
Seat cushion inner finisher
5.
Driver seat frame assembly
6.
Recliner release handle
7.
Seat cushion outer finisher
8.
Seat cushion adjusting knobs
9.
Seat cushion front finisher
10. Outer pedestal finisher
11. Pedestal
12. Inner pedestal finisher
13. Seat cushion frame
14. Seat belt buckle assembly
15. Seat cushion pad
16. Seat cushion trim cover
17. Armrest assembly
18. Seatback trim cover
Revision: August 2007
SE-77
P
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
19. Seatback pad
20. Headrest holder
21. Headrest holder with multi position
lock
22. Headrest
23. Armrest bolt cover
24. Armrest bolt
25. Armrest bushing (cloth only)
Manual Driver Seat
WAIA0101E
1.
Seatback board
2.
Seatback frame
3.
Lumbar support handle
4.
Seat cushion inner finisher
5.
Driver seat frame assembly
6.
Recliner release handle
Revision: August 2007
SE-78
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7.
Seat cushion outer finisher
8.
Seat cushion adjusting knobs
9.
Seat cushion front finisher
A
10. Outer pedestal finisher
11. Pedestal
12. Seat cushion frame
13. Seat belt buckle assembly
14. Silk film bag
15. Seat cushion pad
16. Seat cushion trim cover
17. Armrest assembly
18. Seatback trim cover
19. Seatback pad
20. Headrest holder
21. Headrest holder with multi position
lock
22. Headrest
23. Armrest bolt cover
24. Armrest bolt
25. Armrest bushing (cloth only)
26. Tray table assembly
27. Tray table bracket inner finisher
28. Center tray table
29. Tray table bracket outer finisher
30. Inner pedestal finisher
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-79
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Power Passenger Seat
WAIA0102E
1.
Headrest
2.
Seatback board
3.
Armrest assembly
4.
Armrest bolt cover
5.
Recliner link bar
6.
LH inner hinge cover
7.
Passenger seat power frame assem- 8.
bly
Seat cushion inner finisher
9.
Seat belt assembly
Passenger power seat harness
12.
Inner pedestal finisher
15.
NAVI control unit
10. Seat cushion front finisher
11.
13. Pedestal
14. Rear view camera module (if
equipped)
Revision: August 2007
SE-80
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
16. Outer pedestal finisher
17. Power seat switch
18.
Seat cushion assembly
19. Seat cushion outer finisher
20. Recliner motor
21.
RH inner hinge cover
22. Seatback assembly
23. Headrest holder with locking clip
24.
Headrest holder with multi position
lock
25. Bluetooth control unit (if equipped)
26. Armrest bolt
A
B
Manual Passenger Seat
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WAIA0103E
Revision: August 2007
SE-81
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
Headrest
2.
Seatback board
3.
Headrest holder with multi position
lock
4.
Headrest holder
5.
Seatback assembly
6.
Lumbar support handle
7.
Wiring harness
8.
Pedestal outer finisher
9.
Pedestal
10. NAVI control unit
11.
Seat cushion front finisher
12.
Bluetooth control unit (if equipped)
13. Rear view camera module (if
equipped)
14. Pedestal inner finisher
15.
Seat cushion assembly
16. Seat cushion inner finisher
17. Seat frame assembly
18.
LH inner hinge cover
19. Recliner link bar
20. RH inner hinge cover
21.
Seat cushion outer finisher
22. Recliner handle
23. Armrest bolt cover
24.
Armrest assembly
25. Armrest bushing
26. Armrest bolt
27.
Seat belt assembly
Removal
WARNING:
• When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy.
• Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait
at lease 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
• Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while installing the seat. Always handle it with
care.
• Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will affect
the Occupant Classification System calibration.
• If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to SRS48
• After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced.
NOTE:
• When removing and installing the seat, use shop cloths to protect the vehicle from damage.
• When removing or installing the seat trim, handle it carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slide the seat until the four body bolts are visible and a tool can be inserted.
Disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
Disconnect the side air bag module harness connector.
Remove the four body bolts.
Disconnect the power seat harness connectors (if equipped) and remove the seat from the vehicle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten LH front seat bolts (1) in the order as shown. Tighten RH
front seat bolts (2) in the order as shown.
• ⇐: Vehicle front.
LIIA2309E
Seatback Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718816
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
SE-82
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags.
• Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position.
A
Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
Bend both top corners inward (one at a time) to release the top
hooks (A).
Shift the seatback finisher to the Left and Right to release the
middle hooks (B).
Separate the trim clips (C) from the seatback frame to remove
the seatback finisher.
B
C
D
WIIA0773E
4.
Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback.
E
F
G
PIIA0163E
5.
H
Remove the retainer.
SE
J
K
SIIA0113E
L
6.
7.
Remove the headrest.
From inside of the seatback, squeeze the headrest holder tabs
at the base of the stay pipe and pull the up to remove.
NOTE:
Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/
rear and right/left).
M
N
O
LRS023
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-83
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Remove the snap ring (1) and the lumbar support lever knob (2)
from the shaft (3).
WAIA0104E
9.
Disconnect the seatback heater harness. Remove the seatback trim and pad assembly. Remove the hog
ring to separate the seatback trim from the pad and the heater unit.
Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Seatback Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718817
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Bend both top corners inward (one at a time) to release the top
hooks (A).
Shift the seatback finisher to the Left and Right to release the
middle hooks (B).
Separate the trim clips (C) from the seatback frame to remove
the seatback finisher.
WIIA0773E
4.
5.
Remove the bolts (2 for each side) and seatback assembly.
Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Seat Cushion
INFOID:0000000001718818
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly.
• Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will affect
the Occupant Classification System calibration.
• When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage.
• During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in. Do
not add additional clips.
• The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion
assembly.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove seat. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation".
Remove four seat cushion bolts.
Remove seat cushion assembly.
Revision: August 2007
SE-84
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
Seat Cushion
INFOID:0000000001718819
B
DISSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly
1.
Remove the power seat switch knobs and trim plate (or recline
knobs on manual seat).
C
D
E
LIIA0681E
2.
F
Remove the front seat cushion finisher.
G
H
SE
LIIA0285E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the power seat switch screws (or lift knobs on manual seats).
Remove seat cushion bolts and the seat cushion assembly.
Release the trim retainer from the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat
heater.
For driver seat only, after removing the seat cushion assembly,
remove the hog rings to separate the trim cover from the pad
and seat cushion heater unit.
J
K
L
M
N
SIIA0503E
Assembly
O
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Lifter Motor
INFOID:0000000001718820
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
Remove seat cushion Refer to SE-84, "Seat Cushion".
Disconnect lifter motor connector.
Revision: August 2007
SE-85
2008 Quest
P
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Remove lifter motor nuts (A).
4. Slide lifter motor assembly (1) away from spacer (2), press tabs
and remove spacer.
LIIA2319E
5.
Remove lifter motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Slide Motor and Slide Gear
INFOID:0000000001718821
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
CAUTION:
Do not bend drive cable to prevent slide motor operation noise.
NOTE:
Remove and reinstall slide motor, drive cable, and slide gears from driver seat power frame assembly as if it
were one unit.
1.
2.
Remove seat cushion Refer to SE-84, "Seat Cushion".
Remove seat track bolts (A).
LIIA2317E
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove seat cushion front finisher.
Remove top screw from the seat cushion inner and outer finishers.
Disconnect slide motor connector.
Remove forward bolts from driver seat power frame assembly.
Remove slide gear box nuts.
Slide both seat rails to rear position.
Remove slide gear and slide motor.
Revision: August 2007
SE-86
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
10. Remove drive cable (1) by releasing tab (2).
A
B
C
LIIA2318E
Installation
NOTE:
• Before reinstalling slide motor or slide gear, measure distance between slide gear box and a slide gear box
bolt and adjust slide gears so the distance is equal for both slide gears.
D
E
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SE-87
2008 Quest
REAR SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR SEAT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718822
Second Row
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lift handle and tilt seat forward.
Remove the rear anchor bolt.
Tilt seat backward.
Remove seat base trim cover.
Remove front anchor nuts.
Remove seat striker covers and seat strikers.
LIIA0682E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Third Row
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the luggage side spring cover finishers..
Rotate the seat to mid position (between locked seating position and stowed position)
Remove the lift assist springs.
Retract the seat into the cargo floor position.
Remove the hinge bolts from the seat assembly.
Remove the seat assembly.
WAIA0105E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
SE-88
2008 Quest
REAR SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000001718823
A
Second row
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
WIIA0825E
1.
Seatback board
2.
Seatback frame
3.
Seatback hinge LH
4.
LH inner recliner cover
5.
Recline release lever
6.
LH cushion hinge cover
7.
LH seatback hinge cover
8.
LH arm rest
9.
Armrest bolt cover
11.
Isofix cover
12. LH seat anchor cover
10. Cup holder
Revision: August 2007
SE-89
2008 Quest
REAR SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
13. LH seat anchor striker
14. Lift assist cylinder
15. Seat base and hinge assembly
16. Seat base trim cover
17. Seat base apron
18. RH seat anchor cover
19. RH seat anchor striker
20. Seat belt buckle
21. Flexmat assembly
22. Seat cushion pad
23. RH cushion hinge cover
24. RH armrest
25. Seatback trim cover
26. RH inner recliner cover
27. Seatback pad
28. Seatback hinge RH
29. Seat cushion trim cover
30. Seatback fold flat hinge assembly
31. RH headrest guide
32. LH locking headrest guide
Revision: August 2007
SE-90
2008 Quest
REAR SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Third row
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
N
O
WAIA0106E
P
1.
Hook assembly
4.
Headrest
5.
Seatback pad
6.
Headrest trim rear
7.
Headrest pivot assembly
8.
Seatback frame assembly
9.
Seatback release handle and cable
11.
Seat assembly hinge
12.
Seat lock cover
10. Seat lock cover
2.
Headrest release handle
3.
Trim cover
13. Seat lock assembly
14. Upper hinge assembly
15. Upper seat cover
16. Assist spring
17. Seat assembly hinge anchor
18. Seat assembly hinge
Revision: August 2007
SE-91
2008 Quest
REAR SEAT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
19. Seat cushion frame assembly
20. Seat lock cable assembly
21. Seat cushion pad
22. Seat cushion trim cover
23. Headrest release cable assembly
24. Headrest trim front
25. Headrest support
26. Headrest trim cover
Revision: August 2007
SE-92
2008 Quest
RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SRS
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp
Does Not Turn On ...................................................33
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for SRS "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" Service ...................................... 2
Occupant Classification System Precaution ............. 2
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ............................ 34
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Removal and Installation .........................................38
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ................ 41
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) ................................................................... 4
Removal and Installation .........................................41
SRS Configuration .................................................... 4
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ...... 5
Front Side Air Bag ..................................................... 5
Side Curtain Air Bag .................................................. 5
Occupant Classification System (OCS) .................... 5
Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ............ 6
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 7
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................. 7
SRS Component Parts Location ............................... 9
Schematic ............................................................... 10
Wiring Diagram - SRS- ............................................ 11
CONSULT-III Function (AIR BAG) .......................... 16
Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-III) .... 17
SRS Operation Check ............................................. 18
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III ..................... 19
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-III ................ 29
Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp
Does Not Turn Off ................................................... 32
Removal and Installation .........................................34
F
G
SPIRAL CABLE ................................................ 36
Removal and Installation .........................................36
SRS
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE ...... 38
CRASH ZONE SENSOR ................................... 43
I
J
Removal and Installation .........................................43
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ........... 44
K
Removal and Installation .........................................44
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ........... 45
Removal and Installation .........................................45
L
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 46
Removal and Installation .........................................46
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 47
Removal and Installation .........................................47
M
N
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS .................................. 48
For Frontal Collision ................................................48
For Side and Rollover Collision ...............................49
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718416
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution for SRS "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" Service
INFOID:0000000001718417
• Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pretensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have
passed.
• The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the front
of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust
before installation and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
Occupant Classification System Precaution
INFOID:0000000001718418
Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718419
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-42057A)
Air bag lock master key set
Part of kit (J-42057)
Removing and installing air bag lock
B
C
D
E
LRS210
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-3
2008 Quest
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SRS Configuration
INFOID:0000000001718420
WHIA0215E
The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is activated while the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position. The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different
among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module, front passenger air bag module and front
seat belt pre-tensioners are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision. SRS configurations for
some collision modes are as follows:
SRS configuration
Frontal collision
Left side collision
Right side collision
Driver air bag module
×
—
—
Front passenger air bag module
×
—
—
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
×
—
—
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
×
—
—
Front LH side air bag module
—
×
—
Front RH side air bag module
—
—
×
LH side curtain air bag module
—
×
—
RH side curtain air bag module
—
—
×
Revision: August 2007
SRS-4
2008 Quest
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
INFOID:0000000001718421
A
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for
both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates
simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal
collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level
occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is
immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are
securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and
the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the
load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt
web tension while maintaining force.
Front Side Air Bag
B
C
D
SRS444
E
INFOID:0000000001718422
Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies.
Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown.
F
G
SRS
I
WHIA0008E
Side Curtain Air Bag
INFOID:0000000001718423
J
Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining.
Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as
shown.
K
L
M
WHIA0041E
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
INFOID:0000000001718424
The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and
detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the
passenger, the OCS sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit
uses this signal and the seat belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the
passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely.
NOTE:
In case of customer concern, CONSULT-III can be used to confirm the passenger air bag status (readiness).
Revision: August 2007
SRS-5
2008 Quest
N
O
P
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions
Front Passenger Seat
(Condition)
Seat occupied
Seat occupied
NOTE
Seat empty
PASS AIR BAG OFF Indicator
(Status)
Passenger Air Bag Status
(Readiness)
CONSULT-III Display
OFF
Active (enabled)
ON
ON
Deactivated (disabled)
OFF
OFF
Deactivated (disabled)
OFF
NOTE:
Passenger does not meet Occupant Classification System specifications for passenger air bag activation.
WHIA0187E
Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors
INFOID:0000000001718425
The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors.
• Driver front air bag module
• Passenger front air bag module
• LH side curtain air bag module
• RH side curtain air bag module
• Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
• Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector
to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with
the connector housing.
WHIA0103E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-6
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
INFOID:0000000001718426
CAUTION:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to do so in
this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors.
• Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify SRS wiring harnesses. If a harness is damaged, replace it
with a new one.
• Keep ground connections clean.
B
C
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
D
The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-III.
The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-III are as follows:
E
User mode
Diagnosis mode
Display type
“AIR BAG” warning lamp
X
X
ON-OFF operation
CONSULT-III
—
X
Monitoring
F
G
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp- SRS
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Information From Customer
WHAT - Vehicle model
WHEN - Date, Frequencies
WHERE - Road conditions
HOW - Operating conditions, Symptoms
I
J
Preliminary Check
Check that the following parts are in good order.
• Battery (Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery".)
• Fuse (Refer to SRS-11, "Wiring Diagram - SRS-".)
• System component-to-harness connections
K
WORK FLOW
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-7
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHIA0348E
*1: "PRELIMINARY CHECK"
*2: SRS-18
*3: SRS-19
*4: SRS-29
Revision: August 2007
SRS-8
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SRS Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001718427
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
WHIA0304E
I
1.
Side curtain air bag modules
2.
Front RH side air bag module
3.
Front RH seatbelt pre-tensioner
4.
RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
5.
Belt tension sensor
6.
Occupant classification system sensor
7.
Occupant classification system con- 8.
trol unit
Front passenger air bag module
9.
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
10. Crash zone sensor
11. Front passenger air bag off indicator
12. Spiral cable
13. Driver air bag module
14. Seat belt buckle switches
15. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
16. Front LH seatbelt pre-tensioner
17. Front LH side air bag module
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-9
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001718428
WHWA0303E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-10
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - SRS-
INFOID:0000000001718429
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WHWA0283E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-11
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHWA0284E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-12
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WHWA0304E
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-13
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHWA0286E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-14
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
WHWA0287E
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-15
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHWA0288E
CONSULT-III Function (AIR BAG)
INFOID:0000000001718430
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-16
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
AIR BAG diagnostic mode
Description
SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis
mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs.
SELF-DIAG [PAST]
A
B
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. The
stored results will remain until memory erasing is executed.
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, as shown. When replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a
correct unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-III screen.
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit discriminated numbers assigned are F659 (for models with
side air bags) and F658 (for models without side air bags).
PASSENGER AIR BAG
The STATUS (readiness) of the front passenger air bag module is displayed. The STATUS displayed
(ON/OFF) depends on the signals supplied to the occupant classification system control module and
air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-5, "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" for more information.
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-III
C
D
E
F
G
From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis
mode.
SRS
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode
To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
I
J
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
• “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
A current self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen in real time.
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
• “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-III screen by touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-III and
select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode will continue
to show the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is
repaired completely.
K
L
M
N
• “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased.
Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-III)
O
INFOID:0000000001718431
• The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis
mode”.
• After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis
mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-17
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
SHIA0183E
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis
mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
SRS Operation Check
INFOID:0000000001718432
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Checking SRS Operation Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp—User Mode
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the
examples.
BF-1845D
Revision: August 2007
SRS-18
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Warning lamp examples
“AIR BAG” warning lamp operation-User mode-
SRS condition
Reference item
A
B
• No malfunction is detected.
• No further action is necessary.
—
C
D
SHIA0011E
E
• The system is malfunctioning and
needs to be repaired as indicated.
Go to SRS-19, "Trouble Diagnosis
with CONSULT-III" or SRS-29,
"Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-III".
F
G
SHIA0012E
SRS
• Air bag is deployed.
• Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed.
Go to SRS-48.
I
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
• Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning.
• SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is
malfunctioning.
Go to SRS-32, "Trouble Diagnosis:
"AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn Off".
J
K
SHIA0013E
L
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
• Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning.
Go to SRS-33, "Trouble Diagnosis:
"AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn On".
M
N
SHIA0014E
O
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III
INFOID:0000000001718433
P
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]".
If no malfunction is detected on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]" even though malfunction is detected in "SRS Operation Check", refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)"
, to diagnose the following cases:
Revision: August 2007
SRS-19
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Self-diagnostic result "SELF-DIAG [PAST]" (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after
repair.
• The SRS system malfunctions intermittently.
CONSULT-III Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]")
Diagnostic item
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode.
NO DTC IS DETECTED
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
• Low battery voltage (Less than 9V)
• Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3" .
• Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased after
repair.
• Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
• Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" .
• Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
5" .
• No malfunction is detected.
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1049] or [B1054]
• Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050] or [B1055]
• Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051] or [B1056]
• Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1052] or [B1057]
• Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.
—
1.
2.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1065] or [B1070]
• Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1066] or [B1071]
• Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067] or [B1072]
• Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1068] or [B1073]
• Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
• Crash zone sensor
1.
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1033] or [B1034]
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-20
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace driver air bag module.
Replace the spiral cable.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front passenger air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the crash zone sensor.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1134]
• Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
1.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1135]
• Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit.
3.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
• Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
4.
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1137]
• Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1129]
• Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1130]
• Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
3.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
• Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
4.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1132]
• Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
2.
5.
1.
2.
5.
• LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1118] or [B1119]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
1.
3.
4.
5.
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1113] or [B1114]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
[B1086]
• The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1087]
• The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
• The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
[B1089]
• The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
Revision: August 2007
1.
2.
3.
4.
SRS-21
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag
module).
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
2.
• RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag
module).
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
A
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front LH seat belt pretensioner.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2008 Quest
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Explanation
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
[B1081]
• The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1082]
• The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
• The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
[B1084]
• The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1198]
• The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1199]
• The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1200]
• The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1201]
• The circuits for the LH side front curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1193]
• The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1194]
• The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted
to some power supply circuits.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1195]
• The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted
to ground.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1196]
• The circuits for the RH side front curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1150]
• The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1151]
• The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
• The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1153]
• The circuits for the LH side rear curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
Revision: August 2007
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
SRS-22
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front RH seat belt pretensioner.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Explanation
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1145]
• The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1146]
• The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
• The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1148]
• The circuits for the RH side rear curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
1.
2.
3.
4.
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
CONTROL UNIT
[B1XXX]
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1017], [B1020] or [B1021]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
5.
1.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
• Occupant classification system is malfunctioning.
1.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
• Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted.
1.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2.
3.
4.
5.
• Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning.
1.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
• Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning.
1.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH front seat belt assembly.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
Replace the related harness.
2.
BELT TENSION SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1019]
3.
4.
5.
• Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning.
1.
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front passenger air bag
off indicator.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2.
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[B1023]
3.
4.
FRONTAL COLLISION
DETECTION
[B1209]
• Driver and front passenger air bag modules are deployed.
1.
Refer to SRS-48 .
SIDE COLLISION
DETECTION
[B1210]
• Side or curtain air bag modules are deployed (with side air
bags only).
1.
Refer to SRS-48 .
SRS-23
C
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
NOTE:
Revision: August 2007
B
D
2.
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
[B1022]
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1018]
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
A
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is
eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-III each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still
observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Final Check of SRS Using CONSULT-III—Diagnosis Mode
1.
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 2.
If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely.
2.
Touch “ERASE”.
NOTE:
Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”).
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system
malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely.
3.
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III to “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
4.
5.
Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears in order to return to User mode from
Diagnosis mode.
Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-III.
Go to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check" .
6.
7.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)
Check SRS Repair History
1.CONSIDER POSSIBILITY THAT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT WAS NOT ERASED AFTER REPAIR
Check repair history of the SRS.
Have any previous repairs been made to the SRS?
Yes
>> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased
after repair. Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3".
No
>> Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2".
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
Check SRS Intermittent Malfunction Using CONSULT-III—Diagnosis Mode
1.
If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to step 4.
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch “BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG
MODE”.
2.
Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
NOTE:
With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be
displayed.
3.
4.
5.
Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
Touch “PRINT”.
Compare diagnostic codes to "CONSULT-III Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE
DIAG RECORD")" .
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears.
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-III, and both battery cables.
6.
7.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-24
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”,
that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the
Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component.
9. Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking.
A
CONSULT-III Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD")
B
Diagnostic item
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode.
NO DTC IS DETECTED
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
• Low battery voltage (Less than 9V)
• Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3" .
• Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased after
repair.
• Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
• Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" .
• Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
5" .
• No malfunction is detected.
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1049] or [B1054]
• Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050] or [B1055]
• Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051] or [B1056]
• Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1052] or [B1057]
• Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.
• Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1066] or [B1071]
• Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067] or [B1072]
• Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1068] or [B1073]
• Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
3.
4.
5.
• Crash zone sensor
E
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace driver air bag module.
Replace the spiral cable.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
F
G
SRS
I
2.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front passenger air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
J
K
L
M
1.
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1033] or [B1034]
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
D
—
2.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1065] or [B1070]
C
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the crash zone sensor.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-25
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1134]
• Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
1.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1135]
• Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit.
3.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
• Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
4.
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1137]
• Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1129]
• Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1130]
• Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
3.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
• Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
4.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1132]
• Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
2.
5.
1.
2.
5.
• LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1118] or [B1119]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
• RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1113] or [B1114]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
[B1086]
• The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1087]
• The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
• The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
[B1089]
• The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
Revision: August 2007
1.
2.
3.
4.
SRS-26
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag
module).
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag
module).
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front LH seat belt pretensioner.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Explanation
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
[B1081]
• The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1082]
• The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
• The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
[B1084]
• The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1198]
• The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1199]
• The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1200]
• The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
FR CURTN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1201]
• The circuits for the LH side front curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1193]
• The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1194]
• The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted
to some power supply circuits.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1195]
• The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted
to ground.
FR CURTN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1196]
• The circuits for the RH side front curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
3.
4.
5.
1.
3.
4.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1151]
• The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
• The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1153]
• The circuits for the LH side rear curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
C
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
E
F
G
SRS
2.
• The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open.
B
D
2.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1150]
Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front RH seat belt pretensioner.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
A
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
I
J
K
L
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-27
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Explanation
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1145]
• The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1146]
• The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
• The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1148]
• The circuits for the RH side rear curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
1.
2.
3.
4.
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
CONTROL UNIT
[B1XXX]
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1017], [B1020] or [B1021]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
5.
1.
2.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
• Occupant classification system is malfunctioning.
1.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
• Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted.
1.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
[B1022]
2.
3.
4.
5.
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1018]
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
• Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning.
1.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
• Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning.
1.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace RH front seat belt assembly.
Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system
control unit assembly.
Replace the related harness.
2.
BELT TENSION SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1019]
3.
4.
5.
• Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning.
1.
5.
Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace front passenger air bag
off indicator.
Replace the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
2.
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[B1023]
3.
4.
FRONTAL COLLISION
DETECTION
[B1209]
• Driver and front passenger air bag modules are deployed.
1.
Refer to SRS-48 .
SIDE COLLISION
DETECTION
[B1210]
• Side or curtain air bag modules are deployed (with side air
bags only).
1.
Refer to SRS-48 .
Revision: August 2007
SRS-28
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-III
INFOID:0000000001718434
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
Inspect SRS Malfunction Using "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp—Diagnosis Mode
NOTE:
SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second.
3. Wait more than 3 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two more times (3 times total).
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
SRS is now in Diagnosis mode.
"AIR BAG" warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:
B
C
D
E
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART
F
G
SRS
SHIA0026E
I
J
K
WHIA0260E
L
M
N
O
WHIA0198E
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-29
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHIA0261E
WHIA0200E
WHIA0262E
WHIA0263E
WHIA0203E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-30
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
WHIA0204E
D
E
F
WHIA0264E
G
SRS
I
J
WHIA0265E
K
L
M
WHIA0252E
N
O
P
WHIA0253E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-31
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WHIA0254E
WHIA0255E
WHIA0211E
WHIA0212E
Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off
INFOID:0000000001718435
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
1.CHECK CONDITION OF AIR BAG MODULE
Inspect for deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
Is air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner deployed?
Yes
>> Refer to SRS-48.
No
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-3.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
SRS-32
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
A
3.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN
Replace 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON.
Does the fuse blow again?
Yes
>> Repair harness.
No
>> Inspection End.
B
4.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
C
Connect CONSULT-III.
Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-III?
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Visually inspect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connections. If the connections are OK,
replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation".
D
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION
E
F
Check for loose connections between the combination meter and the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Properly connect the combination meter and air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. If
“AIR BAG” warning lamp still does not turn off, replace the wiring harness.
Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On
INFOID:0000000001718436
G
SRS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
I
1.CHECK METER FUSE
Check the 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-3.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
2.CHECK METER FUSE AGAIN
Replace 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON.
Does the fuse blow again?
Yes
>> Repair harness.
No
>> Inspection End.
L
3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINATION METER
Disconnect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors and turn ignition switch ON.
Does “AIR BAG” warning lamp turn on?
Yes
>> Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation".
No
>> Check the combination meter ground circuits.
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-33
2008 Quest
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718437
WHIA0286E
1.
Steering wheel
4.
Driver air bag module
2.
Side lid LH
3.
Side lid RH
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver
air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
• When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Remove the side lids LH/RH.
3. Remove the driver air bag module bolts.
4. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel.
5. Disconnect the driver air bag harness and horn connectors, then remove the driver air bag module.
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors".
CAUTION:
• When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
• Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
• Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into
air bag module or harness connectors.
• Do not disassemble air bag module.
• Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
• Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures
exceeding 90°C (194°F).
PHIA0291E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-34
2008 Quest
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the air bag module.
A
B
C
SBF814E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors".
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check".
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-35
2008 Quest
SPIRAL CABLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718438
WHIA0275E
1.
Steering wheel
2.
Lighting and turn signal switch
3.
Wiper and washer switch
4.
Spiral cable
5.
Driver air bag module connector
6.
Column cover upper
7.
Column assembly
8.
Column cover lower
9.
Screw (Do not remove)
10. Screw
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
• When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-34, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove the column cover upper and lower.
6. Remove wiper/washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at
wiper/washer switch base and slide switch away from steering
column to remove.
LHIA0034E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-36
2008 Quest
SPIRAL CABLE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
7. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward
driver door and disconnect from base.
A
B
C
LHIA0035E
D
8.
Remove the screws, release the tab, and remove the spiral
cable.
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble spiral cable.
• Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
E
F
G
LHIA0036E
9.
SRS
Remove the spiral cable connectors.
CAUTION:
With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable
may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited
number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
I
J
K
SHIA0193E
10. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel.
L
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make
sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral
position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right
end position and ending with the knob at the top.
• If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering
Angle Sensor Neutral Position" for steering angle sensor adjustment.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure
no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation
Check".
WGIA0038E
CAUTION:
• The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position.
• With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-37
2008 Quest
M
N
O
P
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718439
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors.
Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger
air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Refer to
"WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION" for wiring harness modification procedure.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
• Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
• Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box".
3. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember.
4. Disconnect the front passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors,
refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors".
5. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer
to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
6. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove from
the instrument panel assembly.
WHIA0185E
CAUTION:
• When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in
front of air bag module.
• Always place front passenger air bag module with caution
label side facing upward.
• Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into
air bag module or harness connectors.
• Do not disassemble air bag module.
• Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
• Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
WHIA0111E
• Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the air bag module.
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component
Connectors".
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
Original Passenger Air Bag Module
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-38
2008 Quest
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors".
CAUTION:
• Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check".
A
B
Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module
1.
Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument
panel pad assembly.
C
D
E
WHIA0185E
2.
3.
F
Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air G
bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket.
CAUTION:
• Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. SRS
Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check".
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors.
Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger
air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module.
CAUTION:
• Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
• Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
• Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check".
NOTE:
The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger
air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle
that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is
not required.
1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors.
2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors.
3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-39
2008 Quest
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used
vehicle wiring harness.
LHIA0017E
5.
Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink
tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in
the heat shrink tubing.
WHIA0062E
6.
7.
8.
Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire.
Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness.
Locate the front passenger air bag module service replacement
harness connector (1) that is taped back to the main harness.
Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector.
WHIA0307E
Revision: August 2007
SRS-40
2008 Quest
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001718440
B
C
D
E
F
G
WHIA0305E
1.
Rear side curtain air bag module connector
2.
Front side curtain air bag module connector
SRS
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a directconnect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
• When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-38, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect front and rear side curtain air bag module connectors.
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors".
3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the front and rear side curtain air bag
modules.
CAUTION:
• When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
• Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
• Do not disassemble air bag module.
• Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped
or sustained an impact.
• Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the air bag module.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors".
Revision: August 2007
SRS-41
2008 Quest
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is
detected. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check".
Revision: August 2007
SRS-42
2008 Quest
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718441
REMOVAL
B
CAUTION:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-17, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector.
4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION:
• Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
C
D
E
F
WHIA0113E
G
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18,
SRS
"SRS Operation Check".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-43
2008 Quest
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718442
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt".
3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts.
4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector
(2).
CAUTION:
• Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
• Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of
deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible
signs of damage, replace it with new one.
• Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
• Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been
dropped or sustained an impact.
WHIA0308E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check".
Revision: August 2007
SRS-44
2008 Quest
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001718443
For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt".
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-45
2008 Quest
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000001718444
REMOVAL
WHIA0306E
1.
Diagnosis sensor unit
⇒
Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
3. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel".
4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors.
5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
• Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
• Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust.
If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
• Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check".
CAUTION:
• The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "⇐" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the
vehicle as equipped. Refer to SRS-16, "CONSULT-III Function (AIR BAG)".
Revision: August 2007
SRS-46
2008 Quest
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
A
INFOID:0000000001718445
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an
integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to SE-75, "Removal
and Installation" to remove the seat, and SE-84, "Seat Cushion" to replace the seat cushion assembly.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-47
2008 Quest
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
INFOID:0000000001718446
Check the SRS components using the following table.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check".
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
Driver air bag module
If the driver air bag
has deployed:
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
If the driver air bag has NOT been activated:
1.
Remove driver air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment
with the wheel.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install driver air bag modules with new fasteners.
Front passenger air
bag module
If the front passenger
air bag has deployed:
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
If the front passenger air bag has NOT been activated:
1.
Remove front passenger air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors
for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install front passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with
the instrument panel.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install front passenger air bag modules with new fasteners.
Crash zone sensor
If any of the front air
bags or seat belt pretensioners* have
been activated:
REPLACE the crash
zone sensor and
bracket with new fasteners.
If the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone
sensor and bracket.
3.
Install the crash zone sensor to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt
pre-tensioner activation using CONSULTIII only.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle, reel, lap
outer)
If either the driver or
passenger seat belt
pre-tensioner* has
been activated:
REPLACE all seat
belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new
fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt
pre-tensioner activation using CONSULTIII only.
Diagnosis sensor unit
Revision: August 2007
If any of the SRS components have been
activated:
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit.
Install with new fasteners.
If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and
harness for binding.
2.
Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3.
Check retractor for smooth operation.
4.
Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5.
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
6.
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner
assembly.
7.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
8.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners.
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.
2.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
SRS-48
2008 Quest
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Part
Steering wheel
Spiral cable
SRS is activated
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SRS is NOT activated
Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
If damaged—REPLACE.
If the driver front air
bag has deployed:
REPLACE the spiral
cable.
If the driver front air bag has not deployed:
1.
Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
2.
Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
3.
Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE.
D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove passenger seat.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.
Harness and connectors
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness.
If the passenger front
air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the instrument panel assembly.
E
F
If the passenger front air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Visually check instrument panel for damage.
2.
If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.
3.
If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel.
For Side and Rollover Collision
B
C
Occupant classification system (Passenger seat)
Instrument panel
A
G
SRS
INFOID:0000000001718447
Check the SRS components using the following table.
• After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check".
I
J
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION
1.
2.
3.
Replace the following components:
Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
Diagnosis sensor unit
(LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
K
L
M
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION
1.
2.
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
N
O
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-49
2008 Quest
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Part
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
LH side curtain air
bag module
If the LH side curtain
air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the LH
side curtain air bag
module. (Repair the
center pillar inner, etc.
before installing new
one if damaged.)
If the LH side curtain air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar
on the collision side.
2.
If damaged—Remove the LH side curtain air bag module.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the LH side curtain air bag module.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall the LH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
6.
If damaged—REPLACE the LH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
RH side curtain air
bag module
If the RH side curtain
air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the RH
side curtain air bag
module. (Repair the
center pillar inner, etc.
before installing new
one if damaged.)
If the RH side curtain air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar
on the collision side.
2.
If damaged—Remove the RH side curtain air bag module.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the RH side curtain air bag
module.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall the RH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
6.
If damaged—REPLACE the RH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
Front LH side air bag
module
If the front LH side air
bag has deployed:
REPLACE front LH
seatback assembly.
If the front LH side air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on
the collision side.
2.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If damaged—REPLACE the front LH seatback assembly.
Front RH side air bag
module
If the front RH side air
bag has deployed:
REPLACE front RH
seatback assembly.
If the front RH side air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on
the collision side.
2.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If damaged—REPLACE the front RH seatback assembly.
(LH or RH) side air
bag (satellite) sensor
If any of the SRS
components have deployed:
REPLACE the side air
bag (satellite) sensor
on the collision side
with new fasteners.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness
connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag
(satellite) sensor.
3.
Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
Diagnosis sensor unit
If any of the SRS
components have deployed:
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with
new fasteners.
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
2.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle, reel, lap
outer)
If either the driver or
passenger seat belt
pre-tensioner* has
been activated:
REPLACE all seat
belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new
fasteners.
If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and
harness for binding.
2.
Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3.
Check retractor for smooth operation.
4.
Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5.
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
6.
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner
assembly.
7.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
8.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt
pre-tensioner activation using CONSULTIII only.
Revision: August 2007
SRS-50
2008 Quest
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Part
Seat (with front side
air bag)
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
If either the front LH or
front RH side air bag
modules has been deployed:
REPLACE front seatback assembly on the
deployed side.
If the front LH or front RH side air bag modules have NOT deployed:
1.
Visually check the seat on the collision side.
2.
Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
deformities.
Harness, connectors and terminals
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front
seat)
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front
seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Center inner pillar
1.
2.
Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar.
Trim/headlining
1.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
SRS-51
2008 Quest
SUSPENSION
SECTION
WT
ROAD WHEELS & TIRES
A
B
C
D
WT
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4
ROAD WHEEL .................................................... 5
Inspection .................................................................. 5
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY ...................... 6
PAX Run Flat Tires and Wheels ............................... 6
Conventional Tire and Wheel .................................... 6
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM..... 8
System Component ................................................... 8
System Description ................................................... 8
CAN COMMUNICATION ....................................11
System Description ................................................. 11
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ....................................12
Wiring Diagram -T/WARN - ..................................... 12
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 12
ID Registration Procedure ....................................... 13
Transmitter Wake Up Operation ............................. 14
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 14
Self-Diagnosis .........................................................15
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and
Accurate Repair .......................................................16
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart ...........................17
Preliminary Check ...................................................19
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ................................................. 21
Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM .............................21
Inspection 2 Transmitter - 1 .....................................21
Inspection 3 Transmitter - 2 .....................................22
Inspection 4 Vehicle Speed Signal ..........................22
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ...... 23
Inspection 1 Warning Lamp Does Not Come On
When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................23
Inspection 2 Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................................23
Inspection 3 Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................................24
Inspection 4 Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes
When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................25
Inspection 5 "TIRE PRESSURE" Information in
Display Unit Does Not Exist .....................................25
Inspection 6 ID Registration Cannot Be Completed .............................................................................25
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ..................... 27
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) ................................27
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 29
O
Road Wheel .............................................................29
Tire ..........................................................................29
P
Revision: August 2007
WT-1
2008 Quest
PRECAUTIONS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001718210
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
WT-2
2008 Quest
PREPARATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
PREPARATION
A
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718211
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991B1000
(J-45295)
Transmitter activation tool
• Wake up
• ID registration
B
C
D
WT
WEIA0144E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000001718212
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Removing wheel nuts
F
G
H
I
PBIC0190E
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
WT-3
2008 Quest
TIRES
Symptom
ROAD WHEEL
Revision: August 2007
Vibration
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride
or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy, shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride
or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
WT-4
×
BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
STEERING
×
BRAKE
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
DRIVESHAFT
×
Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart.
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
Refer to TIRES in this chart.
Shake
TIRES
×
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart",
RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
×
FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart",
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
—
Non-uniformity
×
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
—
Deformation or damage
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart",
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-6
Uneven tire wear
×
DIFFERENTIAL
WT-29
Incorrect tire pressure
×
WT-29
WT-6
Imbalance
Noise
Incorrect tire size
WT-5
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Out-of-round
FAX-5, FSU-6
Reference page
Improper installation, looseness
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000001718213
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2008 Quest
ROAD WHEEL
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ROAD WHEEL
A
Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
INFOID:0000000001718214
Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.
Set dial indicator as shown.
Wheel runout
(Dial indicator value)
: Refer to WT-29, "Road
Wheel".
B
C
D
WT
F
SFA975B
3.
4.
Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service".
Check front suspension for looseness. Refer to FSU-6, "On-vehicle Service".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
WT-5
2008 Quest
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
PAX Run Flat Tires and Wheels
INFOID:0000000001718215
CAUTION:
• Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service
PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and
wheel will result.
• If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
Conventional Tire and Wheel
INFOID:0000000001718216
BALANCING WHEELS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road
wheel.
Set road wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
• If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for road wheels.
When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel
balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 to
determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer
balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value
above and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the
designated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Do not install the inner balance weight before installing
the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the
mating surface of the road wheel.
SMA054D
Calculation:
Indicated unbalance value × 1.6 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 1.6 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance
weight value)
NOTE:
The selected balance weight value must be the closest balance weight available to the calculated balance
weight value.
Example:
37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz)
Revision: August 2007
WT-6
2008 Quest
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
a. Install balance weight in the position shown.
b. When installing balance weight to road wheels, set it into the
grooved area on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown in the
figure so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel
balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
• Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
• Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Do not install more than three pieces of balance weight.
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
SMA055D
c.
5.
6.
7.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight pieces in line with each other (as shown in
the figure).
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight piece on top of another.
Start wheel balancer again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual
unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or less.
• If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance):
Maximum allowable unbalance
Dynamic (At rim flange)
Static (At rim flange)
H
I
J
SMA056D
K
L
Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz.)
M
ROTATION
• After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for
1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
CAUTION:
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
Tightening torque
of wheel nut
N
O
P
: 112 N·m (11 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
WEIA0044E
Revision: August 2007
WT-7
2008 Quest
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
System Component
INFOID:0000000001718217
LEIA0128E
1.
Combination meter
4.
Tire pressure warning check connector 5.
2.
Remote keyless entry receiver
3.
BCM
Transmitter
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718218
TRANSMITTER
A sensor-transmitter integrated with a valve is installed in each
wheel, and transmits a detected air pressure signal in the form of a
radio wave.
WEIA0137E
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Revision: August 2007
WT-8
2008 Quest
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
The remote keyless entry receiver (1), which is located near the front
pillar RH (2), is shown with the instrument panel removed. This
remote keyless entry receiver receives the air pressure signal transmitted by the transmitter in each wheel.
A
B
C
LEIA0129E
D
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
The BCM (1), which is located near the front pillar LH (2), is shown
with the instrument panel removed. This BCM reads the air pressure
signal received by the remote keyless entry receiver, and controls
the combination meter warning lamp and the buzzer operations as
shown below. It also has a judgement function to detect a system
malfunction.
Condition
Warning lamp
Buzzer
ON
OFF
WT
F
G
2
Less than 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm , 28 psi)
[Flat tire]
LEIA0130E
System malfunction
After key ON, flashes once per second
for 1 minute, then
stays ON
OFF
System normal
On for 1 second after
ignition ON
OFF
H
I
COMBINATION METER
J
The combination meter receives tire pressure status from the BCM
using CAN communication. When a low tire pressure condition is
sensed by the BCM, the combination meter low tire pressure warning lamp and buzzer are activated.
K
L
M
LEIA0055E
DISPLAY UNIT
N
Displays the air pressure of each tire.
• After the ignition switch is turned ON, the pressure values are not
displayed until the data of each wheel is received.
O
P
WEIA0143E
Revision: August 2007
WT-9
2008 Quest
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WEIA0169E
Revision: August 2007
WT-10
2008 Quest
CAN COMMUNICATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000001718219
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
WT-11
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Wiring Diagram -T/WARN -
INFOID:0000000001718220
WEWA0066E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001718221
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Revision: August 2007
WT-12
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ID Registration Procedure
INFOID:0000000001718222
A
ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
NOTE:
This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM.
New replacement transmitters are provided "asleep" and must first be "woken up" using Transmitter
Activation Tool J-45295 before ID registration can be performed.
1. Connect CONSULT-III.
2. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST".
4. Push the transmitter activation tool against the tire near the front
left transmitter. Press the button for 5 seconds.
Tool number
: (J-45295)
B
C
D
WT
F
LEIA0036E
5.
Register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH and RR LH. When ID registration of each wheel has
been completed, a buzzer sounds and the hazard warning lamps flash.
Activation tire position
Buzzer
1
Front LH
Once
2
Front RH
2 times
3
Rear RH
3 times
4
Rear LH
4 times
Hazard warning lamp
CONSULT-III
2 times flashing
“YET”
↓
“DONE”
G
H
I
J
6. After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure.
NOTE:
Be sure to register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH, to RR LH, or the self-diagnostic results display will not function properly.
K
ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
L
NOTE:
This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM.
New replacement transmitters are provided "asleep" and must first be "woken up" using Transmitter
Activation Tool J-45295 before ID registration can be performed.
1. Connect CONSULT-III.
2. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on “SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on “SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST".
4. Adjust the tire pressure to the values shown in the table below for ID registration, and drive the vehicle at
15 km/h (9.4 MPH) or more for a few minutes.
5.
Tire position
Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Front – Left
250 (2.5, 36)
Front – Right
230 (2.3, 33)
Rear – Right
210 (2.1, 30)
Rear – Left
190 (1.9, 27)
WT-13
N
O
P
After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure.
Revision: August 2007
M
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Activation tire position
CONSULT-III
Front LH
“YET”
↓
“DONE”
Front RH
Rear RH
Rear LH
6.
Inflate all tires to proper pressure. Refer to WT-29, "Tire".
Transmitter Wake Up Operation
INFOID:0000000001718223
WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
NOTE:
This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM.
New replacement transmitters are provided "asleep" and must first be "woken up" using Transmitter
Activation Tool J-45295 before ID registration can be performed.
1. Push the transmitter activation tool against the tire near the front
left transmitter. Press the button for 5 seconds.
Tool number
: (J-45295)
• With ignition switch ON, as the hazard warning lamp flashes
per the follow diagram, the respective transmitter then must be
woken up.
LEIA0036E
2.
When the BCM finishes assigning each tire ID, the BCM flashes the hazard warning lamps and trailer
flasher lamps (if equipped) and sends flashing indicator status by CAN according to the following time
chart. Please see trailer flasher specification details of trailer flashing lamps since the BCM controls trailer
flasher lamps as brake lamps. Refer to LT-103.
LEIA0059E
3.
After completing wake up of all transmitters, make sure low tire pressure warning lamp goes out.
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001718224
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Revision: August 2007
WT-14
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
BCM
diagnostic test item
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received
data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
B
C
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
A
Diagnostic mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication
can be read.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
WT
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
Self-Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001718225
F
DESCRIPTION
During driving, the low tire pressure warning system receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter
installed in each wheel, and gives alarms when the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit (BCM) for this
system has pressure judgement and trouble diagnosis functions.
FUNCTION
G
H
When the low tire pressure warning system detects low inflation pressure, the warning lamp in the combination meter comes on and the buzzer may sound (with PAX tires). The malfunction location is indicated by the
warning lamp flashing.
I
CONSULT-III Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System
ITEM
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Front - Left transmitter
×
×
Front - Right transmitter
×
×
Rear - Left transmitter
×
×
Rear - Right transmitter
×
×
Warning lamp
—
×
Vehicle speed
×
×
Buzzer (in combination meter)
—
×
CAN Communication
×
—
J
K
L
M
× : Applicable
– : Not applicable
N
Self-Diagnostic Results Mode
Diagnostic item
FLAT - TIRE - FL [C1730]
FLAT - TIRE - FR [C1731]
FLAT - TIRE - RR [C1732]
FLAT - TIRE - RL [C1733]
LOW - PRESSURE - FL [C1704]
LOW - PRESSURE - FR [C1705]
LOW - PRESSURE - RR [C1706]
LOW - PRESSURE - RL [C1707]
Revision: August 2007
Diagnostic item is detected when ···
Reference
page
O
—
P
FL tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less
FR tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less
RR tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less
RL tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less
FL tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
FR tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
RR tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
—
RL tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
WT-15
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Diagnostic item
Reference
page
Diagnostic item is detected when ···
[NO-DATA] - FL [C1708]
[NO-DATA] - FR [C1709]
[NO-DATA] - RR [C1710]
[NO-DATA] - RL [C1711]
Data from FL transmitter cannot be received.
Data from FR transmitter cannot be received.
Data from RR transmitter cannot be received.
Data from RL transmitter cannot be received.
WT-21
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - FL
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - FR
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - RR
[CHECKSUM- ERR] - RL
Checksum data from FL transmitter is malfunctioning.
Checksum data from FR transmitter is malfunctioning.
Checksum data from RR transmitter is malfunctioning.
Checksum data from RL transmitter is malfunctioning.
WT-21
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - FL
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - FR
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - RR
[PRESSDATA- ERR] - RL
Air pressure data from FL transmitter is malfunctioning.
Air pressure data from FR transmitter is malfunctioning.
Air pressure data from RR transmitter is malfunctioning.
Air pressure data from RL transmitter is malfunctioning.
WT-22
[CODE- ERR] - FL
[CODE- ERR] - FR
[CODE- ERR] - RR
[CODE- ERR] - RL
Function code data from FL transmitter is malfunctioning.
Function code data from FR transmitter is malfunctioning.
Function code data from RR transmitter is malfunctioning.
Function code data from RL transmitter is malfunctioning.
WT-21
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FL
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FR
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RR
[BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RL
Battery voltage of FL transmitter drops.
Battery voltage of FR transmitter drops.
Battery voltage of RR transmitter drops.
Battery voltage of RL transmitter drops.
WT-21
VHCL_SPEED_SIG_ERR [C1729]
Vehicle speed signal is in error.
WT-22
NOTE:
Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID or else the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-III.
Data Monitor Mode
MONITOR
VHCL SPEED
AIR PRESS FL
AIR PRESS FR
AIR PRESS RR
AIR PRESS RL
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
Drive vehicle.
Vehicle speed (km/h or MPH)
• Drive vehicle for a few minutes.
or
Tire pressure (kPa or psi)
• Ignition switch ON and activation tool
is transmitting activation signals.
ID REGST FL1
ID REGST FR1
ID REGST RR1
ID REGST RL1
Registration ID: DONE
No registration ID: YET
Ignition switch ON
WARNING LAMP
Low tire pressure warning lamp on: ON
Low tire pressure warning lamp off: OFF
BUZZER
Buzzer in combination meter on: ON
Buzzer in combination meter off: OFF
NOTE:
Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID, or else the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-III.
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair
INFOID:0000000001718226
INTRODUCTION
• Before troubleshooting, verify customer complaints.
• If a vehicle malfunction is difficult to reproduce, harnesses, harness connectors or terminals may be malfunctioning. Hold and shake these parts to make sure they are securely connected.
• When using a circuit tester to measure voltage or resistance of each circuit, be careful not to damage or
deform connector terminals.
WORK FLOW
Revision: August 2007
WT-16
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
SEIA0100E
Preliminary check:
WT-19
Self-diagnosis:
WT-15
Trouble diagnosis for symptoms:
K
WT-23
L
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart
INFOID:0000000001718227
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Perform the following procedures to enter the corresponding signals.
Ground the tire pressure warning check harness connector terminal 1 for more than 5 seconds.
Read the flickering of the low tire pressure lamp. Refer to "JUDGEMENT SELF-DIAGNOSIS".
NOTE:
When the low tire pressure warning lamp flashes 5 Hz and continues repeating it, the system is normal.
M
N
O
JUDGEMENT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
P
Revision: August 2007
WT-17
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by flickering of the low tire pressure warning lamp.
SEIA0745E
NOTE:
When the low tire pressure warning lamp flashes 5 Hz and continues repeating it, the system is normal.
Code/Symptom
15
16
17
18
Malfunction part
Reference
page
Front-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Front-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Rear-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
—
Rear-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
21
22
23
24
Transmitter no data (front - left)
Transmitter no data (front - right)
Transmitter no data (rear - right)
Transmitter no data (rear - left)
WT-21, "Inspection 1
Transmitter or
BCM"
31
32
33
34
Transmitter checksum error (front - left)
Transmitter checksum error (front - right)
Transmitter checksum error (rear - right)
Transmitter checksum error (rear - left)
WT-21, "Inspection 2
Transmitter 1"
35
36
37
38
Transmitter pressure data error (front - left)
Transmitter pressure data error (front - right)
Transmitter pressure data error (rear - right)
Transmitter pressure data error (rear - left)
WT-22, "Inspection 3
Transmitter 2"
41
42
43
44
Transmitter function code error (front - left)
Transmitter function code error (front - right)
Transmitter function code error (rear - right)
Transmitter function code error (rear - left)
WT-21, "Inspection 2
Transmitter 1"
45
46
47
48
Transmitter battery voltage low (front - left)
Transmitter battery voltage low (front - right)
Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - right)
Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - left)
WT-21, "Inspection 2
Transmitter 1"
52
Vehicle speed signal
WT-22, "Inspection 4 Vehicle Speed
Signal"
Fuse or combination meter
BCM connector or circuit
BCM
WT-23, "Inspection 1
Warning
Lamp Does
Not Come On
When Ignition
Switch Is
Turned On"
Fuse or combination meter
BCM connector or circuit
BCM
WT-23, "Inspection 2
Warning
Lamp Stays
On When Ignition Switch Is
Turned On"
Low tire pressure warning lamp
does not come on when ignition
switch is turned on.
Low tire pressure warning lamp
stays on when ignition switch is
turned on.
Revision: August 2007
WT-18
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Code/Symptom
Low tire pressure warning lamp
flashes when ignition switch is
turned on.
Hazard warning lamp flashes
when ignition switch is turned on.
“TIRE PRESSURE” information in
display unit does not exist.
ID registration cannot be completed.
Malfunction part
BCM harness connector or circuit
BCM
Transmitter's mode off
ID registration not yet completed
BCM harness connector or circuit
BCM
Reference
page
WT-24, "Inspection 3
Warning
Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is
Turned On"
WT-25, "Inspection 4
Hazard Warning Lamp
Flashes When
Ignition
Switch Is
Turned On"
Fuse
Display unit
BCM
WT-25, "Inspection 5
"TIRE PRESSURE" Information in
Display Unit
Does Not Exist"
Transmitter
Remote keyless entry receiver harness connector or circuit
Remote keyless entry receiver
WT-25, "Inspection 6 ID
Registration
Cannot Be
Completed"
Preliminary Check
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
INFOID:0000000001718228
J
BASIC INSPECTION
1.CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES
K
Check all tire pressures. Refer to WT-29, "Tire".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
L
2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
M
1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp activation.
2. Does low tire pressure warning lamp activate for 1 second when ignition switch is turned ON?
Does warning lamp activate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check fuse and combination meter.
N
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
O
1. Disconnect BCM harness connector.
2. Check terminals for damage or loose connection.
3. Reconnect harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P
4.CHECK TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
Check transmitter activation tool battery.
OK or NG
Revision: August 2007
WT-19
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> Carry out self-diagnosis.
NG
>> Replace transmitter activation tool battery.
Revision: August 2007
WT-20
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM
A
INFOID:0000000001718229
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 or 24 (DTC C1708, C1709, C1710 or C1711)
B
1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT
Drive for several minutes. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM”.
Are all tire pressures displayed as 0 kPa?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
C
D
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CONNECTOR
Check remote keyless entry receiver connector for damage or loose connections.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM, then GO TO 3. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair or replace remote keyless entry receiver connector.
WT
F
3.ID REGISTRATION
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Is there a tire that cannot register ID?
YES >> Replace transmitter of the tire, then GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
4.VEHICLE DRIVING
H
1.
2.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping.
Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed
becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH).
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
I
J
5.ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for
10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC.
K
Inspection 2 Transmitter - 1
M
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000001718230
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 or 48
N
1.ID REGISTRATION (CORRECTION OF TRANSMITTER LOCATION)
1.
2.
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for
10 minutes.
>> GO TO 2.
O
P
2.REPLACE TRANSMITTER
1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp again for flashing, replace malfunctioning transmitter.
2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO Inspection 1. Refer to WT-21, "Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM".
Revision: August 2007
L
WT-21
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.VEHICLE DRIVING
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10
minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning transmitter, and perform “Step 3” again.
Inspection 3 Transmitter - 2
INFOID:0000000001718231
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 or 38
1.CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES
Check all tire pressures. Refer to WT-29, "Tire".
Are there any tires with pressure of 64 psi or more?
NO
>> GO TO 2.
YES >> Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
2.VEHICLE DRIVING
1.
2.
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping.
Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed
becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH).
>> Replace transmitter with new one if “DATA MONITOR ITEM” displays 64 psi or more. Then GO
TO 3.
3.ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
• Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
• Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10
minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC.
Inspection 4 Vehicle Speed Signal
INFOID:0000000001718232
MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52 [DTC C1729]
1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
Using CONSULT-III, check display contents in self-diagnostic results.
Is " CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-38.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BCM
Perform BCM diagnosis. Refer to BCS-15, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> Perform Vehicle Speed Sensor Inspection. Refer to AT-104, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
Revision: August 2007
WT-22
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A
Inspection 1 Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
INFOID:0000000001718233
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
C
Using CONSULT-III, check display contents in self-diagnostic results.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-38.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
D
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
WT
Check combination meter operation.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-17, "Trouble Diagnosis".
F
3.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Does the low tire pressure warning lamp activate?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NO
>> Check combination meter and repair or replace.
Inspection 2 Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
G
H
INFOID:0000000001718234
I
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM harness connectors M18, M19 and M20.
3. Check terminals for damage or loose connections.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
K
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (BAT)
L
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 70 and ground.
1.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M20
70
Ground
M
Voltage
(Approx.)
N
Battery
Voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short.
O
LEIA0098E
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (IGN)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 38 and ground.
Revision: August 2007
WT-23
2008 Quest
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M18
38
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery
Voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short.
WEIA0038E
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 and ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal
M20
67
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Reconnect BCM and perform combination meter check
DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". If
OK, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and
Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit.
Inspection 3 Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
LIIA1040E
INFOID:0000000001718235
NOTE:
If warning lamp flashes as shown, the system is normal.
Flash Mode A
• This mode shows transmitter status is OFF-mode.
Carry out transmitter wake up operation. Refer to WT-14, "Transmitter Wake Up Operation".
SEIA0347E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM harness connectors M18, M19 and M20.
3. Check terminals for damage or loose connections.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CHECK CONNECTOR CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 15 and check connector M123 terminal 1.
Revision: August 2007
WT-24
2008 Quest
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Continuity should exist.
A
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
B
C
WEIA0041E
D
Inspection 4 Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
INFOID:0000000001718236
WT
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM harness connector M20.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 and ground.
F
G
Terminals
(+)
Continuity
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M19
67
H
Ground
Yes
I
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit.
LIIA1040E
J
Inspection 5 "TIRE PRESSURE" Information in Display Unit Does Not Exist
INFOID:0000000001718237
K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
L
Using CONSULT-III, check display contents in self-diagnostic results.
Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-38.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT
Perform display unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" without NAVI or AV-171, "SelfDiagnosis Mode (NAVI)" with NAVI.
Inspection results OK?
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Inspection 6 ID Registration Cannot Be Completed
INFOID:0000000001718238
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.ID REGISTRATION (ALL)
Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed?
Revision: August 2007
WT-25
2008 Quest
N
O
P
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO WT-21, "Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM".
Revision: August 2007
WT-26
2008 Quest
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
INFOID:0000000001718239
CAUTION:
• Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service
PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and
wheel will result.
• If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
B
C
D
Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and
break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the
bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
WT
F
G
SEIA0047E
4.
5.
6.
Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the
tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto
turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees
from mounting/dismounting head.
Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the
tire and remove the transmitter.
Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
H
I
J
K
WEIA0046E
L
INSTALLATION
1.
Place first side of tire onto rim.
M
N
O
SEIA0049E
2.
Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to MA-11.
NOTE:
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
Revision: August 2007
WT-27
2008 Quest
P
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE:
Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut
: 5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
WEIA0137E
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter
is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE:
Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to
WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on
vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel".
WEIA0046E
NOTE:
If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation
must be performed. Refer to WT-14, "Transmitter Wake Up Operation".
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering
Angle Sensor Neutral Position".
Revision: August 2007
WT-28
2008 Quest
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
Road Wheel
INFOID:0000000001718240
B
Wheel type
Maximum radial
runout limit
Maximum residual imbalance
Steel
Aluminum
Inside
Outside
Lateral mm (in)
0.3 (0.012) or less
1.0 (0.039) or less
0.9 (0.035) or less
Radial mm (in)
0.3 (0.012) or less
0.8 (0.031) or less
0.4 (0.016) or less
Dynamic
(at rim flange)
Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side)
Static (at rim flange)
C
D
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
Tire
INFOID:0000000001718241
WT
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Tire size
Air pressure
F
Conventional tire
Spare tire
T135/80*16
—
420 (4.2, 60)
P225/65R16
240 (2.4, 35)
—
P225/60R17
240 (2.4, 35)
—
225-700R480A
240 (2.4, 35)
—
H
—
Speed Rating
G
H
*: D or R depending on manufacturer.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
WT-29
2008 Quest
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
WW
WIPER, WASHER & HORN
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2
Washer Motor ..........................................................24
PRECAUTION ..................................................... 2
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .......... 25
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................25
System Description ..................................................25
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R - ........................................27
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................28
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........28
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................29
Preliminary Check ...................................................29
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................29
Rear Wiper Does Not Operate ................................30
Rear Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect .....................32
Only Rear Wiper Does Not Operate ........................33
Only Rear Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate ....33
Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates ..........................................................................33
Rear Wiper Arm .......................................................33
Rear Wiper Motor ....................................................34
Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment ............................35
Rear Washer Tube Layout ......................................35
Rear Washer Nozzle ...............................................35
Check Valve ............................................................36
Rear Wiper and Washer Switch ..............................36
Washer Fluid Reservoir ...........................................36
Washer Motor ..........................................................36
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .......... 3
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 3
System Description ................................................... 3
CAN Communication System Description ................. 5
Schematic ................................................................. 6
Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ........................................ 7
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................... 9
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ........... 9
Work Flow ............................................................... 10
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
.... 10
CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 10
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 11
Front Wiper Does Not Operate ............................... 12
Front Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect .................... 14
Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate ............... 15
Only Front Wiper High Does Not Operate ............... 16
Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate .... 17
Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted ......................................... 17
Wipers Do Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates ......................................................................... 17
Front Wipers Operate for 10 Seconds, Stop for 20
Seconds, and After Repeating This Operation
Five Times, They Become Inoperative .................... 17
Front Wiper Arms .................................................... 18
Wiper Motor and Linkage ........................................ 19
Washer Nozzle ........................................................ 20
Washer Tube Layout ............................................... 23
Wiper and Washer Switch ....................................... 23
Washer Fluid Reservoir ........................................... 23
Revision: August 2007
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
N
POWER SOCKET ............................................. 37
Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT - .....................................37
Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power
Socket (Cargo) ........................................................37
Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power
Socket (2nd Row) ....................................................38
HORN ................................................................ 39
Wiring Diagram - HORN - ........................................39
Horn .........................................................................39
WW-1
2008 Quest
O
P
PRECAUTION
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION
PRECAUTION
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000001719251
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Revision: August 2007
WW-2
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719252
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5246E
*1
IPDM E/R E118, E119, E120, E121,
E122, E123, and E124
*2
Washer fluid reservoir (view with
right fender protector RH removed)
*4
Front wiper motor E23 (view with
cowl top cover removed)
*5
BCM M18, M19, and M20 (view with *6
instrument panel removed)
System Description
*3
Front and rear washer motor E105
(view with right fender protector RH
removed)
Combination switch (wiper switch)
M28
WW
INFOID:0000000001719253
• Both front wiper relays are located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room).
• Wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals.
Terminal combination status is read by BCM (body control module) when switch is turned ON.
• BCM controls front wiper LO, HI, and INT (intermittent) operation.
• IPDM E/R operates the wiper motor according to CAN communication signals from the BCM.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70, and
• to ignition relay, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU (central processing unit) of IPDM E/R, and
• through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to CPU (central processing unit) of IPDM E/R, and
• through 30A fuse (No. 39, located in the IPDM E/R)
• to front wiper relay, located in the IPDM E/R.
With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
• to ignition relay, and
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38, and
• through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 44
Revision: August 2007
J
WW-3
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to combination switch terminal 14.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67 and
• to combination switch terminal 12
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
• to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 and
• to front wiper motor terminal 1
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to low position,
the BCM detects a low speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
BCM then sends front wiper (low) request signal over CAN communication lines
• from BCM terminals 39 and 40
• to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (low) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay.
With the front wiper relay energized, power is supplied
• through front wiper relay
• to front wiper high relay
• through IPDM E/R terminal 21
• to front wiper motor terminal 3.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to high position,
the BCM detects a high speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
BCM then sends front wiper (high) request signal over CAN communication lines
• from BCM terminals 39 and 40
• to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (high) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper and
the front wiper high relays.
With the front wiper and the front wiper high relays energized, power is supplied
• through front wiper relay
• to front wiper high relay
• through IPDM E/R terminal 31
• to front wiper motor terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
INTERMITTENT OPERATION
Wiper intermittent operation delay interval is determined from the combination of the intermittent wiper dial
position inputs and vehicle speed. During each intermittent operation delay interval, the BCM sends a front
wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R to operate the wipers.
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to intermittent position, the BCM detects a front wiper (intermittent) ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
BCM then sends front wiper (intermittent) request signal over CAN communication lines
• from BCM terminals 39 and 40
• to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
When BCM determines that combination switch status is front wiper intermittent ON, it performs the following
operations.
• BCM detects ON/OFF status of intermittent wiper dial position.
• BCM calculates operation interval from wiper dial position and vehicle speed signal received through CAN
communications.
• BCM sends front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R at calculated operation interval.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper request signal (INT), it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay.
It then sends auto-stop signal to BCM, and conducts intermittent front wiper motor operation.
AUTO STOP OPERATION
When the wiper arms are not located at the base of the windshield, and the wiper switch is turned OFF, the
wiper motor will continue to operate until the wiper arms reach windshield base. When wiper arms reach base
of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 1 and 4 are connected.
Ground is supplied
• to IPDM E/R terminal 32
Revision: August 2007
WW-4
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• through front wiper motor terminal 4
• through front wiper motor terminal 1
• through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
The IPDM E/R sends auto stop operation signal to BCM through CAN communication lines.
When BCM receives auto stop operation signal, BCM sends wiper stop signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication lines. The IPDM E/R then de-energizes the front wiper relay.
Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
FRONT WASHER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front and rear washer switches are OFF, the
front and rear washer motor is supplied power
• through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 44
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 14
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 13
• to front and rear washer motor terminal –.
When front wiper switch is in front washer position, BCM detects front washer signal by BCM wiper switch
reading function. Combination switch ground is supplied
• to front and rear washer motor terminal +
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 11
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 12
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
With ground supplied, the front and rear washer motor is operated in the front direction.
When BCM detects that front washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, BCM uses CAN communication and sends wiper request signal to IPDM E/R for low speed operation of wipers.
When BCM detects that washer switch is OFF, low speed operation cycles approximately 3 times and then
stops.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MIST OPERATION
When the wiper switch is temporarily placed in the mist position, wiper low speed operation cycles once and
then stops.
For additional information about wiper operation under this condition, refer to "LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION".
If the switch is held in the mist position, low speed operation continues.
I
J
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
BCM includes fail-safe function to prevent malfunction of electrical components controlled by CAN communiWW
cations if a malfunction in CAN communications occurs.
BCM uses CAN communications to stop output of electrical components it controls.
Until ignition switch is turned off, front wiper remains in same status as just before fail-safe control was initiated. (If wiper was in low speed operation just before fail-safe, it continues low speed operation until ignition L
switch is turned OFF.)
When fail-safe status is initiated, BCM remains in standby until normal signals are received.
When normal signals are received, fail-safe status is canceled.
M
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
CAN Communication System Description
N
INFOID:0000000001719254
Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System".
O
P
Revision: August 2007
WW-5
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000001719255
ALLWA0134GB
Revision: August 2007
WW-6
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - WIPER -
INFOID:0000000001719256
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
N
O
ALLWA0135GB
Revision: August 2007
WW-7
2008 Quest
P
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4652E
Revision: August 2007
WW-8
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
N
O
WKWA4653E
P
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719257
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719258
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
WW-9
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000001719259
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand the system description, refer to WW-3, "System Description".
Perform preliminary inspection, refer to WW-10, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does wiper function operate normally? If it operates normally, GO TO 6. If not, GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000001719260
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection".
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719261
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "WIPER SPEED SETTING" on the "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
Work Support Setting Item
Item
Description
CONSULT-III
WIPER SPEED SETTING
When wiper switch is at INTERMITTENT, front wiper intermittent
time can be selected according to vehicle speed.
ON/OFF
• ON (Operated)/OFFNOTE (Not operated)
NOTE:
Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
Revision: August 2007
WW-10
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
A
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
B
C
Display Item List
D
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal.
IGN SW CAN
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN switch ON (ON)/Other OFF or ACC (OFF)" status as judged from CAN communications.
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
(1 - 7)
Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal.
INT VOLUME
FR WIPER STOP
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto-stop signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
"0.0 km/h"
Displays vehicle speed as received from CAN communication.
E
F
G
H
I
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s).
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
WW
Display Item List
L
Test item
Display on CONSULT-III
screen
Description
Front wiper HI output
FR WIPER (HI)
Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Front wiper LO output
FR WIPER (LO)
Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Front wiper INT output
FR WIPER (INT)
Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
M
N
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000001719262
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
O
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
P
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
Revision: August 2007
WW-11
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitors predetermined items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are
monitored.
Touch “RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
Item name
CONSULT-III
screen display
Display or unit
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
Front wiper request
FR WIP REQ
STOP/1LO/LO/HI
x
x
x
Signal status input from BCM.
Wiper auto stop
WIP AUTO STOP
ACT P/STOP P
x
x
x
Output status of IPDM E/R.
Wiper protection
WIP PROT
OFF/LS/HS/BLOCK
x
x
x
Control status of IPDM E/R.
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s).
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Front wiper (HI, LO) output
CONSULT-III
screen display
FRONT WIPER
Description
With a certain operation (OFF, HI, LO) front wiper relays can be operated.
Front Wiper Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719263
CAUTION:
During IPDM E/R fail-safe control, front wipers may not operate. Refer to PG-17, "System Description"
to make sure that it is not in fail-safe status.
1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS
With CONSULT-III
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
2. Confirm front wiper operation.
OK or NG
1.
2.
Revision: August 2007
WW-12
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
A
2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and front wiper motor harness connector terminals.
B
C
IPDM E/R
Connector
Front wiper motor
Terminal
Connector
31
E122
21
Continuity
Terminal
D
2
E23
3
32
Yes
E
4
WKIA3167E
4.
F
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and ground.
G
IPDM E/R
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
31
E122
21
H
Ground
No
32
LKIA0383E
5.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E121
60
E124
38
J
Continuity
Ground
I
WW
Yes
L
WKIA1021E
M
6.
Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector
terminal 1 and ground.
N
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
E23
1
Continuity
Ground
O
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
P
WKIA3168E
3.IPDM E/R INSPECTION
1.
2.
With CONSULT-III
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Without CONSULT-III
Revision: August 2007
WW-13
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
When front wiper relay and front wiper high relay are operating,
check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground.
IPDM E/R
(+)
Connector
(–)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Stopped
0V
LO operation
Battery voltage
Terminal
21
E122
Ground
31
Stopped
0V
HI operation
Battery voltage
WKIA1246E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the front wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage".
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
4.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT", "FR WIPER LOW"
and "FR WIPER HI" turn ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
5.BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. Carry out self-diagnosis of BCM.
Displayed self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check CAN communication line of BCM. GO TO BCS-17, "CAN Communication
Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)".
Front Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect
INFOID:0000000001719264
1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR
With CONSULT-III
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III. With "DATA MONITOR", confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from
"ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Revision: August 2007
WW-14
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
front wiper motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E122
32
E23
4
A
Continuity
B
Yes
C
WKIA3169E
D
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and ground.
E
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E122
32
Continuity
Ground
F
No
G
LKIA0321E
5.
Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector
terminal 1 and ground.
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
E23
1
H
I
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> • Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
• Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper motor and ground.
J
WKIA3168E
3.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
WW
L
Turn ignition switch ON.
While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure
voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground.
M
IPDM E/R
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
E122
32
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
N
Wiper operating
Battery
voltage
O
Wiper stopped
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage".
Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate
WKIA0407E
P
INFOID:0000000001719265
Inspection Procedure
1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Revision: August 2007
WW-15
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER LOW" turns ON-OFF
according to operation of wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch".
Only Front Wiper High Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719266
1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS
With CONSULT-III
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
2. Confirm front wiper operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front wiper motor harness connector terminal.
IPDM E/R
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E122
31
E23
2
Continuity
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
WKIA3170E
3.IPDM E/R INSPECTION
With CONSULT-III
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
1.
2.
3.
When front wiper high relay is operating, check voltage between
IPDM E/R terminals.
IPDM E/R
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
E122
31
Connector
Terminal
E124
38
E121
60
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor
and Linkage".
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
WKIA0409E
4.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Revision: August 2007
WW-16
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER HI" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch".
Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate
B
INFOID:0000000001719267
1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
C
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF
according to operation of wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch".
Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted
A
D
E
INFOID:0000000001719268
1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
F
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "INT VOLUME" changes in order from
1 to 7 according to operation of the intermittent switch dial position.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch".
G
Wipers Do Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates
H
INFOID:0000000001719269
1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
I
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF
according to operation of front washer switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch".
J
Front Wipers Operate for 10 Seconds, Stop for 20 Seconds, and After Repeating This
Operation Five Times, They Become Inoperative
WW
CAUTION:
• When auto stop signal has not varied for 10 seconds or longer while IPDM E/R is operating front wipers, IPDM E/R considers front wipers locked and stops wiper output, which causes this symptom.
• This status can be checked by using IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR". Under this condition, "WIP PROT"
reads "BLOCK".
L
INFOID:0000000001719270
M
1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR
With CONSULT-III
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III. With "DATA MONITOR", confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from
"ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation.
Without CONSULT-III
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Revision: August 2007
WW-17
2008 Quest
N
O
P
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and front wiper motor harness connector terminal.
IPDM E/R
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E122
32
E23
4
Continuity
Yes
WKIA3169E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E122
32
Continuity
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LKIA0321E
3.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure
voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground.
IPDM E/R
(+)
Connector
(–)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Wiper operating
Battery
voltage
Wiper stopped
0V
Terminal
E122
32
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG
>> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage".
Front Wiper Arms
WKIA0407E
INFOID:0000000001719271
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove front wiper arm covers and front wiper arm nuts.
Remove front wiper arms.
Remove front wiper blades.
INSTALLATION
1.
Operate front wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop).
Revision: August 2007
WW-18
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Clean up pivot area as shown. This will reduce the possibility of
wiper arm looseness.
A
B
C
SEL024J
D
3.
4.
Install front wiper blades.
Install front wiper arms and front wiper arm nuts and tighten to specified torque.
E
Front wiper arm nut
5.
6.
23.6 N·m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb)
Install front wiper arm covers.
Adjust wiper arms. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION".
F
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Operate front windshield washer and front wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop).
Lift the wiper blade up, then rest it onto glass surface to set
clearance "L1" and "L2" as shown.
G
H
Clearance "L1"
Clearance "L2"
3.
4.
5.
: 41.5 - 56.5 mm (1.634 - 2.224 in)
: 52.5 - 67.5 mm (2.067 - 2.657 in)
I
Remove front wiper arm covers and front wiper arm nuts.
Adjust the front wiper arms on the motor pivot shafts to obtain
specified blade clearances "L1" and "L2".
Tighten front wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install front
wiper arm covers.
Front wiper arm nuts
J
SEL543TA
WW
: 23.6 N·m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb)
Wiper Motor and Linkage
INFOID:0000000001719272
L
COMPONENTS
M
N
O
P
WKIA5264E
Revision: August 2007
WW-19
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1.
Wiper link
⇐
Front
2.
Wiper frame
3.
Front wiper motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operate the front wiper motor, and stop it at the OFF (auto stop) position.
Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector.
Remove wiper frame assembly bolts, and remove wiper frame
assembly.
WKIA1032E
5.
Remove front wiper motor from wiper frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
• Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect front wiper motor to electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate front wiper motor,
then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop).
2. Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector.
3. Install front wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle.
4. Connect front wiper motor electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the front wiper motor,
then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop).
5. Install cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
6. Install wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms".
Washer Nozzle
INFOID:0000000001719273
INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Do not use needle pin to adjust washer nozzle.
• If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the
washer nozzle is installed correctly.
• If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid
spray coverage is not satisfactory adjust washer nozzles. Refer to
"ADJUSTMENT".
PKIA2552E
Revision: August 2007
WW-20
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
ADJUSTMENT
A
B
C
D
E
LKIA0699E
1.
2.
1.
Passenger side washer fluid spray pattern 2.
Washer nozzles
4.
Driver side washer fluid spray pattern
Distance
A.
3.
F
Rear edge of cowl
G
Remove the front wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms".
Measure the distance from rear edge of cowl to lowest point of washer fluid spray coverage (distance A).
Determine recommended washer nozzle shim (refer to chart).
NOTE:
If distance A is in the middle range then no adjustment is required.
H
I
Washer spray coverage
High
Middle
Low
3.
4.
Distance (A)
300 mm (11.81 in) and higher
250 - 300 mm (9.84 - 11.81 in)
210 - 250 mm (8.27 - 9.84 in)
170 - 210 mm (6.69 - 8.27 in)
130 - 170 mm (5.12 - 6.69 in)
90 - 130 mm (3.54 - 5.12 in)
90 mm (3.54 in) and lower
Recommended washer
nozzle shim
Down 1.25 mm
Down 0.75 mm
No shim recommended
Up 1.0 mm
Up 2.25 mm
Up 4.0 mm
Up 6.5 mm
Remove cowl top. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect washer tube from nozzle and remove washer nozzle from cowl top.
J
WW
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: August 2007
WW-21
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
5. Cut off upper portion of spring legs (2) from washer nozzle (1) as
shown.
LKIA0701E
6.
Install the selected size washer nozzle shim (2) onto washer
nozzle (1) as shown.
LKIA0702E
7.
Install washer spray nozzle (1) into cowl top cover (2), then
install spring clip (A) between spring legs (3) as shown.
LKIA0703E
Revision: August 2007
WW-22
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
8. Install cowl top. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation".
9. Install wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms".
10. Recheck washer nozzle spray for correct spray pattern.
A
Washer Tube Layout
INFOID:0000000001719274
B
C
D
E
F
G
WIIA0726E
H
1.
Washer fluid hose to back door
2.
Washer nozzles
Wiper and Washer Switch
3.
Washer fluid reservoir
INFOID:0000000001719275
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-12, "Steering Column Cover".
Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector.
Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch
away from steering column to remove.
J
WW
L
WKIA0071E
M
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
N
Washer Fluid Reservoir
INFOID:0000000001719276
REMOVAL
1.
O
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation".
P
Revision: August 2007
WW-23
2008 Quest
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove the washer fluid reservoir (2) from the vehicle.
• Twist and pull out washer fluid reservoir inlet (1).
• Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector (3)
and washer fluid level sensor electrical connector.
• Remove washer fluid reservoir screws (A).
• Remove front and rear washer hoses.
WKIA4297E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Washer fluid reservoir screws
5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
CAUTION:
After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet, and check for
water leaks.
Washer Motor
INFOID:0000000001719277
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector and front and rear washer hoses.
Pull out front and rear washer motor in the direction of the arrow
as shown, and remove the front and rear washer motor from the
washer fluid reservoir.
LKIA0346E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When installing front and rear washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc.
Revision: August 2007
WW-24
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
A
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
INFOID:0000000001719278
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA5247E
*1
BCM M18, M19, and M20 (view with *2
instrument panel removed)
*4
Front and rear washer motor E105
(view with right fender protector RH
removed)
*5
Combination switch (wiper switch)
M28
*3
Washer fluid reservoir (view with
right fender protector RH removed)
Rear washer nozzle
*6
Rear wiper motor D507
WW
System Description
INFOID:0000000001719279
• Wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals.
Terminal combination status is read by BCM (body control module) when switch is turned ON.
• BCM controls rear wiper ON and INT (intermittent) operation.
Power is supplied at all times
• through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in fuse and fusible link box)
• to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
• through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in fuse block (J/B)]
• to BCM terminal 38, and
• through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 44
• to combination switch terminal 14.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 67 and
• to combination switch terminal 12
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
REAR WIPER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the rear wiper switch is in the ON position, the
BCM detects a rear wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
When the BCM operates the rear wiper motor, power is supplied
• through BCM terminal 55
Revision: August 2007
J
WW-25
2008 Quest
L
M
N
O
P
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• to rear wiper motor terminal B.
Ground is supplied
• to rear wiper motor terminals E and G
• through grounds D403 and D404.
With power and ground supplied, the rear wiper operates.
INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The rear wiper motor operates the wiper arm at low speed approximately every 7 seconds.
When the wiper switch is in the rear wiper INT position, the BCM detects a rear wiper INT signal by BCM wiper
switch reading function.
When BCM operates rear wiper motor, power supplied
• through BCM terminal 55
• to rear wiper motor terminal B.
Ground is supplied
• to rear wiper motor terminals E and G
• through grounds D403 and D404.
With power and ground supplied, the rear wiper operates in intermittent mode.
AUTO STOP OPERATION
When the rear wiper arm is not located at the base of the rear window, and the rear wiper switch is turned
OFF, the rear wiper motor will continue to operate until the rear wiper arm is at the base of the rear window.
When the rear wiper arm reaches the base, rear wiper motor terminals P and E are connected.
Ground is supplied
• to BCM terminal 44
• through rear wiper motor terminal P
• through rear wiper motor terminal E
• through grounds D403 and D404.
REAR WASHER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front and rear washer switches are OFF, the
front and rear washer motor is supplied power
• through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R)
• through IPDM E/R terminal 44
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 14
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 11
• to front and rear washer motor terminal +.
When the rear wiper switch is in rear washer position, the BCM detects a rear washer signal by BCM wiper
switch reading function. Combination switch ground is supplied
• to front and rear washer motor terminal –
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 13
• through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 12
• through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
With ground supplied, the front and rear washer motor is operated in the rear direction.
When the BCM detects that the rear washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, BCM operates the
rear wiper motor.
When the BCM detects that the rear washer switch is in OFF, the rear wiper motor cycles approximately 3
times and then stops.
BCM Wiper Switch Reading Function
Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Revision: August 2007
WW-26
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R -
INFOID:0000000001719280
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
N
O
WKWA4654E
Revision: August 2007
WW-27
2008 Quest
P
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
WKWA4655E
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
INFOID:0000000001719281
Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM".
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
INFOID:0000000001719282
Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R".
Revision: August 2007
WW-28
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000001719283
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm the symptoms and customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to WW-25, "System Description".
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to WW-29, "Preliminary Check".
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the rear wiper operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INFOID:0000000001719284
B
C
D
BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CICUIT
Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection"
E
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
INFOID:0000000001719285
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
F
Diagnostic mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for
setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received
from the BCM and received data is displayed.
G
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
H
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
I
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
J
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
DATA MONITOR
WW
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
L
M
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
N
O
Display Item List
P
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal.
IGN SW CAN
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
Revision: August 2007
WW-29
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
(1 - 7)
Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal.
INT VOLUME
VEHICLE SPEED
"0.0 km/h"
Displays vehicle speed as received over CAN communication.
FR WIPER STOP
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto stop signal.
RR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Rear Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
RR WIPER ON
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Rear Wiper (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
RR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Rear Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
RR WIPER STOP
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Stopped (OFF)/Operating (ON)" status as judged from the auto stop signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Display on CONSULT-III screen
Description
Front wiper HI output
FR WIPER (HI)
Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Front wiper LO output
FR WIPER (LO)
Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Front wiper INT output
FR WIPER (INT)
Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Rear wiper output
RR WIPER
Rear wiper can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Rear Wiper Does Not Operate
INFOID:0000000001719286
1.REAR WIPER ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III, and select "WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "RR WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Make sure rear wiper operates.
Wiper should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and rear wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
70 and rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal B.
70 - B
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1024E
Revision: August 2007
WW-30
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
3.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507
terminal B and ground.
B - Ground
B
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> After repairing harness, be sure to disconnect battery
negative cable, and then reconnect it.
C
D
WKIA1025E
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
E
Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507
terminal E and ground.
E - Ground
F
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
G
H
WKIA1026E
5. CHECK REAR WIPER OPERATING
1.
2.
I
Connect BCM connector and rear wiper motor connector.
Select "RR WIPER" during "ACTIVE TEST". Refer to WW-29,
"CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". When rear wiper is operating,
check voltage between BCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
J
BCM
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M20
70
Ground
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Stopped
0V
ON operation
Battery voltage
WW
WKIA3906E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-34, "Rear Wiper Motor".
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
L
M
6.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
N
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER INT", "RR WIPER ON"
turn ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch.
O
When wiper switch is in
INT position
When wiper switch is in
ON position
: RR WIPER INT ON
: RR WIPER ON
P
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Revision: August 2007
WW-31
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
Rear Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect
INFOID:0000000001719287
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER STOP" turns ON-OFF
according to wiper operation.
When wiper switch is in
OFF position
: RR WIPER STOP OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and rear wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
59 and rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal P.
59 - P
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1029E
3.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507
terminal P and ground.
P - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1030E
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507
terminal E and ground.
E - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1026E
5.CHECK AUTO STOP SIGNAL
Revision: August 2007
WW-32
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between rear wiper motor harness connector
D507 terminal P and ground.
P - Ground
A
B
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Replace rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-34, "Rear Wiper
Motor".
Only Rear Wiper Does Not Operate
C
WKIA4295E
D
INFOID:0000000001719288
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
E
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER ON" turns ON-OFF
according to operation of wiper switch.
F
When rear wiper switch is in
ON position
: RR WIPER ON
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Only Rear Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate
H
INFOID:0000000001719289
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
I
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF
according to operation of wiper switch.
When rear wiper switch is in
INT position
J
: RR WIPER INT ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates
WW
INFOID:0000000001719290
L
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF
according to operation of rear washer switch.
When rear wiper switch is in
WASHER position
N
: RR WASHER SW ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM".
NG
>> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description".
Rear Wiper Arm
O
INFOID:0000000001719291
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Operate rear wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop).
Remove wiper arm cover, remove wiper arm nut, then remove rear wiper arm.
INSTALLATION
1.
Prior to rear wiper arm installation, operate wiper motor one full cycle then turn OFF (auto stop).
Revision: August 2007
WW-33
M
2008 Quest
P
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop).
• Using a suitable brush, clean pivot area as shown. This will
reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness.
2. Install rear wiper arm onto pivot and ensure wiper blade is parallel to the ground.
3. Tighten wiper arm nut to specification, install wiper arm cover.
Wiper arm nut
: 15.5 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
SEL024J
Rear Wiper Motor
INFOID:0000000001719292
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
LKIA0350E
1.
Wiper arm cover
2.
Pivot cap
4.
Wiper blade
5.
Rear wiper arm
3.
Rear wiper motor
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-33, "Rear Wiper Arm".
Remove pivot cap.
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and
Installation".
Disconnect rear wiper motor electrical connector.
Remove rear wiper motor bolts, and remove rear wiper motor.
LKIA0344E
Installation
CAUTION:
Revision: August 2007
WW-34
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
• Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
1. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of
wiper arm looseness.
2. Install rear wiper motor.
3. Attach pivot cap.
4. Connect rear wiper motor electrical connector.
5. Install back door finisher lower. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and
Installation".
6. Attach rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-33, "Rear Wiper Arm".
A
B
C
SEL024J
Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment
INFOID:0000000001719293
E
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown.
Adjustable range
D
: ±15° (In any direction)
F
G
H
LKIA0349E
Rear Washer Tube Layout
INFOID:0000000001719294
I
J
WW
WEL912A
L
M
N
LKIA0347E
Rear Washer Nozzle
INFOID:0000000001719295
O
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
P
Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: August 2007
WW-35
2008 Quest
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
2. Remove rear washer tube from rear washer nozzle.
3. Release retaining clips and remove rear washer nozzle.
LKIA0348E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Check Valve
INFOID:0000000001719296
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Connect the check valve (2) to the washer fluid reservoir tube (1) so
that the directional arrow on the check valve (2) points towards the
washer nozzle tube (3).
CAUTION:
Directional arrow on the check valve (2) must point in the direction of the washer fluid flow.
WKIA4242E
Rear Wiper and Washer Switch
INFOID:0000000001719297
Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch".
Washer Fluid Reservoir
INFOID:0000000001719298
Refer to WW-23, "Washer Fluid Reservoir".
Washer Motor
INFOID:0000000001719299
Refer to WW-24, "Washer Motor".
Revision: August 2007
WW-36
2008 Quest
POWER SOCKET
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
POWER SOCKET
A
Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT -
INFOID:0000000001719300
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
N
O
P
WKWA4656E
Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo)
INFOID:0000000001719301
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Revision: August 2007
WW-37
2008 Quest
POWER SOCKET
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the
ring out from square hole.
3. Disconnect power socket electrical connector.
4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls.
WKIA1035E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row)
INFOID:0000000001719302
REMOVAL and INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the
ring out from square hole.
Disconnect power socket electrical connector.
Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls.
WKIA1035E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
WW-38
2008 Quest
HORN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
HORN
A
Wiring Diagram - HORN -
INFOID:0000000001719303
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
N
O
P
WKWA4953E
Horn
INFOID:0000000001719304
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Revision: August 2007
WW-39
2008 Quest
HORN
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
1. Remove the front bumper. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect horn electrical connector.
3. Remove horn bolt and remove horn from vehicle.
WKIA1033E
WKIA1034E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: August 2007
WW-40
2008 Quest